Beej’s Guide to C Programming

Brian “Beej Jorgensen” Hall

v0.9.6, Copyright © November 25, 2022

Contents

1 Foreword 1
1.1 Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
1.2 How to Read This Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.3 Platform and Compiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.4 Official Homepage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.5 Email Policy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1.6 Mirroring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.7 Note for Translators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.8 Copyright and Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.9 Dedication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2 Hello, World! 5
2.1 What to Expect from C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
2.2 Hello, World! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
2.3 Compilation Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.4 Building with gcc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.5 Building with clang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
2.6 Building from IDEs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2.7 C Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

3 Variables and Statements 11

3.1 Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
3.1.1 Variable Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.1.2 Variable Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
3.1.3 Boolean Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
3.2 Operators and Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2.1 Arithmetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2.2 Ternary Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
3.2.3 Pre-and-Post Increment-and-Decrement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
3.2.4 The Comma Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.2.5 Conditional Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
3.2.6 Boolean Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.2.7 The sizeof Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
3.3 Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
3.3.1 The if-else statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
3.3.2 The while statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.3.3 The do-while statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
3.3.4 The for statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
3.3.5 The switch Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

4 Functions 25
4.1 Passing by Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4.2 Function Prototypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
4.3 Empty Parameter Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28

i
CONTENTS ii

5 Pointers—Cower In Fear! 29
5.1 Memory and Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
5.2 Pointer Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
5.3 Dereferencing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
5.4 Passing Pointers as Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
5.5 The NULL Pointer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
5.6 A Note on Declaring Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
5.7 sizeof and Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

6 Arrays 36
6.1 Easy Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
6.2 Getting the Length of an Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6.3 Array Initializers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
6.4 Out of Bounds! . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
6.5 Multidimensional Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
6.6 Arrays and Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6.6.1 Getting a Pointer to an Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6.6.2 Passing Single Dimensional Arrays to Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
6.6.3 Changing Arrays in Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
6.6.4 Passing Multidimensional Arrays to Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

7 Strings 45
7.1 String Literals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
7.2 String Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
7.3 String Variables as Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
7.4 String Initializers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
7.5 Getting String Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
7.6 String Termination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
7.7 Copying a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

8 Structs 50
8.1 Declaring a Struct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
8.2 Struct Initializers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
8.3 Passing Structs to Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
8.4 The Arrow Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
8.5 Copying and Returning structs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
8.6 Comparing structs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

9 File Input/Output 54
9.1 The FILE* Data Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
9.2 Reading Text Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
9.3 End of File: EOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
9.3.1 Reading a Line at a Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
9.4 Formatted Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
9.5 Writing Text Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
9.6 Binary File I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
9.6.1 struct and Number Caveats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

10 typedef: Making New Types 62

10.1 typedef in Theory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
10.1.1 Scoping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
10.2 typedef in Practice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
10.2.1 typedef and structs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
10.2.2 typedef and Other Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
10.2.3 typedef and Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
CONTENTS iii

10.2.4 typedef and Capitalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64

10.3 Arrays and typedef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

11 Pointers II: Arithmetic 66

11.1 Pointer Arithmetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
11.1.1 Adding to Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
11.1.2 Changing Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
11.1.3 Subtracting Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
11.2 Array/Pointer Equivalence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
11.2.1 Array/Pointer Equivalence in Function Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
11.3 void Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

12 Manual Memory Allocation 75

12.1 Allocating and Deallocating, malloc() and free() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
12.2 Error Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
12.3 Allocating Space for an Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
12.4 An Alternative: calloc() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
12.5 Changing Allocated Size with realloc() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
12.5.1 Reading in Lines of Arbitrary Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
12.5.2 realloc() with NULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
12.6 Aligned Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

13 Scope 84
13.1 Block Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
13.1.1 Where To Define Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
13.1.2 Variable Hiding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
13.2 File Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
13.3 for-loop Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
13.4 A Note on Function Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

14 Types II: Way More Types! 88

14.1 Signed and Unsigned Integers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
14.2 Character Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
14.3 More Integer Types: short, long, long long . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
14.4 More Float: double and long double . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
14.4.1 How Many Decimal Digits? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
14.4.2 Converting to Decimal and Back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
14.5 Constant Numeric Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
14.5.1 Hexadecimal and Octal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
14.5.2 Integer Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
14.5.3 Floating Point Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

15 Types III: Conversions 100

15.1 String Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
15.1.1 Numeric Value to String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
15.1.2 String to Numeric Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
15.2 char Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
15.3 Numeric Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
15.3.1 Boolean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
15.3.2 Integer to Integer Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
15.3.3 Integer and Floating Point Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
15.4 Implicit Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
15.4.1 The Integer Promotions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
15.4.2 The Usual Arithmetic Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
15.4.3 void* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
CONTENTS iv

15.5 Explicit Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

15.5.1 Casting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

16 Types IV: Qualifiers and Specifiers 108

16.1 Type Qualifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
16.1.1 const . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
16.1.2 restrict . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
16.1.3 volatile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
16.1.4 _Atomic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
16.2 Storage-Class Specifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
16.2.1 auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
16.2.2 static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
16.2.3 extern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
16.2.4 register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
16.2.5 _Thread_local . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115

17 Multifile Projects 116

17.1 Includes and Function Prototypes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
17.2 Dealing with Repeated Includes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
17.3 static and extern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
17.4 Compiling with Object Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119

18 The Outside Environment 120

18.1 Command Line Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
18.1.1 The Last argv is NULL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
18.1.2 The Alternate: char **argv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
18.1.3 Fun Facts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
18.2 Exit Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
18.2.1 Other Exit Status Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
18.3 Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
18.3.1 Setting Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
18.3.2 Unix-like Alternative Environment Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

19 The C Preprocessor 129

19.1 #include . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
19.2 Simple Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
19.3 Conditional Compilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
19.3.1 If Defined, #ifdef and #endif . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
19.3.2 If Not Defined, #ifndef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
19.3.3 #else . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
19.3.4 General Conditional: #if, #elif . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
19.3.5 Losing a Macro: #undef . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
19.4 Built-in Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
19.4.1 Mandatory Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
19.4.2 Optional Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
19.5 Macros with Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
19.5.1 Macros with One Argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
19.5.2 Macros with More than One Argument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
19.5.3 Macros with Variable Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
19.5.4 Stringification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
19.5.5 Concatenation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
19.6 Multiline Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
19.7 Example: An Assert Macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
19.8 The #error Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
19.9 The #pragma Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
CONTENTS v

19.9.1 Non-Standard Pragmas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

19.9.2 Standard Pragmas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
19.9.3 _Pragma Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
19.10 The #line Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
19.11 The Null Directive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

20 structs II: More Fun with structs 145

20.1 Initializers of Nested structs and Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
20.2 Anonymous structs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
20.3 Self-Referential structs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
20.4 Flexible Array Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
20.5 Padding Bytes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
20.6 offsetof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
20.7 Fake OOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
20.8 Bit-Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
20.8.1 Non-Adjacent Bit-Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
20.8.2 Signed or Unsigned ints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
20.8.3 Unnamed Bit-Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
20.8.4 Zero-Width Unnamed Bit-Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
20.9 Unions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
20.9.1 Unions and Type Punning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
20.9.2 Pointers to unions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
20.9.3 Common Initial Sequences in Unions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
20.10 Unions and Unnamed Structs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
20.11 Passing and Returning structs and unions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

21 Characters and Strings II 162

21.1 Escape Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
21.1.1 Frequently-used Escapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
21.1.2 Rarely-used Escapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
21.1.3 Numeric Escapes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

22 Enumerated Types: enum 166

22.1 Behavior of enum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
22.1.1 Numbering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
22.1.2 Trailing Commas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
22.1.3 Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
22.1.4 Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
22.2 Your enum is a Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

23 Pointers III: Pointers to Pointers and More 170

23.1 Pointers to Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
23.1.1 Pointer Pointers and const . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
23.2 Multibyte Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
23.3 The NULL Pointer and Zero . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
23.4 Pointers as Integers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
23.5 Casting Pointers to other Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
23.6 Pointer Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
23.7 Pointers to Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

24 Bitwise Operations 181

24.1 Bitwise AND, OR, XOR, and NOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
24.2 Bitwise Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181

25 Variadic Functions 183

CONTENTS vi

25.1 Ellipses in Function Signatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

25.2 Getting the Extra Arguments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
25.3 va_list Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
25.4 Library Functions That Use va_lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

26 Locale and Internationalization 187

26.1 Setting the Localization, Quick and Dirty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
26.2 Getting the Monetary Locale Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
26.2.1 Monetary Digit Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
26.2.2 Separators and Sign Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
26.2.3 Example Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
26.3 Localization Specifics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

27 Unicode, Wide Characters, and All That 192

27.1 What is Unicode? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
27.2 Code Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
27.3 Encoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
27.4 Source and Execution Character Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
27.5 Unicode in C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
27.6 A Quick Note on UTF-8 Before We Swerve into the Weeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
27.7 Different Character Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
27.7.1 Multibyte Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
27.7.2 Wide Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
27.8 Using Wide Characters and wchar_t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
27.8.1 Multibyte to wchar_t Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
27.9 Wide Character Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
27.9.1 wint_t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
27.9.2 I/O Stream Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
27.9.3 I/O Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
27.9.4 Type Conversion Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
27.9.5 String and Memory Copying Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
27.9.6 String and Memory Comparing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
27.9.7 String Searching Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
27.9.8 Length/Miscellaneous Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
27.9.9 Character Classification Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
27.10 Parse State, Restartable Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
27.11 Unicode Encodings and C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
27.11.1 UTF-8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
27.11.2 UTF-16, UTF-32, char16_t, and char32_t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
27.11.3 Multibyte Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
27.11.4 Third-Party Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

28 Exiting a Program 207

28.1 Normal Exits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
28.1.1 Returning From main() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
28.1.2 exit() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
28.1.3 Setting Up Exit Handlers with atexit() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
28.2 Quicker Exits with quick_exit() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
28.3 Nuke it from Orbit: _Exit() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
28.4 Exiting Sometimes: assert() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
28.5 Abnormal Exit: abort() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

29 Signal Handling 211

29.1 What Are Signals? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
29.2 Handling Signals with signal() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
CONTENTS vii

29.3 Writing Signal Handlers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

29.4 What Can We Actually Do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
29.5 Friends Don’t Let Friends signal() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216

30 Variable-Length Arrays (VLAs) 217

30.1 The Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
30.2 sizeof and VLAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
30.3 Multidimensional VLAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
30.4 Passing One-Dimensional VLAs to Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
30.5 Passing Multi-Dimensional VLAs to Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
30.5.1 Partial Multidimensional VLAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
30.6 Compatibility with Regular Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
30.7 typedef and VLAs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
30.8 Jumping Pitfalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
30.9 General Issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

31 goto 224
31.1 A Simple Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
31.2 Labeled continue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
31.3 Bailing Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
31.4 Labeled break . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
31.5 Multi-level Cleanup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
31.6 Tail Call Optimization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
31.7 Restarting Interrupted System Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
31.8 goto and Variable Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
31.9 goto and Variable-Length Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

32 Types Part V: Compound Literals and Generic Selections 232

32.1 Compound Literals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
32.1.1 Passing Unnamed Objects to Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
32.1.2 Unnamed structs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
32.1.3 Pointers to Unnamed Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
32.1.4 Unnamed Objects and Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
32.1.5 Silly Unnamed Object Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
32.2 Generic Selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

33 Arrays Part II 239

33.1 Type Qualifiers for Arrays in Parameter Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
33.2 static for Arrays in Parameter Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
33.3 Equivalent Initializers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

34 Long Jumps with setjmp, longjmp 243

34.1 Using setjmp and longjmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
34.2 Pitfalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
34.2.1 The Values of Local Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
34.2.2 How Much State is Saved? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
34.2.3 You Can’t Name Anything setjmp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
34.2.4 You Can’t setjmp() in a Larger Expression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
34.2.5 When Can’t You longjmp()? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
34.2.6 You Can’t Pass 0 to longjmp() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
34.2.7 longjmp() and Variable Length Arrays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

35 Incomplete Types 247

35.1 Use Case: Self-Referential Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
35.2 Incomplete Type Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
CONTENTS viii

35.3 Other Incomplete Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248

35.4 Use Case: Arrays in Header Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
35.5 Completing Incomplete Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

36 Complex Numbers 251

36.1 Complex Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
36.2 Assigning Complex Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
36.3 Constructing, Deconstructing, and Printing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
36.4 Complex Arithmetic and Comparisons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
36.5 Complex Math . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
36.5.1 Trigonometry Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
36.5.2 Exponential and Logarithmic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
36.5.3 Power and Absolute Value Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
36.5.4 Manipulation Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

37 Fixed Width Integer Types 256

37.1 The Bit-Sized Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
37.2 Maximum Integer Size Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
37.3 Using Fixed Size Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
37.4 Limits of Fixed Size Integers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
37.5 Format Specifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

38 Date and Time Functionality 260

38.1 Quick Terminology and Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
38.2 Date Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
38.3 Initialization and Conversion Between Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
38.3.1 Converting time_t to struct tm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
38.3.2 Converting struct tm to time_t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
38.4 Formatted Date Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
38.5 More Resolution with timespec_get() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
38.6 Differences Between Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

39 Multithreading 266
39.1 Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
39.2 Things You Can Do . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
39.3 Data Races and the Standard Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
39.4 Creating and Waiting for Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
39.5 Detaching Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
39.6 Thread Local Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
39.6.1 _Thread_local Storage-Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
39.6.2 Another Option: Thread-Specific Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
39.7 Mutexes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
39.7.1 Different Mutex Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
39.8 Condition Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
39.8.1 Timed Condition Wait . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
39.8.2 Broadcast: Wake Up All Waiting Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
39.9 Running a Function One Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284

40 Atomics 285
40.1 Testing for Atomic Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
40.2 Atomic Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
40.3 Synchronization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
40.4 Acquire and Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
40.5 Sequential Consistency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
40.6 Atomic Assignments and Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
CONTENTS ix

40.7 Library Functions that Automatically Synchronize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

40.8 Atomic Type Specifier, Qualifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
40.9 Lock-Free Atomic Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
40.9.1 Signal Handlers and Lock-Free Atomics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
40.10 Atomic Flags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
40.11 Atomic structs and unions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
40.12 Atomic Pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
40.13 Memory Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
40.13.1 Sequential Consistency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
40.13.2 Acquire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
40.13.3 Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
40.13.4 Consume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
40.13.5 Acquire/Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
40.13.6 Relaxed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
40.14 Fences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
40.15 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

41 Function Specifiers, Alignment Specifiers/Operators 301

41.1 Function Specifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
41.1.1 inline for Speed—Maybe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
41.1.2 noreturn and _Noreturn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
41.2 Alignment Specifiers and Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
41.2.1 alignas and _Alignas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
41.2.2 alignof and _Alignof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305

42 <assert.h> Runtime and Compile-time Diagnostics 307

42.1 Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
42.2 assert() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
42.3 static_assert() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

43 <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 311

43.1 cacos(), cacosf(), cacosl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
43.2 casin(), casinf(), casinl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
43.3 catan(), catanf(), catanl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
43.4 ccos(), ccosf(), ccosl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
43.5 csin(), csinf(), csinl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
43.6 ctan(), ctanf(), ctanl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
43.7 cacosh(), cacoshf(), cacoshl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
43.8 casinh(), casinhf(), casinhl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
43.9 catanh(), catanhf(), catanhl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
43.10 ccosh(), ccoshf(), ccoshl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
43.11 csinh(), csinhf(), csinhl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
43.12 ctanh(), ctanhf(), ctanhl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
43.13 cexp(), cexpf(), cexpl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
43.14 clog(), clogf(), clogl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
43.15 cabs(), cabsf(), cabsl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
43.16 cpow(), cpowf(), cpowl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
43.17 csqrt(), csqrtf(), csqrtl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
43.18 carg(), cargf(), cargl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
43.19 cimag(), cimagf(), cimagl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
43.20 CMPLX(), CMPLXF(), CMPLXL() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
43.21 conj(), conjf(), conjl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
43.22 cproj(), cproj(), cproj() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
43.23 creal(), crealf(), creall() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
CONTENTS x

44 <ctype.h> Character Classification and Conversion 335

44.1 isalnum() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
44.2 isalpha() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
44.3 isblank() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
44.4 iscntrl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
44.5 isdigit() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
44.6 isgraph() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
44.7 islower() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
44.8 isprint() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
44.9 ispunct() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
44.10 isspace() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
44.11 isupper() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
44.12 isxdigit() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
44.13 tolower() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
44.14 toupper() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346

45 <errno.h> Error Information 348

45.1 errno . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348

46 <fenv.h> Floating Point Exceptions and Environment 351

46.1 Types and Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
46.2 Pragmas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
46.3 feclearexcept() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
46.4 fegetexceptflag() fesetexceptflag() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
46.5 feraiseexcept() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
46.6 fetestexcept() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
46.7 fegetround() fesetround() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
46.8 fegetenv() fesetenv() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
46.9 feholdexcept() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
46.10 feupdateenv() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

47 <float.h> Floating Point Limits 363

47.1 Background . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
47.2 FLT_ROUNDS Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
47.3 FLT_EVAL_METHOD Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
47.4 Subnormal Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
47.5 How Many Decimal Places Can I Use? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
47.6 Comprehensive Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367

48 <inttypes.h> More Integer Conversions 370

48.1 Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
48.2 imaxabs() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
48.3 imaxdiv() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
48.4 strtoimax() strtoumax() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
48.5 wcstoimax() wcstoumax() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374

49 <iso646.h> Alternative Operator Spellings 376

50 <limits.h> Numeric Limits 377

50.1 CHAR_MIN and CHAR_MAX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
50.2 Choosing the Correct Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
50.3 Whither Two’s Complement? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
50.4 Demo Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378

51 <locale.h> locale handling 380

CONTENTS xi

51.1 setlocale() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380

51.2 localeconv() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382

52 <math.h> Mathematics 386

52.1 Math Function Idioms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
52.2 Math Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
52.3 Math Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
52.4 Math Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
52.5 Math Pragmas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
52.6 fpclassify() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
52.7 isfinite(), isinf(), isnan(), isnormal() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
52.8 signbit() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
52.9 acos(), acosf(), acosl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
52.10 asin(), asinf(), asinl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
52.11 atan(), atanf(), atanl(), atan2(), atan2f(), atan2l() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
52.12 cos(), cosf(), cosl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
52.13 sin(), sinf(), sinl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
52.14 tan(), tanf(), tanl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
52.15 acosh(), acoshf(), acoshl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
52.16 asinh(), asinhf(), asinhl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
52.17 atanh(), atanhf(), atanhl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
52.18 cosh(), coshf(), coshl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
52.19 sinh(), sinhf(), sinhl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
52.20 tanh(), tanhf(), tanhl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
52.21 exp(), expf(), expl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
52.22 exp2(), exp2f(), exp2l() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
52.23 expm1(), expm1f(), expm1l() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
52.24 frexp(), frexpf(), frexpl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
52.25 ilogb(), ilogbf(), ilogbl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
52.26 ldexp(), ldexpf(), ldexpl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
52.27 log(), logf(), logl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
52.28 log10(), log10f(), log10l() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
52.29 log1p(), log1pf(), log1pl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
52.30 log2(), log2f(), log2l() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
52.31 logb(), logbf(), logbl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
52.32 modf(), modff(), modfl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
52.33 scalbn(), scalbnf(), scalbnl() scalbln(), scalblnf(), scalblnl() . . . . . . 415
52.34 cbrt(), cbrtf(), cbrtl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
52.35 fabs(), fabsf(), fabsl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
52.36 hypot(), hypotf(), hypotl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
52.37 pow(), powf(), powl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
52.38 sqrt() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
52.39 erf(), erff(), erfl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
52.40 erfc(), erfcf(), erfcl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
52.41 lgamma(), lgammaf(), lgammal() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
52.42 tgamma(), tgammaf(), tgammal() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
52.43 ceil(), ceilf(), ceill() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
52.44 floor(), floorf(), floorl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
52.45 nearbyint(), nearbyintf(), nearbyintl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
52.46 rint(), rintf(), rintl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
52.47 lrint(), lrintf(), lrintl(), llrint(), llrintf(), llrintl() . . . . . . . . . . . 427
52.48 round(), roundf(), roundl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
52.49 lround(), lroundf(), lroundl() llround(), llroundf(), llroundl() . . . . . . 429
52.50 trunc(), truncf(), truncl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
CONTENTS xii

52.51 fmod(), fmodf(), fmodl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431

52.52 remainder(), remainderf(), remainderl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
52.53 remquo(), remquof(), remquol() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
52.54 copysign(), copysignf(), copysignl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
52.55 nan(), nanf(), nanl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
52.56 nextafter(), nextafterf(), nextafterl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
52.57 nexttoward(), nexttowardf(), nexttowardl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
52.58 fdim(), fdimf(), fdiml() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
52.59 fmax(), fmaxf(), fmaxl(), fmin(), fminf(), fminl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
52.60 fma(), fmaf(), fmal() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
52.61 isgreater(), isgreaterequal(), isless(), islessequal() . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
52.62 islessgreater() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
52.63 isunordered() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

53 <setjmp.h> Non-local Goto 444

53.1 setjmp() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
53.2 longjmp() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446

54 <signal.h> signal handling 449

54.1 signal() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
54.2 raise() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453

55 <stdalign.h> Macros for Alignment 455

55.1 alignas() _Alignas() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
55.2 alignof() _Alignof() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

56 <stdarg.h> Variable Arguments 459

56.1 va_arg() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
56.2 va_copy() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
56.3 va_end() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
56.4 va_start() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463

57 <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 466

57.1 Atomic Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
57.2 Lock-free Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
57.3 Atomic Flag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
57.4 Memory Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
57.5 ATOMIC_VAR_INIT() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
57.6 atomic_init() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
57.7 kill_dependency() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
57.8 atomic_thread_fence() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
57.9 atomic_signal_fence() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
57.10 atomic_is_lock_free() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
57.11 atomic_store() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
57.12 atomic_load() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
57.13 atomic_exchange() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
57.14 atomic_compare_exchange_*() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
57.15 atomic_fetch_*() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
57.16 atomic_flag_test_and_set() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
57.17 atomic_flag_clear() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484

58 <stdbool.h> Boolean Types 486

58.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
58.2 _Bool? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
CONTENTS xiii

59 <stddef.h> A Few Standard Definitions 488

59.1 ptrdiff_t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
59.2 size_t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
59.3 max_align_t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
59.4 wchar_t . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
59.5 offsetof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490

60 <stdint.h> More Integer Types 491

60.1 Specific-Width Integers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
60.2 Other Integer Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
60.3 Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
60.4 Other Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
60.5 Macros for Declaring Constants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493

61 <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 494

61.1 remove() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
61.2 rename() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
61.3 tmpfile() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
61.4 tmpnam() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499
61.5 fclose() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
61.6 fflush() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
61.7 fopen() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
61.8 freopen() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
61.9 setbuf(), setvbuf() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
61.10 printf(), fprintf(), sprintf(), snprintf() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
61.11 scanf(), fscanf(), sscanf() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
61.12 vprintf(), vfprintf(), vsprintf(), vsnprintf() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
61.13 vscanf(), vfscanf(), vsscanf() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
61.14 getc(), fgetc(), getchar() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
61.15 gets(), fgets() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
61.16 putc(), fputc(), putchar() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
61.17 puts(), fputs() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
61.18 ungetc() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
61.19 fread() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
61.20 fwrite() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
61.21 fgetpos(), fsetpos() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
61.22 fseek(), rewind() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
61.23 ftell() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
61.24 feof(), ferror(), clearerr() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
61.25 perror() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

62 <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 538

62.1 <stdlib.h> Types and Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
62.2 atof() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 539
62.3 atoi(), atol(), atoll() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540
62.4 strtod(), strtof(), strtold() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
62.5 strtol(), strtoll(), strtoul(), strtoull() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
62.6 rand() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
62.7 srand() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
62.8 aligned_alloc() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
62.9 calloc(), malloc() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
62.10 free() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
62.11 realloc() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
62.12 abort() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
CONTENTS xiv

62.13 atexit(), at_quick_exit() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

62.14 exit(), quick_exit(), _Exit() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
62.15 getenv() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
62.16 system() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
62.17 bsearch() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
62.18 qsort() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
62.19 abs(), labs(), llabs() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
62.20 div(), ldiv(), lldiv() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
62.21 mblen() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
62.22 mbtowc() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
62.23 wctomb() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
62.24 mbstowcs() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
62.25 wcstombs() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570

63 <stdnoreturn.h> Macros for Non-Returning Functions 572

64 <string.h> String Manipulation 573

64.1 memcpy(), memmove() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
64.2 strcpy(), strncpy() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
64.3 strcat(), strncat() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
64.4 strcmp(), strncmp(), memcmp() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
64.5 strcoll() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 578
64.6 strxfrm() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
64.7 strchr(), strrchr(), memchr() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
64.8 strspn(), strcspn() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
64.9 strpbrk() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
64.10 strstr() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
64.11 strtok() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
64.12 memset() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
64.13 strerror() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
64.14 strlen() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

65 <tgmath.h> Type-Generic Math Functions 591

65.1 Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592

66 <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 594

66.1 call_once() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
66.2 cnd_broadcast() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
66.3 cnd_destroy() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 599
66.4 cnd_init() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
66.5 cnd_signal() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
66.6 cnd_timedwait() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
66.7 cnd_wait() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
66.8 mtx_destroy() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
66.9 mtx_init() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 608
66.10 mtx_lock() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 610
66.11 mtx_timedlock() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
66.12 mtx_trylock() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
66.13 mtx_unlock() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
66.14 thrd_create() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 617
66.15 thrd_current() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 619
66.16 thrd_detach() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
66.17 thrd_equal() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
66.18 thrd_exit() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
66.19 thrd_join() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
CONTENTS xv

66.20 thrd_sleep() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625

66.21 thrd_yield() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 626
66.22 tss_create() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 628
66.23 tss_delete() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
66.24 tss_get() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
66.25 tss_set() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634

67 <time.h> Date and Time Functions 637

67.1 Thread Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
67.2 clock() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
67.3 difftime() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
67.4 mktime() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
67.5 time() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
67.6 timespec_get() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
67.7 asctime() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645
67.8 ctime() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
67.9 gmtime() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
67.10 localtime() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
67.11 strftime() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648

68 <uchar.h> Unicode utility functions 653

68.1 Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
68.2 OS X issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
68.3 mbrtoc16() mbrtoc32() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 654
68.4 c16rtomb() c32rtomb() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 657

69 <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 660

69.1 Restartable Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 661
69.2 wprintf(), fwprintf(), swprintf() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662
69.3 wscanf() fwscanf() swscanf() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 663
69.4 vwprintf() vfwprintf() vswprintf() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 664
69.5 vwscanf(), vfwscanf(), vswscanf() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
69.6 getwc() fgetwc() getwchar() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 666
69.7 fgetws() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 667
69.8 putwchar() putwc() fputwc() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 668
69.9 fputws() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
69.10 fwide() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 670
69.11 ungetwc() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672
69.12 wcstod() wcstof() wcstold() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 673
69.13 wcstol() wcstoll() wcstoul() wcstoull() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 675
69.14 wcscpy() wcsncpy() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
69.15 wmemcpy() wmemmove() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
69.16 wcscat() wcsncat() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 678
69.17 wcscmp(), wcsncmp(), wmemcmp() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
69.18 wcscoll() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 680
69.19 wcsxfrm() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 681
69.20 wcschr() wcsrchr() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 683
69.21 wcsspn() wcscspn() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
69.22 wcspbrk() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 685
69.23 wcsstr() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
69.24 wcstok() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 687
69.25 wcslen() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 688
69.26 wcsftime() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 689
69.27 btowc() wctob() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 690
CONTENTS xvi

69.28 mbsinit() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691

69.29 mbrlen() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 692
69.30 mbrtowc() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
69.31 wcrtomb() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 695
69.32 mbsrtowcs() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 696
69.33 wcsrtombs() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698

70 <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 701

70.1 iswalnum() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 701
70.2 iswalpha() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 702
70.3 iswblank() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 703
70.4 iswcntrl() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 704
70.5 iswdigit() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 705
70.6 iswgraph() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
70.7 iswlower() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 706
70.8 iswprint() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 707
70.9 iswpunct() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 708
70.10 iswspace() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 709
70.11 iswupper() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 710
70.12 iswxdigit() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
70.13 iswctype() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 711
70.14 wctype() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 713
70.15 towlower() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 715
70.16 towupper() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
70.17 towctrans() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 716
70.18 wctrans() . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 718
Chapter 1

Foreword

No point in wasting words here, folks, let’s jump straight into the C code:
E((ck?main((z?(stat(M,&t)?P+=a+'{'?0:3:
execv(M,k),a=G,i=P,y=G&255,
sprintf(Q,y/'@'-3?A(*L(V(%d+%d)+%d,0)

And they lived happily ever after. The End.

What’s this? You say something’s still not clear about this whole C programming language thing?
Well, to be quite honest, I’m not even sure what the above code does. It’s a snippet from one of the entries in
the 2001 International Obfuscated C Code Contest1 , a wonderful competition wherein the entrants attempt
to write the most unreadable C code possible, with often surprising results.
The bad news is that if you’re a beginner in this whole thing, all C code you see probably looks obfuscated!
The good news is, it’s not going to be that way for long.
What we’ll try to do over the course of this guide is lead you from complete and utter sheer lost confusion
on to the sort of enlightened bliss that can only be obtained through pure C programming. Right on.

1.1 Audience
This guide assumes that you’ve already got some programming knowledge under your belt from another
language, such as Python2 , JavaScript3 , Java4 , Rust5 , Go6 , Swift7 , etc. (Objective-C8 devs will have a par-
ticularly easy time of it!)
We’re going to assume you know what variables are, what loops do, how functions work, and so on.
If that’s not you for whatever reason the best I can hope to provide is some honest entertainment for your
reading pleasure. The only thing I can reasonably promise is that this guide won’t end on a cliffhanger… or
will it?
1
https://www.ioccc.org/
2
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Python_(programming_language)
3
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/JavaScript
4
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Java_(programming_language)
5
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rust_(programming_language)
6
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Go_(programming_language)
7
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Swift_(programming_language)
8
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Objective-C

1
Chapter 1. Foreword 2

1.2 How to Read This Book

The book is in two parts: the tutorial part and the reference part.
If you’re new, go through the tutorial part in order, generally. The higher you get in chapters, the less
important it is to go in order.
And no matter your skill level, the reference part is there with complete examples of the standard library
function calls to help refresh your memory whenever needed. Good for reading over a bowl of cereal or
other time.
Finally, glancing at the index (if you’re reading the print version), the reference section entries are italicized.

1.3 Platform and Compiler

I’ll try to stick to Plain Ol’-Fashioned ISO-standard C9 . Well, for the most part. Here and there I might go
crazy and start talking about POSIX10 or something, but we’ll see.
Unix users (e.g. Linux, BSD, etc.) try running cc or gcc from the command line–you might already have a
compiler installed. If you don’t, search your distribution for installing gcc or clang.
Windows users should check out Visual Studio Community11 . Or, if you’re looking for a more Unix-like
experience (recommended!), install WSL12 and gcc.
Mac users will want to install XCode13 , and in particular the command line tools.
There are a lot of compilers out there, and virtually all of them will work for this book. And a C++ compiler
will compile a lot of (but not all!) C code. Best use a proper C compiler if you can.

1.4 Official Homepage

This official location of this document is https://beej.us/guide/bgc/14 . Maybe this’ll change in the future, but
it’s more likely that all the other guides are migrated off Chico State computers.

1.5 Email Policy

I’m generally available to help out with email questions so feel free to write in, but I can’t guarantee a
response. I lead a pretty busy life and there are times when I just can’t answer a question you have. When
that’s the case, I usually just delete the message. It’s nothing personal; I just won’t ever have the time to give
the detailed answer you require.
As a rule, the more complex the question, the less likely I am to respond. If you can narrow down your
question before mailing it and be sure to include any pertinent information (like platform, compiler, error
messages you’re getting, and anything else you think might help me troubleshoot), you’re much more likely
to get a response.
If you don’t get a response, hack on it some more, try to find the answer, and if it’s still elusive, then write
me again with the information you’ve found and hopefully it will be enough for me to help out.
Now that I’ve badgered you about how to write and not write me, I’d just like to let you know that I fully
appreciate all the praise the guide has received over the years. It’s a real morale boost, and it gladdens me to
hear that it is being used for good! :-) Thank you!
9
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ANSI_C
10
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/POSIX
11
https://visualstudio.microsoft.com/vs/community/
12
https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/wsl/install-win10
13
https://developer.apple.com/xcode/
14
https://beej.us/guide/bgc/
Chapter 1. Foreword 3

1.6 Mirroring
You are more than welcome to mirror this site, whether publicly or privately. If you publicly mirror the site
and want me to link to it from the main page, drop me a line at beej@beej.us.

1.7 Note for Translators

If you want to translate the guide into another language, write me at beej@beej.us and I’ll link to your
translation from the main page. Feel free to add your name and contact info to the translation.
Please note the license restrictions in the Copyright and Distribution section, below.

1.8 Copyright and Distribution

Beej’s Guide to C is Copyright © 2021 Brian “Beej Jorgensen” Hall.
With specific exceptions for source code and translations, below, this work is licensed under the Creative
Commons Attribution-Noncommercial-No Derivative Works 3.0 License. To view a copy of this license,
visit https://creativecommons.org/licenses/by-nc-nd/3.0/ or send a letter to Creative Commons,
171 Second Street, Suite 300, San Francisco, California, 94105, USA.
One specific exception to the “No Derivative Works” portion of the license is as follows: this guide may
be freely translated into any language, provided the translation is accurate, and the guide is reprinted in its
entirety. The same license restrictions apply to the translation as to the original guide. The translation may
also include the name and contact information for the translator.
The C source code presented in this document is hereby granted to the public domain, and is completely free
of any license restriction.
Educators are freely encouraged to recommend or supply copies of this guide to their students.
Contact beej@beej.us for more information.

1.9 Dedication
The hardest things about writing these guides are:
• Learning the material in enough detail to be able to explain it
• Figuring out the best way to explain it clearly, a seemingly-endless iterative process
• Putting myself out there as a so-called authority, when really I’m just a regular human trying to make
sense of it all, just like everyone else
• Keeping at it when so many other things draw my attention
A lot of people have helped me through this process, and I want to acknowledge those who have made this
book possible.
• Everyone on the Internet who decided to help share their knowledge in one form or another. The free
sharing of instructive information is what makes the Internet the great place that it is.
• The volunteers at cppreference.com15 who provide the bridge that leads from the spec to the real world.
• The helpful and knowledgeable folks on comp.lang.c16 and r/C_Programming17 who got me through
the tougher parts of the language.
• Everyone who submitted corrections and pull-requests on everything from misleading instructions to
typos.
15
https://en.cppreference.com/
16
https://groups.google.com/g/comp.lang.c
17
https://www.reddit.com/r/C_Programming/
Chapter 1. Foreword 4

Thank you! ♥
Chapter 2

Hello, World!

2.1 What to Expect from C

“Where do these stairs go?”
“They go up.”
—Ray Stantz and Peter Venkman, Ghostbusters
C is a low-level language.
It didn’t use to be. Back in the day when people carved punch cards out of granite, C was an incredible way
to be free of the drudgery of lower-level languages like assembly1 .
But now in these modern times, current-generation languages offer all kinds of features that didn’t exist in
1972 when C was invented. This means C is a pretty basic language with not a lot of features. It can do
anything, but it can make you work for it.
So why would we even use it today?
• As a learning tool: not only is C a venerable piece of computing history, but it is connected to the bare
metal2 in a way that present-day languages are not. When you learn C, you learn about how software
interfaces with computer memory at a low level. There are no seatbelts. You’ll write software that
crashes, I assure you. And that’s all part of the fun!
• As a useful tool: C still is used for certain applications, such as building operating systems3 or in
embedded systems4 . (Though the Rust5 programming language is eyeing both these fields!)
If you’re familiar with another language, a lot of things about C are easy. C inspired many other languages,
and you’ll see bits of it in Go, Rust, Swift, Python, JavaScript, Java, and all kinds of other languages. Those
parts will be familiar.
The one thing about C that hangs people up is pointers. Virtually everything else is familiar, but pointers are
the weird one. The concept behind pointers is likely one you already know, but C forces you to be explicit
about it, using operators you’ve likely never seen before.
It’s especially insidious because once you grok6 pointers, they’re suddenly easy. But up until that moment,
they’re slippery eels.
1
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Assembly_language
2
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bare_machine
3
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Operating_system
4
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Embedded_system
5
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rust_(programming_language)
6
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Grok

5
 Chapter 2. Hello, World! 6

Everything else in C is just memorizing another way (or sometimes the same way!) of doing something
you’ve done already. Pointers are the weird bit. And, arguably, even pointers are variations on a theme
you’re probably familiar with.
So get ready for a rollicking adventure as close to the core of the computer as you can get without assembly,
in the most influential computer language of all time7 . Hang on!

2.2 Hello, World!

This is the canonical example of a C program. Everyone uses it. (Note that the numbers to the left are for
reader reference only, and are not part of the source code.)
1 /* Hello world program */
2

3 #include <stdio.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 printf("Hello, World!\n"); // Actually do the work here
8 }

We’re going to don our long-sleeved heavy-duty rubber gloves, grab a scalpel, and rip into this thing to see
what makes it tick. So, scrub up, because here we go. Cutting very gently…
Let’s get the easy thing out of the way: anything between the digraphs /* and */ is a comment and will be
completely ignored by the compiler. Same goes for anything on a line after a //. This allows you to leave
messages to yourself and others, so that when you come back and read your code in the distant future, you’ll
know what the heck it was you were trying to do. Believe me, you will forget; it happens.
Now, what is this #include? GROSS! Well, it tells the C Preprocessor to pull the contents of another file
and insert it into the code right there.
Wait—what’s a C Preprocessor? Good question. There are two stages8 to compilation: the preprocessor
and the compiler. Anything that starts with pound sign, or “octothorpe”, (#) is something the preprocessor
operates on before the compiler even gets started. Common preprocessor directives, as they’re called, are
#include and #define. More on that later.

Before we go on, why would I even begin to bother pointing out that a pound sign is called an octothorpe?
The answer is simple: I think the word octothorpe is so excellently funny, I have to gratuitously spread its
name around whenever I get the opportunity. Octothorpe. Octothorpe, octothorpe, octothorpe.
So anyway. After the C preprocessor has finished preprocessing everything, the results are ready for the
compiler to take them and produce assembly code9 , machine code10 , or whatever it’s about to do. Machine
code is the “language” the CPU understands, and it can understand it very rapidly. This is one of the reasons
C programs tend to be quick.
Don’t worry about the technical details of compilation for now; just know that your source runs through the
preprocessor, then the output of that runs through the compiler, then that produces an executable for you to
run.
What about the rest of the line? What’s <stdio.h>? That is what is known as a header file. It’s the dot-h at
the end that gives it away. In fact it’s the “Standard I/O” (stdio) header file that you will grow to know and
love. It gives us access to a bunch of I/O functionality11 . For our demo program, we’re outputting the string
7
I know someone will fight me on that, but it’s gotta be at least in the top three, right?
8
Well, technically there are more than two, but hey, let’s pretend there are two—ignorance is bliss, right?
9
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Assembly_language
10
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Machine_code
11
Technically, it contains preprocessor directives and function prototypes (more on that later) for common input and output needs.
Chapter 2. Hello, World! 7

“Hello, World!”, so we in particular need access to the printf() function to do this. The <stdio.h> file
gives us this access. Basically, if we tried to use without #include <stdio.h>, the compiler would have
complained to us about it.
How did I know I needed to #include <stdio.h> for printf()? Answer: it’s in the documentation. If
you’re on a Unix system, man 3 printf and it’ll tell you right at the top of the man page what header files
are required. Or see the reference section in this book. :-)
Holy moly. That was all to cover the first line! But, let’s face it, it has been completely dissected. No mystery
shall remain!
So take a breather…look back over the sample code. Only a couple easy lines to go.
Welcome back from your break! I know you didn’t really take a break; I was just humoring you.
The next line is main(). This is the definition of the function main(); everything between the squirrelly
braces ({ and }) is part of the function definition.
(How do you call a different function, anyway? The answer lies in the printf() line, but we’ll get to that
in a minute.)
Now, the main function is a special one in many ways, but one way stands above the rest: it is the function
that will be called automatically when your program starts executing. Nothing of yours gets called before
main(). In the case of our example, this works fine since all we want to do is print a line and exit.

Oh, that’s another thing: once the program executes past the end of main(), down there at the closing
squirrelly brace, the program will exit, and you’ll be back at your command prompt.
So now we know that that program has brought in a header file, stdio.h, and declared a main() function
that will execute when the program is started. What are the goodies in main()?
I am so happy you asked. Really! We only have the one goodie: a call to the function printf(). You can
tell this is a function call and not a function definition in a number of ways, but one indicator is the lack of
squirrelly braces after it. And you end the function call with a semicolon so the compiler knows it’s the end
of the expression. You’ll be putting semicolons after almost everything, as you’ll see.
You’re passing one argument to the function printf(): a string to be printed when you call it. Oh, yeah—
we’re calling a function! We rock! Wait, wait—don’t get cocky. What’s that crazy \n at the end of the string?
Well, most characters in the string will print out just like they are stored. But there are certain characters that
you can’t print on screen well that are embedded as two-character backslash codes. One of the most popular
is \n (read “backslash-N”) that corresponds to the newline character. This is the character that causes further
printing to continue at the beginning of the next line instead of the current. It’s like hitting return at the end
of the line.
So copy that code into a file called hello.c and build it. On a Unix-like platform (e.g. Linux, BSD, Mac,
or WSL), from the command line you’ll build with a command like so:
gcc -o hello hello.c

(This means “compile hello.c, and output an executable called hello”.)

After that’s done, you should have a file called hello that you can run with this command:
./hello

(The leading ./ tells the shell to “run from the current directory”.)
And see what happens:
Hello, World!

It’s done and tested! Ship it!

Chapter 2. Hello, World! 8

2.3 Compilation Details

Let’s talk a bit more about how to build C programs, and what happens behind the scenes there.
Like other languages, C has source code. But, depending on what language you’re coming from, you might
never have had to compile your source code into an executable.
Compilation is the process of taking your C source code and turning it into a program that your operating
system can execute.
JavaScript and Python devs aren’t used to a separate compilation step at all–though behind the scenes it’s
happening! Python compiles your source code into something called bytecode that the Python virtual machine
can execute. Java devs are used to compilation, but that produces bytecode for the Java Virtual Machine.
When compiling C, machine code is generated. This is the 1s and 0s that can be executed directly and speedily
by the CPU.
Languages that typically aren’t compiled are called interpreted languages. But as we mentioned
with Java and Python, they also have a compilation step. And there’s no rule saying that C can’t
be interpreted. (There are C interpreters out there!) In short, it’s a bunch of gray areas. Com-
pilation in general is just taking source code and turning it into another, more easily-executed
form.
The C compiler is the program that does the compilation.
As we’ve already said, gcc is a compiler that’s installed on a lot of Unix-like operating systems12 . And it’s
commonly run from the command line in a terminal, but not always. You can run it from your IDE, as well.
So how do we do command line builds?

2.4 Building with gcc

If you have a source file called hello.c in the current directory, you can build that into a program called
hello with this command typed in a terminal:
gcc -o hello hello.c

The -o means “output to this file”13 . And there’s hello.c at the end, the name of the file we want to compile.
If your source is broken up into multiple files, you can compile them all together (almost as if they were one
file, but the rules are actually more complex than that) by putting all the .c files on the command line:
gcc -o awesomegame ui.c characters.c npc.c items.c

and they’ll all get built together into a big executable.

That’s enough to get started—later we’ll talk details about multiple source files, object files, and all kinds of
fun stuff.

2.5 Building with clang

On Macs, the stock compiler isn’t gcc—it’s clang. But a wrapper is also installed so you can run gcc and
have it still work.
You can also install the gcc compiler proper through Homebrew14 or some other means.
12
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unix
13
If you don’t give it an output filename, it will export to a file called a.out by default—this filename has its roots deep in Unix
history.
14
https://formulae.brew.sh/formula/gcc
Chapter 2. Hello, World! 9

2.6 Building from IDEs

If you’re using an Integrated Development Environment (IDE), you probably don’t have to build from the
command line.
With Visual Studio, CTRL-F7 will build, and CTRL-F5 will run.
With VS Code, you can hit F5 to run via the debugger. (You’ll have to install the C/C++ Extension.)
With XCode, you can build with COMMAND-B and run with COMMAND-R. To get the command line tools, Google
for “XCode command line tools” and you’ll find instructions for installing them.
For getting started, I encourage you to also try to build from the command line—it’s history!

2.7 C Versions
C has come a long way over the years, and it had many named version numbers to describe which dialect of
the language you’re using.
These generally refer to the year of the specification.
The most famous are C89, C99, C11, and C2x. We’ll focus on the latter in this book.
But here’s a more complete table:

Version Description
K&R C 1978, the original. Named after Brian Kernighan and Dennis Ritchie.
Ritchie designed and coded the language, and Kernighan co-authored the
book on it. You rarely see original K&R code today. If you do, it’ll look odd,
like Middle English looks odd to modern English readers.
C89, ANSI C, C90 In 1989, the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) produced a C
language specification that set the tone for C that persists to this day. A year
later, the reins were handed to the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO) that produced the identical C90.
C95 A rarely-mentioned addition to C89 that included wide character support.
C99 The first big overhaul with lots of language additions. The thing most people
remember is the addition of //-style comments. This is the most popular
version of C in use as of this writing.
C11 This major version update includes Unicode support and multi-threading. Be
advised that if you start using these language features, you might be
sacrificing portability with places that are stuck in C99 land. But, honestly,
1999 is getting to be a while back now.
C17, C18 Bugfix update to C11. C17 seems to be the official name, but the publication
was delayed until 2018. As far as I can tell, these two are interchangeable,
with C17 being preferred.
C2x What’s coming next! Expected to eventually become C21.

You can force GCC to use one of these standards with the -std= command line argument. If you want it to
be picky about the standard, add -pedantic.
For example:
gcc -std=c11 -pedantic foo.c

For this book, I compile programs for C2x with all warnings set:
Chapter 2. Hello, World! 10

gcc -Wall -Wextra -std=c2x -pedantic foo.c

Chapter 3

Variables and Statements

“It takes all kinds to make a world, does it not, Padre?”

“So it does, my son, so it does.”
—Pirate Captain Thomas Bartholomew Red to the Padre, Pirates
There sure can be lotsa stuff in a C program.
Yup.
And for various reasons, it’ll be easier for all of us if we classify some of the types of things you can find in
a program, so we can be clear what we’re talking about.

3.1 Variables
It’s said that “variables hold values”. But another way to think about it is that a variable is a human-readable
name that refers to some data in memory.
We’re going to take a second here and take a peek down the rabbit hole that is pointers. Don’t worry about
it.
You can think of memory as a big array of bytes1 . Data is stored in this “array”2 . If a number is larger than
a single byte, it is stored in multiple bytes. Because memory is like an array, each byte of memory can be
referred to by its index. This index into memory is also called an address, or a location, or a pointer.
When you have a variable in C, the value of that variable is in memory somewhere, at some address. Of
course. After all, where else would it be? But it’s a pain to refer to a value by its numeric address, so we
make a name for it instead, and that’s what the variable is.
The reason I’m bringing all this up is twofold:
1. It’s going to make it easier to understand pointer variables later—they’re variables that hold the address
of other variables!
2. Also, it’s going to make it easier to understand pointers later.
So a variable is a name for some data that’s stored in memory at some address.
1
A “byte” is typically an 8-bit binary number. Think of it as an integer that can only hold the values from 0 to 255, inclusive.
Technically, C allows bytes to be any number of bits and if you want to unambiguously refer to an 8-bit number, you should use the
term octet. But programmers are going assume you mean 8-bits when you say “byte” unless you specify otherwise.
2
I’m seriously oversimplifying how modern memory works, here. But the mental model works, so please forgive me.

11
 Chapter 3. Variables and Statements 12

3.1.1 Variable Names

You can use any characters in the range 0-9, A-Z, a-z, and underscore for variable names, with the following
rules:
• You can’t start a variable with a digit 0-9.
• You can’t start a variable name with two underscores.
• You can’t start a variable name with an underscore followed by a capital A-Z.
For Unicode, just try it. There are some rules in the spec in §D.2 that talk about which Unicode codepoint
ranges are allowed in which parts of identifiers, but that’s too much to write about here and is probably
something you’ll never have to think about anyway.

3.1.2 Variable Types

Depending on which languages you already have in your toolkit, you might or might not be familiar with the
idea of types. But C’s kinda picky about them, so we should do a refresher.
Some example types, some of the most basic:

Type Example C Type

Integer 3490 int
Floating point 3.14159 float
Character (single) 'c' char
String "Hello, world!" char *3

C makes an effort to convert automatically between most numeric types when you ask it to. But other than
that, all conversions are manual, notably between string and numeric.
Almost all of the types in C are variants on these types.
Before you can use a variable, you have to declare that variable and tell C what type the variable holds. Once
declared, the type of variable cannot be changed later at runtime. What you set it to is what it is until it falls
out of scope and is reabsorbed into the universe.
Let’s take our previous “Hello, world” code and add a couple variables to it:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int i; // Holds signed integers, e.g. -3, -2, 0, 1, 10
6 float f; // Holds signed floating point numbers, e.g. -3.1416
7

8 printf("Hello, World!\n"); // Ah, blessed familiarity

9 }

There! We’ve declared a couple of variables. We haven’t used them yet, and they’re both uninitialized. One
holds an integer number, and the other holds a floating point number (a real number, basically, if you have a
math background).
Uninitialized variables have indeterminate value4 . They have to be initialized or else you must assume they
contain some nonsense number.
3
Read this as “pointer to a char” or “char pointer”. “Char” for character. Though I can’t find a study, it seems anecdotally most
people pronounce this as “char”, a minority say “car”, and a handful say “care”. We’ll talk more about pointers later.
4
Colloquially, we say they have “random” values, but they aren’t truly—or even pseudo-truly—random numbers.
 Chapter 3. Variables and Statements 13

This is one of the places C can “get you”. Much of the time, in my experience, the indeterminate
value is zero… but it can vary from run to run! Never assume the value will be zero, even if you
see it is. Always explicitly initialize variables to some value before you use them5 .
What’s this? You want to store some numbers in those variables? Insanity!
Let’s go ahead and do that:
1 int main(void)
2 {
3 int i;
4

5 i = 2; // Assign the value 2 into the variable i

6

7 printf("Hello, World!\n");
8 }

Killer. We’ve stored a value. Let’s print it.

We’re going to do that by passing two amazing arguments to the printf() function. The first argument is
a string that describes what to print and how to print it (called the format string), and the second is the value
to print, namely whatever is in the variable i.
printf() hunts through the format string for a variety of special sequences which start with a percent sign
(%) that tell it what to print. For example, if it finds a %d, it looks to the next parameter that was passed, and
prints it out as an integer. If it finds a %f, it prints the value out as a float. If it finds a %s, it prints a string.
As such, we can print out the value of various types like so:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int i = 2;
6 float f = 3.14;
7 char *s = "Hello, world!"; // char * ("char pointer") is the string type
8

9 printf("%s i = %d and f = %f!\n", s, i, f);

10 }

And the output will be:

Hello, world! i = 2 and f = 3.14!

In this way, printf() might be similar to various types of format strings or parameterized strings in other
languages you’re familiar with.

3.1.3 Boolean Types

C has Boolean types, true or false?
1!

Historically, C didn’t have a Boolean type, and some might argue it still doesn’t.
In C, 0 means “false”, and non-zero means “true”.
So 1 is true. And -37 is true. And 0 is false.
5
This isn’t strictly 100% true. When we get to learning about static storage duration, you’ll find the some variables are initialized to
zero automatically. But the safe thing to do is always initialize them.
 Chapter 3. Variables and Statements 14

You can just declare Boolean types as ints:

int x = 1;

if (x) {
printf("x is true!\n");
}

If you #include <stdbool.h>, you also get access to some symbolic names that might make things look
more familiar, namely a bool type and true and false values:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdbool.h>
3

4 int main(void) {
5 bool x = true;
6

7 if (x) {
8 printf("x is true!\n");
9 }
10 }

But these are identical to using integer values for true and false. They’re just a facade to make things look
nice.

3.2 Operators and Expressions

C operators should be familiar to you from other languages. Let’s blast through some of them here.
(There are a bunch more details than this, but we’re going to do enough in this section to get started.)

3.2.1 Arithmetic
Hopefully these are familiar:
i = i + 3; // Addition (+) and assignment (=) operators, add 3 to i
i = i - 8; // Subtraction, subtract 8 from i
i = i * 9; // Multiplication
i = i / 2; // Division
i = i % 5; // Modulo (division remainder)

There are shorthand variants for all of the above. Each of those lines could more tersely be written as:
i += 3; // Same as "i = i + 3", add 3 to i
i -= 8; // Same as "i = i - 8"
i *= 9; // Same as "i = i * 9"
i /= 2; // Same as "i = i / 2"
i %= 5; // Same as "i = i % 5"

There is no exponentiation. You’ll have to use one of the pow() function variants from math.h.
Let’s get into some of the weirder stuff you might not have in your other languages!

3.2.2 Ternary Operator

C also includes the ternary operator. This is an expression whose value depends on the result of a conditional
embedded in it.
Chapter 3. Variables and Statements 15

// If x > 10, add 17 to y. Otherwise add 37 to y.

y += x > 10? 17: 37;

What a mess! You’ll get used to it the more you read it. To help out a bit, I’ll rewrite the above expression
using if statements:
// This expression:

y += x > 10? 17: 37;

// is equivalent to this non-expression:

if (x > 10)
y += 17;
else
y += 37;

Compare those two until you see each of the components of the ternary operator.
Or, another example that prints if a number stored in x is odd or even:
printf("The number %d is %s.\n", x, x % 2 == 0? "even": "odd")

The %s format specifier in printf() means print a string. If the expression x % 2 evaluates to 0, the value
of the entire ternary expression evaluates to the string "even". Otherwise it evaluates to the string "odd".
Pretty cool!
It’s important to note that the ternary operator isn’t flow control like the if statement is. It’s just an expression
that evaluates to a value.

3.2.3 Pre-and-Post Increment-and-Decrement

Now, let’s mess with another thing that you might not have seen.
These are the legendary post-increment and post-decrement operators:
i++; // Add one to i (post-increment)
i--; // Subtract one from i (post-decrement)

Very commonly, these are just used as shorter versions of:

i += 1; // Add one to i
i -= 1; // Subtract one from i

but they’re more subtly different than that, the clever scoundrels.
Let’s take a look at this variant, pre-increment and pre-decrement:
++i; // Add one to i (pre-increment)
--i; // Subtract one from i (pre-decrement)

With pre-increment and pre-decrement, the value of the variable is incremented or decremented before the
expression is evaluated. Then the expression is evaluated with the new value.
With post-increment and post-decrement, the value of the expression is first computed with the value as-is,
and then the value is incremented or decremented after the value of the expression has been determined.
You can actually embed them in expressions, like this:
Chapter 3. Variables and Statements 16

i = 10;
j = 5 + i++; // Compute 5 + i, _then_ increment i

printf("%d, %d\n", i, j); // Prints 11, 15

Let’s compare this to the pre-increment operator:

i = 10;
j = 5 + ++i; // Increment i, _then_ compute 5 + i

printf("%d, %d\n", i, j); // Prints 11, 16

This technique is used frequently with array and pointer access and manipulation. It gives you a way to use
the value in a variable, and also increment or decrement that value before or after it is used.
But by far the most common place you’ll see this is in a for loop:
for (i = 0; i < 10; i++)
printf("i is %d\n", i);

But more on that later.

3.2.4 The Comma Operator

This is an uncommonly-used way to separate expressions that will run left to right:
x = 10, y = 20; // First assign 10 to x, then 20 to y

Seems a bit silly, since you could just replace the comma with a semicolon, right?
x = 10; y = 20; // First assign 10 to x, then 20 to y

But that’s a little different. The latter is two separate expressions, while the former is a single expression!
With the comma operator, the value of the comma expression is the value of the rightmost expression:
x = 1, 2, 3;

printf("x is %d\n", x); // Prints 3, because 3 is rightmost in the comma list

But even that’s pretty contrived. One common place the comma operator is used is in for loops to do multiple
things in each section of the statement:
for (i = 0, j = 10; i < 100; i++, j++)
printf("%d, %d\n", i, j);

We’ll revisit that later.

3.2.5 Conditional Operators

For Boolean values, we have a raft of standard operators:
a == b; // True if a is equivalent to b
a != b; // True if a is not equivalent to b
a < b; // True if a is less than b
a > b; // True if a is greater than b
a <= b; // True if a is less than or equal to b
a >= b; // True if a is greater than or equal to b

Don’t mix up assignment = with comparison ==! Use two equals to compare, one to assign.
Chapter 3. Variables and Statements 17

We can use the comparison expressions with if statements:

if (a <= 10)
printf("Success!\n");

3.2.6 Boolean Operators

We can chain together or alter conditional expressions with Boolean operators for and, or, and not.

Operator Boolean meaning

&& and
|| or
! not

An example of Boolean “and”:

// Do something if x less than 10 and y greater than 20:

if (x < 10 && y > 20)

printf("Doing something!\n");

An example of Boolean “not”:

if (!(x < 12))
printf("x is not less than 12\n");

! has higher precedence than the other Boolean operators, so we have to use parentheses in that case.

Of course, that’s just the same as:

if (x >= 12)
printf("x is not less than 12\n");

but I needed the example!

3.2.7 The sizeof Operator

This operator tells you the size (in bytes) that a particular variable or data type uses in memory.
More particularly, it tells you the size (in bytes) that the type of a particular expression (which might be just
a single variable) uses in memory.
This can be different on different systems, except for char and its variants (which are always 1 byte).
And this might not seem very useful now, but we’ll be making references to it here and there, so it’s worth
covering.
Since this computes the number of bytes needed to store a type, you might think it would return an int. Or…
since the size can’t be negative, maybe an unsigned?
But it turns out C has a special type to represent the return value from sizeof. It’s size_t, pronounced
“size tee”6 . All we know is that it’s an unsigned integer type that can hold the size in bytes of anything you
can give to sizeof.
size_t shows up a lot of different places where counts of things are passed or returned. Think of it as a
value that represents a count.
You can take the sizeof a variable or expression:
6
The _t is short for type.
Chapter 3. Variables and Statements 18

int a = 999;

// %zu is the format specifier for type size_t

printf("%zu\n", sizeof a); // Prints 4 on my system

printf("%zu\n", sizeof(2 + 7)); // Prints 4 on my system
printf("%zu\n", sizeof 3.14); // Prints 8 on my system

// If you need to print out negative size_t values, use %zd

Remember: it’s the size in bytes of the type of the expression, not the size of the expression itself. That’s
why the size of 2+7 is the same as the size of a—they’re both type int. We’ll revisit this number 4 in the
very next block of code…
…Where we’ll see you can take the sizeof a type (note the parentheses are required around a type name,
unlike an expression):
printf("%zu\n", sizeof(int)); // Prints 4 on my system
printf("%zu\n", sizeof(char)); // Prints 1 on all systems

It’s important to note that sizeof is a compile-time operation7 . The result of the expression is determined
entirely at compile-time, not at runtime.
We’ll make use of this later on.

3.3 Flow Control

Booleans are all good, but of course we’re nowhere if we can’t control program flow. Let’s take a look at a
number of constructs: if, for, while, and do-while.
First, a general forward-looking note about statements and blocks of statements brought to you by your local
friendly C developer:
After something like an if or while statement, you can either put a single statement to be executed, or a
block of statements to all be executed in sequence.
Let’s start with a single statement:
if (x == 10) printf("x is 10\n");

This is also sometimes written on a separate line. (Whitespace is largely irrelevant in C—it’s not like Python.)
if (x == 10)
printf("x is 10\n");

But what if you want multiple things to happen due to the conditional? You can use squirrelly braces to mark
a block or compound statement.
if (x == 10) {
printf("x is 10\n");
printf("And also this happens when x is 10\n");
}

It’s a really common style to always use squirrelly braces even if they aren’t necessary:
if (x == 10) {
printf("x is 10\n");
}

7
Except for with variable length arrays—but that’s a story for another time.
Chapter 3. Variables and Statements 19

Some devs feel the code is easier to read and avoids errors like this where things visually look like they’re
in the if block, but actually they aren’t.
// BAD ERROR EXAMPLE

if (x == 10)
printf("This happens if x is 10\n");
printf("This happens ALWAYS\n"); // Surprise!! Unconditional!

while and for and the other looping constructs work the same way as the examples above. If you want to
do multiple things in a loop or after an if, wrap them up in squirrelly braces.
In other words, the if is going to run the one thing after the if. And that one thing can be a single statement
or a block of statements.

3.3.1 The if-else statement

We’ve already been using if for multiple examples, since it’s likely you’ve seen it in a language before, but
here’s another:
int i = 10;

if (i > 10) {
printf("Yes, i is greater than 10.\n");
printf("And this will also print if i is greater than 10.\n");
}

if (i <= 10) printf("i is less than or equal to 10.\n");

In the example code, the message will print if i is greater than 10, otherwise execution continues to the next
line. Notice the squirrley braces after the if statement; if the condition is true, either the first statement or
expression right after the if will be executed, or else the collection of code in the squirlley braces after the
if will be executed. This sort of code block behavior is common to all statements.

Of course, because C is fun this way, you can also do something if the condition is false with an else clause
on your if:
int i = 99;

if (i == 10)
printf("i is 10!\n");
else {
printf("i is decidedly not 10.\n");
printf("Which irritates me a little, frankly.\n");
}

And you can even cascade these to test a variety of conditions, like this:
int i = 99;

if (i == 10)
printf("i is 10!\n");

else if (i == 20)
printf("i is 20!\n");

else if (i == 99) {
printf("i is 99! My favorite\n");
Chapter 3. Variables and Statements 20

printf("I can't tell you how happy I am.\n");

printf("Really.\n");
}

else
printf("i is some crazy number I've never heard of.\n");

Though if you’re going that route, be sure to check out the switch statement for a potentially better solution.
The catch is switch only works with equality comparisons with constant numbers. The above if-else
cascade could check inequality, ranges, variables, or anything else you can craft in a conditional expression.

3.3.2 The while statement

while is your average run-of-the-mill looping construct. Do a thing while a condition expression is true.

Let’s do one!
// Print the following output:
//
// i is now 0!
// i is now 1!
// [ more of the same between 2 and 7 ]
// i is now 8!
// i is now 9!

i = 0;

while (i < 10) {

printf("i is now %d!\n", i);
i++;
}

printf("All done!\n");

That gets you a basic loop. C also has a for loop which would have been cleaner for that example.
A not-uncommon use of while is for infinite loops where you repeat while true:
while (1) {
printf("1 is always true, so this repeats forever.\n");
}

3.3.3 The do-while statement

So now that we’ve gotten the while statement under control, let’s take a look at its closely related cousin,
do-while.

They are basically the same, except if the loop condition is false on the first pass, do-while will execute
once, but while won’t execute at all. In other words, the test to see whether or not to execute the block
happens at the end of the block with do-while. It happens at the beginning of the block with while.
Let’s see by example:
// Using a while statement:

i = 10;
 Chapter 3. Variables and Statements 21

// this is not executed because i is not less than 10:

while(i < 10) {
printf("while: i is %d\n", i);
i++;
}

// Using a do-while statement:

i = 10;

// this is executed once, because the loop condition is not checked until
// after the body of the loop runs:

do {
printf("do-while: i is %d\n", i);
i++;
} while (i < 10);

printf("All done!\n");

Notice that in both cases, the loop condition is false right away. So in the while, the loop fails, and the
following block of code is never executed. With the do-while, however, the condition is checked after the
block of code executes, so it always executes at least once. In this case, it prints the message, increments i,
then fails the condition, and continues to the “All done!” output.
The moral of the story is this: if you want the loop to execute at least once, no matter what the loop condition,
use do-while.
All these examples might have been better done with a for loop. Let’s do something less deterministic—
repeat until a certain random number comes up!
1 #include <stdio.h> // For printf
2 #include <stdlib.h> // For rand
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 int r;
7

8 do {
9 r = rand() % 100; // Get a random number between 0 and 99
10 printf("%d\n", r);
11 } while (r != 37); // Repeat until 37 comes up
12 }

Side note: did you run that more than once? If you did, did you notice the same sequence of numbers came
up again. And again. And again? This is because rand() is a pseudorandom number generator that must be
seeded with a different number in order to generate a different sequence. Look up the srand() function for
more details.

3.3.4 The for statement

Welcome to one of the most popular loops in the world! The for loop!
This is a great loop if you know the number of times you want to loop in advance.
You could do the same thing using just a while loop, but the for loop can help keep the code cleaner.
Chapter 3. Variables and Statements 22

Here are two pieces of equivalent code—note how the for loop is just a more compact representation:
// Print numbers between 0 and 9, inclusive...

// Using a while statement:

i = 0;
while (i < 10) {
printf("i is %d\n", i);
i++;
}

// Do the exact same thing with a for-loop:

for (i = 0; i < 10; i++) {

printf("i is %d\n", i);
}

That’s right, folks—they do exactly the same thing. But you can see how the for statement is a little more
compact and easy on the eyes. (JavaScript users will fully appreciate its C origins at this point.)
It’s split into three parts, separated by semicolons. The first is the initialization, the second is the loop
condition, and the third is what should happen at the end of the block if the loop condition is true. All three
of these parts are optional.
for (initialize things; loop if this is true; do this after each loop)

Note that the loop will not execute even a single time if the loop condition starts off false.
for-loop fun fact!

You can use the comma operator to do multiple things in each clause of the for loop!
for (i = 0, j = 999; i < 10; i++, j--) {
printf("%d, %d\n", i, j);
}

An empty for will run forever:

for(;;) { // "forever"
printf("I will print this again and again and again\n" );
printf("for all eternity until the heat-death of the universe.\n");

printf("Or until you hit CTRL-C.\n");

}

3.3.5 The switch Statement

Depending on what languages you’re coming from, you might or might not be familiar with switch, or C’s
version might even be more restrictive than you’re used to. This is a statement that allows you to take a
variety of actions depending on the value of an integer expression.
Basically, it evaluates an expression to an integer value, jumps to the case that corresponds to that value.
Execution resumes from that point. If a break statement is encountered, then execution jumps out of the
switch.

Let’s do an example where the user enters a number of goats and we print out a gut-feel of how many goats
that is.
 Chapter 3. Variables and Statements 23

1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int goat_count;
6

7 printf("Enter a goat count: ");

8 scanf("%d", &goat_count); // Read an integer from the keyboard
9

10 switch (goat_count) {
11 case 0:
12 printf("You have no goats.\n");
13 break;
14

15 case 1:
16 printf("You have a singular goat.\n");
17 break;
18

19 case 2:
20 printf("You have a brace of goats.\n");
21 break;
22

23 default:
24 printf("You have a bona fide plethora of goats!\n");
25 break;
26 }
27 }

In that example, if the user enters, say, 2, the switch will jump to the case 2 and execute from there. When
(if) it hits a break, it jumps out of the switch.
Also, you might see that default label there at the bottom. This is what happens when no cases match.
Every case, including default, is optional. And they can occur in any order, but it’s really typical for
default, if any, to be listed last.

So the whole thing acts like an if-else cascade:

if (goat_count == 0)
printf("You have no goats.\n");
else if (goat_count == 1)
printf("You have a singular goat.\n");
else if (goat_count == 2)
printf("You have a brace of goats.\n");
else
printf("You have a bona fide plethora of goats!\n");

With some key differences:

• switch is often faster to jump to the correct code (though the spec makes no such guarantee).
• if-else can do things like relational conditionals like < and >= and floating point and other types,
while switch cannot.
There’s one more neat thing about switch that you sometimes see that is quite interesting: fall through.
Remember how break causes us to jump out of the switch?
Well, what happens if we don’t break?
Chapter 3. Variables and Statements 24

Turns out we just keep on going into the next case! Demo!
switch (x) {
case 1:
printf("1\n");
// Fall through!
case 2:
printf("2\n");
break;
case 3:
printf("3\n");
break;
}

If x == 1, this switch will first hit case 1, it’ll print the 1, but then it just continues on to the next line of
code… which prints 2!
And then, at last, we hit a break so we jump out of the switch.
if x == 2, then we just hit the case 2, print 2, and break as normal.
Not having a break is called fall through.
ProTip: ALWAYS put a comment in the code where you intend to fall through, like I did above. It will save
other programmers from wondering if you meant to do that.
In fact, this is one of the common places to introduce bugs in C programs: forgetting to put a break in your
case. You gotta do it if you don’t want to just roll into the next case8 .

Earlier I said that switch works with integer types—keep it that way. Don’t use floating point or string types
in there. One loophole-ish thing here is that you can use character types because those are secretly integers
themselves. So this is perfectly acceptable:
char c = 'b';

switch (c) {
case 'a':
printf("It's 'a'!\n");
break;

case 'b':
printf("It's 'b'!\n");
break;

case 'c':
printf("It's 'c'!\n");
break;
}

Finally, you can use enums in switch since they are also integer types. But more on that in the enum chapter.

8
This was considered such a hazard that the designers of the Go Programming Language made break the default; you have to
explicitly use Go’s fallthrough statement if you want to fall into the next case.
 Chapter 4

Functions

“Sir, not in an environment such as this. That’s why I’ve also been programmed for over thirty
secondary functions that—”
—C3PO, before being rudely interrupted, reporting a now-unimpressive number of additional
functions, Star Wars script
Very much like other languages you’re used to, C has the concept of functions.
Functions can accept a variety of arguments and return a value. One important thing, though: the arguments
and return value types are predeclared—because that’s how C likes it!
Let’s take a look at a function. This is a function that takes an int as an argument, and returns an int.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int plus_one(int n) // The "definition"

4 {
5 return n + 1;
6 }
7

The int before the plus_one indicates the return type.

The int n indicates that this function takes one int argument, stored in parameter n. A parameter is a
special type of local variable into which the arguments are copied.
I’m going to drive home the point that the arguments are copied into the parameters, here. Lots of things in
C are easier to understand if you know that the parameter is a copy of the argument, not the argument itself.
More on that in a minute.
Continuing the program down into main(), we can see the call to the function, where we assign the return
value into local variable j:
8 int main(void)
9 {
10 int i = 10, j;
11

12 j = plus_one(i); // The "call"

13

14 printf("i + 1 is %d\n", j);

15 }

25
 Chapter 4. Functions 26

Before I forget, notice that I defined the function before I used it. If I hadn’t done that, the
compiler wouldn’t know about it yet when it compiles main() and it would have given an
unknown function call error. There is a more proper way to do the above code with function
prototypes, but we’ll talk about that later.
Also notice that main() is a function!
It returns an int.
But what’s this void thing? This is a keyword that’s used to indicate that the function accepts no arguments.
You can also return void to indicate that you don’t return a value:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 // This function takes no arguments and returns no value:

4

5 void hello(void)
6 {
7 printf("Hello, world!\n");
8 }
9

10 int main(void)
11 {
12 hello(); // Prints "Hello, world!"
13 }

4.1 Passing by Value

I’d mentioned earlier that when you pass an argument to a function, a copy of that argument gets made and
stored in the corresponding parameter.
If the argument is a variable, a copy of the value of that variable gets made and stored in the parameter.
More generally, the entire argument expression is evaluated and its value determined. That value is copied
to the parameter.
In any case, the value in the parameter is its own thing. It is independent of whatever values or variables you
used as arguments when you made the function call.
So let’s look at an example here. Study it and see if you can determine the output before running it:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 void increment(int a)
4 {
5 a++;
6 }
7

8 int main(void)
9 {
10 int i = 10;
11

12 increment(i);
13

14 printf("i == %d\n", i); // What does this print?

15 }
 Chapter 4. Functions 27

At first glance, it looks like i is 10, and we pass it to the function increment(). There the value gets
incremented, so when we print it, it must be 11, right?
“Get used to disappointment.”
—Dread Pirate Roberts, The Princess Bride
But it’s not 11—it prints 10! How?
It’s all about the fact that the expressions you pass to functions get copied onto their corresponding parameters.
The parameter is a copy, not the original.
So i is 10 out in main(). And we pass it to increment(). The corresponding parameter is called a in that
function.
And the copy happens, as if by assignment. Loosely, a = i. So at that point, a is 10. And out in main(), i
is also 10.
Then we increment a to 11. But we’re not touching i at all! It remains 10.
Finally, the function is complete. All its local variables are discarded (bye, a!) and we return to main(),
where i is still 10.
And we print it, getting 10, and we’re done.
This is why in the previous example with the plus_one() function, we returned the locally modified value
so that we could see it again in main().
Seems a little bit restrictive, huh? Like you can only get one piece of data back from a function, is what
you’re thinking. There is, however, another way to get data back; C folks call it passing by reference and
that’s a story we’ll tell another time.
But no fancy-schmancy name will distract you from the fact that EVERYTHING you pass to a function WITH-
OUT EXCEPTION is copied into its corresponding parameter, and the function operates on that local copy,
NO MATTER WHAT. Remember that, even when we’re talking about this so-called passing by reference.

4.2 Function Prototypes

So if you recall back in the ice age a few sections ago, I mentioned that you had to define the function before
you used it, otherwise the compiler wouldn’t know about it ahead of time, and would bomb out with an error.
This isn’t quite strictly true. You can notify the compiler in advance that you’ll be using a function of a certain
type that has a certain parameter list. That way the function can be defined anywhere (even in a different
file), as long as the function prototype has been declared before you call that function.
Fortunately, the function prototype is really quite easy. It’s merely a copy of the first line of the function
definition with a semicolon tacked on the end for good measure. For example, this code calls a function that
is defined later, because a prototype has been declared first:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int foo(void); // This is the prototype!

4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 int i;
8

9 // We can call foo() here before it's definition because the

10 // prototype has already been declared, above!
11

12 i = foo();
 Chapter 4. Functions 28

13

14 printf("%d\n", i); // 3490

15 }
16

17 int foo(void) // This is the definition, just like the prototype!

18 {
19 return 3490;
20 }

If you don’t declare your function before you use it (either with a prototype or its definition), you’re per-
forming something called an implicit declaration. This was allowed in the first C standard (C89), and that
standard has rules about it, but is no longer allowed today. And there is no legitimate reason to rely on it in
new code.
You might notice something about the sample code we’ve been using… That is, we’ve been using the good old
printf() function without defining it or declaring a prototype! How do we get away with this lawlessness?
We don’t, actually. There is a prototype; it’s in that header file stdio.h that we included with #include,
remember? So we’re still legit, officer!

4.3 Empty Parameter Lists

You might see these from time to time in older code, but you shouldn’t ever code one up in new code. Always
use void to indicate that a function takes no parameters. There’s never1 a reason to do this in modern code.
If you’re good at just remembering to put void in for empty parameter lists in functions and prototypes, you
can skip the rest of this section.
There are two contexts for this:
• Omitting all parameters where the function is defined
• Omitting all parameters in a prototype
Let’s look at a potential function definition first:
void foo() // Should really have a `void` in there
{
printf("Hello, world!\n");
}

While the spec spells out that the behavior in this instance is as-if you’d indicated void (C11 §6.7.6.3¶14),
the void type is there for a reason. Use it.
But in the case of a function prototype, there is a significant difference between using void and not:
void foo();
void foo(void); // Not the same!

Leaving void out of the prototype indicates to the compiler that there is no additional information about the
parameters to the function. It effectively turns off all that type checking.
With a prototype definitely use void when you have an empty parameter list.

1
Never say “never”.
Chapter 5

Pointers—Cower In Fear!

“How do you get to Carnegie Hall?”

“Practice!”
—20th-century joke of unknown origin
Pointers are one of the most feared things in the C language. In fact, they are the one thing that makes this
language challenging at all. But why?
Because they, quite honestly, can cause electric shocks to come up through the keyboard and physically weld
your arms permanently in place, cursing you to a life at the keyboard in this language from the 70s!
Really? Well, not really. I’m just trying to set you up for success.
Depending on what language you came from, you might already understand the concept of references, where
a variable refers to an object of some type.
This is very much the same, except we have to be more explicit with C about when we’re talking about the
reference or the thing it refers to.

5.1 Memory and Variables

Computer memory holds data of all kinds, right? It’ll hold floats, ints, or whatever you have. To make
memory easy to cope with, each byte of memory is identified by an integer. These integers increase sequen-
tially as you move up through memory1 . You can think of it as a bunch of numbered boxes, where each box
holds a byte2 of data. Or like a big array where each element holds a byte, if you come from a language with
arrays. The number that represents each box is called its address.
Now, not all data types use just a byte. For instance, an int is often four bytes, as is a float, but it really
depends on the system. You can use the sizeof operator to determine how many bytes of memory a certain
type uses.
// %zu is the format specifier for type size_t

printf("an int uses %zu bytes of memory\n", sizeof(int));

// That prints "4" for me, but can vary by system.

1
Typically. I’m sure there are exceptions out there in the dark corridors of computing history.
2
A byte is a number made up of no more than 8 binary digits, or bits for short. This means in decimal digits just like grandma used
to use, it can hold an unsigned number between 0 and 255, inclusive.

29
Chapter 5. Pointers—Cower In Fear! 30

Memory Fun Facts: When you have a data type that uses more than a byte of memory, the
bytes that make up the data are always adjacent to one another in memory. Sometimes they’re
in order, and sometimes they’re not3 , but that’s platform-dependent, and often taken care of for
you without you needing to worry about pesky byte orderings.
So anyway, if we can get on with it and get a drum roll and some foreboding music playing for the definition
of a pointer, a pointer is a variable that holds an address. Imagine the classical score from 2001: A Space
Odyssey at this point. Ba bum ba bum ba bum BAAAAH!
Ok, so maybe a bit overwrought here, yes? There’s not a lot of mystery about pointers. They are the address
of data. Just like an int variable can hold the value 12, a pointer variable can hold the address of data.
This means that all these things mean the same thing, i.e. a number that represents a point in memory:
• Index into memory (if you’re thinking of memory like a big array)
• Address
• Location
I’m going to use these interchangeably. And yes, I just threw location in there because you can never have
enough words that mean the same thing.
And a pointer variable holds that address number. Just like a float variable might hold 3.14159.
Imagine you have a bunch of Post-it® notes all numbered in sequence with their address. (The first one is at
index numbered 0, the next at index 1, and so on.)
In addition to the number representing their positions, you can also write another number of your choice on
each. It could be the number of dogs you have. Or the number of moons around Mars…
…Or, it could be the index of another Post-it note!
If you have written the number of dogs you have, that’s just a regular variable. But if you wrote the index of
another Post-it in there, that’s a pointer. It points to the other note!
Another analogy might be with house addresses. You can have a house with certain qualities, yard, metal
roof, solar, etc. Or you could have the address of that house. The address isn’t the same as the house itself.
One’s a full-blown house, and the other is just a few lines of text. But the address of the house is a pointer
to that house. It’s not the house itself, but it tells you where to find it.
And we can do the same thing in the computer with data. You can have a data variable that’s holding some
value. And that value is in memory at some address. And you could have a different pointer variable hold
the address of that data variable.
It’s not the data variable itself, but, like with a house address, it tells us where to find it.
When we have that, we say we have a “pointer to” that data. And we can follow the pointer to access the
data itself.
(Though it doesn’t seem particularly useful yet, this all becomes indispensable when used with function calls.
Bear with me until we get there.)
So if we have an int, say, and we want a pointer to it, what we want is some way to get the address of that
int, right? After all, the pointer just holds the address of the data. What operator do you suppose we’d use
to find the address of the int?
Well, by a shocking surprise that must come as something of a shock to you, gentle reader, we use the
address-of operator (which happens to be an ampersand: “&”)to find the address of the data. Ampersand.

So for a quick example, we’ll introduce a new format specifier for printf() so you can print a pointer. You
know already how %d prints a decimal integer, yes? Well, %p prints a pointer. Now, this pointer is going to
3
The order that bytes come in is referred to as the endianness of the number. Common ones are big endian and little endian. This
usually isn’t something you need to worry about.
 Chapter 5. Pointers—Cower In Fear! 31

look like a garbage number (and it might be printed in hexadecimal4 instead of decimal), but it is merely the
index into memory the data is stored in. (Or the index into memory that the first byte of data is stored in,
if the data is multi-byte.) In virtually all circumstances, including this one, the actual value of the number
printed is unimportant to you, and I show it here only for demonstration of the address-of operator.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int i = 10;
6

7 printf("The value of i is %d\n", i);

8 printf("And its address is %p\n", (void *)&i);
9

10 // %p expects the argument to be a pointer to void

11 // so we cast it to make the compiler happy.
12 }

On my computer, this prints:

The value of i is 10
And its address is 0x7ffddf7072a4

If you’re curious, that hexadecimal number is 140,727,326,896,068 in decimal (base 10 just like Grandma
used to use). That’s the index into memory where the variable i’s data is stored. It’s the address of i. It’s
the location of i. It’s a pointer to i.
It’s a pointer because it lets you know where i is in memory. Like a home address written on a scrap of paper
tells you where you can find a particular house, this number indicates to us where in memory we can find
the value of i. It points to i.
Again, we don’t really care what the address’s exact number is, generally. We just care that it’s a pointer to
i.

5.2 Pointer Types

So… this is all well and good. You can now successfully take the address of a variable and print it on the
screen. There’s a little something for the ol’ resume, right? Here’s where you grab me by the scruff of the
neck and ask politely what the frick pointers are good for.
Excellent question, and we’ll get to that right after these messages from our sponsor.
ACME ROBOTIC HOUSING UNIT CLEANING SERVICES. YOUR HOMESTEAD WILL BE DRA-
MATICALLY IMPROVED OR YOU WILL BE TERMINATED. MESSAGE ENDS.

Welcome back to another installment of Beej’s Guide. When we met last we were talking about how to make
use of pointers. Well, what we’re going to do is store a pointer off in a variable so that we can use it later.
You can identify the pointer type because there’s an asterisk (*) before the variable name and after its type:
1 int main(void)
2 {
3 int i; // i's type is "int"
4 int *p; // p's type is "pointer to an int", or "int-pointer"
5 }

Hey, so we have here a variable that is a pointer type, and it can point to other ints. That is, it can hold the
address of other ints. We know it points to ints, since it’s of type int* (read “int-pointer”).
4
That is, base 16 with digits 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, A, B, C, D, E, and F.
 Chapter 5. Pointers—Cower In Fear! 32

When you do an assignment into a pointer variable, the type of the right hand side of the assignment has to
be the same type as the pointer variable. Fortunately for us, when you take the address-of a variable, the
resultant type is a pointer to that variable type, so assignments like the following are perfect:
int i;
int *p; // p is a pointer, but is uninitialized and points to garbage

p = &i; // p is assigned the address of i--p now "points to" i

On the left of the assignment, we have a variable of type pointer-to-int (int*), and on the right side, we
have expression of type pointer-to-int since i is an int (because address-of int gives you a pointer to int).
The address of a thing can be stored in a pointer to that thing.
Get it? I know it still doesn’t quite make much sense since you haven’t seen an actual use for the pointer
variable, but we’re taking small steps here so that no one gets lost. So now, let’s introduce you to the anti-
address-of operator. It’s kind of like what address-of would be like in Bizarro World.

5.3 Dereferencing
A pointer variable can be thought of as referring to another variable by pointing to it. It’s rare you’ll hear
anyone in C land talking about “referring” or “references”, but I bring it up just so that the name of this
operator will make a little more sense.
When you have a pointer to a variable (roughly “a reference to a variable”), you can use the original variable
through the pointer by dereferencing the pointer. (You can think of this as “de-pointering” the pointer, but
no one ever says “de-pointering”.)
Back to our analogy, this is vaguely like looking at a home address and then going to that house.
Now, what do I mean by “get access to the original variable”? Well, if you have a variable called i, and you
have a pointer to i called p, you can use the dereferenced pointer p exactly as if it were the original variable
i!

You almost have enough knowledge to handle an example. The last tidbit you need to know is actually
this: what is the dereference operator? It’s actually called the indirection operator, because you’re accessing
values indirectly via the pointer. And it is the asterisk, again: *. Now, don’t get this confused with the asterisk
you used in the pointer declaration, earlier. They are the same character, but they have different meanings in
different contexts5 .
Here’s a full-blown example:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int i;
6 int *p; // this is NOT a dereference--this is a type "int*"
7

8 p = &i; // p now points to i, p holds address of i

9

10 i = 10; // i is now 10
11 *p = 20; // the thing p points to (namely i!) is now 20!!
12

13 printf("i is %d\n", i); // prints "20"

5
That’s not all! It’s used in /*comments*/ and multiplication and in function prototypes with variable length arrays! It’s all the
same *, but the context gives it different meaning.
 Chapter 5. Pointers—Cower In Fear! 33

14 printf("i is %d\n", *p); // "20"! dereference-p is the same as i!

15 }

Remember that p holds the address of i, as you can see where we did the assignment to p on line 8. What
the indirection operator does is tells the computer to use the object the pointer points to instead of using the
pointer itself. In this way, we have turned *p into an alias of sorts for i.
Great, but why? Why do any of this?

5.4 Passing Pointers as Arguments

Right about now, you’re thinking that you have an awful lot of knowledge about pointers, but absolutely zero
application, right? I mean, what use is *p if you could just simply say i instead?
Well, my friend, the real power of pointers comes into play when you start passing them to functions. Why
is this a big deal? You might recall from before that you could pass all kinds of arguments to functions and
they’d be dutifully copied into parameters, and then you could manipulate local copies of those variables
from within the function, and then you could return a single value.
What if you wanted to bring back more than one single piece of data from the function? I mean, you can
only return one thing, right? What if I answered that question with another question? …Er, two questions?
What happens when you pass a pointer as an argument to a function? Does a copy of the pointer get put into
its corresponding parameter? You bet your sweet peas it does. Remember how earlier I rambled on and on
about how EVERY SINGLE ARGUMENT gets copied into parameters and the function uses a copy of the
argument? Well, the same is true here. The function will get a copy of the pointer.
But, and this is the clever part: we will have set up the pointer in advance to point at a variable… and then
the function can dereference its copy of the pointer to get back to the original variable! The function can’t
see the variable itself, but it can certainly dereference a pointer to that variable!
This is analogous to writing a home address on a piece of paper, and then copying that onto another piece of
paper. You now have two pointers to that house, and both are equally good at getting you to the house itself.
In the case of a function call. one of the copies is stored in a pointer variable out in the calling scope, and the
other is stored in a pointer variable that is the parameter of the function.
Example! Let’s revisit our old increment() function, but this time let’s make it so that it actually increments
the value out in the caller.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 void increment(int *p) // note that it accepts a pointer to an int

4 {
5 *p = *p + 1; // add one to the thing p points to
6 }
7

8 int main(void)
9 {
10 int i = 10;
11 int *j = &i; // note the address-of; turns it into a pointer to i
12

13 printf("i is %d\n", i); // prints "10"

14 printf("i is also %d\n", *j); // prints "10"
15

16 increment(j); // j is an int*--to i
17
 Chapter 5. Pointers—Cower In Fear! 34

18 printf("i is %d\n", i); // prints "11"!

19 }

Ok! There are a couple things to see here… not the least of which is that the increment() function takes
an int* as an argument. We pass it an int* in the call by changing the int variable i to an int* using the
address-of operator. (Remember, a pointer holds an address, so we make pointers to variables by running
them through the address-of operator.)
The increment() function gets a copy of the pointer. Both the original pointer j (in main()) and the copy
of that pointer p (the parameter in increment()) point to the same address, namely the one holding the value
i. (Again, by analogy, like two pieces of paper with the same home address written on them.) Dereferencing
either will allow you to modify the original variable i! The function can modify a variable in another scope!
Rock on!
The above example is often more concisely written in the call just by using address-of right in the argument
list:
printf("i is %d\n", i); // prints "10"
increment(&i);
printf("i is %d\n", i); // prints "11"!

Pointer enthusiasts will recall from early on in the guide, we used a function to read from the keyboard,
scanf()… and, although you might not have recognized it at the time, we used the address-of to pass
a pointer to a value to scanf(). We had to pass a pointer, see, because scanf() reads from the keyboard
(typically) and stores the result in a variable. The only way it can see that variable out in the calling function’s
scope is if we pass a pointer to that variable:
int i = 0;

scanf("%d", &i); // pretend you typed "12"

printf("i is %d\n", i); // prints "i is 12"

See, scanf() dereferences the pointer we pass it in order to modify the variable it points to. And now you
know why you have to put that pesky ampersand in there!

5.5 The NULL Pointer

Any pointer variable of any pointer type can be set to a special value called NULL. This indicates that this
pointer doesn’t point to anything.
int *p;

p = NULL;

Since it doesn’t point to a value, dereferencing it is undefined behavior, and probably will result in a crash:
int *p = NULL;

*p = 12; // CRASH or SOMETHING PROBABLY BAD. BEST AVOIDED.

Despite being called the billion dollar mistake by its creator6 , the NULL pointer is a good sentinel value7 and
general indicator that a pointer hasn’t yet been initialized.
(Of course, like other variables, the pointer points to garbage unless you explicitly assign it to point to an
address or NULL.)
6
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Null_pointer#History
7
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Sentinel_value
Chapter 5. Pointers—Cower In Fear! 35

5.6 A Note on Declaring Pointers

The syntax for declaring a pointer can get a little weird. Let’s look at this example:
int a;
int b;

We can condense that into a single line, right?

int a, b; // Same thing

So a and b are both ints. No problem.

But what about this?
int a;
int *p;

Can we make that into one line? We can. But where does the * go?
The rule is that the * goes in front of any variable that is a pointer type. That is. the * is not part of the int
in this example. it’s a part of variable p.
With that in mind, we can write this:
int a, *p; // Same thing

It’s important to note that the following line does not declare two pointers:
int *p, q; // p is a pointer to an int; q is just an int.

This can be particularly insidious-looking if the programmer writes this following (valid) line of code which
is functionally identical to the one above.
int* p, q; // p is a pointer to an int; q is just an int.

So take a look at this and determine which variables are pointers and which are not:
int *a, b, c, *d, e, *f, g, h, *i;

I’ll drop the answer in a footnote8 .

5.7 sizeof and Pointers

Just a little bit of syntax here that might be confusing and you might see from time to time.
Recall that sizeof operates on the type of the expression.
int *p;

sizeof(int); // Returns size of an `int`

sizeof p // p is type int*, so returns size of `int*`
sizeof *p // *p is type int, so returns size of `int`

You might see code with that last sizeof in there. Just remember that sizeof is all about the type of the
expression, not the variables in the expression themselves.

8
The pointer type variables are a, d, f, and i, because those are the ones with * in front of them.
 Chapter 6

Arrays

“Should array indices start at 0 or 1? My compromise of 0.5 was rejected without, I thought,
proper consideration.”
—Stan Kelly-Bootle, computer scientist
Luckily, C has arrays. I mean, I know it’s considered a low-level language1 but it does at least have the
concept of arrays built-in. And since a great many languages drew inspiration from C’s syntax, you’re
probably already familiar with using [ and ] for declaring and using arrays.
But C only barely has arrays! As we’ll find out later, arrays are just syntactic sugar in C—they’re actually
all pointers and stuff deep down. Freak out! But for now, let’s just use them as arrays. Phew.

6.1 Easy Example

Let’s just crank out an example:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int i;
6 float f[4]; // Declare an array of 4 floats
7

8 f[0] = 3.14159; // Indexing starts at 0, of course.

9 f[1] = 1.41421;
10 f[2] = 1.61803;
11 f[3] = 2.71828;
12

13 // Print them all out:

14

15 for (i = 0; i < 4; i++) {

16 printf("%f\n", f[i]);
17 }
18 }

When you declare an array, you have to give it a size. And the size has to be fixed2 .
1
These days, anyway.
2
Again, not really, but variable-length arrays—of which I’m not really a fan—are a story for another time.

36
Chapter 6. Arrays 37

In the above example, we made an array of 4 floats. The value in the square brackets in the declaration lets
us know that.
Later on in subsequent lines, we access the values in the array, setting them or getting them, again with square
brackets.
Hopefully this looks familiar from languages you already know!

6.2 Getting the Length of an Array

You can’t…ish. C doesn’t record this information3 . You have to manage it separately in another variable.
When I say “can’t”, I actually mean there are some circumstances when you can. There is a trick to get the
number of elements in an array in the scope in which an array is declared. But, generally speaking, this won’t
work the way you want if you pass the array to a function4 .
Let’s take a look at this trick. The basic idea is that you take the sizeof the array, and then divide that by
the size of each element to get the length. For example, if an int is 4 bytes, and the array is 32 bytes long,
there must be room for 32 4 or 8 ints in there.
int x[12]; // 12 ints

printf("%zu\n", sizeof x); // 48 total bytes

printf("%zu\n", sizeof(int)); // 4 bytes per int

printf("%zu\n", sizeof x / sizeof(int)); // 48/4 = 12 ints!

If it’s an array of chars, then sizeof the array is the number of elements, since sizeof(char) is defined
to be 1. For anything else, you have to divide by the size of each element.
But this trick only works in the scope in which the array was defined. If you pass the array to a function, it
doesn’t work. Even if you make it “big” in the function signature:
void foo(int x[12])
{
printf("%zu\n", sizeof x); // 8?! What happened to 48?
printf("%zu\n", sizeof(int)); // 4 bytes per int

printf("%zu\n", sizeof x / sizeof(int)); // 8/4 = 2 ints?? WRONG.

}

This is because when you “pass” arrays to functions, you’re only passing a pointer to the first element, and
that’s what sizeof measures. More on this in the Passing Single Dimensional Arrays to Functions section,
below.
One more thing you can do with sizeof and arrays is get the size of an array of a fixed number of elements
without declaring the array. This is like how you can get the size of an int with sizeof(int).
For example, to see how many bytes would be needed for an array of 48 doubles, you can do this:
sizeof(double [48]);

6.3 Array Initializers

You can initialize an array with constants ahead of time:
3
Since arrays are just pointers to the first element of the array under the hood, there’s no additional information recording the length.
4
Because when you pass an array to a function, you’re actually just passing a pointer to the first element of that array, not the “entire”
array.
 Chapter 6. Arrays 38

1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int i;
6 int a[5] = {22, 37, 3490, 18, 95}; // Initialize with these values
7

8 for (i = 0; i < 5; i++) {

9 printf("%d\n", a[i]);
10 }
11 }

Catch: initializer values must be constant terms. Can’t throw variables in there. Sorry, Illinois!
You should never have more items in your initializer than there is room for in the array, or the compiler will
get cranky:
foo.c: In function ‘main’:
foo.c:6:39: warning: excess elements in array initializer
6 | int a[5] = {22, 37, 3490, 18, 95, 999};
| ^~~
foo.c:6:39: note: (near initialization for ‘a’)

But (fun fact!) you can have fewer items in your initializer than there is room for in the array. The remaining
elements in the array will be automatically initialized with zero. This is true in general for all types of array
initializers: if you have an initializer, anything not explicitly set to a value will be set to zero.
int a[5] = {22, 37, 3490};

// is the same as:

int a[5] = {22, 37, 3490, 0, 0};

It’s a common shortcut to see this in an initializer when you want to set an entire array to zero:
int a[100] = {0};

Which means, “Make the first element zero, and then automatically make the rest zero, as well.”
You can set specific array elements in the initializer, as well, by specifying an index for the value! When
you do this, C will happily keep initializing subsequent values for you until the initializer runs out, filling
everything else with 0.
To do this, put the index in square brackets with an = after, and then set the value.
Here’s an example where we build an array:
int a[10] = {0, 11, 22, [5]=55, 66, 77};

Because we listed index 5 as the start for 55, the resulting data in the array is:
0 11 22 0 0 55 66 77 0 0

You can put simple constant expressions in there, as well.

#define COUNT 5

int a[COUNT] = {[COUNT-3]=3, 2, 1};

which gives us:

 Chapter 6. Arrays 39

0 0 3 2 1

Lastly, you can also have C compute the size of the array from the initializer, just by leaving the size off:
int a[3] = {22, 37, 3490};

// is the same as:

int a[] = {22, 37, 3490}; // Left the size off!

6.4 Out of Bounds!

C doesn’t stop you from accessing arrays out of bounds. It might not even warn you.
Let’s steal the example from above and keep printing off the end of the array. It only has 5 elements, but let’s
try to print 10 and see what happens:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int i;
6 int a[5] = {22, 37, 3490, 18, 95};
7

8 for (i = 0; i < 10; i++) { // BAD NEWS: printing too many elements!
9 printf("%d\n", a[i]);
10 }
11 }

Running it on my computer prints:

22
37
3490
18
95
32765
1847052032
1780534144
-56487472
21890

Yikes! What’s that? Well, turns out printing off the end of an array results in what C developers call undefined
behavior. We’ll talk more about this beast later, but for now it means, “You’ve done something bad, and
anything could happen during your program run.”
And by anything, I mean typically things like finding zeroes, finding garbage numbers, or crashing. But
really the C spec says in this circumstance the compiler is allowed to emit code that does anything5 .
Short version: don’t do anything that causes undefined behavior. Ever6 .
5
In the good old MS-DOS days before memory protection was a thing, I was writing some particularly abusive C code that deliber-
ately engaged in all kinds of undefined behavior. But I knew what I was doing, and things were working pretty well. Until I made a
misstep that caused a lockup and, as I found upon reboot, nuked all my BIOS settings. That was fun. (Shout-out to @man for those fun
times.)
6
There are a lot of things that cause undefined behavior, not just out-of-bounds array accesses. This is what makes the C language
so exciting.
 Chapter 6. Arrays 40

6.5 Multidimensional Arrays

You can add as many dimensions as you want to your arrays.
int a[10];
int b[2][7];
int c[4][5][6];

These are stored in memory in row-major order7 . This means with a 2D array, the first index listed indicates
the row, and the second the column.
You can also use initializers on multidimensional arrays by nesting them:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int row, col;
6

7 int a[2][5] = { // Initialize a 2D array

8 {0, 1, 2, 3, 4},
9 {5, 6, 7, 8, 9}
10 };
11

12 for (row = 0; row < 2; row++) {

13 for (col = 0; col < 5; col++) {
14 printf("(%d,%d) = %d\n", row, col, a[row][col]);
15 }
16 }
17 }

For output of:

(0,0) = 0
(0,1) = 1
(0,2) = 2
(0,3) = 3
(0,4) = 4
(1,0) = 5
(1,1) = 6
(1,2) = 7
(1,3) = 8
(1,4) = 9

And you can initialize with explicit indexes:

// Make a 3x3 identity matrix

int a[3][3] = {[0][0]=1, [1][1]=1, [2][2]=1};

which builds a 2D array like this:

1 0 0
0 1 0
0 0 1
7
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Row-_and_column-major_order
 Chapter 6. Arrays 41

6.6 Arrays and Pointers

[Casually] So… I kinda might have mentioned up there that arrays were pointers, deep down? We should
take a shallow dive into that now so that things aren’t completely confusing. Later on, we’ll look at what the
real relationship between arrays and pointers is, but for now I just want to look at passing arrays to functions.

6.6.1 Getting a Pointer to an Array

I want to tell you a secret. Generally speaking, when a C programmer talks about a pointer to an array, they’re
talking about a pointer to the first element of the array8 .
So let’s get a pointer to the first element of an array.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int a[5] = {11, 22, 33, 44, 55};
6 int *p;
7

8 p = &a[0]; // p points to the array

9 // Well, to the first element, actually
10

11 printf("%d\n", *p); // Prints "11"

12 }

This is so common to do in C that the language allows us a shorthand:

1 p = &a[0]; // p points to the array
2

3 // is the same as:

4

5 p = a; // p points to the array, but much nicer-looking!

Just referring to the array name in isolation is the same as getting a pointer to the first element of the array!
We’re going to use this extensively in the upcoming examples.
But hold on a second—isn’t p an int*? And *p gives us 11, same as a[0]? Yessss. You’re starting to get a
glimpse of how arrays and pointers are related in C.

6.6.2 Passing Single Dimensional Arrays to Functions

Let’s do an example with a single dimensional array. I’m going to write a couple functions that we can pass
the array to that do different things.
Prepare for some mind-blowing function signatures!
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 // Passing as a pointer to the first element

4 void times2(int *a, int len)
5 {
6 for (int i = 0; i < len; i++)
7 printf("%d\n", a[i] * 2);
8 }

8
This is technically incorrect, as a pointer to an array and a pointer to the first element of an array have different types. But we can
burn that bridge when we get to it.
 Chapter 6. Arrays 42

10 // Same thing, but using array notation

11 void times3(int a[], int len)
12 {
13 for (int i = 0; i < len; i++)
14 printf("%d\n", a[i] * 3);
15 }
16

17 // Same thing, but using array notation with size

18 void times4(int a[5], int len)
19 {
20 for (int i = 0; i < len; i++)
21 printf("%d\n", a[i] * 4);
22 }
23

24 int main(void)
25 {
26 int x[5] = {11, 22, 33, 44, 55};
27

28 times2(x, 5);
29 times3(x, 5);
30 times4(x, 5);
31 }

All those methods of listing the array as a parameter in the function are identical.
void times2(int *a, int len)
void times3(int a[], int len)
void times4(int a[5], int len)

In usage by C regulars, the first is the most common, by far.

And, in fact, in the latter situation, the compiler doesn’t even care what number you pass in (other than it has
to be greater than zero9 ). It doesn’t enforce anything at all.
Now that I’ve said that, the size of the array in the function declaration actually does matter when you’re
passing multidimensional arrays into functions, but let’s come back to that.

6.6.3 Changing Arrays in Functions

We’ve said that arrays are just pointers in disguise. This means that if you pass an array to a function, you’re
likely passing a pointer to the first element in the array.
But if the function has a pointer to the data, it is able to manipulate that data! So changes that a function
makes to an array will be visible back out in the caller.
Here’s an example where we pass a pointer to an array to a function, the function manipulates the values in
that array, and those changes are visible out in the caller.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 void double_array(int *a, int len)

4 {

9
C11 §6.7.6.2¶1 requires it be greater than zero. But you might see code out there with arrays declared of zero length at the end of
structs and GCC is particularly lenient about it unless you compile with -pedantic. This zero-length array was a hackish mechanism
for making variable-length structures. Unfortunately, it’s technically undefined behavior to access such an array even though it basically
worked everywhere. C99 codified a well-defined replacement for it called flexible array members, which we’ll chat about later.
 Chapter 6. Arrays 43

5 // Multiple each element by 2

6 //
7 // This doubles the values in x in main() since x and a both point
8 // to the same array in memory!
9

10 for (int i = 0; i < len; i++)

11 a[i] *= 2;
12 }
13

14 int main(void)
15 {
16 int x[5] = {1, 2, 3, 4, 5};
17

18 double_array(x, 5);
19

20 for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)

21 printf("%d\n", x[i]); // 2, 4, 6, 8, 10!
22 }

Even though we passed the array in as parameter a which is type int*, look at how we access it using array
notation with a[i]! Whaaaat. This is totally allowed.
Later when we talk about the equivalence between arrays and pointers, we’ll see how this makes a lot more
sense. For now, it’s enough to know that functions can make changes to arrays that are visible out in the
caller.

6.6.4 Passing Multidimensional Arrays to Functions

The story changes a little when we’re talking about multidimensional arrays. C needs to know all the di-
mensions (except the first one) so it has enough information to know where in memory to look to find a
value.
Here’s an example where we’re explicit with all the dimensions:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 void print_2D_array(int a[2][3])

4 {
5 for (int row = 0; row < 2; row++) {
6 for (int col = 0; col < 3; col++)
7 printf("%d ", a[row][col]);
8 printf("\n");
9 }
10 }
11

12 int main(void)
13 {
14 int x[2][3] = {
15 {1, 2, 3},
16 {4, 5, 6}
17 };
18

19 print_2D_array(x);
20 }
Chapter 6. Arrays 44

But in this case, these two10 are equivalent:

void print_2D_array(int a[2][3])
void print_2D_array(int a[][3])

The compiler really only needs the second dimension so it can figure out how far in memory to skip for each
increment of the first dimension. In general, it needs to know all the dimensions except the first one.
Also, remember that the compiler does minimal compile-time bounds checking (if you’re lucky), and C does
zero runtime checking of bounds. No seat belts! Don’t crash by accessing array elements out of bounds!

10
This is also equivalent: void print_2D_array(int (*a)[3]), but that’s more than I want to get into right now.
Chapter 7

Strings

Finally! Strings! What could be simpler?

Well, turns out strings aren’t actually strings in C. That’s right! They’re pointers! Of course they are!
Much like arrays, strings in C barely exist.
But let’s check it out—it’s not really such a big deal.

7.1 String Literals

Before we start, let’s talk about string literals in C. These are sequences of characters in double quotes (").
(Single quotes enclose characters, and are a different animal entirely.)
Examples:
"Hello, world!\n"
"This is a test."
"When asked if this string had quotes in it, she replied, \"It does.\""

The first one has a newline at the end—quite a common thing to see.
The last one has quotes embedded within it, but you see each is preceded by (we say “escaped by”) a backslash
(\) indicating that a literal quote belongs in the string at this point. This is how the C compiler can tell the
difference between printing a double quote and the double quote at the end of the string.

7.2 String Variables

Now that we know how to make a string literal, let’s assign it to a variable so we can do something with it.
char *s = "Hello, world!";

Check out that type: pointer to a char. The string variable s is actually a pointer to the first character in that
string, namely the H.
And we can print it with the %s (for “string”) format specifier:
char *s = "Hello, world!";

printf("%s\n", s); // "Hello, world!"

45
 Chapter 7. Strings 46

7.3 String Variables as Arrays

Another option is this, nearly equivalent to the above char* usage:
char s[14] = "Hello, world!";

// or, if we were properly lazy and have the compiler

// figure the length for us:

char s[] = "Hello, world!";

This means you can use array notation to access characters in a string. Let’s do exactly that to print all the
characters in a string on the same line:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 char s[] = "Hello, world!";
6

7 for (int i = 0; i < 13; i++)

8 printf("%c\n", s[i]);
9 }

Note that we’re using the format specifier %c to print a single character.
Also, check this out. The program will still work fine if we change the definition of s to be a char* type:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 char *s = "Hello, world!"; // char* here
6

7 for (int i = 0; i < 13; i++)

8 printf("%c\n", s[i]); // But still use arrays here...?
9 }

And we still can use array notation to get the job done when printing it out! This is surprising, but is still
only because we haven’t talked about array/pointer equivalence yet. But this is yet another hint that arrays
and pointers are the same thing, deep down.

7.4 String Initializers

We’ve already seen some examples with initializing string variables with string literals:
char *s = "Hello, world!";
char t[] = "Hello, again!";

But these two are subtly different.

This one is a pointer to a string literal (i.e. a pointer to the first character in a string):
char *s = "Hello, world!";

If you try to mutate that string with this:

 Chapter 7. Strings 47

char *s = "Hello, world!";

s[0] = 'z'; // BAD NEWS: tried to mutate a string literal!

The behavior is undefined. Probably, depending on your system, a crash will result.
But declaring it as an array is different. This one is a mutable copy of the string that we can change at will:
char t[] = "Hello, again!"; // t is an array copy of the string
t[0] = 'z'; // No problem

printf("%s\n", t); // "zello, again!"

So remember: if you have a pointer to a string literal, don’t try to change it! And if you use a string in double
quotes to initialize an array, that’s not actually a string literal.

7.5 Getting String Length

You can’t, since C doesn’t track it for you. And when I say “can’t”, I actually mean “can”1 . There’s a function
in <string.h> called strlen() that can be used to compute the length of any string in bytes2 .
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <string.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char *s = "Hello, world!";
7

8 printf("The string is %zu bytes long.\n", strlen(s));

9 }

The strlen() function returns type size_t, which is an integer type so you can use it for integer math. We
print size_t with %zu.
The above program prints:
The string is 13 bytes long.

Great! So it is possible to get the string length!

But… if C doesn’t track the length of the string anywhere, how does it know how long the string is?

7.6 String Termination

C does strings a little differently than many programming languages, and in fact differently than almost every
modern programming language.
When you’re making a new language, you have basically two options for storing a string in memory:
1. Store the bytes of the string along with a number indicating the length of the string.
2. Store the bytes of the string, and mark the end of the string with a special byte called the terminator.
If you want strings longer than 255 characters, option 1 requires at least two bytes to store the length. Whereas
option 2 only requires one byte to terminate the string. So a bit of savings there.
1
Though it is true that C doesn’t track the length of strings.
2
If you’re using the basic character set or an 8-bit character set, you’re used to one character being one byte. This isn’t true in all
character encodings, though.
 Chapter 7. Strings 48

Of course, these days it seems ridiculous to worry about saving a byte (or 3—lots of languages will happily
let you have strings that are 4 gigabytes in length). But back in the day, it was a bigger deal.
So C took approach #2. In C, a “string” is defined by two basic characteristics:
• A pointer to the first character in the string.
• A zero-valued byte (or NUL character3 ) somewhere in memory after the pointer that indicates the end
of the string.
A NUL character can be written in C code as \0, though you don’t often have to do this.
When you include a string in double quotes in your code, the NUL character is automatically, implicitly
included.
char *s = "Hello!"; // Actually "Hello!\0" behind the scenes

So with this in mind, let’s write our own strlen() function that counts chars in a string until it finds a NUL.
The procedure is to look down the string for a single NUL character, counting as we go4 :
int my_strlen(char *s)
{
int count = 0;

while (s[count] != '\0') // Single quotes for single char

count++;

return count;
}

And that’s basically how the built-in strlen() gets the job done.

7.7 Copying a String

You can’t copy a string through the assignment operator (=). All that does is make a copy of the pointer to
the first character… so you end up with two pointers to the same string:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 char s[] = "Hello, world!";
6 char *t;
7

8 // This makes a copy of the pointer, not a copy of the string!

9 t = s;
10

11 // We modify t
12 t[0] = 'z';
13

14 // But printing s shows the modification!

15 // Because t and s point to the same string!
16

17 printf("%s\n", s); // "zello, world!"

18 }

3
This is different than the NULL pointer, and I’ll abbreviate it NUL when talking about the character versus NULL for the pointer.
4
Later we’ll learn a neater way to do it with pointer arithmetic.
 Chapter 7. Strings 49

If you want to make a copy of a string, you have to copy it a byte at a time—but this is made easier with the
strcpy() function5 .

Before you copy the string, make sure you have room to copy it into, i.e. the destination array that’s going
to hold the characters needs to be at least as long as the string you’re copying.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <string.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char s[] = "Hello, world!";
7 char t[100]; // Each char is one byte, so plenty of room
8

9 // This makes a copy of the string!

10 strcpy(t, s);
11

12 // We modify t
13 t[0] = 'z';
14

15 // And s remains unaffected because it's a different string

16 printf("%s\n", s); // "Hello, world!"
17

18 // But t has been changed

19 printf("%s\n", t); // "zello, world!"
20 }

Notice with strcpy(), the destination pointer is the first argument, and the source pointer is the second. A
mnemonic I use to remember this is that it’s the order you would have put t and s if an assignment = worked
for strings, with the source on the right and the destination on the left.

5
There’s a safer function called strncpy() that you should probably use instead, but we’ll get to that later.
Chapter 8

Structs

In C, we have something called a struct, which is a user-definable type that holds multiple pieces of data,
potentially of different types.
It’s a convenient way to bundle multiple variables into a single one. This can be beneficial for passing
variables to functions (so you just have to pass one instead of many), and useful for organizing data and
making code more readable.
If you’ve come from another language, you might be familiar with the idea of classes and objects. These
don’t exist in C, natively1 . You can think of a struct as a class with only data members, and no methods.

8.1 Declaring a Struct

You can declare a struct in your code like so:
struct car {
char *name;
float price;
int speed;
};

This is often done at the global scope outside any functions so that the struct is globally available.
When you do this, you’re making a new type. The full type name is struct car. (Not just car—that won’t
work.)
There aren’t any variables of that type yet, but we can declare some:
struct car saturn; // Variable "saturn" of type "struct car"

And now we have an uninitialized variable saturn2 of type struct car.

We should initialize it! But how do we set the values of those individual fields?
Like in many other languages that stole it from C, we’re going to use the dot operator (.) to access the
individual fields.
saturn.name = "Saturn SL/2";
saturn.price = 15999.99;

1
Although in C individual items in memory like ints are referred to as “objects”, they’re not objects in an object-oriented program-
ming sense.
2
The Saturn was a popular brand of economy car in the United States until it was put out of business by the 2008 crash, sadly so to
us fans.

50
Chapter 8. Structs 51

saturn.speed = 175;

printf("Name: %s\n", saturn.name);

printf("Price (USD): %f\n", saturn.price);
printf("Top Speed (km): %d\n", saturn.speed);

There on the first lines, we set the values in the struct car, and then in the next bit, we print those values
out.

8.2 Struct Initializers

That example in the previous section was a little unwieldy. There must be a better way to initialize that
struct variable!

You can do it with an initializer by putting values in for the fields in the order they appear in the struct
when you define the variable. (This won’t work after the variable has been defined—it has to happen in the
definition).
struct car {
char *name;
float price;
int speed;
};

// Now with an initializer! Same field order as in the struct declaration:

struct car saturn = {"Saturn SL/2", 16000.99, 175};

printf("Name: %s\n", saturn.name);

printf("Price: %f\n", saturn.price);
printf("Top Speed: %d km\n", saturn.speed);

The fact that the fields in the initializer need to be in the same order is a little freaky. If someone changes the
order in struct car, it could break all the other code!
We can be more specific with our initializers:
struct car saturn = {.speed=175, .name="Saturn SL/2"};

Now it’s independent of the order in the struct declaration. Which is safer code, for sure.
Similar to array initializers, any missing field designators are initialized to zero (in this case, that would be
.price, which I’ve omitted).

8.3 Passing Structs to Functions

You can do a couple things to pass a struct to a function.
1. Pass the struct.
2. Pass a pointer to the struct.
Recall that when you pass something to a function, a copy of that thing gets made for the function to operate
on, whether it’s a copy of a pointer, an int, a struct, or anything.
There are basically two cases when you’d want to pass a pointer to the struct:
1. You need the function to be able to make changes to the struct that was passed in, and have those
changes show in the caller.
 Chapter 8. Structs 52

2. The struct is somewhat large and it’s more expensive to copy that onto the stack than it is to just
copy a pointer3 .
For those two reasons, it’s far more common to pass a pointer to a struct to a function, though its by no
means illegal to pass the struct itself.
Let’s try passing in a pointer, making a function that will allow you to set the .price field of the struct
car:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 struct car {
4 char *name;
5 float price;
6 int speed;
7 };
8

9 int main(void)
10 {
11 struct car saturn = {.speed=175, .name="Saturn SL/2"};
12

13 // Pass a pointer to this struct car, along with a new,

14 // more realistic, price:
15 set_price(&saturn, 799.99);
16

17 printf("Price: %f\n", saturn.price);

18 }

You should be able to come up with the function signature for set_price() just by looking at the types of
the arguments we have there.
saturn is a struct car, so &saturn must be the address of the struct car, AKA a pointer to a struct
car, namely a struct car*.

And 799.99 is a float.

So the function declaration must look like this:
void set_price(struct car *c, float new_price)

We just need to write the body. One attempt might be:

void set_price(struct car *c, float new_price) {
c.price = new_price; // ERROR!!
}

That won’t work because the dot operator only works on structs… it doesn’t work on pointers to structs.
Ok, so we can dereference the struct to de-pointer it to get to the struct itself. Dereferencing a struct
car* results in the struct car that the pointer points to, which we should be able to use the dot operator
on:
void set_price(struct car *c, float new_price) {
(*c).price = new_price; // Works, but is ugly and non-idiomatic :(
}

And that works! But it’s a little clunky to type all those parens and the asterisk. C has some syntactic sugar
called the arrow operator that helps with that.
3
A pointer is likely 8 bytes on a 64-bit system.
Chapter 8. Structs 53

8.4 The Arrow Operator

The arrow operator helps refer to fields in pointers to structs.
void set_price(struct car *c, float new_price) {
// (*c).price = new_price; // Works, but non-idiomatic :(
//
// The line above is 100% equivalent to the one below:

c->price = new_price; // That's the one!

}

So when accessing fields, when do we use dot and when do we use arrow?
• If you have a struct, use dot (.).
• If you have a pointer to a struct, use arrow (->).

8.5 Copying and Returning structs

Here’s an easy one for you!
Just assign from one to the other!
struct car a, b;

b = a; // Copy the struct

And returning a struct (as opposed to a pointer to one) from a function also makes a similar copy to the
receiving variable.
This is not a “deep copy”4 . All fields are copied as-is, including pointers to things.

8.6 Comparing structs

There’s only one safe way to do it: compare each field one at a time.
You might think you could use memcmp(), but that doesn’t handle the case of the possible padding bytes that
might be in there.
If you clear the struct to zero first with memset(), then it might work, though there could be weird elements
that might not compare as you expect5 .

4
A deep copy follows pointer in the struct and copies the data they point to, as well. A shallow copy just copies the pointers, but
not the things they point to. C doesn’t come with any built-in deep copy functionality.
5
https://stackoverflow.com/questions/141720/how-do-you-compare-structs-for-equality-in-c
Chapter 9

File Input/Output

We’ve already seen a couple examples of I/O with scanf() and printf() for doing I/O at the console
(screen/keyboard).
But we’ll push those concepts a little farther this chapter.

9.1 The FILE* Data Type

When we do any kind of I/O in C, we do so through a piece of data that you get in the form of a FILE* type.
This FILE* holds all the information needed to communicate with the I/O subsystem about which file you
have open, where you are in the file, and so on.
The spec refers to these as streams, i.e. a stream of data from a file or from any source. I’m going to use
“files” and “streams” interchangeably, but really you should think of a “file” as a special case of a “stream”.
There are other ways to stream data into a program than just reading from a file.
We’ll see in a moment how to go from having a filename to getting an open FILE* for it, but first I want to
mention three streams that are already open for you and ready for use.
|FILE* name|Description| |-|-| |stdin|Standard Input, generally the keyboard by default| |stdout|Standard
Output, generally the screen by default| |stderr|Standard Error, generally the screen by default, as well|
We’ve actually been using these implicitly already, it turns out. For example, these two calls are the same:
printf("Hello, world!\n");
fprintf(stdout, "Hello, world!\n"); // printf to a file

But more on that later.

Also you’ll notice that both stdout and stderr go to the screen. While this seems at first either like an
oversight or redundancy, it actually isn’t. Typical operating systems allow you to redirect the output of either
of those into different files, and it can be convenient to be able to separate error messages from regular
non-error output.
For example, in a POSIX shell (like sh, ksh, bash, zsh, etc.) on a Unix-like system, we could run a program
and send just the non-error (stdout) output to one file, and all the error (stderr) output to another file.
./foo > output.txt 2> errors.txt # This command is Unix-specific

For this reason, you should send serious error messages to stderr instead of stdout.
More on how to do that later.

54
 Chapter 9. File Input/Output 55

9.2 Reading Text Files

Streams are largely categorized two different ways: text and binary.
Text streams are allowed to do significant translation of the data, most notably translations of newlines to
their different representations1 . Text files are logically a sequence of lines separated by newlines. To be
portable, your input data should always end with a newline.
But the general rule is that if you’re able to edit the file in a regular text editor, it’s a text file. Otherwise, it’s
binary. More on binary later.
So let’s get to work—how do we open a file for reading, and pull data out of it?
Let’s create a file called hello.txt that has just this in it:
Hello, world!

And let’s write a program to open the file, read a character out of it, and then close the file when we’re done.
That’s the game plan!
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 FILE *fp; // Variable to represent open file
6

7 fp = fopen("hello.txt", "r"); // Open file for reading

8

9 int c = fgetc(fp); // Read a single character

10 printf("%c\n", c); // Print char to stdout
11

12 fclose(fp); // Close the file when done

13 }

See how when we opened the file with fopen(), it returned the FILE* to us so we could use it later.
(I’m leaving it out for brevity, but fopen() will return NULL if something goes wrong, like file-not-found,
so you should really error check it!)
Also notice the "r" that we passed in—this means “open a text stream for reading”. (There are various
strings we can pass to fopen() with additional meaning, like writing, or appending, and so on.)
After that, we used the fgetc() function to get a character from the stream. You might be wondering why
I’ve made c an int instead of a char—hold that thought!
Finally, we close the stream when we’re done with it. All streams are automatically closed when the program
exits, but it’s good form and good housekeeping to explicitly close any files yourself when done with them.
The FILE* keeps track of our position in the file. So subsequent calls to fgetc() would get the next character
in the file, and then the next, until the end.
But that sounds like a pain. Let’s see if we can make it easier.

9.3 End of File: EOF

There is a special character defined as a macro: EOF. This is what fgetc() will return when the end of the
file has been reached and you’ve attempted to read another character.
1
We used to have three different newlines in broad effect: Carriage Return (CR, used on old Macs), Linefeed (LF, used on Unix
systems), and Carriage Return/Linefeed (CRLF, used on Windows systems). Thankfully the introduction of OS X, being Unix-based,
reduced this number to two.
 Chapter 9. File Input/Output 56

How about I share that Fun Fact™, now. Turns out EOF is the reason why fgetc() and functions like it
return an int instead of a char. EOF isn’t a character proper, and its value likely falls outside the range of
char. Since fgetc() needs to be able to return any byte and EOF, it needs to be a wider type that can hold
more values. so int it is. But unless you’re comparing the returned value against EOF, you can know, deep
down, it’s a char.
All right! Back to reality! We can use this to read the whole file in a loop.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 FILE *fp;
6 int c;
7

8 fp = fopen("hello.txt", "r");
9

10 while ((c = fgetc(fp)) != EOF)

11 printf("%c", c);
12

13 fclose(fp);
14 }

(If line 10 is too weird, just break it down starting with the innermost-nested parens. The first thing we do
is assign the result of fgetc() into c, and then we compare that against EOF. We’ve just crammed it into a
single line. This might look hard to read, but study it—it’s idiomatic C.)
And running this, we see:
Hello, world!

But still, we’re operating a character at a time, and lots of text files make more sense at the line level. Let’s
switch to that.

9.3.1 Reading a Line at a Time

So how can we get an entire line at once? fgets() to the rescue! For arguments, it takes a pointer to a
char buffer to hold bytes, a maximum number of bytes to read, and a FILE* to read from. It returns NULL
on end-of-file or error. fgets() is even nice enough to NUL-terminate the string when its done2 .
Let’s do a similar loop as before, except let’s have a multiline file and read it in a line at a time.
Here’s a file quote.txt:
A wise man can learn more from
a foolish question than a fool
can learn from a wise answer.
--Bruce Lee

And here’s some code that reads that file a line at a time and prints out a line number before each one:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 FILE *fp;
6 char s[1024]; // Big enough for any line this program will encounter

2
If the buffer’s not big enough to read in an entire line, it’ll just stop reading mid-line, and the next call to fgets() will continue
reading the rest of the line.
 Chapter 9. File Input/Output 57

7 int linecount = 0;
8

9 fp = fopen("quote.txt", "r");
10

11 while (fgets(s, sizeof s, fp) != NULL)

12 printf("%d: %s", ++linecount, s);
13

14 fclose(fp);
15 }

Which gives the output:

1: A wise man can learn more from
2: a foolish question than a fool
3: can learn from a wise answer.
4: --Bruce Lee

9.4 Formatted Input

You know how you can get formatted output with printf() (and, thus, fprintf() like we’ll see, below)?
You can do the same thing with fscanf().
Let’s have a file with a series of data records in it. In this case, whales, with name, length in meters, and
weight in tonnes. whales.txt:
blue 29.9 173
right 20.7 135
gray 14.9 41
humpback 16.0 30

Yes, we could read these with fgets() and then parse the string with sscanf() (and in some ways that’s
more resilient against corrupted files), but in this case, let’s just use fscanf() and pull it in directly.
The fscanf() function skips leading whitespace when reading, and returns EOF on end-of-file or error.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 FILE *fp;
6 char name[1024]; // Big enough for any line this program will encounter
7 float length;
8 int mass;
9

10 fp = fopen("whales.txt", "r");
11

12 while (fscanf(fp, "%s %f %d", name, &length, &mass) != EOF)

13 printf("%s whale, %d tonnes, %.1f meters\n", name, mass, length);
14

15 fclose(fp);
16 }

Which gives the result:

blue whale, 173 tonnes, 29.9 meters
right whale, 135 tonnes, 20.7 meters
 Chapter 9. File Input/Output 58

gray whale, 41 tonnes, 14.9 meters

humpback whale, 30 tonnes, 16.0 meters

9.5 Writing Text Files

In much the same way we can use fgetc(), fgets(), and fscanf() to read text streams, we can use
fputc(), fputs(), and fprintf() to write text streams.

To do so, we have to fopen() the file in write mode by passing "w" as the second argument. Opening an
existing file in "w" mode will instantly truncate that file to 0 bytes for a full overwrite.
We’ll put together a simple program that outputs a file output.txt using a variety of output functions.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 FILE *fp;
6 int x = 32;
7

8 fp = fopen("output.txt", "w");
9

10 fputc('B', fp);
11 fputc('\n', fp); // newline
12 fprintf(fp, "x = %d\n", x);
13 fputs("Hello, world!\n", fp);
14

15 fclose(fp);
16 }

And this produces a file, output.txt, with these contents:

B
x = 32
Hello, world!

Fun fact: since stdout is a file, you could replace line 8 with:
fp = stdout;

and the program would have outputted to the console instead of to a file. Try it!

9.6 Binary File I/O

So far we’ve just been talking text files. But there’s that other beast we mentioned early on called binary
files, or binary streams.
These work very similarly to text files, except the I/O subsystem doesn’t perform any translations on the data
like it might with a text file. With binary files, you get a raw stream of bytes, and that’s all.
The big difference in opening the file is that you have to add a "b" to the mode. That is, to read a binary file,
open it in "rb" mode. To write a file, open it in "wb" mode.
Because it’s streams of bytes, and streams of bytes can contain NUL characters, and the NUL character is
the end-of-string marker in C, it’s rare that people use the fprintf()-and-friends functions to operate on
binary files.
 Chapter 9. File Input/Output 59

Instead the most common functions are fread() and fwrite(). The functions read and write a specified
number of bytes to the stream.
To demo, we’ll write a couple programs. One will write a sequence of byte values to disk all at once. And
the second program will read a byte at a time and print them out3 .
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 FILE *fp;
6 unsigned char bytes[6] = {5, 37, 0, 88, 255, 12};
7

8 fp = fopen("output.bin", "wb"); // wb mode for "write binary"!

9

10 // In the call to fwrite, the arguments are:

11 //
12 // * Pointer to data to write
13 // * Size of each "piece" of data
14 // * Count of each "piece" of data
15 // * FILE*
16

17 fwrite(bytes, sizeof(char), 6, fp);

18

19 fclose(fp);
20 }

Those two middle arguments to fwrite() are pretty odd. But basically what we want to tell the function is,
“We have items that are this big, and we want to write that many of them.” This makes it convenient if you
have a record of a fixed length, and you have a bunch of them in an array. You can just tell it the size of one
record and how many to write.
In the example above, we tell it each record is the size of a char, and we have 6 of them.
Running the program gives us a file output.bin, but opening it in a text editor doesn’t show anything
friendly! It’s binary data—not text. And random binary data I just made up, at that!
If I run it through a hex dump4 program, we can see the output as bytes:
05 25 00 58 ff 0c

And those values in hex do match up to the values (in decimal) that we wrote out.
But now let’s try to read them back in with a different program. This one will open the file for binary reading
("rb" mode) and will read the bytes one at a time in a loop.
fread() has the neat feature where it returns the number of bytes read, or 0 on EOF. So we can loop until
we see that, printing numbers as we go.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 FILE *fp;
6 unsigned char c;
7

3
Normally the second program would read all the bytes at once, and then print them out in a loop. That would be more efficient.
But we’re going for demo value, here.
4
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Hex_dump
 Chapter 9. File Input/Output 60

8 fp = fopen("output.bin", "rb"); // rb for "read binary"!

9

10 while (fread(&c, sizeof(char), 1, fp) > 0)

11 printf("%d\n", c);
12 }

And, running it, we see our original numbers!

5
37
0
88
255
12

Woo hoo!

9.6.1 struct and Number Caveats

As we saw in the structs section, the compiler is free to add padding to a struct as it sees fit. And different
compilers might do this differently. And the same compiler on different architectures could do it differently.
And the same compiler on the same architectures could do it differently.
What I’m getting at is this: it’s not portable to just fwrite() an entire struct out to a file when you don’t
know where the padding will end up.
How do we fix this? Hold that thought—we’ll look at some ways to do this after looking at another related
problem.
Numbers!
Turns out all architectures don’t represent numbers in memory the same way.
Let’s look at a simple fwrite() of a 2-byte number. We’ll write it in hex so each byte is clear. The most
significant byte will have the value 0x12 and the least significant will have the value 0x34.
unsigned short v = 0x1234; // Two bytes, 0x12 and 0x34

fwrite(&v, sizeof v, 1, fp);

What ends up in the stream?

Well, it seems like it should be 0x12 followed by 0x34, right?
But if I run this on my machine and hex dump the result, I get:
34 12

They’re reversed! What gives?

This has something to do with what’s called the endianess5 of the architecture. Some write the most signifi-
cant bytes first, and some the least significant bytes first.
This means that if you write a multibyte number out straight from memory, you can’t do it in a portable way6 .
A similar problem exists with floating point. Most systems use the same format for their floating point
numbers, but some do not. No guarantees!
So… how can we fix all these problems with numbers and structs to get our data written in a portable way?
5
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Endianess
6
And this is why I used individual bytes in my fwrite() and fread() examples, above, shrewdly.
Chapter 9. File Input/Output 61

The summary is to serialize the data, which is a general term that means to take all the data and write it out
in a format that you control, that is well-known, and programmable to work the same way on all platforms.
As you might imagine, this is a solved problem. There are a bunch of serialization libraries you can take
advantage of, such as Google’s protocol buffers7 , out there and ready to use. They will take care of all the
gritty details for you, and even will allow data from your C programs to interoperate with other languages
that support the same serialization methods.
Do yourself and everyone a favor! Serialize your binary data when you write it to a stream! This will keep
things nice and portable, even if you transfer data files from one architecture to another.

7
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Protocol_buffers
Chapter 10

typedef: Making New Types

Well, not so much making new types as getting new names for existing types. Sounds kinda pointless on the
surface, but we can really use this to make our code cleaner.

10.1 typedef in Theory

Basically, you take an existing type and you make an alias for it with typedef.
Like this:
typedef int antelope; // Make "antelope" an alias for "int"

antelope x = 10; // Type "antelope" is the same as type "int"

You can take any existing type and do it. You can even make a number of types with a comma list:
typedef int antelope, bagel, mushroom; // These are all "int"

That’s really useful, right? That you can type mushroom instead of int? You must be super excited about
this feature!
OK, Professor Sarcasm—we’ll get to some more common applications of this in a moment.

10.1.1 Scoping
typedef follows regular scoping rules.

For this reason, it’s quite common to find typedef at file scope (“global”) so that all functions can use the
new types at will.

10.2 typedef in Practice

So renaming int to something else isn’t that exciting. Let’s see where typedef commonly makes an ap-
pearance.

10.2.1 typedef and structs

Sometimes a struct will be typedef’d to a new name so you don’t have to type the word struct over and
over.

62
Chapter 10. typedef: Making New Types 63

struct animal {
char *name;
int leg_count, speed;
};

// original name new name

// | |
// v v
// |-----------| |----|
typedef struct animal animal;

struct animal y; // This works

animal z; // This also works because "animal" is an alias

Personally, I don’t care for this practice. I like the clarity the code has when you add the word struct to the
type; programmers know what they’re getting. But it’s really common so I’m including it here.
Now I want to run the exact same example in a way that you might commonly see. We’re going to put the
struct animal in the typedef. You can mash it all together like this:
// original name
// |
// v
// |-----------|
typedef struct animal {
char *name;
int leg_count, speed;
} animal; // <-- new name

struct animal y; // This works

animal z; // This also works because "animal" is an alias

That’s exactly the same as the previous example, just more concise.
But that’s not all! There’s another common shortcut that you might see in code using what are called anony-
mous structures1 . It turns out you don’t actually need to name the structure in a variety of places, and with
typedef is one of them.

Let’s do the same example with an anonymous structure:

// Anonymous struct! It has no name!
// |
// v
// |----|
typedef struct {
char *name;
int leg_count, speed;
} animal; // <-- new name

//struct animal y; // ERROR: this no longer works--no such struct!

animal z; // This works because "animal" is an alias

As another example, we might find something like this:

typedef struct {
int x, y;

1
We’ll talk more about these later.
Chapter 10. typedef: Making New Types 64

} point;

point p = {.x=20, .y=40};

printf("%d, %d\n", p.x, p.y); // 20, 40

10.2.2 typedef and Other Types

It’s not that using typedef with a simple type like int is completely useless… it helps you abstract the types
to make it easier to change them later.
For example, if you have float all over your code in 100 zillion places, it’s going to be painful to change
them all to double if you find you have to do that later for some reason.
But if you prepared a little with:
typedef float app_float;

// and

app_float f1, f2, f3;

Then if later you want to change to another type, like long double, you just need to change the typedef:
// voila!
// |---------|
typedef long double app_float;

// and no need to change this line:

app_float f1, f2, f3; // Now these are all long doubles

10.2.3 typedef and Pointers

You can make a type that is a pointer.
typedef int *intptr;

int a = 10;
intptr x = &a; // "intptr" is type "int*"

I really don’t like this practice. It hides the fact that x is a pointer type because you don’t see a * in the
declaration.
IMHO, it’s better to explicitly show that you’re declaring a pointer type so that other devs can clearly see it
and don’t mistake x for having a non-pointer type.
But at last count, say, 832,007 people had a different opinion.

10.2.4 typedef and Capitalization

I’ve seen all kinds of capitalization on typedef.
typedef struct {
int x, y;
} my_point; // lower snake case

typedef struct {
Chapter 10. typedef: Making New Types 65

int x, y;
} MyPoint; // CamelCase

typedef struct {
int x, y;
} Mypoint; // Leading uppercase

typedef struct {
int x, y;
} MY_POINT; // UPPER SNAKE CASE

The C11 specification doesn’t dictate one way or another, and shows examples in all uppercase and all low-
ercase.
K&R2 uses leading uppercase predominantly, but show some examples in uppercase and snake case (with
_t).

If you have a style guide in use, stick with it. If you don’t, grab one and stick with it.

10.3 Arrays and typedef

The syntax is a little weird, and this is rarely seen in my experience, but you can typedef an array of some
number of items.
// Make type five_ints an array of 5 ints
typedef int five_ints[5];

five_ints x = {11, 22, 33, 44, 55};

I don’t like it because it hides the array nature of the variable, but it’s possible to do.
Chapter 11

Pointers II: Arithmetic

Time to get more into it with a number of new pointer topics! If you’re not up to speed with pointers, check
out the first section in the guide on the matter.

11.1 Pointer Arithmetic

Turns out you can do math on pointers, notably addition and subtraction.
But what does it mean when you do that?
In short, if you have a pointer to a type, adding one to the pointer moves to the next item of that type directly
after it in memory.
It’s important to remember that as we move pointers around and look at different places in memory, we
need to make sure that we’re always pointing to a valid place in memory before we dereference. If we’re off
in the weeds and we try to see what’s there, the behavior is undefined and a crash is a common result.
This is a little chicken-and-eggy with Array/Pointer Equivalence, below, but we’re going to give it a shot,
anyway.

11.1.1 Adding to Pointers

First, let’s take an array of numbers.
int a[5] = {11, 22, 33, 44, 55};

Then let’s get a pointer to the first element in that array:

int a[5] = {11, 22, 33, 44, 55};

int *p = &a[0]; // Or "int *p = a;" works just as well

Then let’s print the value there by dereferencing the pointer:

printf("%d\n", *p); // Prints 11

Now let’s use pointer arithmetic to print the next element in the array, the one at index 1:
printf("%d\n", *(p + 1)); // Prints 22!!

What happened there? C knows that p is a pointer to an int. So it knows the sizeof an int1 and it knows
to skip that many bytes to get to the next int after the first one!
1
Recall that the sizeof operator tells you the size in bytes of an object in memory.

66
Chapter 11. Pointers II: Arithmetic 67

In fact, the prior example could be written these two equivalent ways:
printf("%d\n", *p); // Prints 11
printf("%d\n", *(p + 0)); // Prints 11

because adding 0 to a pointer results in the same pointer.

Let’s think of the upshot here. We can iterate over elements of an array this way instead of using an array:
int a[5] = {11, 22, 33, 44, 55};

int *p = &a[0]; // Or "int *p = a;" works just as well

for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++) {

printf("%d\n", *(p + i)); // Same as p[i]!
}

And that works the same as if we used array notation! Oooo! Getting closer to that array/pointer equivalence
thing! More on this later in this chapter.
But what’s actually happening, here? How does it work?
Remember from early on that memory is like a big array, where a byte is stored at each array index?
And the array index into memory has a few names:
• Index into memory
• Location
• Address
• Pointer!
So a point is an index into memory, somewhere.
For a random example, say that a number 3490 was stored at address (“index”) 23,237,489,202. If we have
an int pointer to that 3490, that value of that pointer is 23,237,489,202… because the pointer is the memory
address. Different words for the same thing.
And now let’s say we have another number, 4096, stored right after the 3490 at address 23,237,489,210 (8
higher than the 3490 because each int in this example is 8 bytes long).
If we add 1 to that pointer, it actually jumps ahead sizeof(int) bytes to the next int. It knows to jump
that far ahead because it’s an int pointer. If it were a float pointer, it’d jump sizeof(float) bytes ahead
to get to the next float!
So you can look at the next int, by adding 1 to the pointer, the one after that by adding 2 to the pointer, and
so on.

11.1.2 Changing Pointers

We saw how we could add an integer to a pointer in the previous section. This time, let’s modify the pointer,
itself.
You can just add (or subtract) integer values directly to (or from) any pointer!
Let’s do that example again, except with a couple changes. First, I’m going to add a 999 to the end of our
numbers to act as a sentinel value. This will let us know where the end of the data is.
int a[] = {11, 22, 33, 44, 55, 999}; // Add 999 here as a sentinel

int *p = &a[0]; // p points to the 11

And we also have p pointing to the element at index 0 of a, namely 11, just like before.
 Chapter 11. Pointers II: Arithmetic 68

Now—let’s start incrementing p so that it points at subsequent elements of the array. We’ll do this until p
points to the 999; that is, we’ll do it until *p == 999:
while (*p != 999) { // While the thing p points to isn't 999
printf("%d\n", *p); // Print it
p++; // Move p to point to the next int!
}

Pretty crazy, right?

When we give it a run, first p points to 11. Then we increment p, and it points to 22, and then again, it points
to 33. And so on, until it points to 999 and we quit.

11.1.3 Subtracting Pointers

You can subtract a value from a pointer to get to earlier address, as well, just like we were adding to them
before.
But we can also subtract two pointers to find the difference between them, e.g. we can calculate how many
ints there are between two int*s. The catch is that this only works within a single array2 —if the pointers
point to anything else, you get undefined behavior.
Remember how strings are char*s in C? Let’s see if we can use this to write another variant of strlen()
to compute the length of a string that utilizes pointer subtraction.
The idea is that if we have a pointer to the beginning of the string, we can find a pointer to the end of the
string by scanning ahead for the NUL character.
And if we have a pointer to the beginning of the string, and we computed the pointer to the end of the string,
we can just subtract the two pointers to come up with the length!
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int my_strlen(char *s)

4 {
5 // Start scanning from the beginning of the string
6 char *p = s;
7

8 // Scan until we find the NUL character

9 while (*p != '\0')
10 p++;
11

12 // Return the difference in pointers

13 return p - s;
14 }
15

16 int main(void)
17 {
18 printf("%d\n", my_strlen("Hello, world!")); // Prints "13"
19 }

Remember that you can only use pointer subtraction between two pointers that point to the same array!
2
Or string, which is really an array of chars. Somewhat peculiarly, you can also have a pointer that references one past the end of
the array without a problem and still do math on it. You just can’t dereference it when it’s out there.
 Chapter 11. Pointers II: Arithmetic 69

11.2 Array/Pointer Equivalence

We’re finally ready to talk about this! We’ve seen plenty of examples of places where we’ve intermixed array
notation, but let’s give out the fundamental formula of array/pointer equivalence:
a[b] == *(a + b)

Study that! Those are equivalent and can be used interchangeably!

I’ve oversimplified a bit, because in my above example a and b can both be expressions, and we might want
a few more parentheses to force order of operations in case the expressions are complex.
The spec is specific, as always, declaring (in C11 §6.5.2.1¶2):
E1[E2] is identical to (*((E1)+(E2)))

but that’s a little harder to grok. Just make sure you include parentheses if the expressions are complicated
so all your math happens in the right order.
This means we can decide if we’re going to use array or pointer notation for any array or pointer (assuming
it points to an element of an array).
Let’s use an array and pointer with both array and pointer notation:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int a[] = {11, 22, 33, 44, 55};
6

7 int *p = a; // p points to the first element of a, 11

8

9 // Print all elements of the array a variety of ways:

10

11 for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)

12 printf("%d\n", a[i]); // Array notation with a
13

14 for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)

15 printf("%d\n", p[i]); // Array notation with p
16

17 for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)

18 printf("%d\n", *(a + i)); // Pointer notation with a
19

20 for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)

21 printf("%d\n", *(p + i)); // Pointer notation with p
22

23 for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)

24 printf("%d\n", *(p++)); // Moving pointer p
25 //printf("%d\n", *(a++)); // Moving array variable a--ERROR!
26 }

So you can see that in general, if you have an array variable, you can use pointer or array notion to access
elements. Same with a pointer variable.
The one big difference is that you can modify a pointer to point to a different address, but you can’t do that
with an array variable.
 Chapter 11. Pointers II: Arithmetic 70

11.2.1 Array/Pointer Equivalence in Function Calls

This is where you’ll encounter this concept the most, for sure.
If you have a function that takes a pointer argument, e.g.:
int my_strlen(char *s)

this means you can pass either an array or a pointer to this function and have it work!
char s[] = "Antelopes";
char *t = "Wombats";

printf("%d\n", my_strlen(s)); // Works!

printf("%d\n", my_strlen(t)); // Works, too!

And it’s also why these two function signatures are equivalent:
int my_strlen(char *s) // Works!
int my_strlen(char s[]) // Works, too!

11.3 void Pointers

You’ve already seen the void keyword used with functions, but this is an entirely separate, unrelated animal.
Sometimes it’s useful to have a pointer to a thing that you don’t know the type of.
I know. Bear with me just a second.
There are basically two use cases for this.
1. A function is going to operate on something byte-by-byte. For example, memcpy() copies bytes of memory
from one pointer to another, but those pointers can point to any type. memcpy() takes advantage of the fact
that if you iterate through char*s, you’re iterating through the bytes of an object no matter what type the
object is. More on this in the Multibyte Values subsection.
2. Another function is calling a function you passed to it (a callback), and it’s passing you data. You know
the type of the data, but the function calling you doesn’t. So it passes you void*s—’cause it doesn’t
know the type—and you convert those to the type you need. The built-in qsort() and bsearch()
use this technique.
Let’s look at an example, the built-in memcpy() function:
void *memcpy(void *s1, void *s2, size_t n);

This function copies n bytes of memory starting from address s1 into the memory starting at address s2.
But look! s1 and s2 are void*s! Why? What does it mean? Let’s run more examples to see.
For instance, we could copy a string with memcpy() (though strcpy() is more appropriate for strings):
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <string.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char s[] = "Goats!";
7 char t[100];
8

9 memcpy(t, s, 7); // Copy 7 bytes--including the NUL terminator!

10
 Chapter 11. Pointers II: Arithmetic 71

11 printf("%s\n", t); // "Goats!"

12 }

Or we can copy some ints:

1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <string.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 int a[] = {11, 22, 33};
7 int b[3];
8

9 memcpy(b, a, 3 * sizeof(int)); // Copy 3 ints of data

10

11 printf("%d\n", b[1]); // 22
12 }

That one’s a little wild—you see what we did there with memcpy()? We copied the data from a to b, but we
had to specify how many bytes to copy, and an int is more than one byte.
OK, then—how many bytes does an int take? Answer: depends on the system. But we can tell how many
bytes any type takes with the sizeof operator.
So there’s the answer: an int takes sizeof(int) bytes of memory to store.
And if we have 3 of them in our array, like we did in that example, the entire space used for the 3 ints must
be 3 * sizeof(int).
(In the string example, earlier, it would have been more technically accurate to copy 7 * sizeof(char)
bytes. But chars are always one byte large, by definition, so that just devolves into 7 * 1.)
We could even copy a float or a struct with memcpy()! (Though this is abusive—we should just use =
for that):
struct antelope my_antelope;
struct antelopy my_clone_antelope;

// ...

memcpy(&my_clone_antelope, &my_antelope, sizeof my_antelope);

Look at how versatile memcpy() is! If you have a pointer to a source and a pointer to a destination, and you
have the number of bytes you want to copy, you can copy any type of data.
Imagine if we didn’t have void*. We’d have to write specialized memcpy() functions for each type:
memcpy_int(int *a, int *b, int count);
memcpy_float(float *a, float *b, int count);
memcpy_double(double *a, double *b, int count);
memcpy_char(char *a, char *b, int count);
memcpy_unsigned_char(unsigned char *a, unsigned char *b, int count);

// etc... blech!

Much better to just use void* and have one function that can do it all.
That’s the power of void*. You can write functions that don’t care about the type and is still able to do things
with it.
Chapter 11. Pointers II: Arithmetic 72

But with great power comes great responsibility. Maybe not that great in this case, but there are some limits.
1. You cannot do pointer arithmetic on a void*. 2. You cannot dereference a void*. 3. You cannot use the
arrow operator on a void*, since it’s also a dereference. 4. You cannot use array notation on a void*, since
it’s also a dereference, as well3 .
And if you think about it, these rules make sense. All those operations rely on knowing the sizeof the type
of data pointed to, and with void*, we don’t know the size of the data being pointed to—it could be anything!

But wait—if you can’t dereference a void* what good can it ever do you?
Like with memcpy(), it helps you write generic functions that can handle multiple types of data. But the
secret is that, deep down, you convert the void* to another type before you use it!
And conversion is easy: you can just assign into a variable of the desired type4 .
char a = 'X'; // A single char

void *p = &a; // p points to the 'X'

char *q = p; // q also points to the 'X'

printf("%c\n", *p); // ERROR--cannot dereference void*!

printf("%c\n", *q); // Prints "X"

Let’s write our own memcpy() to try this out. We can copy bytes (chars), and we know the number of bytes
because it’s passed in.
void *my_memcpy(void *dest, void *src, int byte_count)
{
// Convert void*s to char*s
char *s = src, *d = dest;

// Now that we have char*s, we can dereference and copy them

while (byte_count--) {
*d++ = *s++;
}

// Most of these functions return the destination, just in case

// that's useful to the caller.
return dest;
}

Right there at the beginning, we copy the void*s into char*s so that we can use them as char*s. It’s as
easy as that.
Then some fun in a while loop, where we decrement byte_count until it becomes false (0). Remember
that with post-decrement, the value of the expression is computed (for while to use) and then the variable is
decremented.
And some fun in the copy, where we assign *d = *s to copy the byte, but we do it with post-increment so
that both d and s move to the next byte after the assignment is made.
Lastly, most memory and string functions return a copy of a pointer to the destination string just in case the
caller wants to use it.
3
Because remember that array notation is just a dereference and some pointer math, and you can’t dereference a void*!
4
You can also cast the void* to another type, but we haven’t gotten to casts yet.
 Chapter 11. Pointers II: Arithmetic 73

Now that we’ve done that, I just want to quickly point out that we can use this technique to iterate over the
bytes of any object in C, floats, structs, or anything!
Let’s run one more real-world example with the built-in qsort() routine that can sort anything thanks to the
magic of void*s.
(In the following example, you can ignore the word const, which we haven’t covered yet.)
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 // The type of structure we're going to sort

5 struct animal {
6 char *name;
7 int leg_count;
8 };
9

10 // This is a comparison function called by qsort() to help it determine

11 // what exactly to sort by. We'll use it to sort an array of struct
12 // animals by leg_count.
13 int compar(const void *elem1, const void *elem2)
14 {
15 // We know we're sorting struct animals, so let's make both
16 // arguments pointers to struct animals
17 const struct animal *animal1 = elem1;
18 const struct animal *animal2 = elem2;
19

20 // Return <0 =0 or >0 depending on whatever we want to sort by.

21

22 // Let's sort ascending by leg_count, so we'll return the difference

23 // in the leg_counts
24 if (animal1->leg_count > animal2->leg_count)
25 return 1;
26

27 if (animal1->leg_count < animal2->leg_count)

28 return -1;
29

30 return 0;
31 }
32

33 int main(void)
34 {
35 // Let's build an array of 4 struct animals with different
36 // characteristics. This array is out of order by leg_count, but
37 // we'll sort it in a second.
38 struct animal a[4] = {
39 {.name="Dog", .leg_count=4},
40 {.name="Monkey", .leg_count=2},
41 {.name="Antelope", .leg_count=4},
42 {.name="Snake", .leg_count=0}
43 };
44

45 // Call qsort() to sort the array. qsort() needs to be told exactly

46 // what to sort this data by, and we'll do that inside the compar()
47 // function.
 Chapter 11. Pointers II: Arithmetic 74

48 //
49 // This call is saying: qsort array a, which has 4 elements, and
50 // each element is sizeof(struct animal) bytes big, and this is the
51 // function that will compare any two elements.
52 qsort(a, 4, sizeof(struct animal), compar);
53

54 // Print them all out

55 for (int i = 0; i < 4; i++) {
56 printf("%d: %s\n", a[i].leg_count, a[i].name);
57 }
58 }

As long as you give qsort() a function that can compare two items that you have in your array to be sorted, it
can sort anything. And it does this without needing to have the types of the items hardcoded in there anywhere.
qsort() just rearranges blocks of bytes based on the results of the compar() function you passed in.
Chapter 12

Manual Memory Allocation

This is one of the big areas where C likely diverges from languages you already know: manual memory
management.
Other languages uses reference counting, garbage collection, or other means to determine when to allocate
new memory for some data—and when to deallocate it when no variables refer to it.
And that’s nice. It’s nice to be able to not worry about it, to just drop all the references to an item and trust
that at some point the memory associated with it will be freed.
But C’s not like that, entirely.
Of course, in C, some variables are automatically allocated and deallocated when they come into scope and
leave scope. We call these automatic variables. They’re your average run-of-the-mill block scope “local”
variables. No problem.
But what if you want something to persist longer than a particular block? This is where manual memory
management comes into play.
You can tell C explicitly to allocate for you a certain number of bytes that you can use as you please. And
these bytes will remain allocated until you explicitly free that memory1 .
It’s important to free the memory you’re done with! If you don’t, we call that a memory leak and your process
will continue to reserve that memory until it exits.
If you manually allocated it, you have to manually free it when you’re done with it.
So how do we do this? We’re going to learn a couple new functions, and make use of the sizeof operator
to help us learn how many bytes to allocate.
In common C parlance, devs say that automatic local variables are allocated “on the stack”, and manually-
allocated memory is “on the heap”. The spec doesn’t talk about either of those things, but all C devs will
know what you’re talking about if you bring them up.
All functions we’re going to learn in this chapter can be found in <stdlib.h>.

12.1 Allocating and Deallocating, malloc() and free()

The malloc() function accepts a number of bytes to allocate, and returns a void pointer to that block of
newly-allocated memory.
1
Or until the program exits, in which case all the memory allocated by it is freed. Asterisk: some systems allow you to allocate
memory that persists after a program exits, but it’s system dependent, out of scope for this guide, and you’ll certainly never do it on
accident.

75
Chapter 12. Manual Memory Allocation 76

Since it’s a void*, you can assign it into whatever pointer type you want… normally this will correspond in
some way to the number of bytes you’re allocating.
So… how many bytes should I allocate? We can use sizeof to help with that. If we want to allocate enough
room for a single int, we can use sizeof(int) and pass that to malloc().
After we’re done with some allocated memory, we can call free() to indicate we’re done with that memory
and it can be used for something else. As an argument, you pass the same pointer you got from malloc()
(or a copy of it). It’s undefined behavior to use a memory region after you free() it.
Let’s try. We’ll allocate enough memory for an int, and then store something there, and the print it.
// Allocate space for a single int (sizeof(int) bytes-worth):

int *p = malloc(sizeof(int));

*p = 12; // Store something there

printf("%d\n", *p); // Print it: 12

free(p); // All done with that memory

//*p = 3490; // ERROR: undefined behavior! Use after free()!

Now, in that contrived example, there’s really no benefit to it. We could have just used an automatic int
and it would have worked. But we’ll see how the ability to allocate memory this way has its advantages,
especially with more complex data structures.
One more thing you’ll commonly see takes advantage of the fact that sizeof can give you the size of the
result type of any constant expression. So you could put a variable name in there, too, and use that. Here’s
an example of that, just like the previous one:
int *p = malloc(sizeof *p); // *p is an int, so same as sizeof(int)

12.2 Error Checking

All the allocation functions return a pointer to the newly-allocated stretch of memory, or NULL if the memory
cannot be allocated for some reason.
Some OSes like Linux can be configured in such a way that malloc() never returns NULL, even if you’re
out of memory. But despite this, you should always code it up with protections in mind.
int *x;

x = malloc(sizeof(int) * 10);

if (x == NULL) {
printf("Error allocating 10 ints\n");
// do something here to handle it
}

Here’s a common pattern that you’ll see, where we do the assignment and the condition on the same line:
int *x;

if ((x = malloc(sizeof(int) * 10)) == NULL)

printf("Error allocating 10 ints\n");
 Chapter 12. Manual Memory Allocation 77

// do something here to handle it

}

12.3 Allocating Space for an Array

We’ve seen how to allocate space for a single thing; now what about for a bunch of them in an array?
In C, an array is a bunch of the same thing back-to-back in a contiguous stretch of memory.
We can allocate a contiguous stretch of memory—we’ve seen how to do that. If we wanted 3490 bytes of
memory, we could just ask for it:
char *p = malloc(3490); // Voila

And—indeed!—that’s an array of 3490 chars (AKA a string!) since each char is 1 byte. In other words,
sizeof(char) is 1.

Note: there’s no initialization done on the newly-allocated memory—it’s full of garbage. Clear it with mem-
set() if you want to, or see calloc(), below.

But we can just multiply the size of the thing we want by the number of elements we want, and then access
them using either pointer or array notation. Example!
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // Allocate space for 10 ints
7 int *p = malloc(sizeof(int) * 10);
8

9 // Assign them values 0-45:

10 for (int i = 0; i < 10; i++)
11 p[i] = i * 5;
12

13 // Print all values 0, 5, 10, 15, ..., 40, 45

14 for (int i = 0; i < 10; i++)
15 printf("%d\n", p[i]);
16

17 // Free the space

18 free(p);
19 }

The key’s in that malloc() line. If we know each int takes sizeof(int) bytes to hold it, and we know
we want 10 of them, we can just allocate exactly that many bytes with:
sizeof(int) * 10

And this trick works for every type. Just pass it to sizeof and multiply by the size of the array.

12.4 An Alternative: calloc()

This is another allocation function that works similarly to malloc(), with two key differences:
• Instead of a single argument, you pass the size of one element, and the number of elements you wish
to allocate. It’s like it’s made for allocating arrays.
• It clears the memory to zero.
 Chapter 12. Manual Memory Allocation 78

You still use free() to deallocate memory obtained through calloc().

Here’s a comparison of calloc() and malloc().
// Allocate space for 10 ints with calloc(), initialized to 0:
int *p = calloc(sizeof(int), 10);

// Allocate space for 10 ints with malloc(), initialized to 0:

int *q = malloc(sizeof(int) * 10);
memset(q, 0, sizeof(int) * 10); // set to 0

Again, the result is the same for both except malloc() doesn’t zero the memory by default.

12.5 Changing Allocated Size with realloc()

If you’ve already allocated 10 ints, but later you decide you need 20, what can you do?
One option is to allocate some new space, and then memcpy() the memory over… but it turns out that
sometimes you don’t need to move anything. And there’s one function that’s just smart enough to do the
right thing in all the right circumstances: realloc().
It takes a pointer to some previously-allocted memory (by malloc() or calloc()) and a new size for the
memory region to be.
It then grows or shrinks that memory, and returns a pointer to it. Sometimes it might return the same pointer
(if the data didn’t have to be copied elsewhere), or it might return a different one (if the data did have to be
copied).
Be sure when you call realloc(), you specify the number of bytes to allocate, and not just the number of
array elements! That is:
num_floats *= 2;

np = realloc(p, num_floats); // WRONG: need bytes, not number of elements!

np = realloc(p, num_floats * sizeof(float)); // Better!

Let’s allocate an array of 20 floats, and then change our mind and make it an array of 40.
We’re going to assign the return value of realloc() into another pointer just to make sure it’s not NULL. If
it’s not, then we can reassign it into our original pointer. (If we just assigned the return value directly into the
original pointer, we’d lose that pointer if the function returned NULL and we’d have no way to get it back.)
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // Allocate space for 20 floats
7 float *p = malloc(sizeof *p * 20); // sizeof *p same as sizeof(float)
8

9 // Assign them fractional values 0.0-1.0:

10 for (int i = 0; i < 20; i++)
11 p[i] = i / 20.0;
12

13 // But wait! Let's actually make this an array of 40 elements

14 float *new_p = realloc(p, sizeof *p * 40);
15
 Chapter 12. Manual Memory Allocation 79

16 // Check to see if we successfully reallocated

17 if (new_p == NULL) {
18 printf("Error reallocing\n");
19 return 1;
20 }
21

22 // If we did, we can just reassign p

23 p = new_p;
24

25 // And assign the new elements values in the range 1.0-2.0

26 for (int i = 20; i < 40; i++)
27 p[i] = 1.0 + (i - 20) / 20.0;
28

29 // Print all values 0.0-2.0 in the 40 elements:

30 for (int i = 0; i < 40; i++)
31 printf("%f\n", p[i]);
32

33 // Free the space

34 free(p);
35 }

Notice in there how we took the return value from realloc() and reassigned it into the same pointer variable
p that we passed in. That’s pretty common to do.

Also if line 7 is looking weird, with that sizeof *p in there, remember that sizeof works on the size of
the type of the expression. And the type of *p is float, so that line is equivalent to sizeof(float).

12.5.1 Reading in Lines of Arbitrary Length

I want to demonstrate two things with this full-blown example.
1. Use of realloc() to grow a buffer as we read in more data.
2. Use of realloc() to shrink the buffer down to the perfect size after we’ve completed the read.
What we see here is a loop that calls fgetc() over and over to append to a buffer until we see that the last
character is a newline.
Once it finds the newline, it shrinks the buffer to just the right size and returns it.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 // Read a line of arbitrary size from a file

5 //
6 // Returns a pointer to the line.
7 // Returns NULL on EOF or error.
8 //
9 // It's up to the caller to free() this pointer when done with it.
10 //
11 // Note that this strips the newline from the result. If you need
12 // it in there, probably best to switch this to a do-while.
13

14 char *readline(FILE *fp)

15 {
16 int offset = 0; // Index next char goes in the buffer
17 int bufsize = 4; // Preferably power of 2 initial size
 Chapter 12. Manual Memory Allocation 80

18 char *buf; // The buffer

19 int c; // The character we've read in
20

21 buf = malloc(bufsize); // Allocate initial buffer

22

23 if (buf == NULL) // Error check

24 return NULL;
25

26 // Main loop--read until newline or EOF

27 while (c = fgetc(fp), c != '\n' && c != EOF) {
28

29 // Check if we're out of room in the buffer accounting

30 // for the extra byte for the NUL terminator
31 if (offset == bufsize - 1) { // -1 for the NUL terminator
32 bufsize *= 2; // 2x the space
33

34 char *new_buf = realloc(buf, bufsize);

35

36 if (new_buf == NULL) {
37 free(buf); // On error, free and bail
38 return NULL;
39 }
40

41 buf = new_buf; // Successful realloc

42 }
43

44 buf[offset++] = c; // Add the byte onto the buffer

45 }
46

47 // We hit newline or EOF...

48

49 // If at EOF and we read no bytes, free the buffer and

50 // return NULL to indicate we're at EOF:
51 if (c == EOF && offset == 0) {
52 free(buf);
53 return NULL;
54 }
55

56 // Shrink to fit
57 if (offset < bufsize - 1) { // If we're short of the end
58 char *new_buf = realloc(buf, offset + 1); // +1 for NUL terminator
59

60 // If successful, point buf to new_buf;

61 // otherwise we'll just leave buf where it is
62 if (new_buf != NULL)
63 buf = new_buf;
64 }
65

66 // Add the NUL terminator

67 buf[offset] = '\0';
68

69 return buf;
70 }
 Chapter 12. Manual Memory Allocation 81

71

72 int main(void)
73 {
74 FILE *fp = fopen("foo.txt", "r");
75

76 char *line;
77

78 while ((line = readline(fp)) != NULL) {

79 printf("%s\n", line);
80 free(line);
81 }
82

83 fclose(fp);
84 }

When growing memory like this, it’s common (though hardly a law) to double the space needed each step
just to minimize the number of realloc()s that occur.
Finally you might note that readline() returns a pointer to a malloc()d buffer. As such, it’s up to the
caller to explicitly free() that memory when it’s done with it.

12.5.2 realloc() with NULL

Trivia time! These two lines are equivalent:
char *p = malloc(3490);
char *p = realloc(NULL, 3490);

That could be convenient if you have some kind of allocation loop and you don’t want to special-case the
first malloc().
int *p = NULL;
int length = 0;

while (!done) {
// Allocate 10 more ints:
length += 10;
p = realloc(p, sizeof *p * length);

// Do amazing things
// ...
}

In that example, we didn’t need an initial malloc() since p was NULL to start.

12.6 Aligned Allocations

You probably aren’t going to need to use this.
And I don’t want to get too far off in the weeds talking about it right now, but there’s this thing called memory
alignment, which has to do with the memory address (pointer value) being a multiple of a certain number.
For example, a system might require that 16-bit values begin on memory addresses that are multiples of 2.
Or that 64-bit values begin on memory addresses that are multiples of 2, 4, or 8, for example. It depends on
the CPU.
Some systems require this kind of alignment for fast memory access, or some even for memory access at all.
 Chapter 12. Manual Memory Allocation 82

Now, if you use malloc(), calloc(), or realloc(), C will give you a chunk of memory that’s well-aligned
for any value at all, even structs. Works in all cases.
But there might be times that you know that some data can be aligned at a smaller boundary, or must be aligned
at a larger one for some reason. I imagine this is more common with embedded systems programming.
In those cases, you can specify an alignment with aligned_alloc().
The alignment is an integer power of two greater than zero, so 2, 4, 8, 16, etc. and you give that to
aligned_alloc() before the number of bytes you’re interested in.

The other restriction is that the number of bytes you allocate needs to be a multiple of the alignment. But
this might be changing. See C Defect Report 4602
Let’s do an example, allocating on a 64-byte boundary:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <string.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 // Allocate 256 bytes aligned on a 64-byte boundary
8 char *p = aligned_alloc(64, 256); // 256 == 64 * 4
9

10 // Copy a string in there and print it

11 strcpy(p, "Hello, world!");
12 printf("%s\n", p);
13

14 // Free the space

15 free(p);
16 }

I want to throw a note here about realloc() and aligned_alloc(). realloc() doesn’t have any align-
ment guarantees, so if you need to get some aligned reallocated space, you’ll have to do it the hard way with
memcpy().

Here’s a non-standard aligned_realloc() function, if you need it:

void *aligned_realloc(void *ptr, size_t old_size, size_t alignment, size_t size)
{
char *new_ptr = aligned_alloc(alignment, size);

if (new_ptr == NULL)
return NULL;

size_t copy_size = old_size < size? old_size: size; // get min

if (ptr != NULL)
memcpy(new_ptr, ptr, copy_size);

free(ptr);

return new_ptr;
}

2
http://www.open-std.org/jtc1/sc22/wg14/www/docs/summary.htm#dr_460
Chapter 12. Manual Memory Allocation 83

Note that it always copies data, taking time, while real realloc() will avoid that if it can. So this is hardly
efficient. Avoid needing to reallocate custom-aligned data.
 Chapter 13

Scope

Scope is all about what variables are visible in what contexts.

13.1 Block Scope

This is the scope of almost all the variables devs define. It includes what other languages might call “function
scope”, i.e. variables that are declared inside functions.
The basic rule is that if you’ve declared a variable in a block delimited by squirrelly braces, the scope of that
variable is that block.
If there’s a block inside a block, then variables declared in the inner block are local to that block, and cannot
be seen in the outer scope.
Once a variable’s scope ends, that variable can no longer be referenced, and you can consider its value to be
gone into the great bit bucket1 in the sky.
An example with nested scope:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int a = 12; // Local to outer block, but visible in inner block
6

7 if (a == 12) {
8 int b = 99; // Local to inner block, not visible in outer block
9

10 printf("%d %d\n", a, b); // OK: "12 99"

11 }
12

13 printf("%d\n", a); // OK, we're still in a's scope

14

15 printf("%d\n", b); // ILLEGAL, out of b's scope

16 }

1
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bit_bucket

84
 Chapter 13. Scope 85

13.1.1 Where To Define Variables

Another fun fact is that you can define variables anywhere in the block, within reason—they have the scope
of that block, but cannot be used before they are defined.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int i = 0;
6

7 printf("%d\n", i); // OK: "0"

8

9 //printf("%d\n", j); // ILLEGAL--can't use j before it's defined

10

11 int j = 5;
12

13 printf("%d %d\n", i, j); // OK: "0 5"

14 }

Historically, C required all the variables be defined before any code in the block, but this is no longer the
case in the C99 standard.

13.1.2 Variable Hiding

If you have a variable named the same thing at an inner scope as one at an outer scope, the one at the inner
scope takes precedence as long as you’re running in the inner scope. That is, it hides the one at outer scope
for the duration of its lifetime.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int i = 10;
6

7 {
8 int i = 20;
9

10 printf("%d\n", i); // Inner scope i, 20 (outer i is hidden)

11 }
12

13 printf("%d\n", i); // Outer scope i, 10

14 }

You might have noticed in that example that I just threw a block in there at line 7, not so much as a for or
if statement to kick it off! This is perfectly legal. Sometimes a dev will want to group a bunch of local
variables together for a quick computation and will do this, but it’s rare to see.

13.2 File Scope

If you define a variable outside of a block, that variable has file scope. It’s visible in all functions in the file
that come after it, and shared between them. (An exception is if a block defines a variable of the same name,
it would hide the one at file scope.)
This is closest to what you would consider to be “global” scope in another language.
 Chapter 13. Scope 86

For example:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int shared = 10; // File scope! Visible to the whole file after this!
4

5 void func1(void)
6 {
7 shared += 100; // Now shared holds 110
8 }
9

10 void func2(void)
11 {
12 printf("%d\n", shared); // Prints "110"
13 }
14

15 int main(void)
16 {
17 func1();
18 func2();
19 }

Note that if shared were declared at the bottom of the file, it wouldn’t compile. It has to be declared before
any functions use it.
There are ways to further modify items at file scope, namely with static and extern, but we’ll talk more about
those later.

13.3 for-loop Scope

I really don’t know what to call this, as C11 §6.8.5.3¶1 doesn’t give it a proper name. We’ve done it already
a few times in this guide, as well. It’s when you declare a variable inside the first clause of a for-loop:
for (int i = 0; i < 10; i++)
printf("%d\n", i);

printf("%d\n", i); // ILLEGAL--i is only in scope for the for-loop

In that example, i’s lifetime begins the moment it is defined, and continues for the duration of the loop.
If the loop body is enclosed in a block, the variables defined in the for-loop are visible from that inner scope.
Unless, of course, that inner scope hides them. This crazy example prints 999 five times:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++) {
6 int i = 999; // Hides the i in the for-loop scope
7 printf("%d\n", i);
8 }
9 }
Chapter 13. Scope 87

13.4 A Note on Function Scope

The C spec does refer to function scope, but it’s used exclusively with labels, something we haven’t discussed
yet. More on that another day.
Chapter 14

Types II: Way More Types!

We’re used to char, int, and float types, but it’s now time to take that stuff to the next level and see what
else we have out there in the types department!

14.1 Signed and Unsigned Integers

So far we’ve used int as a signed type, that is, a value that can be either negative or positive. But C also has
specific unsigned integer types that can only hold positive numbers.
These types are prefaced by the keyword unsigned.
int a; // signed
signed int a; // signed
signed a; // signed, "shorthand" for "int" or "signed int", rare
unsigned int b; // unsigned
unsigned c; // unsigned, shorthand for "unsigned int"

Why? Why would you decide you only wanted to hold positive numbers?
Answer: you can get larger numbers in an unsigned variable than you can in a signed ones.
But why is that?
You can think of integers being represented by a certain number of bits1 . On my computer, an int is repre-
sented by 64 bits.
And each permutation of bits that are either 1 or 0 represents a number. We can decide how to divvy up these
numbers.
With signed numbers, we use (roughly) half the permutations to represent negative numbers, and the other
half to represent positive numbers.
With unsigned, we use all the permutations to represent positive numbers.
On my computer with 64-bit ints using two’s complement2 to represent unsigned numbers, I have the fol-
lowing limits on integer range:

1
“Bit” is short for binary digit. Binary is just another way of representing numbers. Instead of digits 0-9 like we’re used to, it’s digits
0-1.
2
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Two%27s_complement

88
Chapter 14. Types II: Way More Types! 89

Type Minimum Maximum

int -9,223,372,036,854,775,808 9,223,372,036,854,775,807
unsigned int 0 18,446,744,073,709,551,615

Notice that the largest positive unsigned int is approximately twice as large as the largest positive int.
So you can get some flexibility there.

14.2 Character Types

Remember char? The type we can use to hold a single character?
char c = 'B';

printf("%c\n", c); // "B"

I have a shocker for you: it’s actually an integer.

char c = 'B';

// Change this from %c to %d:

printf("%d\n", c); // 66 (!!)

Deep down, char is just a small int, namely an integer that uses just a single byte of space, limiting its range
to…
Here the C spec gets just a little funky. It assures us that a char is a single byte, i.e. sizeof(char) == 1.
But then in C11 §3.6¶3 it goes out of its way to say:
A byte is composed of a contiguous sequence of bits, the number of which is implementation-
defined.
Wait—what? Some of you might be used to the notion that a byte is 8 bits, right? I mean, that’s what it
is, right? And the answer is, “Almost certainly.”3 But C is an old language, and machines back in the day
had, shall we say, a more relaxed opinion over how many bits were in a byte. And through the years, C has
retained this flexibility.
But assuming your bytes in C are 8 bits, like they are for virtually all machines in the world that you’ll ever
see, the range of a char is…
—So before I can tell you, it turns out that chars might be signed or unsigned depending on your compiler.
Unless you explicitly specify.
In many cases, just having char is fine because you don’t care about the sign of the data. But if you need
signed or unsigned chars, you must be specific:
char a; // Could be signed or unsigned
signed char b; // Definitely signed
unsigned char c; // Definitely unsigned

OK, now, finally, we can figure out the range of numbers if we assume that a char is 8 bits and your system
uses the virtually universal two’s complement representation for signed and unsigned4 .
So, assuming those constraints, we can finally figure our ranges:

3
The industry term for a sequence of exactly, indisputably 8 bits is an octet.
4
In general, f you have an 𝑛 bit two’s complement number, the signed range is −2𝑛−1 to 2𝑛−1 − 1. And the unsigned range is 0
to 2𝑛 − 1.
 Chapter 14. Types II: Way More Types! 90

char type Minimum Maximum

signed char -128 127
unsigned char 0 255

And the ranges for char are implementation-defined.

Let me get this straight. char is actually a number, so can we do math on it?
Yup! Just remember to keep things in the range of a char!
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 char a = 10, b = 20;
6

7 printf("%d\n", a + b); // 30!

8 }

What about those constant characters in single quotes, like 'B'? How does that have a numeric value?
The spec is also hand-wavey here, since C isn’t designed to run on a single type of underlying system.
But let’s just assume for the moment that your character set is based on ASCII5 for at least the first 128
characters. In that case, the character constant will be converted to a char whose value is the same as the
ASCII value of the character.
That was a mouthful. Let’s just have an example:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 char a = 10;
6 char b = 'B'; // ASCII value 66
7

8 printf("%d\n", a + b); // 76!

9 }

This depends on your execution environment and the character set used6 . One of the most popular character
sets today is Unicode7 (which is a superset of ASCII), so for your basic 0-9, A-Z, a-z and punctuation, you’ll
almost certainly get the ASCII values out of them.

14.3 More Integer Types: short, long, long long

So far we’ve just generally been using two integer types:
• char
• int
and we recently learned about the unsigned variants of the integer types. And we learned that char was
secretly a small int in disguise. So we know the ints can come in multiple bit sizes.
5
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
6
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/List_of_information_system_character_sets
7
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unicode
Chapter 14. Types II: Way More Types! 91

But there are a couple more integer types we should look at, and the minimum minimum and maximum values
they can hold.
Yes, I said “minimum” twice. The spec says that these types will hold numbers of at least these sizes, so your
implementation might be different. The header file <limits.h> defines macros that hold the minimum and
maximum integer values; rely on that to be sure, and never hardcode or assume these values.
These additional types are short int, long int, and long long int. Commonly, when using these
types, C developers leave the int part off (e.g. long long), and the compiler is perfectly happy.
// These two lines are equivalent:
long long int x;
long long x;

// And so are these:

short int x;
short x;

Let’s take a look at the integer data types and sizes in ascending order, grouped by signedness.

Type Minimum Bytes Minimum Value Maximum Value

char 1 -127 or 0 127 or 2558
signed char 1 -127 127
short 2 -32767 32767
int 2 -32767 32767
long 4 -2147483647 2147483647
long long 8 -9223372036854775807 9223372036854775807
unsigned char 1 0 255
unsigned short 2 0 65535
unsigned int 2 0 65535
unsigned long 4 0 4294967295
unsigned long long 8 0 9223372036854775807

There is no long long long type. You can’t just keep adding longs like that. Don’t be silly.
Two’s complement fans might have noticed something funny about those numbers. Why does,
for example, the signed char stop at -127 instead of -128? Remember: these are only the
minimums required by the spec. Some number representations (like sign and magnitude9 ) top
off at ±127.
Let’s run the same table on my 64-bit, two’s complement system and see what comes out:

Type My Bytes Minimum Value Maximum Value

char 1 -128 12710
signed char 1 -128 127
short 2 -32768 32767
int 4 -2147483648 2147483647
long 8 -9223372036854775808 9223372036854775807
long long 8 -9223372036854775808 9223372036854775807
unsigned char 1 0 255
unsigned short 2 0 65535
unsigned int 4 0 4294967295

8
Depends on if a char defaults to signed char or unsigned char
9
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Signed_number_representations#Signed_magnitude_representation
Chapter 14. Types II: Way More Types! 92

Type My Bytes Minimum Value Maximum Value

unsigned long 8 0 18446744073709551615
unsigned long long 8 0 18446744073709551615

That’s a little more sensible, but we can see how my system has larger limits than the minimums in the
specification.
So what are the macros in <limits.h>?

Type Min Macro Max Macro

char CHAR_MIN CHAR_MAX
signed char SCHAR_MIN SCHAR_MAX
short SHRT_MIN SHRT_MAX
int INT_MIN INT_MAX
long LONG_MIN LONG_MAX
long long LLONG_MIN LLONG_MAX
unsigned char 0 UCHAR_MAX
unsigned short 0 USHRT_MAX
unsigned int 0 UINT_MAX
unsigned long 0 ULONG_MAX
unsigned long long 0 ULLONG_MAX

Notice there’s a way hidden in there to determine if a system uses signed or unsigned chars. If CHAR_MAX
== UCHAR_MAX, it must be unsigned.

Also notice there’s no minimum macro for the unsigned variants—they’re just 0.

14.4 More Float: double and long double

Let’s see what the spec has to say about floating point numbers in §5.2.4.2.2¶1-2:
The following parameters are used to define the model for each floating-point type:

Parameter Definition
𝑠 sign (±1)
𝑏 base or radix of exponent representation (an integer
> 1)
𝑒 exponent (an integer between a minimum 𝑒𝑚𝑖𝑛 and
a maximum 𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑥 )
𝑝 precision (the number of base-𝑏 digits in the
significand)
𝑓𝑘 nonnegative integers less than 𝑏 (the significand
digits)

A floating-point number (𝑥) is defined by the following model:

𝑝
𝑥 = 𝑠𝑏𝑒 ∑ 𝑓𝑘 𝑏−𝑘 , 𝑒𝑚𝑖𝑛 ≤ 𝑒 ≤ 𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝑘=1
10
My char is signed.
Chapter 14. Types II: Way More Types! 93

I hope that cleared it right up for you.

Okay, fine. Let’s step back a bit and see what’s practical.
Note: we refer to a bunch of macros in this section. They can be found in the header <float.h>.
Floating point number are encoded in a specific sequence of bits (IEEE-754 format11 is tremendously popular)
in bytes.
Diving in a bit more, the number is basically represented as the significand (which is the number part—the
significant digits themselves, also sometimes referred to as the mantissa) and the exponent, which is what
power to raise the digits to. Recall that a negative exponent can make a number smaller.
Imagine we’re using 10 as a number to raise by an exponent. We could represent the following numbers by
using a significand of 12345, and exponents of −3, 4, and 0 to encode the following floating point values:
12345 × 10−3 = 12.345
12345 × 104 = 123450000
12345 × 100 = 12345
For all those numbers, the significand stays the same. The only difference is the exponent.
On your machine, the base for the exponent is probably 2, not 10, since computers like binary. You can
check it by printing the FLT_RADIX macro.
So we have a number that’s represented by a number of bytes, encoded in some way. Because there are a
limited number of bit patterns, a limited number of floating point numbers can be represented.
But more particularly, only a certain number of significant decimal digits can be represented accurately.
How can you get more? You can use larger data types!
And we have a couple of them. We know about float already, but for more precision we have double. And
for even more precision, we have long double (unrelated to long int except by name).
The spec doesn’t go into how many bytes of storage each type should take, but on my system, we can see the
relative size increases:
|Type|sizeof| |:-|-:| |float|4| |double|8| |long double|16|
So each of the types (on my system) uses those additional bits for more precision.
But how much precision are we talking, here? How many decimal numbers can be represented by these
values?
Well, C provides us with a bunch of macros in <float.h> to help us figure that out.
It gets a little wonky if you are using a base-2 (binary) system for storing the numbers (which is virtually
everyone on the planet, probably including you), but bear with me while we figure it out.

14.4.1 How Many Decimal Digits?

The million dollar question is, “How many significant decimal digits can I store in a given floating point type
so that I get out the same decimal number when I print it?”
The number of decimal digits you can store in a floating point type and surely get the same number back out
when you print it is given by these macros:

Type Decimal Digits You Can Store Minimum

float FLT_DIG 6

11
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/IEEE_754
 Chapter 14. Types II: Way More Types! 94

Type Decimal Digits You Can Store Minimum

double DBL_DIG 10
long double LDBL_DIG 10

On my system, FLT_DIG is 6, so I can be sure that if I print out a 6 digit float, I’ll get the same thing
back. (It could be more digits—some numbers will come back correctly with more digits. But 6 is definitely
coming back.)
For example, printing out floats following this pattern of increasing digits, we apparently make it to 8 digits
before something goes wrong, but after that we’re back to 7 correct digits.
0.12345
0.123456
0.1234567
0.12345678
0.123456791 <-- Things start going wrong
0.1234567910

Let’s do another demo. In this code we’ll have two floats that both hold numbers that have FLT_DIG
significant decimal digits12 . Then we add those together, for what should be 12 significant decimal digits.
But that’s more than we can store in a float and correctly recover as a string—so we see when we print it
out, things start going wrong after the 7th significant digit.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <float.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // Both these numbers have 6 significant digits, so they can be
7 // stored accurately in a float:
8

9 float f = 3.14159f;
10 float g = 0.00000265358f;
11

12 printf("%.5f\n", f); // 3.14159 -- correct!

13 printf("%.11f\n", g); // 0.00000265358 -- correct!
14

15 // Now add them up

16 f += g; // 3.14159265358 is what f _should_ be
17

18 printf("%.11f\n", f); // 3.14159274101 -- wrong!

19 }

(The above code has an f after the numeric constants—this indicates that the constant is type float, as
opposed to the default of double. More on this later.)
Remember that FLT_DIG is the safe number of digits you can store in a float and retrieve correctly.
Sometimes you might get one or two more out of it. But sometimes you’ll only get FLT_DIG digits back.
The sure thing: if you store any number of digits up to and including FLT_DIG in a float, you’re sure to get
them back correctly.
So that’s the story. FLT_DIG. The End.
…Or is it?
12
This program runs as its comments indicate on a system with FLT_DIG of 6 that uses IEEE-754 base-2 floating point numbers.
Otherwise, you might get different output.
Chapter 14. Types II: Way More Types! 95

14.4.2 Converting to Decimal and Back

But storing a base 10 number in a floating point number and getting it back out is only half the story.
Turns out floating point numbers can encode numbers that require more decimal places to print out completely.
It’s just that your big decimal number might not map to one of those numbers.
That is, when you look at floating point numbers from one to the next, there’s a gap. If you try to encode
a decimal number in that gap, it’ll use the closest floating point number. That’s why you can only encode
FLT_DIG for a float.

But what about those floating point numbers that aren’t in the gap? How many places do you need to print
those out accurately?
Another way to phrase this question is for any given floating point number, how many decimal digits do I
have to preserve if I want to convert the decimal number back into an identical floating point number? That
is, how many digits do I have to print in base 10 to recover all the digits in base 2 in the original number?
Sometimes it might only be a few. But to be sure, you’ll want to convert to decimal with a certain safe number
of decimal places. That number is encoded in the following macros:

Macro Description
FLT_DECIMAL_DIG Number of decimal digits encoded in a float.
DBL_DECIMAL_DIG Number of decimal digits encoded in a double.
LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG Number of decimal digits encoded in a long
double.
DECIMAL_DIG Same as the widest encoding, LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG.

Let’s see an example where DBL_DIG is 15 (so that’s all we can have in a constant), but DBL_DECIMAL_DIG
is 17 (so we have to convert to 17 decimal numbers to preserve all the bits of the original double).
Let’s assign the 15 significant digit number 0.123456789012345 to x, and let’s assign the 1 significant digit
number 0.0000000000000006 to y.
x is exact: 0.12345678901234500 Printed to 17 decimal places
y is exact: 0.00000000000000060

But let’s add them together. This should give 0.1234567890123456, but that’s more than DBL_DIG, so
strange things might happen… let’s look:
x + y not quite right: 0.12345678901234559 Should end in 4560!

That’s what we get for printing more than DBL_DIG, right? But check this out… that number, above, is
exactly representable as it is!
If we assign 0.12345678901234559 (17 digits) to z and print it, we get:
z is exact: 0.12345678901234559 17 digits correct! More than DBL_DIG!

If we’d truncated z down to 15 digits, it wouldn’t have been the same number. That’s why to preserve all the
bits of a double, we need DBL_DECIMAL_DIG and not just the lesser DBL_DIG.
All that being said, it’s clear that when we’re messing with decimal numbers in general, it’s not safe to print
more than FLT_DIG, DBL_DIG, or LDBL_DIG digits to be sensible in relation to the original base 10 numbers
and any subsequent math.
But when converting from float to a decimal representation and back to float, definitely use
FLT_DECIMAL_DIG to do that so that all the bits are preserved exactly.
Chapter 14. Types II: Way More Types! 96

14.5 Constant Numeric Types

When you write down a constant number, like 1234, it has a type. But what type is it? Let’s look at how C
decides what type the constant is, and how to force it to choose a specific type.

14.5.1 Hexadecimal and Octal

In addition to good ol’ decimal like Grandma used to bake, C also supports constants of different bases.
If you lead a number with 0x, it is read as a hex number:
int a = 0x1A2B; // Hexadecimal
int b = 0x1a2b; // Case doesn't matter for hex digits

printf("%x", a); // Print a hex number, "1a2b"

If you lead a number with a 0, it is read as an octal number:

int a = 012;

printf("%o\n", a); // Print an octal number, "12"

This is particularly problematic for beginner programmers who try to pad decimal numbers on the left with
0 to line things up nice and pretty, inadvertently changing the base of the number:
int x = 11111; // Decimal 11111
int y = 00111; // Decimal 73 (Octal 111)
int z = 01111; // Decimal 585 (Octal 1111)

14.5.1.1 A Note on Binary

An unofficial extension13 in many C compilers allows you to represent a binary number with a 0b prefix:
int x = 0b101010; // Binary 101010

printf("%d\n", x); // Prints 42 decimal

There’s no printf() format specifier for printing a binary number. You have to do it a character at a time
with bitwise operators.

14.5.2 Integer Constants

You can force a constant integer to be a certain type by appending a suffix to it that indicates the type.
We’ll do some assignments to demo, but most often devs leave off the suffixes unless needed to be precise.
The compiler is pretty good at making sure the types are compatible.
int x = 1234;
long int x = 1234L;
long long int x = 1234LL

unsigned int x = 1234U;

unsigned long int x = 1234UL;
unsigned long long int x = 1234ULL;

13
It’s really surprising to me that C doesn’t have this in the spec yet. In the C99 Rationale document, they write, “A proposal to add
binary constants was rejected due to lack of precedent and insufficient utility.” Which seems kind of silly in light of some of the other
features they kitchen-sinked in there! I’ll bet one of the next releases has it.
Chapter 14. Types II: Way More Types! 97

The suffix can be uppercase or lowercase. And the U and L or LL can appear either one first.

Type Suffix
int None
long int L
long long int LL
unsigned int U
unsigned long int UL
unsigned long long int ULL

I mentioned in the table that “no suffix” means int… but it’s actually more complex than that.
So what happens when you have an unsuffixed number like:
int x = 1234;

What type is it?

What C will generally do is choose the smallest type from int up that can hold the value.
But specifically, that depends on the number’s base (decimal, hex, or octal), as well.
The spec has a great table indicating which type gets used for what unsuffixed value. In fact, I’m just going
to copy it wholesale right here.
C11 §6.4.4.1¶5 reads, “The type of an integer constant is the first of the first of the corresponding list in
which its value can be represented.”
And then goes on to show this table:

Octal or Hexadecimal
Suffix Decimal Constant Constant
none int int
long int unsigned int
long int
unsigned long int
long long int
unsigned long long int

u or U unsigned int unsigned int

unsigned long int unsigned long int
unsigned long long int unsigned long long int

l or L long int long int

long long int unsigned long int
long long int
unsigned long long int

Both u or U unsigned long int unsigned long int

and l or L unsigned long long int unsigned long long int

ll or LL long long int long long int

unsigned long long int
Chapter 14. Types II: Way More Types! 98

Octal or Hexadecimal
Suffix Decimal Constant Constant
Both u or U unsigned long long int unsigned long long int
and ll or LL

What that’s saying is that, for example, if you specify a number like 123456789U, first C will see if it can be
unsigned int. If it doesn’t fit there, it’ll try unsigned long int. And then unsigned long long int.
It’ll use the smallest type that can hold the number.

14.5.3 Floating Point Constants

You’d think that a floating point constant like 1.23 would have a default type of float, right?
Surprise! Turns out unsuffiexed floating point numbers are type double! Happy belated birthday!
You can force it to be of type float by appending an f (or F—it’s case-insensitive). You can force it to be
of type long double by appending l (or L).

Type Suffix
float F
double None
long double L

For example:
float x = 3.14f;
double x = 3.14;
long double x = 3.14L;

This whole time, though, we’ve just been doing this, right?
float x = 3.14;

Isn’t the left a float and the right a double? Yes! But C’s pretty good with automatic numeric conversions,
so it’s more common to have an unsuffixed floating point constant than not. More on that later.

14.5.3.1 Scientific Notation

Remember earlier when we talked about how a floating point number can be represented by a significand,
base, and exponent?
Well, there’s a common way of writing such a number, shown here followed by it’s more recognizable equiv-
alent which is what you get when you actually run the math:
1.2345 × 103 = 1234.5
Writing numbers in the form 𝑠 × 𝑏𝑒 is called scientific notation14 . In C, these are written using “E notation”,
so these are equivalent:

Scientific Notation E notation

1.2345 × 10−3 = 0.0012345 1.2345e-3
1.2345 × 108 = 123450000 1.2345e+8

14
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Scientific_notation
Chapter 14. Types II: Way More Types! 99

You can print a number in this notation with %e:

printf("%e\n", 123456.0); // Prints 1.234560e+05

A couple little fun facts about scientific notation:

• You don’t have to write them with a single leading digit before the decimal point. Any number of
numbers can go in front.
double x = 123.456e+3; // 123456

However, when you print it, it will change the exponent so there is only one digit in front of the decimal
point.
• The plus can be left off the exponent, as it’s default, but this is uncommon in practice from what I’ve
seen.
1.2345e10 == 1.2345e+10

• You can apply the F or L suffixes to E-notation constants:

1.2345e10F
1.2345e10L

14.5.3.2 Hexadecimal Floating Point Constants

But wait, there’s more floating to be done!
Turns out there are hexadecimal floating point constants, as well!
These work similar to decimal floating point numbers, but they begin with a 0x just like integer numbers.
The catch is that you must specify an exponent, and this exponent produces a power of 2. That is: 2𝑥 .
And then you use a p instead of an e when writing the number:
So 0xa.1p3 is 10.0625 × 23 == 80.5.
When using floating point hex constants, We can print hex scientific notation with %a:
double x = 0xa.1p3;

printf("%a\n", x); // 0x1.42p+6

printf("%f\n", x); // 80.500000
 Chapter 15

Types III: Conversions

In this chapter, we want to talk all about converting from one type to another. C has a variety of ways of
doing this, and some might be a little different that you’re used to in other languages.
Before we talk about how to make conversions happen, let’s talk about how they work when they do happen.

15.1 String Conversions

Unlike many languages, C doesn’t do string-to-number (and vice-versa) conversions in quite as streamlined
a manner as it does numeric conversions.
For these, we’ll have to call functions to do the dirty work.

15.1.1 Numeric Value to String

When we want to convert a number to a string, we can use either sprintf() (pronounced SPRINT-f ) or
snprintf() (s-n-print-f )1

These basically work like printf(), except they output to a string instead, and you can print that string later,
or whatever.
For example, turning part of the value π into a string:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 char s[10];
6 float f = 3.14159;
7

8 // Convert "f" to string, storing in "s", writing at most 10 characters

9 // including the NUL terminator
10

11 snprintf(s, 10, "%f", f);

12

13 printf("String value: %s\n", s); // String value: 3.141590

14 }

So you can use %d or %u like you’re used to for integers.

1
They’re the same except snprintf() allows you to specify a maximum number of bytes to output, preventing the overrunning of
the end of your string. So it’s safer.

100
 Chapter 15. Types III: Conversions 101

15.1.2 String to Numeric Value

There are a couple families of functions to do this in C. We’ll call these the atoi (pronounced a-to-i) family
and the strtol (stir-to-long) family.
For basic conversion from a string to a number, try the atoi functions from <stdlib.h>. These have bad
error-handling characteristics (including undefined behavior if you pass in a bad string), so use them carefully.

Function Description
atoi String to int
atof String to float
atol String to long int
atoll String to long long int

Though the spec doesn’t cop to it, the a at the beginning of the function stands for ASCII2 , so really atoi()
is “ASCII-to-integer”, but saying so today is a bit ASCII-centric.
Here’s an example converting a string to a float:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char *pi = "3.14159";
7 float f;
8

9 f = atof(pi);
10

11 printf("%f\n", f);
12 }

But, like I said, we get undefined behavior from weird things like this:
int x = atoi("what"); // "What" ain't no number I ever heard of

(When I run that, I get 0 back, but you really shouldn’t count on that in any way. You could get something
completely different.)
For better error handling characteristics, let’s check out all those strtol functions, also in <stdlib.h>. Not
only that, but they convert to more types and more bases, too!

Function Description
strtol String to long int
strtoll String to long long int
strtoul String to unsigned long int
strtoull String to unsigned long long int
strtof String to float
strtod String to double
strtold String to long double

These functions all follow a similar pattern of use, and are a lot of people’s first experience with pointers to
pointers! But never fret—it’s easier than it looks.
2
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
 Chapter 15. Types III: Conversions 102

Let’s do an example where we convert a string to an unsigned long, discarding error information (i.e. in-
formation about bad characters in the input string):
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char *s = "3490";
7

8 // Convert string s, a number in base 10, to an unsigned long int.

9 // NULL means we don't care to learn about any error information.
10

11 unsigned long int x = strtoul(s, NULL, 10);

12

13 printf("%lu\n", x); // 3490

14 }

Notice a couple things there. Even though we didn’t deign to capture any information about error characters
in the string, strtoul() won’t give us undefined behavior; it will just return 0.
Also, we specified that this was a decimal (base 10) number.
Does this mean we can convert numbers of different bases? Sure! Let’s do binary!
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char *s = "101010"; // What's the meaning of this number?
7

8 // Convert string s, a number in base 2, to an unsigned long int.

9

10 unsigned long int x = strtoul(s, NULL, 2);

11

12 printf("%lu\n", x); // 42
13 }

OK, that’s all fun and games, but what’s with that NULL in there? What’s that for?
That helps us figure out if an error occurred in the processing of the string. It’s a pointer to a pointer to a
char, which sounds scary, but isn’t once you wrap your head around it.

Let’s do an example where we feed in a deliberately bad number, and we’ll see how strtol() lets us know
where the first invalid digit is.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char *s = "34x90"; // "x" is not a valid digit in base 10!
7 char *badchar;
8

9 // Convert string s, a number in base 10, to an unsigned long int.

10

11 unsigned long int x = strtoul(s, &badchar, 10);

 Chapter 15. Types III: Conversions 103

12

13 // It tries to convert as much as possible, so gets this far:

14

15 printf("%lu\n", x); // 34
16

17 // But we can see the offending bad character because badchar

18 // points to it!
19

20 printf("Invalid character: %c\n", *badchar); // "x"

21 }

So there we have strtoul() modifying what badchar points to in order to show us where things went
wrong3 .
But what if nothing goes wrong? In that case, badchar will point to the NUL terminator at the end of the
string. So we can test for it:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char *s = "3490"; // "x" is not a valid digit in base 10!
7 char *badchar;
8

9 // Convert string s, a number in base 10, to an unsigned long int.

10

11 unsigned long int x = strtoul(s, &badchar, 10);

12

13 // Check if things went well

14

15 if (*badchar == '\0') {
16 printf("Success! %lu\n", x);
17 } else {
18 printf("Partial conversion: %lu\n", x);
19 printf("Invalid character: %c\n", *badchar);
20 }
21 }

So there you have it. The atoi()-style functions are good in a controlled pinch, but the strtol()-style
functions give you far more control over error handling and the base of the input.

15.2 char Conversions

What if you have a single character with a digit in it, like '5'… Is that the same as the value 5?
Let’s try it and see.
printf("%d %d\n", 5, '5');

On my UTF-8 system, this prints:

5 53
3
We have to pass a pointer to badchar to strtoul() or it won’t be able to modify it in any way we can see, analogous to why you
have to pass a pointer to an int to a function if you want that function to be able to change that value of that int.
Chapter 15. Types III: Conversions 104

So… no. And 53? What is that? That’s the UTF-8 (and ASCII) code point for the character symbol '5'4
So how do we convert the character '5' (which apparently has value 53) into the value 5?
With one clever trick, that’s how!
The C Standard guarantees that these character will have code points that are in sequence and in this order:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Ponder for a second–how can we use that? Spoilers ahead…

Let’s take a look at the characters and their code points in UTF-8:
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57

You see there that '5' is 53, just like we were getting. And '0' is 48.
So we can subtract '0' from any digit character to get its numeric value:
char c = '6';

int x = c; // x has value 54, the code point for '6'

int y = c - '0'; // y has value 6, just like we want

And we can convert the other way, too, just by adding the value on.
int x = 6;

char c = x + '0'; // c has value 54

printf("%d\n", c); // prints 54

printf("%c\n", c); // prints 6 with %c

You might think this is a weird way to do this conversion, and by today’s standards, it certainly is. But
back in the olden days when computers were made literally out of wood, this was the method for doing this
conversion. And it wasn’t broke, so C never fixed it.

15.3 Numeric Conversions

15.3.1 Boolean
If you convert a zero to bool, the result is 0. Otherwise it’s 1.

15.3.2 Integer to Integer Conversions

If an integer type is converted to unsigned and doesn’t fit in it, the unsigned result wraps around odometer-
style until it fits in the unsigned5 .
If an integer type is converted to a signed number and doesn’t fit, the result is implementation-defined!
Something documented will happen, but you’ll have to look it up6
4
Each character has a value associated with it for any given character encoding scheme.
5
In practice, what’s probably happening on your implementation is that the high-order bits are just being dropped from the result, so
a 16-bit number 0x1234 being converted to an 8-bit number ends up as 0x0034, or just 0x34.
6
Again, in practice, what will likely happen on your system is that the bit pattern for the original will be truncated and then just used
to represent the signed number, two’s complement. For example, my system takes an unsigned char of 192 and converts it to signed
char -64. In two’s complement, the bit pattern for both these numbers is binary 11000000.
Chapter 15. Types III: Conversions 105

15.3.3 Integer and Floating Point Conversions

If a floating point type is converted to an integer type, the fractional part is discarded with prejudice7 .
But—and here’s the catch—if the number is too large to fit in the integer, you get undefined behavior. So
don’t do that.
Going From integer or floating point to floating point, C makes a best effort to find the closest floating point
number to the integer that it can.
Again, though, if the original value can’t be represented, it’s undefined behavior.

15.4 Implicit Conversions

These are conversions the compiler does automatically for you when you mix and match types.

15.4.1 The Integer Promotions

In a number of places, if an int can be used to represent a value from char or short (signed or unsigned),
that value is promoted up to int. If it doesn’t fit in an int, it’s promoted to unsigned int.
This is how we can do something like this:
char x = 10, y = 20;
int i = x + y;

In that case, x and y get promoted to int by C before the math takes place.
The integer promotions take place during The Usual Arithmetic Conversions, with variadic functions8 , unary
+ and - operators, or when passing values to functions without prototypes9 .

15.4.2 The Usual Arithmetic Conversions

These are automatic conversions that C does around numeric operations that you ask for. (That’s actually
what they’re called, by the way, by C11 §6.3.1.8.) Note that for this section, we’re just talking about numeric
types—strings will come later.
These conversions answer questions about what happens when you mix types, like this:
int x = 3 + 1.2; // Mixing int and double
// 4.2 is converted to int
// 4 is stored in x

float y = 12 * 2; // Mixing float and int

// 24 is converted to float
// 24.0 is stored in y

Do they become ints? Do they become floats? How does it work?

Here are the steps, paraphrased for easy consumption.
1. If one thing in the expression is a floating type, convert the other things to that floating type.
2. Otherwise, if both types are integer types, perform the integer promotions on each, then make the
operand types as big as they need to be hold the common largest value. Sometimes this involves
changing signed to unsigned.
7
Not really—it’s just discarded regularly.
8
Functions with a variable number of arguments.
9
This is rarely done because the compiler will complain and having a prototype is the Right Thing to do. I think this still works for
historic reasons, before prototypes were a thing.
Chapter 15. Types III: Conversions 106

If you want to know the gritty details, check out C11 §6.3.1.8. But you probably don’t.
Just generally remember that int types become float types if there’s a floating point type anywhere in there,
and the compiler makes an effort to make sure mixed integer types don’t overflow.
Finally, if you convert from one floating point type to another, the compiler will try to make an exact con-
version. If it can’t, it’ll do the best approximation it can. If the number is too large to fit in the type you’re
converting into, boom: undefined behavior!

15.4.3 void*
The void* type is interesting because it can be converted from or to any pointer type.
int x = 10;

void *p = &x; // &x is type int*, but we store it in a void*

int *q = p; // p is void*, but we store it in an int*

15.5 Explicit Conversions

These are conversions from type to type that you have to ask for; the compiler won’t do it for you.
You can convert from one type to another by assigning one type to another with an =.
You can also convert explicitly with a cast.

15.5.1 Casting
You can explicitly change the type of an expression by putting a new type in parentheses in front of it. Some
C devs frown on the practice unless absolutely necessary, but it’s likely you’ll come across some C code with
these in it.
Let’s do an example where we want to convert an int into a long so that we can store it in a long.
Note: this example is contrived and the cast in this case is completely unnecessary because the x + 12
expression would automatically be changed to long int to match the wider type of y.
int x = 10;
long int y = (long int)x + 12;

In that example, even those x was type int before, the expression (long int)x has type long int. We
say, “We cast x to long int.”
More commonly, you might see a cast being used to convert a void* into a specific pointer type so it can be
dereferenced.
A callback from the built-in qsort() function might display this behavior since it has void*s passed into it:
int compar(const void *elem1, const void *elem2)
{
if (*((const int*)elem2) > *((const int*)elem1)) return 1;
if (*((const int*)elem2) < *((const int*)elem1)) return -1;
return 0;
}

But you could also clearly write it with an assignment:

Chapter 15. Types III: Conversions 107

int compar(const void *elem1, const void *elem2)

{
const int *e1 = elem1;
const int *e2 = elem2;

return *e2 - *e1;

}

One place you’ll see casts more commonly is to avoid a warning when printing pointer values with the
rarely-used %p which gets picky with anything other than a void*:
int x = 3490;
int *p = &x;

printf("%p\n", p);

generates this warning:

warning: format ‘%p’ expects argument of type ‘void *’, but argument
2 has type ‘int *’

You can fix it with a cast:

printf("%p\n", (void *)p);

Another place is with explicit pointer changes, if you don’t want to use an intervening void*, but these are
also pretty uncommon:
long x = 3490;
long *p = &x;
unsigned char *c = (unsigned char *)p;

A third place it’s often required is with the character conversion functions in <ctype.h> where you should
cast questionably-signed values to unsigned char to avoid undefined behavior.
Again, casting is rarely needed in practice. If you find yourself casting, there might be another way to do the
same thing, or maybe you’re casting unnecessarily.
Or maybe it is necessary. Personally, I try to avoid it, but am not afraid to use it if I have to.
Chapter 16

Types IV: Qualifiers and Specifiers

Now that we have some more types under our belts, turns out we can give these types some additional
attributes that control their behavior. These are the type qualifiers and storage-class specifiers.

16.1 Type Qualifiers

These are going to allow you to declare constant values, and also to give the compiler optimization hints that
it can use.

16.1.1 const
This is the most common type qualifier you’ll see. It means the variable is constant, and any attempt to
modify it will result in a very angry compiler.
const int x = 2;

x = 4; // COMPILER PUKING SOUNDS, can't assign to a constant

You can’t change a const value.

Often you see const in parameter lists for functions:
void foo(const int x)
{
printf("%d\n", x + 30); // OK, doesn't modify "x"
}

16.1.1.1 const and Pointers

This one gets a little funky, because there are two usages that have two meanings when it comes to pointers.
For one thing, we can make it so you can’t change the thing the pointer points to. You do this by putting the
const up front with the type name (before the asterisk) in the type declaration.
int x[] = {10, 20};
const int *p = x;

p++; // We can modify p, no problem

*p = 30; // Compiler error! Can't change what it points to

108
Chapter 16. Types IV: Qualifiers and Specifiers 109

Somewhat confusingly, these two things are equivalent:

const int *p; // Can't modify what p points to
int const *p; // Can't modify what p points to, just like the previous line

Great, so we can’t change the thing the pointer points to, but we can change the pointer itself. What if we
want the other way around? We want to be able to change what the pointer points to, but not the pointer
itself?
Just move the const after the asterisk in the declaration:
int *const p; // We can't modify "p" with pointer arithmetic

p++; // Compiler error!

But we can modify what they point to:

int x = 10;
int *const p = &x;

*p = 20; // Set "x" to 20, no problem

You can also do make both things const:

const int *const p; // Can't modify p or *p!

Finally, if you have multiple levels of indirection, you should const the appropriate levels. Just because a
pointer is const, doesn’t mean the pointer it points to must also be. You can explicitly set them like in the
following examples:
char **p;
p++; // OK!
(*p)++; // OK!

char **const p;
p++; // Error!
(*p)++; // OK!

char *const *p;

p++; // OK!
(*p)++; // Error!

char *const *const p;

p++; // Error!
(*p)++; // Error!

16.1.1.2 const Correctness

One more thing I have to mention is that the compiler will warn on something like this:
const int x = 20;
int *p = &x;

saying something to the effect of:

initialization discards 'const' qualifier from pointer type target

What’s happening there?

Well, we need to look at the types on either side of the assignment:
 Chapter 16. Types IV: Qualifiers and Specifiers 110

const int x = 20;

int *p = &x;
// ^ ^
// | |
// int* const int*

The compiler is warning us that the value on the right side of the assignment is const, but the one of the
left is not. And the compiler is letting us know that it is discarding the “const-ness” of the expression on the
right.
That is, we can still try to do the following, but it’s just wrong. The compiler will warn, and it’s undefined
behavior:
const int x = 20;
int *p = &x;

*p = 40; // Undefined behavior--maybe it modifies "x", maybe not!

printf("%d\n", x); // 40, if you're lucky

16.1.2 restrict
TLDR: you never have to use this and you can ignore it every time you see it. If you use it correctly, you
will likely realize some performance gain. If you use it incorrectly, you will realize undefined behavior.
restrict is a hint to the compiler that a particular piece of memory will only be accessed by one pointer
and never another. (That is, there will be no aliasing of the particular object the restrict pointer points
to.) If a developer declares a pointer to be restrict and then accesses the object it points to in another way
(e.g. via another pointer), the behavior is undefined.
Basically you’re telling C, “Hey—I guarantee that this one single pointer is the only way I access this memory,
and if I’m lying, you can pull undefined behavior on me.”
And C uses that information to perform certain optimizations. For instance, if you’re dereferencing the
restrict pointer repeatedly in a loop, C might decide to cache the result in a register and only store the
final result once the loop completes. If any other pointer referred to that same memory and accessed it in the
loop, the results would not be accurate.
(Note that restrict has no effect if the object pointed to is never written to. It’s all about optimizations
surrounding writes to memory.)
Let’s write a function to swap two variables, and we’ll use the restrict keyword to assure C that we’ll
never pass in pointers to the same thing. And then let’s blow it and try passing in pointers to the same thing.
1 void swap(int *restrict a, int *restrict b)
2 {
3 int t;
4

5 t = *a;
6 *a = *b;
7 *b = t;
8 }
9

10 int main(void)
11 {
12 int x = 10, y = 20;
13

14 swap(&x, &y); // OK! "a" and "b", above, point to different things
 Chapter 16. Types IV: Qualifiers and Specifiers 111

15

16 swap(&x, &x); // Undefined behavior! "a" and "b" point to the same thing
17 }

If we were to take out the restrict keywords, above, that would allow both calls to work safely. But then
the compiler might not be able to optimize.
restrict has block scope, that is, the restriction only lasts for the scope it’s used. If it’s in a parameter list
for a function, it’s in the block scope of that function.
If the restricted pointer points to an array, it only applies to the individual objects in the array. Other pointers
could read and write from the array as long as they didn’t read or write any of the same elements as the
restricted one.
If it’s outside any function in file scope, the restriction covers the entire program.
You’re likely to see this in library functions like printf():
int printf(const char * restrict format, ...);

Again, that’s just telling the compiler that inside the printf() function, there will be only one pointer that
refers to any part of that format string.
One last note: if you’re using array notation in your function parameter for some reason instead of pointer
notation, you can use restrict like so:
void foo(int p[restrict]) // With no size

void foo(int p[restrict 10]) // Or with a size

But pointer notation would be more common.

16.1.3 volatile
You’re unlikely to see or need this unless you’re dealing with hardware directly.
volatile tells the compiler that a value might change behind its back and should be looked up every time.

An example might be where the compiler is looking in memory at an address that continuously updates
behind the scenes, e.g. some kind of hardware timer.
If the compiler decides to optimize that and store the value in a register for a protracted time, the value in
memory will update and won’t be reflected in the register.
By declaring something volatile, you’re telling the compiler, “Hey, the thing this points at might change
at any time for reasons outside this program code.”
volatile int *p;

16.1.4 _Atomic
This is an optional C feature that we’ll talk about in the Atomics chapter.

16.2 Storage-Class Specifiers

Storage-class specifiers are similar to type quantifiers. They give the compiler more information about the
type of a variable.
 Chapter 16. Types IV: Qualifiers and Specifiers 112

16.2.1 auto
You barely ever see this keyword, since auto is the default for block scope variables. It’s implied.
These are the same:
{
int a; // auto is the default...
auto int a; // So this is redundant
}

The auto keyword indicates that this object has automatic storage duration. That is, it exists in the scope in
which it is defined, and is automatically deallocated when the scope is exited.
One gotcha about automatic variables is that their value is indeterminate until you explicitly initialize them.
We say they’re full of “random” or “garbage” data, though neither of those really makes me happy. In any
case, you won’t know what’s in it unless you initialize it.
Always initialize all automatic variables before use!

16.2.2 static
This keyword has two meanings, depending on if the variable is file scope or block scope.
Let’s start with block scope.

16.2.2.1 static in Block Scope

In this case, we’re basically saying, “I just want a single instance of this variable to exist, shared between
calls.”
That is, its value will persist between calls.
static in block scope with an initializer will only be initialized one time on program startup, not each time
the function is called.
Let’s do an example:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 void counter(void)
4 {
5 static int count = 1; // This is initialized one time
6

7 printf("This has been called %d time(s)\n", count);

8

9 count++;
10 }
11

12 int main(void)
13 {
14 counter(); // "This has been called 1 time(s)"
15 counter(); // "This has been called 2 time(s)"
16 counter(); // "This has been called 3 time(s)"
17 counter(); // "This has been called 4 time(s)"
18 }

See how the value of count persists between calls?

One thing of note is that static block scope variables are initialized to 0 by default.
 Chapter 16. Types IV: Qualifiers and Specifiers 113

static int foo; // Default starting value is `0`...

static int foo = 0; // So the `0` assignment is redundant

Finally, be advised that if you’re writing multithreaded programs, you have to be sure you don’t let multiple
threads trample the same variable.

16.2.2.2 static in File Scope

When you get out to file scope, outside any blocks, the meaning rather changes.
Variables at file scope already persist between function calls, so that behavior is already there.
Instead what static means in this context is that this variable isn’t visible outside of this particular source
file. Kinda like “global”, but only in this file.
More on that in the section about building with multiple source files.

16.2.3 extern
The extern storage-class specifier gives us a way to refer to objects in other source files.
Let’s say, for example, the file bar.c had the following as its entirety:
1 // bar.c
2

3 int a = 37;

Just that. Declaring a new int a in file scope.

But what if we had another source file, foo.c, and we wanted to refer to the a that’s in bar.c?
It’s easy with the extern keyword:
1 // foo.c
2

3 extern int a;
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 printf("%d\n", a); // 37, from bar.c!
8

9 a = 99;
10

11 printf("%d\n", a); // Same "a" from bar.c, but it's now 99

12 }

We could have also made the extern int a in block scope, and it still would have referred to the a in
bar.c:
1 // foo.c
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 extern int a;
6

7 printf("%d\n", a); // 37, from bar.c!

8

9 a = 99;
10
 Chapter 16. Types IV: Qualifiers and Specifiers 114

11 printf("%d\n", a); // Same "a" from bar.c, but it's now 99

12 }

Now, if a in bar.c had been marked static. this wouldn’t have worked. static variables at file scope are
not visible outside that file.
A final note about extern on functions. For functions, extern is the default, so it’s redundant. You can
declare a function static if you only want it visible in a single source file.

16.2.4 register
This is a keyword to hint to the compiler that this variable is frequently-used, and should be made as fast as
possible to access. The compiler is under no obligation to agree to it.
Now, modern C compiler optimizers are pretty effective at figuring this out themselves, so it’s rare to see
these days.
But if you must:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 register int a; // Make "a" as fast to use as possible.
6

7 for (a = 0; a < 10; a++)

8 printf("%d\n", a);
9 }

It does come at a price, however. You can’t take the address of a register:
register int a;
int *p = &a; // COMPILER ERROR! Can't take address of a register

The same applies to any part of an array:

register int a[] = {11, 22, 33, 44, 55};
int *p = a; // COMPILER ERROR! Can't take address of a[0]

Or dereferencing part of an array:

register int a[] = {11, 22, 33, 44, 55};

int a = *(a + 2); // COMPILER ERROR! Address of a[0] taken

Interestingly, for the equivalent with array notation, gcc only warns:
register int a[] = {11, 22, 33, 44, 55};

int a = a[2]; // COMPILER WARNING!

with:
warning: ISO C forbids subscripting ‘register’ array

The fact that you can’t take the address of a register variable frees the compiler up to make optimizations
around that assumption if it hasn’t figured them out already. Also adding register to a const variable
prevents one from accidentally passing its pointer to another function that willfully ignore its constness1 .
1
https://gustedt.wordpress.com/2010/08/17/a-common-misconsception-the-register-keyword/
Chapter 16. Types IV: Qualifiers and Specifiers 115

A bit of historic backstory, here: deep inside the CPU are little dedicated “variables” called registers2 . They
are super fast to access compared to RAM, so using them gets you a speed boost. But they’re not in RAM,
so they don’t have an associated memory address (which is why you can’t take the address-of or get a pointer
to them).
But, like I said, modern compilers are really good at producing optimal code, using registers whenever
possible regardless of whether or not you specified the register keyword. Not only that, but the spec
allows them to just treat it as if you’d typed auto, if they want. So no guarantees.

16.2.5 _Thread_local
When you’re using multiple threads and you have some variables in either global or static block scope,
this is a way to make sure that each thread gets its own copy of the variable. This’ll help you avoid race
conditions and threads stepping on each other’s toes.
If you’re in block scope, you have to use this along with either extern or static.
Also, if you include <threads.h>, you can use the rather more palatable thread_local as an alias for the
uglier _Thread_local.
More information can be found in the Threads section.

2
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Processor_register
 Chapter 17

Multifile Projects

So far we’ve been looking at toy programs that for the most part fit in a single file. But complex C programs
are made up of many files that are all compiled and linked together into a single executable.
In this chapter we’ll check out some of the common patterns and practices for putting together larger projects.

17.1 Includes and Function Prototypes

A really common situation is that some of your functions are defined in one file, and you want to call them
from another.
This actually works out of the box with a warning… let’s first try it and then look at the right way to fix the
warning.
For these examples, we’ll put the filename as the first comment in the source.
To compile them, you’ll need to specify all the sources on the command line:
# output file source files
# v v
# |----| |---------|
gcc -o foo foo.c bar.c

In that examples, foo.c and bar.c get built into the executable named foo.
So let’s take a look at the source file bar.c:
1 // File bar.c
2

3 int add(int x, int y)

4 {
5 return x + y;
6 }

And the file foo.c with main in it:

1 // File foo.c
2

3 #include <stdio.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {

116
 Chapter 17. Multifile Projects 117

7 printf("%d\n", add(2, 3)); // 5!

8 }

See how from main() we call add()—but add() is in a completely different source file! It’s in bar.c,
while the call to it is in foo.c!
If we build this with:
gcc -o foo foo.c bar.c

we get this error:

error: implicit declaration of function 'add' is invalid in C99

(Or you might get a warning. Which you should not ignore. Never ignore warnings in C; address them all.)
If you recall from the section on prototypes, implicit declarations are banned in modern C and there’s no
legitimate reason to introduce them into new code. We should fix it.
What implicit declaration means is that we’re using a function, namely add() in this case, without
letting C know anything about it ahead of time. C wants to know what it returns, what types it takes as
arguments, and things such as that.
We saw how to fix that earlier with a function prototype. Indeed, if we add one of those to foo.c before we
make the call, everything works well:
1 // File foo.c
2

3 #include <stdio.h>
4

5 int add(int, int); // Add the prototype

6

7 int main(void)
8 {
9 printf("%d\n", add(2, 3)); // 5!
10 }

No more error!
But that’s a pain—needing to type in the prototype every time you want to use a function. I mean, we used
printf() right there and didn’t need to type in a prototype; what gives?

If you remember from what back with hello.c at the beginning of the book, we actually did include the
prototype for printf()! It’s in the file stdio.h! And we included that with #include!
Can we do the same with our add() function? Make a prototype for it and put it in a header file?
Sure!
Header files in C have a .h extension by default. And they often, but not always, have the same name as
their corresponding .c file. So let’s make a bar.h file for our bar.c file, and we’ll stick the prototype in it:
1 // File bar.h
2

3 int add(int, int);

And now let’s modify foo.c to include that file. Assuming it’s in the same directory, we include it inside
double quotes (as opposed to angle brackets):
1 // File foo.c
2

3 #include <stdio.h>
 Chapter 17. Multifile Projects 118

5 #include "bar.h" // Include from current directory

6

7 int main(void)
8 {
9 printf("%d\n", add(2, 3)); // 5!
10 }

Notice how we don’t have the prototype in foo.c anymore—we included it from bar.h. Now any file that
wants that add() functionality can just #include "bar.h" to get it, and you don’t need to worry about
typing in the function prototype.
As you might have guessed, #include literally includes the named file right there in your source code, just
as if you’d typed it in.
And building and running:
./foo
5

Indeed, we get the result of 2 + 3! Yay!

But don’t crack open your drink of choice quite yet. We’re almost there! There’s just one more piece of
boilerplate we have to add.

17.2 Dealing with Repeated Includes

It’s not uncommon that a header file will itself #include other headers needed for the functionality of its
corresponding C files. I mean, why not?
And it could be that you have a header #included multiple times from different places. Maybe that’s no
problem, but maybe it would cause compiler errors. And we can’t control how many places #include it!
Even, worse we might get into a crazy situation where header a.h includes header b.h, and b.h includes
a.h! It’s an #include infinite cycle!

Trying to build such a thing gives an error:

error: #include nested depth 200 exceeds maximum of 200

What we need to do is make it so that if a file gets included once, subsequent #includes for that file are
ignored.
The stuff that we’re about to do is so common that you should just automatically do it every time you
make a header file!
And the common way to do this is with a preprocessor variable that we set the first time we #include the
file. And then for subsequent #includes, we first check to make sure that the variable isn’t defined.
For that variable name, it’s super common to take the name of the header file, like bar.h, make it uppercase,
and replace the period with an underscore: BAR_H.
So put a check at the very, very top of the file where you see if it’s already been included, and effectively
comment the whole thing out if it has.
(Don’t put a leading underscore (because a leading underscore followed by a capital letter is reserved) or a
double leading underscore (because that’s also reserved.))
1 #ifndef BAR_H // If BAR_H isn't defined...
2 #define BAR_H // Define it (with no particular value)
3
 Chapter 17. Multifile Projects 119

4 // File bar.h
5

6 int add(int, int);

7

8 #endif // End of the #ifndef BAR_H

This will effectively cause the header file to be included only a single time, no matter how many places try
to #include it.

17.3 static and extern

When it comes to multifile projects, you can make sure file-scope variables and functions are not visible
from other source files with the static keyword.
And you can refer to objects in other files with extern.
For more info, check out the sections in the book on the static and extern storage-class specifiers.

17.4 Compiling with Object Files

This isn’t part of the spec, but it’s 99.999% common in the C world.
You can compile C files into an intermediate representation called object files. These are compiled machine
code that hasn’t been put into an executable yet.
Object files in Windows have a .OBJ extension; in Unix-likes, they’re .o.
In gcc, we can build some like this, with the -c (compile only!) flag:
gcc -c foo.c # produces foo.o
gcc -c bar.c # produces bar.o

And then we can link those together into a single executable:

gcc -o foo foo.o bar.o

Voila, we’ve produced an executable foo from the two object files.
But you’re thinking, why bother? Can’t we just:
gcc -o foo foo.c bar.c

and kill two boids1 with one stone?

For little programs, that’s fine. I do it all the time.
But for larger programs, we can take advantage of the fact that compiling from source to object files is
relatively slow, and linking together a bunch of object files is relatively fast.
This really shows with the make utility that only rebuilds sources that are newer than their outputs.
Let’s say you had a thousand C files. You could compile them all to object files to start (slowly) and then
combine all those object files into an executable (fast).
Now say you modified just one of those C source files—here’s the magic: you only have to rebuild that one
object file for that source file! And then you rebuild the executable (fast). All the other C files don’t have to
be touched.
In other words, by only rebuilding the object files we need to, we cut down on compilation times radically.
(Unless of course you’re doing a “clean” build, in which case all the object files have to be created.)
1
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Boids
Chapter 18

The Outside Environment

When you run a program, it’s actually you talking to the shell, saying, “Hey, please run this thing.” And the
shell says, “Sure,” and then tells the operating system, “Hey, could you please make a new process and run
this thing?” And if all goes well, the OS complies and your program runs.
But there’s a whole world outside your program in the shell that can be interacted with from within C. We’ll
look at a few of those in this chapter.

18.1 Command Line Arguments

Many command line utilities accept command line arguments. For example, if we want to see all files that
end in .txt, we can type something like this on a Unix-like system:
ls *.txt

(or dir instead of ls on a Windows system).

In this case, the command is ls, but it arguments are all all files that end with .txt1 .
So how can we see what is passed into program from the command line?
Say we have a program called add that adds all numbers passed on the command line and prints the result:
./add 10 30 5
45

That’s gonna pay the bills for sure!

But seriously, this is a great tool for seeing how to get those arguments from the command line and break
them down.
First, let’s see how to get them at all. For this, we’re going to need a new main()!
Here’s a program that prints out all the command line arguments. For example, if we name the executable
foo, we can run it like this:
./foo i like turtles

and we’ll see this output:

1
Historially, MS-DOS and Windows programs would do this differently than Unix. In Unix, the shell would expand the wildcard
into all matching files before your program saw it, whereas the Microsoft variants would pass the wildcard expression into the program
to deal with. In any case, there are arguments that get passed into the program.

120
 Chapter 18. The Outside Environment 121

arg 0: ./foo
arg 1: i
arg 2: like
arg 3: turtles

It’s a little weird, because the zeroth argument is the name of the executable, itself. But that’s just something
to get used to. The arguments themselves follow directly.
Source:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(int argc, char *argv[])

4 {
5 for (int i = 0; i < argc; i++) {
6 printf("arg %d: %s\n", i, argv[i]);
7 }
8 }

Whoa! What’s going on with the main() function signature? What’s argc and argv2 (pronounced arg-cee
and arg-vee)?
Let’s start with the easy one first: argc. This is the argument count, including the program name, itself. If
you think of all the arguments as an array of strings, which is exactly what they are, then you can think of
argc as the length of that array, which is exactly what it is.

And so what we’re doing in that loop is going through all the argvs and printing them out one at a time, so
for a given input:
./foo i like turtles

we get a corresponding output:

arg 0: ./foo
arg 1: i
arg 2: like
arg 3: turtles

With that in mind, we should be good to go with our adder program.

Our plan:
• Look at all the command line arguments (past argv[0], the program name)
• Convert them to integers
• Add them to a running total
• Print the result
Let’s get to it!
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(int argc, char **argv)

5 {
6 int total = 0;
7

8 for (int i = 1; i < argc; i++) { // Start at 1, the first argument

2
Since they’re just regular parameter names, you don’t actually have to call them argc and argv. But it’s so very idiomatic to use
those names, if you get creative, other C programmers will look at you with a suspicious eye, indeed!
 Chapter 18. The Outside Environment 122

9 int value = atoi(argv[i]); // Use strtol() for better error handling

10

11 total += value;
12 }
13

14 printf("%d\n", total);
15 }

Sample runs:
$ ./add
0
$ ./add 1
1
$ ./add 1 2
3
$ ./add 1 2 3
6
$ ./add 1 2 3 4
10

Of course, it might puke if you pass in a non-integer, but hardening against that is left as an exercise to the
reader.

18.1.1 The Last argv is NULL

One bit of fun trivia about argv is that after the last string is a pointer to NULL.
That is:
argv[argc] == NULL

is always true!
This might seem pointless, but it turns out to be useful in a couple places; we’ll take a look at one of those
right now.

18.1.2 The Alternate: char **argv

Remember that when you call a function, C doesn’t differentiate between array notation and pointer notation
in the function signature.
That is, these are the same:
void foo(char a[])
void foo(char *a)

Now, it’s been convenient to think of argv as an array of strings, i.e. an array of char*s, so this made sense:
int main(int argc, char *argv[])

but because of the equivalence, you could also write:

int main(int argc, char **argv)

Yeah, that’s a pointer to a pointer, all right! If it makes it easier, think of it as a pointer to a string. But really,
it’s a pointer to a value that points to a char.
Also recall that these are equivalent:
 Chapter 18. The Outside Environment 123

argv[i]
*(argv + i)

which means you can do pointer arithmetic on argv.

So an alternate way to consume the command line arguments might be to just walk along the argv array by
bumping up a pointer until we hit that NULL at the end.
Let’s modify our adder to do that:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(int argc, char **argv)

5 {
6 int total = 0;
7

8 // Cute trick to get the compiler to stop warning about the

9 // unused variable argc:
10 (void)argc;
11

12 for (char **p = argv + 1; *p != NULL; p++) {

13 int value = atoi(*p); // Use strtol() for better error handling
14

15 total += value;
16 }
17

18 printf("%d\n", total);
19 }

Personally, I use array notation to access argv, but have seen this style floating around, as well.

18.1.3 Fun Facts

Just a few more things about argc and argv.
• Some environments might not set argv[0] to the program name. If it’s not available, argv[0] will
be an empty string. I’ve never seen this happen.
• The spec is actually pretty liberal with what an implementation can do with argv and where those
values come from. But every system I’ve been on works the same way, as we’ve discussed in this
section.
• You can modify argc, argv, or any of the strings that argv points to. (Just don’t make those strings
longer than they already are!)
• On some Unix-like systems, modifying the string argv[0] results in the output of ps changing3 .
Normally, if you have a program called foo that you’ve run with ./foo, you might see this in the
output of ps:
4078 tty1 S 0:00 ./foo

But if you modify argv[0] like so, being careful that the new string "Hi! " is the same length as
the old one "./foo":
strcpy(argv[0], "Hi! ");

3
ps, Process Status, is a Unix command to see what processes are running at the moment.
Chapter 18. The Outside Environment 124

and then run ps while the program ./foo is still executing, we’ll see this instead:
4079 tty1 S 0:00 Hi!

This behavior is not in the spec and is highly system-dependent.

18.2 Exit Status

Did you notice that the function signatures for main() have it returning type int? What’s that all about?
It has to do with a thing called the exit status, which is an integer that can be returned to the program that
launched yours to let it know how things went.
Now, there are a number of ways a program can exit in C, including returning from main(), or calling one
of the exit() variants.
All of these methods accept an int as an argument.
Side note: did you see that in basically all my examples, even though main() is supposed to return an int,
I don’t actually return anything? In any other function, this would be illegal, but there’s a special case in
C: if execution reaches the end of main() without finding a return, it automatically does a return 0.
But what does the 0 mean? What other numbers can we put there? And how are they used?
The spec is both clear and vague on the matter, as is common. Clear because it spells out what you can do,
but vague in that it doesn’t particularly limit it, either.
Nothing for it but to forge ahead and figure it out!
Let’s get Inception4 for a second: turns out that when you run your program, you’re running it from another
program.
Usually this other program is some kind of shell5 that doesn’t do much on its own except launch other
programs.
But this is a multi-phase process, especially visible in command-line shells:
1. The shell launches your program
2. The shell typically goes to sleep (for command-line shells)
3. Your program runs
4. Your program terminates
5. The shell wakes up and waits for another command
Now, there’s a little piece of communication that takes place between steps 4 and 5: the program can return
a status value that the shell can interrogate. Typically, this value is used to indicate the success or failure of
your program, and, if a failure, what type of failure.
This value is what we’ve been returning from main(). That’s the status.
Now, the C spec allows for two different status values, which have macro names defined in <stdlib.h>:

Status Description
EXIT_SUCCESS or 0 Program terminated successfully.
EXIT_FAILURE Program terminated with an error.

Let’s write a short program that multiplies two numbers from the command line. We’ll require that you
specify exactly two values. If you don’t, we’ll print an error message, and exit with an error status.
4
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Inception
5
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Shell_(computing)
 Chapter 18. The Outside Environment 125

1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(int argc, char **argv)

5 {
6 if (argc != 3) {
7 printf("usage: mult x y\n");
8 return EXIT_FAILURE; // Indicate to shell that it didn't work
9 }
10

11 printf("%d\n", atoi(argv[1]) * atoi(argv[2]));

12

13 return 0; // same as EXIT_SUCCESS, everything was good.

14 }

Now if we try to run this, we get the expected effect until we specify exactly the right number of command-
line arguments:
$ ./mult
usage: mult x y

$ ./mult 3 4 5
usage: mult x y

$ ./mult 3 4
12

But that doesn’t really show the exit status that we returned, does it? We can get the shell to print it out,
though. Assuming you’re running Bash or another POSIX shell, you can use echo $? to see it6 .
Let’s try:
$ ./mult
usage: mult x y
$ echo $?
1

$ ./mult 3 4 5
usage: mult x y
$ echo $?
1

$ ./mult 3 4
12
$ echo $?
0

Interesting! We see that on my system, EXIT_FAILURE is 1. The spec doesn’t spell this out, so it could be
any number. But try it; it’s probably 1 on your system, too.

18.2.1 Other Exit Status Values

The status 0 most definitely means success, but what about all the other integers, even negative ones?
Here we’re going off the C spec and into Unix land. In general, while 0 means success, a positive non-zero
6
In Windows cmd.exe, type echo %errorlevel%. In PowerShell, type $LastExitCode.
 Chapter 18. The Outside Environment 126

number means failure. So you can only have one type of success, and multiple types of failure. Bash says
the exit code should be between 0 and 255, though a number of codes are reserved.
In short, if you want to indicate different error exit statuses in a Unix environment, you can start with 1 and
work your way up.
On Linux, if you try any code outside the range 0-255, it will bitwise AND the code with 0xff, effectively
clamping it to that range.
You can script the shell to later use these status codes to make decisions about what to do next.

18.3 Environment Variables

Before I get into this, I need to warn you that C doesn’t specify what an environment variable is. So I’m
going to describe the environment variable system that works on every major platform I’m aware of.
Basically, the environment is the program that’s going to run your program, e.g. the bash shell. And it might
have some bash variables defined. In case you didn’t know, the shell can make its own variables. Each shell
is different, but in bash you can just type set and it’ll show you all of them.
Here’s an excerpt from the 61 variables that are defined in my bash shell:
HISTFILE=/home/beej/.bash_history
HISTFILESIZE=500
HISTSIZE=500
HOME=/home/beej
HOSTNAME=FBILAPTOP
HOSTTYPE=x86_64
IFS=$' \t\n'

Notice they are in the form of key/value pairs. For example, one key is HOSTTYPE and its value is x86_64.
From a C perspective, all values are strings, even if they’re numbers7 .
So, anyway! Long story short, it’s possible to get these values from inside your C program.
Let’s write a program that uses the standard getenv() function to look up a value that you set in the shell.
getenv() will return a pointer to the value string, or else NULL if the environment variable doesn’t exist.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char *val = getenv("FROTZ"); // Try to get the value
7

8 // Check to make sure it exists

9 if (val == NULL) {
10 printf("Cannot find the FROTZ environment variable\n");
11 return EXIT_FAILURE;
12 }
13

14 printf("Value: %s\n", val);

15 }

If I run this directly, I get this:

7
If you need a numeric value, convert the string with something like atoi() or strtol().
 Chapter 18. The Outside Environment 127

$ ./foo
Cannot find the FROTZ environment variable

which makes sense, since I haven’t set it yet.

In bash, I can set it to something with8 :
$ export FROTZ="C is awesome!"

Then if I run it, I get:

$ ./foo
Value: C is awesome!

In this way, you can set up data in environment variables, and you can get it in your C code and modify your
behavior accordingly.

18.3.1 Setting Environment Variables

This isn’t standard, but a lot of systems provide ways to set environment variables.
If on a Unix-like, look up the documentation for putenv(), setenv(), and unsetenv(). On Windows, see
_putenv().

18.3.2 Unix-like Alternative Environment Variables

If you’re on a Unix-like system, odds are you have another couple ways of getting access to environment
variables. Note that although the spec points this out as a common extension, it’s not truly part of the C
standard. It is, however, part of the POSIX standard.
One of these is a variable called environ that must be declared like so:
extern char **environ;

It’s an array of strings terminated with a NULL pointer.

You should declare it yourself before you use it, or you might find it in the non-standard <unistd.h> header
file.
Each string is in the form "key=value" so you’ll have to split it and parse it yourself if you want to get the
keys and values out.
Here’s an example of looping through and printing out the environment variables a couple different ways:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 extern char **environ; // MUST be extern AND named "environ"

4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 for (char **p = environ; *p != NULL; p++) {
8 printf("%s\n", *p);
9 }
10

11 // Or you could do this:

12 for (int i = 0; environ[i] != NULL; i++) {
13 printf("%s\n", environ[i]);
14 }
15 }

8
In Windows CMD.EXE, use set FROTZ=value. In PowerShell, use $Env:FROTZ=value.
 Chapter 18. The Outside Environment 128

For a bunch of output that looks like this:

SHELL=/bin/bash
COLORTERM=truecolor
TERM_PROGRAM_VERSION=1.53.2
LOGNAME=beej
HOME=/home/beej
... etc ...

Use getenv() if at all possible because it’s more portable. But if you have to iterate over environment
variables, using environ might be the way to go.
Another non-standard way to get the environment variables is as a parameter to main(). It works much the
same way, but you avoid needing to add your extern environ variable. Not even the POSIX spec supports
this9 as far as I can tell, but it’s common in Unix land.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(int argc, char **argv, char **env) // <-- env!

4 {
5 (void)argc; (void)argv; // Suppress unused warnings
6

7 for (char **p = env; *p != NULL; p++) {

8 printf("%s\n", *p);
9 }
10

11 // Or you could do this:

12 for (int i = 0; env[i] != NULL; i++) {
13 printf("%s\n", env[i]);
14 }
15 }

Just like using environ but even less portable. It’s good to have goals.

9
https://pubs.opengroup.org/onlinepubs/9699919799/functions/exec.html
Chapter 19

The C Preprocessor

Before your program gets compiled, it actually runs through a phase called preprocessing. It’s almost like
there’s a language on top of the C language that runs first. And it outputs the C code, which then gets
compiled.
We’ve already seen this to an extent with #include! That’s the C Preprocessor! Where it sees that directive,
it includes the named file right there, just as if you’d typed it in there. And then the compiler builds the whole
thing.
But it turns out it’s a lot more powerful than just being able to include things. You can define macros that
are substituted… and even macros that take arguments!

19.1 #include
Let’s start with the one we’ve already seen a bunch. This is, of course, a way to include other sources in your
source. Very commonly used with header files.
While the spec allows for all kinds of behavior with #include, we’re going to take a more pragmatic ap-
proach and talk about the way it works on every system I’ve ever seen.
We can split header files into two categories: system and local. Things that are built-in, like stdio.h,
stdlib.h, math.h, and so on, you can include with angle brackets:
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdlib.h>

The angle brackets tell C, “Hey, don’t look in the current directory for this header file—look in the system-
wide include directory instead.”
Which, of course, implies that there must be a way to include local files from the current directory. And there
is: with double quotes:
#include "myheader.h"

Or you can very probably look in relative directories using forward slashes and dots, like this:
#include "mydir/myheader.h"
#include "../someheader.py"

Don’t use a backslash (\) for your path separators in your #include! It’s undefined behavior! Use forward
slash (/) only, even on Windows.

129
 Chapter 19. The C Preprocessor 130

In summary, used angle brackets (< and >) for the system includes, and use double quotes (") for your personal
includes.

19.2 Simple Macros

A macro is an identifier that gets expanded to another piece of code before the compiler even sees it. Think
of it like a placeholder—when the preprocessor sees one of those identifiers, it replaces it with another value
that you’ve defined.
We do this with #define (often read “pound define”). Here’s an example:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 #define HELLO "Hello, world"

4 #define PI 3.14159
5

6 int main(void)
7 {
8 printf("%s, %f\n", HELLO, PI);
9 }

On lines 3 and 4 we defined a couple macros. Wherever these appear elsewhere in the code (line 8), they’ll
be substituted with the defined values.
From the C compiler’s perspective, it’s exactly as if we’d written this, instead:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 printf("%s, %f\n", "Hello, world", 3.14159);
6 }

See how HELLO was replaced with "Hello, world" and PI was replaced with 3.14159? From the com-
piler’s perspective, it’s just like those values had appeared right there in the code.
Note that the macros don’t have a specific type, per se. Really all that happens is they get replaced wholesale
with whatever they’re #defined as. If the resulting C code is invalid, the compiler will puke.
You can also define a macro with no value:
#define EXTRA_HAPPY

in that case, the macro exists and is defined, but is defined to be nothing. So anyplace it occurs in the text
will just be replaced with nothing. We’ll see a use for this later.
It’s conventional to write macro names in ALL_CAPS even though that’s not technically required.
Overall, this gives you a way to define constant values that are effectively global and can be used any place.
Even in those places where a const variable won’t work, e.g. in switch cases and fixed array lengths.
That said, the debate rages online whether a typed const variable is better than #define macro in the general
case.
It can also be used to replace or modify keywords, a concept completely foreign to const, though this practice
should be used sparingly.
 Chapter 19. The C Preprocessor 131

19.3 Conditional Compilation

It’s possible to get the preprocessor to decide whether or not to present certain blocks of code to the compiler,
or just remove them entirely before compilation.
We do that by basically wrapping up the code in conditional blocks, similar to if-else statements.

19.3.1 If Defined, #ifdef and #endif

First of all, let’s try to compile specific code depending on whether or not a macro is even defined.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 #define EXTRA_HAPPY
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7

8 #ifdef EXTRA_HAPPY
9 printf("I'm extra happy!\n");
10 #endif
11

12 printf("OK!\n");
13 }

In that example, we define EXTRA_HAPPY (to be nothing, but it is defined), then on line 8 we check to see
if it is defined with an #ifdef directive. If it is defined, the subsequent code will be included up until the
#endif.

So because it is defined, the code will be included for compilation and the output will be:
I'm extra happy!
OK!

If we were to comment out the #define, like so:

//#define EXTRA_HAPPY

then it wouldn’t be defined, and the code wouldn’t be included in compilation. And the output would just
be:
OK!

It’s important to remember that these decisions happen at compile time! The code actually gets compiled or
removed depending on the condition. This is in contrast to a standard if statement that gets evaluated while
the program is running.

19.3.2 If Not Defined, #ifndef

There’s also the negative sense of “if defined”: “if not defined”, or #ifndef. We could change the previous
example to output different things based on whether or not something was defined:
8 #ifdef EXTRA_HAPPY
9 printf("I'm extra happy!\n");
10 #endif
11

12 #ifndef EXTRA_HAPPY
13 printf("I'm just regular\n");
14 #endif
 Chapter 19. The C Preprocessor 132

We’ll see a cleaner way to do that in the next section.

Tying it all back in to header files, we’ve seen how we can cause header files to only be included one time
by wrapping them in preprocessor directives like this:
#ifndef MYHEADER_H // First line of myheader.h
#define MYHEADER_H

int x = 12;

#endif // Last line of myheader.h

This demonstrates how a macro persists across files and multiple #includes. If it’s not yet defined, let’s
define it and compile the whole header file.
But the next time it’s included, we see that MYHEADER_H is defined, so we don’t send the header file to the
compiler—it gets effectively removed.

19.3.3 #else
But that’s not all we can do! There’s also an #else that we can throw in the mix.
Let’s mod the previous example:
8 #ifdef EXTRA_HAPPY
9 printf("I'm extra happy!\n");
10 #else
11 printf("I'm just regular\n");
12 #endif

Now if EXTRA_HAPPY is not defined, it’ll hit the #else clause and print:
I'm just regular

19.3.4 General Conditional: #if, #elif

This works very much like the #ifdef and #ifndef directives in that you can also have an #else and the
whole thing wraps up with #endif.
The only difference is that the constant expression after the #if must evaluate to true (non-zero) for the code
in the #if to be compiled. So instead of whether or not something is defined, we want an expression that
evaluates to true.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 #define HAPPY_FACTOR 1
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7

8 #if HAPPY_FACTOR == 0
9 printf("I'm not happy!\n");
10 #elif HAPPY_FACTOR == 1
11 printf("I'm just regular\n");
12 #else
13 printf("I'm extra happy!\n");
14 #endif
15
 Chapter 19. The C Preprocessor 133

16 printf("OK!\n");
17 }

Again, for the unmatched #if clauses, the compiler won’t even see those lines. For the above code, after the
preprocessor gets finished with it, all the compiler sees is:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5

6 printf("I'm just regular\n");

7

8 printf("OK!\n");
9 }

One hackish thing this is used for is to comment out large numbers of lines quickly1 .
If you put an #if 0 (“if false”) at the front of the block to be commented out and an #endif at the end, you
can get this effect:
#if 0
printf("All this code"); /* is effectively */
printf("commented out"); // by the #if 0
#endif

You might have noticed that there’s no #elifdef or #elifndef directives. How can we get the same effect
with #if? That is, what if I wanted this:
#ifdef FOO
x = 2;
#elifdef BAR // ERROR: Not supported by standard C
x = 3;
#endif

How could I do it?

Turns out there’s a preprocessor operator called defined that we can use with an #if statement.
These are equivalent:
#ifdef FOO
#if defined FOO
#if defined(FOO) // Parentheses optional

As are these:
#ifndef FOO
#if !defined FOO
#if !defined(FOO) // Parentheses optional

Notice how we can use the standard logical NOT operator (!) for “not defined”.
So now we’re back in #if land and we can use #elif with impunity!
This broken code:
#ifdef FOO
x = 2;
#elifdef BAR // ERROR: Not supported by standard C

1
You can’t always just wrap the code in /* */ comments because those won’t nest.
 Chapter 19. The C Preprocessor 134

x = 3;
#endif

can be replaced with:

#if defined FOO
x = 2;
#elif defined BAR
x = 3;
#endif

19.3.5 Losing a Macro: #undef

If you’ve defined something but you don’t need it any longer, you can undefine it with #undef.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 #define GOATS
6

7 #ifdef GOATS
8 printf("Goats detected!\n"); // prints
9 #endif
10

11 #undef GOATS // Make GOATS no longer defined

12

13 #ifdef GOATS
14 printf("Goats detected, again!\n"); // doesn't print
15 #endif
16 }

19.4 Built-in Macros

The standard defines a lot of built-in macros that you can test and use for conditional compilation. Let’s look
at those here.

19.4.1 Mandatory Macros

These are all defined:

Macro Description
__DATE__ The date of compilation—like when you’re
compiling this file—in Mmm dd yyyy format
__TIME__ The time of compilation in hh:mm:ss format
__FILE__ A string containing this file’s name
__LINE__ The line number of the file this macro appears on
__func__ The name of the function this appears in, as a string2
__STDC__ Defined with 1 if this is a standard C compiler

2
This isn’t really a macro—it’s technically an identifier. But it’s the only predefined identifier and it feels very macro-like, so I’m
including it here. Like a rebel.
 Chapter 19. The C Preprocessor 135

Macro Description
__STDC_HOSTED__ This will be 1 if the compiler is a hosted
implementation3 , otherwise 0
__STDC_VERSION__ This version of C, a constant long int in the form
yyyymmL, e.g. 201710L

Let’s put these together.

1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 printf("This function: %s\n", __func__);
6 printf("This file: %s\n", __FILE__);
7 printf("This line: %d\n", __LINE__);
8 printf("Compiled on: %s %s\n", __DATE__, __TIME__);
9 printf("C Version: %ld\n", __STDC_VERSION__);
10 }

The output on my system is:

This function: main
This file: foo.c
This line: 7
Compiled on: Nov 23 2020 17:16:27
C Version: 201710

__FILE__, __func__ and __LINE__ are particularly useful to report error conditions in messages to devel-
opers. The assert() macro in <assert.h> uses these to call out where in the code the assertion failed.

19.4.1.1 __STDC_VERSION__s
In case you’re wondering, here are the version numbers for different major releases of the C Language Spec:

Release ISO/IEC version __STDC_VERSION__

C89 ISO/IEC 9899:1990 undefined
C89 ISO/IEC 9899:1990/Amd.1:1995 199409L
C99 ISO/IEC 9899:1999 199901L
C11 ISO/IEC 9899:2011/Amd.1:2012 201112L

Note the macro did not exist originally in C89.

Also note that the plan is that the version numbers will strictly increase, so you could always check for, say,
“at least C99” with:
#if __STDC_VERSION__ >= 1999901L

19.4.2 Optional Macros

Your implementation might define these, as well. Or it might not.

3
A hosted implementation basically means you’re running the full C standard, probably on an operating system of some kind. Which
you probably are. If you’re running on bare metal in some kind of embedded system, you’re probably on a standalone implementation.
 Chapter 19. The C Preprocessor 136

Macro Description
__STDC_ISO_10646__ If defined, wchar_t holds Unicode values,
otherwise something else
__STDC_MB_MIGHT_NEQ_WC__ A 1 indicates that the values in multibyte characters
might not map equally to values in wide characters
__STDC_UTF_16__ A 1 indicates that the system uses UTF-16 encoding
in type char16_t
__STDC_UTF_32__ A 1 indicates that the system uses UTF-32 encoding
in type char32_t
__STDC_ANALYZABLE__ A 1 indicates the code is analyzable4
__STDC_IEC_559__ 1 if IEEE-754 (aka IEC 60559) floating point is
supported
__STDC_IEC_559_COMPLEX__ 1 if IEC 60559 complex floating point is supported
__STDC_LIB_EXT1__ 1 if this implementation supports a variety of “safe”
alternate standard library functions (they have _s
suffixes on the name)
__STDC_NO_ATOMICS__ 1 if this implementation does not support _Atomic
or <stdatomic.h>
__STDC_NO_COMPLEX__ 1 if this implementation does not support complex
types or <complex.h>
__STDC_NO_THREADS__ 1 if this implementation does not support
<threads.h>
__STDC_NO_VLA__ 1 if this implementation does not support
variable-length arrays

19.5 Macros with Arguments

Macros are more powerful than simple substitution, though. You can set them up to take arguments that are
substituted in, as well.
A question often arises for when to use parameterized macros versus functions. Short answer: use functions.
But you’ll see lots of macros in the wild and in the standard library. People tend to use them for short, mathy
things, and also for features that might change from platform to platform. You can define different keywords
for one platform or another.

19.5.1 Macros with One Argument

Let’s start with a simple one that squares a number:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 #define SQR(x) x * x // Not quite right, but bear with me

4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 printf("%d\n", SQR(12)); // 144
8 }

What that’s saying is “everywhere you see SQR with some value, replace it with that value times itself”.
So line 7 will be changed to:
4
OK, I know that was a cop-out answer. Basically there’s an optional extension compilers can implement wherein they agree to limit
certain types of undefined behavior so that the C code is more amenable to static code analysis. It is unlikely you’ll need to use this.
 Chapter 19. The C Preprocessor 137

7 printf("%d\n", 12 * 12); // 144

which C comfortably converts to 144.

But we’ve made an elementary error in that macro, one that we need to avoid.
Let’s check it out. What if we wanted to compute SQR(3 + 4)? Well, 3 + 4 = 7, so we must want to
compute 72 = 49. That’s it; 49—final answer.
Let’s drop it in our code and see that we get… 19?
7 printf("%d\n", SQR(3 + 4)); // 19!!??

What happened?
If we follow the macro expansion, we get
7 printf("%d\n", 3 + 4 * 3 + 4); // 19!

Oops! Since multiplication takes precedence, we do the 4 × 3 = 12 first, and get 3 + 12 + 4 = 19. Not
what we were after.
So we have to fix this to make it right.
This is so common that you should automatically do it every time you make a parameterized math
macro!
The fix is easy: just add some parentheses!
3 #define SQR(x) (x) * (x) // Better... but still not quite good enough!

And now our macro expands to:

7 printf("%d\n", (3 + 4) * (3 + 4)); // 49! Woo hoo!

But we actually still have the same problem which might manifest if we have a higher-precedence operator
than multiply (*) nearby.
So the safe, proper way to put the macro together is to wrap the whole thing in additional parentheses, like
so:
3 #define SQR(x) ((x) * (x)) // Good!

Just make it a habit to do that when you make a math macro and you can’t go wrong.

19.5.2 Macros with More than One Argument

You can stack these things up as much as you want:
#define TRIANGLE_AREA(w, h) (0.5 * (w) * (h))

Let’s do some macros that solve for 𝑥 using the quadratic formula. Just in case you don’t have it on the top
of your head, it says for equations of the form:
𝑎𝑥2 + 𝑏𝑥 + 𝑐 = 0
you can solve for 𝑥 with the quadratic formula:
√
−𝑏 ± 𝑏2 − 4𝑎𝑐
𝑥=
2𝑎
Which is crazy. Also notice the plus-or-minus (±) in there, indicating that there are actually two solutions.
So let’s make macros for both:
 Chapter 19. The C Preprocessor 138

#define QUADP(a, b, c) ((-(b) + sqrt((b) * (b) - 4 * (a) * (c))) / (2 * (a)))

#define QUADM(a, b, c) ((-(b) - sqrt((b) * (b) - 4 * (a) * (c))) / (2 * (a)))

So that gets us some math. But let’s define one more that we can use as arguments to printf() to print both
answers.
// macro replacement
// |-----------| |----------------------------|
#define QUAD(a, b, c) QUADP(a, b, c), QUADM(a, b, c)

That’s just a couple values separated by a comma—and we can use that as a “combined” argument of sorts
to printf() like this:
printf("x = %f or x = %f\n", QUAD(2, 10, 5));

Let’s put it together into some code:

1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h> // For sqrt()
3

4 #define QUADP(a, b, c) ((-(b) + sqrt((b) * (b) - 4 * (a) * (c))) / (2 * (a)))

5 #define QUADM(a, b, c) ((-(b) - sqrt((b) * (b) - 4 * (a) * (c))) / (2 * (a)))
6 #define QUAD(a, b, c) QUADP(a, b, c), QUADM(a, b, c)
7

8 int main(void)
9 {
10 printf("2*x^2 + 10*x + 5 = 0\n");
11 printf("x = %f or x = %f\n", QUAD(2, 10, 5));
12 }

And this gives us the output:

2*x^2 + 10*x + 5 = 0
x = -0.563508 or x = -4.436492

Plugging in either of those values gives us roughly zero (a bit off because the numbers aren’t exact):
2 × −0.5635082 + 10 × −0.563508 + 5 ≈ 0.000003

19.5.3 Macros with Variable Arguments

There’s also a way to have a variable number of arguments passed to a macro, using ellipses (...) after
the known, named arguments. When the macro is expanded, all of the extra arguments will be in a comma-
separated list in the __VA_ARGS__ macro, and can be replaced from there:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 // Combine the first two arguments to a single number,

4 // then have a commalist of the rest of them:
5

6 #define X(a, b, ...) (10*(a) + 20*(b)), __VA_ARGS__

7

8 int main(void)
9 {
10 printf("%d %f %s %d\n", X(5, 4, 3.14, "Hi!", 12));
11 }

The substitution that takes place on line 10 would be:

 Chapter 19. The C Preprocessor 139

10 printf("%d %f %s %d\n", (10*(5) + 20*(4)), 3.14, "Hi!", 12);

for output:
130 3.140000 Hi! 12

You can also “stringify” __VA_ARGS__ by putting a # in front of it:

#define X(...) #__VA_ARGS__

printf("%s\n", X(1,2,3)); // Prints "1, 2, 3"

19.5.4 Stringification
Already mentioned, just above, you can turn any argument into a string by preceding it with a # in the
replacement text.
For example, we could print anything as a string with this macro and printf():
#define STR(x) #x

printf("%s\n", STR(3.14159));

In that case, the substitution leads to:

printf("%s\n", "3.14159");

Let’s see if we can use this to greater effect so that we can pass any int variable name into a macro, and
have it print out it’s name and value.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 #define PRINT_INT_VAL(x) printf("%s = %d\n", #x, x)

4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 int a = 5;
8

9 PRINT_INT_VAL(a); // prints "a = 5"

10 }

On line 9, we get the following macro replacement:

9 printf("%s = %d\n", "a", 5);

19.5.5 Concatenation
We can concatenate two arguments together with ##, as well. Fun times!
#define CAT(a, b) a ## b

printf("%f\n", CAT(3.14, 1592)); // 3.141592

19.6 Multiline Macros

It’s possible to continue a macro to multiple lines if you escape the newline with a backslash (\).
Let’s write a multiline macro that prints numbers from 0 to the product of the two arguments passed in.
 Chapter 19. The C Preprocessor 140

1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 #define PRINT_NUMS_TO_PRODUCT(a, b) do { \
4 int product = (a) * (b); \
5 for (int i = 0; i < product; i++) { \
6 printf("%d\n", i); \
7 } \
8 } while(0)
9

10 int main(void)
11 {
12 PRINT_NUMS_TO_PRODUCT(2, 4); // Outputs numbers from 0 to 7
13 }

A couple things to note there:

• Escapes at the end of every line except the last one to indicate that the macro continues.
• The whole thing is wrapped in a do-while(0) loop with squirrley braces.
The latter point might be a little weird, but it’s all about absorbing the trailing ; the coder drops after the
macro.
At first I thought that just using squirrely braces would be enough, but there’s a case where it fails if the coder
puts a semicolon after the macro. Here’s that case:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 #define FOO(x) { (x)++; }

4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 int i = 0;
8

9 if (i == 0)
10 FOO(i);
11 else
12 printf(":-(\n");
13

14 printf("%d\n", i);
15 }

Looks simple enough, but it won’t build without a syntax error:

foo.c:11:5: error: ‘else’ without a previous ‘if’

Do you see it?

Let’s look at the expansion:

if (i == 0) {
(i)++;
}; // <-- Trouble with a capital-T!

else
printf(":-(\n");
Chapter 19. The C Preprocessor 141

The ; puts an end to the if statement, so the else is just floating out there illegally5 .
So wrap that multiline macro with a do-while(0).

19.7 Example: An Assert Macro

Adding asserts to your code is a good way to catch conditions that you think shouldn’t happen. C provides
assert() functionality. It checks a condition, and if it’s false, the program bombs out telling you the file
and line number on which the assertion failed.
But this is wanting.
1. First of all, you can’t specify an additional message with the assert.
2. Secondly, there’s no easy on-off switch for all the asserts.
We can address the first with macros.
Basically, when I have this code:
ASSERT(x < 20, "x must be under 20");

I want something like this to happen (assuming the ASSERT() is on line 220 of foo.c):
if (!(x < 20)) {
fprintf(stderr, "foo.c:220: assertion x < 20 failed: ");
fprintf(stderr, "x must be under 20\n");
exit(1);
}

We can get the filename out of the __FILE__ macro, and the line number from __LINE__. The message is
already a string, but x < 20 is not, so we’ll have to stringify it with #. We can make a multiline macro by
using backslash escapes at the end of the line.
#define ASSERT(c, m) \
do { \
if (!(c)) { \
fprintf(stderr, __FILE__ ":%d: assertion %s failed: %s\n", \
__LINE__, #c, m); \
exit(1); \
} \
} while(0)

(It looks a little weird with __FILE__ out front like that, but remember it is a string literal, and string literals
next to each other are automagically concatenated. __LINE__ on the other hand, it’s just an int.)
And that works! If I run this:
int x = 30;

ASSERT(x < 20, "x must be under 20");

I get this output:

foo.c:23: assertion x < 20 failed: x must be under 20

Very nice!
The only thing left is a way to turn it on and off, and we could do that with conditional compilation.
Here’s the complete example:
5
Breakin’ the law… breakin’ the law…
 Chapter 19. The C Preprocessor 142

1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 #define ASSERT_ENABLED 1
5

6 #if ASSERT_ENABLED
7 #define ASSERT(c, m) \
8 do { \
9 if (!(c)) { \
10 fprintf(stderr, __FILE__ ":%d: assertion %s failed: %s\n", \
11 __LINE__, #c, m); \
12 exit(1); \
13 } \
14 } while(0)
15 #else
16 #define ASSERT(c, m) // Empty macro if not enabled
17 #endif
18

19 int main(void)
20 {
21 int x = 30;
22

23 ASSERT(x < 20, "x must be under 20");

24 }

This has the output:

foo.c:23: assertion x < 20 failed: x must be under 20

19.8 The #error Directive

This directive causes the compiler to error out as soon as it sees it.
Commonly, this is used inside a conditional to prevent compilation unless some prerequisites are met:
#ifndef __STDC_IEC_559__
#error I really need IEEE-754 floating point to compile. Sorry!
#endif

Some compilers have a non-standard complementary #warning directive that will output a warning but not
stop compilation, but this is not in the C11 spec.

19.9 The #pragma Directive

This is one funky directive, short for “pragmatic”. You can use it to do… well, anything your compiler
supports you doing with it.
Basically the only time you’re going to add this to your code is if some documentation tells you to do so.

19.9.1 Non-Standard Pragmas

Here’s one non-standard example of using #pragma to cause the compiler to execute a for loop in parallel
with multiple threads (if the compiler supports the OpenMP6 extension):
6
https://www.openmp.org/
Chapter 19. The C Preprocessor 143

#pragma omp parallel for

for (int i = 0; i < 10; i++) { ... }

There are all kinds of #pragma directives documented across all four corners of the globe.
All unrecognized #pragmas are ignored by the compiler.

19.9.2 Standard Pragmas

There are also a few standard ones, and these start with STDC, and follow the same form:
#pragma STDC pragma_name on-off

The on-off portion can be either ON, OFF, or DEFAULT.

And the pragma_name can be one of these:

Pragma Name Description

FP_CONTRACT Allow floating point expressions to be contracted
into a single operation to avoid rounding errors that
might occur from multiple operations.
FENV_ACCESS Set to ON if you plan to access the floating point
status flags. If OFF, the compiler might perform
optimizations that cause the values in the flags to be
inconsistent or invalid.
CX_LIMITED_RANGE Set to ON to allow the compiler to skip overflow
checks when performing complex arithmetic.
Defaults to OFF.

For example:
#pragma STDC FP_CONTRACT OFF
#pragma STDC CX_LIMITED_RANGE ON

As for CX_LIMITED_RANGE, the spec points out:

The purpose of the pragma is to allow the implementation to use the formulas:
(𝑥 + 𝑖𝑦) × (𝑢 + 𝑖𝑣) = (𝑥𝑢 − 𝑦𝑣) + 𝑖(𝑦𝑢 + 𝑥𝑣)
(𝑥 + 𝑖𝑦)/(𝑢 + 𝑖𝑣) = [(𝑥𝑢 + 𝑦𝑣) + 𝑖(𝑦𝑢 − 𝑥𝑣)]/(𝑢2 + 𝑣2 )
|𝑥 + 𝑖𝑦| = √𝑥2 + 𝑦2
where the programmer can determine they are safe.

19.9.3 _Pragma Operator

This is another way to declare a pragma that you could use in a macro.
These are equivalent:
#pragma "Unnecessary" quotes
_Pragma("\"Unnecessary\" quotes")

This can be used in a macro, if need be:

#define PRAGMA(x) _Pragma(#x)
Chapter 19. The C Preprocessor 144

19.10 The #line Directive

This allows you to override the values for __LINE__ and __FILE__. If you want.
I’ve never wanted to do this, but in K&R2, they write:
For the benefit of other preprocessors that generate C programs […]
So maybe there’s that.
To override the line number to, say 300:
#line 300

and __LINE__ will keep counting up from there.

To override the line number and the filename:
#line 300 "newfilename"

19.11 The Null Directive

A # on a line by itself is ignored by the preprocessor. Now, to be entirely honest, I don’t know what the use
case is for this.
I’ve seen examples like this:
#ifdef FOO
#
#else
printf("Something");
#endif

which is just cosmetic; the line with the solitary # can be deleted with no ill effect.
Or maybe for cosmetic consistency, like this:
#
#ifdef FOO
x = 2;
#endif
#
#if BAR == 17
x = 12;
#endif
#

But, with respect to cosmetics, that’s just ugly.

Another post mentions elimination of comments—that in GCC, a comment after a # will not be seen by the
compiler. Which I don’t doubt, but the specification doesn’t seem to say this is standard behavior.
My searches for rationale aren’t bearing much fruit. So I’m going to just say this is some good ol’ fashioned
C esoterica.
 Chapter 20

structs II: More Fun with structs

Turns out there’s a lot more you can do with structs than we’ve talked about, but it’s just a big pile of
miscellaneous things. So we’ll throw them in this chapter.
If you’re good with struct basics, you can round out your knowledge here.

20.1 Initializers of Nested structs and Arrays

Remember how you could initialize structure members along these lines?
struct foo x = {.a=12, .b=3.14};

Turns out we have more power in these initializers than we’d originally shared. Exciting!
For one thing, if you have a nested substructure like the following, you can initialize members of that sub-
structure by following the variable names down the line:
struct foo x = {.a.b.c=12};

Let’s look at an example:

1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 struct cabin_information {
4 int window_count;
5 int o2level;
6 };
7

8 struct spaceship {
9 char *manufacturer;
10 struct cabin_information ci;
11 };
12

13 int main(void)
14 {
15 struct spaceship s = {
16 .manufacturer="General Products",
17 .ci.window_count = 8, // <-- NESTED INITIALIZER!
18 .ci.o2level = 21
19 };
20

145
 Chapter 20. structs II: More Fun with structs 146

21 printf("%s: %d seats, %d%% oxygen\n",

22 s.manufacturer, s.ci.window_count, s.ci.o2level);
23 }

Check out lines 16-17! That’s where we’re initializing members of the struct cabin_information in the
definition of s, our struct spaceship.
And here is another option for that same initializer—this time we’ll do something more standard-looking,
but either approach works:
15 struct spaceship s = {
16 .manufacturer="General Products",
17 .ci={
18 .window_count = 8,
19 .o2level = 21
20 }
21 };

Now, as if the above information isn’t spectacular enough, we can also mix in array initializers in there, too.
Let’s change this up to get an array of passenger information in there, and we can check out how the initializers
work in there, too.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 struct passenger {
4 char *name;
5 int covid_vaccinated; // Boolean
6 };
7

8 #define MAX_PASSENGERS 8
9

10 struct spaceship {
11 char *manufacturer;
12 struct passenger passenger[MAX_PASSENGERS];
13 };
14

15 int main(void)
16 {
17 struct spaceship s = {
18 .manufacturer="General Products",
19 .passenger = {
20 // Initialize a field at a time
21 [0].name = "Gridley, Lewis",
22 [0].covid_vaccinated = 0,
23

24 // Or all at once
25 [7] = {.name="Brown, Teela", .covid_vaccinated=1},
26 }
27 };
28

29 printf("Passengers for %s ship:\n", s.manufacturer);

30

31 for (int i = 0; i < MAX_PASSENGERS; i++)

32 if (s.passenger[i].name != NULL)
33 printf(" %s (%svaccinated)\n",
 Chapter 20. structs II: More Fun with structs 147

34 s.passenger[i].name,
35 s.passenger[i].covid_vaccinated? "": "not ");
36 }

20.2 Anonymous structs

These are “the struct with no name”. We also mention these in the typedef section, but we’ll refresh here.
Here’s a regular struct:
struct animal {
char *name;
int leg_count, speed;
};

And here’s the anonymous equivalent:

struct { // <-- No name!
char *name;
int leg_count, speed;
};

Okaaaaay. So we have a struct, but it has no name, so we have no way of using it later? Seems pretty
pointless.
Admittedly, in that example, it is. But we can still make use of it a couple ways.
One is rare, but since the anonymous struct represents a type, we can just put some variable names after it
and use them.
struct { // <-- No name!
char *name;
int leg_count, speed;
} a, b, c; // 3 variables of this struct type

a.name = "antelope";
c.leg_count = 4; // for example

But that’s still not that useful.

Far more common is use of anonymous structs with a typedef so that we can use it later (e.g. to pass
variables to functions).
typedef struct { // <-- No name!
char *name;
int leg_count, speed;
} animal; // New type: animal

animal a, b, c;

a.name = "antelope";
c.leg_count = 4; // for example

Personally, I don’t use many anonymous structs. I think it’s more pleasant to see the entire struct animal
before the variable name in a declaration.
But that’s just, like, my opinion, man.
 Chapter 20. structs II: More Fun with structs 148

20.3 Self-Referential structs

For any graph-like data structure, it’s useful to be able to have pointers to the connected nodes/vertices. But
this means that in the definition of a node, you need to have a pointer to a node. It’s chicken and eggy!
But it turns out you can do this in C with no problem whatsoever.
For example, here’s a linked list node:
struct node {
int data;
struct node *next;
};

It’s important to note that next is a pointer. This is what allows the whole thing to even build. Even though
the compiler doesn’t know what the entire struct node looks like yet, all pointers are the same size.
Here’s a cheesy linked list program to test it out:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 struct node {
5 int data;
6 struct node *next;
7 };
8

9 int main(void)
10 {
11 struct node *head;
12

13 // Hackishly set up a linked list (11)->(22)->(33)

14 head = malloc(sizeof(struct node));
15 head->data = 11;
16 head->next = malloc(sizeof(struct node));
17 head->next->data = 22;
18 head->next->next = malloc(sizeof(struct node));
19 head->next->next->data = 33;
20 head->next->next->next = NULL;
21

22 // Traverse it
23 for (struct node *cur = head; cur != NULL; cur = cur->next) {
24 printf("%d\n", cur->data);
25 }
26 }

Running that prints:

11
22
33

20.4 Flexible Array Members

Back in the good old days, when people carved C code out of wood, some folks thought would be neat if
they could allocate structs that had variable length arrays at the end of them.
Chapter 20. structs II: More Fun with structs 149

I want to be clear that the first part of the section is the old way of doing things, and we’re going to do things
the new way after that.
For example, maybe you could define a struct for holding strings and the length of that string. It would
have a length and an array to hold the data. Maybe something like this:
struct len_string {
int length;
char data[8];
};

But that has 8 hardcoded as the maximum length of a string, and that’s not much. What if we did something
clever and just malloc()d some extra space at the end after the struct, and then let the data overflow into
that space?
Let’s do that, and then allocate another 40 bytes on top of it:
struct len_string *s = malloc(sizeof *s + 40);

Because data is the last field of the struct, if we overflow that field, it runs out into space that we already
allocated! For this reason, this trick only works if the short array is the last field in the struct.
// Copy more than 8 bytes!

strcpy(s->data, "Hello, world!"); // Won't crash. Probably.

In fact, there was a common compiler workaround for doing this, where you’d allocate a zero length array at
the end:
struct len_string {
int length;
char data[0];
};

And then every extra byte you allocated was ready for use in that string.
Because data is the last field of the struct, if we overflow that field, it runs out into space that we already
allocated!
// Copy more than 8 bytes!

strcpy(s->data, "Hello, world!"); // Won't crash. Probably.

But, of course, actually accessing the data beyond the end of that array is undefined behavior! In these
modern times, we no longer deign to resort to such savagery.
Luckily for us, we can still get the same effect with C99 and later, but now it’s legal.
Let’s just change our above definition to have no size for the array1 :
struct len_string {
int length;
char data[];
};

Again, this only works if the flexible array member is the last field in the struct.
And then we can allocate all the space we want for those strings by malloc()ing larger than the struct
len_string, as we do in this example that makes a new struct len_string from a C string:
1
Technically we say that it has an incomplete type.
 Chapter 20. structs II: More Fun with structs 150

struct len_string *len_string_from_c_string(char *s)

{
int len = strlen(s);

// Allocate "len" more bytes than we'd normally need

struct len_string *ls = malloc(sizeof *ls + len);

ls->length = len;

// Copy the string into those extra bytes

memcpy(ls->data, s, len);

return ls;
}

20.5 Padding Bytes

Beware that C is allowed to add padding bytes within or after a struct as it sees fit. You can’t trust that they
will be directly adjacent in memory2 .
Let’s take a look at this program. We output two numbers. One is the sum of the sizeofs the individual
field types. The other is the sizeof the entire struct.
One would expect them to be the same. The size of the total is the size of the sum of its parts, right?
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 struct foo {
4 int a;
5 char b;
6 int c;
7 char d;
8 };
9

10 int main(void)
11 {
12 printf("%zu\n", sizeof(int) + sizeof(char) + sizeof(int) + sizeof(char));
13 printf("%zu\n", sizeof(struct foo));
14 }

But on my system, this outputs:

10
16

They’re not the same! The compiler has added 6 bytes of padding to help it be more performant. Maybe you
got different output with your compiler, but unless you’re forcing it, you can’t be sure there’s no padding.

20.6 offsetof
In the previous section, we saw that the compiler could inject padding bytes at will inside a structure.
What if we needed to know where those were? We can measure it with offsetof, defined in <stddef.h>.
2
Though some compilers have options to force this to occur—search for __attribute__((packed)) to see how to do this with
GCC.
 Chapter 20. structs II: More Fun with structs 151

Let’s modify the code from above to print the offsets of the individual fields in the struct:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stddef.h>
3

4 struct foo {
5 int a;
6 char b;
7 int c;
8 char d;
9 };
10

11 int main(void)
12 {
13 printf("%zu\n", offsetof(struct foo, a));
14 printf("%zu\n", offsetof(struct foo, b));
15 printf("%zu\n", offsetof(struct foo, c));
16 printf("%zu\n", offsetof(struct foo, d));
17 }

For me, this outputs:

0
4
8
12

indicating that we’re using 4 bytes for each of the fields. It’s a little weird, because char is only 1 byte, right?
The compiler is putting 3 padding bytes after each char so that all the fields are 4 bytes long. Presumably
this will run faster on my CPU.

20.7 Fake OOP

There’s a slightly abusive thing that’s sort of OOP-like that you can do with structs.
Since the pointer to the struct is the same as a pointer to the first element of the struct, you can freely
cast a pointer to the struct to a pointer to the first element.
What this means is that we can set up a situation like this:
struct parent {
int a, b;
};

struct child {
struct parent super; // MUST be first
int c, d;
};

Then we are able to pass a pointer to a struct child to a function that expects either that or a pointer to a
struct parent!

Because struct parent super is the first item in the struct child, a pointer to any struct child is
the same as a pointer to that super field3 .
3
super isn’t a keyword, incidentally. I’m just stealing some OOP terminology.
 Chapter 20. structs II: More Fun with structs 152

Let’s set up an example here. We’ll make structs as above, but then we’ll pass a pointer to a struct child
to a function that needs a pointer to a struct parent… and it’ll still work.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 struct parent {
4 int a, b;
5 };
6

7 struct child {
8 struct parent super; // MUST be first
9 int c, d;
10 };
11

12 // Making the argument `void*` so we can pass any type into it

13 // (namely a struct parent or struct child)
14 void print_parent(void *p)
15 {
16 // Expects a struct parent--but a struct child will also work
17 // because the pointer points to the struct parent in the first
18 // field:
19 struct parent *self = p;
20

21 printf("Parent: %d, %d\n", self->a, self->b);

22 }
23

24 void print_child(struct child *self)

25 {
26 printf("Child: %d, %d\n", self->c, self->d);
27 }
28

29 int main(void)
30 {
31 struct child c = {.super.a=1, .super.b=2, .c=3, .d=4};
32

33 print_child(&c);
34 print_parent(&c); // Also works even though it's a struct child!
35 }

See what we did on the last line of main()? We called print_parent() but passed a struct child*
as the argument! Even though print_parent() needs the argument to point to a struct parent, we’re
getting away with it because the first field in the struct child is a struct parent.
Again, this works because a pointer to a struct has the same value as a pointer to the first field in that
struct.

This all hinges on this part of the spec:

§6.7.2.1¶15 […] A pointer to a structure object, suitably converted, points to its initial member
[…], and vice versa.
and
§6.5¶7 An object shall have its stored value accessed only by an lvalue expression that has one
of the following types:
• a type compatible with the effective type of the object
• […]
 Chapter 20. structs II: More Fun with structs 153

and my assumption that “suitably converted” means “cast to the effective type of the initial member”.

20.8 Bit-Fields
In my experience, these are rarely used, but you might see them out there from time to time, especially in
lower-level applications that pack bits together into larger spaces.
Let’s take a look at some code to demonstrate a use case:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 struct foo {
4 unsigned int a;
5 unsigned int b;
6 unsigned int c;
7 unsigned int d;
8 };
9

10 int main(void)
11 {
12 printf("%zu\n", sizeof(struct foo));
13 }

For me, this prints 16. Which makes sense, since unsigneds are 4 bytes on my system.
But what if we knew that all the values that were going to be stored in a and b could be stored in 5 bits, and
the values in c, and d could be stored in 3 bits? That’s only a total 16 bits. Why have 128 bits reserved for
them if we’re only going to use 16?
Well, we can tell C to pretty-please try to pack these values in. We can specify the maximum number of bits
that values can take (from 1 up the size of the containing type).
We do this by putting a colon after the field name, followed by the field width in bits.
3 struct foo {
4 unsigned int a:5;
5 unsigned int b:5;
6 unsigned int c:3;
7 unsigned int d:3;
8 };

Now when I ask C how big my struct foo is, it tells me 4! It was 16 bytes, but now it’s only 4. It has
“packed” those 4 values down into 4 bytes, which is a four-fold memory savings.
The tradeoff is, of course, that the 5-bit fields can only hold values from 0-31 and the 3-bit fields can only
hold values from 0-7. But life’s all about compromise, after all.

20.8.1 Non-Adjacent Bit-Fields

A gotcha: C will only combine adjacent bit-fields. If they’re interrupted by non-bit-fields, you get no
savings:
struct foo { // sizeof(struct foo) == 16 (for me)
unsigned int a:1; // since a is not adjacent to c.
unsigned int b;
unsigned int c:1;
unsigned int d;
};
Chapter 20. structs II: More Fun with structs 154

In that example, since a is not adjacent to c, they are both “packed” in their own ints.
So we have one int each for a, b, c, and d. Since my ints are 4 bytes, that’s a grand total of 16 bytes.
A quick rearrangement yields some space savings from 16 bytes down to 12 bytes (on my system):
struct foo { // sizeof(struct foo) == 12 (for me)
unsigned int a:1;
unsigned int c:1;
unsigned int b;
unsigned int d;
};

And now, since a is next to c, the compiler puts them together into a single int.
So we have one int for a combined a and c, and one int each for b and d. For a grand total of 3 ints, or
12 bytes.
Put all your bitfields together to get the compiler to combine them.

20.8.2 Signed or Unsigned ints

If you just declare a bit-field to be int, the different compilers will treat it as signed or unsigned. Just like
the situation with char.
Be specific about the signedness when using bit-fields.

20.8.3 Unnamed Bit-Fields

In some specific circumstances, you might need to reserve some bits for hardware reasons, but not need to
use them in code.
For example, let’s say you have a byte where the top 2 bits have a meaning, the bottom 1 bit has a meaning,
but the middle 5 bits do not get used by you4 .
We could do something like this:
struct foo {
unsigned char a:2;
unsigned char dummy:5;
unsigned char b:1;
};

And that works—in our code we use a and b, but never dummy. It’s just there to eat up 5 bits to make sure a
and b are in the “required” (by this contrived example) positions within the byte.
C allows us a way to clean this up: unnamed bit-fields. You can just leave the name (dummy) out in this case,
and C is perfectly happy for the same effect:
struct foo {
unsigned char a:2;
unsigned char :5; // <-- unnamed bit-field!
unsigned char b:1;
};

20.8.4 Zero-Width Unnamed Bit-Fields

Some more esoterica out here… Let’s say you were packing bits into an unsigned int, and you needed
some adjacent bit-fields to pack into the next unsigned int.
4
Assuming 8-bit chars, i.e. CHAR_BIT == 8.
Chapter 20. structs II: More Fun with structs 155

That is, if you do this:

struct foo {
unsigned int a:1;
unsigned int b:2;
unsigned int c:3;
unsigned int d:4;
};

the compiler packs all those into a single unsigned int. But what if you needed a and b in one int, and c
and d in a different one?
There’s a solution for that: put an unnamed bit-field of width 0 where you want the compiler to start anew
with packing bits in a different int:
struct foo {
unsigned int a:1;
unsigned int b:2;
unsigned int :0; // <--Zero-width unnamed bit-field
unsigned int c:3;
unsigned int d:4;
};

It’s analogous to an explicit page break in a word processor. You’re telling the compiler, “Stop packing bits
in this unsigned, and start packing them in the next one.”
By adding the zero-width unnamed bit field in that spot, the compiler puts a and b in one unsigned int,
and c and d in another unsigned int. Two total, for a size of 8 bytes on my system (unsigned ints are
4 bytes each).

20.9 Unions
These are basically just like structs, except the fields overlap in memory. The union will be only large
enough for the largest field, and you can only use one field at a time.
It’s a way to reuse the same memory space for different types of data.
You declare them just like structs, except it’s union. Take a look at this:
union foo {
int a, b, c, d, e, f;
float g, h;
char i, j, k, l;
};

Now, that’s a lot of fields. If this were a struct, my system would tell me it took 36 bytes to hold it all.
But it’s a union, so all those fields overlap in the same stretch of memory. The biggest one is int (or float),
taking up 4 bytes on my system. And, indeed, if I ask for the sizeof the union foo, it tells me 4!
The tradeoff is that you can only portably use one of those fields at a time. However…

20.9.1 Unions and Type Punning

You can non-portably write to one union field and read from another!
Doing so is called type punning5 , and you’d use it if you really knew what you were doing, typically with
some kind of low-level programming.
5
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Type_punning
 Chapter 20. structs II: More Fun with structs 156

Since the members of a union share the same memory, writing to one member necessarily affects the others.
And if you read from one what was written to another, you get some weird effects.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 union foo {
4 float b;
5 short a;
6 };
7

8 int main(void)
9 {
10 union foo x;
11

12 x.b = 3.14159;
13

14 printf("%f\n", x.b); // 3.14159, fair enough

15

16 printf("%d\n", x.a); // But what about this?

17 }

On my system, this prints out:

3.141590
4048

because under the hood, the object representation for the float 3.14159 was the same as the object represen-
tation for the short 4048. On my system. Your results may vary.

20.9.2 Pointers to unions

If you have a pointer to a union, you can cast that pointer to any of the types of the fields in that union and
get the values out that way.
In this example, we see that the union has ints and floats in it. And we get pointers to the union, but
we cast them to int* and float* types (the cast silences compiler warnings). And then if we dereference
those, we see that they have the values we stored directly in the union.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 union foo {
4 int a, b, c, d, e, f;
5 float g, h;
6 char i, j, k, l;
7 };
8

9 int main(void)
10 {
11 union foo x;
12

13 int *foo_int_p = (int *)&x;

14 float *foo_float_p = (float *)&x;
15

16 x.a = 12;
17 printf("%d\n", x.a); // 12
18 printf("%d\n", *foo_int_p); // 12, again
19
 Chapter 20. structs II: More Fun with structs 157

20 x.g = 3.141592;
21 printf("%f\n", x.g); // 3.141592
22 printf("%f\n", *foo_float_p); // 3.141592, again
23 }

The reverse is also true. If we have a pointer to a type inside the union, we can cast that to a pointer to the
union and access its members.
union foo x;
int *foo_int_p = (int *)&x; // Pointer to int field
union foo *p = (union foo *)foo_int_p; // Back to pointer to union

p->a = 12; // This line the same as...

x.a = 12; // this one.

All this just lets you know that, under the hood, all these values in a union start at the same place in memory,
and that’s the same as where the entire union is.

20.9.3 Common Initial Sequences in Unions

If you have a union of structs, and all those structs begin with a common initial sequence, it’s valid to
access members of that sequence from any of the union members.
What?
Here are two structs with a common initial sequence:
struct a {
int x; //
float y; // Common initial sequence

char *p;
};

struct b {
int x; //
float y; // Common initial sequence

double *p;
short z;
};

Do you see it? It’s that they start with int followed by float—that’s the common initial sequence. The
members in the sequence of the structs have to be compatible types. And we see that with x and y, which
are int and float respectively.
Now let’s build a union of these:
union foo {
struct a sa;
struct b sb;
};

What this rule tells us is that we’re guaranteed that the members of the common initial sequences are inter-
changeable in code. That is:
• f.sa.x is the same as f.sb.x.
and
 Chapter 20. structs II: More Fun with structs 158

• f.sa.y is the same as f.sb.y.

Because fields x and y are both in the common initial sequence.
Also, the names of the members in the common initial sequence don’t matter—all that matters is that the
types are the same.
All together, this allows us a way to safely add some shared information between structs in the union. The
best example of this is probably using a field to determine the type of struct out of all the structs in the
union that is currently “in use”.

That is, if we weren’t allowed this and we passed the union to some function, how would that function know
which member of the union was the one it should look at?
Take a look at these structs. Note the common initial sequence:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 struct common {
4 int type; // common initial sequence
5 };
6

7 struct antelope {
8 int type; // common initial sequence
9

10 int loudness;
11 };
12

13 struct octopus {
14 int type; // common initial sequence
15

16 int sea_creature;
17 float intelligence;
18 };

Now let’s throw them into a union:

20 union animal {
21 struct common common;
22 struct antelope antelope;
23 struct octopus octopus;
24 };

Also, please indulge me these two #defines for the demo:

26 #define ANTELOPE 1
27 #define OCTOPUS 2

So far, nothing special has happened here. It seems like the type field is completely useless.
But now let’s make a generic function that prints a union animal. It has to somehow be able to tell if it’s
looking at a struct antelope or a struct octopus.
Because of the magic of common initial sequences, it can look up the animal type in any of these places for
a particular union animal x:
int type = x.common.type; \\ or...
int type = x.antelope.type; \\ or...
int type = x.octopus.type;

All those refer to the same value in memory.

 Chapter 20. structs II: More Fun with structs 159

And, as you might have guessed, the struct common is there so code can agnostically look at the type
without mentioning a particular animal.
Let’s look at the code to print a union animal:
29 void print_animal(union animal *x)
30 {
31 switch (x->common.type) {
32 case ANTELOPE:
33 printf("Antelope: loudness=%d\n", x->antelope.loudness);
34 break;
35

36 case OCTOPUS:
37 printf("Octopus : sea_creature=%d\n", x->octopus.sea_creature);
38 printf(" intelligence=%f\n", x->octopus.intelligence);
39 break;
40

41 default:
42 printf("Unknown animal type\n");
43 }
44

45 }
46

47 int main(void)
48 {
49 union animal a = {.antelope.type=ANTELOPE, .antelope.loudness=12};
50 union animal b = {.octopus.type=OCTOPUS, .octopus.sea_creature=1,
51 .octopus.intelligence=12.8};
52

53 print_animal(&a);
54 print_animal(&b);
55 }

See how on line 29 we’re just passing in the union—we have no idea what type of animal struct is in use
within it.
But that’s OK! Because on line 31 we check the type to see if it’s an antelope or an octopus. And then we
can look at the proper struct to get the members.
It’s definitely possible to get this same effect using just structs, but you can do it this way if you want the
memory-saving effects of a union.

20.10 Unions and Unnamed Structs

You know how you can have an unnamed struct, like this:
struct {
int x, y;
} s;

That defines a variable s that is of anonymous struct type (because the struct has no name tag), with
members x and y.
So things like this are valid:
s.x = 34;
s.y = 90;
 Chapter 20. structs II: More Fun with structs 160

printf("%d %d\n", s.x, s.y);

Turns out you can drop those unnamed structs in unions just like you might expect:
union foo {
struct { // unnamed!
int x, y;
} a;

struct { // unnamed!
int z, w;
} b;
};

And then access them as per normal:

union foo f;

f.a.x = 1;
f.a.y = 2;
f.b.z = 3;
f.b.w = 4;

No problem!

20.11 Passing and Returning structs and unions

You can pass a struct or union to a function by value (as opposed to a pointer to it)—a copy of that object
to the parameter will be made as if by assignment as per usual.
You can also return a struct or union from a function and it is also passed by value back.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 struct foo {
4 int x, y;
5 };
6

7 struct foo f(void)

8 {
9 return (struct foo){.x=34, .y=90};
10 }
11

12 int main(void)
13 {
14 struct foo a = f(); // Copy is made
15

16 printf("%d %d\n", a.x, a.y);

17 }

Fun fact: if you do this, you can use the . operator right off the function call:
16 printf("%d %d\n", f().x, f().y);

(Of course that example calls the function twice, inefficiently.)

Chapter 20. structs II: More Fun with structs 161

And the same holds true for returning pointers to structs and unions—just be sure to use the -> arrow
operator in that case.
Chapter 21

Characters and Strings II

We’ve talked about how char types are actually just small integer types… but it’s the same for a character
in single quotes.
But a string in double quotes is type const char *.
Turns out there are few more types of strings and characters, and it leads down one of the most infamous
rabbit holes in the language: the whole multibyte/wide/Unicode/localization thingy.
We’re going to peer into that rabbit hole, but not go in. …Yet!

21.1 Escape Sequences

We’re used to strings and characters with regular letters, punctuation, and numbers:
char *s = "Hello!";
char t = 'c';

But what if we want some special characters in there that we can’t type on the keyboard because they don’t
exist (e.g. “€”), or even if we want a character that’s a single quote? We clearly can’t do this:
char t = ''';

To do these things, we use something called escape sequences. These are the backslash character (\) followed
by another character. The two (or more) characters together have special meaning.
For our single quote character example, we can put an escape (that is, \) in front of the central single quote
to solve it:
char t = '\'';

Now C knows that \' means just a regular quote we want to print, not the end of the character sequence.
You can say either “backslash” or “escape” in this context (“escape that quote”) and C devs will know what
you’re talking about. Also, “escape” in this context is different than your Esc key or the ASCII ESC code.

21.1.1 Frequently-used Escapes

In my humble opinion, these escape characters make up 99.2%1 of all escapes.

1
I just made up that number, but it’s probably not far off

162
 Chapter 21. Characters and Strings II 163

Code Description
\n Newline character—when printing, continue subsequent output on the next line
\' Single quote—used for a single quote character constant
\" Double quote—used for a double quote in a string literal
\\ Backslash—used for a literal \ in a string or character

Here are some examples of the escapes and what they output when printed.
printf("Use \\n for newline\n"); // Use \n for newline
printf("Say \"hello\"!\n"); // Say "hello"!
printf("%c\n", '\''); // '

21.1.2 Rarely-used Escapes

But there are more escapes! You just don’t see these as often.

Code Description
\a Alert. This makes the terminal make a sound or flash, or both!
\b Backspace. Moves the cursor back a character. Doesn’t delete the character.
\f Formfeed. This moves to the next “page”, but that doesn’t have much modern meaning.
On my system, this behaves like \v.
\r Return. Move to the beginning of the same line.
\t Horizontal tab. Moves to the next horizontal tab stop. On my machine, this lines up on
columns that are multiples of 8, but YMMV.
\v Vertical tab. Moves to the next vertical tab stop. On my machine, this moves to the same
column on the next line.
\? Literal question mark. Sometimes you need this to avoid trigraphs, as shown below.

21.1.2.1 Single Line Status Updates

A use case for \b or \r is to show status updates that appear on the same line on the screen and don’t cause
the display to scroll. Here’s an example that does a countdown from 10. (Note this makes use of the non-
standard POSIX function sleep() from <unistd.h>—if you’re not on a Unix-like, search for your platform
and sleep for the equivalent.)
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 for (int i = 10; i >= 0; i--) {
7 printf("\rT minus %d second%s... \b", i, i != 1? "s": "");
8

9 fflush(stdout); // Force output to update

10

11 // Sleep for 1 second

12 thrd_sleep(&(struct timespec){.tv_sec=1}, NULL);
13 }
14

15 printf("\rLiftoff! \n");
16 }
Chapter 21. Characters and Strings II 164

Quite a few things are happening on line 7. First of all, we lead with a \r to get us to the beginning of the
current line, then we overwrite whatever’s there with the current countdown. (There’s ternary operator out
there to make sure we print 1 second instead of 1 seconds.)
Also, there’s a space after the ... That’s so that we properly overwrite the last . when i drops from 10 to
9 and we get a column narrower. Try it without the space to see what I mean.

And we wrap it up with a \b to back up over that space so the cursor sits at the exact end of the line in an
aesthetically-pleasing way.
Note that line 14 also has a lot of spaces at the end to overwrite the characters that were already there from
the countdown.
Finally, we have a weird fflush(stdout) in there, whatever that means. Short answer is that most termi-
nals are line buffered by default, meaning they don’t actually display anything until a newline character is
encountered. Since we don’t have a newline (we just have \r), without this line, the program would just
sit there until Liftoff! and then print everything all in one instant. fflush() overrides this behavior and
forces output to happen right now.

21.1.2.2 The Question Mark Escape

Why bother with this? After all, this works just fine:
printf("Doesn't it?\n");

And it works fine with the escape, too:

printf("Doesn't it\?\n"); // Note \?

So what’s the point??!

Let’s get more emphatic with another question mark and an exclamation point:
printf("Doesn't it??!\n");

When I compile this, I get this warning:

foo.c: In function ‘main’:
foo.c:5:23: warning: trigraph ??! converted to | [-Wtrigraphs]
5 | printf("Doesn't it??!\n");
|

And running it gives this unlikely result:

Doesn't it|

So trigraphs? What the heck is this??!

I’m sure we’ll revisit this dusty corner of the language later, but the short of it is the compiler looks for certain
triplets of characters starting with ?? and it substitutes other characters in their place. So if you’re on some
ancient terminal without a pipe symbol (|) on the keyboard, you can type ??! instead.
You can fix this by escaping the second question mark, like so:
printf("Doesn't it?\?!\n");

And then it compiles and works as-expected.

These days, of course, no one ever uses trigraphs. But that whole ??! does sometimes appear if you decide
to use it in a string for emphasis.
Chapter 21. Characters and Strings II 165

21.1.3 Numeric Escapes

In addition, there are ways to specify numeric constants or other character values inside strings or character
constants.
If you know an octal or hexadecimal representation of a byte, you can include that in a string or character
constant.
The following table has example numbers, but any hex or octal numbers may be used. Pad with leading zeros
if necessary to read the proper digit count.

Code Description
\123 Embed the byte with octal value 123, 3 digits exactly.
\x4D Embed the byte with hex value 4D, 2 digits.
\u2620 Embed the Unicode character at code point with hex value 2620, 4 digits.
\U0001243F Embed the Unicode character at code point with hex value 1243F, 8 digits.

Here’s an example of the less-commonly used octal notation to represent the letter B in between A and C.
Normally this would be used for some kind of special unprintable character, but we have other ways to do
that, below, and this is just an octal demo:
printf("A\102C\n"); // 102 is `B` in ASCII/UTF-8

Note there’s no leading zero on the octal number when you include it this way. But it does need to be three
characters, so pad with leading zeros if you need to.
But far more common is to use hex constants these days. Here’s a demo that you shouldn’t use, but it demos
embedding the UTF-8 bytes 0xE2, 0x80, and 0xA2 in a string, which corresponds to the Unicode “bullet”
character (•).
printf("\xE2\x80\xA2 Bullet 1\n");
printf("\xE2\x80\xA2 Bullet 2\n");
printf("\xE2\x80\xA2 Bullet 3\n");

Produces the following output if you’re on a UTF-8 console (or probably garbage if you’re not):
• Bullet 1
• Bullet 2
• Bullet 3

But that’s a crummy way to do Unicode. You can use the escapes \u (16-bit) or \U (32-bit) to just refer to
Unicode by code point number. The bullet is 2022 (hex) in Unicode, so you can do this and get more portable
results:
printf("\u2022 Bullet 1\n");
printf("\u2022 Bullet 2\n");
printf("\u2022 Bullet 3\n");

Be sure to pad \u with enough leading zeros to get to four characters, and \U with enough to get to eight.
For example, that bullet could be done with \U and four leading zeros:
printf("\U00002022 Bullet 1\n");

But who has time to be that verbose?

Chapter 22

Enumerated Types: enum

C offers us another way to have constant integer values by name: enum.

For example:
enum {
> TWO=2
};

printf("%d %d", ONE, TWO); // 1 2

In some ways, it can be better—or different—than using a #define. Key differences:

• enums can only be integer types.
• #define can define anything at all.
• enums are often shown by their symbolic identifier name in a debugger.
• #defined numbers just show as raw numbers which are harder to know the meaning of while debug-
ging.
Since they’re integer types, they can be used any place integers can be used, including in array dimensions
and case statements.
Let’s tear into this more.

22.1 Behavior of enum

22.1.1 Numbering
enums are automatically numbered unless you override them.

They start at 0, and autoincrement up from there, by default:

enum {
SHEEP, // Value is 0
WHEAT, // Value is 1
WOOD, // Value is 2
BRICK, // Value is 3
ORE // Value is 4
};

printf("%d %d\n", SHEEP, BRICK); // 0 3

166
Chapter 22. Enumerated Types: enum 167

You can force particular integer values, as we saw earlier:

enum {
X=2,
Y=18,
Z=-2
};

Duplicates are not a problem:

enum {
X=2,
Y=2,
Z=2
};

if values are omitted, numbering continues counting in the positive direction from whichever value was last
specified. For example:
enum {
A, // 0, default starting value
B, // 1
C=4, // 4, manually set
D, // 5
E, // 6
F=3 // 3, manually set
G, // 4
H // 5
}

22.1.2 Trailing Commas

This is perfectly fine, if that’s your style:
enum {
X=2,
Y=18,
Z=-2, // <-- Trailing comma
};

It’s gotten more popular in languages of the recent decades so you might be pleased to see it.

22.1.3 Scope
enums scope as you’d expect. If at file scope, the whole file can see it. If in a block, it’s local to that block.

It’s really common for enums to be defined in header files so they can be #included at file scope.

22.1.4 Style
As you’ve noticed, it’s common to declare the enum symbols in uppercase (with underscores).
This isn’t a requirement, but is a very, very common idiom.

22.2 Your enum is a Type

This is an important thing to know about enum: they’re a type, analogous to how a struct is a type.
Chapter 22. Enumerated Types: enum 168

You can give them a tag name so you can refer to the type later and declare variables of that type.
Now, since enums are integer types, why not just use int?
In C, the best reason for this is code clarity–it’s a nice, typed way to describe your thinking in code. C (unlike
C++) doesn’t actually enforce any values being in range for a particular enum.
Let’s do an example where we declare a variable r of type enum resource that can hold those values:
// Named enum, type is "enum resource"

enum resource {
SHEEP,
WHEAT,
WOOD,
BRICK,
ORE
};

// Declare a variable "r" of type "enum resource"

enum resource r = BRICK;

if (r == BRICK) {
printf("I'll trade you a brick for two sheep.\n");
}

You can also typedef these, of course, though I personally don’t like to.
typedef enum {
SHEEP,
WHEAT,
WOOD,
BRICK,
ORE
} RESOURCE;

RESOURCE r = BRICK;

Another shortcut that’s legal but rare is to declare variables when you declare the enum:
// Declare an enum and some initialized variables of that type:

enum {
SHEEP,
WHEAT,
WOOD,
BRICK,
ORE
} r = BRICK, s = WOOD;

You can also give the enum a name so you can use it later, which is probably what you want to do in most
cases:
// Declare an enum and some initialized variables of that type:

enum resource { // <-- type is now "enum resource"

SHEEP,
Chapter 22. Enumerated Types: enum 169

WHEAT,
WOOD,
BRICK,
ORE
} r = BRICK, s = WOOD;

In short, enums are a great way to write nice, scoped, typed, clean code.
 Chapter 23

Pointers III: Pointers to Pointers and

More

Here’s where we cover some intermediate and advanced pointer usage. If you don’t have pointers down well,
review the previous chapters on pointers and pointer arithmetic before starting on this stuff.

23.1 Pointers to Pointers

If you can have a pointer to a variable, and a variable can be a pointer, can you have a pointer to a variable
that it itself a pointer?
Yes! This is a pointer to a pointer, and it’s held in variable of type pointer-pointer.
Before we tear into that, I want to try for a gut feel for how pointers to pointers work.
Remember that a pointer is just a number. It’s a number that represents an index in computer memory,
typically one that holds a value we’re interested in for some reason.
That pointer, which is a number, has to be stored somewhere. And that place is memory, just like everything
else1 .
But because it’s stored in memory, it must have an index it’s stored at, right? The pointer must have an index
in memory where it is stored. And that index is a number. It’s the address of the pointer. It’s a pointer to the
pointer.
Let’s start with a regular pointer to an int, back from the earlier chapters:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int x = 3490; // Type: int
6 int *p = &x; // Type: pointer to an int
7

8 printf("%d\n", *p); // 3490

9 }

1
There’s some devil in the details with values that are stored in registers only, but we can safely ignore that for our purposes here.
Also the C spec makes no stance on these “register” things beyond the register keyword, the description for which doesn’t mention
registers.

170
 Chapter 23. Pointers III: Pointers to Pointers and More 171

Straightforward enough, right? We have two types represented: int and int*, and we set up p to point to x.
Then we can dereference p on line 8 and print out the value 3490.
But, like we said, we can have a pointer to any variable… so does that mean we can have a pointer to p?
In other words, what type is this expression?
int x = 3490; // Type: int
int *p = &x; // Type: pointer to an int

&p // <-- What type is the address of p? AKA a pointer to p?

If x is an int, then &x is a pointer to an int that we’ve stored in p which is type int*. Follow? (Repeat this
paragraph until you do!)
And therefore &p is a pointer to an int*, AKA a “pointer to a pointer to an int”. AKA “int-pointer-pointer”.
Got it? (Repeat the previous paragraph until you do!)
We write this type with two asterisks: int **. Let’s see it in action.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int x = 3490; // Type: int
6 int *p = &x; // Type: pointer to an int
7 int **q = &p; // Type: pointer to pointer to int
8

9 printf("%d %d\n", *p, **q); // 3490 3490

10 }

Let’s make up some pretend addresses for the above values as examples and see what these three variables
might look like in memory. The address values, below are just made up by me for example purposes:

Variable Stored at Address Value Stored There

x 28350 3490—the value from the code
p 29122 28350—the address of x!
q 30840 29122—the address of p!

Indeed, let’s try it for real on my computer2 and print out the pointer values with %p and I’ll do the same table
again with actual references (printed in hex).

Variable Stored at Address Value Stored There

x 0x7ffd96a07b94 3490—the value from the code
p 0x7ffd96a07b98 0x7ffd96a07b94—the address of x!
q 0x7ffd96a07ba0 0x7ffd96a07b98—the address of p!

You can see those addresses are the same except the last byte, so just focus on those.
On my system, ints are 4 bytes, which is why we’re seeing the address go up by 4 from x to p3 and then
goes up by 8 from p to q. On my system, all pointers are 8 bytes.
2
You’re very likely to get different numbers on yours.
3
There is absolutely nothing in the spec that says this will always work this way, but it happens to work this way on my system.
Chapter 23. Pointers III: Pointers to Pointers and More 172

Does it matter if it’s an int* or an int**? Is one more bytes than the other? Nope! Remember that all
pointers are addresses, that is indexes into memory. And on my machine you can represent an index with 8
bytes… doesn’t matter what’s stored at that index.
Now check out what we did there on line 9 of the previous example: we double dereferenced q to get back
to our 3490.
This is the important bit about pointers and pointers to pointers:
• You can get a pointer to anything with & (including to a pointer!)
• You can get the thing a pointer points to with * (including a pointer!)
So you can think of & as being used to make pointers, and * being the inverse—it goes the opposite direction
of &—to get to the thing pointed to.
In terms of type, each time you &, that adds another pointer level to the type.

If you have Then you run The result type is

int x &x int *
int *x &x int **
int **x &x int ***
int ***x &x int ****

And each time you use dereference (*), it does the opposite:

If you have Then you run The result type is

int ****x *x int ***
int ***x *x int **
int **x *x int *
int *x *x int

Note that you can use multiple *s in a row to quickly dereference, just like we saw in the example code with
**q, above. Each one strips away one level of indirection.

If you have Then you run The result type is

int ****x ***x int *
int ***x **x int *
int **x **x int

In general, &*E == E4 . The dereference “undoes” the address-of.

But & doesn’t work the same way—you can only do those one at a time, and have to store the result in an
intermediate variable:
int x = 3490; // Type: int
int *p = &x; // Type: int *, pointer to an int
int **q = &p; // Type: int **, pointer to pointer to int
int ***r = &q; // Type: int ***, pointer to pointer to pointer to int
int ****s = &r; // Type: int ****, you get the idea
int *****t = &s; // Type: int *****

4
Even if E is NULL, it turns out, weirdly.
 Chapter 23. Pointers III: Pointers to Pointers and More 173

23.1.1 Pointer Pointers and const

If you recall, declaring a pointer like this:
int *const p;

means that you can’t modify p. Trying to p++ would give you a compile-time error.
But how does that work with int ** or int ***? Where does the const go, and what does it mean?
Let’s start with the simple bit. The const right next to the variable name refers to that variable. So if you
want an int*** that you can’t change, you can do this:
int ***const p;

p++; // Not allowed

But here’s where things get a little weird.

What if we had this situation:
1 int main(void)
2 {
3 int x = 3490;
4 int *const p = &x;
5 int **q = &p;
6 }

When I build that, I get a warning:

warning: initialization discards ‘const’ qualifier from pointer target type
7 | int **q = &p;
| ^

What’s going on? The

That is, we’re saying that q is type int **, and if you dereference that, the rightmost * in the type goes away.
So after the dereference, we have type int *.
And we’re assigning &p into it which is a pointer to an int *const, or, in other words, int *const *.
But q is int **! A type with different constness on the first *! So we get a warning that the const in p’s
int *const * is being ignored and thrown away.

We can fix that by making sure q’s type is at least as const as p.

int x = 3490;
int *const p = &x;
int *const *q = &p;

And now we’re happy.

We could make q even more const. As it is, above, we’re saying, “q isn’t itself const, but the thing it points
to is const.” But we could make them both const:
int x = 3490;
int *const p = &x;
int *const *const q = &p; // More const!

And that works, too. Now we can’t modify q, or the pointer q points to.
 Chapter 23. Pointers III: Pointers to Pointers and More 174

23.2 Multibyte Values

We kinda hinted at this in a variety of places earlier, but clearly not every value can be stored in a single byte
of memory. Things take up multiple bytes of memory (assuming they’re not chars). You can tell how many
bytes by using sizeof. And you can tell which address in memory is the first byte of the object by using the
standard & operator, which always returns the address of the first byte.
And here’s another fun fact! If you iterate over the bytes of any object, you get its object representation. Two
things with the same object representation in memory are equal.
If you want to iterate over the object representation, you should do it with pointers to unsigned char.
Let’s make our own version of memcpy() that does exactly this:
void *my_memcpy(void *dest, const void *src, size_t n)
{
// Make local variables for src and dest, but of type unsigned char

const unsigned char *s = src;

unsigned char *d = dest;

while (n-- > 0) // For the given number of bytes

*d++ = *s++; // Copy source byte to dest byte

// Most copy functions return a pointer to the dest as a convenience

// to the caller

return dest;
}

(There are some good examples of post-increment and post-decrement in there for you to study, as well.)
It’s important to note that the version, above, is probably less efficient than the one that comes with your
system.
But you can pass pointers to anything into it, and it’ll copy those objects. Could be int*, struct animal*,
or anything.
Let’s do another example that prints out the object representation bytes of a struct so we can see if there’s
any padding in there and what values it has5 .
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 struct foo {
4 char a;
5 int b;
6 };
7

8 int main(void)
9 {
10 struct foo x = {0x12, 0x12345678};
11 unsigned char *p = (unsigned char *)&x;
12

13 for (size_t i = 0; i < sizeof x; i++) {

14 printf("%02X\n", p[i]);
15 }
16 }

5
Your C compiler is not required to add padding bytes, and the values of any padding bytes that are added are indeterminate.
Chapter 23. Pointers III: Pointers to Pointers and More 175

What we have there is a struct foo that’s built in such a way that should encourage a compiler to inject
padding bytes (though it doesn’t have to). And then we get an unsigned char * to the first byte of the
struct foo variable x.

From there, all we need to know is the sizeof x and we can loop through that many bytes, printing out the
values (in hex for ease).
Running this gives a bunch of numbers as output. I’ve annotated it below to identify where the values were
stored:
12 | x.a == 0x12

AB |
BF | padding bytes with "random" value
26 |

78 |
56 | x.b == 0x12345678
34 |
12 |

On all systems, sizeof(char) is 1, and we see that first byte at the top of the output holding the value 0x12
that we stored there.
Then we have some padding bytes—for me, these varied from run to run.
Finally, on my system, sizeof(int) is 4, and we can see those 4 bytes at the end. Notice how they’re the
same bytes as are in the hex value 0x12345678, but strangely in reverse order6 .
So that’s a little peek under the hood at the bytes of a more complex entity in memory.

23.3 The NULL Pointer and Zero

These things can be used interchangeably:
• NULL
• 0
• '\0'
• (void *)0

Personally, I always use NULL when I mean NULL, but you might see some other variants from time to time.
Though '\0' (a byte with all bits set to zero) will also compare equal, it’s weird to compare it to a pointer; you
should compare NULL against the pointer. (Of course, lots of times in string processing, you’re comparing
the thing the pointer points to to '\0', and that’s right.)
0 is called the null pointer constant, and, when compared to or assigned into another pointer, it is converted
to a null pointer of the same type.

23.4 Pointers as Integers

You can cast pointers to integers and vice-versa (since a pointer is just an index into memory), but you proba-
bly only ever need to do this if you’re doing some low-level hardware stuff. The results of such machinations
are implementation-defined, so they aren’t portable. And weird things could happen.
C does make one guarantee, though: you can convert a pointer to a uintptr_t type and you’ll be able to
convert it back to a pointer without losing any data.
6
This will vary depending on the architecture, but my system is little endian, which means the least-significant byte of the number
is stored first. Big endian systems will have the 12 first and the 78 last. But the spec doesn’t dictate anything about this representation.
 Chapter 23. Pointers III: Pointers to Pointers and More 176

uintptr_t is defined in <stdint.h>7 .

Additionally, if you feel like being signed, you can use intptr_t to the same effect.

23.5 Casting Pointers to other Pointers

There’s only one safe pointer conversion:
1. Converting to intptr_t or uintptr_t.
2. Converting to and from void*.
TWO! Two safe pointer conversions.
3. Converting to and from char*.
THREE! Three safe conversions!
4. Converting to and from a pointer to a struct and a pointer to its first member, and vice-versa.
FOUR! Four safe conversions!
If you cast to a pointer of another type and then access the object it points to, the behavior is undefined due
to something called strict aliasing.
Plain old aliasing refers to the ability to have more than one way to access the same object. The access points
are aliases for each other.
Strict aliasing says you are only allowed to access an object via pointers to compatible types to that object.
For example, this is definitely allowed:
int a = 1;
int *p = &a;

p is a pointer to an int, and it points to a compatible type—namely int—so we’re golden.

But the following isn’t good because int and float are not compatible types:
int a = 1;
float *p = (float *)&a;

Here’s a demo program that does some aliasing. It takes a variable v of type int32_t and aliases it to a
pointer to a struct words. That struct has two int16_ts in it. These types are incompatible, so we’re
in violation of strict aliasing rules. The compiler will assume that these two pointers never point to the same
object… but we’re making it so they do. Which is naughty of us.
Let’s see if we can break something.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdint.h>
3

4 struct words {
5 int16_t v[2];
6 };
7

8 void fun(int32_t *pv, struct words *pw)

9 {
10 for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++) {
11 (*pv)++;
12

7
It’s an optional feature, so it might not be there—but it probably is.
 Chapter 23. Pointers III: Pointers to Pointers and More 177

13 // Print the 32-bit value and the 16-bit values:

14

15 printf("%x, %x-%x\n", *pv, pw->v[1], pw->v[0]);

16 }
17 }
18

19 int main(void)
20 {
21 int32_t v = 0x12345678;
22

23 struct words *pw = (struct words *)&v; // Violates strict aliasing

24

25 fun(&v, pw);
26 }

See how I pass in the two incompatible pointers to fun()? One of the types is int32_t* and the other is
struct words*.

But they both point to the same object: the 32-bit value initialized to 0x12345678.
So if we look at the fields in the struct words, we should see the two 16-bit halves of that number. Right?
And in the fun() loop, we increment the pointer to the int32_t. That’s it. But since the struct points to
that same memory, it, too, should be updated to the same value.
So let’s run it and get this, with the 32-bit value on the left and the two 16-bit portions on the right. It should
match8 :
12345679, 1234-5679
1234567a, 1234-567a
1234567b, 1234-567b
1234567c, 1234-567c
1234567d, 1234-567d

and it does… UNTIL TOMORROW!

Let’s try it compiling GCC with -O3 and -fstrict-aliasing:
12345679, 1234-5678
1234567a, 1234-5679
1234567b, 1234-567a
1234567c, 1234-567b
1234567d, 1234-567c

They’re off by one! But they point to the same memory! How could this be? Answer: it’s undefined behavior
to alias memory like that. Anything is possible, except not in a good way.
If your code violates strict aliasing rules, whether it works or not depends on how someone decides to compile
it. And that’s a bummer since that’s beyond your control. Unless you’re some kind of omnipotent deity.
Unlikely, sorry.
GCC can be forced to not use the strict aliasing rules with -fno-strict-aliasing. Compiling the demo
program, above, with -O3 and this flag causes the output to be as expected.
Lastly, type punning is using pointers of different types to look at the same data. Before strict aliasing, this
kind of things was fairly common:
8
I’m printing out the 16-bit values reversed since I’m on a little-endian machine and it makes it easier to read here.
Chapter 23. Pointers III: Pointers to Pointers and More 178

int a = 0x12345678;
short b = *((short *)&a); // Violates strict aliasing

If you want to do type punning (relatively) safely, see the section on Unions and Type Punning.

23.6 Pointer Differences

As you know from the section on pointer arithmetic, you can subtract one pointer from another9 to get the
difference between them in count of array elements.
Now the type of that difference is something that’s up to the implementation, so it could vary from system to
system.
To be more portable, you can store the result in a variable of type ptrdiff_t defined in <stddef.h>.
int cats[100];

int *f = cats + 20;

int *g = cats + 60;

ptrdiff_t d = g - f; // difference is 40

And you can print it by prefixing the integer format specifier with t:
printf("%td\n", d); // Print decimal: 40
printf("%tX\n", d); // Print hex: 28

23.7 Pointers to Functions

Functions are just collections of machine instructions in memory, so there’s no reason we can’t get a pointer
to the first instruction of the function.
And then call it.
This can be useful for passing a pointer to a function into another function as an argument. Then the second
one could call whatever was passed in.
The tricky part with these, though, is that C needs to know the type of the variable that is the pointer to the
function.
And it would really like to know all the details.
Like “this is a pointer to a function that takes two int arguments and returns void”.
How do you write all that down so you can declare a variable?
Well, it turns out it looks very much like a function prototype, except with some extra parentheses:
// Declare p to be a pointer to a function.
// This function returns a float, and takes two ints as arguments.

float (*p)(int, int);

Also notice that you don’t have to give the parameters names. But you can if you want; they’re just ignored.
// Declare p to be a pointer to a function.
// This function returns a float, and takes two ints as arguments.

9
Assuming they point to the same array object.
 Chapter 23. Pointers III: Pointers to Pointers and More 179

float (*p)(int a, int b);

So now that we know how to declare a variable, how do we know what to assign into it? How do we get the
address of a function?
Turns out there’s a shortcut just like with getting a pointer to an array: you can just refer to the bare function
name without parens. (You can put an & in front of this if you like, but it’s unnecessary and not idiomatic.)
Once you have a pointer to a function, you can call it just by adding parens and an argument list.
Let’s do a simple example where I effectively make an alias for a function by setting a pointer to it. Then
we’ll call it.
This code prints out 3490:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 void print_int(int n)
4 {
5 printf("%d\n", n);
6 }
7

8 int main(void)
9 {
10 // Assign p to point to print_int:
11

12 void (*p)(int) = print_int;

13

14 p(3490); // Call print_int via the pointer

15 }

Notice how the type of p represents the return value and parameter types of print_int. It has to, or else C
will complain about incompatible pointer types.
One more example here shows how we might pass a pointer to a function as an argument to another function.
We’ll write a function that takes a couple integer arguments, plus a pointer to a function that operates on
those two arguments. Then it prints the result.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int add(int a, int b)

4 {
5 return a + b;
6 }
7

8 int mult(int a, int b)

9 {
10 return a * b;
11 }
12

13 void print_math(int (*op)(int, int), int x, int y)

14 {
15 int result = op(x, y);
16

17 printf("%d\n", result);
18 }
19
 Chapter 23. Pointers III: Pointers to Pointers and More 180

20 int main(void)
21 {
22 print_math(add, 5, 7); // 12
23 print_math(mult, 5, 7); // 35
24 }

Take a moment to digest that. The idea here is that we’re going to pass a pointer to a function to
print_math(), and it’s going to call that function to do some math.

This way we can change the behavior of print_math() by passing another function into it. You can see we
do that on lines 22-23 when we pass in pointers to functions add and mult, respectively.
Now, on line 13, I think we can all agree the function signature of print_math() is a sight to behold. And,
if you can believe it, this one is actually pretty straight-forward compared to some things you can construct10 .
But let’s digest it. Turns out there are only three parameters, but they’re a little hard to see:
// op x y
// |-----------------| |---| |---|
void print_math(int (*op)(int, int), int x, int y)

The first, op, is a pointer to a function that takes two ints as arguments and returns an int. This matches
the signatures for both add() and mult().
The second and third, x and y, are just standard int parameters.
Slowly and deliberately let your eyes play over the signature while you identify the working parts. One thing
that always stands out for me is the sequence (*op)(, the parens and the asterisk. That’s the giveaway it’s a
pointer to a function.
Finally, jump back to the Pointers II chapter for a pointer-to-function example using the built-in qsort().

10
The Go Programming Language drew its type declaration syntax inspiration from the opposite of what C does.
Chapter 24

Bitwise Operations

These numeric operations effectively allow you to manipulate individual bits in variables, fitting since C is
such a low-level langauge1 .
If you’re not familiar with bitwise operations, Wikipedia has a good bitwise article2 .

24.1 Bitwise AND, OR, XOR, and NOT

For each of these, the usual arithmetic conversions take place on the operands (which in this case must be an
integer type), and then the appropriate bitwise operation is performed.

Operation Operator Example

AND & a = b & c
OR | a = b | c
XOR ^ a = b ^ c
NOT ~ a = ~c

Note how they’re similar to the Boolean operators && and ||.
These have assignment shorthand variants similar to += and -=:

Operator Example Longhand equivalent

&= a &= c a = a & c
|= a |= c a = a | c
^= a ^= c a = a ^ c

24.2 Bitwise Shift

For these, the integer promotions are performed on each operand (which must be an integer type) and then a
bitwise shift is executed. The type of the result is the type of the promoted left operand.
New bits are filled with zeros, with a possible exception noted in the implementation-defined behavior, below.
1
Not that other languages don’t do this—they do. It is interesting how many modern languages use the same operators for bitwise
that C does.
2
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Bitwise_operation

181
Chapter 24. Bitwise Operations 182

Operation Operator Example

Shift left << a = b << c
Shift right >> a = b >> c

There’s also the same similar shorthand for shifting:

Operator Example Longhand equivalent

>>= a >>= c a = a >> c
<<= a <<= c a = a << c

Watch for undefined behavior: no negative shifts, and no shifts that are larger than the size of the promoted
left operand.
Also watch for implementation-defined behavior: if you right-shift a negative number, the results are
implementation-defined. (It’s perfectly fine to right-shift a signed int, just make sure it’s positive.)
Chapter 25

Variadic Functions

Variadic is a fancy word for functions that take arbitrary numbers of arguments.
A regular function takes a specific number of arguments, for example:
int add(int x, int y)
{
return x + y;
}

You can only call that with exactly two arguments which correspond to parameters x and y.
add(2, 3);
add(5, 12);

But if you try it with more, the compiler won’t let you:
add(2, 3, 4); // ERROR
add(5); // ERROR

Variadic functions get around this limitation to a certain extent.

We’ve already seen a famous example in printf()! You can pass all kinds of things to it.
printf("Hello, world!\n");
printf("The number is %d\n", 2);
printf("The number is %d and pi is %f\n", 2, 3.14159);

It seems to not care how many arguments you give it!

Well, that’s not entirely true. Zero arguments will give you an error:
printf(); // ERROR

This leads us to one of the limitations of variadic functions in C: they must have at least one argument.
But aside from that, they’re pretty flexible, even allows arguments to have different types just like printf()
does.
Let’s see how they work!

25.1 Ellipses in Function Signatures

So how does it work, syntactically?

183
 Chapter 25. Variadic Functions 184

What you do is put all the arguments that must be passed first (and remember there has to be at least one) and
after that, you put .... Just like this:
void func(int a, ...) // Literally 3 dots here

Here’s some code to demo that:

#include <stdio.h>

void func(int a, ...)

{
printf("a is %d\n", a); // Prints "a is 2"
}

int main(void)
{
func(2, 3, 4, 5, 6);
}

So, great, we can get that first argument that’s in variable a, but what about the rest of the arguments? How
do you get to them?
Here’s where the fun begins!

25.2 Getting the Extra Arguments

You’re going to want to include <stdarg.h> to make any of this work.
First things first, we’re going to use a special variable of type va_list (variable argument list) to keep track
of which variable we’re accessing at a time.
The idea is that we first start processing arguments with a call to va_start(), process each argument in turn
with va_arg(), and then, when done, wrap it up with va_end().
When you call va_start(), you need to pass in the last named parameter (the one just before the ...) so
it knows where to start looking for the additional arguments.
And when you call va_arg() to get the next argument, you have to tell it the type of argument to get next.
Here’s a demo that adds together an arbitrary number of integers. The first argument is the number of integers
to add together. We’ll make use of that to figure out how many times we have to call va_arg().
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdarg.h>
3

4 int add(int count, ...)

5 {
6 int total = 0;
7 va_list va;
8

9 va_start(va, count); // Start with arguments after "count"

10

11 for (int i = 0; i < count; i++) {

12 int n = va_arg(va, int); // Get the next int
13

14 total += n;
15 }
16
 Chapter 25. Variadic Functions 185

17 va_end(va); // All done

18

19 return total;
20 }
21

22 int main(void)
23 {
24 printf("%d\n", add(4, 6, 2, -4, 17)); // 6 + 2 - 4 + 17 = 21
25 printf("%d\n", add(2, 22, 44)); // 22 + 44 = 66
26 }

(Note that when printf() is called, it uses the number of %ds (or whatever) in the format string to know
how many more arguments there are!)
If the syntax of va_arg() is looking strange to you (because of that loose type name floating around in there),
you’re not alone. These are implemented with preprocessor macros in order to get all the proper magic in
there.

25.3 va_list Functionality

What is that va_list variable we’re using up there? It’s an opaque variable1 that holds information about
which argument we’re going to get next with va_arg(). You see how we just call va_arg() over and over?
The va_list variable is a placeholder that’s keeping track of progress so far.
But we have to initialize that variable to some sensible value. That’s where va_start() comes into play.
When we called va_start(va, count), above, we were saying, “Initialize the va variable to point to the
variable argument immediately after count.”
And that’s why we need to have at least one named variable in our argument list2 .
Once you have that pointer to the initial parameter, you can easily get subsequent argument values by calling
va_arg() repeatedly. When you do, you have to pass in your va_list variable (so it can keep on keeping
track of where you are), as well as the type of argument you’re about to copy off.
It’s up to you as a programmer to figure out which type you’re going to pass to va_arg(). In the above
example, we just did ints. But in the case of printf(), it uses the format specifier to determine which type
to pull off next.
And when you’re done, call va_end() to wrap it up. You must (the spec says) call this on a particular
va_list variable before you decide to call either va_start() or va_copy() on it again. I know we haven’t
talked about va_copy() yet.
So the standard progression is:
• va_start() to initialize your va_list variable
• Repeatedly va_arg() to get the values
• va_end() to deinitialize your va_list variable
I also mentioned va_copy() up there; it makes a copy of your va_list variable in the exact same state.
That is, if you haven’t started with va_arg() with the source variable, the new one won’t be started, either.
If you’ve consumed 5 variables with va_arg() so far, the copy will also reflect that.
1
That is, us lowly developers aren’t supposed to know what’s in there or what it means. The spec doesn’t dictate what it is in detail.
2
Honestly, it would be possible to remove that limitation from the language, but the idea is that the macros va_start(), va_arg(),
and va_end() should be able to be written in C. And to make that happen, we need some way to initialize a pointer to the location of
the first parameter. And to do that, we need the name of the first parameter. It would require a language extension to make this possible,
and so far the committee hasn’t found a rationale for doing so.
 Chapter 25. Variadic Functions 186

va_copy() can be useful if you need to scan ahead through the arguments but need to also remember your
current place.

25.4 Library Functions That Use va_lists

One of the other uses for these is pretty cool: writing your own custom printf() variant. It would be a pain
to have to handle all those format specifiers right? All zillion of them?
Luckily, there are printf() variants that accept a working va_list as an argument. You can use these to
wrap up and make your own custom printf()s!
These functions start with the letter v, such as vprintf(), vfprintf(), vsprintf(), and vsnprintf().
Basically all your printf() golden oldies except with a v in front.
Let’s make a function my_printf() that works just like printf() except it takes an extra argument up
front.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdarg.h>
3

4 int my_printf(int serial, const char *format, ...)

5 {
6 va_list va;
7

8 // Do my custom work
9 printf("The serial number is: %d\n", serial);
10

11 // Then pass the rest off to vprintf()

12 va_start(va, format);
13 int rv = vprintf(format, va);
14 va_end(va);
15

16 return rv;
17 }
18

19 int main(void)
20 {
21 int x = 10;
22 float y = 3.2;
23

24 my_printf(3490, "x is %d, y is %f\n", x, y);

25 }

See what we did there? On lines 12-14 we started a new va_list variable, and then just passed it right into
vprintf(). And it knows just want to do with it, because it has all the printf() smarts built-in.

We still have to call va_end() when we’re done, though, so don’t forget that!
Chapter 26

Locale and Internationalization

Localization is the process of making your app ready to work well in different locales (or countries).
As you might know, not everyone uses the same character for decimal points or for thousands separators…
or for currency.
These locales have names, and you can select one to use. For example, a US locale might write a number
like:
100,000.00
Whereas in Brazil, the same might be written with the commas and decimal points swapped:
100.000,00
Makes it easier to write your code so it ports to other nationalities with ease!
Well, sort of. Turns out C only has one built-in locale, and it’s limited. The spec really leaves a lot of
ambiguity here; it’s hard to be completely portable.
But we’ll do our best!

26.1 Setting the Localization, Quick and Dirty

For these calls, include <locale.h>.
There is basically one thing you can portably do here in terms of declaring a specific locale. This is likely
what you want to do if you’re going to do locale anything:
setlocale(LC_ALL, ""); // Use this environment's locale for everything

You’ll want to call that so that the program gets initialized with your current locale.
Getting into more details, there is one more thing you can do and stay portable:
setlocale(LC_ALL, "C"); // Use the default C locale

but that’s called by default every time your program starts, so there’s not much need to do it yourself.
In that second string, you can specify any locale supported by your system. This is completely system-
dependent, so it will vary. On my system, I can specify this:
setlocale(LC_ALL, "en_US.UTF-8"); // Non-portable!

And that’ll work. But it’s only portable to systems which have that exact same name for that exact same
locale, and you can’t guarantee it.

187
Chapter 26. Locale and Internationalization 188

By passing in an empty string ("") for the second argument, you’re telling C, “Hey, figure out what the
current locale on this system is so I don’t have to tell you.”

26.2 Getting the Monetary Locale Settings

Because moving green pieces of paper around promises to be the key to happiness1 , let’s talk about monetary
locale. When you’re writing portable code, you have to know what to type for cash, right? Whether that’s
“$”, “€”, “¥”, or “£”.
How can you write that code without going insane? Luckily, once you call setlocale(LC_ALL, ""), you
can just look these up with a call to localeconv():
struct lconv *x = localeconv();

This function returns a pointer to a statically-allocated struct lconv that has all that juicy information
you’re looking for.
Here are the fields of struct lconv and their meanings.
First, some conventions. An _p_ means “positive”, and _n_ means “negative”, and int_ means “interna-
tional”. Though a lot of these are type char or char*, most (or the strings they point to) are actually treated
as integers2 .
Before we go further, know that CHAR_MAX (from <limits.h>) is the maximum value that can be held in a
char. And that many of the following char values use that to indicate the value isn’t available in the given
locale.

Field Description
char *mon_decimal_point Decimal pointer character for money, e.g. ".".
char *mon_thousands_sep Thousands separator character for money, e.g. ",".
char *mon_grouping Grouping description for money (see below).
char *positive_sign Positive sign for money, e.g. "+" or "".
char *negative_sign Negative sign for money, e.g. "-".
char *currency_symbol Currency symbol, e.g. "$".
char frac_digits When printing monetary amounts, how many digits to print past the
decimal point, e.g. 2.
char p_cs_precedes 1 if the currency_symbol comes before the value for a non-negative
monetary amount, 0 if after.
char n_cs_precedes 1 if the currency_symbol comes before the value for a negative
monetary amount, 0 if after.
char p_sep_by_space Determines the separation of the currency symbol from the value for
non-negative amounts (see below).
char n_sep_by_space Determines the separation of the currency symbol from the value for
negative amounts (see below).
char p_sign_posn Determines the positive_sign position for non-negative values.
char p_sign_posn Determines the positive_sign position for negative values.
char *int_curr_symbol International currency symbol, e.g. "USD ".
char int_frac_digits International value for frac_digits.
char int_p_cs_precedes International value for p_cs_precedes.
char int_n_cs_precedes International value for n_cs_precedes.
char int_p_sep_by_space International value for p_sep_by_space.
1
“This planet has—or rather had—a problem, which was this: most of the people living on it were unhappy for pretty much of the
time. Many solutions were suggested for this problem, but most of these were largely concerned with the movement of small green
pieces of paper, which was odd because on the whole it wasn’t the small green pieces of paper that were unhappy.” —The Hitchhiker’s
Guide to the Galaxy, Douglas Adams
2
Remember that char is just a byte-sized integer.
Chapter 26. Locale and Internationalization 189

Field Description
char int_n_sep_by_space International value for n_sep_by_space.
char int_p_sign_posn International value for p_sign_posn.
char int_n_sign_posn International value for n_sign_posn.

26.2.1 Monetary Digit Grouping

OK, this is a trippy one. mon_grouping is a char*, so you might be thinking it’s a string. But in this case,
no, it’s really an array of chars. It should always end either with a 0 or CHAR_MAX.
These values describe how to group sets of numbers in currency to the left of the decimal (the whole number
part).
For example, we might have:
2 1 0
--- --- ---
$100,000,000.00

These are groups of three. Group 0 (just left of the decimal) has 3 digits. Group 1 (next group to the left) has
3 digits, and the last one also has 3.
So we could describe these groups, from the right (the decimal) to the left with a bunch of integer values
representing the group sizes:
3 3 3

And that would work for values up to $100,000,000.

But what if we had more? We could keep adding 3s…
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

but that’s crazy. Luckily, we can specify 0 to indicate that the previous group size repeats:
3 0

Which means to repeat every 3. That would handle $100, $1,000, $10,000, $10,000,000, $100,000,000,000,
and so on.
You can go legitimately crazy with these to indicate some weird groupings.
For example:
4 3 2 1 0

would indicate:
$1,0,0,0,0,00,000,0000.00

One more value that can occur is CHAR_MAX. This indicates that no more grouping should occur, and can
appear anywhere in the array, including the first value.
3 2 CHAR_MAX

would indicate:
100000000,00,000.00

for example.
And simply having CHAR_MAX in the first array position would tell you there was to be no grouping at all.
Chapter 26. Locale and Internationalization 190

26.2.2 Separators and Sign Position

All the sep_by_space variants deal with spacing around the currency sign. Valid values are:

Value Description
0 No space between currency symbol and value.
1 Separate the currency symbol (and sign, if any) from the value with a space.
2 Separate the sign symbol from the currency symbol (if adjacent) with a space,
otherwise separate the sign symbol from the value with a space.

The sign_posn variants are determined by the following values:

Value Description
0 Put parens around the value and the currency symbol.
1 Put the sign string in front of the currency symbol and value.
2 Put the sign string after the currency symbol and value.
3 Put the sign string directly in front of the currency symbol.
4 Put the sign string directly behind the currency symbol.

26.2.3 Example Values

When I get the values on my system, this is what I see (grouping string displayed as individual byte values):
mon_decimal_point = "."
mon_thousands_sep = ","
mon_grouping = 3 3 0
positive_sign = ""
negative_sign = "-"
currency_symbol = "$"
frac_digits = 2
p_cs_precedes = 1
n_cs_precedes = 1
p_sep_by_space = 0
n_sep_by_space = 0
p_sign_posn = 1
n_sign_posn = 1
int_curr_symbol = "USD "
int_frac_digits = 2
int_p_cs_precedes = 1
int_n_cs_precedes = 1
int_p_sep_by_space = 1
int_n_sep_by_space = 1
int_p_sign_posn = 1
int_n_sign_posn = 1

26.3 Localization Specifics

Notice how we passed the macro LC_ALL to setlocale() earlier… this hints that there might be some
variant that allows you to be more precise about which parts of the locale you’re setting.
Let’s take a look at the values you can see for these:
Chapter 26. Locale and Internationalization 191

Macro Description
LC_ALL Set all of the following to the given locale.
LC_COLLATE Controls the behavior of the strcoll() and strxfrm() functions.
LC_CTYPE Controls the behavior of the character-handling functions3 .
LC_MONETARY Controls the values returned by localeconv().
LC_NUMERIC Controls the decimal point for the printf() family of functions.
LC_TIME Controls time formatting of the strftime() and wcsftime() time and date
printing functions.

It’s pretty common to see LC_ALL being set, but, hey, at least you have options.
Also I should point out that LC_CTYPE is one of the biggies because it ties into wide characters, a significant
can of worms that we’ll talk about later.

3
Except for isdigit() and isxdigit().
Chapter 27

Unicode, Wide Characters, and All That

Before we begin, note that this is an active area of language development in C as it works to get past some,
erm, growing pains. When C2x comes out, updates here are probable.
Most people are basically interested in the deceptively simple question, “How do I use such-and-such char-
acter set in C?” We’ll get to that. But as we’ll see, it might already work on your system. Or you might have
to punt to a third-party library.
We’re going to talk about a lot of things this chapter—some are platform agnostic, and some are C-specific.
Let’s get an outline first of what we’re going to look at:
• Unicode background
• Character encoding background
• Source and Execution character Sets
• Using Unicode and UTF-8
• Using other character types like wchar_t, char16_t, and char32_t
Let’s dive in!

27.1 What is Unicode?

Back in the day, it was popular in the US and much of the world to use a 7-bit or 8-bit encoding for characters
in memory. This meant we could have 128 or 256 characters (including non-printable characters) total. That
was fine for a US-centric world, but it turns out there are actually other alphabets out there—who knew?
Chinese has over 50,000 characters, and that’s not fitting in a byte.
So people came up with all kinds of alternate ways to represent their own custom character sets. And that
was fine, but turned into a compatibility nightmare.
To escape it, Unicode was invented. One character set to rule them all. It extends off into infinity (effectively)
so we’ll never run out of space for new characters. It has Chinese, Latin, Greek, cuneiform, chess symbols,
emojis… just about everything, really! And more is being added all the time!

27.2 Code Points

I want to talk about two concepts here. It’s confusing because they’re both numbers… different numbers for
the same thing. But bear with me.
Let’s loosely define code point to mean a numeric value representing a character. (Code points can also
represent unprintable control characters, but just assume I mean something like the letter “B” or the character

192
Chapter 27. Unicode, Wide Characters, and All That 193

“π”.)
Each code point represents a unique character. And each character has a unique numeric code point associated
with it.
For example, in Unicode, the numeric value 66 represents “B”, and 960 represents “π”. Other character map-
pings that aren’t Unicode use different values, potentially, but let’s forget them and concentrate on Unicode,
the future!
So that’s one thing: there’s a number that represents each character. In Unicode, these numbers run from 0
to over 1 million.
Got it?
Because we’re about to flip the table a little.

27.3 Encoding
If you recall, an 8-bit byte can hold values from 0-255, inclusive. That’s great for “B” which is 66—that fits
in a byte. But “π” is 960, and that doesn’t fit in a byte! We need another byte. How do we store all that in
memory? Or what about bigger numbers, like 195,024? That’s going to need a number of bytes to hold.
The Big Question: how are these numbers represented in memory? This is what we call the encoding of the
characters.
So we have two things: one is the code point which tells us effectively the serial number of a particular
character. And we have the encoding which tells us how we’re going to represent that number in memory.
There are plenty of encodings. You can make up your own right now, if you want1 . But we’re going to look
at some really common encodings that are in use with Unicode.

Encoding Description
UTF-8 A byte-oriented encoding that uses a variable number of bytes per character.
This is the one to use.
UTF-16 A 16-bit per character2 encoding.
UTF-32 A 32-bit per character encoding.

With UTF-16 and UTF-32, the byte order matters, so you might see UTF-16BE for big-endian and UTF-
16LE for little-endian. Same for UTF-32. Technically, if unspecified, you should assume big-endian. But
since Windows uses UTF-16 extensively and is little-endian, sometimes that is assumed3 .
Let’s look at some examples. I’m going to write the values in hex because that’s exactly two digits per 8-bit
byte, and it makes it easier to see how things are arranged in memory.

Character Code Point UTF-16BE UTF-32BE UTF-16LE UTF-32LE UTF-8

A 41 0041 00000041 4100 41000000 41
B 42 0042 00000042 4200 42000000 42
~ 7E 007E 0000007E 7E00 7E000000 7E
π 3C0 03C0 000003C0 C003 C0030000 CF80

1
For example, we could store the code point in a big-endian 32-bit integer. Straightforward! We just invented an encoding! Actually
not; that’s what UTF-32BE encoding is. Oh well—back to the grind!
2
Ish. Technically, it’s variable width—there’s a way to represent code points higher than 216 by putting two UTF-16 characters
together.
3
There’s a special character called the Byte Order Mark (BOM), code point 0xFEFF, that can optionally precede the data stream and
indicate the endianess. It is not required, however.
Chapter 27. Unicode, Wide Characters, and All That 194

Character Code Point UTF-16BE UTF-32BE UTF-16LE UTF-32LE UTF-8

€ 20AC 20AC 000020AC AC20 AC200000 E282AC

Look in there for the patterns. Note that UTF-16BE and UTF-32BE are simply the code point represented
directly as 16- and 32-bit values4 .
Little-endian is the same, except the bytes are in little-endian order.
Then we have UTF-8 at the end. First you might notice that the single-byte code points are represented as
a single byte. That’s nice. You might also notice that different code points take different number of bytes.
This is a variable-width encoding.
So as soon as we get above a certain value, UTF-8 starts using additional bytes to store the values. And they
don’t appear to correlate with the code point value, either.
The details of UTF-8 encoding5 are beyond the scope of this guide, but it’s enough to know that it has a
variable number of bytes per code point, and those byte values don’t match up with the code point except for
the first 128 code points. If you really want to learn more, Computerphile has a great UTF-8 video with Tom
Scott6 .
That last bit is a neat thing about Unicode and UTF-8 from a North American perspective: it’s backward
compatible with 7-bit ASCII encoding! So if you’re used to ASCII, UTF-8 is the same! Every ASCII-
encoded document is also UTF-8 encoded! (But not the other way around, obviously.)
It’s probably that last point more than any other that is driving UTF-8 to take over the world.

27.4 Source and Execution Character Sets

When programming in C, there are (at least) three character sets that are in play:
• The one that your code exists on disk as.
• The one the compiler translates that into just as compilation begins (the source character set). This
might be the same as the one on disk, or it might not.
• The one the compiler translates the source character set into for execution (the execution character
set). This might be the same as the source character set, or it might not.
Your compiler probably has options to select these character sets at build-time.
The basic character set for both source and execution will contain the following characters:
A B C D E F G H I J K L M
N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
a b c d e f g h i j k l m
n o p q r s t u v w x y z
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
! " # % & ' ( ) * + , - . / :
; < = > ? [ \ ] ^ _ { | } ~
space tab vertical-tab
form-feed end-of-line

Those are the characters you can use in your source and remain 100% portable.
The execution character set will additionally have characters for alert (bell/flash), backspace, carriage return,
and newline.
4
Again, this is only true in UTF-16 for characters that fit in two bytes.
5
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/UTF-8
6
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=MijmeoH9LT4
Chapter 27. Unicode, Wide Characters, and All That 195

But most people don’t go to that extreme and freely use their extended character sets in source and executable,
especially now that Unicode and UTF-8 are getting more common. I mean, the basic character set doesn’t
even allow for @, $, or `!
Notably, it’s a pain (though possible with escape sequences) to enter Unicode characters using only the basic
character set.

27.5 Unicode in C
Before I get into encoding in C, let’s talk about Unicode from a code point standpoint. There is a way in C
to specify Unicode characters and these will get translated by the compiler into the execution character set7 .
So how do we do it?
How about the euro symbol, code point 0x20AC. (I’ve written it in hex because both ways of representing it
in C require hex.) How can we put that in our C code?
Use the \u escape to put it in a string, e.g. "\u20AC" (case for the hex doesn’t matter). You must put exactly
four hex digits after the \u, padding with leading zeros if necessary.
Here’s an example:
char *s = "\u20AC1.23";

printf("%s\n", s); // €1.23

So \u works for 16-bit Unicode code points, but what about ones bigger than 16 bits? For that, we need
capitals: \U.
For example:
char *s = "\U0001D4D1";

printf("%s\n", s); // Prints a mathematical letter "B"

It’s the same as \u, just with 32 bits instead of 16. These are equivalent:
\u03C0
\U000003C0

Again, these are translated into the execution character set during compilation. They represent Unicode code
points, not any specific encoding. Furthermore, if a Unicode code point is not representable in the execution
character set, the compiler can do whatever it wants with it.
Now, you might wonder why you can’t just do this:
char *s = "€1.23";

printf("%s\n", s); // €1.23

And you probably can, given a modern compiler. The source character set will be translated for you into the
execution character set by the compiler. But compilers are free to puke out if they find any characters that
aren’t included in their extended character set, and the € symbol certainly isn’t in the basic character set.
Caveat from the spec: you can’t use \u or \U to encode any code points below 0xA0 except for 0x24 ($),
0x40 (@), and 0x60 (`)—yes, those are precisely the trio of common punctuation marks missing from the
basic character set. Apparently this restriction is relaxed in the upcoming version of the spec.
7
Presumably the compiler makes the best effort to translate the code point to whatever the output encoding is, but I can’t find any
guarantees in the spec.
Chapter 27. Unicode, Wide Characters, and All That 196

Finally, you can also use these in identifiers in your code, with some restrictions. But I don’t want to get into
that here. We’re all about string handling in this chapter.
And that’s about it for Unicode in C (except encoding).

27.6 A Quick Note on UTF-8 Before We Swerve into the Weeds

It could be that your source file on disk, the extended source characters, and the extended execution characters
are all in UTF-8 format. And the libraries you use expect UTF-8. This is the glorious future of UTF-8
everywhere.
If that’s the case, and you don’t mind being non-portable to systems that aren’t like that, then just run with it.
Stick Unicode characters in your source and data at will. Use regular C strings and be happy.
A lot of things will just work (albeit non-portably) because UTF-8 strings can safely be NUL-terminated just
like any other C string. But maybe losing portability in exchange for easier character handling is a tradeoff
that’s worth it to you.
There are some caveats, however:
• Things like strlen() report the number of bytes in a string, not the number of characters, necessarily.
(The mbstowcs() returns the number of characters in a string when you convert it to wide characters.
POSIX extends this so you can pass NULL for the first argument if you just want the character count.)
• The following won’t work properly with characters of more than one byte: strtok(), strchr() (use
strstr() instead), strspn()-type functions, toupper(), tolower(), isalpha()-type functions,
and probably more. Beware anything that operates on bytes.
• printf() variants allow for a way to only print so many bytes of a string8 . You want to make certain
you print the correct number of bytes to end on a character boundary.
• If you want to malloc() space for a string, or declare an array of chars for one, be aware that the
maximum size could be more than you were expecting. Each character could take up to MB_LEN_MAX
bytes (from <limits.h>)—except characters in the basic character set which are guaranteed to be one
byte.
And probably others I haven’t discovered. Let me know what pitfalls there are out there…

27.7 Different Character Types

I want to introduce more character types. We’re used to char, right?
But that’s too easy. Let’s make things a lot more difficult! Yay!

27.7.1 Multibyte Characters

First of all, I want to potentially change your thinking about what a string (array of chars) is. These are
multibyte strings made up of multibyte characters.
That’s right—your run-of-the-mill string of characters is multibyte. When someone says “C string”, they
mean “C multibyte string”.
Even if a particular character in the string is only a single byte, or if a string is made up of only single
characters, it’s known as a multibyte string.
For example:
8
With a format specifier like "%.12s", for example.
Chapter 27. Unicode, Wide Characters, and All That 197

char c[128] = "Hello, world!"; // Multibyte string

What we’re saying here is that a particular character that’s not in the basic character set could be composed
of multiple bytes. Up to MB_LEN_MAX of them (from <limits.h>). Sure, it only looks like one character on
the screen, but it could be multiple bytes.
You can throw Unicode values in there, as well, as we saw earlier:
char *s = "\u20AC1.23";

printf("%s\n", s); // €1.23

But here we’re getting into some weirdness, because check this out:
char *s = "\u20AC1.23"; // €1.23

printf("%zu\n", strlen(s)); // 7!

The string length of "€1.23" is 7?! Yes! Well, on my system, yes! Remember that strlen() returns the
number of bytes in the string, not the number of characters. (When we get to “wide characters”, coming up,
we’ll see a way to get the number of characters in the string.)
Note that while C allows individual multibyte char constants (as opposed to char*), the behavior of these
varies by implementation and your compiler might warn on it.
GCC, for example, warns of multi-character character constants for the following two lines (and, on my
system, prints out the UTF-8 encoding):
printf("%x\n", '€');
printf("%x\n", '\u20ac');

27.7.2 Wide Characters

If you’re not a multibyte character, then you’re a wide character.
A wide character is a single value that can uniquely represent any character in the current locale. It’s analo-
gous to Unicode code points. But it might not be. Or it might be.
Basically, where multibyte character strings are arrays of bytes, wide character strings are arrays of charac-
ters. So you can start thinking on a character-by-character basis rather than a byte-by-byte basis (the latter
of which gets all messy when characters start taking up variable numbers of bytes).
Wide characters can be represented by a number of types, but the big standout one is wchar_t. It’s the main
one. It’s like char, except wide.
You might be wondering if you can’t tell if it’s Unicode or not, how does that allow you much flexibility in
terms of writing code? wchar_t opens some of those doors, as there are a rich set of functions you can use
to deal with wchar_t strings (like getting the length, etc.) without caring about the encoding.

27.8 Using Wide Characters and wchar_t

Time for a new type: wchar_t. This is the main wide character type. Remember how a char is only one
byte? And a byte’s not enough to represent all characters, potentially? Well, this one is enough.
To use wchar_t, include <wchar.h>.
How many bytes big is it? Well, it’s not totally clear. Could be 16 bits. Could be 32 bits.
 Chapter 27. Unicode, Wide Characters, and All That 198

But wait, you’re saying—if it’s only 16 bits, it’s not big enough to hold all the Unicode code points, is it?
You’re right—it’s not. The spec doesn’t require it to be. It just has to be able to represent all the characters
in the current locale.
This can cause grief with Unicode on platforms with 16-bit wchar_ts (ahem—Windows). But that’s out of
scope for this guide.
You can declare a string or character of this type with the L prefix, and you can print them with the %ls (“ell
ess”) format specifier. Or print an individual wchar_t with %lc.
wchar_t *s = L"Hello, world!";
wchar_t c = L'B';

printf("%ls %lc\n", s, c);

Now—are those characters stored as Unicode code points, or not? Depends on the implementation. But you
can test if they are with the macro __STDC_ISO_10646__. If this is defined, the answer is, “It’s Unicode!”
More detailedly, the value in that macro is an integer in the form yyyymm that lets you know what Unicode
standard you can rely on—whatever was in effect on that date.
But how do you use them?

27.8.1 Multibyte to wchar_t Conversions

So how do we get from the byte-oriented standard strings to the character-oriented wide strings and back?
We can use a couple string conversion functions to make this happen.
First, some naming conventions you’ll see in these functions:
• mb: multibyte
• wc: wide character
• mbs: multibyte string
• wcs: wide character string

So if we want to convert a multibyte string to a wide character string, we can call the mbstowcs(). And the
other way around: wcstombs().

Conversion Function Description

mbtowc() Convert a multibyte character to a wide character.
wctomb() Convert a wide character to a multibyte character.
mbstowcs() Convert a multibyte string to a wide string.
wcstombs() Convert a wide string to a multibyte string.

Let’s do a quick demo where we convert a multibyte string to a wide character string, and compare the string
lengths of the two using their respective functions.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <wchar.h>
4 #include <string.h>
5 #include <locale.h>
6

7 int main(void)
8 {
9 // Get out of the C locale to one that likely has the euro symbol
10 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
 Chapter 27. Unicode, Wide Characters, and All That 199

11

12 // Original multibyte string with a euro symbol (Unicode point 20ac)

13 char *mb_string = "The cost is \u20ac1.23"; // €1.23
14 size_t mb_len = strlen(mb_string);
15

16 // Wide character array that will hold the converted string

17 wchar_t wc_string[128]; // Holds up to 128 wide characters
18

19 // Convert the MB string to WC; this returns the number of wide chars
20 size_t wc_len = mbstowcs(wc_string, mb_string, 128);
21

22 // Print result--note the %ls for wide char strings

23 printf("multibyte: \"%s\" (%zu bytes)\n", mb_string, mb_len);
24 printf("wide char: \"%ls\" (%zu characters)\n", wc_string, wc_len);
25 }

On my system, this outputs:

multibyte: "The cost is €1.23" (19 bytes)
wide char: "The cost is €1.23" (17 characters)

(Your system might vary on the number of bytes depending on your locale.)
One interesting thing to note is that mbstowcs(), in addition to converting the multibyte string to wide,
returns the length (in characters) of the wide character string. On POSIX-compliant systems, you can take
advantage of a special mode where it only returns the length-in-characters of a given multibyte string: you just
pass NULL to the destination, and 0 to the maximum number of characters to convert (this value is ignored).
(In the code below, I’m using my extended source character set—you might have to replace those with \u
escapes.)
setlocale(LC_ALL, "");

// The following string has 7 characters

size_t len_in_chars = mbstowcs(NULL, "§¶°±π€•", 0);

printf("%zu", len_in_chars); // 7

Again, that’s a non-portable POSIX extension.

And, of course, if you want to convert the other way, it’s wcstombs().

27.9 Wide Character Functionality

Once we’re in wide character land, we have all kinds of functionality at our disposal. I’m just going to
summarize a bunch of the functions here, but basically what we have here are the wide character versions
of the multibyte string functions that we’re use to. (For example, we know strlen() for multibyte strings;
there’s a wcslen() for wide character strings.)

27.9.1 wint_t
A lot of these functions use a wint_t to hold single characters, whether they are passed in or returned.
It is related to wchar_t in nature. A wint_t is an integer that can represent all values in the extended
character set, and also a special end-of-file character, WEOF.
This is used by a number of single-character-oriented wide character functions.
Chapter 27. Unicode, Wide Characters, and All That 200

27.9.2 I/O Stream Orientation

The tl;dr here is to not mix and match byte-oriented functions (like fprintf()) with wide-oriented functions
(like fwprintf()). Decide if a stream will be byte-oriented or wide-oriented and stick with those types of
I/O functions.
In more detail: streams can be either byte-oriented or wide-oriented. When a stream is first created, it has
no orientation, but the first read or write will set the orientation.
If you first use a wide operation (like fwprintf()) it will orient the stream wide.
If you first use a byte operation (like fprintf()) it will orient the stream by bytes.
You can manually set an unoriented stream one way or the other with a call to fwide(). You can use that
same function to get the orientation of a stream.
If you need to change the orientation mid-flight, you can do it with freopen().

27.9.3 I/O Functions

Typically include <stdio.h> and <wchar.h> for these.

I/O Function Description

wprintf() Formatted console output.
wscanf() Formatted console input.
getwchar() Character-based console input.
putwchar() Character-based console output.
fwprintf() Formatted file output.
fwscanf() Formatted file input.
fgetwc() Character-based file input.
fputwc() Character-based file output.
fgetws() String-based file input.
fputws() String-based file output.
swprintf() Formatted string output.
swscanf() Formatted string input.
vfwprintf() Variadic formatted file output.
vfwscanf() Variadic formatted file input.
vswprintf() Variadic formatted string output.
vswscanf() Variadic formatted string input.
vwprintf() Variadic formatted console output.
vwscanf() Variadic formatted console input.
ungetwc() Push a wide character back on an output stream.
fwide() Get or set stream multibyte/wide orientation.

27.9.4 Type Conversion Functions

Typically include <wchar.h> for these.

Conversion Function Description

wcstod() Convert string to double.
wcstof() Convert string to float.
wcstold() Convert string to long double.
wcstol() Convert string to long.
wcstoll() Convert string to long long.
wcstoul() Convert string to unsigned long.
Chapter 27. Unicode, Wide Characters, and All That 201

Conversion Function Description

wcstoull() Convert string to unsigned long long.

27.9.5 String and Memory Copying Functions

Typically include <wchar.h> for these.

Copying
Func-
tion Description
wcscpy() Copy string.
wcsncpy()Copy string, length-limited.
wmemcpy()Copy memory.
Copy potentially-overlapping memory.
wmemmove()
wcscat() Concatenate strings.
wcsncat()Concatenate strings, length-limited.

27.9.6 String and Memory Comparing Functions

Typically include <wchar.h> for these.

Comparing Function Description

wcscmp() Compare strings lexicographically.
wcsncmp() Compare strings lexicographically, length-limited.
wcscoll() Compare strings in dictionary order by locale.
wmemcmp() Compare memory lexicographically.
wcsxfrm() Transform strings into versions such that wcscmp() behaves like wcscoll()9 .

27.9.7 String Searching Functions

Typically include <wchar.h> for these.

Searching Function Description

wcschr() Find a character in a string.
wcsrchr() Find a character in a string from the back.
wmemchr() Find a character in memory.
wcsstr() Find a substring in a string.
wcspbrk() Find any of a set of characters in a string.
wcsspn() Find length of substring including any of a set of
characters.
wcscspn() Find length of substring before any of a set of
characters.
wcstok() Find tokens in a string.

9
wcscoll() is the same as wcsxfrm() followed by wcscmp().
Chapter 27. Unicode, Wide Characters, and All That 202

27.9.8 Length/Miscellaneous Functions

Typically include <wchar.h> for these.

Length/Misc Function Description

wcslen() Return the length of the string.
wmemset() Set characters in memory.
wcsftime() Formatted date and time output.

27.9.9 Character Classification Functions

Include <wctype.h> for these.

Length/Misc Function Description

iswalnum() True if the character is alphanumeric.
iswalpha() True if the character is alphabetic.
iswblank() True if the character is blank (space-ish, but not a
newline).
iswcntrl() True if the character is a control character.
iswdigit() True if the character is a digit.
iswgraph() True if the character is printable (except space).
iswlower() True if the character is lowercase.
iswprint() True if the character is printable (including space).
iswpunct() True if the character is punctuation.
iswspace() True if the character is whitespace.
iswupper() True if the character is uppercase.
iswxdigit() True if the character is a hex digit.
towlower() Convert character to lowercase.
towupper() Convert character to uppercase.

27.10 Parse State, Restartable Functions

We’re going to get a little bit into the guts of multibyte conversion, but this is a good thing to understand,
conceptually.
Imagine how your program takes a sequence of multibyte characters and turns them into wide characters, or
vice-versa. It might, at some point, be partway through parsing a character, or it might have to wait for more
bytes before it makes the determination of the final value.
This parse state is stored in an opaque variable of type mbstate_t and is used every time conversion is
performed. That’s how the conversion functions keep track of where they are mid-work.
And if you change to a different character sequence mid-stream, or try to seek to a different place in your
input sequence, it could get confused over that.
Now you might want to call me on this one: we just did some conversions, above, and I never mentioned
any mbstate_t anywhere.
That’s because the conversion functions like mbstowcs(), wctomb(), etc. each have their own mbstate_t
variable that they use. There’s only one per function, though, so if you’re writing multithreaded code, they’re
not safe to use.
Fortunately, C defines restartable versions of these functions where you can pass in your own mbstate_t
on per-thread basis if you need to. If you’re doing multithreaded stuff, use these!
 Chapter 27. Unicode, Wide Characters, and All That 203

Quick note on initializing an mbstate_t variable: just memset() it to zero. There is no built-in function to
force it to be initialized.
mbstate_t mbs;

// Set the state to the initial state

memset(&mbs, 0, sizeof mbs);

Here is a list of the restartable conversion functions—note the naming convension of putting an “r” after the
“from” type:
• mbrtowc()—multibyte to wide character
• wcrtomb()—wide character to multibyte
• mbsrtowcs()—multibyte string to wide character string
• wcsrtombs()—wide character string to multibyte string

These are really similar to their non-restartable counterparts, except they require you pass in a pointer to your
own mbstate_t variable. And also they modify the source string pointer (to help you out if invalid bytes
are found), so it might be useful to save a copy of the original.
Here’s the example from earlier in the chapter reworked to pass in our own mbstate_t.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <stddef.h>
4 #include <wchar.h>
5 #include <string.h>
6 #include <locale.h>
7

8 int main(void)
9 {
10 // Get out of the C locale to one that likely has the euro symbol
11 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
12

13 // Original multibyte string with a euro symbol (Unicode point 20ac)

14 char *mb_string = "The cost is \u20ac1.23"; // €1.23
15 size_t mb_len = strlen(mb_string);
16

17 // Wide character array that will hold the converted string

18 wchar_t wc_string[128]; // Holds up to 128 wide characters
19

20 // Set up the conversion state

21 mbstate_t mbs;
22 memset(&mbs, 0, sizeof mbs); // Initial state
23

24 // mbsrtowcs() modifies the input pointer to point at the first

25 // invalid character, or NULL if successful. Let's make a copy of
26 // the pointer for mbsrtowcs() to mess with so our original is
27 // unchanged.
28 //
29 // This example will probably be successful, but we check farther
30 // down to see.
31 const char *invalid = mb_string;
32

33 // Convert the MB string to WC; this returns the number of wide chars
34 size_t wc_len = mbsrtowcs(wc_string, &invalid, 128, &mbs);
35
 Chapter 27. Unicode, Wide Characters, and All That 204

36 if (invalid == NULL) {
37 printf("No invalid characters found\n");
38

39 // Print result--note the %ls for wide char strings

40 printf("multibyte: \"%s\" (%zu bytes)\n", mb_string, mb_len);
41 printf("wide char: \"%ls\" (%zu characters)\n", wc_string, wc_len);
42 } else {
43 ptrdiff_t offset = invalid - mb_string;
44 printf("Invalid character at offset %td\n", offset);
45 }
46 }

For the conversion functions that manage their own state, you can reset their internal state to the initial one
by passing in NULL for their char* arguments, for example:
mbstowcs(NULL, NULL, 0); // Reset the parse state for mbstowcs()
mbstowcs(dest, src, 100); // Parse some stuff

For I/O, each wide stream manages its own mbstate_t and uses that for input and output conversions as it
goes.
And some of the byte-oriented I/O functions like printf() and scanf() keep their own internal state while
doing their work.
Finally, these restartable conversion functions do actually have their own internal state if you pass in NULL
for the mbstate_t parameter. This makes them behave more like their non-restartable counterparts.

27.11 Unicode Encodings and C

In this section, we’ll see what C can (and can’t) do when it comes to three specific Unicode encodings:
UTF-8, UTF-16, and UTF-32.

27.11.1 UTF-8
To refresh before this section, read the UTF-8 quick note, above.
Aside from that, what are C’s UTF-8 capabilities?
Well, not much, unfortunately.
You can tell C that you specifically want a string literal to be UTF-8 encoded, and it’ll do it for you. You can
prefix a string with u8:
char *s = u8"Hello, world!";

printf("%s\n", s); // Hello, world!--if you can output UTF-8

Now, can you put Unicode characters in there?

char *s = u8"€123";

Sure! If the extended source character set supports it. (gcc does.)
What if it doesn’t? You can specify a Unicode code point with your friendly neighborhood \u and \U, as
noted above.
But that’s about it. There’s no portable way in the standard library to take arbirary input and turn it into
UTF-8 unless your locale is UTF-8. Or to parse UTF-8 unless your locale is UTF-8.
So if you want to do it, either be in a UTF-8 locale and:
Chapter 27. Unicode, Wide Characters, and All That 205

setlocale(LC_ALL, "");

or figure out a UTF-8 locale name on your local machine and set it explicitly like so:
setlocale(LC_ALL, "en_US.UTF-8"); // Non-portable name

Or use a third-party library.

27.11.2 UTF-16, UTF-32, char16_t, and char32_t

char16_t and char32_t are a couple other potentially wide character types with sizes of 16 bits and 32
bits, respectively. Not necessarily wide, because if they can’t represent every character in the current locale,
they lose their wide character nature. But the spec refers them as “wide character” types all over the place,
so there we are.
These are here to make things a little more Unicode-friendly, potentially.
To use, include <uchar.h>. (That’s “u”, not “w”.)
This header file doesn’t exist on OS X—bummer. If you just want the types, you can:
#include <stdint.h>

typedef int_least16_t char16_t;

typedef int_least32_t char32_t;

But if you also want the functions, that’s all on you.

Assuming you’re still good to go, you can declare a string or character of these types with the u and U prefixes:
char16_t *s = u"Hello, world!";
char16_t c = u'B';

char32_t *t = U"Hello, world!";

char32_t d = U'B';

Now—are values in these stored in UTF-16 or UTF-32? Depends on the implementation.

But you can test to see if they are. If the macros __STDC_UTF_16__ or __STDC_UTF_32__ are defined (to
1) it means the types hold UTF-16 or UTF-32, respectively.

If you’re curious, and I know you are, the values, if UTF-16 or UTF-32, are stored in the native endianess.
That is, you should be able to compare them straight up to Unicode code point values:
char16_t pi = u"\u03C0"; // pi symbol

#if __STDC_UTF_16__
pi == 0x3C0; // Always true
#else
pi == 0x3C0; // Probably not true
#endif

27.11.3 Multibyte Conversions

You can convert from your multibyte encoding to char16_t or char32_t with a number of helper functions.
(Like I said, though, the result might not be UTF-16 or UTF-32 unless the corresponding macro is set to 1.)
Chapter 27. Unicode, Wide Characters, and All That 206

All of these functions are restartable (i.e. you pass in your own mbstate_t), and all of them operate character
by character10 .

Conversion Function Description

mbrtoc16() Convert a multibyte character to a char16_t
character.
mbrtoc32() Convert a multibyte character to a char32_t
character.
c16rtomb() Convert a char16_t character to a multibyte
character.
c32rtomb() Convert a char32_t character to a multibyte
character.

27.11.4 Third-Party Libraries

For heavy-duty conversion between different specific encodings, there are a couple mature libraries worth
checking out. Note that I haven’t used either of these.
• iconv11 —Internationalization Conversion, a common POSIX-standard API available on the major plat-
forms.
• ICU12 —International Components for Unicode. At least one blogger found this easy to use.
If you have more noteworthy libraries, let me know.

10
Ish—things get funky with multi-char16_t UTF-16 encodings.
11
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Iconv
12
http://site.icu-project.org/
Chapter 28

Exiting a Program

Turns out there are a lot of ways to do this, and even ways to set up “hooks” so that a function runs when a
program exits.
In this chapter we’ll dive in and check them out.
We already covered the meaning of the exit status code in the Exit Status section, so jump back there and
review if you have to.
All the functions in this section are in <stdlib.h>.

28.1 Normal Exits

We’ll start with the regular ways to exit a program, and then jump to some of the rarer, more esoteric ones.
When you exit a program normally, all open I/O streams are flushed and temporary files removed. Basically
it’s a nice exit where everything gets cleaned up and handled. It’s what you want to do almost all the time
unless you have reasons to do otherwise.

28.1.1 Returning From main()

If you’ve noticed, main() has a return type of int… and yet I’ve rarely, if ever, been returning anything
from main() at all.
This is because for main() only (and I can’t stress enough this special case only applies to main() and no
other functions anywhere) has an implicit return 0 if you fall off the end.
You can explicitly return from main() any time you want, and some programmers feel it’s more Right to
always have a return at the end of main(). But if you leave it off, C will put one there for you.
So… here are the return rules for main():
• You can return an exit status from main() with a return statement. main() is the only function with
this special behavior. Using return in any other function just returns from that function to the caller.
• If you don’t explicitly return and just fall off the end of main(), it’s just as if you’d returned 0 or
EXIT_SUCCESS.

28.1.2 exit()
This one has also made an appearance a few times. If you call exit() from anywhere in your program, it
will exit at that point.
The argument you pass to exit() is the exit status.

207
 Chapter 28. Exiting a Program 208

28.1.3 Setting Up Exit Handlers with atexit()

You can register functions to be called when a program exits whether by returning from main() or calling
the exit() function.
A call to atexit() with the handler function name will get it done. You can register multiple exit handlers,
and they’ll be called in the reverse order of registration.
Here’s an example:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 void on_exit_1(void)
5 {
6 printf("Exit handler 1 called!\n");
7 }
8

9 void on_exit_2(void)
10 {
11 printf("Exit handler 2 called!\n");
12 }
13

14 int main(void)
15 {
16 atexit(on_exit_1);
17 atexit(on_exit_2);
18

19 printf("About to exit...\n");
20 }

And the output is:

About to exit...
Exit handler 2 called!
Exit handler 1 called!

28.2 Quicker Exits with quick_exit()

This is similar to a normal exit, except:
• Open files might not be flushed.
• Temporary files might not be removed.
• atexit() handlers won’t be called.
But there is a way to register exit handlers: call at_quick_exit() analogously to how you’d call atexit().
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 void on_quick_exit_1(void)
5 {
6 printf("Quick exit handler 1 called!\n");
7 }
8

9 void on_quick_exit_2(void)
10 {
 Chapter 28. Exiting a Program 209

11 printf("Quick exit handler 2 called!\n");

12 }
13

14 void on_exit(void)
15 {
16 printf("Normal exit--I won't be called!\n");
17 }
18

19 int main(void)
20 {
21 at_quick_exit(on_quick_exit_1);
22 at_quick_exit(on_quick_exit_2);
23

24 atexit(on_exit); // This won't be called

25

26 printf("About to quick exit...\n");

27

28 quick_exit(0);
29 }

Which gives this output:

About to quick exit...
Quick exit handler 2 called!
Quick exit handler 1 called!

It works just like exit()/atexit(), except for the fact that file flushing and cleanup might not be done.

28.3 Nuke it from Orbit: _Exit()

Calling _Exit() exits immediately, period. No on-exit callback functions are executed. Files won’t be
flushed. Temp files won’t be removed.
Use this if you have to exit right fargin’ now.

28.4 Exiting Sometimes: assert()

The assert() statement is used to insist that something be true, or else the program will exit.
Devs often use an assert to catch Should-Never-Happen type errors.
#define PI 3.14159

assert(PI > 3); // Sure enough, it is, so carry on

versus:
goats -= 100;

assert(goats >= 0); // Can't have negative goats

In that case, if I try to run it and goats falls under 0, this happens:
goat_counter: goat_counter.c:8: main: Assertion `goats >= 0' failed.
Aborted

and I’m dropped back to the command line.

Chapter 28. Exiting a Program 210

This isn’t very user-friendly, so it’s only used for things the user will never see. And often people write their
own assert macros that can more easily be turned off.

28.5 Abnormal Exit: abort()

You can use this if something has gone horribly wrong and you want to indicate as much to the outside
environment. This also won’t necessarily clean up any open files, etc.
I’ve rarely seen this used.
Some foreshadowing about signals: this actually works by raising a SIGABRT which will end the process.
What happens after that is up to the system, but on Unix-likes, it was common to dump core1 as the program
terminated.

1
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Core_dump
Chapter 29

Signal Handling

Before we start, I’m just going to advise you to generally ignore this entire chapter and use your OS’s (very
likely) superior signal handling functions. Unix-likes have the sigaction() family of functions, and Win-
dows has… whatever it does1 .
With that out of the way, what are signals?

29.1 What Are Signals?

A signal is raised on a variety of external events. Your program can be configured to be interrupted to handle
the signal, and, optionally, continue where it left off once the signal has been handled.
Think of it like a function that’s automatically called when one of these external events occurs.
What are these events? On your system, there are probably a lot of them, but in the C spec there are just a
few:

Signal Description
SIGABRT Abnormal termination—what happens when
abort() is called.
SIGFPE Floating point exception.
SIGILL Illegal instruction.
SIGINT Interrupt—usually the result of CTRL-C being hit.
SIGSEGV “Segmentation Violation”: invalid memory access.
SIGTERM Termination requested.

You can set up your program to ignore, handle, or allow the default action for each of these by using the
signal() function.

29.2 Handling Signals with signal()

The signal() call takes two parameters: the signal in question, and an action to take when that signal is
raised.
The action can be one of three things:
• A pointer to a handler function.
1
Apparently it doesn’t do Unix-style signals at all deep down, and they’re simulated for console apps.

211
 Chapter 29. Signal Handling 212

• SIG_IGN to ignore the signal.

• SIG_DFL to restore the default handler for the signal.
Let’s write a program that you can’t CTRL-C out of. (Don’t fret—in the following program, you can also hit
RETURN and it’ll exit.)
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <signal.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char s[1024];
7

8 signal(SIGINT, SIG_IGN); // Ignore SIGINT, caused by ^C

9

10 printf("Try hitting ^C... (hit RETURN to exit)\n");

11

12 // Wait for a line of input so the program doesn't just exit

13 fgets(s, sizeof s, stdin);
14 }

Check out line 8—we tell the program to ignore SIGINT, the interrupt signal that’s raised when CTRL-C is
hit. No matter how much you hit it, the signal remains ignored. If you comment out line 8, you’ll see you
can CTRL-C with impunity and quit the program on the spot.

29.3 Writing Signal Handlers

I mentioned you could also write a handler function that gets called when the signal is raised.
These are pretty straightforward, are also very capability-limited when it comes to the spec.
Before we start, let’s look at the function prototype for the signal() call:
void (*signal(int sig, void (*func)(int)))(int);

Pretty easy to read, right?

WRONG! :)
Let’s take a moment to take it apart for practice.
signal() takes two arguments: an integer sig representing the signal, and a pointer func to the handler
(the handler returns void and takes an int as an argument), highlighted below:
sig func
|-----| |---------------|
void (*signal(int sig, void (*func)(int)))(int);

Basically, we’re going to pass in the signal number we’re interested in catching, and we’re going to pass a
pointer to a function of the form:
void f(int x);

that will do the actual catching.

Now—what about the rest of that prototype? It’s basically all the return type. See, signal() will return
whatever you passed as func on success… so that means it’s returning a pointer to a function that returns
void and takes an int as an argument.
 Chapter 29. Signal Handling 213

returned
function indicates we're and
returns returning a that function
void pointer to function takes an int
|--| | |---|
void (*signal(int sig, void (*func)(int)))(int);

Also, it can return SIG_ERR in case of an error.

Let’s do an example where we make it so you have to hit CTRL-C twice to exit.
I want to be clear that this program engages in undefined behavior in a couple ways. But it’ll probably work
for you, and it’s hard to come up with portable non-trivial demos.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <signal.h>
4

5 int count = 0;
6

7 void sigint_handler(int signum)

8 {
9 // The compiler is allowed to run:
10 //
11 // signal(signum, SIG_DFL)
12 //
13 // when the handler is called. So we reset the handler here:
14 signal(SIGINT, sigint_handler);
15

16 (void)signum; // Get rid of unused variable warning

17

18 count++; // Undefined behavior

19 printf("Count: %d\n", count); // Undefined behavior
20

21 if (count == 2) {
22 printf("Exiting!\n"); // Undefined behavior
23 exit(0);
24 }
25 }
26

27 int main(void)
28 {
29 signal(SIGINT, sigint_handler);
30

31 printf("Try hitting ^C...\n");

32

33 for(;;); // Wait here forever

34 }

One of the things you’ll notice is that on line 14 we reset the signal handler. This is because C has the option
of resetting the signal handler to its SIG_DFL behavior before running your custom handler. In other words,
it could be a one-off. So we reset it first thing so that we handle it again for the next one.
We’re ignoring the return value from signal() in this case. If we’d set it to a different handler earlier, it
would return a pointer to that handler, which we could get like this:
Chapter 29. Signal Handling 214

// old_handler is type "pointer to function that takes a single

// int parameter and returns void":

void (*old_handler)(int);

old_handler = signal(SIGINT, sigint_handler);

That said, I’m not sure of a common use case for this. But if you need the old handler for some reason, you
can get it that way.
Quick note on line 16—that’s just to tell the compiler to not warn that we’re not using this variable. It’s like
saying, “I know I’m not using it; you don’t have to warn me.”
And lastly you’ll see that I’ve marked undefined behavior in a couple places. More on that in the next section.

29.4 What Can We Actually Do?

Turns out we’re pretty limited in what we can and can’t do in our signal handlers. This is one of the rea-
sons why I say you shouldn’t even bother with this and instead use your OS’s signal handling instead (e.g.
sigaction() for Unix-like systems).

Wikipedia goes so far as to say the only really portable thing you can do is call signal() with SIG_IGN or
SIG_DFL and that’s it.

Here’s what we can’t portably do:

• Call any standard library function.
– Like printf(), for example.
– I think it’s probably safe to call restartable/reentrant functions, but the spec doesn’t allow that
liberty.
• Get or set values from a local static, file scope, or thread-local variable.
– Unless it’s a lock-free atomic object or…
– You’re assigning into a variable of type volatile sig_atomic_t.
That last bit–sig_atomic_t–is your ticket to getting data out of a signal handler. (Unless you want to use
lock-free atomic objects, which is outside the scope of this section2 .) It’s an integer type that might or might
not be signed. And it’s bounded by what you can put in there.
You can look at the minimum and maximum allowable values in the macros SIG_ATOMIC_MIN and
SIG_ATOMIC_MAX3 .

Confusingly, the spec also says you can’t refer “to any object with static or thread storage duration that is not
a lock-free atomic object other than by assigning a value to an object declared as volatile sig_atomic_t
[…]”
My read on this is that you can’t read or write anything that’s not a lock-free atomic object. Also you can
assign to an object that’s volatile sig_atomic_t.
But can you read from it? I honestly don’t see why not, except that the spec is very pointed about mentioning
assigning into. But if you have to read it and make any kind of decision based on it, you might be opening
up room for some kind of race conditions.
With that in mind, we can rewrite our “hit CTRL-C twice to exit” code to be a little more portable, albeit less
verbose on the output.
Let’s change our SIGINT handler to do nothing except increment a value that’s of type volatile
sig_atomic_t. So it’ll count the number of CTRL-Cs that have been hit.
2
Confusingly, sig_atomic_t predates the lock-free atomics and is not the same thing.
3
If sig_action_t is signed, the range will be at least -127 to 127. If unsigned, at least 0 to 255.
 Chapter 29. Signal Handling 215

Then in our main loop, we’ll check to see if that counter is over 2, then bail out if it is.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <signal.h>
3

4 volatile sig_atomic_t count = 0;

5

6 void sigint_handler(int signum)

7 {
8 (void)signum; // Unused variable warning
9

10 signal(SIGINT, sigint_handler); // Reset signal handler

11

12 count++; // Undefined behavior

13 }
14

15 int main(void)
16 {
17 signal(SIGINT, sigint_handler);
18

19 printf("Hit ^C twice to exit.\n");

20

21 while(count < 2);

22 }

Undefined behavior again? It’s my read that this is, because we have to read the value in order to increment
and store it.
If we only want to postpone the exit by one hitting of CTRL-C, we can do that without too much trouble. But
any more postponement would require some ridiculous function chaining.
What we’ll do is handle it once, and the handler will reset the signal to its default behavior (that is, to exit):
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <signal.h>
3

4 void sigint_handler(int signum)

5 {
6 (void)signum; // Unused variable warning
7 signal(SIGINT, SIG_DFL); // Reset signal handler
8 }
9

10 int main(void)
11 {
12 signal(SIGINT, sigint_handler);
13

14 printf("Hit ^C twice to exit.\n");

15

16 while(1);
17 }

Later when we look at lock-free atomic variables, we’ll see a way to fix the count version (assuming lock-
free atomic variables are available on your particular system).
This is why at the beginning, I was suggesting checking out your OS’s built-in signal system as a probably-
superior alternative.
Chapter 29. Signal Handling 216

29.5 Friends Don’t Let Friends signal()

Again, use your OS’s built-in signal handling or the equivalent. It’s not in the spec, not as portable, but
probably is far more capable. Plus your OS probably has a number of signals defined that aren’t in the C
spec. And it’s difficult to write portable code using signal() anyway.
 Chapter 30

Variable-Length Arrays (VLAs)

C provides a way for you to declare an array whose size is determined at runtime. This gives you the benefits
of dynamic runtime sizing like you get with malloc(), but without needing to worry about free()ing the
memory after.
Now, a lot of people don’t like VLAs. They’ve been banned from the Linux kernel, for example. We’ll dig
into more of that rationale later.
This is an optional feature of the language. The macro __STDC_NO_VLA__ is set to 1 if VLAs are not present.
(They were mandatory in C99, and then became optional in C11.)
#if __STDC_NO_VLA__ == 1
#error Sorry, need VLAs for this program!
#endif

But since neither GCC nor Clang bother to define this macro, you may get limited mileage from this.
Let’s dive in first with an example, and then we’ll look for the devil in the details.

30.1 The Basics

A normal array is declared with a constant size, like this:
int v[10];

But with VLAs, we can use a size determined at runtime to set the array, like this:
int n = 10;
int v[n];

Now, that looks like the same thing, and in many ways is, but this gives you the flexibility to compute the
size you need, and then get an array of exactly that size.
Let’s ask the user to input the size of the array, and then store the index-times-10 in each of those array
elements:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int n;
6

7 printf("Enter a number: "); fflush(stdout);

217
 Chapter 30. Variable-Length Arrays (VLAs) 218

8 scanf(" %d", &n);

9

10 int v[n];
11

12 for (int i = 0; i < n; i++)

13 v[i] = i * 10;
14

15 for (int i = 0; i < n; i++)

16 printf("v[%d] = %d\n", i, v[i]);
17 }

(On line 7, I have an fflush() that should force the line to output even though I don’t have a newline at the
end.)
Line 10 is where we declare the VLA—once execution gets past that line, the size of the array is set to
whatever n was at that moment. The array length can’t be changed later.
You can put an expression in the brackets, as well:
int v[x * 100];

Some restrictions:
• You can’t declare a VLA at file scope, and you can’t make a static one in block scope1 .
• You can’t use an initializer list to initialize the array.
Also, entering a negative value for the size of the array invokes undefined behavior—in this universe, anyway.

30.2 sizeof and VLAs

We’re used to sizeof giving us the size in bytes of any particular object, including arrays. And VLAs are
no exception.
The main difference is that sizeof on a VLA is executed at runtime, whereas on a non-variably-sized variable
it is computed at compile time.
But the usage is the same.
You can even compute the number of elements in a VLA with the usual array trick:
size_t num_elems = sizeof v / sizeof v[0];

There’s a subtle and correct implication from the above line: pointer arithmetic works just like you’d expect
for a regular array. So go ahead and use it to your heart’s content:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int n = 5;
6 int v[n];
7

8 int *p = v;
9

10 *(p+2) = 12;
11 printf("%d\n", v[2]); // 12

1
This is due to how VLAs are typically allocated on the stack, whereas static variables are on the heap. And the whole idea with
VLAs is they’ll be automatically dellocated when the stack frame is popped at the end of the function.
 Chapter 30. Variable-Length Arrays (VLAs) 219

12

13 p[3] = 34;
14 printf("%d\n", v[3]); // 34
15 }

Like with regular arrays, you can use parentheses with sizeof() to get the size of a would-be VLA without
actually declaring one:
int x = 12;

printf("%zu\n", sizeof(int [x])); // Prints 48 on my system

30.3 Multidimensional VLAs

You can go ahead and make all kinds of VLAs with one or more dimensions set to a variable
int w = 10;
int h = 20;

int x[h][w];
int y[5][w];
int z[10][w][20];

Again, you can navigate these just like you would a regular array.

30.4 Passing One-Dimensional VLAs to Functions

Passing single-dimensional VLAs into a function can be no different than passing a regular array in. You
just go for it.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int sum(int count, int *v)

4 {
5 int total = 0;
6

7 for (int i = 0; i < count; i++)

8 total += v[i];
9

10 return total;
11 }
12

13 int main(void)
14 {
15 int x[5]; // Standard array
16

17 int a = 5;
18 int y[a]; // VLA
19

20 for (int i = 0; i < a; i++)

21 x[i] = y[i] = i + 1;
22

23 printf("%d\n", sum(5, x));

24 printf("%d\n", sum(a, y));
 Chapter 30. Variable-Length Arrays (VLAs) 220

25 }

But there’s a bit more to it than that. You can also let C know that the array is a specific VLA size by passing
that in first and then giving that dimension in the parameter list:
int sum(int count, int v[count])
{
// ...
}

Incidentally, there are a couple ways of listing a prototype for the above function; one of them involves an
* if you don’t want to specifically name the value in the VLA. It just indicates that the type is a VLA as
opposed to a regular pointer.
VLA prototypes:
void do_something(int count, int v[count]); // With names
void do_something(int, int v[*]); // Without names

Again, that * thing only works with the prototype—in the function itself, you’ll have to put the explicit size.
Now—let’s get multidimensional! This is where the fun begins.

30.5 Passing Multi-Dimensional VLAs to Functions

Same thing as we did with the second form of one-dimensional VLAs, above, but this time we’re passing in
two dimensions and using those.
In the following example, we build a multiplication table matrix of a variable width and height, and then pass
it to a function to print it out.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 void print_matrix(int h, int w, int m[h][w])

4 {
5 for (int row = 0; row < h; row++) {
6 for (int col = 0; col < w; col++)
7 printf("%2d ", m[row][col]);
8 printf("\n");
9 }
10 }
11

12 int main(void)
13 {
14 int rows = 4;
15 int cols = 7;
16

17 int matrix[rows][cols];
18

19 for (int row = 0; row < rows; row++)

20 for (int col = 0; col < cols; col++)
21 matrix[row][col] = row * col;
22

23 print_matrix(rows, cols, matrix);

24 }
 Chapter 30. Variable-Length Arrays (VLAs) 221

30.5.1 Partial Multidimensional VLAs

You can have some of the dimensions fixed and some variable. Let’s say we have a record length fixed at 5
elements, but we don’t know how many records there are.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 void print_records(int count, int record[count][5])

4 {
5 for (int i = 0; i < count; i++) {
6 for (int j = 0; j < 5; j++)
7 printf("%2d ", record[i][j]);
8 printf("\n");
9 }
10 }
11

12 int main(void)
13 {
14 int rec_count = 3;
15 int records[rec_count][5];
16

17 // Fill with some dummy data

18 for (int i = 0; i < rec_count; i++)
19 for (int j = 0; j < 5; j++)
20 records[i][j] = (i+1)*(j+2);
21

22 print_records(rec_count, records);
23 }

30.6 Compatibility with Regular Arrays

Because VLAs are just like regular arrays in memory, it’s perfectly permissible to pass them interchange-
ably… as long as the dimensions match.
For example, if we have a function that specifically wants a 3 × 5 array, we can still pass a VLA into it.
int foo(int m[5][3]) {...}

\\ ...

int w = 3, h = 5;
int matrix[h][w];

foo(matrix); // OK!

Likewise, if you have a VLA function, you can pass a regular array into it:
int foo(int h, int w, int m[h][w]) {...}

\\ ...

int matrix[3][5];

foo(3, 5, matrix); // OK!

Beware, though: if your dimensions mismatch, you’re going to have some undefined behavior going on,
 Chapter 30. Variable-Length Arrays (VLAs) 222

likely.

30.7 typedef and VLAs

You can typedef a VLA, but the behavior might not be as you expect.
Basically, typedef makes a new type with the values as they existed the moment the typedef was executed.
So it’s not a typedef of a VLA so much as a new fixed size array type of the dimensions at the time.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int w = 10;
6

7 typedef int goat[w];

8

9 // goat is an array of 10 ints

10 goat x;
11

12 // Init with squares of numbers

13 for (int i = 0; i < w; i++)
14 x[i] = i*i;
15

16 // Print them
17 for (int i = 0; i < w; i++)
18 printf("%d\n", x[i]);
19

20 // Now let's change w...

21

22 w = 20;
23

24 // But goat is STILL an array of 10 ints, because that was the

25 // value of w when the typedef executed.
26 }

So it acts like an array of fixed size.

But you still can’t use an initializer list on it.

30.8 Jumping Pitfalls

You have to watch out when using goto near VLAs because a lot of things aren’t legal.
And when you’re using longjmp() there’s a case where you could leak memory with VLAs.
But both of these things we’ll cover in their respective chapters.

30.9 General Issues

VLAs have been banned from the Linux kernel for a few reasons:
• Lots of places they were used should have just been fixed-size.
• The code behind VLAs is slower (to a degree that most people wouldn’t notice, but makes a difference
in an operating system).
Chapter 30. Variable-Length Arrays (VLAs) 223

• VLAs are not supported to the same degree by all C compilers.

• Stack size is limited, and VLAs go on the stack. If some code accidentally (or maliciously) passes a
large value into a kernel function that allocates a VLA, Bad Things™ could happen.
Other folks online point out that there’s no way to detect a VLA’s failure to allocate, and programs that
suffered such problems would likely just crash. While fixed-size arrays also have the same issue, it’s far
more likely that someone accidentally make a VLA Of Unusual Size than somehow accidentally declare a
fixed-size, say, 30 megabyte array.
 Chapter 31

goto

The goto statement is universally revered and can be here presented without contest.
Just kidding! Over the years, there has been a lot of back-and-forth over whether or not (often not) goto is
considered harmful1 .
In this programmer’s opinion, you should use whichever constructs leads to the best code, factoring in main-
tainability and speed. And sometimes this might be goto!
In this chapter, we’ll see how goto works in C, and then check out some of the common cases where it is
used2 .

31.1 A Simple Example

In this example, we’re going to use goto to skip a line of code and jump to a label. The label is the identifier
that can be a goto target—it ends with a colon (:).
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 printf("One\n");
6 printf("Two\n");
7

8 goto skip_3;
9

10 printf("Three\n");
11

12 skip_3:
13

14 printf("Five!\n");
15 }

The output is:

One
Two
Five!
1
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Goto#Criticism
2
I’d like to point out that using goto in all these cases is avoidable. You can use variables and loops instead. It’s just that some
people think goto produces the best code in those circumstances.

224
Chapter 31. goto 225

goto sends execution jumping to the specified label, skipping everything in between.

You can jump forward or backward with goto.

infinite_loop:
print("Hello, world!\n");
goto infinite_loop;

Labels are skipped over during execution. The following will print all three numbers in order just as if the
labels weren’t there:
printf("Zero\n");
label_1:
label_2:
printf("One\n");
label_3:
printf("Two\n");
label_4:
printf("Three\n");

As you’ve noticed, it’s common convention to justify the labels all the way on the left. This increases read-
ability because a reader can quickly scan to find the destination.
Labels have function scope. That is, no matter how many levels deep in blocks they appear, you can still
goto them from anywhere in the function.

It also means you can only goto labels that are in the same function as the goto itself. Labels in other
functions are out of scope from goto’s perspective. And it means you can use the same label name in two
functions—just not the same label name in the same function.

31.2 Labeled continue

In some languages, you can actually specify a label for a continue statement. C doesn’t allow it, but you
can easily use goto instead.
To show the issue, check out continue in this nested loop:
for (int i = 0; i < 3; i++) {
for (int j = 0; j < 3; j++) {
printf("%d, %d\n", i, j);
continue; // Always goes to next j
}
}

As we see, that continue, like all continues, goes to the next iteration of the nearest enclosing loop. What
if we want to continue in the next loop out, the loop with i?
Well, we can break to get back to the outer loop, right?
for (int i = 0; i < 3; i++) {
for (int j = 0; j < 3; j++) {
printf("%d, %d\n", i, j);
break; // Gets us to the next iteration of i
}
}

That gets us two levels of nested loop. But then if we nest another loop, we’re out of options. What about
this, where we don’t have any statement that will get us out to the next iteration of i?
Chapter 31. goto 226

for (int i = 0; i < 3; i++) {

for (int j = 0; j < 3; j++) {
for (int k = 0; k < 3; k++) {
printf("%d, %d, %d\n", i, j, k);

continue; // Gets us to the next iteration of k

break; // Gets us to the next iteration of j
????; // Gets us to the next iteration of i???

}
}
}

The goto statement offers us a way!

for (int i = 0; i < 3; i++) {
for (int j = 0; j < 3; j++) {
for (int k = 0; k < 3; k++) {
printf("%d, %d, %d\n", i, j, k);

goto continue_i; // Now continuing the i loop!!

}
}
continue_i: ;
}

We have a ; at the end there—that’s because you can’t have a label pointing to the plain end of a compound
statement (or before a variable declaration).

31.3 Bailing Out

When you’re super nested in the middle of some code, you can use goto to get out of it in a manner that’s
often cleaner than nesting more ifs and using flag variables.
// Pseudocode

for(...) {
for (...) {
while (...) {
do {
if (some_error_condition)
goto bail;

} while(...);
}
}
}

bail:
// Cleanup here

Without goto, you’d have to check an error condition flag in all of the loops to get all the way out.
Chapter 31. goto 227

31.4 Labeled break

This is a very similar situation to how continue only continues the innermost loop. break also only breaks
out of the innermost loop.
for (int i = 0; i < 3; i++) {
for (int j = 0; j < 3; j++) {
printf("%d, %d\n", i, j);
break; // Only breaks out of the j loop
}
}

printf("Done!\n");

But we can use goto to break farther:

for (int i = 0; i < 3; i++) {
for (int j = 0; j < 3; j++) {
printf("%d, %d\n", i, j);
goto break_i; // Now breaking out of the i loop!
}
}

break_i:

printf("Done!\n");

31.5 Multi-level Cleanup

If you’re calling multiple functions to initialize multiple systems and one of them fails, you should only
de-initialize the ones that you’ve gotten to so far.
Let’s do a fake example where we start initializing systems and checking to see if any returns an error (we’ll
use -1 to indicate an error). If one of them does, we have to shutdown only the systems we’ve initialized so
far.
if (init_system_1() == -1)
goto shutdown;

if (init_system_2() == -1)
goto shutdown_1;

if (init_system_3() == -1)
goto shutdown_2;

if (init_system_4() == -1)
goto shutdown_3;

do_main_thing(); // Run our program

shutdown_system4();

shutdown_3:
shutdown_system3();
 Chapter 31. goto 228

shutdown_2:
shutdown_system2();

shutdown_1:
shutdown_system1();

shutdown:
print("All subsystems shut down.\n");

Note that we’re shutting down in the reverse order that we initialized the subsystems. So if subsystem 4 fails
to start up, it will shut down 3, 2, then 1 in that order.

31.6 Tail Call Optimization

Kinda. For recursive functions only.
If you’re unfamiliar, Tail Call Optimization (TCO)3 is a way to not waste stack space when calling other
functions under very specific circumstances. Unfortunately the details are beyond the scope of this guide.
But if you have a recursive function you know can be optimized in this way, you can make use of this
technique. (Note that you can’t tail call other functions due to the function scope of labels.)
Let’s do a straightforward example, factorial.
Here’s a recursive version that’s not TCO, but it can be!
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int factorial(int n, int a)

5 {
6 if (n == 0)
7 return a;
8

9 return factorial(n - 1, a * n);

10 }
11

12 int main(void)
13 {
14 for (int i = 0; i < 8; i++)
15 printf("%d! == %ld\n", i, factorial(i, 1));
16 }

To make it happen, you can replace the call with two steps:
1. Set the values of the parameters to what they’d be on the next call.
2. goto a label on the first line of the function.
Let’s try it:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int factorial(int n, int a)

4 {
5 tco: // add this
6

3
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Tail_call
 Chapter 31. goto 229

7 if (n == 0)
8 return a;
9

10 // replace return by setting new parameter values and

11 // goto-ing the beginning of the function
12

13 //return factorial(n - 1, a * n);

14

15 int next_n = n - 1; // See how these match up with

16 int next_a = a * n; // the recursive arguments, above?
17

18 n = next_n; // Set the parameters to the new values

19 a = next_a;
20

21 goto tco; // And repeat!

22 }
23

24 int main(void)
25 {
26 for (int i = 0; i < 8; i++)
27 printf("%d! == %d\n", i, factorial(i, 1));
28 }

I used temporary variables up there to set the next values of the parameters before jumping to the start of the
function. See how they correspond to the recursive arguments that were in the recursive call?
Now, why use temp variables? I could have done this instead:
a *= n;
n -= 1;

goto tco;

and that actually works just fine. But if I carelessly reverse those two lines of code:
n -= 1; // BAD NEWS
a *= n;

—now we’re in trouble. We modified n before using it to modify a. That’s Bad because that’s not how
it works when you call recursively. Using the temporary variables avoids this problem even if you’re not
looking out for it. And the compiler likely optimizes them out, anyway.

31.7 Restarting Interrupted System Calls

This is outside the spec, but commonly seen in Unix-like systems.
Certain long-lived system calls might return an error if they’re interrupted by a signal, and errno will be set
to EINTR to indicate the syscall was doing fine; it was just interrupted.
In those cases, it’s really common for the programmer to want to restart the call and try it again.
retry:
byte_count = read(0, buf, sizeof(buf) - 1); // Unix read() syscall

if (byte_count == -1) { // An error occurred...

if (errno == EINTR) { // But it was just interrupted
printf("Restarting...\n");
Chapter 31. goto 230

goto retry;
}

Many Unix-likes have an SA_RESTART flag you can pass to sigaction() to request the OS automatically
restart any slow syscalls instead of failing with EINTR.
Again, this is Unix-specific and is outside the C standard.
That said, it’s possible to use a similar technique any time any function should be restarted.

31.8 goto and Variable Scope

We’ve already seen that labels have function scope, but weird things can happen if we jump past some variable
initialization.
Look at this example where we jump from a place where the variable x is out of scope into the middle of its
scope (in the block).
goto label;

{
int x = 12345;

label:
printf("%d\n", x);
}

This will compile and run, but gives me a warning:

warning: ‘x’ is used uninitialized in this function

And then it prints out 0 when I run it (your mileage may vary).
Basically what has happened is that we jumped into x’s scope (so it was OK to reference it in the printf())
but we jumped over the line that actually initialized it to 12345. So the value was indeterminate.
The fix is, of course, to get the initialization after the label one way or another.
goto label;

{
int x;

label:
x = 12345;
printf("%d\n", x);
}

Let’s look at one more example.

{
int x = 10;

label:

printf("%d\n", x);
}

goto label;
Chapter 31. goto 231

What happens here?

The first time through the block, we’re good. x is 10 and that’s what prints.
But after the goto, we’re jumping into the scope of x, but past its initialization. Which means we can still
print it, but the value is indeterminate (since it hasn’t been reinitialized).
On my machine, it prints 10 again (to infinity), but that’s just luck. It could print any value after the goto
since x is uninitialized.

31.9 goto and Variable-Length Arrays

When it comes to VLAs and goto, there’s one rule: you can’t jump from outside the scope of a VLA into
the scope of that VLA.
If I try to do this:
int x = 10;

goto label;

{
int v[x];

label:

printf("Hi!\n");
}

I get an error:
error: jump into scope of identifier with variably modified type

You can jump in ahead of the VLA declaration, like this:

int x = 10;

goto label;

{
label: ;
int v[x];

printf("Hi!\n");
}

Because that way the VLA gets allocated properly before its inevitable deallocation once it falls out of scope.
Chapter 32

Types Part V: Compound Literals and

Generic Selections

This is the final chapter for types! We’re going to talk about two things:
• How to have “anonymous” unnamed objects and how that’s useful.
• How to generate type-dependent code.
They’re not particularly related, but don’t really each warrant their own chapters. So I crammed them in here
like a rebel!

32.1 Compound Literals

This is a neat feature of the language that allows you to create an object of some type on the fly without ever
assigning it to a variable. You can make simple types, arrays, structs, you name it.
One of the main uses for this is passing complex arguments to functions when you don’t want to make a
temporary variable to hold the value.
The way you create a compound literal is to put the type name in parentheses, and then put an initializer list
after. For example, an unnamed array of ints, might look like this:
(int []){1,2,3,4}

Now, that line of code doesn’t do anything on its own. It creates an unnamed array of 4 ints, and then throws
them away without using them.
We could use a pointer to store a reference to the array…
int *p = (int []){1 ,2 ,3 ,4};

printf("%d\n", p[1]); // 2

But that seems a little like a long-winded way to have an array. I mean, we could have just done this1 :
int p[] = {1, 2, 3, 4};

printf("%d\n", p[1]); // 2

So let’s take a look at a more useful example.

1
Which isn’t quite the same, since it’s an array, not a pointer to an int.

232
 Chapter 32. Types Part V: Compound Literals and Generic Selections 233

32.1.1 Passing Unnamed Objects to Functions

Let’s say we have a function to sum an array of ints:
int sum(int p[], int count)
{
int total = 0;

for (int i = 0; i < count; i++)

total += p[i];

return total;
}

If we wanted to call it, we’d normally have to do something like this, declaring an array and storing values
in it to pass to the function:
int a[] = {1, 2, 3, 4};

int s = sum(a, 4);

But unnamed objects give us a way to skip the variable by passing it directly in (parameter names listed
above). Check it out—we’re going to replace the variable a with an unnamed array that we pass in as the
first argument:
// p[] count
// |-----------------| |
int s = sum((int []){1, 2, 3, 4}, 4);

Pretty slick!

32.1.2 Unnamed structs

We can do something similar with structs.
First, let’s do things without unnamed objects. We’ll define a struct to hold some x/y coordinates. Then
we’ll define one, passing in values into its initializer. Finally, we’ll pass it to a function to print the values:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 struct coord {
4 int x, y;
5 };
6

7 void print_coord(struct coord c)

8 {
9 printf("%d, %d\n", c.x, c.y);
10 }
11

12 int main(void)
13 {
14 struct coord t = {.x=10, .y=20};
15

16 print_coord(t); // prints "10, 20"

17 }

Straightforward enough?
Let’s modify it to use an unnamed object instead of the variable t we’re passing to print_coord().
 Chapter 32. Types Part V: Compound Literals and Generic Selections 234

We’ll just take t out of there and replace it with an unnamed struct:
7 //struct coord t = {.x=10, .y=20};
8

9 print_coord((struct coord){.x=10, .y=20}); // prints "10, 20"

Still works!

32.1.3 Pointers to Unnamed Objects

You might have noticed in the last example that even through we were using a struct, we were passing a
copy of the struct to print_coord() as opposed to passing a pointer to the struct.
Turns out, we can just take the address of an unnamed object with & like always.
This is because, in general, if an operator would have worked on a variable of that type, you can use that
operator on an unnamed object of that type.
Let’s modify the above code so that we pass a pointer to an unnamed object
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 struct coord {
4 int x, y;
5 };
6

7 void print_coord(struct coord *c)

8 {
9 printf("%d, %d\n", c->x, c->y);
10 }
11

12 int main(void)
13 {
14 // Note the &
15 // |
16 print_coord(&(struct coord){.x=10, .y=20}); // prints "10, 20"
17 }

Additionally, this can be a nice way to pass even pointers to simple objects:
// Pass a pointer to an int with value 3490
foo(&(int){3490});

Easy as that.

32.1.4 Unnamed Objects and Scope

The lifetime of an unnamed object ends at the end of its scope. The biggest way this could bite you is if you
make a new unnamed object, get a pointer to it, and then leave the object’s scope. In that case, the pointer
will refer to a dead object.
So this is undefined behavior:
int *p;

{
p = &(int){10};
}
 Chapter 32. Types Part V: Compound Literals and Generic Selections 235

printf("%d\n", *p); // INVALID: The (int){10} fell out of scope

Likewise, you can’t return a pointer to an unnamed object from a function. The object is deallocated when
it falls out of scope:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int *get3490(void)
4 {
5 // Don't do this
6 return &(int){3490};
7 }
8

9 int main(void)
10 {
11 printf("%d\n", *get3490()); // INVALID: (int){3490} fell out of scope
12 }

Just think of their scope like that of an ordinary local variable. You can’t return a pointer to a local variable,
either.

32.1.5 Silly Unnamed Object Example

You can put any type in there and make an unnamed object.
For example, these are effectively equivalent:
int x = 3490;

printf("%d\n", x); // 3490 (variable)

printf("%d\n", 3490); // 3490 (constant)
printf("%d\n", (int){3490}); // 3490 (unnamed object)

That last one is unnamed, but it’s silly. Might as well do the simple one on the line before.
But hopefully that provides a little more clarity on the syntax.

32.2 Generic Selections

This is an expression that allows you to select different pieces of code depending on the type of the first
argument to the expression.
We’ll look at an example in just a second, but it’s important to know this is processed at compile time, not at
runtime. There’s no runtime analysis going on here.
The expression begins with _Generic, works kinda like a switch, and it takes at least two arguments.
The first argument is an expression (or variable2 ) that has a type. All expressions have a type. The remaining
arguments to _Generic are the cases of what to substitute in for the result of the expression if the first
argument is that type.
Wat?
Let’s try it out and see.
2
A variable used here is an expression.
 Chapter 32. Types Part V: Compound Literals and Generic Selections 236

1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int i;
6 float f;
7 char c;
8

9 char *s = _Generic(i,
10 int: "that variable is an int",
11 float: "that variable is a float",
12 default: "that variable is some type"
13 );
14

15 printf("%s\n", s);
16 }

Check out the _Generic expression starting on line 9.

When the compiler sees it, it looks at the type of the first argument. (In this example, the type of the variable
i.) It then looks through the cases for something of that type. And then it substitutes the argument in place
of the entire _Generic expression.
In this case, i is an int, so it matches that case. Then the string is substituted in for the expression. So the
line turns into this when the compiler sees it:
char *s = "that variable is an int";

If the compiler can’t find a type match in the _Generic, it looks for the optional default case and uses that.
If it can’t find a type match and there’s no default, you’ll get a compile error. The first expression must
match one of the types or default.
Because it’s inconvenient to write _Generic over and over, it’s often used to make the body of a macro that
can be easily repeatedly reused.
Let’s make a macro TYPESTR(x) that takes an argument and returns a string with the type of the argument.
So TYPESTR(1) will return the string "int", for example.
Here we go:
#include <stdio.h>

#define TYPESTR(x) _Generic((x), \

int: "int", \
long: "long", \
float: "float", \
double: "double", \
default: "something else")

int main(void)
{
int i;
long l;
float f;
double d;
char c;
 Chapter 32. Types Part V: Compound Literals and Generic Selections 237

printf("i is type %s\n", TYPESTR(i));

printf("l is type %s\n", TYPESTR(l));
printf("f is type %s\n", TYPESTR(f));
printf("d is type %s\n", TYPESTR(d));
printf("c is type %s\n", TYPESTR(c));
}

This outputs:
i is type int
l is type long
f is type float
d is type double
c is type something else

Which should be no surprise, because, like we said, that code in main() is replaced with the following when
it is compiled:
printf("i is type %s\n", "int");
printf("l is type %s\n", "long");
printf("f is type %s\n", "float");
printf("d is type %s\n", "double");
printf("c is type %s\n", "something else");

And that’s exactly the output we see.

Let’s do one more. I’ve included some macros here so that when you run:
int i = 10;
char *s = "Foo!";

PRINT_VAL(i);
PRINT_VAL(s);

you get the output:

i = 10
s = Foo!

We’ll have to make use of some macro magic to do that.

1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <string.h>
3

4 // Macro that gives back a format specifier for a type

5 #define FMTSPEC(x) _Generic((x), \
6 int: "%d", \
7 long: "%ld", \
8 float: "%f", \
9 double: "%f", \
10 char *: "%s")
11 // TODO: add more types
12

13 // Macro that prints a variable in the form "name = value"

14 #define PRINT_VAL(x) do { \
15 char fmt[512]; \
16 snprintf(fmt, sizeof fmt, #x " = %s\n", FMTSPEC(x)); \
17 printf(fmt, (x)); \
 Chapter 32. Types Part V: Compound Literals and Generic Selections 238

18 } while(0)
19

20 int main(void)
21 {
22 int i = 10;
23 float f = 3.14159;
24 char *s = "Hello, world!";
25

26 PRINT_VAL(i);
27 PRINT_VAL(f);
28 PRINT_VAL(s);
29 }

for the output:

i = 10
f = 3.141590
s = Hello, world!

We could have crammed that all in one big macro, but I broke it into two to prevent eye bleeding.
Chapter 33

Arrays Part II

We’re going to go over a few extra misc things this chapter concerning arrays.
• Type qualifiers with array parameters
• The static keyword with array parameters
• Partial multi-dimensional array initializers
They’re not super-commonly seen, but we’ll peek at them since they’re part of the newer spec.

33.1 Type Qualifiers for Arrays in Parameter Lists

If you recall from earlier, these two things are equivalent in function parameter lists:
int func(int *p) {...}
int func(int p[]) {...}

And you might also recall that you can add type qualifiers to a pointer variable like so:
int *const p;
int *volatile p;
int *const volatile p;
// etc.

But how can we do that when we’re using array notation in your parameter list?
Turns out it goes in the brackets. And you can put the optional count after. The two following lines are
equivalent:
int func(int *const volatile p) {...}
int func(int p[const volatile]) {...}
int func(int p[const volatile 10]) {...}

If you have a multidimensional array, you need to put the type qualifiers in the first set of brackets.

33.2 static for Arrays in Parameter Lists

Similarly, you can use the keyword static in the array in a parameter list.
This is something I’ve never seen in the wild. It is always followed by a dimension:
int func(int p[static 4]) {...}

239
Chapter 33. Arrays Part II 240

What this means, in the above example, is the compiler is going to assume that any array you pass to the
function will be at least 4 elements.
Anything else is undefined behavior.
int func(int p[static 4]) {...}

int main(void)
{
int a[] = {11, 22, 33, 44};
int b[] = {11, 22, 33, 44, 55};
int c[] = {11, 22};

func(a); // OK! a is 4 elements, the minimum

func(b); // OK! b is at least 4 elements
func(c); // Undefined behavior! c is under 4 elements!
}

This basically sets the minimum size array you can have.
Important note: there is nothing in the compiler that prohibits you from passing in a smaller array. The
compiler probably won’t warn you, and it won’t detect it at runtime.
By putting static in there, you’re saying, “I double secret PROMISE that I will never pass in a smaller
array than this.” And the compiler says, “Yeah, fine,” and trusts you to not do it.
And then the compiler can make certain code optimizations, safe in the knowledge that you, the programmer,
will always do the right thing.

33.3 Equivalent Initializers

C is a little bit, shall we say, flexible when it comes to array initializers.
We’ve already seen some of this, where any missing values are replaced with zero.
For example, we can initialize a 5 element array to 1,2,0,0,0 with this:
int a[5] = {1, 2};

Or set an array entirely to zero with:

int a[5] = {0};

But things get interesting when initializing multidimensional arrays.

Let’s make an array of 3 rows and 2 columns:
int a[3][2];

Let’s write some code to initialize it and print the result:

#include <stdio.h>

int main(void)
{
int a[3][2] = {
{1, 2},
{3, 4},
{5, 6}
};
Chapter 33. Arrays Part II 241

for (int row = 0; row < 3; row++) {

for (int col = 0; col < 2; col++)
printf("%d ", a[row][col]);
printf("\n");
}
}

And when we run it, we get the expected:

1 2
3 4
5 6

Let’s leave off some of the initializer elements and see they get set to zero:
int a[3][2] = {
{1, 2},
{3}, // Left off the 4!
{5, 6}
};

which produces:
1 2
3 0
5 6

Now let’s leave off the entire last middle element:

int a[3][2] = {
{1, 2},
// {3, 4}, // Just cut this whole thing out
{5, 6}
};

And now we get this, which might not be what you expect:
1 2
5 6
0 0

But if you stop to think about it, we only provided enough initializers for two rows, so they got used for the
first two rows. And the remaining elements were initialized to zero.
So far so good. Generally, if we leave off parts of the initializer, the compiler sets the corresponding elements
to 0.
But let’s get crazy.
int a[3][2] = { 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 };

What—? That’s a 2D array, but it only has a 1D initializer!

Turns out that’s legal (though GCC will warn about it with the proper warnings turned on).
Basically, what it does is starts filling in elements in row 0, then row 1, then row 2 from left to right.
So when we print, it prints in order:
1 2
3 4
5 6
Chapter 33. Arrays Part II 242

If we leave some off:

int a[3][2] = { 1, 2, 3 };

they fill with 0:

1 2
3 0
0 0

So if you want to fill the whole array with 0, then go ahead and:
int a[3][2] = {0};

But my recommendation is if you have a 2D array, use a 2D initializer. It just makes the code more readable.
(Except for initializing the whole array with 0, in which case it’s idiomatic to use {0} no matter the dimension
of the array.)
 Chapter 34

Long Jumps with setjmp, longjmp

We’ve already seen goto, which jumps in function scope. But longjmp() allows you to jump back to an
earlier point in execution, back to a function that called this one.
There are a lot of limitations and caveats, but this can be a useful function for bailing out from deep in the
call stack back up to an earlier state.
In my experience, this is very rarely-used functionality.

34.1 Using setjmp and longjmp

The dance we’re going to do here is to basically put a bookmark in execution with setjmp(). Later on,
we’ll call longjmp() and it’ll jump back to the earlier point in execution where we set the bookmark with
setjmp().

And it can do this even if you’ve called subfunctions.

Here’s a quick demo where we call into functions a couple levels deep and then bail out of it.
We’re going to use a file scope variable env to keep the state of things when we call setjmp() so we can
restore them when we call longjmp() later. This is the variable in which we remember our “place”.
The variable env is of type jmp_buf, an opaque type declared in <setjmp.h>.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <setjmp.h>
3

4 jmp_buf env;
5

6 void depth2(void)
7 {
8 printf("Entering depth 2\n");
9 longjmp(env, 3490); // Bail out
10 printf("Leaving depth 2\n"); // This won't happen
11 }
12

13 void depth1(void)
14 {
15 printf("Entering depth 1\n");
16 depth2();
17 printf("Leaving depth 1\n"); // This won't happen

243
 Chapter 34. Long Jumps with setjmp, longjmp 244

18 }
19

20 int main(void)
21 {
22 switch (setjmp(env)) {
23 case 0:
24 printf("Calling into functions, setjmp() returned 0\n");
25 depth1();
26 printf("Returned from functions\n"); // This won't happen
27 break;
28

29 case 3490:
30 printf("Bailed back to main, setjmp() returned 3490\n");
31 break;
32 }
33 }

When run, this outputs:

Calling into functions, setjmp() returned 0
Entering depth 1
Entering depth 2
Bailed back to main, setjmp() returned 3490

If you try to take that output and match it up with the code, it’s clear there’s some really funky stuff going on.
One of the most notable things is that setjmp() returns twice. What the actual frank? What is this sorcery?!
So here’s the deal: if setjmp() returns 0, it means that you’ve successfully set the “bookmark” at that point.
If it returns non-zero, it means you’ve just returned to the “bookmark” set earlier. (And the value returned is
the one you pass to longjmp().)
This way you can tell the difference between setting the bookmark and returning to it later.
So when the code, above, calls setjmp() the first time, setjmp() stores the state in the env variable and
returns 0. Later when we call longjmp() with that same env, it restores the state and setjmp() returns the
value longjmp() was passed.

34.2 Pitfalls
Under the hood, this is pretty straightforward. Typically the stack pointer keeps track of the locations in
memory that local variables are stored, and the program counter keeps track of the address of the currently-
executing instruction1 .
So if we want to jump back to an earlier function, it’s basically only a matter of restoring the stack pointer and
program counter to the values kept in the jmp_buf variable, and making sure the return value is set correctly.
And then execution will resume there.
But a variety of factors confound this, making a significant number of undefined behavior traps.

34.2.1 The Values of Local Variables

If you want the values of automatic (non-static and non-extern) local variables to persist in the function
that called setjmp() after a longjmp() happens, you must declare those variables to be volatile.
1
Both “stack pointer” and “program counter” are related to the underlying architecture and C implementation, and are not part of
the spec.
Chapter 34. Long Jumps with setjmp, longjmp 245

Technically, they only have to be volatile if they change between the time setjmp() is called and
longjmp() is called2 .

For example, if we run this code:

int x = 20;

if (setjmp(env) == 0) {
x = 30;
}

and then later longjmp() back, the value of x will be indeterminate.

If we want to fix this, x must be volatile:
volatile int x = 20;

if (setjmp(env) == 0) {
x = 30;
}

Now the value will be the correct 30 after a longjmp() returns us to this point.

34.2.2 How Much State is Saved?

When you longjmp(), execution resumes at the point of the corresponding setjmp(). And that’s it.
The spec points out that it’s just as if you’d jumped back into the function at that point with local variables
set to whatever values they had when the longjmp() call was made.
Things that aren’t restored include, paraphrasing the spec:
• Floating point status flags
• Open files
• Any other component of the abstract machine

34.2.3 You Can’t Name Anything setjmp

You can’t have any extern identifiers with the name setjmp. Or, if setjmp is a macro, you can’t undefine
it.
Both are undefined behavior.

34.2.4 You Can’t setjmp() in a Larger Expression

That is, you can’t do something like this:
if (x == 12 && setjmp(env) == 0) { ... }

That’s too complex to be allowed by the spec due to the machinations that must occur when unrolling the stack
and all that. We can’t longjmp() back into some complex expression that’s only been partially executed.
So there are limits on the complexity of that expression.
• It can be the entire controlling expression of the conditional.
if (setjmp(env)) {...}

2
The rationale here is that the program might store a value temporarily in a CPU register while it’s doing work on it. In that timeframe,
the register holds the correct value, and the value on the stack might be out of date. Then later the register values would get overwritten
and the changes to the variable lost.
Chapter 34. Long Jumps with setjmp, longjmp 246

switch (setjmp(env)) {...}

• It can be part of a relational or equality expression, as long as the other operand is an integer constant.
And the whole thing is the controlling expression of the conditional.
if (setjmp(env) == 0) {...}

• The operand to a logical NOT (!) operation, being the entire controlling expression.
if (!setjmp(env)) {...}

• A standalone expression, possibly cast to void.

setjmp(env);

(void)setjmp(env);

34.2.5 When Can’t You longjmp()?

It’s undefined behavior if:
• You didn’t call setjmp() earlier
• You called setjmp() from another thread
• You called setjmp() in the scope of a variable length array (VLA), and execution left the scope of
that VLA before longjmp() was called.
• The function containing the setjmp() exited before longjmp() was called.
On that last one, “exited” includes normal returns from the function, as well as the case if another longjmp()
jumped back to “earlier” in the call stack than the function in question.

34.2.6 You Can’t Pass 0 to longjmp()

If you try to pass the value 0 to longjmp(), it will silently change that value to 1.
Since setjmp() ultimately returns this value, and having setjmp() return 0 has special meaning, returning
0 is prohibited.

34.2.7 longjmp() and Variable Length Arrays

If you are in scope of a VLA and longjmp() out there, the memory allocated to the VLA could leak3 .
Same thing happens if you longjmp() back over any earlier functions that had VLAs still in scope.
This is one thing that really bugged me able VLAs—that you could write perfectly legitimate C code that
squandered memory. But, hey—I’m not in charge of the spec.

3
That is, remain allocated until the program ends with no way to free it.
Chapter 35

Incomplete Types

It might surprise you to learn that this builds without error:

extern int a[];

int main(void)
{
struct foo *x;
union bar *y;
enum baz *z;
}

We never gave a size for a. And we have pointers to structs foo, bar, and baz that never seem to be
declared anywhere.
And the only warnings I get are that x, y, and z are unused.
These are examples of incomplete types.
An incomplete type is a type the size (i.e. the size you’d get back from sizeof) for which is not known.
Another way to think of it is a type that you haven’t finished declaring.
You can have a pointer to an incomplete type, but you can’t dereference it or use pointer arithmetic on it.
And you can’t sizeof it.
So what can you do with it?

35.1 Use Case: Self-Referential Structures

I only know of one real use case: forward references to structs or unions with self-referential or co-
dependent structures. (I’m going to use struct for the rest of these examples, but they all apply equally to
unions, as well.)

Let’s do the classic example first.

But before I do, know this! As you declare a struct, the struct is incomplete until the closing brace is
reached!
struct antelope { // struct antelope is incomplete here
int leg_count; // Still incomplete
float stomach_fullness; // Still incomplete
float top_speed; // Still incomplete

247
Chapter 35. Incomplete Types 248

char *nickname; // Still incomplete

}; // NOW it's complete.

So what? Seems sane enough.

But what if we’re doing a linked list? Each linked list node needs to have a reference to another node. But
how can we create a reference to another node if we haven’t finished even declaring the node yet?
C’s allowance for incomplete types makes it possible. We can’t declare a node, but we can declare a pointer
to one, even if it’s incomplete!
struct node {
int val;
struct node *next; // struct node is incomplete, but that's OK!
};

Even though the struct node is incomplete on line 3, we can still declare a pointer to one1 .
We can do the same thing if we have two different structs that refer to each other:
struct a {
struct b *x; // Refers to a `struct b`
};

struct b {
struct a *x; // Refers to a `struct a`
};

We’d never be able to make that pair of structures without the relaxed rules for incomplete types.

35.2 Incomplete Type Error Messages

Are you getting errors like these?
invalid application of ‘sizeof’ to incomplete type

invalid use of undefined type

dereferencing pointer to incomplete type

Most likely culprit: you probably forgot to #include the header file that declares the type.

35.3 Other Incomplete Types

Declaring a struct or union with no body makes an incomplete type, e.g. struct foo;.
enums are incomplete until the closing brace.

void is an incomplete type.

Arrays declared extern with no size are incomplete, e.g.:

extern int a[];

If it’s a non-extern array with no size followed by an initializer, it’s incomplete until the closing brace of
the initializer.
1
This works because in C, pointers are the same size regardless of the type of data they point to. So the compiler doesn’t need to
know the size of the struct node at this point; it just needs to know the size of a pointer.
 Chapter 35. Incomplete Types 249

35.4 Use Case: Arrays in Header Files

It can be useful to declare incomplete array types in header files. In those cases, the actual storage (where
the complete array is declared) should be in a single .c file. If you put it in the .h file, it will be duplicated
every time the header file is included.
So what you can do is make a header file with an incomplete type that refers to the array, like so:
1 // File: bar.h
2

3 #ifndef BAR_H
4 #define BAR_H
5

6 extern int my_array[]; // Incomplete type

7

8 #endif

And the in the .c file, actually define the array:

1 // File: bar.c
2

3 int my_array[1024]; // Complete type!

Then you can include the header from as many places as you’d like, and every one of those places will refer
to the same underlying my_array.
1 // File: foo.c
2

3 #include <stdio.h>
4 #include "bar.h" // includes the incomplete type for my_array
5

6 int main(void)
7 {
8 my_array[0] = 10;
9

10 printf("%d\n", my_array[0]);
11 }

When compiling multiple files, remember to specify all the .c files to the compiler, but not the .h files, e.g.:
gcc -o foo foo.c bar.c

35.5 Completing Incomplete Types

If you have an incomplete type, you can complete it by defining the complete struct, union, enum, or array
in the same scope.
struct foo; // incomplete type

struct foo *p; // pointer, no problem

// struct foo f; // Error: incomplete type!

struct foo {
int x, y, z;
}; // Now the struct foo is complete!
Chapter 35. Incomplete Types 250

struct foo f; // Success!

Note that though void is an incomplete type, there’s no way to complete it. Not that anyone ever thinks of
doing that weird thing. But it does explain why you can do this:
void *p; // OK: pointer to incomplete type

and not either of these:

void v; // Error: declare variable of incomplete type

printf("%d\n", *p); // Error: dereference incomplete type

The more you know…

Chapter 36

Complex Numbers

A tiny primer on Complex numbers1 stolen directly from Wikipedia:

A complex number is a number that can be expressed in the form 𝑎 + 𝑏𝑖, where 𝑎 and 𝑏 are
real numbers [i.e. floating point types in C], and 𝑖 represents the imaginary unit, satisfying the
equation 𝑖2 = −1. Because no real number satisfies this equation, 𝑖 is called an imaginary
number. For the complex number 𝑎 + 𝑏𝑖, 𝑎 is called the real part, and 𝑏 is called the imaginary
part.
But that’s as far as I’m going to go. We’ll assume that if you’re reading this chapter, you know what a
complex number is and what you want to do with them.
And all we need to cover is C’s faculties for doing so.
Turns out, though, that complex number support in a compiler is an optional feature. Not all compliant
compilers can do it. And the ones that do, might do it to various degrees of completeness.
You can test if your system supports complex numbers with:
#ifdef __STDC_NO_COMPLEX__
#error Complex numbers not supported!
#endif

Furthermore, there is a macro that indicates adherence to the ISO 60559 (IEEE 754) standard for floating
point math with complex numbers, as well as the presence of the _Imaginary type.
#if __STDC_IEC_559_COMPLEX__ != 1
#error Need IEC 60559 complex support!
#endif

More details on that are spelled out in Annex G in the C11 spec.

36.1 Complex Types

To use complex numbers, #include <complex.h>.
With that, you get at least two types:
_Complex
complex

Those both mean the same thing, so you might as well use the prettier complex.
1
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Complex_number

251
Chapter 36. Complex Numbers 252

You also get some types for imaginary numbers if you implementation is IEC 60559-compliant:
_Imaginary
imaginary

These also both mean the same thing, so you might as well use the prettier imaginary.
You also get values for the imaginary number 𝑖, itself:
I
_Complex_I
_Imaginary_I

The macro I is set to _Imaginary_I (if available), or _Complex_I. So just use I for the imaginary number.
One aside: I’ve said that if a compiler has __STDC_IEC_559_COMPLEX__ set to 1, it must support _Imag-
inary types to be compliant. That’s my read of the spec. However, I don’t know of a single compiler that
actually supports _Imaginary even though they have __STDC_IEC_559_COMPLEX__ set. So I’m going to
write some code with that type in here I have no way of testing. Sorry!
OK, so now we know there’s a complex type, how can we use it?

36.2 Assigning Complex Numbers

Since the complex number has a real and imaginary part, but both of them rely on floating point numbers to
store values, we need to also tell C what precision to use for those parts of the complex number.
We do that by just pinning a float, double, or long double to the complex, either before or after it.
Let’s define a complex number that uses float for its components:
float complex c; // Spec prefers this way
complex float c; // Same thing--order doesn't matter

So that’s great for declarations, but how do we initialize them or assign to them?
Turns out we get to use some pretty natural notation. Example!
double complex x = 5 + 2*I;
double complex y = 10 + 3*I;

For 5 + 2𝑖 and 10 + 3𝑖, respectively.

36.3 Constructing, Deconstructing, and Printing

We’re getting there…
We’ve already seen one way to write a complex number:
double complex x = 5 + 2*I;

There’s also no problem using other floating point numbers to build it:
double a = 5;
double b = 2;
double complex x = a + b*I;

There is also a set of macros to help build these. The above code could be written using the CMPLX() macro,
like so:
 Chapter 36. Complex Numbers 253

double complex x = CMPLX(5, 2);

As far as I can tell in my research, these are almost equivalent:

double complex x = 5 + 2*I;
double complex x = CMPLX(5, 2);

But the CMPLX() macro will handle negative zeros in the imaginary part correctly every time, whereas the
other way might convert them to positive zeros. I think2 This seems to imply that if there’s a chance the
imaginary part will be zero, you should use the macro… but someone should correct me on this if I’m
mistaken!
The CMPLX() macro works on double types. There are two other macros for float and long double:
CMPLXF() and CMPLXL(). (These “f” and “l” suffixes appear in virtually all the complex-number-related
functions.)
Now let’s try the reverse: if we have a complex number, how do we break it apart into its real and imaginary
parts?
Here we have a couple functions that will extract the real and imaginary parts from the number: creal()
and cimag():
double complex x = 5 + 2*I;
double complex y = 10 + 3*I;

printf("x = %f + %fi\n", creal(x), cimag(x));

printf("y = %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

for the output:

x = 5.000000 + 2.000000i
y = 10.000000 + 3.000000i

Note that the i I have in the printf() format string is a literal i that gets printed—it’s not part of the format
specifier. Both return values from creal() and cimag() are double.
And as usual, there are float and long double variants of these functions: crealf(), cimagf(), cre-
all(), and cimagl().

36.4 Complex Arithmetic and Comparisons

Arithmetic can be performed on complex numbers, though how this works mathematically is beyond the
scope of the guide.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 1 + 2*I;
7 double complex y = 3 + 4*I;
8 double complex z;
9

10 z = x + y;

2
This was a harder one to research, and I’ll take any more information anyone can give me. I could be defined as _Complex_I or
_Imaginary_I, if the latter exists. _Imaginary_I will handle signed zeros, but _Complex_I might not. This has implications with
branch cuts and other complex-numbery-mathy things. Maybe. Can you tell I’m really getting out of my element here? In any case, the
CMPLX() macros behave as if I were defined as _Imaginary_I, with signed zeros, even if _Imaginary_I doesn’t exist on the system.
 Chapter 36. Complex Numbers 254

11 printf("x + y = %f + %fi\n", creal(z), cimag(z));

12

13 z = x - y;
14 printf("x - y = %f + %fi\n", creal(z), cimag(z));
15

16 z = x * y;
17 printf("x * y = %f + %fi\n", creal(z), cimag(z));
18

19 z = x / y;
20 printf("x / y = %f + %fi\n", creal(z), cimag(z));
21 }

for a result of:

x + y = 4.000000 + 6.000000i
x - y = -2.000000 + -2.000000i
x * y = -5.000000 + 10.000000i
x / y = 0.440000 + 0.080000i

You can also compare two complex numbers for equality (or inequality):
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 1 + 2*I;
7 double complex y = 3 + 4*I;
8

9 printf("x == y = %d\n", x == y); // 0

10 printf("x != y = %d\n", x != y); // 1
11 }

with the output:

x == y = 0
x != y = 1

They are equal if both components test equal. Note that as with all floating point, they could be equal if
they’re close enough due to rounding error3 .

36.5 Complex Math

But wait! There’s more than just simple complex arithmetic!
Here’s a summary table of all the math functions available to you with complex numbers.
I’m only going to list the double version of each function, but for all of them there is a float version that
you can get by appending f to the function name, and a long double version that you can get by appending
l.

For example, the cabs() function for computing the absolute value of a complex number also has cabsf()
and cabsl() variants. I’m omitting them for brevity.
3
The simplicity of this statement doesn’t do justice to the incredible amount of work that goes into simply understanding how floating
point actually functions. https://randomascii.wordpress.com/2012/02/25/comparing-floating-point-numbers-2012-edition/
Chapter 36. Complex Numbers 255

36.5.1 Trigonometry Functions

Function Description
ccos() Cosine
csin() Sine
ctan() Tangent
cacos() Arc cosine
casin() Arc sine
catan() Play Settlers of Catan
ccosh() Hyperbolic cosine
csinh() Hyperbolic sine
ctanh() Hyperbolic tangent
cacosh() Arc hyperbolic cosine
casinh() Arc hyperbolic sine
catanh() Arc hyperbolic tangent

36.5.2 Exponential and Logarithmic Functions

Function Description
cexp() Base-𝑒 exponential
clog() Natural (base-𝑒) logarithm

36.5.3 Power and Absolute Value Functions

Function Description
cabs() Absolute value
cpow() Power
csqrt() Square root

36.5.4 Manipulation Functions

Function Description
creal() Return real part
cimag() Return imaginary part
CMPLX() Construct a complex number
carg() Argument/phase angle
conj() Conjugate4
cproj() Projection on Riemann sphere

4
This is the only one that doesn’t begin with an extra leading c, strangely.
Chapter 37

Fixed Width Integer Types

C has all those small, bigger, and biggest integer types like int and long and all that. And you can look in
the section on limits to see what the largest int is with INT_MAX and so on.
How big are those types? That is, how many bytes do they take up? We could use sizeof to get that answer.
But what if I wanted to go the other way? What if I needed a type that was exactly 32 bits (4 bytes) or at
least 16 bits or somesuch?
How can we declare a type that’s a certain size?
The header <stdint.h> gives us a way.

37.1 The Bit-Sized Types

For both signed and unsigned integers, we can specify a type that is a certain number of bits, with some
caveats, of course.
And there are three main classes of these types (in these examples, the N would be replaced by a certain
number of bits):
• Integers of exactly a certain size (intN_t)
• Integers that are at least a certain size (int_leastN_t)
• Integers that are at least a certain size and are as fast as possible (int_fastN_t)1
How much faster is fast? Definitely maybe some amount faster. Probably. The spec doesn’t say how much
faster, just that they’ll be the fastest on this architecture. Most C compilers are pretty good, though, so you’ll
probably only see this used in places where the most possible speed needs to be guaranteed (rather than just
hoping the compiler is producing pretty-dang-fast code, which it is).
Finally, these unsigned number types have a leading u to differentiate them.
For example, these types have the corresponding listed meaning:
int32_t w; // x is exactly 32 bits, signed
uint16_t x; // y is exactly 16 bits, unsigned

int_least8_t y; // y is at least 8 bits, signed

uint_fast64_t z; // z is the fastest representation at least 64 bits, unsigned

1
Some architectures have different sized data that the CPU and RAM can operate with at a faster rate than others. In those cases, if
you need the fastest 8-bit number, it might give you have a 16- or 32-bit type instead because that’s just faster. So with this, you won’t
know how big the type is, but it will be least as big as you say.

256
Chapter 37. Fixed Width Integer Types 257

The following types are guaranteed to be defined:

int_least8_t uint_least8_t
int_least16_t uint_least16_t
int_least32_t uint_least32_t
int_least64_t uint_least64_t

int_fast8_t uint_fast8_t
int_fast16_t uint_fast16_t
int_fast32_t uint_fast32_t
int_fast64_t uint_fast64_t

There might be others of different widths, as well, but those are optional.
Hey! Where are the fixed types like int16_t? Turns out those are entirely optional…unless certain con-
ditions are met2 . And if you have an average run-of-the-mill modern computer system, those conditions
probably are met. And if they are, you’ll have these types:
int8_t uint8_t
int16_t uint16_t
int32_t uint32_t
int64_t uint64_t

Other variants with different widths might be defined, but they’re optional.

37.2 Maximum Integer Size Type

There’s a type you can use that holds the largest representable integers available on the system, both signed
and unsigned:
intmax_t
uintmax_t

Use these types when you want to go as big as possible.

Obviously values from any other integer types of the same sign will fit in this type, necessarily.

37.3 Using Fixed Size Constants

If you have a constant that you want to have fit in a certain number of bits, you can use these macros to
automatically append the proper suffix onto the number (e.g. 22L or 3490ULL).
INT8_C(x) UINT8_C(x)
INT16_C(x) UINT16_C(x)
INT32_C(x) UINT32_C(x)
INT64_C(x) UINT64_C(x)
INTMAX_C(x) UINTMAX_C(x)

Again, these work only with constant integer values.

For example, we can use one of these to assign constant values like so:
uint16_t x = UINT16_C(12);
intmax_t y = INTMAX_C(3490);

2
Namely, the system has 8, 16, 32, or 64 bit integers with no padding that use two’s complement representation, in which case the
intN_t variant for that particular number of bits must be defined.
Chapter 37. Fixed Width Integer Types 258

37.4 Limits of Fixed Size Integers

We also have some limits defined so you can get the maximum and minimum values for these types:
INT8_MAX INT8_MIN UINT8_MAX
INT16_MAX INT16_MIN UINT16_MAX
INT32_MAX INT32_MIN UINT32_MAX
INT64_MAX INT64_MIN UINT64_MAX

INT_LEAST8_MAX INT_LEAST8_MIN UINT_LEAST8_MAX

INT_LEAST16_MAX INT_LEAST16_MIN UINT_LEAST16_MAX
INT_LEAST32_MAX INT_LEAST32_MIN UINT_LEAST32_MAX
INT_LEAST64_MAX INT_LEAST64_MIN UINT_LEAST64_MAX

INT_FAST8_MAX INT_FAST8_MIN UINT_FAST8_MAX

INT_FAST16_MAX INT_FAST16_MIN UINT_FAST16_MAX
INT_FAST32_MAX INT_FAST32_MIN UINT_FAST32_MAX
INT_FAST64_MAX INT_FAST64_MIN UINT_FAST64_MAX

INTMAX_MAX INTMAX_MIN UINTMAX_MAX

Note the MIN for all the unsigned types is 0, so, as such, there’s no macro for it.

37.5 Format Specifiers

In order to print these types, you need to send the right format specifier to printf(). (And the same issue
for getting input with scanf().)
But how are you going to know what size the types are under the hood? Luckily, once again, C provides
some macros to help with this.
All this can be found in <inttypes.h>.
Now, we have a bunch of macros. Like a complexity explosion of macros. So I’m going to stop listing out
every one and just put the lowercase letter n in the place where you should put 8, 16, 32, or 64 depending on
your needs.
Let’s look at the macros for printing signed integers:
PRIdn PRIdLEASTn PRIdFASTn PRIdMAX
PRIin PRIiLEASTn PRIiFASTn PRIiMAX

Look for the patterns there. You can see there are variants for the fixed, least, fast, and max types.
And you also have a lowercase d and a lowercase i. Those correspond to the printf() format specifiers %d
and %i.
So if I have something of type:
int_least16_t x = 3490;

I can print that with the equivalent format specifier for %d by using PRId16.
But how? How do we use that macro?
First of all, that macro specifies a string containing the letter or letters printf() needs to use to print that
type. Like, for example, it could be "d" or "ld".
So all we need to do is embed that in our format string to the printf() call.
 Chapter 37. Fixed Width Integer Types 259

To do this, we can take advantage of a fact about C that you might have forgotten: adjacent string literals are
automatically concatenated to a single string. E.g.:
printf("Hello, " "world!\n"); // Prints "Hello, world!"

And since these macros are string literals, we can use them like so:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdint.h>
3 #include <inttypes.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 int_least16_t x = 3490;
8

9 printf("The value is %" PRIdLEAST16 "!\n", x);

10 }

We also have a pile of macros for printing unsigned types:

PRIon PRIoLEASTn PRIoFASTn PRIoMAX
PRIun PRIuLEASTn PRIuFASTn PRIuMAX
PRIxn PRIxLEASTn PRIxFASTn PRIxMAX
PRIXn PRIXLEASTn PRIXFASTn PRIXMAX

In this case, o, u, x, and X correspond to the documented format specifiers in printf().

And, as before, the lowercase n should be substituted with 8, 16, 32, or 64.
But just when you think you had enough of the macros, it turns out we have a complete complementary set
of them for scanf()!
SCNdn SCNdLEASTn SCNdFASTn SCNdMAX
SCNin SCNiLEASTn SCNiFASTn SCNiMAX
SCNon SCNoLEASTn SCNoFASTn SCNoMAX
SCNun SCNuLEASTn SCNuFASTn SCNuMAX
SCNxn SCNxLEASTn SCNxFASTn SCNxMAX

Remember: when you want to print out a fixed size integer type with printf() or scanf(), grab the correct
corresponding format specifer from <inttypes.h>.
Chapter 38

Date and Time Functionality

“Time is an illusion. Lunchtime doubly so.”

—Ford Prefect, The Hitchhikers Guide to the Galaxy
This isn’t too complex, but it can be a little intimidating at first, both with the different types available and
the way we can convert between them.
Mix in GMT (UTC) and local time and we have all the Usual Fun™ one gets with times and dates.
And of course never forget the golden rule of dates and times: Never attempt to write your own date and time
functionality. Only use what the library gives you.
Time is too complex for mere mortal programmers to handle correctly. Seriously, we all owe a point to
everyone who worked on any date and time library, so put that in your budget.

38.1 Quick Terminology and Information

Just a couple quick terms in case you don’t have them down.
• UTC: Coordinated Universal Time is a universally1 agreed upon, absolute time. Everyone on the
planet thinks it’s the same time right now in UTC… even though they have different local times.
• GMT: Greenwich Mean Time, effectively the same as UTC2 . You probably want to say UTC, or
“universal time”. If you’re talking specifically about the GMT time zone, say GMT. Confusingly,
many of C’s UTC functions predate UTC and still refer to Greenwich Mean Time. When you see that,
know that C means UTC.
• Local time: what time it is where the computer running the program is located. This is described as an
offset from UTC. Although there are many time zones in the world, most computers do work in either
local time or UTC.
As a general rule, if you are describing an event that happens one time, like a log entry, or a rocket launch,
or when pointers finally clicked for you, use UTC.
On the other hand, if it’s something that happens the same time in every time zone, like New Year’s Eve or
dinner time, use local time.
Since a lot of languages are only good at converting between UTC and local time, you can cause yourself a
lot of pain by choosing to store your dates in the wrong form. (Ask me how I know.)
1
On Earth, anyway. Who know what crazy systems they use out there…
2
OK, don’t murder me! GMT is technically a time zone while UTC is a global time system. Also some countries might adjust GMT
for daylight saving time, whereas UTC is never adjusted for daylight saving time.

260
Chapter 38. Date and Time Functionality 261

38.2 Date Types

There are two3 main types in C when it comes to dates: time_t and struct tm.
The spec doesn’t actually say much about them:
• time_t: a real type capable of holding a time. So by the spec, this could be a floating type or integer
type. In POSIX (Unix-likes), it’s an integer. This holds calendar time. Which you can think of as
UTC time.
• struct tm: holds the components of a calendar time. This is a broken-down time, i.e. the components
of the time, like hour, minute, second, day, month, year, etc.
On a lot of systems, time_t represents the number of seconds since Epoch4 . Epoch is in some ways the start
of time from the computer’s perspective, which is commonly January 1, 1970 UTC. time_t can go negative
to represent times before Epoch. Windows behaves the same way as Unix from what I can tell.
And what’s in a struct tm? The following fields:
struct tm {
int tm_sec; // seconds after the minute -- [0, 60]
int tm_min; // minutes after the hour -- [0, 59]
int tm_hour; // hours since midnight -- [0, 23]
int tm_mday; // day of the month -- [1, 31]
int tm_mon; // months since January -- [0, 11]
int tm_year; // years since 1900
int tm_wday; // days since Sunday -- [0, 6]
int tm_yday; // days since January 1 -- [0, 365]
int tm_isdst; // Daylight Saving Time flag
};

Note that everything is zero-based except the day of the month.

It’s important to know that you can put any values in these types you want. There are functions to help get
the time now, but the types hold a time, not the time.
So the question becomes: “How do you initialize data of these types, and how do you convert between them?”

38.3 Initialization and Conversion Between Types

First, you can get the current time and store it in a time_t with the time() function.
time_t now; // Variable to hold the time now

now = time(NULL); // You can get it like this...

time(&now); // ...or this. Same as the previous line.

Great! You have a variable that gets you the time now.
Amusingly, there’s only one portable way to print out what’s in a time_t, and that’s the rarely-used ctime()
function that prints the value in local time:
now = time(NULL);
printf("%s", ctime(&now));

This returns a string with a very specific form that includes a newline at the end:
3
Admittedly, there are more than two.
4
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unix_time
Chapter 38. Date and Time Functionality 262

Sun Feb 28 18:47:25 2021

So that’s kind of inflexible. If you want more control, you should convert that time_t into a struct tm.

38.3.1 Converting time_t to struct tm

There are two amazing ways to do this conversion:
• localtime(): this function converts a time_t to a struct tm in local time.
• gmtime(): this function converts a time_t to a struct tm in UTC. (See ye olde GMT creeping into
that function name?)
Let’s see what time it is now by printing out a struct tm with the asctime() function:
printf("Local: %s", asctime(localtime(&now)));
printf(" UTC: %s", asctime(gmtime(&now)));

Output (I’m in the Pacific Standard Time zone):

Local: Sun Feb 28 20:15:27 2021
UTC: Mon Mar 1 04:15:27 2021

Once you have your time_t in a struct tm, it opens all kinds of doors. You can print out the time in a
variety of ways, figure out which day of the week a date is, and so on. Or convert it back into a time_t.
More on that soon!

38.3.2 Converting struct tm to time_t

If you want to go the other way, you can use mktime() to get that information.
mktime() sets the values of tm_wday and tm_yday for you, so don’t bother filling them out because they’ll
just be overwritten.
Also, you can set tm_isdst to -1 to have it make the determination for you. Or you can manually set it to
true or false.
struct tm some_time = {
.tm_year=82, // years since 1900
.tm_mon=3, // months since January -- [0, 11]
.tm_mday=12, // day of the month -- [1, 31]
.tm_hour=12, // hours since midnight -- [0, 23]
.tm_min=00, // minutes after the hour -- [0, 59]
.tm_sec=04, // seconds after the minute -- [0, 60]
.tm_isdst=-1, // Daylight Saving Time flag
};

time_t some_time_epoch;

some_time_epoch = mktime(&some_time);

printf("%s", ctime(&some_time_epoch));
printf("Is DST: %d\n", some_time.tm_isdst);

Output:
Mon Apr 12 12:00:04 1982
Is DST: 0
 Chapter 38. Date and Time Functionality 263

When you manually load a struct tm like that, it should be in local time. mktime() will convert that local
time into a time_t calendar time.
Weirdly, however, the standard doesn’t give us a way to load up a struct tm with a UTC time and convert
that to a time_t. If you want to do that with Unix-likes, try the non-standard timegm(). On Windows,
_mkgmtime().

38.4 Formatted Date Output

We’ve already seen a couple ways to print formatted date output to the screen. With time_t we can use
ctime(), and with struct tm we can use asctime().
time_t now = time(NULL);
struct tm *local = localtime(&now);
struct tm *utc = gmtime(&now);

printf("Local time: %s", ctime(&now)); // Local time with time_t

printf("Local time: %s", asctime(local)); // Local time with struct tm
printf("UTC : %s", asctime(utc)); // UTC with a struct tm

But what if I told you, dear reader, that there’s a way to have much more control over how the date was
printed?
Sure, we could fish individual fields out of the struct tm, but there’s a great function called strftime()
that will do a lot of the hard work for you. It’s like printf(), except for dates!
Let’s see some examples. In each of these, we pass in a destination buffer, a maximum number of characters
to write, and then a format string (in the style of—but not the same as—printf()) which tells strftime()
which components of a struct tm to print and how.
You can add other constant characters to include in the output in the format string, as well, just like with
printf().

We get a struct tm in this case from localtime(), but any source works fine.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <time.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char s[128];
7 time_t now = time(NULL);
8

9 // %c: print date as per current locale

10 strftime(s, sizeof s, "%c", localtime(&now));
11 puts(s); // Sun Feb 28 22:29:00 2021
12

13 // %A: full weekday name

14 // %B: full month name
15 // %d: day of the month
16 strftime(s, sizeof s, "%A, %B %d", localtime(&now));
17 puts(s); // Sunday, February 28
18

19 // %I: hour (12 hour clock)

20 // %M: minute
21 // %S: second
22 // %p: AM or PM
 Chapter 38. Date and Time Functionality 264

23 strftime(s, sizeof s, "It's %I:%M:%S %p", localtime(&now));

24 puts(s); // It's 10:29:00 PM
25

26 // %F: ISO 8601 yyyy-mm-dd

27 // %T: ISO 8601 hh:mm:ss
28 // %z: ISO 8601 time zone offset
29 strftime(s, sizeof s, "ISO 8601: %FT%T%z", localtime(&now));
30 puts(s); // ISO 8601: 2021-02-28T22:29:00-0800
31 }

There are a ton of date printing format specifiers for strftime(), so be sure to check them out in the
strftime() reference page.

38.5 More Resolution with timespec_get()

You can get the number of seconds and nanoseconds since Epoch with timespec_get().
Maybe.
Implementations might not have nanosecond resolution (that’s one billionth of a second) so who knows how
many significant places you’ll get, but give it a shot and see.
timespec_get() takes two arguments. One is a pointer to a struct timespec to hold the time information.
And the other is the base, which the spec lets you set to TIME_UTC indicating that you’re interested in seconds
since Epoch. (Other implementations might give you more options for the base.)
And the structure itself has two fields:
struct timespec {
time_t tv_sec; // Seconds
long tv_nsec; // Nanoseconds (billionths of a second)
};

Here’s an example where we get the time and print it out both as integer values and also a floating value:
struct timespec ts;

timespec_get(&ts, TIME_UTC);

printf("%ld s, %ld ns\n", ts.tv_sec, ts.tv_nsec);

double float_time = ts.tv_sec + ts.tv_nsec/1000000000.0;

printf("%f seconds since epoch\n", float_time);

Example output:
1614581530 s, 806325800 ns
1614581530.806326 seconds since epoch

struct timespec also makes an appearance in a number of the threading functions that need to be able to
specify time with that resolution.

38.6 Differences Between Times

One quick note about getting the difference between two time_ts: since the spec doesn’t dictate how that
type represents a time, you might not be able to simply subtract two time_ts and get anything sensible5 .
5
You will on POSIX, where time_t is definitely an integer. Unfortunately the entire world isn’t POSIX, so there we are.
 Chapter 38. Date and Time Functionality 265

Luckily you can use difftime() to compute the difference in seconds between two dates.
In the following example, we have two events that occur some time apart, and we use difftime() to compute
the difference.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <time.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 struct tm time_a = {
7 .tm_year=82, // years since 1900
8 .tm_mon=3, // months since January -- [0, 11]
9 .tm_mday=12, // day of the month -- [1, 31]
10 .tm_hour=4, // hours since midnight -- [0, 23]
11 .tm_min=00, // minutes after the hour -- [0, 59]
12 .tm_sec=04, // seconds after the minute -- [0, 60]
13 .tm_isdst=-1, // Daylight Saving Time flag
14 };
15

16 struct tm time_b = {
17 .tm_year=120, // years since 1900
18 .tm_mon=10, // months since January -- [0, 11]
19 .tm_mday=15, // day of the month -- [1, 31]
20 .tm_hour=16, // hours since midnight -- [0, 23]
21 .tm_min=27, // minutes after the hour -- [0, 59]
22 .tm_sec=00, // seconds after the minute -- [0, 60]
23 .tm_isdst=-1, // Daylight Saving Time flag
24 };
25

26 time_t cal_a = mktime(&time_a);

27 time_t cal_b = mktime(&time_b);
28

29 double diff = difftime(cal_b, cal_a);

30

31 double years = diff / 60 / 60 / 24 / 365.2425; // close enough

32

33 printf("%f seconds (%f years) between events\n", diff, years);

34 }

Output:
1217996816.000000 seconds (38.596783 years) between events

And there you have it! Remember to use difftime() to take the time difference. Even though you can just
subtract on a POSIX system, might as well stay portable.
>]
Chapter 39

Multithreading

C11 introduced, formally, multithreading to the C language. It’s very eerily similar to POSIX threads1 , if
you’ve ever used those.
And if you’ve not, no worries. We’ll talk it through.
Do note, however, that I’m not intending this to be a full-blown classic multithreading how-to2 ; you’ll have
to pick up a different very thick book for that, specifically. Sorry!
Threading is an optional feature. If a C11+ compiler defines __STDC_NO_THREADS__, threads will not be
present in the library. Why they decided to go with a negative sense in that macro is beyond me, but there
we are.
You can test for it like this:
#ifdef __STDC_NO_THREADS__
#error I need threads to build this program!
#endif

Also, you might need to specify certain linker options when building. In the case of Unix-likes, try appending
a -lpthreads to the end of the command line to link the pthreads library3 :
gcc -std=c11 -o foo foo.c -lpthreads

If you’re getting linker errors on your system, it could be because the appropriate library wasn’t included.

39.1 Background
Threads are a way to have all those shiny CPU cores you paid for do work for you in the same program.
Normally, a C program just runs on a single CPU core. But if you know how to split up the work, you can
give pieces of it to a number of threads and have them do the work simultaneously.
Though the spec doesn’t say it, on your system it’s very likely that C (or the OS at its behest) will attempt to
balance the threads over all your CPU cores.
And if you have more threads than cores, that’s OK. You just won’t realize all those gains if they’re all trying
to compete for CPU time.
1
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/POSIX_Threads
2
I’m more a fan of shared-nothing, myself, and my skills with classic multithreading constructs are rusty, to say the least.
3
Yes, pthreads with a “p”. It’s short for POSIX threads, a library that C11 borrowed liberally from for its threads implementation.

266
Chapter 39. Multithreading 267

39.2 Things You Can Do

You can create a thread. It will begin running the function you specify. The parent thread that spawned it
will also continue to run.
And you can wait for the thread to complete. This is called joining.
Or if you don’t care when the thread completes and don’t want to wait, you can detach it.
A thread can explicitly exit, or it can implicitly call it quits by returning from its main function.
A thread can also sleep for a period of time, doing nothing while other threads run.
The main() program is a thread, as well.
Additionally, we have thread local storage, mutexes, and conditional variables. But more on those later. Let’s
just look at the basics for now.

39.3 Data Races and the Standard Library

Some of the functions in the standard library (e.g. asctime() and strtok()) return or use static data
elements that aren’t threadsafe. But in general unless it’s said otherwise, the standard library makes an effort
to be so4 .
But keep an eye out. If a standard library function is maintaining state between calls in a variable you don’t
own, or if a function is returning a pointer to a thing that you didn’t pass in, it’s not threadsafe.

39.4 Creating and Waiting for Threads

Let’s hack something up!
We’ll make some threads (create) and wait for them to complete (join).
We have a tiny bit to understand first, though.
Every single thread is identified by an opaque variable of type thrd_t. It’s a unique identifier per thread in
your program. When you create a thread, it’s given a new ID.
Also when you make the thread, you have to give it a pointer to a function to run, and a pointer to an argument
to pass to it (or NULL if you don’t have anything to pass).
The thread will begin execution on the function you specify.
When you want to wait for a thread to complete, you have to specify its thread ID so C knows which one to
wait for.
So the basic idea is:
1. Write a function to act as the thread’s “main”. It’s not main()-proper, but analogous to it. The thread
will start running there.
2. From the main thread, launch a new thread with thrd_create(), and pass it a pointer to the function
to run.
3. In that function, have the thread do whatever it has to do.
4. Meantimes, the main thread can continue doing whatever it has to do.
5. When the main thread decides to, it can wait for the child thread to complete by calling thrd_join().
Generally you must thrd_join() the thread to clean up after it or else you’ll leak memory5
4
Per §7.1.4¶5.
5
Unless you thrd_detach(). More on this later.
 Chapter 39. Multithreading 268

thrd_create() takes a pointer to the function to run, and it’s of type thrd_start_t, which is int
(*)(void *). That’s Greek for “a pointer to a function that takes an void* as an argument, and returns an
int.”

Let’s make a thread! We’ll launch it from the main thread with thrd_create() to run a function, do some
other things, then wait for it to complete with thrd_join(). I’ve named the thread’s main function run(),
but you can name it anything as long as the types match thrd_start_t.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 // This is the function the thread will run. It can be called anything.
5 //
6 // arg is the argument pointer passed to `thrd_create()`.
7 //
8 // The parent thread will get the return value back from `thrd_join()`'
9 // later.
10

11 int run(void *arg)

12 {
13 int *a = arg; // We'll pass in an int* from thrd_create()
14

15 printf("THREAD: Running thread with arg %d\n", *a);

16

17 return 12; // Value to be picked up by thrd_join() (chose 12 at random)

18 }
19

20 int main(void)
21 {
22 thrd_t t; // t will hold the thread ID
23 int arg = 3490;
24

25 printf("Launching a thread\n");
26

27 // Launch a thread to the run() function, passing a pointer to 3490

28 // as an argument. Also stored the thread ID in t:
29

30 thrd_create(&t, run, &arg);

31

32 printf("Doing other things while the thread runs\n");

33

34 printf("Waiting for thread to complete...\n");

35

36 int res; // Holds return value from the thread exit

37

38 // Wait here for the thread to complete; store the return value
39 // in res:
40

41 thrd_join(t, &res);
42

43 printf("Thread exited with return value %d\n", res);

44 }

See how we did the thrd_create() there to call the run() function? Then we did other things in main()
and then stopped and waited for the thread to complete with thrd_join().
 Chapter 39. Multithreading 269

Sample output (yours might vary):

Launching a thread
Doing other things while the thread runs
Waiting for thread to complete...
THREAD: Running thread with arg 3490
Thread exited with return value 12

The arg that you pass to the function has to have a lifetime long enough so that the thread can pick it up
before it goes away. Also, it needs to not be overwritten by the main thread before the new thread can use it.
Let’s look at an example that launches 5 threads. One thing to note here is how we use an array of thrd_ts
to keep track of all the thread IDs.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 int run(void *arg)

5 {
6 int i = *(int*)arg;
7

8 printf("THREAD %d: running!\n", i);

9

10 return i;
11 }
12

13 #define THREAD_COUNT 5
14

15 int main(void)
16 {
17 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
18

19 int i;
20

21 printf("Launching threads...\n");
22 for (i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++)
23

24 // NOTE! In the following line, we pass a pointer to i,

25 // but each thread sees the same pointer. So they'll
26 // print out weird things as i changes value here in
27 // the main thread! (More in the text, below.)
28

29 thrd_create(t + i, run, &i);

30

31 printf("Doing other things while the thread runs...\n");

32 printf("Waiting for thread to complete...\n");
33

34 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

35 int res;
36 thrd_join(t[i], &res);
37

38 printf("Thread %d complete!\n", res);

39 }
40

41 printf("All threads complete!\n");

42 }
 Chapter 39. Multithreading 270

When I run the threads, I count i up from 0 to 4. And pass a pointer to it to thrd_create(). This pointer
ends up in the run() routine where we make a copy of it.
Simple enough? Here’s the output:
Launching threads...
THREAD 2: running!
THREAD 3: running!
THREAD 4: running!
THREAD 2: running!
Doing other things while the thread runs...
Waiting for thread to complete...
Thread 2 complete!
Thread 2 complete!
THREAD 5: running!
Thread 3 complete!
Thread 4 complete!
Thread 5 complete!
All threads complete!

Whaaa—? Where’s THREAD 0? And why do we have a THREAD 5 when clearly i is never more than 4 when
we call thrd_create()? And two THREAD 2s? Madness!
This is getting into the fun land of race conditions. The main thread is modifying i before the thread has a
chance to copy it. Indeed, i makes it all the way to 5 and ends the loop before the last thread gets a chance
to copy it.
We’ve got to have a per-thread variable that we can refer to so we can pass it in as the arg.
We could have a big array of them. Or we could malloc() space (and free it somewhere—maybe in the
thread itself.)
Let’s give that a shot:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <threads.h>
4

5 int run(void *arg)

6 {
7 int i = *(int*)arg; // Copy the arg
8

9 free(arg); // Done with this

10

11 printf("THREAD %d: running!\n", i);

12

13 return i;
14 }
15

16 #define THREAD_COUNT 5
17

18 int main(void)
19 {
20 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
21

22 int i;
23

24 printf("Launching threads...\n");
 Chapter 39. Multithreading 271

25 for (i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

26

27 // Get some space for a per-thread argument:

28

29 int *arg = malloc(sizeof *arg);

30 *arg = i;
31

32 thrd_create(t + i, run, arg);

33 }
34

35 // ...

Notice on lines 27-30 we malloc() space for an int and copy the value of i into it. Each new thread gets
its own freshly-malloc()d variable and we pass a pointer to that to the run() function.
Once run() makes its own copy of the arg on line 7, it free()s the malloc()d int. And now that it has
its own copy, it can do with it what it pleases.
And a run shows the result:
Launching threads...
THREAD 0: running!
THREAD 1: running!
THREAD 2: running!
THREAD 3: running!
Doing other things while the thread runs...
Waiting for thread to complete...
Thread 0 complete!
Thread 1 complete!
Thread 2 complete!
Thread 3 complete!
THREAD 4: running!
Thread 4 complete!
All threads complete!

There we go! Threads 0-4 all in effect!

Your run might vary—how the threads get scheduled to run is beyond the C spec. We see in the above
example that thread 4 didn’t even begin until threads 0-1 had completed. Indeed, if I run this again, I likely
get different output. We cannot guarantee a thread execution order.

39.5 Detaching Threads

If you want to fire-and-forget a thread (i.e. so you don’t have to thrd_join() it later), you can do that with
thrd_detach().

This removes the parent thread’s ability to get the return value from the child thread, but if you don’t care
about that and just want threads to clean up nicely on their own, this is the way to go.
Basically we’re going to do this:
thrd_create(&t, run, NULL);
thrd_detach(t);

where the thrd_detach() call is the parent thread saying, “Hey, I’m not going to wait for this child thread
to complete with thrd_join(). So go ahead and clean it up on your own when it completes.”
 Chapter 39. Multithreading 272

1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 int run(void *arg)

5 {
6 (void)arg;
7

8 //printf("Thread running! %lu\n", thrd_current()); // non-portable!

9 printf("Thread running!\n");
10

11 return 0;
12 }
13

14 #define THREAD_COUNT 10
15

16 int main(void)
17 {
18 thrd_t t;
19

20 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

21 thrd_create(&t, run, NULL);
22 thrd_detach(t); // <-- DETACH!
23 }
24

25 // Sleep for a second to let all the threads finish

26 thrd_sleep(&(struct timespec){.tv_sec=1}, NULL);
27 }

Note that in this code, we put the main thread to sleep for 1 second with thrd_sleep()—more on that later.
Also in the run() function, I have a commented-out line in there that prints out the thread ID as an unsigned
long. This is non-portable, because the spec doesn’t say what type a thrd_t is under the hood—it could be
a struct for all we know. But that line works on my system.
Something interesting I saw when I ran the code, above, and printed out the thread IDs was that some threads
had duplicate IDs! This seems like it should be impossible, but C is allowed to reuse thread IDs after the
corresponding thread has exited. So what I was seeing was that some threads completed their run before
other threads were launched.

39.6 Thread Local Data

Threads are interesting because they don’t have their own memory beyond local variables. If you want a
static variable or file scope variable, all threads will see that same variable.

This can lead to race conditions, where you get Weird Things™ happening.
Check out this example. We have a static variable foo in block scope in run(). This variable will be
visible to all threads that pass through the run() function. And the various threads can effectively step on
each others toes.
Each thread copies foo into a local variable x (which is not shared between threads—all the threads have
their own call stacks). So they should be the same, right?
And the first time we print them, they are6 . But then right after that, we check to make sure they’re still the
6
Though I don’t think they have to be. It’s just that the threads don’t seem to get rescheduled until some system call like might
happen with a printf()… which is why I have the printf() in there.
 Chapter 39. Multithreading 273

same.
And they usually are. But not always!
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <threads.h>
4

5 int run(void *arg)

6 {
7 int n = *(int*)arg; // Thread number for humans to differentiate
8

9 free(arg);
10

11 static int foo = 10; // Static value shared between threads

12

13 int x = foo; // Automatic local variable--each thread has its own

14

15 // We just assigned x from foo, so they'd better be equal here.

16 // (In all my test runs, they were, but even this isn't guaranteed!)
17

18 printf("Thread %d: x = %d, foo = %d\n", n, x, foo);

19

20 // And they should be equal here, but they're not always!

21 // (Sometimes they were, sometimes they weren't!)
22

23 // What happens is another thread gets in and increments foo

24 // right now, but this thread's x remains what it was before!
25

26 if (x != foo) {
27 printf("Thread %d: Craziness! x != foo! %d != %d\n", n, x, foo);
28 }
29

30 foo++; // Increment shared value

31

32 return 0;
33 }
34

35 #define THREAD_COUNT 5
36

37 int main(void)
38 {
39 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
40

41 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

42 int *n = malloc(sizeof *n); // Holds a thread serial number
43 *n = i;
44 thrd_create(t + i, run, n);
45 }
46

47 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

48 thrd_join(t[i], NULL);
49 }
50 }
 Chapter 39. Multithreading 274

Here’s an example output (though this varies from run to run):

Thread 0: x = 10, foo = 10
Thread 1: x = 10, foo = 10
Thread 1: Craziness! x != foo! 10 != 11
Thread 2: x = 12, foo = 12
Thread 4: x = 13, foo = 13
Thread 3: x = 14, foo = 14

In thread 1, between the two printf()s, the value of foo somehow changed from 10 to 11, even though
clearly there’s no increment between the printf()s!
It was another thread that got in there (probably thread 0, from the look of it) and incremented the value of
foo behind thread 1’s back!

Let’s solve this problem two different ways. (If you want all the threads to share the variable and not step on
each other’s toes, you’ll have to read on to the mutex section.)

39.6.1 _Thread_local Storage-Class

First things first, let’s just look at the easy way around this: the _Thread_local storage-class.
Basically we’re just going to slap this on the front of our block scope static variable and things will work!
It tells C that every thread should have its own version of this variable, so none of them step on each other’s
toes.
The <threads.h> header defines thread_local as an alias to _Thread_local so your code doesn’t have
to look so ugly.
Let’s take the previous example and make foo into a thread_local variable so that we don’t share that
data.
5 int run(void *arg)
6 {
7 int n = *(int*)arg; // Thread number for humans to differentiate
8

9 free(arg);
10

11 thread_local static int foo = 10; // <-- No longer shared!!

And running we get:

Thread 0: x = 10, foo = 10
Thread 1: x = 10, foo = 10
Thread 2: x = 10, foo = 10
Thread 4: x = 10, foo = 10
Thread 3: x = 10, foo = 10

No more weird problems!

One thing: if a thread_local variable is block scope, it must be static. Them’s the rules. (But this is OK
because non-static variables are per-thread already since each thread has it’s own non-static variables.)
A bit of a lie there: block scope thread_local variables can also be extern.

39.6.2 Another Option: Thread-Specific Storage

Thread-specific storage (TSS) is another way of getting per-thread data.
 Chapter 39. Multithreading 275

One additional feature is that these functions allow you to specify a destructor that will be called on the data
when the TSS variable is deleted. Commonly this destructor is free() to automatically clean up malloc()d
per-thread data. Or NULL if you don’t need to destroy anything.
The destructor is type tss_dtor_t which is a pointer to a function that returns void and takes a void* as
an argument (the void* points to the data stored in the variable). In other words, it’s a void (*)(void*),
if that clears it up. Which I admit it probably doesn’t. Check out the example, below.
Generally, thread_local is probably your go-to, but if you like the destructor idea, then you can make use
of that.
The usage is a bit weird in that we need a variable of type tss_t to be alive to represent the value on a per
thread basis. Then we initialize it with tss_create(). Eventually we get rid of it with tss_delete().
Note that calling tss_delete() doesn’t run all the destructors—it’s thrd_exit() (or returning from the
run function) that does that. tss_delete() just releases any memory allocated by tss_create().
In the middle, threads can call tss_set() and tss_get() to set and get the value.
In the following code, we set up the TSS variable before creating the threads, then clean up after the threads.
In the run() function, the threads malloc() some space for a string and store that pointer in the TSS variable.
When the thread exits, the destructor function (free() in this case) is called for all the threads.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <threads.h>
4

5 tss_t str;
6

7 void some_function(void)
8 {
9 // Retrieve the per-thread value of this string
10 char *tss_string = tss_get(str);
11

12 // And print it
13 printf("TSS string: %s\n", tss_string);
14 }
15

16 int run(void *arg)

17 {
18 int serial = *(int*)arg; // Get this thread's serial number
19 free(arg);
20

21 // malloc() space to hold the data for this thread

22 char *s = malloc(64);
23 sprintf(s, "thread %d! :)", serial); // Happy little string
24

25 // Set this TSS variable to point at the string

26 tss_set(str, s);
27

28 // Call a function that will get the variable

29 some_function();
30

31 return 0; // Equivalent to thrd_exit(0)

32 }
33

34 #define THREAD_COUNT 15
 Chapter 39. Multithreading 276

35

36 int main(void)
37 {
38 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
39

40 // Make a new TSS variable, the free() function is the destructor

41 tss_create(&str, free);
42

43 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

44 int *n = malloc(sizeof *n); // Holds a thread serial number
45 *n = i;
46 thrd_create(t + i, run, n);
47 }
48

49 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

50 thrd_join(t[i], NULL);
51 }
52

53 // All threads are done, so we're done with this

54 tss_delete(str);
55 }

Again, this is kind of a painful way of doing things compared to thread_local, so unless you really need
that destructor functionality, I’d use that instead.

39.7 Mutexes
If you want to only allow a single thread into a critical section of code at a time, you can protect that section
with a mutex7 .
For example, if we had a static variable and we wanted to be able to get and set it in two operations without
another thread jumping in the middle and corrupting it, we could use a mutex for that.
You can acquire a mutex or release it. If you attempt to acquire the mutex and succeed, you may continue
execution. If you attempt and fail (because someone else holds it), you will block8 until the mutex is released.
If multiple threads are blocked waiting for a mutex to be released, one of them will be chosen to run (at
random, from our perspective), and the others will continue to sleep.
The gameplan is that first we’ll initialize a mutex variable to make it ready to use with mtx_init().
Then subsequent threads can call mtx_lock() and mtx_unlock() to get and release the mutex.
When we’re completely done with the mutex, we can destroy it with mtx_destroy(), the logical opposite
of mtx_init().
First, let’s look at some code that does not use a mutex, and endeavors to print out a shared (static) serial
number and then increment it. Because we’re not using a mutex over the getting of the value (to print it) and
the setting (to increment it), threads might get in each other’s way in that critical section.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 int run(void *arg)

5 {

7
Short for “mutual exclusion”, AKA a “lock” on a section of code that only one thread is permitted to execute.
8
That is, your process will go to sleep.
 Chapter 39. Multithreading 277

6 (void)arg;
7

8 static int serial = 0; // Shared static variable!

9

10 printf("Thread running! %d\n", serial);

11

12 serial++;
13

14 return 0;
15 }
16

17 #define THREAD_COUNT 10
18

19 int main(void)
20 {
21 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
22

23 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

24 thrd_create(t + i, run, NULL);
25 }
26

27 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

28 thrd_join(t[i], NULL);
29 }
30 }

When I run this, I get something that looks like this:

Thread running! 0
Thread running! 0
Thread running! 0
Thread running! 3
Thread running! 4
Thread running! 5
Thread running! 6
Thread running! 7
Thread running! 8
Thread running! 9

Clearly multiple threads are getting in there and running the printf() before anyone gets a change to update
the serial variable.
What we want to do is wrap the getting of the variable and setting of it into a single mutex-protected stretch
of code.
We’ll add a new variable to represent the mutex of type mtx_t in file scope, initialize it, and then the threads
can lock and unlock it in the run() function.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 mtx_t serial_mtx; // <-- MUTEX VARIABLE

5

6 int run(void *arg)

7 {
8 (void)arg;
 Chapter 39. Multithreading 278

10 static int serial = 0; // Shared static variable!

11

12 // Acquire the mutex--all threads will block on this call until

13 // they get the lock:
14

15 mtx_lock(&serial_mtx); // <-- ACQUIRE MUTEX

16

17 printf("Thread running! %d\n", serial);

18

19 serial++;
20

21 // Done getting and setting the data, so free the lock. This will
22 // unblock threads on the mtx_lock() call:
23

24 mtx_unlock(&serial_mtx); // <-- RELEASE MUTEX

25

26 return 0;
27 }
28

29 #define THREAD_COUNT 10
30

31 int main(void)
32 {
33 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
34

35 // Initialize the mutex variable, indicating this is a normal

36 // no-frills, mutex:
37

38 mtx_init(&serial_mtx, mtx_plain); // <-- CREATE MUTEX

39

40 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

41 thrd_create(t + i, run, NULL);
42 }
43

44 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

45 thrd_join(t[i], NULL);
46 }
47

48 // Done with the mutex, destroy it:

49

50 mtx_destroy(&serial_mtx); // <-- DESTROY MUTEX

51 }

See how on lines 38 and 50 of main() we initialize and destroy the mutex.
But each individual thread acquires the mutex on line 15 and releases it on line 24.
In between the mtx_lock() and mtx_unlock() is the critical section, the area of code where we don’t want
multiple threads mucking about at the same time.
And now we get proper output!
Thread running! 0
Thread running! 1
Thread running! 2
Chapter 39. Multithreading 279

Thread running! 3
Thread running! 4
Thread running! 5
Thread running! 6
Thread running! 7
Thread running! 8
Thread running! 9

If you need multiple mutexes, no problem: just have multiple mutex variables.
And always remember the Number One Rule of Multiple Mutexes: Unlock mutexes in the opposite order in
which you lock them!

39.7.1 Different Mutex Types

As hinted earlier, we have a few mutex types that you can create with mtx_init(). (Some of these types
are the result of a bitwise-OR operation, as noted in the table.)

Type Description
mtx_plain Regular ol’ mutex
mtx_timed Mutex that supports timeouts
mtx_plain|mtx_recursive Recursive mutex
mtx_timed|mtx_recursive Recursive mutex that supports timeouts

“Recursive” means that the holder of a lock can call mtx_lock() multiple times on the same lock. (They
have to unlock it an equal number of times before anyone else can take the mutex.) This might ease coding
from time to time, especially if you call a function that needs to lock the mutex when you already hold the
mutex.
And the timeout gives a thread a chance to try to get the lock for a while, but then bail out if it can’t get it in
that timeframe.
For a timeout mutex, be sure to create it with mtx_timed:
mtx_init(&serial_mtx, mtx_timed);

And then when you wait for it, you have to specify a time in UTC when it will unlock9 .
The function timespec_get() from <time.h> can be of assistance here. It’ll get you the current time in
UTC in a struct timespec which is just what we need. In fact, it seems to exist merely for this purpose.
It has two fields: tv_sec has the current time in seconds since epoch, and tv_nsec has the nanoseconds
(billionths of a second) as the “fractional” part.
So you can load that up with the current time, and then add to it to get a specific timeout.
Then call mtx_timedlock() instead of mtx_lock(). If it returns the value thrd_timedout, it timed out.
struct timespec timeout;

timespec_get(&timeout, TIME_UTC); // Get current time

timeout.tv_sec += 1; // Timeout 1 second after now

int result = mtx_timedlock(&serial_mtx, &timeout));

9
You might have expected it to be “time from now”, but you’d just like to think that, wouldn’t you!
Chapter 39. Multithreading 280

if (result == thrd_timedout) {
printf("Mutex lock timed out!\n");
}

Other than that, timed locks are the same as regular locks.

39.8 Condition Variables

Condition Variables are the last piece of the puzzle we need to make performant multithreaded applications
and to compose more complex multithreaded structures.
A condition variable provides a way for threads to go to sleep until some event on another thread occurs.
In other words, we might have a number of threads that are rearing to go, but they have to wait until some
event is true before they continue. Basically they’re being told “wait for it!” until they get notified.
And this works hand-in-hand with mutexes since what we’re going to wait on generally depends on the value
of some data, and that data generally needs to be protected by a mutex.
It’s important to note that the condition variable itself isn’t the holder of any particular data from our perspec-
tive. It’s merely the variable by which C keeps track of the waiting/not-waiting status of a particular thread
or group of threads.
Let’s write a contrived program that reads in groups of 5 numbers from the main thread one at a time. Then,
when 5 numbers have been entered, the child thread wakes up, sums up those 5 numbers, and prints the result.
The numbers will be stored in a global, shared array, as will the index into the array of the about-to-be-entered
number.
Since these are shared values, we at least have to hide them behind a mutex for both the main and child
threads. (The main will be writing data to them and the child will be reading data from them.)
But that’s not enough. The child thread needs to block (“sleep”) until 5 numbers have been read into the
array. And then the parent thread needs to wake up the child thread so it can do its work.
And when it wakes up, it needs to be holding that mutex. And it will! When a thread waits on a condition
variable, it also acquires a mutex when it wakes up.
All this takes place around an additional variable of type cnd_t that is the condition variable. We create this
variable with the cnd_init() function and destroy it when we’re done with it with the cnd_destroy()
function.
But how’s this all work? Let’s look at the outline of what the child thread will do:
1. Lock the mutex with mtx_lock()
2. If we haven’t entered all the numbers, wait on the condition variable with cnd_wait()
3. Do the work that needs doing
4. Unlock the mutex with mtx_unlock()
Meanwhile the main thread will be doing this:
1. Lock the mutex with mtx_lock()
2. Store the recently-read number into the array
3. If the array is full, signal the child to wake up with cnd_signal()
4. Unlock the mutex with mtx_unlock()
If you didn’t skim that too hard (it’s OK—I’m not offended), you might notice something weird: how can
the main thread hold the mutex lock and signal the child, if the child has to hold the mutex lock to wait for
the signal? They can’t both hold the lock!
 Chapter 39. Multithreading 281

And indeed they don’t! There’s some behind-the-scenes magic with condition variables: when you
cnd_wait(), it releases the mutex that you specify and the thread goes to sleep. And when someone signals
that thread to wake up, it reacquires the lock as if nothing had happened.
It’s a little different on the cnd_signal() side of things. This doesn’t do anything with the mutex. The
signaling thread still must manually release the mutex before the waiting threads can wake up.
One more thing on the cnd_wait(). You’ll probably be calling cnd_wait() if some condition10 is not yet
met (e.g. in this case, if not all the numbers have yet been entered). Here’s the deal: this condition should be
in a while loop, not an if statement. Why?
It’s because of a mysterious phenomenon called a spurious wakeup. Sometimes, in some implementations, a
thread can be woken up out of a cnd_wait() sleep for seemingly no reason. [X-Files music]11 . And so we
have to check to see that the condition we need is still actually met when we wake up. And if it’s not, back
to sleep with us!
So let’s do this thing! Starting with the main thread:
• The main thread will set up the mutex and condition variable, and will launch the child thread.
• Then it will, in an infinite loop, get numbers as input from the console.
• It will also acquire the mutex to store the inputted number into a global array.
• When the array has 5 numbers in it, the main thread will signal the child thread that it’s time to wake
up and do its work.
• Then the main thread will unlock the mutex and go back to reading the next number from the console.
Meanwhile, the child thread has been up to its own shenanigans:
• The child thread grabs the mutex
• While the condition is not met (i.e. while the shared array doesn’t yet have 5 numbers in it), the child
thread sleeps by waiting on the condition variable. When it waits, it implicitly unlocks the mutex.
• Once the main thread signals the child thread to wake up, it wakes up to do the work and gets the mutex
lock back.
• The child thread sums the numbers and resets the variable that is the index into the array.
• It then releases the mutex and runs again in an infinite loop.
And here’s the code! Give it some study so you can see where all the above pieces are being handled:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 #define VALUE_COUNT_MAX 5
5

6 int value[VALUE_COUNT_MAX]; // Shared global

7 int value_count = 0; // Shared global, too
8

9 mtx_t value_mtx; // Mutex around value

10 cnd_t value_cnd; // Condition variable on value
11

12 int run(void *arg)

13 {
14 (void)arg;

10
And that’s why they’re called condition variables!
11
I’m not saying it’s aliens… but it’s aliens. OK, really more likely another thread might have been woken up and gotten to the work
first.
 Chapter 39. Multithreading 282

15

16 for (;;) {
17 mtx_lock(&value_mtx); // <-- GRAB THE MUTEX
18

19 while (value_count < VALUE_COUNT_MAX) {

20 printf("Thread: is waiting\n");
21 cnd_wait(&value_cnd, &value_mtx); // <-- CONDITION WAIT
22 }
23

24 printf("Thread: is awake!\n");
25

26 int t = 0;
27

28 // Add everything up
29 for (int i = 0; i < VALUE_COUNT_MAX; i++)
30 t += value[i];
31

32 printf("Thread: total is %d\n", t);

33

34 // Reset input index for main thread

35 value_count = 0;
36

37 mtx_unlock(&value_mtx); // <-- MUTEX UNLOCK

38 }
39

40 return 0;
41 }
42

43 int main(void)
44 {
45 thrd_t t;
46

47 // Spawn a new thread

48

49 thrd_create(&t, run, NULL);

50 thrd_detach(t);
51

52 // Set up the mutex and condition variable

53

54 mtx_init(&value_mtx, mtx_plain);
55 cnd_init(&value_cnd);
56

57 for (;;) {
58 int n;
59

60 scanf("%d", &n);
61

62 mtx_lock(&value_mtx); // <-- LOCK MUTEX

63

64 value[value_count++] = n;
65

66 if (value_count == VALUE_COUNT_MAX) {
67 printf("Main: signaling thread\n");
68 cnd_signal(&value_cnd); // <-- SIGNAL CONDITION
 Chapter 39. Multithreading 283

69 }
70

71 mtx_unlock(&value_mtx); // <-- UNLOCK MUTEX

72 }
73

74 // Clean up (I know that's an infinite loop above here, but I

75 // want to at least pretend to be proper):
76

77 mtx_destroy(&value_mtx);
78 cnd_destroy(&value_cnd);
79 }

And here’s some sample output (individual numbers on lines are my input):
Thread: is waiting
1
1
1
1
1
Main: signaling thread
Thread: is awake!
Thread: total is 5
Thread: is waiting
2
8
5
9
0
Main: signaling thread
Thread: is awake!
Thread: total is 24
Thread: is waiting

It’s a common use of condition variables in producer-consumer situations like this. If we didn’t have a way
to put the child thread to sleep while it waited for some condition to be met, it would be force to poll which
is a big waste of CPU.

39.8.1 Timed Condition Wait

There’s a variant of cnd_wait() that allows you to specify a timeout so you can stop waiting.
Since the child thread must relock the mutex, this doesn’t necessarily mean that you’ll be popping back to
life the instant the timeout occurs; you still must wait for any other threads to release the mutex.
But it does mean that you won’t be waiting until the cnd_signal() happens.
To make this work, call cnd_timedwait() instead of cnd_wait(). If it returns the value thrd_timedout,
it timed out.
The timestamp is an absolute time in UTC, not a time-from-now. Thankfully the timespec_get() function
in <time.h> seems custom-made for exactly this case.
struct timespec timeout;

timespec_get(&timeout, TIME_UTC); // Get current time

timeout.tv_sec += 1; // Timeout 1 second after now
Chapter 39. Multithreading 284

int result = cnd_timedwait(&condition, &mutex, &timeout));

if (result == thrd_timedout) {
printf("Condition variable timed out!\n");
}

39.8.2 Broadcast: Wake Up All Waiting Threads

cnd_signal() function]] cnd_signal() only wakes up one thread to continue working. Depending on
how you have your logic done, it might make sense to wake up more than one thread to continue once the
condition is met.
Of course only one of them can grab the mutex, but if you have a situation where:
• The newly-awoken thread is responsible for waking up the next one, and—
• There’s a chance the spurious-wakeup loop condition will prevent it from doing so, then—
you’ll want to broadcast the wake up so that you’re sure to get at least one of the threads out of that loop to
launch the next one.
How, you ask?
Simply use cnd_broadcast() instead of cnd_signal(). Exact same usage, except cnd_broadcast()
wakes up all the sleeping threads that were waiting on that condition variable.

39.9 Running a Function One Time

Let’s say you have a function that could be run by many threads, but you don’t know when, and it’s not work
trying to write all that logic.
There’s a way around it: use call_once(). Tons of threads could try to run the function, but only the first
one counts12
To work with this, you need a special flag variable you declare to keep track of whether or not the thing’s
been run. And you need a function to run, which takes no parameters and returns no value.
once_flag of = ONCE_FLAG_INIT; // Initialize it like this

void run_once_function(void)
{
printf("I'll only run once!\n");
}

int run(void *arg)

{
(void)arg;

call_once(&of, run_once_function);

// ...

In this example, no matter how many threads get to the run() function, the run_once_function() will
only be called a single time.

12
Survival of the fittest! Right? I admit it’s actually nothing like that.
Chapter 40

Atomics

“They tried and failed, all of them?”

“Oh, no.” She shook her head. “They tried and died.”
—Paul Atreides and The Reverend Mother Gaius Helen Mohiam, Dune
This is one of the more challenging aspects of multithreading with C. But we’ll try to take it easy.
Basically, I’ll talk about the more straightforward uses of atomic variables, what they are, and how they work,
etc. And I’ll mention some of the more insanely-complex paths that are available to you.
But I won’t go down those paths. Not only am I barely qualified to even write about them, but I figure if you
know you need them, you already know more than I do.
But there are some weird things out here even in the basics. So buckle your seatbelts, everyone, ‘cause
Kansas is goin’ bye-bye.

40.1 Testing for Atomic Support

Atomics are an optional feature. There’s a macro __STDC_NO_ATOMICS__ that’s 1 if you don’t have atomics.
That macro might not exist pre-C11, so we should test the language version with __STDC_VERSION__1 .
#if __STDC_VERSION__ < 201112L || __STDC_NO_ATOMICS__ == 1
#define HAS_ATOMICS 0
#else
#define HAS_ATOMICS 1
#endif

If those tests pass, then you can safely include <stdatomic.h>, the header on which the rest of this chapter
is based. But if there is no atomic support, that header might not even exist.
On some systems, you might need to add -latomic to the end of your compilation command line to use any
functions in the header file.

40.2 Atomic Variables

Here’s part of how atomic variables work:
If you have a shared atomic variable and you write to it from one thread, that write will be all-or-nothing in
a different thread.
1
The __STDC_VERSION__ macro didn’t exist in early C89, so if you’re worried about that, check it with #ifdef.

285
 Chapter 40. Atomics 286

That is, the other thread will see the entire write of, say, a 32-bit value. Not half of it. There’s no way for
one thread to interrupt another that is in the middle of an atomic multi-byte write.
It’s almost like there’s a little lock around the getting and setting of that one variable. (And there might be!
See Lock-Free Atomic Variables, below.)
And on that note, you can get away with never using atomics if you use mutexes to lock your critical sections.
It’s just that there are a class of lock-free data structures that always allow other threads to make progress
instead of being blocked by a mutex… but these are tough to create correctly from scratch, and are one of
the things that are beyond the scope of the guide, sadly.
That’s only part of the story. But it’s the part we’ll start with.
Before we go further, how do you declare a variable to be atomic?
First, include <stdatomic.h>.
This gives us types such as atomic_int.
And then we can simply declare variables to be of that type.
But let’s do a demo where we have two threads. The first runs for a while and then sets a variable to a specific
value, then exits. The other runs until it sees that value get set, and then it exits.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3 #include <stdatomic.h>
4

5 atomic_int x; // THE POWER OF ATOMICS! BWHAHAHA!

6

7 int thread1(void *arg)

8 {
9 (void)arg;
10

11 printf("Thread 1: Sleeping for 1.5 seconds\n");

12 thrd_sleep(&(struct timespec){.tv_sec=1, .tv_nsec=500000000}, NULL);
13

14 printf("Thread 1: Setting x to 3490\n");

15 x = 3490;
16

17 printf("Thread 1: Exiting\n");
18 return 0;
19 }
20

21 int thread2(void *arg)

22 {
23 (void)arg;
24

25 printf("Thread 2: Waiting for 3490\n");

26 while (x != 3490) {} // spin here
27

28 printf("Thread 2: Got 3490--exiting!\n");

29 return 0;
30 }
31

32 int main(void)
33 {
34 x = 0;
 Chapter 40. Atomics 287

35

36 thrd_t t1, t2;

37

38 thrd_create(&t1, thread1, NULL);

39 thrd_create(&t2, thread2, NULL);
40

41 thrd_join(t1, NULL);
42 thrd_join(t2, NULL);
43

44 printf("Main : Threads are done, so x better be 3490\n");

45 printf("Main : And indeed, x == %d\n", x);
46 }

The second thread spins in place, looking at the flag and waiting for it to get set to the value 3490. And the
first one does that.
And I get this output:
Thread 1: Sleeping for 1.5 seconds
Thread 2: Waiting for 3490
Thread 1: Setting x to 3490
Thread 1: Exiting
Thread 2: Got 3490--exiting!
Main : Threads are done, so x better be 3490
Main : And indeed, x == 3490

Look, ma! We’re accessing a variable from different threads and not using a mutex! And that’ll work every
time thanks to the atomic nature of atomic variables.
You might be wondering what happens if that’s a regular non-atomic int, instead. Well, on my system it
still works… unless I do an optimized build in which case it hangs on thread 2 waiting to see the 3490 to get
set2 .
But that’s just the beginning of the story. The next part is going to require more brain power and has to do
with something called synchronization.

40.3 Synchronization
The next part of our story is all about when certain memory writes in one thread become visible to those in
another thread.
You might think, it’s right away, right? But it’s not. A number of things can go wrong. Weirdly wrong.
The compiler might have rearranged memory accesses so that when you think you set a value relative to
another might not be true. And even if the compiler didn’t, your CPU might have done it on the fly. Or
maybe there’s something else about this architecture that causes writes on one CPU to be delayed before
they’re visible on another.
The good news is that we can condense all these potential troubles into one: unsynchronized memory accesses
can appear out of order depending on which thread is doing the observing, as if the lines of code themselves
had been rearranged.
By way of example, which happens first in the following code, the write to x or the write to y?
2
The reason for this is when optimized, my compiler has put the value of x in a register to make the while loop fast. But the
register has no way of knowing that the variable was updated in another thread, so it never sees the 3490. This isn’t really related to the
all-or-nothing part of atomicity, but is more related to the synchronization aspects in the next section.
 Chapter 40. Atomics 288

1 int x, y; // global
2

3 // ...
4

5 x = 2;
6 y = 3;
7

8 printf("%d %d\n", x, y);

Answer: we don’t know. The compiler or CPU could silently reverse lines 5 and 6 and we’d be none-the-
wiser. The code would run single-threaded as-if it were executed in code order.
In a multithreaded scenario, we might have something like this pseudocode:
1 int x = 0, y = 0;
2

3 thread1() {
4 x = 2;
5 y = 3;
6 }
7

8 thread2() {
9 while (y != 3) {} // spin
10 printf("x is now %d\n", x); // 2? ...or 0?
11 }

What is the output from thread 2?

Well, if x gets assigned 2 before y is assigned 3, then I’d expect the output to be the very sensible:
x is now 2

But something sneaky could rearrange lines 4 and 5 causing us to see the value of 0 for x when we print it.
In other words, all bets are off unless we can somehow say, “As of this point, I expect all previous writes in
another thread to be visible in this thread.”
Two threads synchronize when they agree on the state of shared memory. As we’ve seen, they’re not always
in agreement with the code. So how do they agree?
Using atomic variables can force the agreement3 . If a thread writes to an atomic variable, it’s saying “anyone
who reads this atomic variable in the future will also see all the changes I made to memory (atomic or not)
up to and including the atomic variable”.
Or, in more human terms, let’s sit around the conference table and make sure we’re on the same page as
to which pieces of shared memory hold what values. You agree that the memory changes that you’d made
up-to-and-including the atomic store will be visible to me after I do a load of the same atomic variable.
So we can easily fix our example:
1 int x = 0;
2 atomic int y = 0; // Make y atomic
3

4 thread1() {
5 x = 2;
6 y = 3; // Synchronize on write
7 }
8

3
Until I say otherwise, I’m speaking generally about sequentially consistent operations. More on what that means soon.
 Chapter 40. Atomics 289

9 thread2() {
10 while (y != 3) {} // Synchronize on read
11 printf("x is now %d\n", x); // 2, period.
12 }

Because the threads synchronize across y, all writes in thread 1 that happened before the write to y are visible
in thread 2 after the read from y (in the while loop).
It’s important to note a couple things here:
1. Nothing sleeps. The synchronization is not a blocking operation. Both threads are running full bore
until they exit. Even the one stuck in the spin loop isn’t blocking anyone else from running.
2. The synchronization happens when one thread reads an atomic variable another thread wrote. So when
thread 2 reads y, all previous memory writes in thread 1 (namely setting x) will be visible in thread 2.
3. Notice that x isn’t atomic. That’s OK because we’re not synchronizing over x, and the synchronization
over y when we write it in thread 1 means that all previous writes—including x—in thread 1 will
become visible to other threads… if those other threads read y to synchronize.
Forcing this synchronization is inefficient and can be a lot slower than just using a regular variable. This is
why we don’t use atomics unless we have to for a particular application.
So that’s the basics. Let’s look deeper.

40.4 Acquire and Release

More terminology! It’ll pay off to learn this now.
When a thread reads an atomic variable, it is said to be an acquire operation.
When a thread writes an atomic variable, it is said to be a release operation.
What are these? Let’s line them up with terms you already know when it comes to atomic variables:
Read = Load = Acquire. Like when you compare an atomic variable or read it to copy it to another value.
Write = Store = Release. Like when you assign a value into an atomic variable.
When using atomic variables with these acquire/release semantics, C spells out what can happen when.
Acquire/release form the basis for the synchronization we just talked about.
When a thread acquires an atomic variable, it can see values set in another thread that released that same
variable.
In other words:
When a thread reads an atomic variable, it can see values set in another thread that wrote to that same variable.
The synchronization happens across the acquire/release pair.
More details:
With read/load/acquire of a particular atomic variable:
• All writes (atomic or non-atomic) in another thread that happened before that other thread
wrote/stored/released this atomic variable are now visible in this thread.
• The new value of the atomic variable set by the other thread is also visible in this thread.
• No reads or writes of any variables/memory in the current thread can be reordered to happen before
this acquire.
Chapter 40. Atomics 290

• The acquire acts as a one-way barrier when it comes to code reordering; reads and writes in the current
thread can be moved down from after the release to before it. But, more importantly for synchroniza-
tion, nothing can move down from after the acquire to before it.
With write/store/release of a particular atomic variable:
• All writes (atomic or non-atomic) in the current thread that happened before this release become visible
to other threads that have read/loaded/acquired the same atomic variable.
• The value written to this atomic variable by this thread is also visible to other threads.
• No reads or writes of any variables/memory in the current thread can be reordered to happen after this
release.
• The release acts as a one-way barrier when it comes to code reordering: reads and writes in the current
thread can be moved up from after the release to before it. But, more importantly for synchronization,
nothing can move down from before the release to after it.
Again, the upshot is synchronization of memory from one thread to another. The second thread can be sure
that variables and memory are written in the order the programmer intended.
int x, y, z = 0;
atomic_int a = 0;

thread1() {
x = 10;
y = 20;
a = 999; // Release
z = 30;
}

thread2()
{
while (a != 999) { } // Acquire

assert(x == 10); // never asserts, x is always 10

assert(y == 20); // never asserts, y is always 20

assert(z == 0); // might assert!!

}

In the above example, thread2 can be sure of the values in x and y after it acquires a because they were set
before thread1 released the atomic a.
But thread2 can’t be sure of z’s value because it happened after the release. Maybe the assignment to z got
moved before the assignment to a.
An important note: releasing one atomic variable has no effect on acquires of different atomic variables.
Each variable is isolated from the others.

40.5 Sequential Consistency

You hanging in there? We’re through the meat of the simpler usage of atomics. And since we’re not even
going to talk about the more complex uses here, you can relax a bit.
Sequential consistency is what’s called a memory ordering. There are many memory orderings, but sequential
consistency is the sanest4 C has to offer. It is also the default. You have to go out of your way to use other
4
Sanest from a programmer perspective.
Chapter 40. Atomics 291

memory orderings.
All the stuff we’ve been talking about so far has happened within the realm of sequential consistency.
We’ve talked about how the compiler or CPU can rearrange memory reads and writes in a single thread as
long as it follows the as-if rule.
And we’ve seen how we can put the brakes on this behavior by synchronizing over atomic variables.
Let’s formalize just a little more.
If operations are sequentially consistent, it means at the end of the day, when all is said and done, all the
threads can kick up their feet, open their beverage of choice, and all agree on the order in which memory
changes occurred during the run. And that order is the one specified by the code.
One won’t say, “But didn’t B happen before A?” if the rest of them say, “A definitely happened before B”.
They’re all friends, here.
In particular, within a thread, none of the acquires and releases can be reordered with respect to one another.
This is in addition to the rules about what other memory accesses can be reordered around them.
This rule gives an additional level of sanity to the progression of atomic loads/acquires and stores/releases.
Every other memory order in C involves a relaxation of the reordering rules, either for acquires/releases or
other memory accesses, atomic or otherwise. You’d do that if you really knew what you were doing and
needed the speed boost. Here be armies of dragons…
More on that later, but for now, let’s stick to the safe and practical.

40.6 Atomic Assignments and Operators

Certain operators on atomic variables are atomic. And others aren’t.
Let’s start with a counter-example:
atomic_int x = 0;

thread1() {
x = x + 3; // NOT atomic!
}

Since there’s a read of x on the right hand side of the assignment and a write effectively on the left, these are
two operations. Another thread could sneak in the middle and make you unhappy.
But you can use the shorthand += to get an atomic operation:
atomic_int x = 0;

thread1() {
x += 3; // ATOMIC!
}

In that case, x will be atomically incremented by 3—no other thread can jump in the middle.
In particular, the following operators are atomic read-modify-write operations with sequential consistency,
so use them with gleeful abandon. (In the example, a is atomic.)
a++ a-- --a ++a
a += b a -= b a *= b a /= b a %= b
a &= b a |= b a ^= b a >>= b a <<= b
Chapter 40. Atomics 292

40.7 Library Functions that Automatically Synchronize

So far we’ve talked about how you can synchronize with atomic variables, but it turns out there are a few
library functions that do some limited behind-the-scenes synchronization, themselves.
call_once() thrd_create() thrd_join()
mtx_lock() mtx_timedlock() mtx_trylock()
malloc() calloc() realloc()
aligned_alloc()

call_once(): synchronizes with all subsequent calls to call_once() for a particular flag. This way sub-
sequent calls can rest assured that if another thread sets the flag, they will see it.
thrd_create(): synchronizes with the beginning of the new thread. The new thread can be sure it will see
all shared memory writes from the parent thread from before the thrd_create() call.
thrd_join(): when a thread dies, it synchronizes with this function. The thread that has called
thrd_join() can be assured that it can see all the late thread’s shared writes.

mtx_lock(): earlier calls to mtx_unlock() on the same mutex synchronize on this call. This is the case
that most mirrors the acquire/release process we’ve already talked about. mtx_unlock() performs a release
on the mutex variable, assuring any subsequent thread that makes an acquire with mtx_lock() can see all
the shared memory changes in the critical section.
mtx_timedlock() and mtx_trylock(): similar to the situation with mtx_lock(), if this call succeeds,
earlier calls to mtx_unlock() synchronize with this one.
Dynamic Memory Functions: if you allocate memory, it synchronizes with the previous deallocation of
that same memory. And allocations and deallocations of that particular memory region happen in a single
total order that all threads can agree upon. I think the idea here is that the deallocation can wipe the region if
it chooses, and we want to be sure that a subsequent allocation doesn’t see the non-wiped data. Someone let
me know if there’s more to it.

40.8 Atomic Type Specifier, Qualifier

Let’s take it down a notch and see what types we have available, and how we can even make new atomic
types.
First things first, let’s look at the built-in atomic types and what they are typedef’d to. (Spoiler: _Atomic
is a type qualifier!)

Atomic type Longhand equivalent

atomic_bool _Atomic _Bool
atomic_char _Atomic char
atomic_schar _Atomic signed char
atomic_uchar _Atomic unsigned char
atomic_short _Atomic short
atomic_ushort _Atomic unsigned short
atomic_int _Atomic int
atomic_uint _Atomic unsigned int
atomic_long _Atomic long
atomic_ulong _Atomic unsigned long
atomic_llong _Atomic long long
atomic_ullong _Atomic unsigned long long
atomic_char16_t _Atomic char16_t
atomic_char32_t _Atomic char32_t
Chapter 40. Atomics 293

Atomic type Longhand equivalent

atomic_wchar_t _Atomic wchar_t
atomic_int_least8_t _Atomic int_least8_t
atomic_uint_least8_t _Atomic uint_least8_t
atomic_int_least16_t _Atomic int_least16_t
atomic_uint_least16_t _Atomic uint_least16_t
atomic_int_least32_t _Atomic int_least32_t
atomic_uint_least32_t _Atomic uint_least32_t
atomic_int_least64_t _Atomic int_least64_t
atomic_uint_least64_t _Atomic uint_least64_t
atomic_int_fast8_t _Atomic int_fast8_t
atomic_uint_fast8_t _Atomic uint_fast8_t
atomic_int_fast16_t _Atomic int_fast16_t
atomic_uint_fast16_t _Atomic uint_fast16_t
atomic_int_fast32_t _Atomic int_fast32_t
atomic_uint_fast32_t _Atomic uint_fast32_t
atomic_int_fast64_t _Atomic int_fast64_t
atomic_uint_fast64_t _Atomic uint_fast64_t
atomic_intptr_t _Atomic intptr_t
atomic_uintptr_t _Atomic uintptr_t
atomic_size_t _Atomic size_t
atomic_ptrdiff_t _Atomic ptrdiff_t
atomic_intmax_t _Atomic intmax_t
atomic_uintmax_t _Atomic uintmax_t

Use those at will! They’re consistent with the atomic aliases found in C++, if that helps.
But what if you want more?
You can do it either with a type qualifier or type specifier.
First, specifier! It’s the keyword _Atomic with a type in parens after5 —suitable for use with typedef:
typedef _Atomic(double) atomic_double;

atomic_double f;

Restrictions on the specifier: the type you’re making atomic can’t be of type array or function, nor can it be
atomic or otherwise qualified.
Next, qualifier! It’s the keyword _Atomic without a type in parens.
So these do similar things6 :
_Atomic(int) i; // type specifier
_Atomic int j; // type qualifier

The thing is, you can include other type qualifiers with the latter:
_Atomic volatile int k; // qualified atomic variable

Restrictions on the qualifier: the type you’re making atomic can’t be of type array or function.
5
Apparently C++23 is adding this as a macro.
6
The spec notes that they might differ in size, representation, and alignment.
Chapter 40. Atomics 294

40.9 Lock-Free Atomic Variables

Hardware architectures are limited in the amount of data they can atomically read and write. It depends on
how it’s wired together. And it varies.
If you use an atomic type, you can be assured that accesses to that type will be atomic… but there’s a catch:
if the hardware can’t do it, it’s done with a lock, instead.
So the atomic access becomes lock-access-unlock, which is rather slower and has some implications for
signal handlers.
Atomic flags, below, is the only atomic type that is guaranteed to be lock-free in all conforming implemen-
tations. In typical desktop/laptop computer world, other larger types are likely lock-free.
Luckily, we have a couple ways to determine if a particular type is a lock-free atomic or not.
First of all, some macros—you can use these at compile time with #if. They apply to both signed and
unsigned types.

Atomic Type Lock Free Macro

atomic_bool ATOMIC_BOOL_LOCK_FREE
atomic_char ATOMIC_CHAR_LOCK_FREE
atomic_char16_t ATOMIC_CHAR16_T_LOCK_FREE
atomic_char32_t ATOMIC_CHAR32_T_LOCK_FREE
atomic_wchar_t ATOMIC_WCHAR_T_LOCK_FREE
atomic_short ATOMIC_SHORT_LOCK_FREE
atomic_int ATOMIC_INT_LOCK_FREE
atomic_long ATOMIC_LONG_LOCK_FREE
atomic_llong ATOMIC_LLONG_LOCK_FREE
atomic_intptr_t ATOMIC_POINTER_LOCK_FREE

These macros can interestingly have three different values:

Value Meaning
0 Never lock-free.
1 Sometimes lock-free.
2 Always lock-free.

Wait—how can something be sometimes lock-free? This just means the answer isn’t known at compile-time,
but could later be known at runtime. Maybe the answer varies depending on whether or not you’re running
this code on Genuine Intel or AMD, or something like that7 .
But you can always test at runtime with the atomic_is_lock_free() function. This function returns true
or false if the particular type is atomic right now.
So why do we care?
Lock-free is faster, so maybe there’s a speed concern that you’d code around another way. Or maybe you
need to use an atomic variable in a signal handler.
7
I just pulled that example out of nowhere. Maybe it doesn’t matter on Intel/AMD, but it could matter somewhere, dangit!
Chapter 40. Atomics 295

40.9.1 Signal Handlers and Lock-Free Atomics

If you read or write a shared variable (static storage duration or _Thread_Local) in a signal handler, it’s
undefined behavior [gasp!]… Unless you do one of the following:
1. Write to a variable of type volatile sig_atomic_t.
2. Read or write a lock-free atomic variable.
As far as I can tell, lock-free atomic variables are one of the few ways you get portably get information out
of a signal handler.
The spec is a bit vague, in my read, about the memory order when it comes to acquiring or releasing atomic
variables in the signal handler. C++ says, and it makes sense, that such accesses are unsequenced with respect
to the rest of the program8 . The signal can be raised, after all, at any time. So I’m assuming C’s behavior is
similar.

40.10 Atomic Flags

There’s only one type the standard guarantees will be a lock-free atomic: atomic_flag. This is an opaque
type for test-and-set9 operations.
It can be either set or clear. You can initialize it to clear with:
atomic_flag f = ATOMIC_FLAG_INIT;

You can set the flag atomically with atomic_flag_test_and_set(), which will set the flag and return its
previous status as a _Bool (true for set).
You can clear the flag atomically with atomic_flag_clear().
Here’s an example where we init the flag to clear, set it twice, then clear it again.
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdbool.h>
#include <stdatomic.h>

atomic_flag f = ATOMIC_FLAG_INIT;

int main(void)
{
bool r = atomic_flag_test_and_set(&f);
printf("Value was: %d\n", r); // 0

r = atomic_flag_test_and_set(&f);
printf("Value was: %d\n", r); // 1

atomic_flag_clear(&f);
r = atomic_flag_test_and_set(&f);
printf("Value was: %d\n", r); // 0
}

40.11 Atomic structs and unions

Using the _Atomic qualifier or specifier, you can make atomic structs or unions! Pretty astounding.
8
C++ elaborates that if the signal is the result of a call to raise(), it is sequenced after the raise().
9
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Test-and-set
 Chapter 40. Atomics 296

If there’s not a lot of data in there (i.e. a handful of bytes), the resulting atomic type might be lock-free. Test
it with atomic_is_lock_free().
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdatomic.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 struct point {
7 float x, y;
8 };
9

10 _Atomic(struct point) p;
11

12 printf("Is lock free: %d\n", atomic_is_lock_free(&p));

13 }

Here’s the catch: you can’t access fields of an atomic struct or union… so what’s the point? Well, you
can atomically copy the entire struct into a non-atomic variable and then use it. You can atomically copy
the other way, too.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdatomic.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 struct point {
7 float x, y;
8 };
9

10 _Atomic(struct point) p;
11 struct point t;
12

13 p = (struct point){1, 2}; // Atomic copy

14

15 //printf("%f\n", p.x); // Error

16

17 t = p; // Atomic copy
18

19 printf("%f\n", t.x); // OK!

20 }

You can also declare a struct where individual fields are atomic. It is implementation defined if atomic
types are allowed on bitfields.

40.12 Atomic Pointers

Just a note here about placement of _Atomic when it comes to pointers.
First, pointers to atomics (i.e. the pointer value is not atomic, but the thing it points to is):
_Atomic int x;
_Atomic int *p; // p is a pointer to an atomic int

p = &x; // OK!
Chapter 40. Atomics 297

Second, atomic pointers to non-atomic values (i.e. the pointer value itself is atomic, but the thing it points to
is not):
int x;
int * _Atomic p; // p is an atomic pointer to an int

p = &x; // OK!

Lastly, atomic pointers to atomic values (i.e. the pointer and the thing it points to are both atomic):
_Atomic int x;
_Atomic int * _Atomic p; // p is an atomic pointer to an atomic int

p = &x; // OK!

40.13 Memory Order

We’ve already talked about sequential consistency, which is the sensible one of the bunch. But there are a
number of other ones:

memory_order Description
memory_order_seq_cst Sequential Consistency
memory_order_acq_rel Acquire/Release
memory_order_release Release
memory_order_acquire Acquire
memory_order_consume Consume
memory_order_relaxed Relaxed

You can specify other ones with certain library functions. For example, you can add a value to an atomic
variable like this:
atomic_int x = 0;

x += 5; // Sequential consistency, the default

Or you can do the same with this library function:

atomic_int x = 0;

atomic_fetch_add(&x, 5); // Sequential consistency, the default

Or you can do the same thing with an explicit memory ordering:

atomic_int x = 0;

atomic_fetch_add_explicit(&x, 5, memory_order_seq_cst);

But what if we didn’t want sequential consistency? And you wanted acquire/release instead for whatever
reason? Just name it:
atomic_int x = 0;

atomic_fetch_add_explicit(&x, 5, memory_order_acq_rel);

We’ll do a breakdown of the different memory orders, below. Don’t mess with anything other than sequential
consistency unless you know what you’re doing. It’s really easy to make mistakes that will cause rare, hard-
to-repro failures.
Chapter 40. Atomics 298

40.13.1 Sequential Consistency

• Load operations acquire (see below).
• Store operations release (see below).
• Read-modify-write operations acquire then release.
Also, in order to maintain the total order of acquires and releases, no acquires or releases will be reordered
with respect to each other. (The acquire/release rules do not forbid reordering a release followed by an acquire.
But the sequentially consistent rules do.)

40.13.2 Acquire
This is what happens on a load/read operation on an atomic variable.
• If another thread released this atomic variable, all the writes that thread did are now visible in this
thread.
• Memory accesses in this thread that happen after this load can’t be reordered before it.

40.13.3 Release
This is what happens on a store/write of an atomic variable.
• If another thread later acquires this atomic variable, all memory writes in this thread before its atomic
write become visible to that other thread.
• Memory accesses in this thread that happen before the release can’t be reordered after it.

40.13.4 Consume
This is an odd one, similar to a less-strict version of acquire. It affects memory accesses that are data depen-
dent on the atomic variable.
Being “data dependent” vaguely means that the atomic variable is used in a calculation.
That is, if a thread consumes an atomic variable then all the operations in that thread that go on to use that
atomic variable will be able to see the memory writes in the releasing thread.
Compare to acquire where memory writes in the releasing thread will be visible to all operations in the current
thread, not just the data-dependent ones.
Also like acquire, there is a restriction on which operations can be reordered before the consume. With
acquire, you couldn’t reorder anything before it. With consume, you can’t reorder anything that depends on
the loaded atomic value before it.

40.13.5 Acquire/Release
This only applies to read-modify-write operations. It’s an acquire and release bundled into one.
• An acquire happens for the read.
• A release happens for the write.

40.13.6 Relaxed
No rules; it’s anarchy! Everyone can reorder everything everywhere! Dogs and cats living together—mass
hysteria!
Actually, there is a rule. Atomic reads and writes are still all-or-nothing. But the operations can be reordered
whimsically and there is zero synchronization between threads.
Chapter 40. Atomics 299

There are a few use cases for this memory order, which you can find with a tiny bit of searching, e.g. simple
counters.
And you can use a fence to force synchronization after a bunch of relaxed writes.

40.14 Fences
You know how the releases and acquires of atomic variables occur as you read and write them?
Well, it’s possible to do a release or acquire without an atomic variable, as well.
This is called a fence. So if you want all the writes in a thread to be visible elsewhere, you can put up a
release fence in one thread and an acquire fence in another, just like with how atomic variables work.
Since a consume operation doesn’t really make sense on a fence10 , memory_order_consume is treated as an
acquire.
You can put up a fence with any specified order:
atomic_thread_fence(memory_order_release);

There’s also a light version of a fence for use with signal handlers, called atomic_signal_fence().
It works just the same way as atomic_thread_fence(), except:
• It only deals with visibility of values within the same thread; there is no synchronization with other
threads.
• No hardware fence instructions are emitted.
If you want to be sure the side effects of non-atomic operations (and relaxed atomic operations) are visible
in the signal handler, you can use this fence.
The idea is that the signal handler is executing in this thread, not another, so this is a lighter-weight way of
making sure changes outside the signal handler are visible within it (i.e. they haven’t been reordered).

40.15 References
If you want to learn more about this stuff, here are some of the things that helped me plow through it:
• Herb Sutter’s atomic<> Weapons talk:
– Part 111
– part 212
• Jeff Preshing’s materials13 , in particular:
– An Introduction to Lock-Free Programming14
– Acquire and Release Semantics15
– The Happens-Before Relation16
– The Synchronizes-With Relation17
– The Purpose of memory_order_consume in C++1118
10
Because consume is all about the operations that are dependent on the value of the acquired atomic variable, and there is no atomic
variable with a fence.
11
https://channel9.msdn.com/Shows/Going+Deep/Cpp-and-Beyond-2012-Herb-Sutter-atomic-Weapons-1-of-2
12
https://channel9.msdn.com/Shows/Going+Deep/Cpp-and-Beyond-2012-Herb-Sutter-atomic-Weapons-2-of-2
13
https://preshing.com/archives/
14
https://preshing.com/20120612/an-introduction-to-lock-free-programming/
15
https://preshing.com/20120913/acquire-and-release-semantics/
16
https://preshing.com/20130702/the-happens-before-relation/
17
https://preshing.com/20130823/the-synchronizes-with-relation/
18
https://preshing.com/20140709/the-purpose-of-memory_order_consume-in-cpp11/
Chapter 40. Atomics 300

– You Can Do Any Kind of Atomic Read-Modify-Write Operation19

• CPPReference:
– Memory Order20
– Atomic Types21
• Bruce Dawson’s Lockless Programming Considerations22
• The helpful and knowledgeable folks on r/C_Programming23

19
https://preshing.com/20150402/you-can-do-any-kind-of-atomic-read-modify-write-operation/
20
https://en.cppreference.com/w/c/atomic/memory_order
21
https://en.cppreference.com/w/c/language/atomic
22
https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/win32/dxtecharts/lockless-programming
23
https://www.reddit.com/r/C_Programming/
 Chapter 41

Function Specifiers, Alignment

Specifiers/Operators

These don’t see a heck of a lot of use in my experience, but we’ll cover them here for the sake of completeness.

41.1 Function Specifiers

When you declare a function, you can give the compiler a couple tips about how the functions could or will
be used. This enables or encourages the compiler to make certain optimizations.

41.1.1 inline for Speed—Maybe

You can declare a function to be inline like this:
static inline int add(int x, int y) {
return x + y;
}

This is meant to encourage the compiler to make this function call as fast as possible. And, historically, one
way to do this was inlining, which means that the body of the function would be embedded in its entirety
where the call was made. This would avoid all the overhead of setting up the function call and tearing it
down at the expense of larger code size as the function was copied all over the place instead of being reused.
That would seem to be the end of the story, but it’s not. inline comes with a whole pile of rules that make
for interesting times. I’m not sure I even understand them all, and behavior seems to vary from compiler to
compiler.
The short answer is define the inline function as static in the file that you need it. And then use it in that
one file. And you never have to worry about the rest of it.
But if you’re wondering, here are more fun times.
Let’s try leaving the static off.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 inline int add(int x, int y)

4 {
5 return x + y;
6 }
7

301
 Chapter 41. Function Specifiers, Alignment Specifiers/Operators 302

8 int main(void)
9 {
10 printf("%d\n", add(1, 2));
11 }

gcc gives a linker error on add()… unless you compile with optimizations on (probably)!

See, a compiler can choose to inline or not, but if it chooses not to, you’re left with no function at all. gcc
doesn’t inline unless you’re doing an optimized build.
One way around this is to define a non-inline external linkage version of the function elsewhere, and that
one will be used when the inline one isn’t. But you as the programmer can’t determine which, portably. If
both are available, it’s unspecified which one the compiler chooses. With gcc the inline function will be used
if you’re compiling with optimizations, and the non-inline one will be used otherwise. Even if the bodies of
these functions are completely different. Zany!
Another way is to declare the function as extern inline. This will attempt to inline in this file, but will
also create a version with external linkage. And so gcc will use one or the other depending on optimizations,
but at least they’re the same function.
Unless, of course, you have another source file with an inline function of the same name; it will use its
inline function or the one with external linkage depending on optimizations.

But let’s say you’re doing a build where the compiler is inlining the function. In that case, you can just use
a plain inline in the definition. However, there are now additional restrictions.
You can’t refer to any static globals:
static int b = 13;

inline int add(int x, int y)

{
return x + y + b; // BAD -- can't refer to b
}

And you can’t define any non-const static local variables:

inline int add(int x, int y)
{
static int b = 13; // BAD -- can't define static

return x + y + b;
}

But making it const is OK:

inline int add(int x, int y)
{
static const int b = 13; // OK -- static const

return x + y + b;
}

Now, you know the functions are extern by default, so we should be able to call add() from another file.
You’d like to think that, wouldn’t you!
But you can’t! If it’s just a plain inline, it’s similar to static: it’s only visible in that file.
Okay, so what if you throw an extern on there? Now we’re coming full circle to when we discussed having
inline mixed with functions with external linkage.
 Chapter 41. Function Specifiers, Alignment Specifiers/Operators 303

If both are visible, the compiler can choose which to use.

Let’s do a demo of this behavior. We’ll have two files, foo.c and bar.c. They’ll both call func() which
is inline in foo.c and external linkage in bar.c.
Here’s foo.c with the inline.
1 // foo.c
2

3 #include <stdio.h>
4

5 inline char *func(void)

6 {
7 return "foo's function";
8 }
9

10 int main(void)
11 {
12 printf("foo.c: %s\n", func());
13

14 void bar(void);
15 bar();
16 }

Recall that unless we’re doing an optimized build with gcc. func() will vanish and we’ll get a linker error.
Unless, or course, we have a version with external linkage defined elsewhere.
And we do. In bar.c.
1 // bar.c
2

3 #include <stdio.h>
4

5 char *func(void)
6 {
7 return "bar's function";
8 }
9

10 void bar(void)
11 {
12 printf("bar.c: %s\n", func());
13 }

So the question is, what is the output?

Seems like when we call func() from foo.c, it should print “foo's function”. And from bar.c, that
func() should print “bar's function”.

And if I compile with gcc with optimizations1 it will use inline functions, and we’ll get the expected:
foo.c: foo's function
bar.c: bar's function

Great!
But if we compile in gcc without optimizations, it ignores the inline function and uses the external linkage
func() from bar.c! And we get this:
1
You can do this with -O on the command line.
 Chapter 41. Function Specifiers, Alignment Specifiers/Operators 304

foo.c: bar's function

bar.c: bar's function

In short, the rules are surprisingly complex. I give myself a good 30% chance of having described them
correctly.

41.1.2 noreturn and _Noreturn

This indicates to the compiler that a particular function will not ever return to its caller, i.e. the program will
exit by some mechanism before the function returns.
It allows the compiler to perhaps perform some optimizations around the function call.
It also allows you to indicate to other devs that some program logic depends on a function not returning.
You’ll likely never need to use this, but you’ll see it on some library calls like exit() and abort().
The built-in keyword is _Noreturn, but if it doesn’t break your existing code, everyone would recommend
including <stdnoreturn.h> and using the easier-to-read noreturn instead.
It’s undefined behavior if a function specified as noreturn actually does return. It’s computationally dis-
honest, see.
Here’s an example of using noreturn correctly:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <stdnoreturn.h>
4

5 noreturn void foo(void) // This function should never return!

6 {
7 printf("Happy days\n");
8

9 exit(1); // And it doesn't return--it exits here!

10 }
11

12 int main(void)
13 {
14 foo();
15 }

If the compiler detects that a noreturn function could return, it might warn you, helpfully.
Replacing the foo() function with this:
noreturn void foo(void)
{
printf("Breakin' the law\n");
}

gets me a warning:
foo.c:7:1: warning: function declared 'noreturn' should not return

41.2 Alignment Specifiers and Operators

Alignment2 is all about multiples of addresses on which objects can be stored. Can you store this at any
2
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Data_structure_alignment
 Chapter 41. Function Specifiers, Alignment Specifiers/Operators 305

address? Or must it be a starting address that’s divisible by 2? Or 8? Or 16?

If you’re coding up something low-level like a memory allocator that interfaces with your OS, you might
need to consider this. Most devs go their careers without using this functionality in C.

41.2.1 alignas and _Alignas

This isn’t a function. Rather, it’s an alignment specifier that you can use with a variable declaration.
The built-in specifier is _Alignas, but the header <stdalign.h> defines it as alignas for something better
looking.
If you need your char to be aligned like an int, you can force it like this when you declare it:
char alignas(int) c;

You can also pass a constant value or expression in for the alignment. This has to be something supported
by the system, but the spec stops short of dictating what values you can put in there. Small powers of 2 (1,
2, 4, 8, and 16) are generally safe bets.
char alignas(8) c; // align on 8-byte boundaries

If you want to align at the maximum used alignment by your system, include <stddef.h> and use the type
max_align_t, like so:
char alignas(max_align_t) c;

You could potentially over-align by specifying an alignment more than that of max_align_t, but whether
or not such things are allowed is system dependent.

41.2.2 alignof and _Alignof

This operator will return the address multiple a particular type uses for alignment on this system. For example,
maybe chars are aligned every 1 address, and ints are aligned every 4 addresses.
The built-in operator is _Alignof, but the header <stdalign.h> defines it as alignof if you want to look
cooler.
Here’s a program that will print out the alignments of a variety of different types. Again, these will vary
from system to system. Note that the type max_align_t will give you the maximum alignment used by the
system.
1 #include <stdalign.h>
2 #include <stdio.h> // for printf()
3 #include <stddef.h> // for max_align_t
4

5 struct t {
6 int a;
7 char b;
8 float c;
9 };
10

11 int main(void)
12 {
13 printf("char : %zu\n", alignof(char));
14 printf("short : %zu\n", alignof(short));
15 printf("int : %zu\n", alignof(int));
16 printf("long : %zu\n", alignof(long));
17 printf("long long : %zu\n", alignof(long long));
 Chapter 41. Function Specifiers, Alignment Specifiers/Operators 306

18 printf("double : %zu\n", alignof(double));

19 printf("long double: %zu\n", alignof(long double));
20 printf("struct t : %zu\n", alignof(struct t));
21 printf("max_align_t: %zu\n", alignof(max_align_t));
22 }

Output on my system:
char : 1
short : 2
int : 4
long : 8
long long : 8
double : 8
long double: 16
struct t : 16
max_align_t: 16

And there you have it. Alignment!

Chapter 42

<assert.h> Runtime and Compile-time

Diagnostics

Macro Description
assert() Runtime assertion
static_assert() Compile-time assertion

This functionality has to do with things that Should Never Happen™. If you have something that should
never be true and you want your program to bomb out because it happened, this is the header file for you.
There are two types of assertions: compile-time assertions (called “static assertions”) and runtime assertions.
If the assertion fails (i.e. the thing that you need to be true is not true) then the program will bomb out either
at compile-time or runtime.

42.1 Macros
If you define the macro NDEBUG before you include <assert.h>, then the assert() macro will have no
effect. You can define NDEBUG to be anything, but 1 seems like a good value.
Since assert() causes your program to bomb out at runtime, you might not desire this behavior when you
go into production. Defining NDEBUG causes assert() to be ignored.
NDEBUG has no effect on static_assert().

42.2 assert()
Bomb out at runtime if a condition fails

Synopsis
#include <assert.h>

void assert(scalar expression);

307
 Chapter 42. <assert.h> Runtime and Compile-time Diagnostics 308

Description
You pass in an expression to this macro. If it evaluates to false, the program will crash with an assertion
failure (by calling the abort() function).
Basically, you’re saying, “Hey, I’m assuming this condition is true, and if it’s not, I don’t want to continue
running.”
This is used while debugging to make sure no unexpected conditions arise. And if you find during develop-
ment that the condition does arise, maybe you should modify the code to handle it before going to production.
If you’ve defined the macro NDEBUG to any value before <assert.h> was included, the assert() macro is
ignored. This is a good idea before production.
Unlike static_assert(), this macro doesn’t allow you to print an arbitrary message. If you want to do
this, check out the example in the Preprocessor chapter.

Return Value
This macro doesn’t return (since it calls abort() which never returns).
If NDEBUG is set, the macro evaluates to ((void)0), which does nothing.

Example
Here’s a function that divides the size of our goat herd. But we’re assuming we’ll never get a 0 passed to us.
So we assert that amount != 0… and if it is, the program aborts/
1 //#define NDEBUG 1 // uncomment this to disable the assert
2

3 #include <stdio.h>
4 #include <assert.h>
5

6 int goat_count = 10;

7

8 void divide_goat_herd_by(int amount)

9 {
10 assert(amount != 0);
11

12 goat_count /= amount;
13 }
14

15 int main(void)
16 {
17 divide_goat_herd_by(2); // OK
18

19 divide_goat_herd_by(0); // Causes the assert to fire

20 }

When I run this and pass 0 to the function, I get the following on my system (the exact output may vary):
assert: assert.c:10: divide_goat_herd_by: Assertion `amount != 0' failed.

See Also
static_assert(), abort()
 Chapter 42. <assert.h> Runtime and Compile-time Diagnostics 309

42.3 static_assert()
Bomb out at compile-time if a condition fails

Synopsis
#include <assert.h>

static_assert(constant-expression, string-literal);

Description
This macro prevents your program from even compiling if a condition isn’t true.
And it prints the string literal you give it.
Basically if constant-expression is false, then compilation will cease and the string-literal will be
printed.
The constant expression must be truly constant–just values, no variables. And the same is true for the string
literal: no variables, just a literal string in double quotes. (It has to be this way since the program’s not
running at this point.)

Return Value
Not applicable, as this is a compile-time feature.

Example
Here’s a partial example with an algorithm that presumably has poor performance or memory issues if the
size of the local array is too large. We prevent that eventuality at compile-time by catching it with the
static_assert().
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <assert.h>
3

4 #define ARRAY_SIZE 16
5

6 int main(void)
7 {
8 static_assert(ARRAY_SIZE > 32, "ARRAY_SIZE too small");
9

10 int a[ARRAY_SIZE];
11

12 a[32] = 10;
13

14 printf("%d\n", a[32]);
15 }

On my system, when I try to compile it, this prints (your output may vary):
In file included from static_assert.c:2:
static_assert.c: In function ‘main’:
static_assert.c:8:5: error: static assertion failed: "ARRAY_SIZE too small"
8 | static_assert(ARRAY_SIZE > 32, "ARRAY_SIZE too small");
| ^~~~~~~~~~~~~
Chapter 42. <assert.h> Runtime and Compile-time Diagnostics 310

See Also
assert()
Chapter 43

<complex.h> Complex Number

Functionality

The complex functions in this reference section come in three flavors each: double complex, float com-
plex, and long double complex.

The float variants end with f and the long double variants end with l, e.g. for complex cosine:
ccos() double complex
ccosf() float complex
ccosl() long double complex

The table below only lists the double complex version for brevity.

Function Description
cabs() Compute the complex absolute value
cacos() Compute the complex arc-cosine
cacosh() Compute the complex arc hyperbolic cosine
carg() Compute the complex argument
casin() Compute the complex arc-sine
casinh() Compute the complex arc hyperbolic sine
catan() Compute the complex arc-tangent
catanh() Compute the complex arc hyperbolic tangent
ccos() Compute the complex cosine
ccosh() Compute the complex hyperbolic cosine
cexp() Compute the complex base-𝑒 exponential
cimag() Returns the imaginary part of a complex number
clog() Compute the complex logarithm
CMPLX() Build a complex value from real and imaginary types
conj() Compute the conjugate of a complex number
cproj() Compute the projection of a complex number
creal() Returns the real part of a complex number
csin() Compute the complex sine
csinh() Compute the complex hyperbolic sine
csqrt() Compute the complex square root
ctan() Compute the complex tangent
ctanh() Compute the complex hyperbolic tangent

311
Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 312

You can test for complex number support by looking at the __STDC_NO_COMPLEX__ macro. If it’s defined,
complex numbers aren’t available.
There are possibly two types of numbers defined: complex and imaginary. No system I’m currently aware
of implements imaginary types.
The complex types, which are a real value plus a multiple of 𝑖, are:
float complex
double complex
long double complex

The imaginary types, which hold a multiple of 𝑖, are:

float imaginary
double imaginary
long double imaginary
√
The mathematical value 𝑖 = −1 is represented by the symbol _Complex_I or _Imaginary_I, if it exists.
The The macro I will be preferentially set to _Imaginary_I (if it exists), or to _Complex_I otherwise.
You can write imaginary literals (if supported) using this notation:
double imaginary x = 3.4 * I;

You can write complex literals using regular complex notation:

double complex x = 1.2 + 3.4 * I;

or build them with the CMPLX() macro:

double complex x = CMPLX(1.2, 3.4); // Like 1.2 + 3.4 * I

The latter has the advantage of handing special cases of complex numbers correctly (like those involving
infinity or signed zeroes) as if _Imaginary_I were present, even if it’s not.
All angular values are in radians.
Some functions have discontinuities called branch cuts. Now, I’m no mathematician so I can’t really talk
sensibly about this, but if you’re here, I like to think you know what you’re doing when it comes to this side
of things.
If you system has signed zeroes, you can tell which side of the cut you’re on by the sign. And you can’t if
you don’t. The spec elaborates:
Implementations that do not support a signed zero […] cannot distinguish the sides of branch cuts.
These implementations shall map a cut so the function is continuous as the cut is approached
coming around the finite endpoint of the cut in a counter clockwise direction. (Branch cuts for
the functions specified here have just one finite endpoint.) For example, for the square root
function, coming counter clockwise around the finite endpoint of the cut along the negative real
axis approaches the cut from above, so the cut maps to the positive imaginary axis.
Finally, there’s a pragma called CX_LIMITED_RANGE that can be turned on and off (default is off). You can
turn it on with:
#pragma STDC CX_LIMITED_RANGE ON

It allows for certain intermediate operations to underflow, overflow, or deal badly with infinity, presumably
for a tradeoff in speed. If you’re sure these types of errors won’t occur with the numbers you’re using AND
you’re trying to get as much speed out as you can, you could turn this macro on.
The spec also elaborates here:
 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 313

The purpose of the pragma is to allow the implementation to use the formulas:
(𝑥 + 𝑖𝑦) × (𝑢 + 𝑖𝑣) = (𝑥𝑢 − 𝑦𝑣) + 𝑖(𝑦𝑢 + 𝑥𝑣)
(𝑥 + 𝑖𝑦)/(𝑢 + 𝑖𝑣) = [(𝑥𝑢 + 𝑦𝑣) + 𝑖(𝑦𝑢 − 𝑥𝑣)]/(𝑢2 + 𝑣2 )
|𝑥 + 𝑖𝑦| = √𝑥2 + 𝑦2
where the programmer can determine they are safe.

43.1 cacos(), cacosf(), cacosl()

Compute the complex arc-cosine

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double complex cacos(double complex z);

float complex cacosf(float complex z);

long double complex cacosl(long double complex z);

Description
Computes the complex arc-cosine of a complex number.
The complex number z will have an imaginary component in the range [0, 𝜋], and the real component is
unbounded.
There are branch cuts outside the interval [−1, +1] on the real axis.

Return Value
Returns the complex arc-cosine of z.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 8 + 1.5708 * I;
7

8 double complex y = cacos(x);

9

10 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

11 }

Output:
 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 314

Result: 0.195321 + -2.788006i

See Also
ccos(), casin(), catan()

43.2 casin(), casinf(), casinl()

Compute the complex arc-sine

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double complex casin(double complex z);

float complex casinf(float complex z);

long double complex casinl(long double complex z);

Description
Computes the complex arc-sine of a complex number.
The complex number z will have an imaginary component in the range [−𝜋/2, +𝜋/2], and the real compo-
nent is unbounded.
There are branch cuts outside the interval [−1, +1] on the real axis.

Return Value
Returns the complex arc-sine of z.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 8 + 1.5708 * I;
7

8 double complex y = casin(x);

9

10 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

11 }

Output:
Result: 1.375476 + 2.788006i
 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 315

See Also
csin(), cacos(), catan()

43.3 catan(), catanf(), catanl()

Compute the complex arc-tangent

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double complex catan(double complex z);

float complex catanf(float complex z);

long double complex catanl(long double complex z);

Description
Computes the complex arc-tangent of a complex number.
The complex number z will have an real component in the range [−𝜋/2, +𝜋/2], and the imaginary compo-
nent is unbounded.
There are branch cuts outside the interval [−𝑖, +𝑖] on the imaginary axis.

Return Value
Returns the complex arc-tangent of z.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double wheat = 8;
7 double sheep = 1.5708;
8

9 double complex x = wheat + sheep * I;

10

11 double complex y = catan(x);

12

13 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

14 }

Output:
Result: 1.450947 + 0.023299i
 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 316

See Also
ctan(), cacos(), casin()

43.4 ccos(), ccosf(), ccosl()

Compute the complex cosine

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double complex ccos(double complex z);

float complex ccosf(float complex z);

long double complex ccosl(long double complex z);

Description
Computes the complex cosine of a complex number.

Return Value
Returns the complex cosine of z.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 8 + 1.5708 * I;
7

8 double complex y = ccos(x);

9

10 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

11 }

Output:
Result: -0.365087 + -2.276818i

See Also
csin(), ctan(), cacos()
 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 317

43.5 csin(), csinf(), csinl()

Compute the complex sine

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double complex csin(double complex z);

float complex csinf(float complex z);

long double complex csinl(long double complex z);

Description
Computes the complex sine of a complex number.

Return Value
Returns the complex sine of z.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 8 + 1.5708 * I;
7

8 double complex y = csin(x);

9

10 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

11 }

Output:
Result: 2.482485 + -0.334840i

See Also
ccos(), ctan(), casin()

43.6 ctan(), ctanf(), ctanl()

Compute the complex tangent

Synopsis
 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 318

#include <complex.h>

double complex ctan(double complex z);

float complex ctanf(float complex z);

long double complex ctanl(long double complex z);

Description
Computes the complex tangent of a complex number.

Return Value
Returns the complex tangent of z.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 8 + 1.5708 * I;
7

8 double complex y = ctan(x);

9

10 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

11 }

Output:
Result: -0.027073 + 1.085990i

See Also
ccos(), csin(), catan()

43.7 cacosh(), cacoshf(), cacoshl()

Compute the complex arc hyperbolic cosine

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double complex cacosh(double complex z);

float complex cacoshf(float complex z);

long double complex cacoshl(long double complex z);

 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 319

Description
Computes the complex arc hyperbolic cosine of a complex number.
There is a branch cut at values less than 1 on the real axis.
The return value will be non-negative on the real number axis, and in the range [−𝑖𝜋, +𝑖𝜋] on the imaginary
axis.

Return Value
Returns the complex arc hyperbolic cosine of z.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 8 + 1.5708 * I;
7

8 double complex y = cacosh(x);

9

10 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

11 }

Output:
Result: 2.788006 + 0.195321i

See Also
casinh(), catanh(), acosh()

43.8 casinh(), casinhf(), casinhl()

Compute the complex arc hyperbolic sine

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double complex casinh(double complex z);

float complex casinhf(float complex z);

long double complex casinhl(long double complex z);

Description
Computes the complex arc hyperbolic sine of a complex number.
 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 320

There are branch cuts outside [−𝑖, +𝑖] on the imaginary axis.
The return value will be unbounded on the real number axis, and in the range [−𝑖𝜋/2, +𝑖𝜋/2] on the imag-
inary axis.

Return Value
Returns the complex arc hyperbolic sine of z.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 8 + 1.5708 * I;
7

8 double complex y = casinh(x);

9

10 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

11 }

Output:
Result: 2.794970 + 0.192476i

See Also
cacosh(), catanh(), asinh()

43.9 catanh(), catanhf(), catanhl()

Compute the complex arc hyperbolic tangent

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double complex catanh(double complex z);

float complex catanhf(float complex z);

long double complex catanhl(long double complex z);

Description
Computes the complex arc hyperbolic tangent of a complex number.
There are branch cuts outside [−1, +1] on the real axis.
The return value will be unbounded on the real number axis, and in the range [−𝑖𝜋/2, +𝑖𝜋/2] on the imag-
inary axis.
 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 321

Return Value
Returns the complex arc hyperbolic tangent of z.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 8 + 1.5708 * I;
7

8 double complex y = catanh(x);

9

10 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

11 }

Output:
Result: 0.120877 + 1.546821i

See Also
cacosh(), casinh(), atanh()

43.10 ccosh(), ccoshf(), ccoshl()

Compute the complex hyperbolic cosine

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double complex ccosh(double complex z);

float complex ccoshf(float complex z);

long double complex ccoshl(long double complex z);

Description
Computes the complex hyperbolic cosine of a complex number.

Return Value
Returns the complex hyperbolic cosine of z.

Example
 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 322

1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 8 + 1.5708 * I;
7

8 double complex y = ccosh(x);

9

10 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

11 }

Output:
Result: -0.005475 + 1490.478826i

See Also
csinh(), ctanh(), ccos()

43.11 csinh(), csinhf(), csinhl()

Compute the complex hyperbolic sine

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double complex csinh(double complex z);

float complex csinhf(float complex z);

long double complex csinhl(long double complex z);

Description
Computes the complex hyperbolic sine of a complex number.

Return Value
Returns the complex hyperbolic sine of z.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 8 + 1.5708 * I;
7
 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 323

8 double complex y = csinh(x);

9

10 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

11 }

Output:
Result: -0.005475 + 1490.479161i

See Also
ccosh(), ctanh(), csin()

43.12 ctanh(), ctanhf(), ctanhl()

Compute the complex hyperbolic tangent

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double complex ctanh(double complex z);

float complex ctanhf(float complex z);

long double complex ctanhl(long double complex z);

Description
Computes the complex hyperbolic tangent of a complex number.

Return Value
Returns the complex hyperbolic tangent of z.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 8 + 1.5708 * I;
7

8 double complex y = ctanh(x);

9

10 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

11 }

Output:
 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 324

Result: 1.000000 + -0.000000i

See Also
ccosh(), csinh(), ctan()

43.13 cexp(), cexpf(), cexpl()

Compute the complex base-𝑒 exponential

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double complex cexp(double complex z);

float complex cexpf(float complex z);

long double complex cexpl(long double complex z);

Description
Computes the complex base-𝑒 exponential of z.

Return Value
Returns the complex base-𝑒 exponential of z.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 1 + 2 * I;
7

8 double complex y = cexp(x);

9

10 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

11 }

Output:
Result: -1.131204 + 2.471727i

See Also
cpow(), clog(), exp()
 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 325

43.14 clog(), clogf(), clogl()

Compute the complex logarithm

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double complex clog(double complex z);

float complex clogf(float complex z);

long double complex clogl(long double complex z);

Description
Compute the base-𝑒 complex logarithm of z. There is a branch cut on the negative real axis.
The returns value is unbounded on the real axis and in the range [−𝑖𝜋, +𝑖𝜋] on the imaginary axis.

Return Value
Returns the base-𝑒 complex logarithm of z.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 1 + 2 * I;
7

8 double complex y = clog(x);

9

10 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

11 }

Output:
Result: 0.804719 + 1.107149i

See Also
cexp(), log()

43.15 cabs(), cabsf(), cabsl()

Compute the complex absolute value
 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 326

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double cabs(double complex z);

float cabsf(float complex z);

long double cabsl(long double complex z);

Description
Computes the complex absolute value of z.

Return Value
Returns the complex absolute value of z.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 1 + 2 * I;
7

8 double complex y = cabs(x);

9

10 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

11 }

Output:
Result: 2.236068 + 0.000000i

See Also
fabs(), abs()

43.16 cpow(), cpowf(), cpowl()

Compute complex power

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double complex cpow(double complex x, double complex y);

float complex cpowf(float complex x, float complex y);

 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 327

long double complex cpowl(long double complex x,

long double complex y);

Description
Computes the complex 𝑥𝑦 .
There is a branch cut for x along the negative real axis.

Return Value
Returns the complex 𝑥𝑦 .

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 1 + 2 * I;
7 double complex y = 3 + 4 * I;
8

9 double r = cpow(x, y);

10

11 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(r), cimag(r));

12 }

Result:
Result: 0.129010 + 0.000000i

See Also
csqrt(), cexp()

43.17 csqrt(), csqrtf(), csqrtl()

Compute the complex square root

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double complex csqrt(double complex z);

float complex csqrtf(float complex z);

long double complex csqrtl(long double complex z);

 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 328

Description
Computes the complex square root of z.
There is a branch cut along the negative real axis.
The return value is in the right half of the complex plane and includes the imaginary axis.

Return Value
Returns the complex square root of z.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 1 + 2 * I;
7

8 double complex y = csqrt(x);

9

10 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

11 }

Output:
Result: 1.272020 + 0.786151i

See Also
cpow(), sqrt()

43.18 carg(), cargf(), cargl()

Compute the complex argument

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double carg(double complex z);

float cargf(float complex z);

long double cargl(long double complex z);

Description
Computes the complex argument (AKA phase angle) of z.
There is a branch cut along the negative real axis.
 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 329

Returns a value in the range [−𝜋, +𝜋].

Return Value
Returns the complex argument of z.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 1 + 2 * I;
7

8 double y = carg(x);
9

10 printf("Result: %f\n", y);

11 }

Output:
Result: 1.107149

43.19 cimag(), cimagf(), cimagl()

Returns the imaginary part of a complex number

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double cimag(double complex z);

float cimagf(float complex z);

long double cimagl(long double complex z);

Description
Returns the imaginary part of z.
As a footnote, the spec points out that any complex number x is part of the following equivalency:
x == creal(x) + cimag(x) * I;

Return Value
Returns the imaginary part of z.
 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 330

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 1 + 2 * I;
7

8 double y = cimag(x);
9

10 printf("Result: %f\n", y);

11 }

Output—just the imaginary part:

Result: 2.000000

See Also
creal()

43.20 CMPLX(), CMPLXF(), CMPLXL()

Build a complex value from real and imaginary types

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double complex CMPLX(double x, double y);

float complex CMPLXF(float x, float y);

long double complex CMPLXL(long double x, long double y);

Description
These macros build a complex value from real and imaginary types.
Now I know what you’re thinking. “But I can already build a complex value from real and imaginary types
using the I macro, like in the example you’re about to give us.”
double complex x = 1 + 2 * I;

And that’s true.

But the reality of the matter is weird and complex.
Maybe I got undefined, or maybe you redefined it.
Or maybe I was defined as _Complex_I which doesn’t necessarily preserve the sign of a zero value.
As the spec points out, these macros build complex numbers as if _Imaginary_I were defined (thus pre-
serving your zero sign) even if it’s not. That is, they are defined equivalently to:
 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 331

#define CMPLX(x, y) ((double complex)((double)(x) + \

_Imaginary_I * (double)(y)))

#define CMPLXF(x, y) ((float complex)((float)(x) + \

_Imaginary_I * (float)(y)))

#define CMPLXL(x, y) ((long double complex)((long double)(x) + \

_Imaginary_I * (long double)(y)))

Return Value
Returns the complex number for the given real x and imaginary y components.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = CMPLX(1, 2); // Like 1 + 2 * I
7

8 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(x), cimag(x));

9 }

Output:
Result: 1.000000 + 2.000000i

See Also
creal(), cimag()

43.21 conj(), conjf(), conjl()

Compute the conjugate of a complex number

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double complex conj(double complex z);

float complex conjf(float complex z);

long double complex conjl(long double complex z);

 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 332

Description
This function computes the complex conjugate1 of z. Apparently it does this by reversing the sign of the
imaginary part, but dammit, I’m a programmer not a mathematician, Jim!

Return Value
Returns the complex conjugate of z

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 1 + 2 * I;
7

8 double complex y = conj(x);

9

10 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

11 }

Output:
Result: 1.000000 + -2.000000i

43.22 cproj(), cproj(), cproj()

Compute the projection of a complex number

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double complex cproj(double complex z);

float complex cprojf(float complex z);

long double complex cprojl(long double complex z);

Description
Computes the projection of z onto a Riemann sphere2 .
Now we’re really outside my expertise. The spec has this to say, which I’m quoting verbatim because I’m
not knowledgable enough to rewrite it sensibly. Hopefully it makes sense to anyone who would need to use
this function.
1
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Complex_conjugate
2
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Riemann_sphere
 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 333

z projects to z except that all complex infinities (even those with one infinite part and one NaN
part) project to positive infinity on the real axis. If z has an infinite part, then cproj(z) is
equivalent to
INFINITY + I * copysign(0.0, cimag(z))

So there you have it.

Return Value
Returns the projection of z onto a Riemann sphere.

Example
Fingers crossed this is a remotely sane example…
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3 #include <math.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 double complex x = 1 + 2 * I;
8

9 double complex y = cproj(x);

10

11 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

12

13 x = INFINITY + 2 * I;
14 y = cproj(x);
15

16 printf("Result: %f + %fi\n", creal(y), cimag(y));

17 }

Output:
Result: 1.000000 + 2.000000i
Result: inf + 0.000000i

43.23 creal(), crealf(), creall()

Returns the real part of a complex number

Synopsis
#include <complex.h>

double creal(double complex z);

float crealf(float complex z);

long double creall(long double complex z);

 Chapter 43. <complex.h> Complex Number Functionality 334

Description
Returns the real part of z.
As a footnote, the spec points out that any complex number x is part of the following equivalency:
x == creal(x) + cimag(x) * I;

Return Value
Returns the real part of z.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <complex.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double complex x = 1 + 2 * I;
7

8 double y = creal(x);
9

10 printf("Result: %f\n", y);

11 }

Output—just the real part:

Result: 1.000000

See Also
cimag()
Chapter 44

<ctype.h> Character Classification and

Conversion

Function Description
isalnum() Tests if a character is alphabetic or is a digit
isalpha() Returns true if a character is alphabetic
isblank() Tests if a character is word-separating whitespace
iscntrl() Test if a character is a control character
isdigit() Tests if a character is a digit
isgraph() Tests if the character is printable and not a space
islower() Tests if a character is lowercase
isprint() Tests if a character is printable
ispunct() Test if a character is punctuation
isspace() Test if a character is whitespace
isupper() Tests if a character is uppercase
isxdigit() Tests if a character is a hexadecimal digit
tolower() Convert a letter to lowercase
toupper() Convert a letter to uppercase

This collection of macros is good for testing characters to see if they’re of a certain class, such as alphabetic,
numeric, control characters, etc.
Surprisingly, they take int arguments instead of some kind of char. This is so you can feed EOF in for con-
venience if you have an integer representation of that. If not EOF, the value passed in has to be representable
in an unsigned char. Otherwise it’s (dun dun DUUNNNN) undefined behavior. So you can forget about
passing in your UTF-8 multibyte characters.
You can portably avoid this undefined behavior by casting the arguments to these functions to (unsigned
char). This is irksome and ugly, admittedly. The values in the basic character set are all safe to use since
they’re positive values that fit into an unsigned char.
Also, the behavior of these functions varies based on locale.
In many of the pages in this section, I give some examples. These are from the “C” locale, and might vary if
you’ve set a different locale.
Note that wide characters have their own set of classification functions, so don’t try to use these on wchar_ts.
Or else!

335
 Chapter 44. <ctype.h> Character Classification and Conversion 336

44.1 isalnum()
Tests if a character is alphabetic or is a digit

Synopsis
#include <ctype.h>

int isalnum(int c);

Description
Tests if a character is alphabetic (A-Z or a-z) or a digit (0-9).
Is equivalent to:
isalpha(c) || isdigit(c)

Return Value
Returns true if a character is alphabetic (A-Z or a-z) or a digit (0-9).

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <ctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 printf("%s\n", isalnum('a')? "yes": "no"); // yes
9 printf("%s\n", isalnum('B')? "yes": "no"); // yes
10 printf("%s\n", isalnum('5')? "yes": "no"); // yes
11 printf("%s\n", isalnum('?')? "yes": "no"); // no
12 }

See Also
isalpha(), isdigit()

44.2 isalpha()
Returns true if a character is alphabetic

Synopsis
#include <ctype.h>

int isalpha(int c);

 Chapter 44. <ctype.h> Character Classification and Conversion 337

Description
Returns true for alphabetic characters (A-Z or a-z).
Technically (and in the “C” locale) equivalent to:
isupper(c) || islower(c)

Extra super technically, because I know you’re dying for this to be extra unnecessarily complex, it can also
include some locale-specific characters for which this is true:
!iscntrl(c) && !isdigit(c) && !ispunct(c) && !isspace(c)

and this is true:

isupper(c) || islower(c)

Return Value
Returns true for alphabetic characters (A-Z or a-z).
Or for any of the other crazy stuff in the description, above.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <ctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 printf("%s\n", isalpha('a')? "yes": "no"); // yes
9 printf("%s\n", isalpha('B')? "yes": "no"); // yes
10 printf("%s\n", isalpha('5')? "yes": "no"); // no
11 printf("%s\n", isalpha('?')? "yes": "no"); // no
12 }

See Also
isalnum()

44.3 isblank()
Tests if a character is word-separating whitespace

Synopsis
#include <ctype.h>

int isblank(int c);

 Chapter 44. <ctype.h> Character Classification and Conversion 338

Description
True if the character is a whitespace character used to separate words in a single line.
For example, space (' ') or horizontal tab ('\t'). Other locales might define other blank characters.

Return Value
Returns true if the character is a whitespace character used to separate words in a single line.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <ctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 printf("%s\n", isblank(' ')? "yes": "no"); // yes
9 printf("%s\n", isblank('\t')? "yes": "no"); // yes
10 printf("%s\n", isblank('\n')? "yes": "no"); // no
11 printf("%s\n", isblank('a')? "yes": "no"); // no
12 printf("%s\n", isblank('?')? "yes": "no"); // no
13 }

See Also
isspace()

44.4 iscntrl()
Test if a character is a control character

Synopsis
#include <ctype.h>

int iscntrl(int c);

Description
A control character is a locale-specific non-printing character.
For the “C” locale, this means control characters are in the range 0x00 to 0x1F (the character right before
SPACE) and 0x7F (the DEL character).
Basically if it’s not an ASCII (or Unicode less than 128) printable character, it’s a control character in the
“C” locale.

Return Value
Returns true if c is a control character.
 Chapter 44. <ctype.h> Character Classification and Conversion 339

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <ctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 printf("%s\n", iscntrl('\t')? "yes": "no"); // yes (tab)
9 printf("%s\n", iscntrl('\n')? "yes": "no"); // yes (newline)
10 printf("%s\n", iscntrl('\r')? "yes": "no"); // yes (return)
11 printf("%s\n", iscntrl('\a')? "yes": "no"); // yes (bell)
12 printf("%s\n", iscntrl(' ')? "yes": "no"); // no
13 printf("%s\n", iscntrl('a')? "yes": "no"); // no
14 printf("%s\n", iscntrl('?')? "yes": "no"); // no
15 }

See Also
isgraph(), isprint()

44.5 isdigit()
Tests if a character is a digit

Synopsis
#include <ctype.h>

int isdigit(int c);

Description
Tests if c is a digit in the range 0-9.

Return Value
Returns true if the character is a digit, unsurprisingly.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <ctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 printf("%s\n", isdigit('0')? "yes": "no"); // yes
 Chapter 44. <ctype.h> Character Classification and Conversion 340

9 printf("%s\n", isdigit('5')? "yes": "no"); // yes

10 printf("%s\n", isdigit('a')? "yes": "no"); // no
11 printf("%s\n", isdigit('B')? "yes": "no"); // no
12 printf("%s\n", isdigit('?')? "yes": "no"); // no
13 }

See Also
isalnum(), isxdigit()

44.6 isgraph()
Tests if the character is printable and not a space

Synopsis
#include <ctype.h>

int isgraph(int c);

Description
Tests if c is any printable character that isn’t a space (' ').

Return Value
Returns true if c is any printable character that isn’t a space (' ').

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <ctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 printf("%s\n", isgraph('0')? "yes": "no"); // yes
9 printf("%s\n", isgraph('a')? "yes": "no"); // yes
10 printf("%s\n", isgraph('B')? "yes": "no"); // yes
11 printf("%s\n", isgraph('?')? "yes": "no"); // yes
12 printf("%s\n", isgraph(' ')? "yes": "no"); // no
13 printf("%s\n", isgraph('\n')? "yes": "no"); // no
14 }

See Also
iscntrl(), isprint()
 Chapter 44. <ctype.h> Character Classification and Conversion 341

44.7 islower()
Tests if a character is lowercase

Synopsis
#include <ctype.h>

int islower(int c);

Description
Tests if a character is lowercase, in the range a-z.
In other locales, there could be other lowercase characters. In all cases, to be lowercase, the following must
be true:
!iscntrl(c) && !isdigit(c) && !ispunct(c) && !isspace(c)

Return Value
Returns true if the character is lowercase.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <ctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 printf("%s\n", islower('c')? "yes": "no"); // yes
9 printf("%s\n", islower('0')? "yes": "no"); // no
10 printf("%s\n", islower('B')? "yes": "no"); // no
11 printf("%s\n", islower('?')? "yes": "no"); // no
12 printf("%s\n", islower(' ')? "yes": "no"); // no
13 }

See Also
isupper(), isalpha(), toupper(), tolower()

44.8 isprint()
Tests if a character is printable

Synopsis
 Chapter 44. <ctype.h> Character Classification and Conversion 342

#include <ctype.h>

int isprint(int c);

Description
Tests if a character is printable, including space (' '). So like isgraph(), except space isn’t left out in the
cold.

Return Value
Returns true if the character is printable, including space (' ').

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <ctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 printf("%s\n", isprint('c')? "yes": "no"); // yes
9 printf("%s\n", isprint('0')? "yes": "no"); // yes
10 printf("%s\n", isprint(' ')? "yes": "no"); // yes
11 printf("%s\n", isprint('\r')? "yes": "no"); // no
12 }

See Also
isgraph(), iscntrl()

44.9 ispunct()
Test if a character is punctuation

Synopsis
#include <ctype.h>

int ispunct(int c);

Description
Tests if a character is punctuation.
In the “C” locale, this means:
!isspace(c) && !isalnum(c)

In other locales, there could be other punctuation characters (but they also can’t be space or alphanumeric).
 Chapter 44. <ctype.h> Character Classification and Conversion 343

Return Value
True if the character is punctuation.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <ctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 printf("%s\n", ispunct(',')? "yes": "no"); // yes
9 printf("%s\n", ispunct('!')? "yes": "no"); // yes
10 printf("%s\n", ispunct('c')? "yes": "no"); // no
11 printf("%s\n", ispunct('0')? "yes": "no"); // no
12 printf("%s\n", ispunct(' ')? "yes": "no"); // no
13 printf("%s\n", ispunct('\n')? "yes": "no"); // no
14 }

See Also
isspace(), isalnum()

44.10 isspace()
Test if a character is whitespace

Synopsis
#include <ctype.h>

int isspace(int c);

Description
Tests if c is a whitespace character. These are:
• Space (' ')
• Formfeed ('\f')
• Newline ('\n')
• Carriage Return ('\r')
• Horizontal Tab ('\t')
• Vertical Tab ('\v')
Other locales might specify other whitespace characters. isalnum() is false for all whitespace characters.

Return Value
True if the character is whitespace.
 Chapter 44. <ctype.h> Character Classification and Conversion 344

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <ctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 printf("%s\n", isspace(' ')? "yes": "no"); // yes
9 printf("%s\n", isspace('\n')? "yes": "no"); // yes
10 printf("%s\n", isspace('\t')? "yes": "no"); // yes
11 printf("%s\n", isspace(',')? "yes": "no"); // no
12 printf("%s\n", isspace('!')? "yes": "no"); // no
13 printf("%s\n", isspace('c')? "yes": "no"); // no
14 }

See Also
isblank()

44.11 isupper()
Tests if a character is uppercase

Synopsis
#include <ctype.h>

int isupper(int c);

Description
Tests if a character is uppercase, in the range A-Z.
In other locales, there could be other uppercase characters. In all cases, to be uppercase, the following must
be true:
!iscntrl(c) && !isdigit(c) && !ispunct(c) && !isspace(c)

Return Value
Returns true if the character is uppercase.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <ctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
 Chapter 44. <ctype.h> Character Classification and Conversion 345

6 // testing this char

7 // v
8 printf("%s\n", isupper('B')? "yes": "no"); // yes
9 printf("%s\n", isupper('c')? "yes": "no"); // no
10 printf("%s\n", isupper('0')? "yes": "no"); // no
11 printf("%s\n", isupper('?')? "yes": "no"); // no
12 printf("%s\n", isupper(' ')? "yes": "no"); // no
13 }

See Also
islower(), isalpha(), toupper(), tolower()

44.12 isxdigit()
Tests if a character is a hexadecimal digit

Synopsis
#include <ctype.h>

int isxdigit(int c);

Description
Returns true if the character is a hexadecimal digit. Namely if it’s 0-9, a-f, or A-F.

Return Value
True if the character is a hexadecimal digit.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <ctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 printf("%s\n", isxdigit('B')? "yes": "no"); // yes
9 printf("%s\n", isxdigit('c')? "yes": "no"); // yes
10 printf("%s\n", isxdigit('2')? "yes": "no"); // yes
11 printf("%s\n", isxdigit('G')? "yes": "no"); // no
12 printf("%s\n", isxdigit('?')? "yes": "no"); // no
13 }

See Also
isdigit()
 Chapter 44. <ctype.h> Character Classification and Conversion 346

44.13 tolower()
Convert a letter to lowercase

Synopsis
#include <ctype.h>

int tolower(int c);

Description
If the character is uppercase (i.e. isupper(c) is true), this function returns the corresponding lowercase
letter.
Different locales might have different upper- and lowercase letters.

Return Value
Returns the lowercase value for an uppercase letter. If the letter isn’t uppercase, returns it unchanged.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <ctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // changing this char
7 // v
8 printf("%c\n", tolower('B')); // b (made lowercase!)
9 printf("%c\n", tolower('e')); // e (unchanged)
10 printf("%c\n", tolower('!')); // ! (unchanged)
11 }

See Also
toupper(), islower(), isupper()

44.14 toupper()
Convert a letter to uppercase

Synopsis
#include <ctype.h>

int toupper(int c);

 Chapter 44. <ctype.h> Character Classification and Conversion 347

Description
If the character is lower (i.e. islower(c) is true), this function returns the corresponding uppercase letter.
Different locales might have different upper- and lowercase letters.

Return Value
Returns the uppercase value for a lowercase letter. If the letter isn’t lowercase, returns it unchanged.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <ctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // changing this char
7 // v
8 printf("%c\n", toupper('B')); // B (unchanged)
9 printf("%c\n", toupper('e')); // E (made uppercase!)
10 printf("%c\n", toupper('!')); // ! (unchanged)
11 }

See Also
tolower(), islower(), isupper()
Chapter 45

<errno.h> Error Information

Variable Description
errno Holds the error status of the last call

This header defines a single variable1 , errno, that can be checked to see if an error has occurred.
errno is set to 0 on startup, but no library function sets it to 0. If you’re going to use solely it to check
for errors, set it to 0 before the call and then check it after. Not only that, but if there’s no error, all library
functions will leave the value of errno unchanged.
Often, though, you’ll get some error indication from the function you’re calling then check errno to see
what went wrong.
This is commonly used in conjunction with perror() to get a human-readable error message that corre-
sponds to the specific error.
Important Safety Tip: You should never make your own variable called errno—that’s undefined behavior.
Note that the C Spec defines less than a handful of values errno can take on. Unix defines a bunch more2 ,
as does Windows3 .

45.1 errno
Holds the error status of the last call

Synopsis
errno // Type is undefined, but it's assignable

Description
Indicates the error status of the last call (note that not all calls will set this value).

1
Really it’s just required to be a modifiable lvalue, so not necessarily a variable. But you can treat it as such.
2
https://man.archlinux.org/man/errno.3.en
3
https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/cpp/c-runtime-library/errno-constants?view=msvc-160

348
 Chapter 45. <errno.h> Error Information 349

Value Description
0 No error
EDOM Domain error (from math)
EILSEQ Encoding error (from character conversion)
ERANGE Range error (from math)

If you’re doing a number of math functions, you might come across EDOM or ERANGE.
With multibyte/wide character conversion functions, you might see EILSEQ.
And your system might define any other number of values that errno could be set to, all of which will begin
with the letter E.
Fun Fact: you can use EDOM, EILSEQ, and ERANGE with preprocessor directives such as #ifdef. But, frankly,
I’m not sure why you’d do that other than to test their existence.

Example
The following prints an error message, since passing 2.0 to acos() is outside the function’s domain.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3 #include <errno.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 double x;
8

9 errno = 0; // Make sure this is clear before the call

10

11 x = acos(2.0); // Invalid argument to acos()

12

13 if (errno == EDOM)
14 perror("acos");
15 else
16 printf("Answer is %f\n", x);
17

18 return 0;
19 }

Output:
acos: Numerical argument out of domain

The following prints an error message (on my system), since passing 1e+30 to exp() produces a result that’s
outside the range of a double.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3 #include <errno.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 double x;
8

9 errno = 0; // Make sure this is clear before the call

 Chapter 45. <errno.h> Error Information 350

10

11 x = exp(1e+30); // Pass in some too-huge number

12

13 if (errno == ERANGE)
14 perror("exp");
15 else
16 printf("Answer is %f\n", x);
17

18 return 0;
19 }

Output:
exp: Numerical result out of range

This example tries to convert an invalid character into a wide character, failing. This sets errno to EILSEQ.
We then use perror() to print an error message.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <string.h>
3 #include <wchar.h>
4 #include <errno.h>
5 #include <locale.h>
6

7 int main(void)
8 {
9 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
10

11 char *bad_str = "\xff"; // Probably invalid char in this locale

12 wchar_t wc;
13 size_t result;
14 mbstate_t ps;
15

16 memset(&ps, 0, sizeof ps);

17

18 result = mbrtowc(&wc, bad_str, 1, &ps);

19

20 if (result == (size_t)(-1))
21 perror("mbrtowc"); // mbrtowc: Illegal byte sequence
22 else
23 printf("Converted to L'%lc'\n", wc);
24

25 return 0;
26 }

Output:
mbrtowc: Invalid or incomplete multibyte or wide character

See Also
perror(), mbrtoc16(), c16rtomb(), mbrtoc32(), c32rtomb(), fgetwc(), fputwc(), mbrtowc(),
wcrtomb(), mbsrtowcs(), wcsrtombs(), <math.h>,
Chapter 46

<fenv.h> Floating Point Exceptions and

Environment

Function Description
feclearexcept() Clear floating point exceptions
fegetexceptflag() Save the floating point exception flags
fesetexceptflag() Restore the floating point exception flags
feraiseexcept() Raise a floating point exception through software
fetestexcept() Test to see if an exception has occurred
fegetround() Get the rounding direction
fesetround() Set the rounding direction
fegetenv() Save the entire floating point environment
fesetenv() Restore the entire floating point environment
feholdexcept() Save floating point state and install non-stop mode
feupdateenv() Restore floating point environment and apply recent exceptions

46.1 Types and Macros

There are two types defined in this header:

Type Description
fenv_t The entire floating point environment
fexcept_t A set of floating point exceptions

The “environment” can be thought of as the status at this moment of the floating point processing system:
this includes the exceptions, rounding, etc. It’s an opaque type, so you won’t be able to access it directly, and
it must be done through the proper functions.
If the functions in question exist on your system (they might not be!), then you’ll also have these macros
defined to represent different exceptions:

Macro Description
FE_DIVBYZERO Division by zero
FE_INEXACT Result was not exact, was rounded

351
Chapter 46. <fenv.h> Floating Point Exceptions and Environment 352

Macro Description
FE_INVALID Domain error
FE_OVERFLOW Numeric overflow
FE_UNDERFLOW Numeric underflow
FE_ALL_EXCEPT All of the above combined

The idea is that you can bitwise-OR these together to represent multiple exceptions, e.g. FE_INVALID|FE_OVERFLOW.
The functions, below, that have an excepts parameter will take these values.
See <math.h> for which functions raise which exceptions and when.

46.2 Pragmas
Normally C is free to optimize all kinds of stuff that might cause the flags to not look like you might expect.
So if you’re going to use this stuff, be sure to set this pragma:
#pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON

If you do this at global scope, it remains in effect until you turn it off:
#pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS OFF

If you do it in block scope, it has to come before any statements or declarations. In this case, it has effect
until the block ends (or until it is explicitly turned off.)
A caveat: this program isn’t supported on either of the compilers I have (gcc and clang) as of this writing,
so though I have built the code, below, it’s not particularly well-tested.

46.3 feclearexcept()
Clear floating point exceptions

Synopsis
#include <fenv.h>

int feclearexcept(int excepts);

Description
If a floating point exception has occurred, this function can clear it.
Set excepts to a bitwise-OR list of exceptions to clear.
Passing 0 has no effect.

Return Value
Returns 0 on success and non-zero on failure.
 Chapter 46. <fenv.h> Floating Point Exceptions and Environment 353

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3 #include <fenv.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
8

9 double f = sqrt(-1);
10

11 int r = feclearexcept(FE_INVALID);
12

13 printf("%d %f\n", r, f);

14 }

See Also
feraiseexcept(), fetestexcept()

46.4 fegetexceptflag() fesetexceptflag()

Save or restore the floating point exception flags

Synopsis
#include <fenv.h>

int fegetexceptflag(fexcept_t *flagp, int excepts);

int fesetexceptflag(fexcept_t *flagp, int excepts);

Description
Use these functions to save or restore the current floating point environment in a variable.
Set excepts to the set of exceptions you want to save or restore the state of. Setting it to FE_ALL_EXCEPT
will save or restore the entire state.
Note that fexcept_t is an opaque type—you don’t know what’s in it.
excepts can be set to zero for no effect.

Return Value
Returns 0 on success or if excepts is zero.
Returns non-zero on failure.
 Chapter 46. <fenv.h> Floating Point Exceptions and Environment 354

Example
This program √saves the state (before any error has happened), then deliberately causes a domain error by
trying to take −1.
After that, it restores the floating point state to before the error had occurred, thereby clearing it.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3 #include <fenv.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
8

9 fexcept_t flag;
10

11 fegetexceptflag(&flag, FE_ALL_EXCEPT); // Save state

12

13 double f = sqrt(-1); // I imagine this won't work

14 printf("%f\n", f); // "nan"
15

16 if (fetestexcept(FE_INVALID))
17 printf("1: Domain error\n"); // This prints!
18 else
19 printf("1: No domain error\n");
20

21 fesetexceptflag(&flag, FE_ALL_EXCEPT); // Restore to before error

22

23 if (fetestexcept(FE_INVALID))
24 printf("2: Domain error\n");
25 else
26 printf("2: No domain error\n"); // This prints!
27 }

46.5 feraiseexcept()
Raise a floating point exception through software

Synopsis
#include <fenv.h>

int feraiseexcept(int excepts);

Description
This attempts to raise a floating point exception as if it had happened.
You can specify multiple exceptions to raise.
If either FE_UNDERFLOW or FE_OVERFLOW is raised, C might also raise FE_INEXACT.
 Chapter 46. <fenv.h> Floating Point Exceptions and Environment 355

If either FE_UNDERFLOW or FE_OVERFLOW is raised at the same time as FE_INEXACT, then FE_UNDERFLOW or
FE_OVERFLOW will be raised before FE_INEXACT behind the scenes.

The order the other exceptions are raised is undefined.

Return Value
Returns 0 if all the exceptions were raised or if excepts is 0.
Returns non-zero otherwise.

Example
This code deliberately raises a division-by-zero exception and then detects it.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3 #include <fenv.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
8

9 feraiseexcept(FE_DIVBYZERO);
10

11 if (fetestexcept(FE_DIVBYZERO) == FE_DIVBYZERO)
12 printf("Detected division by zero\n"); // This prints!!
13 else
14 printf("This is fine.\n");
15 }

See Also
feclearexcept(), fetestexcept()

46.6 fetestexcept()
Test to see if an exception has occurred

Synopsis
#include <fenv.h>

int fetestexcept(int excepts);

Description
Put the exceptions you want to test in excepts, bitwise-ORing them together.

Return Value
Returns the bitwise-OR of the exceptions that have been raised.
 Chapter 46. <fenv.h> Floating Point Exceptions and Environment 356

Example
This code deliberately raises a division-by-zero exception and then detects it.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3 #include <fenv.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
8

9 feraiseexcept(FE_DIVBYZERO);
10

11 if (fetestexcept(FE_DIVBYZERO) == FE_DIVBYZERO)
12 printf("Detected division by zero\n"); // This prints!!
13 else
14 printf("This is fine.\n");
15 }

See Also
feclearexcept(), feraiseexcept()

46.7 fegetround() fesetround()

Get or set the rounding direction

Synopsis
#include <fenv.h>

int fegetround(void);

int fesetround(int round);

Description
Use these to get or set the rounding direction used by a variety of math functions.
Basically when a function “rounds” a number, it wants to know how to do it. By default, it does it how we
tend to expect: if the fractional part is less than 0.5, it rounds down closer to zero, otherwise up farther from
zero.

Macro Description
FE_TONEAREST Round to the nearest whole number, the default
FE_TOWARDZERO Round toward zero always
FE_DOWNWARD Round toward the next lesser whole number
FE_UPWARD Round toward the next greater whole number

Some implementations don’t support rounding. If it does, the above macros will be defined.
 Chapter 46. <fenv.h> Floating Point Exceptions and Environment 357

Note that the round() function is always “to-nearest” and doesn’t pay attention to the rounding mode.

Return Value
fegetround() returns the current rounding direction, or a negative value on error.

fesetround() returns zero on success, or non-zero on failure.

Example
This rounds some numbers
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3 #include <fenv.h>
4

5 // Helper function to print the rounding mode

6 const char *rounding_mode_str(int mode)
7 {
8 switch (mode) {
9 case FE_TONEAREST: return "FE_TONEAREST";
10 case FE_TOWARDZERO: return "FE_TOWARDZERO";
11 case FE_DOWNWARD: return "FE_DOWNWARD";
12 case FE_UPWARD: return "FE_UPWARD";
13 }
14

15 return "Unknown";
16 }
17

18 int main(void)
19 {
20 #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
21

22 int rm;
23

24 rm = fegetround();
25

26 printf("%s\n", rounding_mode_str(rm)); // Print current mode

27 printf("%f %f\n", rint(2.1), rint(2.7)); // Try rounding
28

29 fesetround(FE_TOWARDZERO); // Set the mode

30

31 rm = fegetround();
32

33 printf("%s\n", rounding_mode_str(rm)); // Print it

34 printf("%f %f\n", rint(2.1), rint(2.7)); // Try it now!
35 }

Output:
FE_TONEAREST
2.000000 3.000000
FE_TOWARDZERO
2.000000 2.000000
 Chapter 46. <fenv.h> Floating Point Exceptions and Environment 358

See Also
nearbyint(), nearbyintf(), nearbyintl(), rint(), rintf(), rintl(), lrint(), lrintf(),
lrintl(), llrint(), llrintf(), llrintl()

46.8 fegetenv() fesetenv()

Save or restore the entire floating point environment

Synopsis
#include <fenv.h>

int fegetenv(fenv_t *envp);

int fesetenv(const fenv_t *envp);

Description
You can save the environment (exceptions, rounding direction, etc.) by calling fegetenv() and restore it
with fesetenv().
Use this if you want to restore the state after a function call, i.e. hide from the caller that some floating point
exceptions or changes occurred.

Return Value
fegetenv() and fesetenv() return 0 on success, and non-zero otherwise.

Example
This example saves the environment, messes with the rounding and exceptions, then restores it. After the
environment is restored, we see that the rounding is back to default and the exception is cleared.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3 #include <fenv.h>
4

5 void show_status(void)
6 {
7 printf("Rounding is FE_TOWARDZERO: %d\n",
8 fegetround() == FE_TOWARDZERO);
9

10 printf("FE_DIVBYZERO is set: %d\n",

11 fetestexcept(FE_DIVBYZERO) != 0);
12 }
13

14 int main(void)
15 {
16 #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
17

18 fenv_t env;
19

20 fegetenv(&env); // Save the environment

 Chapter 46. <fenv.h> Floating Point Exceptions and Environment 359

21

22 fesetround(FE_TOWARDZERO); // Change rounding

23 feraiseexcept(FE_DIVBYZERO); // Raise an exception
24

25 show_status();
26

27 fesetenv(&env); // Restore the environment

28

29 show_status();
30 }

Output:
Rounding is FE_TOWARDZERO: 1
FE_DIVBYZERO is set: 1
Rounding is FE_TOWARDZERO: 0
FE_DIVBYZERO is set: 0

See Also
feholdexcept(), feupdateenv()

46.9 feholdexcept()
Save floating point state and install non-stop mode

Synopsis
#include <fenv.h>

int feholdexcept(fenv_t *envp);

Description
This is just like fegetenv() except that it updates the current environment to be in non-stop mode, namely
it won’t halt on any exceptions.
It remains in this state until you restore the state with fesetenv() or feupdateenv().

Return Value
Example
This example saves the environment and goes into non-stop mode, messes with the rounding and exceptions,
then restores it. After the environment is restored, we see that the rounding is back to default and the exception
is cleared. We’ll also be out of non-stop mode.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3 #include <fenv.h>
4

5 void show_status(void)
6 {
 Chapter 46. <fenv.h> Floating Point Exceptions and Environment 360

7 printf("Rounding is FE_TOWARDZERO: %d\n",

8 fegetround() == FE_TOWARDZERO);
9

10 printf("FE_DIVBYZERO is set: %d\n",

11 fetestexcept(FE_DIVBYZERO) != 0);
12 }
13

14 int main(void)
15 {
16 #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
17

18 fenv_t env;
19

20 // Save the environment and don't stop on exceptions

21 feholdexcept(&env);
22

23 fesetround(FE_TOWARDZERO); // Change rounding

24 feraiseexcept(FE_DIVBYZERO); // Raise an exception
25

26 show_status();
27

28 fesetenv(&env); // Restore the environment

29

30 show_status();
31 }

See Also
fegetenv(), fesetenv(), feupdateenv()

46.10 feupdateenv()
Restore floating point environment and apply recent exceptions

Synopsis
#include <fenv.h>

int feupdateenv(const fenv_t *envp);

Description
This is like fesetenv() except that it modifies the passed-in environment so that it is updated with excep-
tions that have happened in the meantime.
So let’s say you had a function that might raise exceptions, but you wanted to hide those in the caller. One
option might be to:
1. Save the environment with fegetenv() or feholdexcept().
2. Do whatever you do that might raise exceptions.
3. Restore the environment with fesetenv(), thereby hiding the exceptions that happened in step 2.
 Chapter 46. <fenv.h> Floating Point Exceptions and Environment 361

But that hides all exceptions. What if you just wanted to hide some of them? You could use feupdateenv()
like this:
1. Save the environment with fegetenv() or feholdexcept().
2. Do whatever you do that might raise exceptions.
3. Call feclearexcept() to clear the exceptions you want to hide from the caller.
4. Call feupdateenv() to restore the previous environment and update it with the other exceptions that
have occurred.
So it’s like a more capable way of restoring the environment than simply fegetenv()/fesetenv().

Return Value
Returns 0 on success, non-zero otherwise.

Example
This program saves state, raises some exceptions, then clears one of the exceptions, then restores and updates
the state.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3 #include <fenv.h>
4

5 void show_status(void)
6 {
7 printf("FE_DIVBYZERO: %d\n", fetestexcept(FE_DIVBYZERO) != 0);
8 printf("FE_INVALID : %d\n", fetestexcept(FE_INVALID) != 0);
9 printf("FE_OVERFLOW : %d\n\n", fetestexcept(FE_OVERFLOW) != 0);
10 }
11

12 int main(void)
13 {
14 #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
15

16 fenv_t env;
17

18 feholdexcept(&env); // Save the environment

19

20 // Pretend some bad math happened here:

21 feraiseexcept(FE_DIVBYZERO); // Raise an exception
22 feraiseexcept(FE_INVALID); // Raise an exception
23 feraiseexcept(FE_OVERFLOW); // Raise an exception
24

25 show_status();
26

27 feclearexcept(FE_INVALID);
28

29 feupdateenv(&env); // Restore the environment

30

31 show_status();
32 }

In the output, at first we have no exceptions. Then we have the three we raised. Then after we restore/update
the environment, we see the one we cleared (FE_INVALID) hasn’t been applied:
Chapter 46. <fenv.h> Floating Point Exceptions and Environment 362

FE_DIVBYZERO: 0
FE_INVALID : 0
FE_OVERFLOW : 0

FE_DIVBYZERO: 1
FE_INVALID : 1
FE_OVERFLOW : 1

FE_DIVBYZERO: 1
FE_INVALID : 0
FE_OVERFLOW : 1

See Also
fegetenv(), fesetenv(), feholdexcept(), feclearexcept()
Chapter 47

<float.h> Floating Point Limits

Macro Minimum Magnitude Description

FLT_ROUNDS Current rounding mode
FLT_EVAL_METHOD Types used for evaluation
FLT_HAS_SUBNORM Subnormal support for float
DBL_HAS_SUBNORM Subnormal support for double
LDBL_HAS_SUBNORM Subnormal support for long double
FLT_RADIX 2 Floating point radix (base)
FLT_MANT_DIG Number of base FLT_RADIX digits in a float
DBL_MANT_DIG Number of base FLT_RADIX digits in a double
LDBL_MANT_DIG Number of base FLT_RADIX digits in a long double
FLT_DECIMAL_DIG 6 Number of decimal digits required to encode a float
DBL_DECIMAL_DIG 10 Number of decimal digits required to encode a double
LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG 10 Number of decimal digits required to encode a long
double
DECIMAL_DIG 10 Number of decimal digits required to encode the the
widest floating point number supported
FLT_DIG 6 Number of decimal digits that can be safely stored in a
float
DBL_DIG 10 Number of decimal digits that can be safely stored in a
double
LDBL_DIG 10 Number of decimal digits that can be safely stored in a
long double
FLT_MIN_EXP FLT_RADIX to the FLT_MIN_EXP-1 power is the smallest
normalized float
DBL_MIN_EXP FLT_RADIX to the DBL_MIN_EXP-1 power is the smallest
normalized double
LDBL_MIN_EXP FLT_RADIX to the LDBL_MIN_EXP-1 power is the
smallest normalized long double
FLT_MIN_10_EXP -37 Minimum exponent such that 10 to this number is a
normalized float
DBL_MIN_10_EXP -37 Minimum exponent such that 10 to this number is a
normalized double
LDBL_MIN_10_EXP -37 Minimum exponent such that 10 to this number is a
normalized long_double
FLT_MAX_EXP FLT_RADIX to the FLT_MAX_EXP-1 power is the largest
finite float

363
Chapter 47. <float.h> Floating Point Limits 364

Macro Minimum Magnitude Description

DBL_MAX_EXP FLT_RADIX to the DBL_MAX_EXP-1 power is the largest
finite double
LDBL_MAX_EXP FLT_RADIX to the LDBL_MAX_EXP-1 power is the largest
finite long double
FLT_MAX_10_EXP -37 Minimum exponent such that 10 to this number is a finite
float
DBL_MAX_10_EXP -37 Minimum exponent such that 10 to this number is a finite
double
LDBL_MAX_10_EXP -37 Minimum exponent such that 10 to this number is a finite
long_double
FLT_MAX 1E+37 Largest finite float
DBL_MAX 1E+37 Largest finite double
LDBL_MAX 1E+37 Largest finite long double

Macro Maximum Value Description

FLT_EPSILON 1E-5 Difference between 1 and the next biggest representable
float
DBL_EPSILON 1E-9 Difference between 1 and the next biggest representable
double
LDBL_EPSILON 1E-9 Difference between 1 and the next biggest representable
long double
FLT_MIN 1E-37 Minimum positive normalized float
DBL_MIN 1E-37 Minimum positive normalized double
LDBL_MIN 1E-37 Minimum positive normalized long double
FLT_TRUE_MIN 1E-37 Minimum positive float
DBL_TRUE_MIN 1E-37 Minimum positive double
LDBL_TRUE_MIN 1E-37 Minimum positive long double

The minimum and maximum values here are from the spec—they should what you can at least expect across
all platforms. Your super dooper machine might do better, still!

47.1 Background
The spec allows a lot of leeway when it comes to how C represents floating point numbers. This header file
spells out the limits on those numbers.
It gives a model that can describe any floating point number that I know you’re going to absolutely love. It
looks like this:
𝑝
𝑥 = 𝑠𝑏𝑒 ∑ 𝑓𝑘 𝑏−𝑘 , 𝑒𝑚𝑖𝑛 ≤ 𝑒 ≤ 𝑒𝑚𝑎𝑥
𝑘=1

where:

Variable Meaning
𝑠 Sign, −1 or 1
𝑏 Base (radix), probably 2 on your system
𝑒 Exponent
𝑝 Precision: how many base-𝑏 digits in the number
Chapter 47. <float.h> Floating Point Limits 365

Variable Meaning
𝑓𝑘 The individual digits of the number, the significand

But let’s blissfully ignore all that for a second.

Let’s assume your computer uses base 2 for it’s floating point (it probably does). And that in the example
below the 1s-and-0s numbers are in binary, and the rest are in decimal.
The short of it is you could have floating point numbers like shown in this example:
−0.10100101 × 25 = −10100.101 = −20.625
That’s your fractional part multiplied by the base to the exponent’s power. The exponent controls where the
decimal point is. It “floats” around!

47.2 FLT_ROUNDS Details

This tells you the rounding mode. It can be changed with a call to fesetround().

Mode Description
-1 Indeterminable
0 Toward zero
1 To nearest
2 Toward positive infinity
3 Toward negative infinity… and beyond!

Unlike every other macro in this here header, FLT_ROUNDS might not be a constant expression.

47.3 FLT_EVAL_METHOD Details

This basically tells you how floating point values are promoted to different types in expressions.

Method Description
-1 Indeterminable
0 Evaluate all operations and constants to the precision of their respective types
1 Evaluate float and double operations as double and long double ops as long
double
2 Evaluate all operations and constants as long double

47.4 Subnormal Numbers

The macros FLT_HAS_SUBNORM, DBL_HAS_SUBNORM, and LDBL_HAS_SUBNORM all let you know if those types
support subnormal numbers1 .

Value Description
-1 Indeterminable
0 Subnormals not supported for this type

1
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Subnormal_number
 Chapter 47. <float.h> Floating Point Limits 366

Value Description
1 Subnormals supported for this type

47.5 How Many Decimal Places Can I Use?

It depends on what you want to do.
The safe thing is if you never use more than FLT_DIG base-10 digits in your float, you’re good. (Same for
DBL_DIG and LDBL_DIG for their types.)

And by “use” I mean print out, have in code, read from the keyboard, etc.
You can print out that many decimal places with printf() and the %g format specifier:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <float.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 float pi = 3.1415926535897932384626433832795028841971;
7

8 // With %g or %G, the precision refers to the number of significant

9 // digits:
10

11 printf("%.*g\n", FLT_DIG, pi); // For me: 3.14159

12

13 // But %f prints too many, since the precision is the number of

14 // digits to the right of the decimal--it doesn't count the digits
15 // to the left of it:
16

17 printf("%.*f\n", FLT_DIG, pi); // For me: 3.14159... 3 ???

18 }

That’s the end, but stay tuned for the exciting conclusion of “How Many Decimal Places Can I Use?”
Because base 10 and base 2 (your typical FLT_RADIX) don’t mix very well, you can actually have more than
FLT_DIG in your float; the bits of storage go out a little farther. But these might round in a way you don’t
expect.
But if you want to convert a floating point number to base 10 and then be able to convert it back again to
the exact same floating point number, you’ll need FLT_DECIMAL_DIG digits from your float to make sure
you get those extra bits of storage represented. (And DBL_DECIMAL_DIG and LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG for those
corresponding types.)
Here’s some example output that shows how the value stored might have some extra decimal places at the
end.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3 #include <assert.h>
4 #include <float.h>
5

6 int main(void)
7 {
8 printf("FLT_DIG = %d\n", FLT_DIG);
9 printf("FLT_DECIMAL_DIG = %d\n\n", FLT_DECIMAL_DIG);
 Chapter 47. <float.h> Floating Point Limits 367

10

11 assert(FLT_DIG == 6); // Code below assumes this

12

13 for (float x = 0.123456; x < 0.12346; x += 0.000001) {

14 printf("As written: %.*g\n", FLT_DIG, x);
15 printf("As stored: %.*g\n\n", FLT_DECIMAL_DIG, x);
16 }
17 }

And the output on my machine, starting at 0.123456 and incrementing by 0.000001 each time:
FLT_DIG = 6
FLT_DECIMAL_DIG = 9

As written: 0.123456
As stored: 0.123456001

As written: 0.123457
As stored: 0.123457

As written: 0.123458
As stored: 0.123457998

As written: 0.123459
As stored: 0.123458996

As written: 0.12346
As stored: 0.123459995

You can see that the value stored isn’t always the value we’re expecting since base-2 can’t represent all
base-10 fractions exactly. The best it can do is store more places and then round.
Also notice that even though we tried to stop the for loop before 0.123460, it actually ran including that
value since the stored version of that number was 0.123459995, which is still less than 0.123460.
Aren’t floating point numbers fun?

47.6 Comprehensive Example

Here’s a program that prints out the details for a particular machine:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <float.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("FLT_RADIX: %d\n", FLT_RADIX);
7 printf("FLT_ROUNDS: %d\n", FLT_ROUNDS);
8 printf("FLT_EVAL_METHOD: %d\n", FLT_EVAL_METHOD);
9 printf("DECIMAL_DIG: %d\n\n", DECIMAL_DIG);
10

11 printf("FLT_HAS_SUBNORM: %d\n", FLT_HAS_SUBNORM);

12 printf("FLT_MANT_DIG: %d\n", FLT_MANT_DIG);
13 printf("FLT_DECIMAL_DIG: %d\n", FLT_DECIMAL_DIG);
14 printf("FLT_DIG: %d\n", FLT_DIG);
15 printf("FLT_MIN_EXP: %d\n", FLT_MIN_EXP);
 Chapter 47. <float.h> Floating Point Limits 368

16 printf("FLT_MIN_10_EXP: %d\n", FLT_MIN_10_EXP);

17 printf("FLT_MAX_EXP: %d\n", FLT_MAX_EXP);
18 printf("FLT_MAX_10_EXP: %d\n", FLT_MAX_10_EXP);
19 printf("FLT_MIN: %.*e\n", FLT_DECIMAL_DIG, FLT_MIN);
20 printf("FLT_MAX: %.*e\n", FLT_DECIMAL_DIG, FLT_MAX);
21 printf("FLT_EPSILON: %.*e\n", FLT_DECIMAL_DIG, FLT_EPSILON);
22 printf("FLT_TRUE_MIN: %.*e\n\n", FLT_DECIMAL_DIG, FLT_TRUE_MIN);
23

24 printf("DBL_HAS_SUBNORM: %d\n", DBL_HAS_SUBNORM);

25 printf("DBL_MANT_DIG: %d\n", DBL_MANT_DIG);
26 printf("DBL_DECIMAL_DIG: %d\n", DBL_DECIMAL_DIG);
27 printf("DBL_DIG: %d\n", DBL_DIG);
28 printf("DBL_MIN_EXP: %d\n", DBL_MIN_EXP);
29 printf("DBL_MIN_10_EXP: %d\n", DBL_MIN_10_EXP);
30 printf("DBL_MAX_EXP: %d\n", DBL_MAX_EXP);
31 printf("DBL_MAX_10_EXP: %d\n", DBL_MAX_10_EXP);
32 printf("DBL_MIN: %.*e\n", DBL_DECIMAL_DIG, DBL_MIN);
33 printf("DBL_MAX: %.*e\n", DBL_DECIMAL_DIG, DBL_MAX);
34 printf("DBL_EPSILON: %.*e\n", DBL_DECIMAL_DIG, DBL_EPSILON);
35 printf("DBL_TRUE_MIN: %.*e\n\n", DBL_DECIMAL_DIG, DBL_TRUE_MIN);
36

37 printf("LDBL_HAS_SUBNORM: %d\n", LDBL_HAS_SUBNORM);

38 printf("LDBL_MANT_DIG: %d\n", LDBL_MANT_DIG);
39 printf("LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG: %d\n", LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG);
40 printf("LDBL_DIG: %d\n", LDBL_DIG);
41 printf("LDBL_MIN_EXP: %d\n", LDBL_MIN_EXP);
42 printf("LDBL_MIN_10_EXP: %d\n", LDBL_MIN_10_EXP);
43 printf("LDBL_MAX_EXP: %d\n", LDBL_MAX_EXP);
44 printf("LDBL_MAX_10_EXP: %d\n", LDBL_MAX_10_EXP);
45 printf("LDBL_MIN: %.*Le\n", LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG, LDBL_MIN);
46 printf("LDBL_MAX: %.*Le\n", LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG, LDBL_MAX);
47 printf("LDBL_EPSILON: %.*Le\n", LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG, LDBL_EPSILON);
48 printf("LDBL_TRUE_MIN: %.*Le\n\n", LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG, LDBL_TRUE_MIN);
49

50 printf("sizeof(float): %zu\n", sizeof(float));

51 printf("sizeof(double): %zu\n", sizeof(double));
52 printf("sizeof(long double): %zu\n", sizeof(long double));
53 }

And here’s the output on my machine:

FLT_RADIX: 2
FLT_ROUNDS: 1
FLT_EVAL_METHOD: 0
DECIMAL_DIG: 21

FLT_HAS_SUBNORM: 1
FLT_MANT_DIG: 24
FLT_DECIMAL_DIG: 9
FLT_DIG: 6
FLT_MIN_EXP: -125
FLT_MIN_10_EXP: -37
FLT_MAX_EXP: 128
FLT_MAX_10_EXP: 38
Chapter 47. <float.h> Floating Point Limits 369

FLT_MIN: 1.175494351e-38
FLT_MAX: 3.402823466e+38
FLT_EPSILON: 1.192092896e-07
FLT_TRUE_MIN: 1.401298464e-45

DBL_HAS_SUBNORM: 1
DBL_MANT_DIG: 53
DBL_DECIMAL_DIG: 17
DBL_DIG: 15
DBL_MIN_EXP: -1021
DBL_MIN_10_EXP: -307
DBL_MAX_EXP: 1024
DBL_MAX_10_EXP: 308
DBL_MIN: 2.22507385850720138e-308
DBL_MAX: 1.79769313486231571e+308
DBL_EPSILON: 2.22044604925031308e-16
DBL_TRUE_MIN: 4.94065645841246544e-324

LDBL_HAS_SUBNORM: 1
LDBL_MANT_DIG: 64
LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG: 21
LDBL_DIG: 18
LDBL_MIN_EXP: -16381
LDBL_MIN_10_EXP: -4931
LDBL_MAX_EXP: 16384
LDBL_MAX_10_EXP: 4932
LDBL_MIN: 3.362103143112093506263e-4932
LDBL_MAX: 1.189731495357231765021e+4932
LDBL_EPSILON: 1.084202172485504434007e-19
LDBL_TRUE_MIN: 3.645199531882474602528e-4951

sizeof(float): 4
sizeof(double): 8
sizeof(long double): 16
 Chapter 48

<inttypes.h> More Integer

Conversions

Function Description
imaxabs() Compute the absolute value of an intmax_t
imaxdiv() Compute the quotient and remainder of intmax_ts
strtoimax() Convert strings to type intmax_t
strtoumax() Convert strings to type uintmax_t
wcstoimax() Convert wide strings to type intmax_t
wcstoumax() Convert wide strings to type uintmax_t

This header does conversions to maximum sized integers, division with maximum sized integers, and also
provides format specifiers for printf() and scanf() for a variety of types defined in <stdint.h>.
The header <stdint.h> is included by this one.

48.1 Macros
These are to help with printf() and scanf() when you use a type such as int_least16_t… what format
specifiers do you use?
Let’s start with printf()—all these macros start with PRI and then are followed by the format specifier
you’d typically use for that type. Lastly, the number of bits is added on.
For example, the format specifier for a 64-bit integer is PRId64—the d is because you usually print integers
with "%d".
An unsigned 16-bit integer could be printed with PRIu16.
These macros expand to string literals. We can take advantage of the fact that C automatically concatenates
neighboring string literals and use these specifiers like this:
1 #include <stdio.h> // for printf()
2 #include <inttypes.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 int16_t x = 32;
7

370
 Chapter 48. <inttypes.h> More Integer Conversions 371

8 printf("The value is %" PRId16 "!\n", x);

9 }

There’s nothing magical happening on line 8, above. Indeed, if I print out the value of the macro:
printf("%s\n", PRId16);

we get this on my system:

hd

which is a printf() format specifier meaning “short signed integer” .

So back to line 8, after string literal concatenation, it’s just as if I’d typed:
8 printf("The value is %hd!\n", x);

Here’s a table of all the macros you can use for printf() format specifiers… substitute the number of bits
for N, usually 8, 16, 32, or 64.

PRIdN PRIdLEASTN PRIdFASTN PRIdMAX PRIdPTR

PRIiN PRIiLEASTN PRIiFASTN PRIiMAX PRIiPTR
PRIoN PRIoLEASTN PRIoFASTN PRIoMAX PRIoPTR
PRIuN PRIuLEASTN PRIuFASTN PRIuMAX PRIuPTR
PRIxN PRIxLEASTN PRIxFASTN PRIxMAX PRIxPTR
PRIXN PRIXLEASTN PRIXFASTN PRIXMAX PRIXPTR

Note again how the lowercase center letter represents the usual format specifiers you’d pass to printf(): d,
i, o, u, x, and X.

And we have a similar set of macros for scanf() for reading in these various types:

SCNdN SCNdLEASTN SCNdFASTN SCNdMAX SCNdPTR

SCNiN SCNiLEASTN SCNiFASTN SCNiMAX SCNiPTR
SCNoN SCNoLEASTN SCNoFASTN SCNoMAX SCNoPTR
SCNuN SCNuLEASTN SCNuFASTN SCNuMAX SCNuPTR
SCNxN SCNxLEASTN SCNxFASTN SCNxMAX SCNxPTR

The rule is that for each type defined in <stdint.h> there will be corresponding printf() and scanf()
macros defined here.

48.2 imaxabs()
Compute the absolute value of an intmax_t

Synopsis
#include <inttypes.h>

intmax_t imaxabs(intmax_t j);

 Chapter 48. <inttypes.h> More Integer Conversions 372

Description
When you need the absolute value of the biggest integer type on the system, this is the function for you.
The spec notes that if the absolute value of the number cannot be represented, the behavior is undefined.
This would happen if you tried to take the absolute value of the smallest possible negative number in a
two’s-complement system.

Return Value
Returns the absolute value of the input, |𝑗|.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <inttypes.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 intmax_t j = -3490;
7

8 printf("%jd\n", imaxabs(j)); // 3490

9 }

See Also
fabs()

48.3 imaxdiv()
Compute the quotient and remainder of intmax_ts

Synopsis
#include <inttypes.h>

imaxdiv_t imaxdiv(intmax_t numer, intmax_t denom);

Description
When you want to do integer division and remainder in a single operation, this function will do it for you.
It computes numer/denom and numer%denom and returns the result in a structure of type imaxdiv_t.
This structure has two imaxdiv_t fields, quot and rem, that you use to retrieve the sought-after values.

Return Value
Returns an imaxdiv_t containing the quotient and remainder of the operation.
 Chapter 48. <inttypes.h> More Integer Conversions 373

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <inttypes.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 intmax_t numer = INTMAX_C(3490);
7 intmax_t denom = INTMAX_C(17);
8

9 imaxdiv_t r = imaxdiv(numer, denom);

10

11 printf("Quotient: %jd, remainder: %jd\n", r.quot, r.rem);

12 }

Output:
Quotient: 205, remainder: 5

See Also
remquo()

48.4 strtoimax() strtoumax()

Convert strings to types intmax_t and uintmax_t

Synopsis
#include <inttypes.h>

intmax_t strtoimax(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr,

int base);

uintmax_t strtoumax(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr,

int base);

Description
These work just like the strtol() family of functions, except they return an intmax_t or uintmax_t.
See the strtol() reference page for details.

Return Value
Returns the converted string as an intmax_t or uintmax_t.
If the result is out of range, the returned value will be INTMAX_MAX, INTMAX_MIN, or UINTMAX_MAX, as
appropriate. And the errno variable will be set to ERANGE.
 Chapter 48. <inttypes.h> More Integer Conversions 374

Example
The following example converts a base-10 number to an intmax_t. Then it attempts to convert an invalid
base-2 number, catching the error.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <inttypes.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 intmax_t r;
7 char *endptr;
8

9 // Valid base-10 number

10 r = strtoimax("123456789012345", &endptr, 10);
11

12 if (*endptr != '\0')
13 printf("Invalid digit: %c\n", *endptr);
14 else
15 printf("Value is %jd\n", r);
16

17 // The following binary number contains an invalid digit

18 r = strtoimax("0100102010101101", &endptr, 2);
19

20 if (*endptr != '\0')
21 printf("Invalid digit: %c\n", *endptr);
22 else
23 printf("Value is %jd\n", r);
24 }

Output:
Value is 123456789012345
Invalid digit: 2

See Also
strtol(), errno

48.5 wcstoimax() wcstoumax()

Convert wide strings to types intmax_t and uintmax_t

Synopsis
#include <stddef.h> // for wchar_t
#include <inttypes.h>

intmax_t wcstoimax(const wchar_t * restrict nptr,

wchar_t ** restrict endptr, int base);

uintmax_t wcstoumax(const wchar_t * restrict nptr,

wchar_t ** restrict endptr, int base);
 Chapter 48. <inttypes.h> More Integer Conversions 375

Description
These work just like the wcstol() family of functions, except they return an intmax_t or uintmax_t.
See the wcstol() reference page for details.

Return Value
Returns the converted wide string as an intmax_t or uintmax_t.
If the result is out of range, the returned value will be INTMAX_MAX, INTMAX_MIN, or UINTMAX_MAX, as
appropriate. And the errno variable will be set to ERANGE.

Example
The following example converts a base-10 number to an intmax_t. Then it attempts to convert an invalid
base-2 number, catching the error.
1 #include <wchar.h>
2 #include <inttypes.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 intmax_t r;
7 wchar_t *endptr;
8

9 // Valid base-10 number

10 r = wcstoimax(L"123456789012345", &endptr, 10);
11

12 if (*endptr != '\0')
13 wprintf(L"Invalid digit: %lc\n", *endptr);
14 else
15 wprintf(L"Value is %jd\n", r);
16

17 // The following binary number contains an invalid digit

18 r = wcstoimax(L"0100102010101101", &endptr, 2);
19

20 if (*endptr != '\0')
21 wprintf(L"Invalid digit: %lc\n", *endptr);
22 else
23 wprintf(L"Value is %jd\n", r);
24 }

Value is 123456789012345
Invalid digit: 2

See Also
wcstol(), errno
 Chapter 49

<iso646.h> Alternative Operator

Spellings

ISO-646 is a character encoding standard that’s very similar to ASCII. But it’s missing a few notable charac-
ters, like |, ^, and ~.
Since these are operators or parts of operators in C, this header file defines a number of macros you can use in
case those characters aren’t found on your keyboard. (And also C++ can use these same alternate spellings.)

Operator <iso646.h> equivalent

&& and
&= and_eq
& bitand
| bitor
~ compl
! not
!= not_eq
|| or
|= or_eq
^ xor
^= xor_eq

Interestingly, there is no eq for ==, and & and ! are included despite being in ISO-646.
Example usage:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <iso646.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 int x = 12;
7 int y = 30;
8

9 if (x == 12 and y not_eq 40)

10 printf("Now we know.\n");
11 }

I’ve personally never seen this file included, but I’m sure it gets used from time to time.

376
Chapter 50

<limits.h> Numeric Limits

Important note: the “minimum magnitude” in the table below is the minimum allowed by the spec. It’s very
likely that the values on your bad-ass system exceed those, below.

Macro Minimum Magnitude Description

CHAR_BIT 8 Number of bits in a byte
SCHAR_MIN -127 Minimum value of a signed char
SCHAR_MAX 127 Maximum value of a signed char
UCHAR_MAX 255 Maximum value of an unsigned char1
CHAR_MIN 0 or SCHAR_MIN More detail below
CHAR_MAX SCHAR_MAX or UCHAR_MAX More detail below
MB_LEN_MAX 1 Maximum number of bytes in a multibyte character on any
locale
SHRT_MIN -32767 Minimum value of a short
SHRT_MAX 32767 Maximum value of a short
USHRT_MAX 65535 Maximum value of an unsigned short
INT_MIN -32767 Minimum vale of an int
INT_MAX 32767 Maximum value of an int
UINT_MAX 65535 Maximum value of an unsigned int
LONG_MIN -2147483647 Minimum value of a long
LONG_MAX 2147483647 Maximum value of a long
ULONG_MAX 4294967295 Maximum value of an unsigned long
LLONG_MIN -9223372036854775807 Minimum value of a long long
LLONG_MAX 9223372036854775807 Maximum value of a long long
ULLONG_MAX 18446744073709551615 Maximum value of an unsigned long long

50.1 CHAR_MIN and CHAR_MAX

When it comes to the CHAR_MIN and CHAR_MAX macros, it all depends on if your char type is signed or
unsigned by default. Remember that C leaves that up to the implementation? No? Well, it does.
So if it’s signed, the values of CHAR_MIN and CHAR_MAX are the same as SCHAR_MIN and SCHAR_MAX.
And if it’s unsigned, the values of CHAR_MIN and CHAR_MAX are the same as 0 and UCHAR_MAX.
1
The minimum value of an unsigned char is 0. Same fo an unsigned short and unsigned long. Or any unsigned type, for
that matter.

377
 Chapter 50. <limits.h> Numeric Limits 378

Side benefit: you can tell at runtime if the system has signed or unsigned chars by checking to see if CHAR_MIN
is 0.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <limits.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("chars are %ssigned\n", CHAR_MIN == 0? "un": "");
7 }

On my system, chars are signed.

50.2 Choosing the Correct Type

If you want to be super portable, choose a type you know will be at least as big as you need by the table,
above.
That said, a lot of code, for better or (likely) worse, assumes ints are 32-bits, when in actuality it’s only
guaranteed to be 16.
If you need a guaranteed bit size, check out the int_leastN_t types in <stdint.h>.

50.3 Whither Two’s Complement?

If you were looking closely and have a priori knowledge of the matter, you might have thought I erred in the
minimum values of the macros, above.
“short goes from 32767 to -32767? Shouldn’t it go to -32768?”
No, I have it right. The spec list the minimum magnitudes for those macros, and some old-timey systems
might have used a different encoding for their signed values that could only go that far.
Virtually every modern system uses Two’s Complement2 for signed numbers, and those would go from 32767
to -32768 for a short. Your system probably does, too.

50.4 Demo Program

Here’s a program to print out the values of the macros:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <limits.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("CHAR_BIT = %d\n", CHAR_BIT);
7 printf("SCHAR_MIN = %d\n", SCHAR_MIN);
8 printf("SCHAR_MAX = %d\n", SCHAR_MAX);
9 printf("UCHAR_MAX = %d\n", UCHAR_MAX);
10 printf("CHAR_MIN = %d\n", CHAR_MIN);
11 printf("CHAR_MAX = %d\n", CHAR_MAX);
12 printf("MB_LEN_MAX = %d\n", MB_LEN_MAX);
13 printf("SHRT_MIN = %d\n", SHRT_MIN);
14 printf("SHRT_MAX = %d\n", SHRT_MAX);

2
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Two%27s_complement
 Chapter 50. <limits.h> Numeric Limits 379

15 printf("USHRT_MAX = %u\n", USHRT_MAX);

16 printf("INT_MIN = %d\n", INT_MIN);
17 printf("INT_MAX = %d\n", INT_MAX);
18 printf("UINT_MAX = %u\n", UINT_MAX);
19 printf("LONG_MIN = %ld\n", LONG_MIN);
20 printf("LONG_MAX = %ld\n", LONG_MAX);
21 printf("ULONG_MAX = %lu\n", ULONG_MAX);
22 printf("LLONG_MIN = %lld\n", LLONG_MIN);
23 printf("LLONG_MAX = %lld\n", LLONG_MAX);
24 printf("ULLONG_MAX = %llu\n", ULLONG_MAX);
25 }

On my 64-bit Intel system with clang, this outputs:

CHAR_BIT = 8
SCHAR_MIN = -128
SCHAR_MAX = 127
UCHAR_MAX = 255
CHAR_MIN = -128
CHAR_MAX = 127
MB_LEN_MAX = 6
SHRT_MIN = -32768
SHRT_MAX = 32767
USHRT_MAX = 65535
INT_MIN = -2147483648
INT_MAX = 2147483647
UINT_MAX = 4294967295
LONG_MIN = -9223372036854775808
LONG_MAX = 9223372036854775807
ULONG_MAX = 18446744073709551615
LLONG_MIN = -9223372036854775808
LLONG_MAX = 9223372036854775807
ULLONG_MAX = 18446744073709551615

Looks like my system probably uses two’s-complement encoding for signed numbers, my chars are signed,
and my ints are 32-bit.
Chapter 51

<locale.h> locale handling

Function Description
setlocale() Set the locale
localeconv() Get information about the current locale

The “locale” is the details of how the program should run given its physical location on the planet.
For example, in one locale, a unit of money might be printed as $123, and in another €123.
Or one locale might use ASCII encoding and another UTF-8 encoding.
By default, the program runs in the “C” locale. It has a basic set of characters with a single-byte encoding.
If you try to print UTF-8 characters in the C locale, nothing will print. You have to switch to a proper locale.

51.1 setlocale()
Set the locale

Synopsis
#include <locale.h>

char *setlocale(int category, const char *locale);

Description
Sets the locale for the given category.
Category is one of the following:

Category Description
LC_ALL All of the following categories
LC_COLLATE Affects the strcoll() and strxfrm() functions
LC_CTYPE Affects the functions in <ctype.h>

380
 Chapter 51. <locale.h> locale handling 381

Category Description
LC_MONETARY Affects the monetary information returned from
localeconv()
LC_NUMERIC Affects the decimal point for formatted I/O and
formatted string functions, and the monetary
information returned from localeconv()
LC_TIME Affects the strftime() and wcsftime() functions

And there are three portable things you can pass in for locale; any other string passed in is implementation-
defined and non-portable.

Locale Description
"C" Set the program to the C locale
"" (Empty string) Set the program to the native locale
of this system
NULL Change nothing; just return the current locale
Other Set the program to an implementation-defined
locale

The most common call, I’d wager, is this:

// Set all locale settings to the local, native locale

setlocale(LC_ALL, "");

Handily, setlocale() returns the locale that was just set, so you could see what the actual locale is on your
system.

Return Value
On success, returns a pointer to the string representing the current locale. You may not modify this string,
and it might be changed by subsequent calls to setlocale().
On failure, returns NULL.

Example
Here we get the current locale. Then we set it to the native locale, and print out what that is.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <locale.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char *loc;
7

8 // Get the current locale

9 loc = setlocale(LC_ALL, NULL);
10

11 printf("Starting locale: %s\n", loc);

12

13 // Set (and get) the locale to native locale

14 loc = setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
 Chapter 51. <locale.h> locale handling 382

15

16 printf("Native locale: %s\n", loc);

17 }

Output on my system:
Starting locale: C
Native locale: en_US.UTF-8

Note that my native locale (on a Linux box) might be different from what you see.
Nevertheless, I can explicitly set it on my system without a problem, or to any other locale I have installed:
13 loc = setlocale(LC_ALL, "en_US.UTF-8"); // Non-portable

But again, your system might have different locales defined.

See Also
localeconv(), strcoll(), strxfrm(), strftime(), wcsftime(), printf(), scanf(), <ctype.h>

51.2 localeconv()
Get information about the current locale

Synopsis
#include <locale.h>

struct lconv *localeconv(void);

Description
This function just returns a pointer to a struct lconv, but is still a bit of a powerhouse.
The returned structure contains tons of information about the locale. Here are the fields of struct lconv
and their meanings.
First, some conventions. In the field names, below, a _p_ means “positive”, and _n_ means “negative”, and
int_ means “international”. Though a lot of these are type char or char*, most (or the strings they point
to) are actually treated as integers1 .
Before we go further, know that CHAR_MAX (from <limits.h>) is the maximum value that can be held in a
char. And that many of the following char values use that to indicate the value isn’t available in the given
locale.

Field Description
char *mon_decimal_point Decimal pointer character for money, e.g. ".".
char *mon_thousands_sep Thousands separator character for money, e.g. ",".
char *mon_grouping Grouping description for money (see below).
char *positive_sign Positive sign for money, e.g. "+" or "".
char *negative_sign Negative sign for money, e.g. "-".
char *currency_symbol Currency symbol, e.g. "$".
1
Remember that char is just a byte-sized integer.
Chapter 51. <locale.h> locale handling 383

Field Description
char frac_digits When printing monetary amounts, how many digits to print past the
decimal point, e.g. 2.
char p_cs_precedes 1 if the currency_symbol comes before the value for a non-negative
monetary amount, 0 if after.
char n_cs_precedes 1 if the currency_symbol comes before the value for a negative
monetary amount, 0 if after.
char p_sep_by_space Determines the separation of the currency symbol from the value for
non-negative amounts (see below).
char n_sep_by_space Determines the separation of the currency symbol from the value for
negative amounts (see below).
char p_sign_posn Determines the positive_sign position for non-negative values.
char p_sign_posn Determines the positive_sign position for negative values.
char *int_curr_symbol International currency symbol, e.g. "USD ".
char int_frac_digits International value for frac_digits.
char int_p_cs_precedes International value for p_cs_precedes.
char int_n_cs_precedes International value for n_cs_precedes.
char int_p_sep_by_space International value for p_sep_by_space.
char int_n_sep_by_space International value for n_sep_by_space.
char int_p_sign_posn International value for p_sign_posn.
char int_n_sign_posn International value for n_sign_posn.

Even though many of these have char type, the value stored within is meant to be accessed as an integer.
All the sep_by_space variants deal with spacing around the currency sign. Valid values are:

Value Description
0 No space between currency symbol and value.
1 Separate the currency symbol (and sign, if any) from the value with a space.
2 Separate the sign symbol from the currency symbol (if adjacent) with a space,
otherwise separate the sign symbol from the value with a space.

The sign_posn variants are determined by the following values:

Value Description
0 Put parens around the value and the currency symbol.
1 Put the sign string in front of the currency symbol and value.
2 Put the sign string after the currency symbol and value.
3 Put the sign string directly in front of the currency symbol.
4 Put the sign string directly behind the currency symbol.

For more information on the mon_grouping field, see “Monetary Digit Grouping” in the “Locale and Inter-
nationalization” chapter.

Return Value
Returns a pointer to the structure containing the locale information.
The program may not modify this structure.
Subsequent calls to localeconv() may overwrite this structure, as might calls to setlocale() with
LC_ALL, LC_MONETARY, or LC_NUMERIC.
 Chapter 51. <locale.h> locale handling 384

Example
Here’s a program to print the locale information for the native locale.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <locale.h>
3 #include <limits.h> // for CHAR_MAX
4

5 void print_grouping(char *mg)

6 {
7 int done = 0;
8

9 while (!done) {
10 if (*mg == CHAR_MAX)
11 printf("CHAR_MAX ");
12 else
13 printf("%c ", *mg + '0');
14 done = *mg == CHAR_MAX || *mg == 0;
15 mg++;
16 }
17 }
18

19 int main(void)
20 {
21 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
22

23 struct lconv *lc = localeconv();

24

25 printf("mon_decimal_point : %s\n", lc->mon_decimal_point);

26 printf("mon_thousands_sep : %s\n", lc->mon_thousands_sep);
27 printf("mon_grouping : ");
28 print_grouping(lc->mon_grouping);
29 printf("\n");
30 printf("positive_sign : %s\n", lc->positive_sign);
31 printf("negative_sign : %s\n", lc->negative_sign);
32 printf("currency_symbol : %s\n", lc->currency_symbol);
33 printf("frac_digits : %c\n", lc->frac_digits);
34 printf("p_cs_precedes : %c\n", lc->p_cs_precedes);
35 printf("n_cs_precedes : %c\n", lc->n_cs_precedes);
36 printf("p_sep_by_space : %c\n", lc->p_sep_by_space);
37 printf("n_sep_by_space : %c\n", lc->n_sep_by_space);
38 printf("p_sign_posn : %c\n", lc->p_sign_posn);
39 printf("p_sign_posn : %c\n", lc->p_sign_posn);
40 printf("int_curr_symbol : %s\n", lc->int_curr_symbol);
41 printf("int_frac_digits : %c\n", lc->int_frac_digits);
42 printf("int_p_cs_precedes : %c\n", lc->int_p_cs_precedes);
43 printf("int_n_cs_precedes : %c\n", lc->int_n_cs_precedes);
44 printf("int_p_sep_by_space: %c\n", lc->int_p_sep_by_space);
45 printf("int_n_sep_by_space: %c\n", lc->int_n_sep_by_space);
46 printf("int_p_sign_posn : %c\n", lc->int_p_sign_posn);
47 printf("int_n_sign_posn : %c\n", lc->int_n_sign_posn);
48 }

Output on my system:
Chapter 51. <locale.h> locale handling 385

mon_decimal_point : .
mon_thousands_sep : ,
mon_grouping : 3 3 0
positive_sign :
negative_sign : -
currency_symbol : $
frac_digits : 2
p_cs_precedes : 1
n_cs_precedes : 1
p_sep_by_space : 0
n_sep_by_space : 0
p_sign_posn : 1
p_sign_posn : 1
int_curr_symbol : USD
int_frac_digits : 2
int_p_cs_precedes : 1
int_n_cs_precedes : 1
int_p_sep_by_space: 1
int_n_sep_by_space: 1
int_p_sign_posn : 1
int_n_sign_posn : 1

See Also
setlocale()
Chapter 52

<math.h> Mathematics

Many of the following functions have float and long double variants as described below (e.g. pow(),
powf(), powl()). The float and long double variants are omitted from the following table to keep your
eyeballs from melting out.

Function Description
acos() Calculate the arc cosine of a number.
acosh() Compute arc hyperbolic cosine.
asin() Calculate the arc sine of a number.
asinh() Compute arc hyperbolic sine.
atan(), atan2() Calculate the arc tangent of a number.
atanh() Compute the arc hyperbolic tangent.
cbrt() Compute the cube root.
ceil() Ceiling—return the next whole number not smaller than the given number.
copysign() Copy the sign of one value into another.
cos() Calculate the cosine of a number.
cosh() Compute the hyperbolic cosine.
erf() Compute the error function of the given value.
erfc() Compute the complementary error function of a value.
exp() Compute 𝑒 raised to a power.
exp2() Compute 2 to a power.
expm1() Compute 𝑒𝑥 − 1.
fabs() Compute the absolute value.
fdim() Return the positive difference between two numbers clamped at 0.
floor() Compute the largest whole number not larger than the given value.
fma() Floating (AKA “Fast”) multiply and add.
fmax(), fmin() Return the maximum or minimum of two numbers.
fmod() Compute the floating point remainder.
fpclassify() Return the classification of a given floating point number.
frexp() Break a number into its fraction part and exponent (as a power of 2).
hypot() Compute the length of the hypotenuse of a triangle.
ilogb() Return the exponent of a floating point number.
isfinite() True if the number is not infinite or NaN.
isgreater() True if one argument is greater than another.
isgreatereequal() True if one argument is greater than or equal to another.
isinf() True if the number is infinite.
isless() True if one argument is less than another.
islesseequal() True if one argument is less than or equal to another.

386
Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 387

Function Description
islessgreater() Test if a floating point number is less than or greater than another.
isnan() True if the number is Not-a-Number.
isnormal() True if the number is normal.
isunordered() Macro returns true if either floating point argument is NaN.
ldexp() Multiply a number by an integral power of 2.
lgamma() Compute the natural logarithm of the absolute value of Γ(𝑥).
log() Compute the natural logarithm.
log10() Compute the log-base-10 of a number.
log2() Compute the base-2 logarithm of a number.
logb() Extract the exponent of a number given FLT_RADIX.
log1p() Compute the natural logarithm of a number plus 1.
lrint() Returns x rounded in the current rounding direction as an integer.
lround(), llround() Round a number in the good old-fashioned way, returning an integer.
modf() Extract the integral and fractional parts of a number.
nan() Return NAN.
nearbyint() Rounds a value in the current rounding direction.
nextafter() Get the next (or previous) representable floating point value.
nexttoward() Get the next (or previous) representable floating point value.
pow() Compute a value raised to a power.
remainder() Compute the remainder IEC 60559-style.
remquo() Compute the remainder and (some of the) quotient.
rint() Rounds a value in the current rounding direction.
round() Round a number in the good old-fashioned way.
scalbn(), scalbln() Efficiently compute 𝑥 × 𝑟𝑛 , where 𝑟 is FLT_RADIX.
signbit() Return the sign of a number.
sin() Calculate the sine of a number.
sqrt() Calculate the square root of a number.
tan() Calculate the tangent of a number.
tanh() Compute the hyperbolic tangent.
tgamma() Compute the gamma function, Γ(𝑥).
trunc() Truncate the fractional part off a floating point value.

It’s your favorite subject: Mathematics! Hello, I’m Doctor Math, and I’ll be making math FUN and EASY!
[vomiting sounds]
Ok, I know math isn’t the grandest thing for some of you out there, but these are merely functions that quickly
and easily do math you either know, want, or just don’t care about. That pretty much covers it.

52.1 Math Function Idioms

Many of these math functions exist in three forms, each corresponding to the argument and/or return types
the function uses, float, double, or long double.
The alternate form for float is made by appending f to the end of the function name.
The alternate form for long double is made by appending l to the end of the function name.
For example, the pow() function, which computes 𝑥𝑦 , exists in these forms:
double pow(double x, double y); // double
float powf(float x, float y); // float
long double powl(long double x, long double y); // long double
Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 388

Remember that parameters are given values as if you assigned into them. So if you pass a double to powf(),
it’ll choose the closest float it can to hold the double. If the double doesn’t fit, undefined behavior happens.

52.2 Math Types

We have two exciting new types in <math.h>:
• float_t
• double_t
The float_t type is at least as accurate as a float, and the double_t type is at least as accurate as a
double.

The idea with these types is they can represent the most efficient way of storing numbers for maximum speed.
Their actual types vary by implementation, but can be determined by the value of the FLT_EVAL_METHOD
macro.

FLT_EVAL_METHOD float_t type double_t type

0 float double
1 double double
2 long double long double
Other Implementation-defined Implementation-defined

For all defined values of FLT_EVAL_METHOD, float_t is the least-precise type used for all floating calcula-
tions.

52.3 Math Macros

There are actually a number of these defined, but we’ll cover most of them in their relevant reference sections,
below.
But here are a couple:
NAN represents Not-A-Number.

Defined in <float.h> is FLT_RADIX: the number base used by floating point numbers. This is commonly
2, but could be anything.

52.4 Math Errors

As we know, nothing can ever go wrong with math… except everything!
So there are just a couple errors that might occur when using some of these functions.
• Range errors mean that some result is beyond what can be stored in the result type.
• Domain errors mean that you’ve passed in an argument that doesn’t have a defined result for this
function.
• Pole errors mean that the limit of the function as 𝑥 approaches the given argument is infinite.
• Overflow errors are when the result is really large, but can’t be stored without incurring large roundoff
error.
• Underflow errors are like overflow errors, except with very small numbers.
Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 389

Now, the C math library can do a couple things when these errors occur:
• Set errno to some value, or…
• Raise a floating point exception.
Your system might vary on what happens. You can check it by looking at the value of the variable
math_errhandling. It will be equivalent to one of the following1 :

math_errhandling Description
MATH_ERRNO The system uses errno for math errors.
MATH_ERREXCEPT The system uses exceptions for math errors.
MATH_ERRNO | MATH_ERREXCEPT The system does both! (That’s a bitwise-OR!)

You are not allowed to change math_errhandling.

For a fuller description on how exceptions work and their meanings, see the <fenv.h> section.

52.5 Math Pragmas

In case you don’t remember, you can brush up on pragmas back in the C Preprocessor section.
But in a nutshell, they offer various ways to control the compiler’s behavior.
In this case, we have a pragma FP_CONTRACT that can be turned off and on.
What does it mean?
First of all, keep in mind that any operation in an expression can cause rounding error. So each step of the
expression can introduce more rounding error.
But what if the compiler knows a double secret way of taking the expression you wrote and converting it to
a single instruction that reduced the number of steps such that the intermediate rounding error didn’t occur?
Could it use it? I mean, the results would be different than if you let the rounding error settle each step of the
way…
Because the results would be different, you can tell the compiler if you want to allow it to do this or not.
If you want to allow it:
#pragma STDC FP_CONTRACT ON

and to disallow it:

#pragma STDC FP_CONTRACT OFF

If you do this at global scope, it stays at whatever state you set it to until you change it.
If you do it at block scope, it reverts to the value outside the block when the block ends.
The initial value of the FP_CONTRACT pragma varies from system to system.

52.6 fpclassify()
Return the classification of a given floating point number.
1
Though the system defines MATH_ERRNO as 1 and MATH_ERREXCEPT as 2, it’s best to always use their symbolic names. Just in case.
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 390

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

int fpclassify(any_floating_type x);

Description
What kind of entity does this floating point number represent? What are the options?
We’re used to floating point numbers being regular old things like 3.14 or 3490.0001.
But floating point numbers can also represent things like infinity. Or Not-A-Number (NAN). This function
will let you know which type of floating point number the argument is.
This is a macro, so you can use it with float, double, long double or anything similar.

Return Value
Returns one of these macros depending on the argument’s classification:

Classification Description
FP_INFINITE Number is infinite.
FP_NAN Number is Not-A-Number (NAN).
FP_NORMAL Just a regular number.
FP_SUBNORMAL Number is a sub-normal number.
FP_ZERO Number is zero.

A discussion of subnormal numbers is beyond the scope of the guide, and is something that most devs go
their whole lives without dealing with. In a nutshell, it’s a way to represent really small numbers that might
normally round down to zero. If you want to know more, see the Wikipedia page on denormal numbers2 .

Example
Print various number classifications.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 const char *get_classification(double n)

5 {
6 switch (fpclassify(n)) {
7 case FP_INFINITE: return "infinity";
8 case FP_NAN: return "not a number";
9 case FP_NORMAL: return "normal";
10 case FP_SUBNORMAL: return "subnormal";
11 case FP_ZERO: return "zero";
12 }
13

14 return "unknown";
15 }
16

17 int main(void)

2
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Denormal_number
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 391

18 {
19 printf(" 1.23: %s\n", get_classification(1.23));
20 printf(" 0.0: %s\n", get_classification(0.0));
21 printf("sqrt(-1): %s\n", get_classification(sqrt(-1)));
22 printf("1/tan(0): %s\n", get_classification(1/tan(0)));
23 printf(" 1e-310: %s\n", get_classification(1e-310)); // very small!
24 }

Output3 :
1.23: normal
0.0: zero
sqrt(-1): not a number
1/tan(0): infinity
1e-310: subnormal

See Also
isfinite(), isinf(), isnan(), isnormal(), signbit()

52.7 isfinite(), isinf(), isnan(), isnormal()

Return true if a number matches a classification.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

int isfinite(any_floating_type x);

int isinf(any_floating_type x);

int isnan(any_floating_type x);

int isnormal(any_floating_type x);

Description
These are helper macros to fpclassify(). Bring macros, they work on any floating point type.

Macro Description
isfinite() True if the number is not infinite or NaN.
isinf() True if the number is infinite.
isnan() True if the number is Not-a-Number.
isnormal() True if the number is normal.

For more superficial discussion on normal and subnormal numbers, see fpclassify().
3
This is on my system. Some systems will have different points at which numbers become subnormal, or they might not support
subnormal values at all.
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 392

Return Value
Returns non-zero for true, and zero for false.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf(" isfinite(1.23): %d\n", isfinite(1.23)); // 1
7 printf(" isinf(1/tan(0)): %d\n", isinf(1/tan(0))); // 1
8 printf(" isnan(sqrt(-1)): %d\n", isnan(sqrt(-1))); // 1
9 printf("isnormal(1e-310): %d\n", isnormal(1e-310)); // 0
10 }

See Also
fpclassify(), signbit(),

52.8 signbit()
Return the sign of a number.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

int signbit(any_floating_type x);

Description
This macro takes any floating point number and returns a value indicating the sign of the number, positive
or negative.

Return Value
Returns 1 if the sign is negative, otherwise 0.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("%d\n", signbit(3490.0)); // 0
7 printf("%d\n", signbit(-37.0)); // 1
8 }
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 393

See Also
fpclassify(), isfinite(), isinf(), isnan(), isnormal(), copysign()

52.9 acos(), acosf(), acosl()

Calculate the arc cosine of a number.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double acos(double x);

float acosf(float x);
long double acosl(long double x);

Description
Calculates the arc cosine of a number in radians. (That is, the value whose cosine is x.) The number must be
in the range -1.0 to 1.0.
For those of you who don’t remember, radians are another way of measuring an angle, just like degrees. To
convert from degrees to radians or the other way around, use the following code:
pi = 3.14159265358979;
degrees = radians * 180 / pi;
radians = degrees * pi / 180;

Return Value
Returns the arc cosine of x, unless x is out of range. In that case, errno will be set to EDOM and the return
value will be NaN. The variants return different types.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double acosx;
7 long double ldacosx;
8

9 acosx = acos(0.2);
10 ldacosx = acosl(0.3L);
11

12 printf("%f\n", acosx);
13 printf("%Lf\n", ldacosx);
14 }
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 394

See Also
asin(), atan(), atan2(), cos()

52.10 asin(), asinf(), asinl()

Calculate the arc sine of a number.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double asin(double x);

float asinf(float x);
long double asinl(long double x);

Description
Calculates the arc sine of a number in radians. (That is, the value whose sine is x.) The number must be in
the range -1.0 to 1.0.
For those of you who don’t remember, radians are another way of measuring an angle, just like degrees. To
convert from degrees to radians or the other way around, use the following code:
pi = 3.14159265358979;
degrees = radians * 180 / pi;
radians = degrees * pi / 180;

Return Value
Returns the arc sine of x, unless x is out of range. In that case, errno will be set to EDOM and the return
value will be NaN. The variants return different types.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double asinx;
7 long double ldasinx;
8

9 asinx = asin(0.2);
10 ldasinx = asinl(0.3L);
11

12 printf("%f\n", asinx);
13 printf("%Lf\n", ldasinx);
14 }
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 395

See Also
acos(), atan(), atan2(), sin()

52.11 atan(), atanf(), atanl(), atan2(), atan2f(), atan2l()

Calculate the arc tangent of a number.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double atan(double x);

float atanf(float x);
long double atanl(long double x);

double atan2(double y, double x);

float atan2f(float y, float x);
long double atan2l(long double y, long double x);

Description
Calculates the arc tangent of a number in radians. (That is, the value whose tangent is x.)
The atan2() variants are pretty much the same as using atan() with y/x as the argument…except that
atan2() will use those values to determine the correct quadrant of the result.

For those of you who don’t remember, radians are another way of measuring an angle, just like degrees. To
convert from degrees to radians or the other way around, use the following code:
pi = 3.14159265358979;
degrees = radians * 180 / pi;
radians = degrees * pi / 180;

Return Value
The atan() functions return the arc tangent of x, which will be between PI/2 and -PI/2. The atan2()
functions return an angle between PI and -PI.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double atanx;
7 long double ldatanx;
8

9 atanx = atan(0.7);
10 ldatanx = atanl(0.3L);
11
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 396

12 printf("%f\n", atanx);
13 printf("%Lf\n", ldatanx);
14

15 atanx = atan2(7, 10);

16 ldatanx = atan2l(3L, 10L);
17

18 printf("%f\n", atanx);
19 printf("%Lf\n", ldatanx);
20 }

See Also
tan(), asin(), atan()

52.12 cos(), cosf(), cosl()

Calculate the cosine of a number.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double cos(double x)
float cosf(float x)
long double cosl(long double x)

Description
Calculates the cosine of the value x, where x is in radians.
For those of you who don’t remember, radians are another way of measuring an angle, just like degrees. To
convert from degrees to radians or the other way around, use the following code:
pi = 3.14159265358979;
degrees = radians * 180 / pi;
radians = degrees * pi / 180;

Return Value
Returns the cosine of x. The variants return different types.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double cosx;
7 long double ldcosx;
8
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 397

9 cosx = cos(3490.0); // round and round we go!

10 ldcosx = cosl(3.490L);
11

12 printf("%f\n", cosx);
13 printf("%Lf\n", ldcosx);
14 }

See Also
sin(), tan(), acos()

52.13 sin(), sinf(), sinl()

Calculate the sine of a number.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double sin(double x);

float sinf(float x);
long double sinl(long double x);

Description
Calculates the sine of the value x, where x is in radians.
For those of you who don’t remember, radians are another way of measuring an angle, just like degrees. To
convert from degrees to radians or the other way around, use the following code:
pi = 3.14159265358979;
degrees = radians * 180 / pi;
radians = degrees * pi / 180;

Return Value
Returns the sine of x. The variants return different types.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double sinx;
7 long double ldsinx;
8

9 sinx = sin(3490.0); // round and round we go!

10 ldsinx = sinl(3.490L);
11
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 398

12 printf("%f\n", sinx);
13 printf("%Lf\n", ldsinx);
14 }

See Also
cos(), tan(), asin()

52.14 tan(), tanf(), tanl()

Calculate the tangent of a number.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double tan(double x)
float tanf(float x)
long double tanl(long double x)

Description
Calculates the tangent of the value x, where x is in radians.
For those of you who don’t remember, radians are another way of measuring an angle, just like degrees. To
convert from degrees to radians or the other way around, use the following code:
pi = 3.14159265358979;
degrees = radians * 180 / pi;
radians = degrees * pi / 180;

Return Value
Returns the tangent of x. The variants return different types.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double tanx;
7 long double ldtanx;
8

9 tanx = tan(3490.0); // round and round we go!

10 ldtanx = tanl(3.490L);
11

12 printf("%f\n", tanx);
13 printf("%Lf\n", ldtanx);
14 }
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 399

See Also
sin(), cos(), atan(), atan2()

52.15 acosh(), acoshf(), acoshl()

Compute arc hyperbolic cosine.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double acosh(double x);

float acoshf(float x);

long double acoshl(long double x);

Description
Trig lovers can rejoice! C has arc hyperbolic cosine!
These functions return the nonnegative acosh of x, which must be greater than or equal to 1.

Return Value
Returns the arc hyperbolic cosince in the range [0, +∞].

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("acosh 1.8 = %f\n", acosh(1.8)); // 1.192911
7 }

See Also
asinh()

52.16 asinh(), asinhf(), asinhl()

Compute arc hyperbolic sine.

Synopsis
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 400

#include <math.h>

double asinh(double x);

float asinhf(float x);

long double asinhl(long double x);

Description
Trig lovers can rejoice! C has arc hyperbolic sine!
These functions return the asinh of x.

Return Value
Returns the arc hyperbolic sine.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("asinh 1.8 = %f\n", asinh(1.8)); // 1.350441
7 }

See Also
acosh()

52.17 atanh(), atanhf(), atanhl()

Compute the arc hyperbolic tangent.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double atanh(double x);

float atanhf(float x);

long double atanhl(long double x);

Description
These functions compute the arc hyperbolic tangent of x, which must be in the range [−1, +1]. Passing
exactly −1 or +1 might result in a pole error.
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 401

Return Value
Returns the arc hyperbolic tangent of x.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("atanh 0.5 = %f\n", atanh(0.5)); // 0.549306
7 }

See Also
acosh(), asinh()

52.18 cosh(), coshf(), coshl()

Compute the hyperbolic cosine.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double cosh(double x);

float coshf(float x);

long double coshl(long double x);

Description
These functions predictably compute the hyperbolic cosine of x. A range error might occur if x is too large.

Return Value
Returns the hyperbolic cosine of x.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("cosh 0.5 = %f\n", cosh(0.5)); // 1.127626
7 }
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 402

See Also
sinh(), tanh()

52.19 sinh(), sinhf(), sinhl()

Compute the hyperbolic sine.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double sinh(double x);

float sinhf(float x);

long double sinhl(long double x);

Description
These functions predictably compute the hyperbolic sine of x. A range error might occur if x is too large.

Return Value
Returns the hyperbolic sine of x.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("sinh 0.5 = %f\n", sinh(0.5)); // 0.521095
7 }

See Also
sinh(), tanh()

52.20 tanh(), tanhf(), tanhl()

Compute the hyperbolic tangent.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 403

double tanh(double x);

float tanhf(float x);

long double tanhl(long double x);

Description
These functions predictably compute the hyperbolic tangent of x.
Mercifully, this is the last trig-related man page I’m going to write.

Return Value
Returns the hyperbolic tangent of x.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("tanh 0.5 = %f\n", tanh(0.5)); // 0.462117
7 }

See Also
cosh(), sinh()

52.21 exp(), expf(), expl()

Compute 𝑒 raised to a power.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double exp(double x);

float expf(float x);

long double expl(long double x);

Description
Compute 𝑒𝑥 where 𝑒 is Euler’s number4 .
The number 𝑒 is named after Leonard Euler, born April 15, 1707, who is responsible, among other things,
for making this reference page longer than it needed to be.
4
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/E_(mathematical_constant)
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 404

Return Value
Returns 𝑒𝑥 .

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("exp(1) = %f\n", exp(1)); // 2.718282
7 printf("exp(2) = %f\n", exp(2)); // 7.389056
8 }

See Also
exp2(), expm1(), pow(), log()

52.22 exp2(), exp2f(), exp2l()

Compute 2 to a power.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double exp2(double x);

float exp2f(float x);

long double exp2l(long double x);

Description
These functions raise 2 to a power. Very exciting, since computers are all about twos-to-powers!
These are likely to be faster than using pow() to do the same thing.
They support fractional exponents, as well.
A range error occurs if x is too large.

Return Value
exp2() returns 2𝑥 .

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 405

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("2^3 = %f\n", exp2(3)); // 2^3 = 8.000000
7 printf("2^8 = %f\n", exp2(8)); // 2^8 = 256.000000
8 printf("2^0.5 = %f\n", exp2(0.5)); // 2^0.5 = 1.414214
9 }

See Also
exp(), pow()

52.23 expm1(), expm1f(), expm1l()

Compute 𝑒𝑥 − 1.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double expm1(double x);

float expm1f(float x);

long double expm1l(long double x);

Description
This is just like exp() except—plot twist!–it computes that result minus one.
For more discussion about what 𝑒 is, see the exp() man page.
If x is giant, a range error might occur.
For small values of x near zero, expm1(x) might be more accurate than computing exp(x)-1.

Return Value
Returns 𝑒𝑥 − 1.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("%f\n", expm1(2.34)); // 9.381237
7 }
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 406

See Also
exp()

52.24 frexp(), frexpf(), frexpl()

Break a number into its fraction part and exponent (as a power of 2).

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double frexp(double value, int *exp);

float frexpf(float value, int *exp);

long double frexpl(long double value, int *exp);

Description
If you have a floating point number, you can break it into its fractional part and exponent part (as a power of
2).
For example, if you have the number 1234.56, this can be represented as a multiple of a power of 2 like so:
1234.56 = 0.6028125 × 211
And you can use this function to get the 0.6028125 and 11 parts of that equation.
As for why, I have a simple answer: I don’t know. I can’t find a use. K&R2 and everyone else I can find just
says how to use it, but not why you might want to.
The C99 Rationale document says:
The functions frexp, ldexp, and modf are primitives used by the remainder of the library.
There was some sentiment for dropping them for the same reasons that ecvt, fcvt, and gcvt
were dropped, but their adherents rescued them for general use. Their use is problematic: on
non-binary architectures, ldexp may lose precision and frexp may be inefficient.
So there you have it. If you need it.

Return Value
frexp() returns the fractional part of value in the range 0.5 (inclusive) to 1 (exclusive), or 0. And it stores
the exponent power-of-2 in the variable pointed to by exp.
If you pass in zero, the return value and the variable exp points to are both zero.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 407

6 double frac;
7 int expt;
8

9 frac = frexp(1234.56, &expt);

10 printf("1234.56 = %.7f x 2^%d\n", frac, expt);
11 }

Output:
1234.56 = 0.6028125 x 2^11

See Also
ldexp(), ilogb(), modf()

52.25 ilogb(), ilogbf(), ilogbl()

Return the exponent of a floating point number.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

int ilogb(double x);

int ilogbf(float x);

int ilogbl(long double x);

Description
This gives you the exponent of the given number… it’s a little weird, because the exponent depends on the
value of FLT_RADIX. Now, this is very often 2—but no guarantees!
It actually returns log𝑟 |𝑥| where 𝑟 is FLT_RADIX.
Domain or range errors might occur for invalid values of x, or for return values that are outside the range of
the return type.

Return Value
The exponent of the absolute value of the given number, depending on FLT_RADIX.
Specifically log𝑟 |𝑥| where 𝑟 is FLT_RADIX.
If you pass in 0, it’ll return FP_ILOGB0.
If you pass in infinity, it’ll return INT_MAX.
If you pass in NaN, it’ll return FP_ILOGBNAN.
The spec goes on to say that the value of FP_ILOGB0 will be either INT_MIN or -INT_MAX. And the value of
FP_ILOGBNAN shall be either INT_MAX or INT_MIN, if that’s useful in any way.
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 408

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("%d\n", ilogb(257)); // 8
7 printf("%d\n", ilogb(256)); // 8
8 printf("%d\n", ilogb(255)); // 7
9 }

See Also
frexp(), logb()

52.26 ldexp(), ldexpf(), ldexpl()

Multiply a number by an integral power of 2.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double ldexp(double x, int exp);

float ldexpf(float x, int exp);

long double ldexpl(long double x, int exp);

Description
These functions multiply the given number x by 2 raised to the exp power.

Return Value
Returns 𝑥 × 2𝑒𝑥𝑝 .

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("1 x 2^10 = %f\n", ldexp(1, 10));
7 printf("5.67 x 2^7 = %f\n", ldexp(5.67, 7));
8 }

Output:
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 409

1 x 2^10 = 1024.000000
5.67 x 2^7 = 725.760000

See Also
exp()

52.27 log(), logf(), logl()

Compute the natural logarithm.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double log(double x);

float logf(float x);

long double logl(long double x);

Description
Natural logarithms! And there was much rejoycing.
These compute the base-𝑒 logarithm of a number, log𝑒 𝑥, ln 𝑥.
In other words, for a given 𝑥, solves 𝑥 = 𝑒𝑦 for 𝑦.

Return Value
The base-𝑒 logarithm of the given value, log𝑒 𝑥, ln 𝑥.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 const double e = 2.718281828459045;
7

8 printf("%f\n", log(3490.2)); // 8.157714

9 printf("%f\n", log(e)); // 1.000000
10 }

See Also
exp(), log10(), log1p()
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 410

52.28 log10(), log10f(), log10l()

Compute the log-base-10 of a number.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double log10(double x);

float log10f(float x);

long double log10l(long double x);

Description
Just when you thought you might have to use Laws of Logarithms to compute this, here’s a function coming
out of the blue to save you.
These compute the base-10 logarithm of a number, log10 𝑥.
In other words, for a given 𝑥, solves 𝑥 = 10𝑦 for 𝑦.

Return Value
Returns the log base-10 of x, log10 𝑥.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("%f\n", log10(3490.2)); // 3.542850
7 printf("%f\n", log10(10)); // 1.000000
8 }

See Also
pow(), log()

52.29 log1p(), log1pf(), log1pl()

Compute the natural logarithm of a number plus 1.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double log1p(double x);

 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 411

float log1pf(float x);

long double log1pl(long double x);

Description
This computes log𝑒 (1 + 𝑥), ln(1 + 𝑥).
This works just like calling:
log(1 + x)

except it could be more accurate for small values of x.

So if your x is small magnitude, use this.

Return Value
Returns log𝑒 (1 + 𝑥), ln(1 + 𝑥).

Example
Compute some big and small logarithm values to see the difference between log1p() and log():
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <float.h> // for LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG
3 #include <math.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 printf("Big log1p() : %.*Lf\n", LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG-1, log1pl(9));
8 printf("Big log() : %.*Lf\n", LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG-1, logl(1 + 9));
9

10 printf("Small log1p(): %.*Lf\n", LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG-1, log1pl(0.01));

11 printf("Small log() : %.*Lf\n", LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG-1, logl(1 + 0.01));
12 }

Output on my system:
Big log1p() : 2.30258509299404568403
Big log() : 2.30258509299404568403
Small log1p(): 0.00995033085316808305
Small log() : 0.00995033085316809164

See Also
log()

52.30 log2(), log2f(), log2l()

Compute the base-2 logarithm of a number.
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 412

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double log2(double x);

float log2f(float x);

long double log2l(long double x);

Description
Wow! Were you thinking we were done with the logarithm functions? We’re only getting started!
This one computes log2 𝑥. That is, computes 𝑦 that satisfies 𝑥 = 2𝑦 .
Love me those powers of 2!

Return Value
Returns the base-2 logarithm of the given value, log2 𝑥.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("%f\n", log2(3490.2)); // 11.769094
7 printf("%f\n", log2(256)); // 8.000000
8 }

See Also
log()

52.31 logb(), logbf(), logbl()

Extract the exponent of a number given FLT_RADIX.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double logb(double x);

float logbf(float x);

long double logbl(long double x);

 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 413

Description
This function returns the whole number portion of the exponent of the number with radix FLT_RADIX, namely
the whole number portion log𝑟 |𝑥| where 𝑟 is FLT_RADIX. Fractional numbers are truncated.
If the number is subnormal5 , logb() treats it as if it were normalized.
If x is 0, there could be a domain error or pole error.

Return Value
This function returns the whole number portion of log𝑟 |𝑥| where 𝑟 is FLT_RADIX.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <float.h> // For FLT_RADIX
3 #include <math.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 printf("FLT_RADIX = %d\n", FLT_RADIX);
8 printf("%f\n", logb(3490.2));
9 printf("%f\n", logb(256));
10 }

Output:
FLT_RADIX = 2
11.000000
8.000000

See Also
ilogb()

52.32 modf(), modff(), modfl()

Extract the integral and fractional parts of a number.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double modf(double value, double *iptr);

float modff(float value, float *iptr);

long double modfl(long double value, long double *iptr);

5
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Denormal_number
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 414

Description
If you have a floating point number, like 123.456, this function will extract the integral part (123.0) and the
fractional part (0.456). It’s total coincidence that this is exactly the plot for the latest Jason Statham action
spectacular.
Both the integral part and fractional parts keep the sign of the passed in value.
The integral part is stored in the address pointed to by iptr.
See the note in frexp() regarding why this is in the library.

Return Value
These functions return the fractional part of the number. The integral part is stored in the address pointed to
by iptr. Both the integral and fractional parts preserve the sign of the passed-in value.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 void print_parts(double x)
5 {
6 double i, f;
7

8 f = modf(x, &i);
9

10 printf("Entire number : %f\n", x);

11 printf("Integral part : %f\n", i);
12 printf("Fractional part: %f\n\n", f);
13 }
14

15 int main(void)
16 {
17 print_parts(123.456);
18 print_parts(-123.456);
19 }

Output:
Entire number : 123.456000
Integral part : 123.000000
Fractional part: 0.456000

Entire number : -123.456000

Integral part : -123.000000
Fractional part: -0.456000

See Also
frexp()
Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 415

52.33 scalbn(), scalbnf(), scalbnl() scalbln(), scalblnf(),

scalblnl()
Efficiently compute 𝑥 × 𝑟𝑛 , where 𝑟 is FLT_RADIX.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double scalbn(double x, int n);

float scalbnf(float x, int n);

long double scalbnl(long double x, int n);

double scalbln(double x, long int n);

float scalblnf(float x, long int n);

long double scalblnl(long double x, long int n);

Description
These functions efficiently compute 𝑥 × 𝑟𝑛 , where 𝑟 is FLT_RADIX.
If FLT_RADIX happens to be 2 (no guarantees!), then this works like exp2().
The name of this function should have an obvious meaning to you. Clearly they all start with the prefix
“scalb” which means…
…OK, I confess! I have no idea what it means. My searches are futile!
But let’s look at the suffixes:

Suffix Meaning
n scalbn()—exponent n is an int
nf scalbnf()—float version of scalbn()
nl scalbnl()—long double version of scalbn()
ln scalbln()—exponent n is a long int
lnf scalblnf()—float version of scalbln()
lnl scalblnl()—long double version of scalbln()

So while I’m still in the dark about “scalb”, at least I have that part down.
A range error might occur for large values.

Return Value
Returns 𝑥 × 𝑟𝑛 , where 𝑟 is FLT_RADIX.

Example
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 416

1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3 #include <float.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 printf("FLT_RADIX = %d\n\n", FLT_RADIX);
8 printf("scalbn(3, 8) = %f\n", scalbn(2, 8));
9 printf("scalbnf(10.2, 20) = %f\n", scalbnf(10.2, 20));
10 }

Output on my system:
FLT_RADIX = 2

scalbn(3, 8) = 512.000000
scalbn(10.2, 20.7) = 10695475.200000

See Also
exp2(), pow()

52.34 cbrt(), cbrtf(), cbrtl()

Compute the cube root.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double cbrt(double x);

float cbrtf(float x);

long double cbrtl(long double x);

Description
√
Computes the cube root of x, 𝑥1/3 , 3
𝑥.

Return Value
√
Returns the cube root of x, 𝑥1/3 , 3
𝑥.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 417

6 printf("cbrt(1729.03) = %f\n", cbrt(1729.03));

7 }

Output:
cbrt(1729.03) = 12.002384

See Also
sqrt(), pow()

52.35 fabs(), fabsf(), fabsl()

Compute the absolute value.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double fabs(double x);

float fabsf(float x);

long double fabsl(long double x);

Description
These functions straightforwardly return the absolute value of x, that is |𝑥|.
If you’re rusty on your absolute values, all it means is that the result will be positive, even if x is negative.
It’s just strips negative signs off.

Return Value
Returns the absolute value of x, |𝑥|.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("fabs(3490.0) = %f\n", fabs(3490.0)); // 3490.000000
7 printf("fabs(-3490.0) = %f\n", fabs(3490.0)); // 3490.000000
8 }

See Also
abs(), copysign(), imaxabs()
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 418

52.36 hypot(), hypotf(), hypotl()

Compute the length of the hypotenuse of a triangle.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double hypot(double x, double y);

float hypotf(float x, float y);

long double hypotl(long double x, long double y);

Description
Pythagorean Theorem6 fans rejoice! This is the function you’ve been waiting for!
If you know the lengths of the two sides of a right triangle, x and y, you can compute the length of the
hypotenuse (the longest, diagonal side) with this function.
In particular, it computes the square root of the sum of the squares of the sides: √𝑥2 + 𝑦 2 .

Return Value
Returns the lenght of the hypotenuse of a right triangle with side lengths x and y: √𝑥2 + 𝑦2 .

Example
1 printf("%f\n", hypot(3, 4)); // 5.000000

See Also
sqrt()

52.37 pow(), powf(), powl()

Compute a value raised to a power.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double pow(double x, double y);

float powf(float x, float y);

long double powl(long double x, long double y);

6
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Pythagorean_theorem
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 419

Description
Computes x raised to the yth power: 𝑥𝑦 .
These arguments can be fractional.

Return Value
Returns x raised to the yth power: 𝑥𝑦 .
A domain error can occur if:
• x is a finite negative number and y is a finite non-integer
• x is zero and y is zero.
A domain error or pole error can occur if x is zero and y is negative.
A range error can occur for large values.

Example
1 printf("%f\n", pow(3, 4)); // 3^4 = 81.000000
2 printf("%f\n", pow(2, 0.5)); // sqrt 2 = 1.414214

See Also
exp(), exp2(), sqrt(), cbrt()

52.38 sqrt()
Calculate the square root of a number.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double sqrt(double x);

float sqrtf(float x);

long double sqrtl(long double x);

Description
√
Computes the square root of a number: 𝑥. To those of you who don’t know what a square root is, I’m not
going to explain. Suffice it to say, the square root of a number delivers a value that when squared (multiplied
by itself) results in the original number.
Ok, fine—I did explain it after all, but only because I wanted to show off. It’s not like I’m giving you
examples or anything, such as the square root of nine is three, because when you multiply three by three you
get nine, or anything like that. No examples. I hate examples!
And I suppose you wanted some actual practical information here as well. You can see the usual trio of func-
tions here—they all compute square root, but they take different types as arguments. Pretty straightforward,
really.
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 420

A domain error occurs if x is negative.

Return Value
√
Returns (and I know this must be something of a surprise to you) the square root of x: 𝑥.

Example
1 // example usage of sqrt()
2

3 float something = 10;

4

5 double x1 = 8.2, y1 = -5.4;

6 double x2 = 3.8, y2 = 34.9;
7 double dx, dy;
8

9 printf("square root of 10 is %.2f\n", sqrtf(something));

10

11 dx = x2 - x1;
12 dy = y2 - y1;
13 printf("distance between points (x1, y1) and (x2, y2): %.2f\n",
14 sqrt(dx*dx + dy*dy));

And the output is:

square root of 10 is 3.16
distance between points (x1, y1) and (x2, y2): 40.54

See Also
hypot(), pow()

52.39 erf(), erff(), erfl()

Compute the error function of the given value.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double erfc(double x);

float erfcf(float x);

long double erfcl(long double x);

Description
These functions compute the error function7 of a value.
7
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Error_function
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 421

Return Value
Returns the error function of x:
𝑥
2 2
√ ∫ 𝑒−𝑡 𝑑𝑡
𝜋 0

Example
1 for (float i = -2; i <= 2; i += 0.5)
2 printf("% .1f: %f\n", i, erf(i));

Output:
-2.0: -0.995322
-1.5: -0.966105
-1.0: -0.842701
-0.5: -0.520500
0.0: 0.000000
0.5: 0.520500
1.0: 0.842701
1.5: 0.966105
2.0: 0.995322

See Also
erfc()

52.40 erfc(), erfcf(), erfcl()

Compute the complementary error function of a value.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double erfc(double x);

float erfcf(float x);

long double erfcl(long double x);

Description
These functions compute the complementary error function8 of a value.
This is the same as:
1 - erf(x)

A range error can occur if x is too large.

8
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Error_function
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 422

Return Value
Returns 1 - erf(x), namely:
∞
2 2
√ ∫ 𝑒−𝑡 𝑑𝑡
𝜋 𝑥

Example
1 for (float i = -2; i <= 2; i += 0.5)
2 printf("% .1f: %f\n", i, erfc(i));

Output:
-2.0: 1.995322
-1.5: 1.966105
-1.0: 1.842701
-0.5: 1.520500
0.0: 1.000000
0.5: 0.479500
1.0: 0.157299
1.5: 0.033895
2.0: 0.004678

See Also
erf()

52.41 lgamma(), lgammaf(), lgammal()

Compute the natural logarithm of the absolute value of Γ(𝑥).

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double lgamma(double x);

float lgammaf(float x);

long double lgammal(long double x);

Description
Compute the natural log of the absolute value of gamma9 x, log𝑒 |Γ(𝑥)|.
A range error can occur if x is too large.
A pole error can occur is x is non-positive.
9
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gamma_function
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 423

Return Value
Returns log𝑒 |Γ(𝑥)|.

Example
1 for (float i = 0.5; i <= 4; i += 0.5)
2 printf("%.1f: %f\n", i, lgamma(i));

Output:
0.5: 0.572365
1.0: 0.000000
1.5: -0.120782
2.0: 0.000000
2.5: 0.284683
3.0: 0.693147
3.5: 1.200974
4.0: 1.791759

See Also
tgamma()

52.42 tgamma(), tgammaf(), tgammal()

Compute the gamma function, Γ(𝑥).

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double tgamma(double x);

float tgammaf(float x);

long double tgammal(long double x);

Description
Computes the gamma function10 of x, Γ(𝑥).
A domain or pole error might occur if x is non-positive.
A range error might occur if x is too large or too small.

Return Value
Returns the gamma function of x, Γ(𝑥).
10
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Gamma_function
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 424

Example
1 for (float i = 0.5; i <= 4; i += 0.5)
2 printf("%.1f: %f\n", i, tgamma(i));

Output:
0.5: 1.772454
1.0: 1.000000
1.5: 0.886227
2.0: 1.000000
2.5: 1.329340
3.0: 2.000000
3.5: 3.323351
4.0: 6.000000

See Also
lgamma()

52.43 ceil(), ceilf(), ceill()

Ceiling—return the next whole number not smaller than the given number.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double ceil(double x);

float ceilf(float x);

long double ceill(long double x);

Description
Returns the ceiling of the x: ⌈𝑥⌉.
This is the next whole number not smaller than x.
Beware this minor dragon: it’s not just “rounding up”. Well, it is for positive numbers, but negative numbers
effectively round toward zero. (Because the ceiling function is headed for the next largest whole number and
−4 is larger than −5.)

Return Value
Returns the next largest whole number larger than x.

Example
Notice for the negative numbers it heads toward zero, i.e. toward the next largest whole number—just like
the positives head toward the next largest whole number.
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 425

1 printf("%f\n", ceil(4.0)); // 4.000000

2 printf("%f\n", ceil(4.1)); // 5.000000
3 printf("%f\n", ceil(-2.0)); // -2.000000
4 printf("%f\n", ceil(-2.1)); // -2.000000
5 printf("%f\n", ceil(-3.1)); // -3.000000

See Also
floor(), round()

52.44 floor(), floorf(), floorl()

Compute the largest whole number not larger than the given value.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>
double floor(double x);
float floorf(float x);
long double floorl(long double x);

Description
Returns the floor of the value: ⌊𝑥⌋. This is the opposite of ceil().
This is the largest whole number that is not greater than x.
For positive numbers, this is like rounding down: 4.5 becomes 4.0.
For negative numbers, it’s like rounding up: -3.6 becomes -4.0.
In both cases, those results are the largest whole number not bigger than the given number.

Return Value
Returns the largest whole number not greater than x: ⌊𝑥⌋.

Example
Note how the negative numbers effectively round away from zero, unlike the positives.
1 printf("%f\n", floor(4.0)); // 4.000000
2 printf("%f\n", floor(4.1)); // 4.000000
3 printf("%f\n", floor(-2.0)); // -2.000000
4 printf("%f\n", floor(-2.1)); // -3.000000
5 printf("%f\n", floor(-3.1)); // -4.000000

See Also
ceil(), round()
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 426

52.45 nearbyint(), nearbyintf(), nearbyintl()

Rounds a value in the current rounding direction.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double nearbyint(double x);

float nearbyintf(float x);

long double nearbyintl(long double x);

Description
This function rounds x to the nearest integer in the current rounding direction.
The rounding direction can be set with fesetround() in <fenv.h>.
nearbyint() won’t raise the “inexact” floating point exception.

Return Value
Returns x rounded in the current rounding direction.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3 #include <fenv.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON // If supported
8

9 fesetround(FE_TONEAREST); // round to nearest

10

11 printf("%f\n", nearbyint(3.14)); // 3.000000

12 printf("%f\n", nearbyint(3.74)); // 4.000000
13

14 fesetround(FE_TOWARDZERO); // round toward zero

15

16 printf("%f\n", nearbyint(1.99)); // 1.000000

17 printf("%f\n", nearbyint(-1.99)); // -1.000000
18 }

See Also
rint(), lrint(), round(), fesetround(), fegetround()
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 427

52.46 rint(), rintf(), rintl()

Rounds a value in the current rounding direction.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double rint(double x);

float rintf(float x);

long double rintl(long double x);

Description
This works just like nearbyint() except that is can raise the “inexact” floating point exception.

Return Value
Returns x rounded in the current rounding direction.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3 #include <fenv.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
8

9 fesetround(FE_TONEAREST);
10

11 printf("%f\n", rint(3.14)); // 3.000000

12 printf("%f\n", rint(3.74)); // 4.000000
13

14 fesetround(FE_TOWARDZERO);
15

16 printf("%f\n", rint(1.99)); // 1.000000

17 printf("%f\n", rint(-1.99)); // -1.000000
18 }

See Also
nearbyint(), lrint(), round(), fesetround(), fegetround()

52.47 lrint(), lrintf(), lrintl(), llrint(), llrintf(), llrintl()

Returns x rounded in the current rounding direction as an integer.
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 428

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

long int lrint(double x);

long int lrintf(float x);
long int lrintl(long double x);

long long int llrint(double x);

long long int llrintf(float x);
long long int llrintl(long double x);

Description
Round a floating point number in the current rounding direction, but this time return an integer intead of a
float. You know, just to mix it up.
These come in two variants:
• lrint()—returns long int
• llrint()—returns long long int
If the result doesn’t fit in the return type, a domain or range error might occur.

Return Value
The value of x rounded to an integer in the current rounding direction.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3 #include <fenv.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 #pragma STDC FENV_ACCESS ON
8

9 fesetround(FE_TONEAREST);
10

11 printf("%ld\n", lrint(3.14)); // 3
12 printf("%ld\n", lrint(3.74)); // 4
13

14 fesetround(FE_TOWARDZERO);
15

16 printf("%ld\n", lrint(1.99)); // 1
17 printf("%ld\n", lrint(-1.99)); // -1
18 }

See Also
nearbyint(), rint(), round(), fesetround(), fegetround()
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 429

52.48 round(), roundf(), roundl()

Round a number in the good old-fashioned way.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double round(double x);

float roundf(float x);

long double roundl(long double x);

Description
Rounds a number to the nearest whole value.
In case of halfsies, rounds away from zero (i.e. “round up” in magnitude).
The current rounding direction’s Jedi mind tricks don’t work on this function.

Return Value
The rounded value of x.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("%f\n", round(3.14)); // 3.000000
7 printf("%f\n", round(3.5)); // 4.000000
8

9 printf("%f\n", round(-1.5)); // -2.000000

10 printf("%f\n", round(-1.14)); // -1.000000
11 }

See Also
lround(), nearbyint(), rint(), lrint(), trunc()

52.49 lround(), lroundf(), lroundl() llround(), llroundf(),

llroundl()
Round a number in the good old-fashioned way, returning an integer.
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 430

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

long int lround(double x);

long int lroundf(float x);
long int lroundl(long double x);

long long int llround(double x);

long long int llroundf(float x);
long long int llroundl(long double x);

Description
These are just like round() except they return integers.
Halfway values round away from zero, e.g. 1.5 rounds to 2 and −1.5 rounds to −2.
The functions are grouped by return type:
• lround()—returns a long int
• llround()—returns a long long int
If the rounded value can’t fit in the return type, a domain or range error can occur.

Return Value
Returns the rounded value of x as an integer.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("%ld\n", lround(3.14)); // 3
7 printf("%ld\n", lround(3.5)); // 4
8

9 printf("%ld\n", lround(-1.5)); // -2
10 printf("%ld\n", lround(-1.14)); // -1
11 }

See Also
round(), nearbyint(), rint(), lrint(), trunc()

52.50 trunc(), truncf(), truncl()

Truncate the fractional part off a floating point value.
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 431

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double trunc(double x);

float truncf(float x);

long double truncl(long double x);

Description
These functions just drop the fractional part of a floating point number. Boom.
In other words, they always round toward zero.

Return Value
Returns the truncated floating point number.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("%f\n", trunc(3.14)); // 3.000000
7 printf("%f\n", trunc(3.8)); // 3.000000
8

9 printf("%f\n", trunc(-1.5)); // -1.000000

10 printf("%f\n", trunc(-1.14)); // -1.000000
11 }

See Also
round(), lround(), nearbyint(), rint(), lrint()

52.51 fmod(), fmodf(), fmodl()

Compute the floating point remainder.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double fmod(double x, double y);

float fmodf(float x, float y);

long double fmodl(long double x, long double y);

 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 432

Description
Returns the remainder of 𝑥𝑦 . The result will have the same sign as x.
Under the hood, the computation performed is:
x - trunc(x / y) * y

But it might be easier just to think of the remainder.

Return Value
𝑥
Returns the remainder of 𝑦 with the same sign as x.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("%f\n", fmod(-9.2, 5.1)); // -4.100000
7 printf("%f\n", fmod(9.2, 5.1)); // 4.100000
8 }

See Also
remainder()

52.52 remainder(), remainderf(), remainderl()

Compute the remainder IEC 60559-style.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double remainder(double x, double y);

float remainderf(float x, float y);

long double remainderl(long double x, long double y);

Description
This is similar to fmod(), but not quite the same. fmod() is probably what you’re after if you’re expecting
remainders to wrap around like an odometer.
The C spec quotes IEC 60559 on how this works:
When 𝑦 ≠ 0, the remainder 𝑟 = 𝑥 REM 𝑦 is defined regardless of the rounding mode by
the mathematical relation 𝑟 = 𝑥 − 𝑛𝑦 , where 𝑛 is the integer nearest the exact value of 𝑥/𝑦;
whenever |𝑛 − 𝑥/𝑦| = 1/2, then 𝑛 is even. If 𝑟 = 0, its sign shall be that of 𝑥.
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 433

Hope that clears it up!

OK, maybe not. Here’s the upshot:
You know how if you fmod() something by, say 2.0 you get a result that is somewhere between 0.0 and
2.0? And how if you just increase the number that you’re modding by 2.0, you can see the result climb up
to 2.0 and then wrap around to 0.0 like your car’s odometer?
remainder() works just like that, except if y is 2.0, it wraps from -1.0 to 1.0 instead of from 0.0 to 2.0.

In other words, the range of the function runs from -y/2 to y/2. Contrasted to fmod() that runs from 0.0
to y, remainder()’s output is just shifted down half a y.
And zero-remainder-anything is 0.
Except if y is zero, the function might return zero or a domain error might occur.

Return Value
The IEC 60559 result of x-remainder-y.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("%f\n", remainder(3.7, 4)); // -0.300000
7 printf("%f\n", remainder(4.3, 4)); // 0.300000
8 }

See Also
fmod(), remquo()

52.53 remquo(), remquof(), remquol()

Compute the remainder and (some of the) quotient.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double remquo(double x, double y, int *quo);

float remquof(float x, float y, int *quo);

long double remquol(long double x, long double y, int *quo);

Description
This is a funky little thing.
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 434

First of all, the return value is the remainder, the same as the remainder() function, so check that out.
And the quotient comes back in the quo pointer.
Or at least some of it does. You’ll get at least 3 bits worth of the quotient.
But why?
So a couple things.
One is that the quotient of some very large floating point numbers can easily be far too gigantic to fit in even
a long long unsigned int. So some of it might very well need to be lopped off, anyway.
But at 3 bits? How’s that even useful? That only gets you from 0 to 7!
The C99 Rationale document states:
The remquo functions are intended for implementing argument reductions which can exploit a
few low-order bits of the quotient. Note that 𝑥 may be so large in magnitude relative to 𝑦 that
an exact representation of the quotient is not practical.
So… implementing argument reductions… which can exploit a few low-order bits… Ooookay.
CPPReference has this to say11 on the matter, which is spoken so well, I will quote wholesale:
This function is useful when implementing periodic functions with the period exactly repre-
sentable as a floating-point value: when calculating sin(𝜋𝑥) for a very large x, calling sin
directly may result in a large error, but if the function argument is first reduced with remquo,
the low-order bits of the quotient may be used to determine the sign and the octant of the result
within the period, while the remainder may be used to calculate the value with high precision.
And there you have it. If you have another example that works for you… congratulations! :)

Return Value
Returns the same as remainder: The IEC 60559 result of x-remainder-y.
In addition, at least the lowest 3 bits of the quotient will be stored in quo with the same sign as x/y.

Example
There’s a great cos() example at CPPReference12 that covers a genuine use case.
But instead of stealing it, I’ll just post a simple example here and you can visit their site for a real one.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 int quo;
7 double rem;
8

9 rem = remquo(12.75, 2.25, &quo);

10

11 printf("%d remainder %f\n", quo, rem); // 6 remainder -0.750000

12 }

11
https://en.cppreference.com/w/c/numeric/math/remquo
12
https://en.cppreference.com/w/c/numeric/math/remquo
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 435

See Also
remainder(), imaxdiv()

52.54 copysign(), copysignf(), copysignl()

Copy the sign of one value into another.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double copysign(double x, double y);

float copysignf(float x, float y);

long double copysignl(long double x, long double y);

Description
These functions return a number that has the magnitude of x and the sign of y. You can use them to coerce
the sign to that of another value.
Neither x nor y are modified, of course. The return value holds the result.

Return Value
Returns a value with the magnitude of x and the sign of y.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double x = 34.9;
7 double y = -999.9;
8 double z = 123.4;
9

10 printf("%f\n", copysign(x, y)); // -34.900000

11 printf("%f\n", copysign(x, z)); // 34.900000
12 }

See Also
signbit()
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 436

52.55 nan(), nanf(), nanl()

Return NAN.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double nan(const char *tagp);

float nanf(const char *tagp);

long double nanl(const char *tagp);

Description
These functions return a quiet NaN13 . It is produced as if calling strtod() with "NAN" (or a variant thereof)
as an argument.
tagp points to a string which could be several things, including empty. The contents of the string determine
which variant of NaN might get returned depending on the implementation.
Which version of NaN? Did you even know it was possible to get this far into the weeds with something that
wasn’t a number?
Case 1 in which you pass in an empty string, in which case these are the same:
nan("");

strtod("NAN()", NULL);

Case 2 in which the string contains only digits 0-9, letters a-z, letters A-Z, and/or underscore:
nan("goats");

strtod("NAN(goats)", NULL);

And Case 3, in which the string contains anything else and is ignored:
nan("!");

strtod("NAN", NULL);

As for what strtod() does with those values in parens, see the [strtod()] reference page. Spoiler: it’s
implementation-defined.

Return Value
Returns the requested quiet NaN, or 0 if such things aren’t supported by your system.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

13
A quiet NaN is one that doesn’t raise any exceptions.
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 437

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("%f\n", nan("")); // nan
7 printf("%f\n", nan("goats")); // nan
8 printf("%f\n", nan("!")); // nan
9 }

See Also
strtod()

52.56 nextafter(), nextafterf(), nextafterl()

Get the next (or previous) representable floating point value.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double nextafter(double x, double y);

float nextafterf(float x, float y);

long double nextafterl(long double x, long double y);

Description
As you probably know, floating point numbers can’t represent every possible real number. There are limits.
And, as such, there exists a “next” and “previous” number after or before any floating point number.
These functions return the next (or previous) representable number. That is, no floating point numbers exist
between the given number and the next one.
The way it figures it out is it works from x in the direction of y, answering the question of “what is the next
representable number from x as we head toward y.

Return Value
Returns the next representable floating point value from x in the direction of y.
If x equals y, returns y. And also x, I suppose.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("%.*f\n", DBL_DECIMAL_DIG, nextafter(0.5, 1.0));
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 438

7 printf("%.*f\n", DBL_DECIMAL_DIG, nextafter(0.349, 0.0));

8 }

Output on my system:
0.50000000000000011
0.34899999999999992

See Also
nexttoward()

52.57 nexttoward(), nexttowardf(), nexttowardl()

Get the next (or previous) representable floating point value.

Synopsis
include <math.h>

double nexttoward(double x, long double y);

float nexttowardf(float x, long double y);

long double nexttowardl(long double x, long double y);

Description
These functions are the same as nextafter() except the second parameter is always long double.

Return Value
Returns the same as nextafter() except if x equals y, returns y cast to the function’s return type.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <float.h>
3 #include <math.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 printf("%.*f\n", DBL_DECIMAL_DIG, nexttoward(0.5, 1.0));
8 printf("%.*f\n", DBL_DECIMAL_DIG, nexttoward(0.349, 0.0));
9 }

Output on my system:
0.50000000000000011
0.34899999999999992
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 439

See Also
nextafter()

52.58 fdim(), fdimf(), fdiml()

Return the positive difference between two numbers clamped at 0.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double fdim(double x, double y);

float fdimf(float x, float y);

long double fdiml(long double x, long double y);

Description
The positive difference between x and y is the difference… except if the difference is less than 0, it’s clamped
to 0.
These functions might throw a range error.

Return Value
Returns the difference of x-y if the difference is greater than 0. Otherwise it returns 0.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("%f\n", fdim(10.0, 3.0)); // 7.000000
7 printf("%f\n", fdim(3.0, 10.0)); // 0.000000, clamped
8 }

52.59 fmax(), fmaxf(), fmaxl(), fmin(), fminf(), fminl()

Return the maximum or minimum of two numbers.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double fmax(double x, double y);

 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 440

float fmaxf(float x, float y);

long double fmaxl(long double x, long double y);

double fmin(double x, double y);

float fminf(float x, float y);

long double fminl(long double x, long double y);

Description
Straightforwardly, these functions return the minimum or maximum of two given numbers.
If one of the numbers is NaN, the functions return the non-NaN number. If both arguments are NaN, the
functions return NaN.

Return Value
Returns the minimum or maximum values, with NaN handled as mentioned above.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("%f\n", fmin(10.0, 3.0)); // 3.000000
7 printf("%f\n", fmax(3.0, 10.0)); // 10.000000
8 }

52.60 fma(), fmaf(), fmal()

Floating (AKA “Fast”) multiply and add.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

double fma(double x, double y, double z);

float fmaf(float x, float y, float z);

long double fmal(long double x, long double y, long double z);

Description
This performs the operation (𝑥 × 𝑦) + 𝑧 , but does so in a nifty way. It does the computation as if it had
infinite precision, and then rounds the final result to the final data type according to the current rounding
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 441

mode.
Contrast to if you’d do the math yourself, where it would have rounded each step of the way, potentially.
Also some architectures have a CPU instruction to do exactly this calculation, so it can do it super quick. (If
it doesn’t, it’s considerably slower.)
You can tell if your CPU supports the fast version by checking that the macro FP_FAST_FMA is set to 1. (The
float and long variants of fma() can be tested with FP_FAST_FMAF and FP_FAST_FMAL, respectively.)

These functions might cause a range error to occur.

Return Value
Returns (x * y) + z.

Example
1 printf("%f\n", fma(1.0, 2.0, 3.0)); // 5.000000

52.61 isgreater(), isgreaterequal(), isless(), islessequal()

Floating point comparison macros.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

int isgreater(any_floating_type x, any_floating_type y);

int isgreaterequal(any_floating_type x, any_floating_type y);

int isless(any_floating_type x, any_floating_type y);

int islessequal(any_floating_type x, any_floating_type y);

Description
These macros compare floating point numbers. Being macros, we can pass in any floating point type.
You might think you can already do that with just regular comparison operators—and you’d be right!
One one exception: the comparison operators raise the “invalid” floating exception if one or more of the
operands is NaN. These macros do not.
Note that you must only pass floating point types into these functions. Passing an integer or any other type
is undefined behavior.

Return Value
isgreater() returns the result of x > y.

isgreaterequal() returns the result of x >= y.

isless() returns the result of x < y.

 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 442

islessequal() returns the result of x <= y.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("%d\n", isgreater(10.0, 3.0)); // 1
7 printf("%d\n", isgreaterequal(10.0, 10.0)); // 1
8 printf("%d\n", isless(10.0, 3.0)); // 0
9 printf("%d\n", islessequal(10.0, 3.0)); // 0
10 }

See Also
islessgreater(), isunordered()

52.62 islessgreater()
Test if a floating point number is less than or greater than another.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

int islessgreater(any_floating_type x, any_floating_type y);

Description
This macro is similar to isgreater() and all those, except it made the section name too long if I included
it up there. So it gets its own spot.
This returns true if 𝑥 < 𝑦 or 𝑥 > 𝑦 .
Even though it’s a macro, we can rest assured that x and y are only evaluated once.
And even if x or y are NaN, this will not throw an “invalid” exception, unlike the normal comparison opera-
tors.
If you pass in a non-floating type, the behavior is undefined.

Return Value
Returns (x < y) || (x > y).

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3
 Chapter 52. <math.h> Mathematics 443

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("%d\n", islessgreater(10.0, 3.0)); // 1
7 printf("%d\n", islessgreater(10.0, 30.0)); // 1
8 printf("%d\n", islessgreater(10.0, 10.0)); // 0
9 }

See Also
isgreater(), isgreaterequal(), isless(), islessequal(), isunordered()

52.63 isunordered()
Macro returns true if either floating point argument is NaN.

Synopsis
#include <math.h>

int isunordered(any_floating_type x, any_floating_type y);

Description
The spec writes:
The isunordered macro determines whether its arguments are unordered.
See? Told you C was easy!
It does also elaborate that the arguments are unordered if one or both of them are NaN.

Return Value
This macro returns true if one or both of the arguments are NaN.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <math.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("%d\n", isunordered(1.0, 2.0)); // 0
7 printf("%d\n", isunordered(1.0, sqrt(-1))); // 1
8 printf("%d\n", isunordered(NAN, 30.0)); // 1
9 printf("%d\n", isunordered(NAN, NAN)); // 1
10 }

See Also
isgreater(), isgreaterequal(), isless(), islessequal(), islessgreater()
Chapter 53

<setjmp.h> Non-local Goto

These functions enable you to rewind the call stack to an earlier point, with a bunch of gotchas. See the
chapter on setjmp()/longjmp() for more info.

Function Description
longjmp() Return to the previously-placed bookmark
setjmp() Bookmark this place to return to later

There’s also a new opaque type, jmp_buf, that holds all the information needed to pull off this magic trick.
If you want your automatic local variables to be correct after a call to longjmp(). declare them as volatile
where you called setjmp().

53.1 setjmp()
Save this location as one to return to later

Synopsis
#include <setjmp.h>

int setjmp(jmp_buf env);

Description
This is how you save your position so you can longjmp() back it, later. Think of it as setting up a warp
destination for later use.
Basically, you call this, giving it an env it can fill in with all the information it needs to come back here later.
This env is one you’ll pass to longjmp() later when you want to teleport back here.
And the really funky part is this can return two different ways:
1. It can return 0 from the call where you set up the jump destination.
2. If can return non-zero when you actually warp back here as the result of a call to longjmp().

444
 Chapter 53. <setjmp.h> Non-local Goto 445

What you can do is check the return value to see which case has occurred.
You’re only allowed to call setjmp() in a limited number of circumstances.
1. As a standalone expression:
setjmp(env);

You can also cast it to (void) if you really wanted to do such a thing.
2. As the complete controlling expression in an if or switch.
if (setjmp(env)) { ... }

switch (setjmp(env)) { ... }

But not this as it’s not the complete controlling expression in this case:
if (x == 2 && setjmp()) { ... } // Undefined behavior

3. The same as (2), above, except with a comparison to an integer constant:

if (setjmp(env) == 0) { ... }

if (setjmp(env) > 2) { ... }

4. As the operand to the not (!) operator:

if (!setjmp(env)) { ... }

Anything else is (you guessed it) undefined behavior!

This can be a macro or a function, but you’ll treat it the same way in any case.

Return Value
This one is funky. It returns one of two things:
Returns 0 if this was the call to setjmp() to set it up.
Returns non-zero if being here was the result of a call to longjmp(). (Namely, it returns the value passed
into the longjmp() function.)

Example
Here’s a function that calls setjmp() to set things up (where it returns 0), then calls a couple levels deep
into functions, and finally short-circuits the return path by longjmp()ing back to the place where setjmp()
was called, earlier. This time, it passes 3490 as a value, which setjmp() returns.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <setjmp.h>
3

4 jmp_buf env;
5

6 void depth2(void)
7 {
8 printf("Entering depth 2\n");
9 longjmp(env, 3490); // Jump back to setjmp()!!
10 printf("Leaving depth 2\n"); // This won't happen
11 }
12

13 void depth1(void)
 Chapter 53. <setjmp.h> Non-local Goto 446

14 {
15 printf("Entering depth 1\n");
16 depth2();
17 printf("Leaving depth 1\n"); // This won't happen
18 }
19

20 int main(void)
21 {
22 switch (setjmp(env)) {
23 case 0:
24 printf("Calling into functions, setjmp() returned 0\n");
25 depth1();
26 printf("Returned from functions\n"); // This won't happen
27 break;
28

29 case 3490:
30 printf("Bailed back to main, setjmp() returned 3490\n");
31 break;
32 }
33 }

When run, this outputs:

Calling into functions, setjmp() returned 0
Entering depth 1
Entering depth 2
Bailed back to main, setjmp() returned 3490

Notice that the second printf() in case 0 didn’t run; it got jumped over by longjmp()!

See Also
longjmp()

53.2 longjmp()
Return to the previous setjmp() location

Synopsis
#include <setjmp.h>

_Noreturn void longjmp(jmp_buf env, int val);

Description
This returns to a previous call to setjmp() back in the call history. setjmp() will return the val passed
into longjmp().
The env passed to setjmp() should be the same one you pass into longjmp().
There are a bunch of potential issues with doing this, so you’ll want to be careful that you avoid undefined
behavior by not doing the following:
 Chapter 53. <setjmp.h> Non-local Goto 447

1. Don’t call longjmp() if the corresponding setjmp() was in a different thread.

2. Don’t call longjmp() if you didn’t call setjmp() first.
3. Don’t call longjmp() if the function that called setjmp() has completed.
4. Don’t call longjmp() if the call to setjmp() had a variable length array (VLA) in scope and the
scope has ended.
5. Don’t call longjmp() if there are any VLAs in any active scopes between the setjmp() and the
longjmp(). A good rule of thumb here is to not mix VLAs and longjmp().

Though longjmp() attempts to restore the machine to the state at the setjmp(), including local variables,
there are some things that aren’t brought back to life:
• Non-volatile local variables that might have changed
• Floating point status flags
• Open files
• Any other component of the abstract machine

Return Value
This one is also funky in that it is one of the few functions in C that never returns!

Example
Here’s a function that calls setjmp() to set things up (where it returns 0), then calls a couple levels deep
into functions, and finally short-circuits the return path by longjmp()ing back to the place where setjmp()
was called, earlier. This time, it passes 3490 as a value, which setjmp() returns.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <setjmp.h>
3

4 jmp_buf env;
5

6 void depth2(void)
7 {
8 printf("Entering depth 2\n");
9 longjmp(env, 3490); // Jump back to setjmp()!!
10 printf("Leaving depth 2\n"); // This won't happen
11 }
12

13 void depth1(void)
14 {
15 printf("Entering depth 1\n");
16 depth2();
17 printf("Leaving depth 1\n"); // This won't happen
18 }
19

20 int main(void)
21 {
22 switch (setjmp(env)) {
23 case 0:
24 printf("Calling into functions, setjmp() returned 0\n");
25 depth1();
26 printf("Returned from functions\n"); // This won't happen
27 break;
 Chapter 53. <setjmp.h> Non-local Goto 448

28

29 case 3490:
30 printf("Bailed back to main, setjmp() returned 3490\n");
31 break;
32 }
33 }

When run, this outputs:

Calling into functions, setjmp() returned 0
Entering depth 1
Entering depth 2
Bailed back to main, setjmp() returned 3490

Notice that the second printf() in case 0 didn’t run; it got jumped over by longjmp()!

See Also
setjmp()
Chapter 54

<signal.h> signal handling

Function Description
signal() Set a signal handler for a given signal
raise() Cause a signal to be raised

Handle signals in a portable way, kind of!

These signals get raised for a variety of reasons such as CTRL-C being hit, requests to terminate for external
programs, memory access violations, and so on.
Your OS likely defines a plethora of other signals, as well.
This system is pretty limited, as seen below. If you’re on Unix, it’s almost certain your OS has far superior
signal handling capabilities than the C standard library. Check out sigaction1 .

54.1 signal()
Set a signal handler for a given signal

Synopsis
#include <signal.h>

void (*signal(int sig, void (*func)(int)))(int);

Description
How’s that for a function declaration?
Let’s ignore it for a moment and just talk about what this function does.
When a signal is raised, something is going to happen. This function lets you decide to do one of these things
when the signal is raised:
• Ignore the signal
1
https://man.archlinux.org/man/sigaction.2.en

449
Chapter 54. <signal.h> signal handling 450

• Perform the default action

• Have a specific function called
The signal() function takes two arguments. The first, sig, is the name of the signal to handle.

Signal Description
SIGABRT Raised when abort() is called
SIGFPE Floating-point arithmetic exception
SIGILL CPU tried to execute an illegal instruction
SIGINT Interrupt signal, as if CTRL-C were pressed
SIGSEGV Segmention Violation: attempted to access restricted memory
SIGTERM Termination request2

So that’s the first bit when you call signal()—tell it the signal in question:
signal(SIGINT, ...

But what’s that func parameter?

For spoilers, it’s a pointer to a function that takes an int argument and returns void. We can use this to call
an arbitrary function when the signal occurs.
Before we do that, though, let’s look at the easy ones: telling the system to ignore the signal or perform the
default action (which it does by default if you never call signal()).
You can set func to one of two special values to make this happen:

func Description
SIG_DFL Perform the default action on this signal
SIG_IGN Ignore this signal

For example:
signal(SIGTERM, SIG_DFL); // Default action on SIGTERM
signal(SIGINT, SIG_IGN); // Ignore SIGINT

But what if you want to have your own handler do something instead of the default or ignoring it? You can
pass in your own function to be called. That’s what the crazy function signature is partially about. It’s saying
that the argument can be a pointer to a function that takes an int argument and returns void.
So if you wanted to call your handler, you could have code like this:
int handler(int sig)
{
// Handle the signal
}

int main(void)
{
signal(SIGINT, handler);

What can you do in the signal handler? Not much.

If the signal is due to abort() or raise(), the handler can’t call raise().
2
As if might be sent from Unix’s kill command.]
 Chapter 54. <signal.h> signal handling 451

If the signal is not due to abort() or raise(), you’re only allowed to call these functions from the standard
library (though the spec doesn’t prohibit calling other non-library functions):
• abort()
• _Exit()
• quick_exit()
• Functions in <stdatomic.h> when the atomic arguments are lock-free
• signal() with a first argument equivalent to the argument that was passed into the handler

In addition, if the signal was not due to abort() or raise(), the handler can’t access any object with static
or thread-storage duration unless it’s lock-free.
An exception is that you can assign to (but not read from!) a variable of type volatile sig_atomic_t.
It’s up to the implementation, but the signal handler might be reset to SIG_DFL just before the handler is
called.
It’s undefined behavior to call signal() in a multithreaded program.
It’s undefined behavior to return from the handler for SIGFPE, SIGILL, SIGSEGV, or any implementation-
defined value. You must exit.
The implementation might or might not prevent other signals from arising while in the signal handler.

Return Value
On success, signal() returns a pointer to the previous signal handler set by a call to signal() for that
particular signal number. If you haven’t called it set, returns SIG_DFL.
On failure, SIG_ERR is returned and errno is set to a positive value.

Example
Here’s a program that causes SIGINT to be ignored. Commonly you trigger this signal by hitting CTRL-C.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <signal.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 signal(SIGINT, SIG_IGN);
7

8 printf("You can't hit CTRL-C to exit this program. Try it!\n\n");

9 printf("Press return to exit, instead.");
10 fflush(stdout);
11 getchar();
12 }

Output:
You can't hit CTRL-C to exit this program. Try it!

Press return to exit, instead.^C^C^C^C^C^C^C^C^C^C^C

This program sets the signal handler, then raises the signal. The signal handler fires.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <signal.h>
3

4 void handler(int sig)

 Chapter 54. <signal.h> signal handling 452

5 {
6 // Undefined behavior to call printf() if this handler was not
7 // as the result of a raise(), i.e. if you hit CTRL-C.
8

9 printf("Got signal %d!\n", sig);

10

11 // Common to reset the handler just in case the implementation set

12 // it to SIG_DFL when the signal occurred.
13

14 signal(sig, handler);
15 }
16

17 int main(void)
18 {
19 signal(SIGINT, handler);
20

21 raise(SIGINT);
22 raise(SIGINT);
23 raise(SIGINT);
24 }

Output:
Got signal 2!
Got signal 2!
Got signal 2!

This example catches SIGINT but then sets a flag to 1. Then the main loop sees the flag and exits.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <signal.h>
3

4 volatile sig_atomic_t x;
5

6 void handler(int sig)

7 {
8 x = 1;
9 }
10

11 int main(void)
12 {
13 signal(SIGINT, handler);
14

15 printf("Hit CTRL-C to exit\n");

16 while (x != 1);
17 }

See Also
raise(), abort()
 Chapter 54. <signal.h> signal handling 453

54.2 raise()
Cause a signal to be raised

Synopsis
#include <signal.h>

int raise(int sig);

Description
Causes the signal handler for the signal sig to be called. If the handler is SIG_DFL or SIG_IGN, then the
default action or no action happens.
raise() returns after the signal handler has finished running.

Interestingly, if you cause a signal to happen with raise(), you can call library functions from within the
signal handler without causing undefined behavior. I’m not sure how this fact is practically useful, though.

Return Value
Returns 0 on success. Nonzero otherwise.

Example
This program sets the signal handler, then raises the signal. The signal handler fires.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <signal.h>
3

4 void handler(int sig)

5 {
6 // Undefined behavior to call printf() if this handler was not
7 // as the result of a raise(), i.e. if you hit CTRL-C.
8

9 printf("Got signal %d!\n", sig);

10

11 // Common to reset the handler just in case the implementation set

12 // it to SIG_DFL when the signal occurred.
13

14 signal(sig, handler);
15 }
16

17 int main(void)
18 {
19 signal(SIGINT, handler);
20

21 raise(SIGINT);
22 raise(SIGINT);
23 raise(SIGINT);
24 }

Output:
Chapter 54. <signal.h> signal handling 454

Got signal 2!
Got signal 2!
Got signal 2!

See Also
signal()
Chapter 55

<stdalign.h> Macros for Alignment

If you’re coding up something low-level like a memory allocator that interfaces with your OS, you might
need this header file. But most C devs go their careers without using it.
Alignment1 is all about multiples of addresses on which objects can be stored. Can you store this at any
address? Or must it be a starting address that’s divisible by 2? Or 8? Or 16?

Name Description
alignas() Specify alignment, expands to _Alignas
alignof() Get alignment, expands to _Alignof

These two additional macros are defined to be 1:

__alignas_is_defined
__alignof_is_defined

Quick note: alignments greater than that of max_align_t are known as overalignments and are
implementation-defined.

55.1 alignas() _Alignas()

Force a variable to have a certain alignment

Synopsis
#include <stdalign.h>

alignas(type-name)
alignas(constant-expression)

_Alignas(type-name)
_Alignas(constant-expression)

1
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Data_structure_alignment

455
 Chapter 55. <stdalign.h> Macros for Alignment 456

Description
Use this alignment specifier to force the alignment of particular variables. For instance, we can declare c to
be char, but aligned as if it were an int:
char alignas(int) c;

You can put a constant integer expression in there, as well. The compiler will probably impose limits on
what these values can be. Small powers of 2 (1, 2, 4, 8, and 16) are generally safe bets.
char alignas(8) c; // align on 8-byte boundaries

For convenience, you can also specify 0 if you want the default alignment (as if you hadn’t said alignas()
at all):
char alignas(0) c; // use default alignment for this type

Example
1 #include <stdalign.h>
2 #include <stdio.h> // for printf()
3 #include <stddef.h> // for max_align_t
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 int i, j;
8 char alignas(max_align_t) a, b;
9 char alignas(int) c, d;
10 char e, f;
11

12 printf("i: %p\n", (void *)&i);

13 printf("j: %p\n\n", (void *)&j);
14 printf("a: %p\n", (void *)&a);
15 printf("b: %p\n\n", (void *)&b);
16 printf("c: %p\n", (void *)&c);
17 printf("d: %p\n\n", (void *)&d);
18 printf("e: %p\n", (void *)&e);
19 printf("f: %p\n", (void *)&f);
20 }

Output on my system follows. Notice the difference between the pairs of values.
• i and j, both ints, are aligned on 4-byte boundaries.
• a and b have been forced to the boundary of the type max_align_t, which is every 16 bytes on my
system.
• c and d have been forced to the same alignment as int, which is 4 bytes, just like with i and j.
• e and f do not have an alignment specified, so they were stored with their default alignment of 1 byte.
i: 0x7ffee7dfb4cc <-- difference of 4 bytes
j: 0x7ffee7dfb4c8

a: 0x7ffee7dfb4c0 <-- difference of 16 bytes

b: 0x7ffee7dfb4b0

c: 0x7ffee7dfb4ac <-- difference of 4 bytes

d: 0x7ffee7dfb4a8
 Chapter 55. <stdalign.h> Macros for Alignment 457

e: 0x7ffee7dfb4a7 <-- difference of 1 byte

f: 0x7ffee7dfb4a6

See Also
alignof, max_align_t

55.2 alignof() _Alignof()

Get the alignment of a type

Synopsis
#include <stdalign.h>

alignof(type-name)

_Alignof(type-name)

Description
This evaluates to a value of type size_t that gives the alignment of a particular type on your system.

Return Value
Returns the alignment value, i.e. the address of the beginning of the given type of object must begin on an
address boundary divisible by this number.

Example
Print out the alignments of a variety of different types.
1 #include <stdalign.h>
2 #include <stdio.h> // for printf()
3 #include <stddef.h> // for max_align_t
4

5 struct t {
6 int a;
7 char b;
8 float c;
9 };
10

11 int main(void)
12 {
13 printf("char : %zu\n", alignof(char));
14 printf("short : %zu\n", alignof(short));
15 printf("int : %zu\n", alignof(int));
16 printf("long : %zu\n", alignof(long));
17 printf("long long : %zu\n", alignof(long long));
18 printf("double : %zu\n", alignof(double));
19 printf("long double: %zu\n", alignof(long double));
 Chapter 55. <stdalign.h> Macros for Alignment 458

20 printf("struct t : %zu\n", alignof(struct t));

21 printf("max_align_t: %zu\n", alignof(max_align_t));
22 }

Output on my system:
char : 1
short : 2
int : 4
long : 8
long long : 8
double : 8
long double: 16
struct t : 16
max_align_t: 16

See Also
alignas, max_align_t
Chapter 56

<stdarg.h> Variable Arguments

Macro Description
va_arg() Get the next variable argument
va_copy() Copy a va_list and the work done so far
va_end() Signify we’re done processing variable arguments
va_start() Initialize a va_list to start variable argument processing

This header file is what allows you to write functions that take a variable number of arguments.
In addition to the macros, you get a new type that helps C keep track of where it is in the variable-number-of-
arguments-processing: va_list. This type is opaque, and you’ll be passing it around to the various macros
to help get at the arguments.
Note that every variadic function requires at least one non-variable parameter. You need this to kick off
processing with va_start().

56.1 va_arg()
Get the next variable argument

Synopsis
#include <stdarg.h>

type va_arg(va_list ap, type);

Description
If you have a variable argument list you’ve initialized with va_start(), pass it to this one along with the
type of argument you’re trying to get, e.g.
int x = va_arg(args, int);
float y = va_arg(args, float);

459
 Chapter 56. <stdarg.h> Variable Arguments 460

Return Value
Evaluates to the value and type of the next variable argument.

Example
Here’s a demo that adds together an arbitrary number of integers. The first argument is the number of integers
to add together. We’ll make use of that to figure out how many times we have to call va_arg().
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdarg.h>
3

4 int add(int count, ...)

5 {
6 int total = 0;
7 va_list va;
8

9 va_start(va, count); // Start with arguments after "count"

10

11 for (int i = 0; i < count; i++) {

12 int n = va_arg(va, int); // Get the next int
13

14 total += n;
15 }
16

17 va_end(va); // All done

18

19 return total;
20 }
21

22 int main(void)
23 {
24 printf("%d\n", add(4, 6, 2, -4, 17)); // 6 + 2 - 4 + 17 = 21
25 printf("%d\n", add(2, 22, 44)); // 22 + 44 = 66
26 }

See Also
va_start(), va_end()

56.2 va_copy()
Copy a va_list and the work done so far

Synopsis
#include <stdarg.h>

void va_copy(va_list dest, va_list src);

 Chapter 56. <stdarg.h> Variable Arguments 461

Description
The main intended use of this is to save your state partway through processing variable arguments so you
can scan ahead and then rewind back to the save point.
You pass in a src va_list and it copies it to dest.
If you’ve already called this once for a particular dest, you can’t call it (or va_start()) again with the
same dest unless you call va_end() on that dest first.
va_copy(dest, src);
va_copy(dest, src2); // BAD!

va_copy(dest, src);
va_start(dest, var); // BAD!

va_copy(dest, src);
va_end(dest);
va_copy(dest, src2); // OK!

va_copy(dest, src);
va_end(dest);
va_start(dest, var); // OK!

Return Value
Returns nothing.

Example
Here’s an example where we’re adding together all the variable arguments, but then we want to go back and
add on all the numbers past the first two, for example if the arguments are:
10 20 30 40

First we add them all for 100, and then we add on everything from the third number on, so add on 30+40 for
a total of 170.
We’ll do this by saving our place in the variable argument processing with va_copy and then using that later
to reprocess the trailing arguments.
(And yes, I know there’s a mathematical way to do this without all the rewinding, but I’m having an heck of
a time coming up with a good example!)
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdarg.h>
3

4 // Add all the numbers together, but then add on all the numbers
5 // past the second one again.
6 int contrived_adder(int count, ...)
7 {
8 if (count < 3) return 0; // OK, I'm being lazy. You got me.
9

10 int total = 0;
11

12 va_list args, mid_args;

13

14 va_start(args, count);
 Chapter 56. <stdarg.h> Variable Arguments 462

15

16 for (int i = 0; i < count; i++) {

17

18 // If we're at the second number, save our place in

19 // mid_args:
20

21 if (i == 2)
22 va_copy(mid_args, args);
23

24 total += va_arg(args, int);

25 }
26

27 va_end(args); // Done with this

28

29 // But now let's start with mid_args and add all those on:
30 for (int i = 0; i < count - 2; i++)
31 total += va_arg(mid_args, int);
32

33 va_end(mid_args); // Done with this, too

34

35 return total;
36 }
37

38 int main(void)
39 {
40 // 10+20+30 + 30 == 90
41 printf("%d\n", contrived_adder(3, 10, 20, 30));
42

43 // 10+20+30+40+50 + 30+40+50 == 270

44 printf("%d\n", contrived_adder(5, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50));
45 }

See Also
va_start(), va_arg(), va_end()

56.3 va_end()
Signify we’re done processing variable arguments

Synopsis
#include <stdarg.h>

void va_end(va_list ap);

Description
After you’ve va_start()ed or va_copy’d a new va_list, you must call va_end() with it before it goes
out of scope.
 Chapter 56. <stdarg.h> Variable Arguments 463

You also have to do this if you’re going to call va_start() or va_copy() again on a variable you’ve already
done that to.
Them’s the rules if you want to avoid undefined behavior.
But just think of it as cleanup. You called va_start(), so you’ll call va_end() when you’re done.

Return Value
Returns nothing.

Example
Here’s a demo that adds together an arbitrary number of integers. The first argument is the number of integers
to add together. We’ll make use of that to figure out how many times we have to call va_arg().
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdarg.h>
3

4 int add(int count, ...)

5 {
6 int total = 0;
7 va_list va;
8

9 va_start(va, count); // Start with arguments after "count"

10

11 for (int i = 0; i < count; i++) {

12 int n = va_arg(va, int); // Get the next int
13

14 total += n;
15 }
16

17 va_end(va); // All done

18

19 return total;
20 }
21

22 int main(void)
23 {
24 printf("%d\n", add(4, 6, 2, -4, 17)); // 6 + 2 - 4 + 17 = 21
25 printf("%d\n", add(2, 22, 44)); // 22 + 44 = 66
26 }

See Also
va_start(), va_copy()

56.4 va_start()
Initialize a va_list to start variable argument processing
 Chapter 56. <stdarg.h> Variable Arguments 464

Synopsis
#include <stdarg.h>

void va_start(va_list ap, parmN);

Description
You’ve declared a variable of type va_list to keep track of the variable argument processing… now how
to initialize it so you can start calling va_arg() to get those arguments?
va_start() to the rescue!

What you do is pass in your va_list, here shown as parameter ap. Just pass the list, not a pointer to it.
Then for the second argument to va_start(), you give the name of the parameter that you want to start
processing arguments after. This must be the parameter right before the ... in the argument list.
If you’ve already called va_start() on a particular va_list and you want to call va_start() on it again,
you must call va_end() first!

Return Value
Returns nothing!

Example
Here’s a demo that adds together an arbitrary number of integers. The first argument is the number of integers
to add together. We’ll make use of that to figure out how many times we have to call va_arg().
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdarg.h>
3

4 int add(int count, ...)

5 {
6 int total = 0;
7 va_list va;
8

9 va_start(va, count); // Start with arguments after "count"

10

11 for (int i = 0; i < count; i++) {

12 int n = va_arg(va, int); // Get the next int
13

14 total += n;
15 }
16

17 va_end(va); // All done

18

19 return total;
20 }
21

22 int main(void)
23 {
24 printf("%d\n", add(4, 6, 2, -4, 17)); // 6 + 2 - 4 + 17 = 21
25 printf("%d\n", add(2, 22, 44)); // 22 + 44 = 66
26 }
Chapter 56. <stdarg.h> Variable Arguments 465

See Also
va_arg(), va_end()
Chapter 57

<stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related
Functions

Function Description
atomic_compare_exchange_strong_explicit() Atomic compare and exchange, strong, explicit
atomic_compare_exchange_strong() Atomic compare and exchange, strong
atomic_compare_exchange_weak_explicit() Atomic compare and exchange, weak, explicit
atomic_compare_exchange_weak() Atomic compare and exchange, weak
atomic_exchange_explicit() Replace a value in an atomic object, explicit
atomic_exchange() Replace a value in an atomic object
atomic_fetch_add_explicit() Atomically add to an atomic integer, explicit
atomic_fetch_add() Atomically add to an atomic integer
atomic_fetch_and_explicit() Atomically bitwise-AND an atomic integer, explicit
atomic_fetch_and() Atomically bitwise-AND an atomic integer
atomic_fetch_or_explicit() Atomically bitwise-OR an atomic integer, explicit
atomic_fetch_or() Atomically bitwise-OR an atomic integer
atomic_fetch_sub_explicit() Atomically subtract from an atomic integer, explicit
atomic_fetch_sub() Atomically subtract from an atomic integer
atomic_fetch_xor_explicit() Atomically bitwise-XOR an atomic integer, explicit
atomic_fetch_xor() Atomically bitwise-XOR an atomic integer
atomic_flag_clear_explicit() Clear an atomic flag, explicit
atomic_flag_clear() Clear an atomic flag
atomic_flag_test_and_set_explicit() Test and set an atomic flag, explicit
atomic_flag_test_and_set() Test and set an atomic flag
atomic_init() Initialize an atomic variable
atomic_is_lock_free() Determine if an atomic type is lock free
atomic_load_explicit() Return a value from an atomic variable, explicit
atomic_load() Return a value from an atomic variable
atomic_signal_fence() Fence for intra-thread signal handlers
atomic_store_explicit() Store a value in an atomic variable, explicit
atomic_store() Store a value in an atomic variable
atomic_thread_fence() Set up a fence
ATOMIC_VAR_INIT() Create an initializer for an atomic variable
kill_dependency() End a dependency chain

You might need to add -latomic to your compilation command line on Unix-like operating systems.

466
Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 467

57.1 Atomic Types

A bunch of types are predefined by this header:

Atomic type Longhand equivalent

atomic_bool _Atomic _Bool
atomic_char _Atomic char
atomic_schar _Atomic signed char
atomic_uchar _Atomic unsigned char
atomic_short _Atomic short
atomic_ushort _Atomic unsigned short
atomic_int _Atomic int
atomic_uint _Atomic unsigned int
atomic_long _Atomic long
atomic_ulong _Atomic unsigned long
atomic_llong _Atomic long long
atomic_ullong _Atomic unsigned long long
atomic_char16_t _Atomic char16_t
atomic_char32_t _Atomic char32_t
atomic_wchar_t _Atomic wchar_t
atomic_int_least8_t _Atomic int_least8_t
atomic_uint_least8_t _Atomic uint_least8_t
atomic_int_least16_t _Atomic int_least16_t
atomic_uint_least16_t _Atomic uint_least16_t
atomic_int_least32_t _Atomic int_least32_t
atomic_uint_least32_t _Atomic uint_least32_t
atomic_int_least64_t _Atomic int_least64_t
atomic_uint_least64_t _Atomic uint_least64_t
atomic_int_fast8_t _Atomic int_fast8_t
atomic_uint_fast8_t _Atomic uint_fast8_t
atomic_int_fast16_t _Atomic int_fast16_t
atomic_uint_fast16_t _Atomic uint_fast16_t
atomic_int_fast32_t _Atomic int_fast32_t
atomic_uint_fast32_t _Atomic uint_fast32_t
atomic_int_fast64_t _Atomic int_fast64_t
atomic_uint_fast64_t _Atomic uint_fast64_t
atomic_intptr_t _Atomic intptr_t
atomic_uintptr_t _Atomic uintptr_t
atomic_size_t _Atomic size_t
atomic_ptrdiff_t _Atomic ptrdiff_t
atomic_intmax_t _Atomic intmax_t
atomic_uintmax_t _Atomic uintmax_t

You can make your own additional types with the _Atomic type qualifier:
_Atomic double x;

or the _Atomic() type specifier:

_Atomic(double) x;

57.2 Lock-free Macros

These macros let you know if a type is lock-free or not. Maybe.
Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 468

They can be used at compile time with #if. They apply to both signed and unsigned types.

Atomic Type Lock Free Macro

atomic_bool ATOMIC_BOOL_LOCK_FREE
atomic_char ATOMIC_CHAR_LOCK_FREE
atomic_char16_t ATOMIC_CHAR16_T_LOCK_FREE
atomic_char32_t ATOMIC_CHAR32_T_LOCK_FREE
atomic_wchar_t ATOMIC_WCHAR_T_LOCK_FREE
atomic_short ATOMIC_SHORT_LOCK_FREE
atomic_int ATOMIC_INT_LOCK_FREE
atomic_long ATOMIC_LONG_LOCK_FREE
atomic_llong ATOMIC_LLONG_LOCK_FREE
atomic_intptr_t ATOMIC_POINTER_LOCK_FREE

These macros can interestingly have three different values:

Value Meaning
0 Never lock-free.
1 Sometimes lock-free1 .
2 Always lock-free.

57.3 Atomic Flag

The atomic_flag opaque type is the only time guaranteed to be lock-free. Though your PC implementation
probably does a lot more.
It is accessed through the atomic_flag_test_and_set() and atomic_flag_clear() functions.
Before use, it can be initialized to a clear state with:
atomic_flag f = ATOMIC_FLAG_INIT;

57.4 Memory Order

This header introduces a new enum type called memory_order. This is used by a bunch of the functions to
specify memory orders other than sequential consistency.

memory_order Description
memory_order_seq_cst Sequential Consistency
memory_order_acq_rel Acquire/Release
memory_order_release Release
memory_order_acquire Acquire
memory_order_consume Consume
memory_order_relaxed Relaxed

You can feed these into atomic functions with the _explicit suffix.
The non-_explcit versions of the functions are the same as if you’d called the _explicit counterpart with
memory_order_seq_cst.
1
Maybe it depends on the run-time environment and can’t be known at compile-time.
 Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 469

57.5 ATOMIC_VAR_INIT()
Create an initializer for an atomic variable

Synopsis
#include <stdatomic.h>

#define ATOMIC_VAR_INIT(C value) // Deprecated

Description
This macro expands to an initializer, so you can use it when a variable is defined.
The type of the value should be the base type of the atomic variable.
The initialization itself is not an atomic operation, ironically.
CPPReference says this is deprecated2 and likely to be removed. Standards document p1138r03 elaborates
that the macro is limited in that it can’t properly initialize atomic structs, and its original raison d’être
turned out to not be useful.
Just initialize the variable straight-up, instead.

Return Value
Expands to an initializer suitable for this atomic variable.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdatomic.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 atomic_int x = ATOMIC_VAR_INIT(3490); // Deprecated
7 printf("%d\n", x);
8 }

See Also
atomic_init()

57.6 atomic_init()
Initialize an atomic variable
2
https://en.cppreference.com/w/cpp/atomic/ATOMIC_VAR_INIT
3
http://www.open-std.org/jtc1/sc22/wg21/docs/papers/2018/p1138r0.pdf
 Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 470

Synopsis
#include <stdatomic.h>

void atomic_init(volatile A *obj, C value);

Description
You can use this to initialize an atomic variable.
The type of the value should be the base type of the atomic variable.
The initialization itself is not an atomic operation, ironically.
As far as I can tell, there’s no difference between this and assigning directly to the atomic variable. The spec
says it’s there to allow the compiler to inject any additional initialization that needs doing, but everything
seems fine without it. If anyone has more info, send it my way.

Return Value
Returns nothing!

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdatomic.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 atomic_int x;
7

8 atomic_init(&x, 3490);
9

10 printf("%d\n", x);
11 }

See Also
ATOMIC_VAR_INIT(), atomic_store(), atomic_store_explicit()

57.7 kill_dependency()
End a dependency chain

Synopsis
#include <stdatomic.h>

type kill_dependency(type y);

 Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 471

Description
This is potentially useful for optimizing if you’re using memory_order_consume anywhere.
And if you know what you’re doing. If unsure, learn more before trying to use this.

Return Value
Returns the value passed in.

Example
In this example, i carries a dependency into x. And would do into y, except for the call to
kill_dependency().
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdatomic.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 atomic_int a;
7 int i = 10, x, y;
8

9 atomic_store_explicit(&a, 3490, memory_order_release);

10

11 i = atomic_load_explicit(&a, memory_order_consume);
12 x = i;
13 y = kill_dependency(i);
14

15 printf("%d %d\n", x, y); // 3490 and either 3490 or 10

16 }

57.8 atomic_thread_fence()
Set up a fence

Synopsis
#include <stdatomic.h>

void atomic_thread_fence(memory_order order);

Description
This sets up a memory fence with the specified order.

order Description
memory_order_seq_cst Sequentially consistency acquire/release fence
memory_order_acq_rel Acquire/release dence
memory_order_release Release fence
memory_order_acquire Acquire fence
memory_order_consume Acquire fence (again)
 Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 472

order Description
memory_order_relaxed No fence at all—no point in calling with this

You might try to avoid using these and just stick with the different modes with atomic_store_explicit()
and atomic_load_explicit(). Or not.

Return Value
Returns nothing!

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3 #include <stdatomic.h>
4

5 atomic_int shared_1 = 1;
6 atomic_int shared_2 = 2;
7

8 int thread_1(void *arg)

9 {
10 (void)arg;
11

12 atomic_store_explicit(&shared_1, 10, memory_order_relaxed);

13

14 atomic_thread_fence(memory_order_release);
15

16 atomic_store_explicit(&shared_2, 20, memory_order_relaxed);

17

18 return 0;
19 }
20

21 int thread_2(void *arg)

22 {
23 (void)arg;
24

25 // If this fence runs after the release fence, we're

26 // guaranteed to see thread_1's changes to the shared
27 // varaibles.
28

29 atomic_thread_fence(memory_order_acquire);
30

31 if (shared_2 == 20) {
32 printf("Shared_1 better be 10 and it's %d\n", shared_1);
33 } else {
34 printf("Anything's possible: %d %d\n", shared_1, shared_2);
35 }
36

37 return 0;
38 }
39

40 int main(void)
 Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 473

41 {
42 thrd_t t1, t2;
43

44 thrd_create(&t2, thread_2, NULL);

45 thrd_create(&t1, thread_1, NULL);
46

47 thrd_join(t1, NULL);
48 thrd_join(t2, NULL);
49 }

See Also
atomic_store_explicit(), atomic_load_explicit(), atomic_signal_fence()

57.9 atomic_signal_fence()
Fence for intra-thread signal handlers

Synopsis
#include <stdatomic.h>

void atomic_signal_fence(memory_order order);

Description
This works like atomic_thread_fence() except its purpose is within in a single thread; notably for use in
a signal handler in that thread.
Since signals can happen at any time, we might need a way to be certain that any writes by the thread that
happened before the signal handler be visible within that signal handler.

Return Value
Returns nothing!

Example
Partial demo. (Note that it’s technically undefined behavior to call printf() in a signal handler.)
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <signal.h>
3 #include <stdatomic.h>
4

5 int global;
6

7 void handler(int sig)

8 {
9 (void)sig;
10

11 // If this runs before the release, the handler will

 Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 474

12 // potentially see global == 0.

13 //
14 // Otherwise, it will definitely see global == 10.
15

16 atomic_signal_fence(memory_order_acquire);
17

18 printf("%d\n", global);
19 }
20

21 int main(void)
22 {
23 signal(SIGINT, handler);
24

25 global = 10;
26

27 atomic_signal_fence(memory_order_release);
28

29 // If the signal handler runs after the release

30 // it will definitely see the value 10 in global.
31 }

See Also
atomic_thread_fence(), signal()

57.10 atomic_is_lock_free()
Determine if an atomic type is lock free

Synopsis
#include <stdatomic.h>

_Bool atomic_is_lock_free(const volatile A *obj);

Description
Determines if the variable obj of type A is lock-free. Can be used with any type.
Unlike the lock-free macros which can be used at compile-time, this is strictly a run-time function. So in
places where the macros say “maybe”, this function will definitely tell you one way or another if the atomic
variable is lock-free.
This is useful when you’re defining your own atomic variables and want to know their lock-free status.

Return Value
True if the variable is lock-free, false otherwise.
 Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 475

Example
Test if a couple structs and an atomic double are lock-free. On my system, the larger struct is too big
to be lock-free, but the other two are OK.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdatomic.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 struct foo {
7 int x, y;
8 };
9

10 struct bar {
11 int x, y, z;
12 };
13

14 _Atomic(double) a;
15 struct foo b;
16 struct bar c;
17

18 printf("a is lock-free: %d\n", atomic_is_lock_free(&a));

19 printf("b is lock-free: %d\n", atomic_is_lock_free(&b));
20 printf("c is lock-free: %d\n", atomic_is_lock_free(&c));
21 }

Output on my system (YMMV):

a is lock-free: 1
b is lock-free: 1
c is lock-free: 0

See Also
Lock-free Macros

57.11 atomic_store()
Store a value in an atomic variable

Synopsis
#include <stdatomic.h>

void atomic_store(volatile A *object, C desired);

void atomic_store_explicit(volatile A *object,

C desired, memory_order order);

Description
Store a value in an atomic variable, possible synchronized.
 Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 476

This is like a plain assignment, but with more flexibility.

These have the same storage effect for an atomic_int x:
x = 10;
atomic_store(&x, 10);
atomic_store_explicit(&x, 10, memory_order_seq_cst);

But the last function, atomic_store_explicit(), lets you specify the memory order.
Since this is a “release-y” operation, none of the “acquire-y” memory orders are legal. order can be only be
memory_order_seq_cst, memory_order_release, or memory_order_relaxed.

order cannot be memory_order_acq_rel, memory_order_acquire, or memory_order_consume.

Return Value
Returns nothing!

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdatomic.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 atomic_int x = 0;
7 atomic_int y = 0;
8

9 atomic_store(&x, 10);
10

11 atomic_store_explicit(&y, 20, memory_order_relaxed);

12

13 // Will print either "10 20" or "10 0":

14 printf("%d %d\n", x, y);
15 }

See Also
atomic_init(), atomic_load(), atomic_load_explicit(), atomic_exchange(),
atomic_exchange_explicit(), atomic_compare_exchange_strong(),
atomic_compare_exchange_strong_explicit(), atomic_compare_exchange_weak(),
atomic_compare_exchange_weak_explicit(), atomic_fetch_*()

57.12 atomic_load()
Return a value from an atomic variable

Synopsis
#include <stdatomic.h>

C atomic_load(const volatile A *object);

 Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 477

C atomic_load_explicit(const volatile A *object, memory_order order);

Description
For a pointer to an object of type A, atomically returns its value C. This is a generic function that can be
used with any type.
The function atomic_load_explicit() lets you specify the memory order.
Since this is an “acquire-y” operation, none of the “release-y” memory orders are legal. order can
be only be memory_order_seq_cst, memory_order_acquire, memory_order_consume, or mem-
ory_order_relaxed.

order cannot be memory_order_acq_rel or memory_order_release.

Return Value
Returns the value stored in object.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdatomic.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 atomic_int x = 10;
7

8 int v = atomic_load(&x);
9

10 printf("%d\n", v); // 10
11 }

See Also
atomic_store(), atomic_store_explicit()

57.13 atomic_exchange()
Replace a value in an atomic object

Synopsis
#include <stdatomic.h>

C atomic_exchange(volatile A *object, C desired);

C atomic_exchange_explicit(volatile A *object, C desired,

memory_order order);
 Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 478

Description
Sets the value in object to desired.
object is type A, some atomic type.

desired is type C, the respective non-atomic type to A.

This is very similar to atomic_store(), except the previous value is atomically returned.

Return Value
Returns the previous value of object.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdatomic.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 atomic_int x = 10;
7

8 int previous = atomic_exchange(&x, 20);

9

10 printf("x is %d\n", x);

11 printf("x was %d\n", previous);
12 }

Output:
x is 20
x was 10

See Also
atomic_init(), atomic_load(), atomic_load_explicit(), atomic_store(),
atomic_store_explicit() atomic_compare_exchange_strong(),
atomic_compare_exchange_strong_explicit(), atomic_compare_exchange_weak(),
atomic_compare_exchange_weak_explicit()

57.14 atomic_compare_exchange_*()
Atomic compare and exchange

Synopsis
#include <stdatomic.h>

_Bool atomic_compare_exchange_strong(volatile A *object,

C *expected, C desired);

_Bool atomic_compare_exchange_strong_explicit(volatile A *object,

C *expected, C desired,
Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 479

memory_order success,
memory_order failure);

_Bool atomic_compare_exchange_weak(volatile A *object,

C *expected, C desired);

_Bool atomic_compare_exchange_weak_explicit(volatile A *object,

C *expected, C desired,
memory_order success,
memory_order failure);

Description
The venerable basis for some many things lock-free: compare and exchange.
In the above prototypes, A is the type of the atomic object, and C is the equivalent base type.
Ignoring the _explicit versions for a moment, what these do is:
• If the value pointed to by object is equal to the value pointed to by expected, then the value pointed
to by object is set to desired. And the function returns true indicating the exchange did take place.
• Else the value pointed to by expected (yes, expected) is set to desired and the function returns
false indicating the exchange did not take place.

Pseudocode for the exchange would look like this4 :

bool compare_exchange(atomic_A *object, C *expected, C desired)
{
if (*object is the same as *expected) {
*object = desired
return true
}

*expected = desired
return false
}

The _weak variants might spontaneously fail, so even if *object == *desired, it might not change the
value and will return false. So you’ll want that in a loop if you use it5 .
The _explicit variants have two memory orders: success if *object is set to desired, and failure if
it is not.
These are test-and-set functions, so you can use memory_order_acq_rel with the _explicit variants.

Return Value
Returns true if *object was *expected. Otherwise, false.

Example
A contrived example where multiple threads add 2 to a shared value in a lock-free way.
4
This effectively does the same thing, but it’s clearly not atomic.
5
The spec says, “This spurious failure enables implementation of compare-and-exchange on a broader class of machines, e.g. load-
locked store-conditional machines.” And adds, “When a compare-and-exchange is in a loop, the weak version will yield better perfor-
mance on some platforms. When a weak compare-and-exchange would require a loop and a strong one would not, the strong one is
preferable.”
 Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 480

(It would be better to use += 2 to get this done in real life unless you were using some _explicit wizardry.)
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3 #include <stdatomic.h>
4

5 #define LOOP_COUNT 10000

6

7 atomic_int value;
8

9 int run(void *arg)

10 {
11 (void)arg;
12

13 for(int i = 0; i < LOOP_COUNT; i++) {

14

15 int cur = value;

16 int next;
17

18 do {
19 next = cur + 2;
20 } while (!atomic_compare_exchange_strong(&value, &cur, next));
21 }
22

23 return 0;
24 }
25

26 int main(void)
27 {
28 thrd_t t1, t2;
29

30 thrd_create(&t1, run, NULL);

31 thrd_create(&t2, run, NULL);
32

33 thrd_join(t1, NULL);
34 thrd_join(t2, NULL);
35

36 printf("%d should equal %d\n", value, LOOP_COUNT * 4);

37 }

Just replacing this with value = value + 2 causes data trampling.

See Also
atomic_load(), atomic_load_explicit(), atomic_store(), atomic_store_explicit(),
atomic_exchange(), atomic_exchange_explicit(), atomic_fetch_*()

57.15 atomic_fetch_*()
Atomically modify atomic variables
Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 481

Synopsis
#include <stdatomic.h>

C atomic_fetch_KEY(volatile A *object, M operand);

C atomic_fetch_KEY_explicit(volatile A *object, M operand,

memory_order order);

Description
These are actually a group of 10 functions. You substitute one of the following for KEY to perform that
operation:
• add
• sub
• or
• xor
• and

So these functions can add or subtract values to or from an atomic variable, or can perform bitwise-OR, XOR,
or AND on them.
Use it with integer or pointer types. Though the spec is a little vague on the matter, other types make C
unhappy. It goes out of its way to avoid undefined behavior with signed integers, as well:
C18 §7.17.7.5 ¶3:
For signed integer types, arithmetic is defined to use two’s complement representation with silent
wrap-around on overflow; there are no undefined results.
In the synopsis, above, A is an atomic type, and M is the corresponding non-atomic type for A (or ptrdiff_t
for atomic pointers), and C is the corresponding non-atomic type for A.
For example, here are some operations on an atomic_int.
atomic_fetch_add(&x, 20);
atomic_fetch_sub(&x, 37);
atomic_fetch_xor(&x, 3490);

They are the same as +=, -=, |=, ^= and &=, except the return value is the previous value of the atomic object.
(With the assignment operators, the value of the expression is that after its evaluation.)
atomic_int x = 10;
int prev = atomic_fetch_add(&x, 20);
printf("%d %d\n", prev, x); // 10 30

versus:
atomic_int x = 10;
int prev = (x += 20);
printf("%d %d\n", prev, x); // 30 30

And, of course, the _explicit version allows you to specify a memory order and all the assignment operators
are memory_order_seq_cst.

Return Value
Returns the previous value of the atomic object before the modification.
 Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 482

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdatomic.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 atomic_int x = 0;
7 int prev;
8

9 atomic_fetch_add(&x, 3490);
10 atomic_fetch_sub(&x, 12);
11 atomic_fetch_xor(&x, 444);
12 atomic_fetch_or(&x, 12);
13 prev = atomic_fetch_and(&x, 42);
14

15 printf("%d %d\n", prev, x); // 3118 42

16 }

See Also
atomic_exchange(), atomic_exchange_explicit(), atomic_compare_exchange_strong(),
atomic_compare_exchange_strong_explicit(), atomic_compare_exchange_weak(),
atomic_compare_exchange_weak_explicit()

57.16 atomic_flag_test_and_set()
Test and set an atomic flag

Synopsis
#include <stdatomic.h>

_Bool atomic_flag_test_and_set(volatile atomic_flag *object);

_Bool atomic_flag_test_and_set_explicit(volatile atomic_flag *object,

memory_order order);

Description
One of the venerable old functions of lock-free programming, this function sets the given atomic flag in
object, and returns the previous value of the flag.

As usual, the _explicit allows you to specify an alternate memory order.

Return Value
Returns true if the flag was set previously, and false if it wasn’t.
 Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 483

Example
Using test-and-set to implement a spin lock6 :
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3 #include <stdatomic.h>
4

5 // Shared non-atomic struct

6 struct {
7 int x, y, z;
8 } s = {1, 2, 3};
9

10 atomic_flag f = ATOMIC_FLAG_INIT;
11

12 int run(void *arg)

13 {
14 int tid = *(int*)arg;
15

16 printf("Thread %d: waiting for lock...\n", tid);

17

18 while (atomic_flag_test_and_set(&f));
19

20 printf("Thread %d: got lock, s is {%d, %d, %d}\n", tid,

21 s.x, s.y, s.z);
22 s.x = (tid + 1) * 5 + 0;
23 s.y = (tid + 1) * 5 + 1;
24 s.z = (tid + 1) * 5 + 2;
25 printf("Thread %d: set s to {%d, %d, %d}\n", tid, s.x, s.y, s.z);
26

27 printf("Thread %d: releasing lock...\n", tid);

28 atomic_flag_clear(&f);
29

30 return 0;
31 }
32

33 int main(void)
34 {
35 thrd_t t1, t2;
36 int tid[] = {0, 1};
37

38 thrd_create(&t1, run, tid+0);

39 thrd_create(&t2, run, tid+1);
40

41 thrd_join(t1, NULL);
42 thrd_join(t2, NULL);
43 }

Example output (varies run to run):

Thread 0: waiting for lock...
Thread 0: got lock, s is {1, 2, 3}
Thread 1: waiting for lock...

6
Don’t use this unless you know what you’re doing—use the thread mutex functionality instead. It’ll let your blocked thread sleep
and stop chewing up CPU.
 Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 484

Thread 0: set s to {5, 6, 7}

Thread 0: releasing lock...
Thread 1: got lock, s is {5, 6, 7}
Thread 1: set s to {10, 11, 12}
Thread 1: releasing lock...

See Also
atomic_flag_clear()

57.17 atomic_flag_clear()
Clear an atomic flag

Synopsis
#include <stdatomic.h>

void atomic_flag_clear(volatile atomic_flag *object);

void atomic_flag_clear_explicit(volatile atomic_flag *object,

memory_order order);

Description
Clears an atomic flag.
As usual, the _explicit allows you to specify an alternate memory order.

Return Value
Returns nothing!

Example
Using test-and-set to implement a spin lock7 :
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3 #include <stdatomic.h>
4

5 // Shared non-atomic struct

6 struct {
7 int x, y, z;
8 } s = {1, 2, 3};
9

10 atomic_flag f = ATOMIC_FLAG_INIT;
11

12 int run(void *arg)

7
Don’t use this unless you know what you’re doing—use the thread mutex functionality instead. It’ll let your blocked thread sleep
and stop chewing up CPU.
 Chapter 57. <stdatomic.h> Atomic-Related Functions 485

13 {
14 int tid = *(int*)arg;
15

16 printf("Thread %d: waiting for lock...\n", tid);

17

18 while (atomic_flag_test_and_set(&f));
19

20 printf("Thread %d: got lock, s is {%d, %d, %d}\n", tid,

21 s.x, s.y, s.z);
22 s.x = (tid + 1) * 5 + 0;
23 s.y = (tid + 1) * 5 + 1;
24 s.z = (tid + 1) * 5 + 2;
25 printf("Thread %d: set s to {%d, %d, %d}\n", tid, s.x, s.y, s.z);
26

27 printf("Thread %d: releasing lock...\n", tid);

28 atomic_flag_clear(&f);
29

30 return 0;
31 }
32

33 int main(void)
34 {
35 thrd_t t1, t2;
36 int tid[] = {0, 1};
37

38 thrd_create(&t1, run, tid+0);

39 thrd_create(&t2, run, tid+1);
40

41 thrd_join(t1, NULL);
42 thrd_join(t2, NULL);
43 }

Example output (varies run to run):

Thread 0: waiting for lock...
Thread 0: got lock, s is {1, 2, 3}
Thread 1: waiting for lock...
Thread 0: set s to {5, 6, 7}
Thread 0: releasing lock...
Thread 1: got lock, s is {5, 6, 7}
Thread 1: set s to {10, 11, 12}
Thread 1: releasing lock...

See Also
atomic_flag_test_and_set()
 Chapter 58

<stdbool.h> Boolean Types

This is a small header file that defines a number of convenient Boolean macros. If you really need that kind
of thing.

Macro Description
bool Type for Boolean, expands to _Bool
true True value, expands to 1
false False value, expands to 0

There’s one more macro that I’m not putting in the table because it’s such a long name it’ll blow up the table
alignment:
__bool_true_false_are_defined

which expands to 1.

58.1 Example
Here’s a lame example that shows off these macros.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdbool.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 bool x;
7

8 x = (3 > 2);
9

10 if (x == true)
11 printf("The universe still makes sense.\n");
12

13 x = false;
14

15 printf("x is now %d\n", x); // 0

16 }

Output:

486
Chapter 58. <stdbool.h> Boolean Types 487

The universe still makes sense.

x is now 0

58.2 _Bool?
What’s the deal with _Bool? Why didn’t they just make it bool?
Well, there was a lot of C code out there where people had defined their own bool type and adding an official
bool would have broken those typedefs.

But C has already reserved all identifiers that start with an underscore followed by a capital letter, so it was
clear to make up a new _Bool type and go with that.
And, if you know your code can handle it, you can include this header to get all this juicy syntax.
One more note on conversions: unlike converting to int, the only thing that converts to false in a _Bool
is a scalar zero value. Anything at all that’s not zero, like -3490, 0.12, or NaN, converts to true.
 Chapter 59

<stddef.h> A Few Standard Definitions

Despite its name, I’ve haven’t seen this frequently included.

It includes several types and macros.

Name Description
ptrdiff_t Signed integer difference between two pointers
size_t Unsigned integer type returned by sizeof
max_align_t Declare a type with the biggest possible alignment
wchar_t Wide character type
NULL NULL pointer, as defined a number of places
offsetof Get the byte offsets of struct or union fields

59.1 ptrdiff_t
This holds the different between two pointers. You could store this in another type, but the result of a pointer
subtraction is an implementation-defined type; you can be maximally portable by using ptrdiff_t.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stddef.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 int cats[100];
7

8 int *f = cats + 20;

9 int *g = cats + 60;
10

11 ptrdiff_t d = g - f; // difference is 40

And you can print it by prefixing the integer format specifier with t:
13 printf("%td\n", d); // Print decimal: 40
14 printf("%tX\n", d); // Print hex: 28
15 }

488
 Chapter 59. <stddef.h> A Few Standard Definitions 489

59.2 size_t
This is the type returned by sizeof and used in a few other places. It’s an unsigned integer.
You can print it using the z prefix in printf():
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <uchar.h>
3 #include <string.h>
4 #include <stddef.h>
5

6 int main(void)
7 {
8 size_t x;
9

10 x = sizeof(int);
11

12 printf("%zu\n", x);

Some functions return negative numbers cast to size_t as error values (such as mbrtoc16()). If you want
to print these as negative values, you can do it with %zd:
14 char16_t a;
15 mbstate_t mbs;
16 memset(&mbs, 0, sizeof mbs);
17

18 x = mbrtoc16(&a, "b", 8, &mbs);

19

20 printf("%zd\n", x);
21 }

59.3 max_align_t
As far as I can tell, this exists to allow the runtime computation of the maximum fundamental alignment1 on
the current platform. Someone please mail me if there’s another use.
Maybe you need this if you’re writing your own memory allocator or somesuch.
1 #include <stddef.h>
2 #include <stdio.h> // For printf()
3 #include <stdalign.h> // For alignof
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 int max = alignof(max_align_t);
8

9 printf("Maximum fundamental alignment: %d\n", max);

10 }

On my system, this prints:

Maximum fundamental alignment: 16

See also alignas, alignof.

1
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Data_structure_alignment
 Chapter 59. <stddef.h> A Few Standard Definitions 490

59.4 wchar_t
This is analogous to char, except it’s for wide characters.
It’s an integer type that has enough range to hold unique values for all characters in all supported locales.
The value 0 is the wide NUL character.
Finally, the values of character constants from the basic character set will be the same as their corresponding
wchar_t values… unless __STDC_MB_MIGHT_NEQ_WC__ is defined.

59.5 offsetof
If you have a struct or union, you can use this to get the byte offset of fields within that type.
Usage is:
offsetof(type, fieldname);

The resulting value has type size_t.

Here’s an example that prints the field offsets of a struct:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stddef.h>
3

4 struct foo {
5 int a;
6 char b;
7 char c;
8 float d;
9 };
10

11 int main(void)
12 {
13 printf("a: %zu\n", offsetof(struct foo, a));
14 printf("b: %zu\n", offsetof(struct foo, b));
15 printf("c: %zu\n", offsetof(struct foo, c));
16 printf("d: %zu\n", offsetof(struct foo, d));
17 }

On my system, this outputs:

a: 0
b: 4
c: 5
d: 8

And you can’t use offsetof on a bitfield, so don’t get your hopes up.
Chapter 60

<stdint.h> More Integer Types

This header gives us access to (potentially) types of a fixed number of bits, or, at the very least, types that
are at least that many bits.
It also gives us handy macros to use.

60.1 Specific-Width Integers

There are three main classes of types defined here, signed and unsigned:
• Integers of exactly a certain size (intN _t, uintN _t)
• Integers that are at least a certain size (int_leastN _t, uint_leastN _t)
• Integers that are at least a certain size and are as fast as possible (int_fastN _t, uint_fastN _t)
Where the N occurs, you substitute the number of bits, commonly multiples of 8, e.g. uint16_t.
The following types are guaranteed to be defined:
int_least8_t uint_least8_t
int_least16_t uint_least16_t
int_least32_t uint_least32_t
int_least64_t uint_least64_t

int_fast8_t uint_fast8_t
int_fast16_t uint_fast16_t
int_fast32_t uint_fast32_t
int_fast64_t uint_fast64_t

Everything else is optional, but you’ll probably also have the following, which are required when a system
has integers of these sizes with no padding and two’s-complement representation… which is the case for
Macs and PCs and a lot of other systems. In short, you very likely have these:
int8_t uint8_t
int16_t uint16_t
int32_t uint32_t
int64_t uint64_t

Other numbers of bits can also be supported by an implementation if it wants to go all crazy with it.
Examples:

491
Chapter 60. <stdint.h> More Integer Types 492

#include <stdint.h>

int main(void)
{
int16_t x = 32;
int_fast32_t y = 3490;

// ...

60.2 Other Integer Types

There are a couple optional types that are integers capable of holding pointer types.
intptr_t
uintptr_t

You can convert a void* to one of these types, and back again. And the void*s will compare equal.
The use case is any place you need an integer that represents a pointer for some reason.
Also, there are a couple types that are just there to be the biggest possible integers your system supports:
intmax_t
uintmax_t

Fun fact: you can print these types with the "%jd" and "%ju" printf() format specifiers.
There are also a bunch of macros in <inttypes.h>(#inttypes) that you can use to print any of the types
mentioned, above.

60.3 Macros
The following macros define the minimum and maximum values for these types:
INT8_MAX INT8_MIN UINT8_MAX
INT16_MAX INT16_MIN UINT16_MAX
INT32_MAX INT32_MIN UINT32_MAX
INT64_MAX INT64_MIN UINT64_MAX

INT_LEAST8_MAX INT_LEAST8_MIN UINT_LEAST8_MAX

INT_LEAST16_MAX INT_LEAST16_MIN UINT_LEAST16_MAX
INT_LEAST32_MAX INT_LEAST32_MIN UINT_LEAST32_MAX
INT_LEAST64_MAX INT_LEAST64_MIN UINT_LEAST64_MAX

INT_FAST8_MAX INT_FAST8_MIN UINT_FAST8_MAX

INT_FAST16_MAX INT_FAST16_MIN UINT_FAST16_MAX
INT_FAST32_MAX INT_FAST32_MIN UINT_FAST32_MAX
INT_FAST64_MAX INT_FAST64_MIN UINT_FAST64_MAX

INTMAX_MAX INTMAX_MIN UINTMAX_MAX

INTPTR_MAX INTPTR_MIN UINTPTR_MAX

For the exact-bit-size signed types, the minimum is exactly −(2𝑁−1 ) and the maximum is exactly 2𝑁−1 − 1.
And for the exact-bit-size unsigned types, the max is exactly 2𝑁 − 1.
Chapter 60. <stdint.h> More Integer Types 493

For the signed “least” and “fast” variants, the magnitude and sign of the minimum is at least −(2𝑁−1 − 1)
and the maximum is at least 2𝑁−1 − 1. And for unsigned it’s at least 2𝑁 − 1.
INTMAX_MAX is at least 263 −1, INTMAX_MIN is at least −(263 −1) in sign and magnitude. And UINTMAX_MAX
is at least 264 − 1.
Finally, INTPTR_MAX is at least 215 − 1, INTPTR_MIN is at least −(215 − 1) in sign and magnitude. And
UINTPTR_MAX is at least 216 − 1.

60.4 Other Limits

There are a bunch of types in <inttypes.h>(#inttypes) that have their limits defined here. (<inttypes.h>
includes <stdint.h>.)

Macro Description
PTRDIFF_MIN Minimum ptrdiff_t value
PTRDIFF_MAX Maximum ptrdiff_t value
SIG_ATOMIC_MIN Minimum sig_atomic_t value
SIG_ATOMIC_MAX Maximum sig_atomic_t value
SIZE_MAX Maximum size_t value
WCHAR_MIN Minimum wchar_t value
WCHAR_MAX Maximum wchar_t value
WINT_MIN Minimum wint_t value
WINT_MAX Maximum wint_t value

The spec says that PTRDIFF_MIN will be at least -65535 in magnitude. And PTRDIFF_MAX and SIZE_MAX
will be at least 65535.
SIG_ATOMIC_MIN and MAX will be either -127 and 127 (if it’s signed) or 0 and 255 (if it’s unsigned).

Same for WCHAR_MIN and MAX.

WINT_MIN and MAX will be either -32767 and 32767 (if it’s signed) or 0 and 65535 (if it’s unsigned).

60.5 Macros for Declaring Constants

If you recall, you can specify a type for integer constants:
int x = 12;
long int y = 12L;
unsigned long long int z = 12ULL;

You can use the macros INTN _C() and UINTN () where N is 8, 16, 32 or 64.
uint_least16_t x = INT16_C(3490);
uint_least64_t y = INT64_C(1122334455);

A variant on these is INTMAX_C() and UINTMAX_C(). They will make a constant suitable for storing in an
intmax_t or uintmax_t.
intmax_t x = INTMAX_C(3490);
uintmax_t x = UINTMAX_C(1122334455);
Chapter 61

<stdio.h> Standard I/O Library

Function Description
clearerr() Clear the feof and ferror status flags
fclose() Close an open file
feof() Return the file end-of-file status
ferror() Return the file error status
fflush() Flush all buffered output to a file
fgetc() Read a character in a file
fgetpos() Get the file I/O position
fgets() Read a line from a file
fopen() Open a file
fprintf() Print formatted output to a file
fputc() Print a character to a file
fputs() Print a string to a file
fread() Read binary data from a file
freopen() Change file associated with a stream
fscanf() Read formatted input from a file
fseek() Set the file I/O position
fsetpos() Set the file I/O position
ftell() Get the file I/O position
fwrite() Write binary data to a file
getc() Get a character from stdin
getchar() Get a character from stdin
gets() Get a string from stdin (removed in C11)
perror() Print a human-formatted error message
printf() Print formatted output to stdout
putc() Print a character to stdout
putchar() Print a character to stdout
puts() Print a string to stdout
remove() Delete a file from disk
rename() Rename or move a file on disk
rewind() Set the I/O position to the beginning of a file
scanf() Read formatted input from stdin
setbuf() Configure buffering for I/O operations
setvbuf() Configure buffering for I/O operations
snprintf() Print length-limited formatted output to a string
sprintf() Print formatted output to a string

494
Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 495

Function Description
sscanf() Read formatted input from a string
tmpfile() Create a temporary file
tmpnam() Generate a unique name for a temporary file
ungetc() Push a character back on the input stream
vfprintf() Variadic print formatted output to a file
vfscanf() Variadic read formatted input from a file
vprintf() Variadic print formatted output to stdout
vscanf() Variadic read formatted input from stdin
vsnprintf() Variadic length-limited print formatted output to a
string
vsprintf() Variadic print formatted output to a string
vsscanf() Variadic read formatted input to a string

The most basic of all libraries in the whole of the standard C library is the standard I/O library. It’s used for
reading from and writing to files. I can see you’re very excited about this.
So I’ll continue. It’s also used for reading and writing to the console, as we’ve already often seen with the
printf() function.

(A little secret here—many many things in various operating systems are secretly files deep down, and the
console is no exception. “Everything in Unix is a file!” :-))
You’ll probably want some prototypes of the functions you can use, right? To get your grubby little mittens
on those, you’ll want to include stdio.h.
Anyway, so we can do all kinds of cool stuff in terms of file I/O. LIE DETECTED. Ok, ok. We can do all
kinds of stuff in terms of file I/O. Basically, the strategy is this:
1. Use fopen() to get a pointer to a file structure of type FILE*. This pointer is what you’ll be passing
to many of the other file I/O calls.
2. Use some of the other file calls, like fscanf(), fgets(), fprintf(), or etc. using the FILE* returned
from fopen().
3. When done, call fclose() with the FILE*. This let’s the operating system know that you’re truly
done with the file, no take-backs.
What’s in the FILE*? Well, as you might guess, it points to a struct that contains all kinds of information
about the current read and write position in the file, how the file was opened, and other stuff like that. But,
honestly, who cares. No one, that’s who. The FILE structure is opaque to you as a programmer; that is, you
don’t need to know what’s in it, and you don’t even want to know what’s in it. You just pass it to the other
standard I/O functions and they know what to do.
This is actually pretty important: try to not muck around in the FILE structure. It’s not even the same from
system to system, and you’ll end up writing some really non-portable code.
One more thing to mention about the standard I/O library: a lot of the functions that operate on files use an
“f” prefix on the function name. The same function that is operating on the console will leave the “f” off.
For instance, if you want to print to the console, you use printf(), but if you want to print to a file, use
fprintf(), see?

Wait a moment! If writing to the console is, deep down, just like writing to a file, since everything in Unix is
a file, why are there two functions? Answer: it’s more convenient. But, more importantly, is there a FILE*
associated with the console that you can use? Answer: YES!
There are, in fact, three (count ’em!) special FILE*s you have at your disposal merely for just including
stdio.h. There is one for input, and two for output.
Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 496

That hardly seems fair—why does output get two files, and input only get one?
That’s jumping the gun a bit—let’s just look at them:

Stream Description
stdin Input from the console.
stdout Output to the console.
stderr Output to the console on the error file stream.

So standard input (stdin) is by default just what you type at the keyboard. You can use that in fscanf() if
you want, just like this:
/* this line: */
scanf("%d", &x);

/* is just like this line: */

fscanf(stdin, "%d", &x);

And stdout works the same way:

printf("Hello, world!\n");
fprintf(stdout, "Hello, world!\n"); /* same as previous line! */

So what is this stderr thing? What happens when you output to that? Well, generally it goes to the console
just like stdout, but people use it for error messages, specifically. Why? On many systems you can redirect
the output from the program into a file from the command line…and sometimes you’re interested in getting
just the error output. So if the program is good and writes all its errors to stderr, a user can redirect just
stderr into a file, and just see that. It’s just a nice thing you, as a programmer, can do.

Finally, a lot of these functions return int where you might expect char. This is because the function can
return a character or end-of-file (EOF), and EOF is potentially an integer. If you don’t get EOF as a return
value, you can safely store the result in a char.

61.1 remove()
Delete a file

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

int remove(const char *filename);

Description
Removes the specified file from the filesystem. It just deletes it. Nothing magical. Simply call this function
and sacrifice a small chicken and the requested file will be deleted.

Return Value
Returns zero on success, and -1 on error, setting errno.
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 497

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 char *filename = "evidence.txt";
6

7 remove(filename);
8 }

See Also
rename()

61.2 rename()
Renames a file and optionally moves it to a new location

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

int rename(const char *old, const char *new);

Description
Renames the file old to name new. Use this function if you’re tired of the old name of the file, and you are
ready for a change. Sometimes simply renaming your files makes them feel new again, and could save you
money over just getting all new files!
One other cool thing you can do with this function is actually move a file from one directory to another by
specifying a different path for the new name.

Return Value
Returns zero on success, and -1 on error, setting errno.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 // Rename a file
6 rename("foo", "bar");
7

8 // Rename and move to another directory:

9 rename("/home/beej/evidence.txt", "/tmp/nothing.txt");
10 }
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 498

See Also
remove()

61.3 tmpfile()
Create a temporary file

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

FILE *tmpfile(void);

Description
This is a nifty little function that will create and open a temporary file for you, and will return a FILE* to it
that you can use. The file is opened with mode “r+b”, so it’s suitable for reading, writing, and binary data.
By using a little magic, the temp file is automatically deleted when it is close()’d or when your program
exits. (Specifically, in Unix terms, tmpfile() unlinks1 the file right after it opens it. This means that it’s
primed to be deleted from disk, but still exists because your process still has it open. As soon as your process
exits, all open files are closed, and the temp file vanishes into the ether.)

Return Value
This function returns an open FILE* on success, or NULL on failure.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 FILE *temp;
6 char s[128];
7

8 temp = tmpfile();
9

10 fprintf(temp, "What is the frequency, Alexander?\n");

11

12 rewind(temp); // back to the beginning

13

14 fscanf(temp, "%s", s); // read it back out

15

16 fclose(temp); // close (and magically delete)

17 }

1
https://man.archlinux.org/man/unlinkat.2.en#DESCRIPTION
Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 499

See Also
fopen(), fclose(), tmpnam()

61.4 tmpnam()
Generate a unique name for a temporary file

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

char *tmpnam(char *s);

Description
This function takes a good hard look at the existing files on your system, and comes up with a unique name
for a new file that is suitable for temporary file usage.
Let’s say you have a program that needs to store off some data for a short time so you create a temporary file
for the data, to be deleted when the program is done running. Now imagine that you called this file foo.txt.
This is all well and good, except what if a user already has a file called foo.txt in the directory that you
ran your program from? You’d overwrite their file, and they’d be unhappy and stalk you forever. And you
wouldn’t want that, now would you?
Ok, so you get wise, and you decide to put the file in /tmp so that it won’t overwrite any important content.
But wait! What if some other user is running your program at the same time and they both want to use that
filename? Or what if some other program has already created that file?
See, all of these scary problems can be completely avoided if you just use tmpnam() to get a safe-ready-to-use
filename.
So how do you use it? There are two amazing ways. One, you can declare an array (or malloc() it—
whatever) that is big enough to hold the temporary file name. How big is that? Fortunately there has been a
macro defined for you, L_tmpnam, which is how big the array must be.
And the second way: just pass NULL for the filename. tmpnam() will store the temporary name in a static
array and return a pointer to that. Subsequent calls with a NULL argument will overwrite the static array, so
be sure you’re done using it before you call tmpnam() again.
Again, this function just makes a file name for you. It’s up to you to later fopen() the file and use it.
One more note: some compilers warn against using tmpnam() since some systems have better functions (like
the Unix function mkstemp().) You might want to check your local documentation to see if there’s a better
option. Linux documentation goes so far as to say, “Never use this function. Use mkstemp() instead.”
I, however, am going to be a jerk and not talk about mkstemp()2 because it’s not in the standard I’m writing
about. Nyaah.
The macro TMP_MAX holds the number of unique filenames that can be generated by tmpnam(). Ironically,
it is the minimum number of such filenames.
2
https://man.archlinux.org/man/mkstemp.3.en
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 500

Return Value
Returns a pointer to the temporary file name. This is either a pointer to the string you passed in, or a pointer
to internal static storage if you passed in NULL. On error (like it can’t find any temporary name that is unique),
tmpnam() returns NULL.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 char filename[L_tmpnam];
6 char *another_filename;
7

8 if (tmpnam(filename) != NULL)
9 printf("We got a temp file name: \"%s\"\n", filename);
10 else
11 printf("Something went wrong, and we got nothing!\n");
12

13 another_filename = tmpnam(NULL);
14

15 printf("We got another temp file name: \"%s\"\n", another_filename);

16 printf("And we didn't error check it because we're too lazy!\n");
17 }

On my Linux system, this generates the following output:

We got a temp file name: "/tmp/filew9PMuZ"
We got another temp file name: "/tmp/fileOwrgPO"
And we didn't error check it because we're too lazy!

See Also
fopen(), tmpfile()

61.5 fclose()
The opposite of fopen()—closes a file when you’re done with it so that it frees system resources

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

int fclose(FILE *stream);

Description
When you open a file, the system sets aside some resources to maintain information about that open file.
Usually it can only open so many files at once. In any case, the Right Thing to do is to close your files when
you’re done using them so that the system resources are freed.
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 501

Also, you might not find that all the information that you’ve written to the file has actually been written to
disk until the file is closed. (You can force this with a call to fflush().)
When your program exits normally, it closes all open files for you. Lots of times, though, you’ll have a
long-running program, and it’d be better to close the files before then. In any case, not closing a file you’ve
opened makes you look bad. So, remember to fclose() your file when you’re done with it!

Return Value
On success, 0 is returned. Typically no one checks for this. On error EOF is returned. Typically no one checks
for this, either.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 FILE *fp;
6

7 fp = fopen("spoon.txt", "r");
8

9 if (fp == NULL) {
10 printf("Error opening file\n");
11 } else {
12 printf("Opened file just fine!\n");
13 fclose(fp); // All done!
14 }
15 }

See Also
fopen()

61.6 fflush()
Process all buffered I/O for a stream right now

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

int fflush(FILE *stream);

Description
When you do standard I/O, as mentioned in the section on the setvbuf() function, it is usually stored in a
buffer until a line has been entered or the buffer is full or the file is closed. Sometimes, though, you really
want the output to happen right this second, and not wait around in the buffer. You can force this to happen
by calling fflush().
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 502

The advantage to buffering is that the OS doesn’t need to hit the disk every time you call fprintf(). The
disadvantage is that if you look at the file on the disk after the fprintf() call, it might not have actually
been written to yet. (“I called fputs(), but the file is still zero bytes long! Why?!”) In virtually all circum-
stances, the advantages of buffering outweigh the disadvantages; for those other circumstances, however,
use fflush().
Note that fflush() is only designed to work on output streams according to the spec. What will happen if
you try it on an input stream? Use your spooky voice: who knooooows!

Return Value
On success, fflush() returns zero. If there’s an error, it returns EOF and sets the error condition for the
stream (see ferror().)

Example
In this example, we’re going to use the carriage return, which is '\r'. This is like newline ('\n'), except
that it doesn’t move to the next line. It just returns to the front of the current line.
What we’re going to do is a little text-based status bar like so many command line programs implement. It’ll
do a countdown from 10 to 0 printing over itself on the same line.
What is the catch and what does this have to do with fflush()? The catch is that the terminal is most likely
“line buffered” (see the section on setvbuf() for more info), meaning that it won’t actually display anything
until it prints a newline. But we’re not printing newlines; we’re just printing carriage returns, so we need a
way to force the output to occur even though we’re on the same line. Yes, it’s fflush()!
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 void sleep_seconds(int s)
5 {
6 thrd_sleep(&(struct timespec){.tv_sec=s}, NULL);
7 }
8

9 int main(void)
10 {
11 int count;
12

13 for(count = 10; count >= 0; count--) {

14 printf("\rSeconds until launch: "); // lead with a CR
15 if (count > 0)
16 printf("%2d", count);
17 else
18 printf("blastoff!\n");
19

20 // force output now!!

21 fflush(stdout);
22

23 sleep_seconds(1);
24 }
25 }

See Also
setbuf(), setvbuf()
Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 503

61.7 fopen()
Opens a file for reading or writing

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

FILE *fopen(const char *path, const char *mode);

Description
The fopen() opens a file for reading or writing.
Parameter path can be a relative or fully-qualified path and file name to the file in question.
Parameter mode tells fopen() how to open the file (reading, writing, or both), and whether or not it’s a binary
file. Possible modes are:

Mode Description
r Open the file for reading (read-only).
w Open the file for writing (write-only). The file is
created if it doesn’t exist.
r+ Open the file for reading and writing. The file has
to already exist.
w+ Open the file for writing and reading. The file is
created if it doesn’t already exist.
a Open the file for append. This is just like opening a
file for writing, but it positions the file pointer at the
end of the file, so the next write appends to the end.
The file is created if it doesn’t exist.
a+ Open the file for reading and appending. The file is
created if it doesn’t exist.

Any of the modes can have the letter “b” appended to the end, as is “wb” (“write binary”), to signify that the
file in question is a binary file. (“Binary” in this case generally means that the file contains non-alphanumeric
characters that look like garbage to human eyes.) Many systems (like Unix) don’t differentiate between binary
and non-binary files, so the “b” is extraneous. But if your data is binary, it doesn’t hurt to throw the “b” in
there, and it might help someone who is trying to port your code to another system.
The macro FOPEN_MAX tells you how many streams (at least) you can have open at once.
The macro FILENAME_MAX tells you what the longest valid filename can be. Don’t go crazy, now.

Return Value
fopen() returns a FILE* that can be used in subsequent file-related calls.

If something goes wrong (e.g. you tried to open a file for read that didn’t exist), fopen() will return NULL.
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 504

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 FILE *fp;
6

7 fp = fopen("spoon.txt", "r");
8

9 if (fp == NULL) {
10 printf("Error opening file\n");
11 } else {
12 printf("Opened file just fine!\n");
13 fclose(fp); // All done!
14 }
15 }

See Also
fclose(), freopen()

61.8 freopen()
Reopen an existing FILE*, associating it with a new path

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

FILE *freopen(const char *filename, const char *mode, FILE *stream);

Description
Let’s say you have an existing FILE* stream that’s already open, but you want it to suddenly use a different
file than the one it’s using. You can use freopen() to “re-open” the stream with a new file.
Why on Earth would you ever want to do that? Well, the most common reason would be if you had a program
that normally would read from stdin, but instead you wanted it to read from a file. Instead of changing all
your scanf()s to fscanf()s, you could simply reopen stdin on the file you wanted to read from.
Another usage that is allowed on some systems is that you can pass NULL for filename, and specify a new
mode for stream. So you could change a file from “r+” (read and write) to just “r” (read), for instance. It’s
implementation dependent which modes can be changed.
When you call freopen(), the old stream is closed. Otherwise, the function behaves just like the standard
fopen().

Return Value
freopen() returns stream if all goes well.

If something goes wrong (e.g. you tried to open a file for read that didn’t exist), freopen() will return NULL.
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 505

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int i, i2;
6

7 scanf("%d", &i); // read i from stdin

8

9 // now change stdin to refer to a file instead of the keyboard

10 freopen("someints.txt", "r", stdin);
11

12 scanf("%d", &i2); // now this reads from the file "someints.txt"

13

14 printf("Hello, world!\n"); // print to the screen

15

16 // change stdout to go to a file instead of the terminal:

17 freopen("output.txt", "w", stdout);
18

19 printf("This goes to the file \"output.txt\"\n");

20

21 // this is allowed on some systems--you can change the mode of a file:

22 freopen(NULL, "wb", stdout); // change to "wb" instead of "w"
23 }

See Also
fclose(), fopen()

61.9 setbuf(), setvbuf()

Configure buffering for standard I/O operations

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

void setbuf(FILE *stream, char *buf);

int setvbuf(FILE *stream, char *buf, int mode, size_t size);

Description
Now brace yourself because this might come as a bit of a surprise to you: when you printf() or fprintf()
or use any I/O functions like that, it does not normally work immediately. For the sake of efficiency, and to
irritate you, the I/O on a FILE* stream is buffered away safely until certain conditions are met, and only then
is the actual I/O performed. The functions setbuf() and setvbuf() allow you to change those conditions
and the buffering behavior.
So what are the different buffering behaviors? The biggest is called “full buffering”, wherein all I/O is stored
in a big buffer until it is full, and then it is dumped out to disk (or whatever the file is). The next biggest is
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 506

called “line buffering”; with line buffering, I/O is stored up a line at a time (until a newline ('\n') character
is encountered) and then that line is processed. Finally, we have “unbuffered”, which means I/O is processed
immediately with every standard I/O call.
You might have seen and wondered why you could call putchar() time and time again and not see any
output until you called putchar('\n'); that’s right—stdout is line-buffered!
Since setbuf() is just a simplified version of setvbuf(), we’ll talk about setvbuf() first.
The stream is the FILE* you wish to modify. The standard says you must make your call to setvbuf()
before any I/O operation is performed on the stream, or else by then it might be too late.
The next argument, buf allows you to make your own buffer space (using malloc() or just a char array)
to use for buffering. If you don’t care to do this, just set buf to NULL.
Now we get to the real meat of the function: mode allows you to choose what kind of buffering you want to
use on this stream. Set it to one of the following:

Mode Description
_IOFBF stream will be fully buffered.
_IOLBF stream will be line buffered.
_IONBF stream will be unbuffered.

Finally, the size argument is the size of the array you passed in for buf…unless you passed NULL for buf,
in which case it will resize the existing buffer to the size you specify.
Now what about this lesser function setbuf()? It’s just like calling setvbuf() with some specific param-
eters, except setbuf() doesn’t return a value. The following example shows the equivalency:
// these are the same:
setbuf(stream, buf);
setvbuf(stream, buf, _IOFBF, BUFSIZ); // fully buffered

// and these are the same:

setbuf(stream, NULL);
setvbuf(stream, NULL, _IONBF, BUFSIZ); // unbuffered

Return Value
setvbuf() returns zero on success, and nonzero on failure. setbuf() has no return value.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 FILE *fp;
6 char lineBuf[1024];
7

8 fp = fopen("somefile.txt", "w");
9 setvbuf(fp, lineBuf, _IOLBF, 1024); // set to line buffering
10 fprintf(fp, "You won't see this in the file yet. ");
11 fprintf(fp, "But now you will because of this newline.\n");
12 fclose(fp);
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 507

13

14 fp = fopen("anotherfile.txt", "w");
15 setbuf(fp, NULL); // set to unbuffered
16 fprintf(fp, "You will see this in the file now.");
17 fclose(fp);
18 }

See Also
fflush()

61.10 printf(), fprintf(), sprintf(), snprintf()

Print a formatted string to the console or to a file

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

int printf(const char *format, ...);

int fprintf(FILE *stream, const char *format, ...);

int sprintf(char * restrict s, const char * restrict format, ...);

int snprintf(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format, ...);

Description
These functions print formatted output to a variety of destinations.

Function Output Destination

printf() Print to console (screen by default, typically).
fprintf() Print to a file.
sprintf() Print to a string.
snprintf() Print to a string (safely).

The only differences between these is are the leading parameters that you pass to them before the format
string.

Function What you pass before format

printf() Nothing comes before format.
fprintf() Pass a FILE*.
sprintf() Pass a char* to a buffer to print into.
snprintf() Pass a char* to the buffer and a maximum buffer length.

The printf() function is legendary as being one of the most flexible outputting systems ever devised. It
can also get a bit freaky here or there, most notably in the format string. We’ll take it a step at a time here.
Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 508

The easiest way to look at the format string is that it will print everything in the string as-is, unless a character
has a percent sign (%) in front of it. That’s when the magic happens: the next argument in the printf()
argument list is printed in the way described by the percent code. These percent codes are called format
specifiers.
Here are the most common format specifiers.

Specifier Description
%d Print the next argument as a signed decimal number, like 3490. The argument printed this
way should be an int, or something that gets promoted to int.
%f Print the next argument as a signed floating point number, like 3.14159. The argument
printed this way should be a double, or something that gets promoted to a double.
%c Print the next argument as a character, like 'B'. The argument printed this way should be a
char variant.
%s Print the next argument as a string, like "Did you remember your mittens?". The
argument printed this way should be a char* or char[].
%% No arguments are converted, and a plain old run-of-the-mill percent sign is printed. This is
how you print a ‘%’ using printf().

So those are the basics. I’ll give you some more of the format specifiers in a bit, but let’s get some more
breadth before then. There’s actually a lot more that you can specify in there after the percent sign.
For one thing, you can put a field width in there—this is a number that tells printf() how many spaces to
put on one side or the other of the value you’re printing. That helps you line things up in nice columns. If
the number is negative, the result becomes left-justified instead of right-justified. Example:
printf("%10d", x); /* prints X on the right side of the 10-space field */
printf("%-10d", x); /* prints X on the left side of the 10-space field */

If you don’t know the field width in advance, you can use a little kung-foo to get it from the argument list
just before the argument itself. Do this by placing your seat and tray tables in the fully upright position. The
seatbelt is fastened by placing the—cough. I seem to have been doing way too much flying lately. Ignoring
that useless fact completely, you can specify a dynamic field width by putting a * in for the width. If you are
not willing or able to perform this task, please notify a flight attendant and we will reseat you.
int width = 12;
int value = 3490;

printf("%*d\n", width, value);

You can also put a “0” in front of the number if you want it to be padded with zeros:
int x = 17;
printf("%05d", x); /* "00017" */

When it comes to floating point, you can also specify how many decimal places to print by making a field
width of the form “x.y” where x is the field width (you can leave this off if you want it to be just wide
enough) and y is the number of digits past the decimal point to print:
float f = 3.1415926535;

printf("%.2f", f); /* "3.14" */

printf("%7.3f", f); /* " 3.141" <-- 7 spaces across */

Ok, those above are definitely the most common uses of printf(), but let’s get total coverage.
Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 509

61.10.0.1 Format Specifier Layout

Technically, the layout of the format specifier is these things in this order:
1. %, followed by…
2. Optional: zero or more flags, left justify, leading zeros, etc.
3. Optional: Field width, how wide the output field should be.
4. Optional: Precision, or how many decimal places to print.
5. Optional: Length modifier, for printing things bigger than int or double.
6. Conversion specifier, like d, f, etc.
In short, the whole format specifier is laid out like this:
%[flags][fieldwidth][.precision][lengthmodifier]conversionspecifier

What could be easier?

61.10.0.2 Conversion Specifiers

Let’s talk conversion specifiers first. Each of the following specifies what type it can print, but it can also
print anything that gets promoted to that type. For example, %d can print int, short, and char.

Conversion
Specifier Description
d Print an int argument as a decimal number.
i Identical to d.
o Print an unsigned int in octal (base 8).
u Print an unsigned int in decimal.
x Print an unsigned int in hexadecimal with lowercase letters.
X Print an unsigned int in hexadecimal with uppercase letters.
f Print a double in decimal notation. Infinity is printed as infinity or inf, and NaN is
printed as nan, any of which could have a leading minus sign.
F Same as f, except it prints out INFINITY, INF, or NAN in all caps.
e Print a number in scientific notation, e.g. 1.234e56. Does infinity and NaN like f.
E Just like e, except prints the exponent E (and infinity and NaN) in uppercase.
g Print small numbers like f and large numbers like e. See note below.
G Print small numbers like F and large numbers like E. See note below.
a Print a double in hexadecimal form 0xh.hhhhpd where h is a lowercase hex digit and d
is a decimal exponent of 2. Infinity and NaN in the form of f. More below.
A Like a except everything’s uppercase.
c Convert int argument to unsigned char and print as a character.
s Print a string starting at the given char*.
p Print a void* out as a number, probably the numeric address, possibly in hex.
n Store the number of characters written so far in the given int*. Doesn’t print anything.
See below.
% Print a literal percent sign.

61.10.0.2.1 Note on %a and %A When printing floating point numbers in hex form, there is one number
before the decimal point, and the rest of are out to the precision.
double pi = 3.14159265358979;

printf("%.3a\n", pi); // 0x1.922p+1

C can choose the leading number in such a way to ensure subsequent digits align to 4-bit boundaries.
Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 510

If the precision is left out and the macro FLT_RADIX is a power of 2, enough precision is used to represent
the number exactly. If FLT_RADIX is not a power of two, enough precision is used to be able to tell any two
floating values apart.
If the precision is 0 and the # flag isn’t specified, the decimal point is omitted.

61.10.0.2.2 Note on %g and %G The gist of this is to use scientific notation when the number gets too
“extreme”, and regular decimal notation otherwise.
The exact behavior for whether these print as %f or %e depends on a number of factors:
If the number’s exponent is greater than or equal to -4 and the precision is greater than the exponent, we use
%f. In this case, the precision is converted according to 𝑝 = 𝑝 − (𝑥 + 1), where 𝑝 is the specified precision
and 𝑥 is the exponent.
Otherwise we use %e, and the precision becomes 𝑝 − 1.
Trailing zeros in the decimal portion are removed. And if there are none left, the decimal point is removed,
too. All this unless the # flag is specified.

61.10.0.2.3 Note on %n This specifier is cool and different, and rarely needed. It doesn’t actually print
anything, but stores the number of characters printed so far in the next pointer argument in the list.
int numChars;
float a = 3.14159;
int b = 3490;

printf("%f %d%n\n", a, b, &numChars);

printf("The above line contains %d characters.\n", numChars);

The above example will print out the values of a and b, and then store the number of characters printed so
far into the variable numChars. The next call to printf() prints out that result.
3.141590 3490
The above line contains 13 characters

61.10.0.3 Length Modifiers

You can stick a length modifier in front of each of the conversion specifiers, if you want. most of those
format specifiers work on int or double types, but what if you want larger or smaller types? That’s what
these are good for.
For example, you could print out a long long int with the ll modifier:
long long int x = 3490;

printf("%lld\n", x); // 3490

Length
Modifier Conversion Specifier Description
hh d, i, o, u, x, X Convert argument to char (signed or unsigned as appropriate)
before printing.
h d, i, o, u, x, X Convert argument to short int (signed or unsigned as
appropriate) before printing.
l d, i, o, u, x, X Argument is a long int (signed or unsigned as appropriate).
ll d, i, o, u, x, X Argument is a long long int (signed or unsigned as
appropriate).
j d, i, o, u, x, X Argument is a intmax_t or uintmax_t (as appropriate).
Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 511

Length
Modifier Conversion Specifier Description
z d, i, o, u, x, X Argument is a size_t.
t d, i, o, u, x, X Argument is a ptrdiff_t.
L a, A, e, E, f, F, g, G Argument is a long double.
l c Argument is in a wint_t, a wide character.
l s Argument is in a wchar_t*, a wide character string.
hh n Store result in signed char* argument.
h n Store result in short int* argument.
l n Store result in long int* argument.
ll n Store result in long long int* argument.
j n Store result in intmax_t* argument.
z n Store result in size_t* argument.
t n Store result in ptrdiff_t* argument.

61.10.0.4 Precision
In front of the length modifier, you can put a precision, which generally means how many decimal places
you want on your floating point numbers.
To do this, you put a decimal point (.) and the decimal places afterward.
For example, we could print π rounded to two decimal places like this:
double pi = 3.14159265358979;

printf("%.2f\n", pi); // 3.14

Conversion Specifier Precision Value Meaning

d, i, o, u, x, X For integer types, minimum number of digits (will pad with leading
zeros)
a, e, f, A, E, F For floating types, the precision is the number of digits past the decimal.
g, G For floating types, the precision is the number of significant digits
printed.
s The maximum number of bytes (not multibyte characters!) to be written.

If no number is specified in the precision after the decimal point, the precision is zero.
If an * is specified after the decimal, something amazing happens! It means the int argument to printf()
before the number to be printed holds the precision. You can use this if you don’t know the precision at
compile time.
int precision;
double pi = 3.14159265358979;

printf("Enter precision: "); fflush(stdout);

scanf("%d", &precision);

printf("%.*f\n", precision, pi);

Which gives:
Enter precision: 4
3.1416
Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 512

61.10.0.5 Field Width

In front of the optional precision, you can indicate a field width. This is a decimal number that indicates how
wide the region should be in which the argument is printed. The region is padding with leading (or trailing)
spaces to make sure it’s wide enough.
If the field width specified is too small to hold the output, it is ignored.
As a preview, you can give a negative field width to justify the item the other direction.
So let’s print a number in a field of width 10. We’ll put some angle brackets around it so we can see the
padding spaces in the output.
printf("<<%10d>>\n", 3490); // right justified
printf("<<%-10d>>\n", 3490); // left justified

<< 3490>>
<<3490 >>

Like with the precision, you can use an asterisk (*) as the field width
int field_width;
int val = 3490;

printf("Enter field_width: "); fflush(stdout);

scanf("%d", &field_width);

printf("<<%*d>>\n", field_width, val);

61.10.0.6 Flags
Before the field width, you can put some optional flags that further control the output of the subsequent fields.
We just saw that the - flag can be used to left- or right-justify fields. But there are plenty more!

Flag Description
- For a field width, left justify in the field (right is default).
+ If the number is signed, always prefix a + or - on the front.
[SPACE] If the number is signed, prefix a space for positive, or a - for negative.
0 Pad the right-justified field with leading zeros instead of leading spaces.
# Print using an alternate form. See below.

For example, we could pad a hexadecimal number with leading zeros to a field width of 8 with:
printf("%08x\n", 0x1234); // 00001234

The # “alternate form” result depends on the conversion specifier.

Conversion Specifier Alternate Form (#) Meaning

o Increase precision of a non-zero number just enough to get one leading 0 on the
octal number.
x Prefix a non-zero number with 0x.
X Same as x, except capital 0X.
a, e, f Always print a decimal point, even if nothing follows it.
A, E, F Identical to a, e, f.
g, G Always print a decimal point, even if nothing follows it, and keep trailing zeros.
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 513

61.10.0.7 sprintf() and snprintf() Details

Both sprintf() and snprintf() have the quality that if you pass in NULL as the buffer, nothing is written—
but you can still check the return value to see how many characters would have been written.
snprintf() always terminates the string with a NUL character. So if you try to write out more than the
maximum specified characters, the universe ends.
Just kidding. If you do, snprintf() will write 𝑛 − 1 characters so that it has enough room to write the
terminator at the end.

Return Value
Returns the number of characters outputted, or a negative number on error.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int a = 100;
6 float b = 2.717;
7 char *c = "beej!";
8 char d = 'X';
9 int e = 5;
10

11 printf("%d\n", a); /* "100" */

12 printf("%f\n", b); /* "2.717000" */
13 printf("%s\n", c); /* "beej!" */
14 printf("%c\n", d); /* "X" */
15 printf("110%%\n"); /* "110%" */
16

17 printf("%10d\n", a); /* " 100" */

18 printf("%-10d\n", a); /* "100 " */
19 printf("%*d\n", e, a); /* " 100" */
20 printf("%.2f\n", b); /* "2.72" */
21

22 printf("%hhd\n", d); /* "88" <-- ASCII code for 'X' */

23

24 printf("%5d %5.2f %c\n", a, b, d); /* " 100 2.72 X" */

25 }

See Also
sprintf(), vprintf()

61.11 scanf(), fscanf(), sscanf()

Read formatted string, character, or numeric data from the console or from a file
Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 514

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

int scanf(const char *format, ...);

int fscanf(FILE *stream, const char *format, ...);

int sscanf(const char * restrict s, const char * restrict format, ...);

Description
These functions read formatted output from a variety of sources.

Function Input Source

scanf() Read from the console (keyboard by default, typically).
fscanf() Read from a file.
sscanf() Read from a string.

The only differences between these is are the leading parameters that you pass to them before the format
string.

Function What you pass before format

scanf() Nothing comes before format.
fscanf() Pass a FILE*.
sscanf() Pass a char* to a buffer to read from.

The scanf() family of functions reads data from the console or from a FILE stream, parses it, and stores
the results away in variables you provide in the argument list.
The format string is very similar to that in printf() in that you can tell it to read a "%d", for instance for an
int. But it also has additional capabilities, most notably that it can eat up other characters in the input that
you specify in the format string.
But let’s start simple, and look at the most basic usage first before plunging into the depths of the function.
We’ll start by reading an int from the keyboard:
int a;

scanf("%d", &a);

scanf() obviously needs a pointer to the variable if it is going to change the variable itself, so we use the
address-of operator to get the pointer.
In this case, scanf() walks down the format string, finds a “%d”, and then knows it needs to read an integer
and store it in the next variable in the argument list, a.
Here are some of the other format specifiers you can put in the format string:

Format Specifier Description

%d Reads an integer to be stored in an int. This integer
can be signed.
%u Reads an integer to be stored in an unsigned int.
Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 515

Format Specifier Description

%f Reads a floating point number, to be stored in a
float.
%s Reads a string up to the first whitespace character.
%c Reads a char.

And that’s the end of the story!

Ha! Just kidding. If you’ve just arrived from the printf() page, you know there’s a near-infinite amount
of additional material.

61.11.0.1 Consuming Other Characters

scanf() will move along the format string matching any characters you include.

For example, you could read a hyphenated date like so:

scanf("%u-%u-%u", &yyyy, &mm, &dd);

In that case, scanf() will attempt to consume an unsigned decimal number, then a hyphen, then another
unsigned number, then another hypen, then another unsigned number.
If it fails to match at any point (e.g. the user entered “foo”), scanf() will bail without consuming the offend-
ing characters.
And it will return the number of variables successfully converted. In the example above, if the user entered
a valid string, scanf() would return 3, one for each variable successfully read.

61.11.0.2 Problems with scanf()

I (and the C FAQ and a lot of people) recommend against using scanf() to read directly from the keyboard.
It’s too easy for it to stop consuming characters when the user enters some bad data.
If you have data in a file and you’re confident it’s in good shape, fscanf() can be really useful.
But in the case of the keyboard or file, you can always use fgets() to read a complete line into a buffer, and
then use sscanf() to scan things out of the buffer. This gives you the best of both worlds.

61.11.0.3 Problems with sscanf()

A while back, a third-party programmer rose to fame for figuring out how to cut GTA Online load times by
70%3 .
What they’d discovered was that the implementation of sscanf() first effectively calls strlen()… so even
if you’re just using sscanf() to peel the first few characters off the string, it still runs all the way out to the
end of the string first.
On small strings, no big deal, but on large strings with repeated calls (which is what was happening in GTA)
it got sloooooooooowwwww…
So if you’re just converting a string to a number, consider atoi(), atof(), or the strtol() and strtod()
families of functions, instead.
(The programmer collected a $10,000 bug bounty for the effort.)
3
https://nee.lv/2021/02/28/How-I-cut-GTA-Online-loading-times-by-70/
Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 516

61.11.0.4 The Deep Details

Let’s check out what a scanf()
And here are some more codes, except these don’t tend to be used as often. You, of course, may use them as
often as you wish!
First, the format string. Like we mentioned, it can hold ordinary characters as well as % format specifiers.
And whitespace characters.
Whitespace characters have a special role: a whitespace character will cause scanf() to consume as many
whitespace characters as it can up to the next non-whitespace character. You can use this to ignore all leading
or trailing whitespace.
Also, all format specifiers except for s, c, and [ automatically consume leading whitespace.
But I know what you’re thinking: the meat of this function is in the format specifiers. What do those look
like?
These consist of the following, in sequence:
1. A % sign
2. Optional: an * to suppress assignment—more later
3. Optional: a field width—max characters to read
4. Optional: length modifier, for specifying longer or shorter types
5. A conversion specifier, like d or f indicating the type to read

61.11.0.5 The Conversion Specifier

Let’s start with the best and last: the conversion specifier.
This is the part of the format specifier that tells us what type of variable scanf() should be reading into, like
%d or %f.

Conversion
Specifier Description
d Matches a decimal int. Can have a leading sign.
i Like d, except will handle it if you put a leading 0x (hex) or 0 (octal) on the number.
o Matches an octal (base 8) unsigned int. Leading zeros are ignored.
u Matches a decimal unsigned int.
x Matches a hex (base 16) unsigned int.
f Match a floating point number (or scientific notation, or anything strtod() can handle).
c Match a char, or mutiple chars if a field width is given.
s Match a sequence of non-whitespace chars.
[ Match a sequence of characters from a set. The set ends with ]. More below.
p Match a pointer, the opposite of %p for printf().
n Store the number of characters written so far in the given int*. Doesn’t consume
anything.
% Match a literal percent sign.

All of the following are equivalent to the f specifier: a, e, g, A, E, F, G.

And capital X is equivalent to lowercase x.

61.11.0.5.1 The Scanset %[] Conversion Specifier This is about the weirdest format specifier there is.
It allows you to specify a set of characters (the scanset) to be stored away (likely in an array of chars).
Conversion stops when a character that is not in the set is matched.
Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 517

For example, %[0-9] means “match all numbers zero through nine.” And %[AD-G34] means “match A, D
through G, 3, or 4”.
Now, to convolute matters, you can tell scanf() to match characters that are not in the set by putting a caret
(^) directly after the %[ and following it with the set, like this: %[^A-C], which means “match all characters
that are not A through C.”
To match a close square bracket, make it the first character in the set, like this: %[]A-C] or %[^]A-C]. (I
added the “A-C” just so it was clear that the “]” was first in the set.)
To match a hyphen, make it the last character in the set, e.g. to match A-through-C or hyphen: %[A-C-].
So if we wanted to match all letters except “%”, “^”, “]”, “B”, “C”, “D”, “E”, and “-”, we could use this
format string: %[^]%^B-E-].
Got it? Now we can go onto the next func—no wait! There’s more! Yes, still more to know about scanf().
Does it never end? Try to imagine how I feel writing about it!

61.11.0.6 The Length Modifier

So you know that “%d” stores into an int. But how do you store into a long, short, or double?
Well, like in printf(), you can add a modifier before the type specifier to tell scanf() that you have a
longer or shorter type. The following is a table of the possible modifiers:

Length
Modifier Conversion Specifier Description
hh d, i, o, u, x, X Convert input to char (signed or unsigned as appropriate)
before printing.
h d, i, o, u, x, X Convert input to short int (signed or unsigned as
appropriate) before printing.
l d, i, o, u, x, X Convert input to long int (signed or unsigned as
appropriate).
ll d, i, o, u, x, X Convert input to long long int (signed or unsigned as
appropriate).
j d, i, o, u, x, X Convert input to intmax_t or uintmax_t (as appropriate).
z d, i, o, u, x, X Convert input to size_t.
t d, i, o, u, x, X Convert input to ptrdiff_t.
L a, A, e, E, f, F, g, G Convert input to long double.
l c,s,[ Convert input to wchar_t, a wide character.
l s Argument is in a wchar_t*, a wide character string.
hh n Store result in signed char* argument.
h n Store result in short int* argument.
l n Store result in long int* argument.
ll n Store result in long long int* argument.
j n Store result in intmax_t* argument.
z n Store result in size_t* argument.
t n Store result in ptrdiff_t* argument.

61.11.0.7 Field Widths

The field width generally allows you to specify a maximum number of characters to consume. If the thing
you’re trying to match is shorter than the field width, that input will stop being processed before the field
width is reached.
So a string will stop being consumed when whitespace is found, even if fewer than the field width characters
are matched.
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 518

And a float will stop being consumed at the end of the number, even if fewer characters than the field width
are matched.
But %c is an interesting one—it doesn’t stop consuming characters on anything. So it’ll go exactly to the
field width. (Or 1 character if no field width is given.)

61.11.0.8 Skip Input with *

If you put an * in the format specifier, it tells scanf() do to the conversion specified, but not store it anywhere.
It simply discards the data as it reads it. This is what you use if you want scanf() to eat some data but you
don’t want to store it anywhere; you don’t give scanf() an argument for this conversion.
// Read 3 ints, but discard the middle one
scanf("%d %*d %d", &int1, &int3);

Return Value
scanf() returns the number of items assigned into variables. Since assignment into variables stops when
given invalid input for a certain format specifier, this can tell you if you’ve input all your data correctly.
Also, scanf() returns EOF on end-of-file.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int a;
6 long int b;
7 unsigned int c;
8 float d;
9 double e;
10 long double f;
11 char s[100];
12

13 scanf("%d", &a); // store an int

14 scanf(" %d", &a); // eat any whitespace, then store an int
15 scanf("%s", s); // store a string
16 scanf("%Lf", &f); // store a long double
17

18 // store an unsigned, read all whitespace, then store a long int:

19 scanf("%u %ld", &c, &b);
20

21 // store an int, read whitespace, read "blendo", read whitespace,

22 // and store a float:
23 scanf("%d blendo %f", &a, &d);
24

25 // read all whitespace, then store all characters up to a newline

26 scanf(" %[^\n]", s);
27

28 // store a float, read (and ignore) an int, then store a double:

29 scanf("%f %*d %lf", &d, &e);
30

31 // store 10 characters:
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 519

32 scanf("%10c", s);
33 }

See Also
sscanf(), vscanf(), vsscanf(), vfscanf()

61.12 vprintf(), vfprintf(), vsprintf(), vsnprintf()

printf() variants using variable argument lists (va_list)

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdarg.h>

int vprintf(const char * restrict format, va_list arg);

int vfprintf(FILE * restrict stream, const char * restrict format,

va_list arg);

int vsprintf(char * restrict s, const char * restrict format, va_list arg);

int vsnprintf(char * restrict s, size_t n, const char * restrict format,

va_list arg);

Description
These are just like the printf() variants except instead of taking an actual variable number of arguments,
they take a fixed number—the last of which is a va_list that refers to the variable arguments.
Like with printf(), the different variants send output different places.

Function Output Destination

vprintf() Print to console (screen by default, typically).
vfprintf() Print to a file.
vsprintf() Print to a string.
vsnprintf() Print to a string (safely).

Both vsprintf() and vsnprintf() have the quality that if you pass in NULL as the buffer, nothing is
written—but you can still check the return value to see how many characters would have been written.
If you try to write out more than the maximum number of characters, vsnprintf() will graciously write
only 𝑛 − 1 characters so that it has enough room to write the terminator at the end.
As for why in the heck would you ever want to do this, the most common reason is to create your own
specialized versions of printf()-type functions, piggybacking on all that printf() functionality goodness.
See the example for an example, predictably.
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 520

Return Value
vprintf() and vfprintf() return the number of characters printed, or a negative value on error.

vsprintf() returns the number of characters printed to the buffer, not counting the NUL terminator, or a
negative value if an error occurred.
vnsprintf() returns the number of characters printed to the buffer. Or the number that would have been
printed if the buffer had been large enough.

Example
In this example, we make our own version of printf() called logger() that timestamps output. Notice
how the calls to logger() have all the bells and whistles of printf().
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdarg.h>
3 #include <time.h>
4

5 int logger(char *format, ...)

6 {
7 va_list va;
8 time_t now_secs = time(NULL);
9 struct tm *now = gmtime(&now_secs);
10

11 // Output timestamp in format "YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss : "

12 printf("%04d-%02d-%02d %02d:%02d:%02d : ",
13 now->tm_year + 1900, now->tm_mon + 1, now->tm_mday,
14 now->tm_hour, now->tm_min, now->tm_sec);
15

16 va_start(va, format);
17 int result = vprintf(format, va);
18 va_end(va);
19

20 printf("\n");
21

22 return result;
23 }
24

25 int main(void)
26 {
27 int x = 12;
28 float y = 3.2;
29

30 logger("Hello!");
31 logger("x = %d and y = %.2f", x, y);
32 }

Output:
2021-03-30 04:25:49 : Hello!
2021-03-30 04:25:49 : x = 12 and y = 3.20

See Also
printf()
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 521

61.13 vscanf(), vfscanf(), vsscanf()

scanf() variants using variable argument lists (va_list)

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>
#include <stdarg.h>

int vscanf(const char * restrict format, va_list arg);

int vfscanf(FILE * restrict stream, const char * restrict format,

va_list arg);

int vsscanf(const char * restrict s, const char * restrict format,

va_list arg);

Description
These are just like the scanf() variants except instead of taking an actual variable number of arguments,
they take a fixed number—the last of which is a va_list that refers to the variable arguments.

Function Input Source

vscanf() Read from the console (keyboard by default, typically).
vfscanf() Read from a file.
vsscanf() Read from a string.

Like with the vprintf() functions, this would be a good way to add additional functionality that took
advantage of the power scanf() has to offer.

Return Value
Returns the number of items successfully scanned, or EOF on end-of-file or error.

Example
I have to admit I was wracking my brain to think of when you’d ever want to use this. The best example I
could find was one on Stack Overflow4 that error-checks the return value from scanf() against the expected.
A variant of that is shown below.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdarg.h>
3 #include <assert.h>
4

5 int error_check_scanf(int expected_count, char *format, ...)

6 {
7 va_list va;
8

4
https://stackoverflow.com/questions/17017331/c99-vscanf-for-dummies/17018046#17018046
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 522

9 va_start(va, format);
10 int count = vscanf(format, va);
11 va_end(va);
12

13 // This line will crash the program if the condition is false:

14 assert(count == expected_count);
15

16 return count;
17 }
18

19 int main(void)
20 {
21 int a, b;
22 float c;
23

24 error_check_scanf(3, "%d, %d/%f", &a, &b, &c);

25 error_check_scanf(2, "%d", &a);
26 }

See Also
scanf()

61.14 getc(), fgetc(), getchar()

Get a single character from the console or from a file

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

int getc(FILE *stream);

int fgetc(FILE *stream);

int getchar(void);

Description
All of these functions in one way or another, read a single character from the console or from a FILE. The
differences are fairly minor, and here are the descriptions:
getc() returns a character from the specified FILE. From a usage standpoint, it’s equivalent to the same
fgetc() call, and fgetc() is a little more common to see. Only the implementation of the two functions
differs.
fgetc() returns a character from the specified FILE. From a usage standpoint, it’s equivalent to the same
getc() call, except that fgetc() is a little more common to see. Only the implementation of the two
functions differs.
Yes, I cheated and used cut-n-paste to do that last paragraph.
getchar() returns a character from stdin. In fact, it’s the same as calling getc(stdin).
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 523

Return Value
All three functions return the unsigned char that they read, except it’s cast to an int.
If end-of-file or an error is encountered, all three functions return EOF.

Example
This example reads all the characters from a file, outputting only the letter ’b’s it finds..
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 FILE *fp;
6 int c;
7

8 fp = fopen("spoon.txt", "r"); // error check this!

9

10 // this while-statement assigns into c, and then checks against EOF:

11

12 while((c = fgetc(fp)) != EOF) {

13 if (c == 'b') {
14 putchar(c);
15 }
16 }
17

18 putchar('\n');
19

20 fclose(fp);
21 }

See Also

61.15 gets(), fgets()

Read a string from console or file

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

char *fgets(char *s, int size, FILE *stream);

char *gets(char *s);

Description
These are functions that will retrieve a newline-terminated string from the console or a file. In other normal
words, it reads a line of text. The behavior is slightly different, and, as such, so is the usage. For instance,
here is the usage of gets():
Don’t use gets(). In fact, as of C11, it ceases to exist! This is one of the rare cases of a function being
removed from the standard.
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 524

Admittedly, rationale would be useful, yes? For one thing, gets() doesn’t allow you to specify the length
of the buffer to store the string in. This would allow people to keep entering data past the end of your buffer,
and believe me, this would be Bad News.
And that’s what the size parameter in fgets() is for. fgets() will read at most size-1 characters and
then stick a NUL terminator on after that.
I was going to add another reason, but that’s basically the primary and only reason not to use gets(). As
you might suspect, fgets() allows you to specify a maximum string length.
One difference here between the two functions: gets() will devour and throw away the newline at the end
of the line, while fgets() will store it at the end of your string (space permitting).
Here’s an example of using fgets() from the console, making it behave more like gets() (with the excep-
tion of the newline inclusion):
char s[100];
gets(s); // don't use this--read a line (from stdin)
fgets(s, sizeof(s), stdin); // read a line from stdin

In this case, the sizeof() operator gives us the total size of the array in bytes, and since a char is a byte, it
conveniently gives us the total size of the array.
Of course, like I keep saying, the string returned from fgets() probably has a newline at the end that you
might not want. You can write a short function to chop the newline off—in fact, let’s just roll that into our
own version of gets()
#include <stdio.h>
#include <string.h>

char *ngets(char *s, int size)

{
char *rv = fgets(s, size, stdin);

if (rv == NULL)
return NULL;

char *p = strchr(s, '\n'); // Find a newline

if (p != NULL) // if there's a newline

*p = '\0'; // truncate the string there

return s;
}

So, in summary, use fgets() to read a line of text from the keyboard or a file, and don’t use gets().

Return Value
Both gets() and fgets() return a pointer to the string passed.
On error or end-of-file, the functions return NULL.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 525

4 {
5 FILE *fp;
6 char s[100];
7

8 gets(s); // read from standard input (don't use this--use fgets()!)

9

10 fgets(s, sizeof s, stdin); // read 100 bytes from standard input

11

12 fp = fopen("spoon.txt", "r"); // (you should error-check this)

13 fgets(s, 100, fp); // read 100 bytes from the file datafile.dat
14 fclose(fp);
15

16 fgets(s, 20, stdin); // read a maximum of 20 bytes from stdin

17 }

See Also
getc(), fgetc(), getchar(), puts(), fputs(), ungetc()

61.16 putc(), fputc(), putchar()

Write a single character to the console or to a file

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

int putc(int c, FILE *stream);

int fputc(int c, FILE *stream);

int putchar(int c);

Description
All three functions output a single character, either to the console or to a FILE.
putc() takes a character argument, and outputs it to the specified FILE. fputc() does exactly the same
thing, and differs from putc() in implementation only. Most people use fputc().
putchar() writes the character to the console, and is the same as calling putc(c, stdout).

Return Value
All three functions return the character written on success, or EOF on error.

Example
Print the alphabet:
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 526

1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 char i;
6

7 for(i = 'A'; i <= 'Z'; i++)

8 putchar(i);
9

10 putchar('\n'); // put a newline at the end to make it pretty

11 }

See Also

61.17 puts(), fputs()

Write a string to the console or to a file

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

int puts(const char *s);

int fputs(const char *s, FILE *stream);

Description
Both these functions output a NUL-terminated string. puts() outputs to the console, while fputs() allows
you to specify the file for output.

Return Value
Both functions return non-negative on success, or EOF on error.

Example
Read strings from the console and save them in a file:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 FILE *fp;
6 char s[100];
7

8 fp = fopen("somefile.txt", "w"); // error check this!

9

10 while(fgets(s, sizeof(s), stdin) != NULL) { // read a string

11 fputs(s, fp); // write it to the file we opened
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 527

12 }
13

14 fclose(fp);
15 }

See Also

61.18 ungetc()
Pushes a character back into the input stream

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

int ungetc(int c, FILE *stream);

Description
You know how getc() reads the next character from a file stream? Well, this is the opposite of that—it
pushes a character back into the file stream so that it will show up again on the very next read from the
stream, as if you’d never gotten it from getc() in the first place.
Why, in the name of all that is holy would you want to do that? Perhaps you have a stream of data that
you’re reading a character at a time, and you won’t know to stop reading until you get a certain character,
but you want to be able to read that character again later. You can read the character, see that it’s what you’re
supposed to stop on, and then ungetc() it so it’ll show up on the next read.
Yeah, that doesn’t happen very often, but there we are.
Here’s the catch: the standard only guarantees that you’ll be able to push back one character. Some imple-
mentations might allow you to push back more, but there’s really no way to tell and still be portable.

Return Value
On success, ungetc() returns the character you passed to it. On failure, it returns EOF.

Example
This example reads a piece of punctuation, then everything after it up to the next piece of punctuation. It
returns the leading punctuation, and stores the rest in a string.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <ctype.h>
3

4 int read_punctstring(FILE *fp, char *s)

5 {
6 int origpunct, c;
7

8 origpunct = fgetc(fp);
9

10 if (origpunct == EOF) // return EOF on end-of-file

 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 528

11 return EOF;
12

13 while (c = fgetc(fp), !ispunct(c) && c != EOF)

14 *s++ = c; // save it in the string
15

16 *s = '\0'; // nul-terminate the string

17

18 // if we read punctuation last, ungetc it so we can fgetc it next

19 // time:
20 if (ispunct(c))
21 ungetc(c, fp);
22

23 return origpunct;
24 }
25

26 int main(void)
27 {
28 char s[128];
29 char c;
30

31 while((c = read_punctstring(stdin, s)) != EOF) {

32 printf("%c: %s\n", c, s);
33 }
34 }

Sample Input:
!foo#bar*baz

Sample output:
!: foo
#: bar
*: baz

See Also
fgetc()

61.19 fread()
Read binary data from a file

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

size_t fread(void *p, size_t size, size_t nmemb, FILE *stream);

Description
You might remember that you can call fopen() with the “b” flag in the open mode string to open the file in
“binary” mode. Files open in not-binary (ASCII or text mode) can be read using standard character-oriented
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 529

calls like fgetc() or fgets(). Files open in binary mode are typically read using the fread() function.
All this function does is says, “Hey, read this many things where each thing is a certain number of bytes, and
store the whole mess of them in memory starting at this pointer.”
This can be very useful, believe me, when you want to do something like store 20 ints in a file.
But wait—can’t you use fprintf() with the “%d” format specifier to save the ints to a text file and store
them that way? Yes, sure. That has the advantage that a human can open the file and read the numbers. It
has the disadvantage that it’s slower to convert the numbers from ints to text and that the numbers are likely
to take more space in the file. (Remember, an int is likely 4 bytes, but the string “12345678” is 8 bytes.)
So storing the binary data can certainly be more compact and faster to read.

Return Value
This function returns the number of items successfully read. If all requested items are read, the return value
will be equal to that of the parameter nmemb. If EOF occurs, the return value will be zero.
To make you confused, it will also return zero if there’s an error. You can use the functions feof() or
ferror() to tell which one really happened.

Example
Read 10 numbers from a file and store them in an array:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int i;
6 int n[10]
7 FILE *fp;
8

9 fp = fopen("numbers.dat", "rb");
10 fread(n, sizeof(int), 10, fp); // read 10 ints
11 fclose(fp);
12

13 // print them out:

14 for(i = 0; i < 10; i++)
15 printf("n[%d] == %d\n", i, n[i]);
16 }

See Also
fopen(), fwrite(), feof(), ferror()

61.20 fwrite()
Write binary data to a file

Synopsis
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 530

#include <stdio.h>

size_t fwrite(const void *p, size_t size, size_t nmemb, FILE *stream);

Description
This is the counterpart to the fread() function. It writes blocks of binary data to disk. For a description of
what this means, see the entry for fread().

Return Value
fwrite() returns the number of items successfully written, which should hopefully be nmemb that you passed
in. It’ll return zero on error.

Example
Save 10 random numbers to a file:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 int i;
7 int n[10];
8 FILE *fp;
9

10 // populate the array with random numbers:

11 for(i = 0; i < 10; i++) {
12 n[i] = rand();
13 printf("n[%d] = %d\n", i, n[i]);
14 }
15

16 // save the random numbers (10 ints) to the file

17 fp = fopen("numbers.dat", "wb");
18 fwrite(n, sizeof(int), 10, fp); // write 10 ints
19 fclose(fp);
20 }

See Also
fopen(), fread()

61.21 fgetpos(), fsetpos()

Get the current position in a file, or set the current position in a file. Just like ftell() and fseek() for most
systems

Synopsis
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 531

#include <stdio.h>

int fgetpos(FILE *stream, fpos_t *pos);

int fsetpos(FILE *stream, fpos_t *pos);

Description
These functions are just like ftell() and fseek(), except instead of counting in bytes, they use an opaque
data structure to hold positional information about the file. (Opaque, in this case, means you’re not supposed
to know what the data type is made up of.)
On virtually every system (and certainly every system that I know of), people don’t use these functions, using
ftell() and fseek() instead. These functions exist just in case your system can’t remember file positions
as a simple byte offset.
Since the pos variable is opaque, you have to assign to it using the fgetpos() call itself. Then you save the
value for later and use it to reset the position using fsetpos().

Return Value
Both functions return zero on success, and -1 on error.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 char s[100];
6 fpos_t pos;
7 FILE *fp;
8

9 fp = fopen("spoon.txt", "r");
10

11 fgets(s, sizeof(s), fp); // read a line from the file

12 printf("%s", s);
13

14 fgetpos(fp, &pos); // save the position after the read

15

16 fgets(s, sizeof(s), fp); // read another line from the file

17 printf("%s", s);
18

19 fsetpos(fp, &pos); // now restore the position to where we saved

20

21 fgets(s, sizeof(s), fp); // read the earlier line again

22 printf("%s", s);
23

24 fclose(fp);
25 }
Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 532

See Also
fseek(), ftell(), rewind()

61.22 fseek(), rewind()

Position the file pointer in anticipition of the next read or write

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

int fseek(FILE *stream, long offset, int whence);

void rewind(FILE *stream);

Description
When doing reads and writes to a file, the OS keeps track of where you are in the file using a counter
generically known as the file pointer. You can reposition the file pointer to a different point in the file using
the fseek() call. Think of it as a way to randomly access you file.
The first argument is the file in question, obviously. offset argument is the position that you want to seek
to, and whence is what that offset is relative to.
Of course, you probably like to think of the offset as being from the beginning of the file. I mean, “Seek to
position 3490, that should be 3490 bytes from the beginning of the file.” Well, it can be, but it doesn’t have
to be. Imagine the power you’re wielding here. Try to command your enthusiasm.
You can set the value of whence to one of three things:

whence Description
SEEK_SET offset is relative to the beginning of the file. This is probably what you had in mind
anyway, and is the most commonly used value for whence.
SEEK_CUR offset is relative to the current file pointer position. So, in effect, you can say, “Move
to my current position plus 30 bytes,” or, “move to my current position minus 20 bytes.”
SEEK_END offset is relative to the end of the file. Just like SEEK_SET except from the other end of
the file. Be sure to use negative values for offset if you want to back up from the end
of the file, instead of going past the end into oblivion.

Speaking of seeking off the end of the file, can you do it? Sure thing. In fact, you can seek way off the end
and then write a character; the file will be expanded to a size big enough to hold a bunch of zeros way out to
that character.
Now that the complicated function is out of the way, what’s this rewind() that I briefly mentioned? It
repositions the file pointer at the beginning of the file:
fseek(fp, 0, SEEK_SET); // same as rewind()
rewind(fp); // same as fseek(fp, 0, SEEK_SET)
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 533

Return Value
For fseek(), on success zero is returned; -1 is returned on failure.
The call to rewind() never fails.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 FILE *fp;
6

7 fp = fopen("spoon.txt", "r");
8

9 fseek(fp, 100, SEEK_SET); // seek to the 100th byte of the file

10 printf("100: %c\n", fgetc(fp));
11

12 fseek(fp, -31, SEEK_CUR); // seek backward 30 bytes from the current pos
13 printf("31 back: %c\n", fgetc(fp));
14

15 fseek(fp, -12, SEEK_END); // seek to the 10th byte before the end of file
16 printf("12 from end: %c\n", fgetc(fp));
17

18 fseek(fp, 0, SEEK_SET); // seek to the beginning of the file

19 rewind(fp); // seek to the beginning of the file, too
20 printf("Beginning: %c\n", fgetc(fp));
21

22 fclose(fp);
23 }

See Also
ftell(), fgetpos(), fsetpos()

61.23 ftell()
Tells you where a particular file is about to read from or write to

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

long ftell(FILE *stream);

Description
This function is the opposite of fseek(). It tells you where in the file the next file operation will occur
relative to the beginning of the file.
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 534

It’s useful if you want to remember where you are in the file, fseek() somewhere else, and then come back
later. You can take the return value from ftell() and feed it back into fseek() (with whence parameter
set to SEEK_SET) when you want to return to your previous position.

Return Value
Returns the current offset in the file, or -1 on error.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 char c[6];
6 FILE *fp;
7

8 fp = fopen("spoon.txt", "r");
9

10 long pos;
11

12 // seek ahead 10 bytes:

13 fseek(fp, 10, SEEK_SET);
14

15 // store the current position in variable "pos":

16 pos = ftell(fp);
17

18 // Read some bytes

19 fread(c, sizeof c - 1, 1, fp);
20 c[5] = '\0';
21 printf("Read: \"%s\"\n", c);
22

23 // and return to the starting position, stored in "pos":

24 fseek(fp, pos, SEEK_SET);
25

26 // Read the same bytes again

27 fread(c, sizeof c - 1, 1, fp);
28 c[5] = '\0';
29 printf("Read: \"%s\"\n", c);
30

31 fclose(fp);
32 }

See Also
fseek(), rewind(), fgetpos(), fsetpos()

61.24 feof(), ferror(), clearerr()

Determine if a file has reached end-of-file or if an error has occurred
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 535

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>

int feof(FILE *stream);

int ferror(FILE *stream);

void clearerr(FILE *stream);

Description
Each FILE* that you use to read and write data from and to a file contains flags that the system sets when
certain events occur. If you get an error, it sets the error flag; if you reach the end of the file during a read, it
sets the EOF flag. Pretty simple really.
The functions feof() and ferror() give you a simple way to test these flags: they’ll return non-zero (true)
if they’re set.
Once the flags are set for a particular stream, they stay that way until you call clearerr() to clear them.

Return Value
feof() and ferror() return non-zero (true) if the file has reached EOF or there has been an error, respec-
tively.

Example
Read binary data, checking for EOF or error:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int a;
6 FILE *fp;
7

8 fp = fopen("numbers.dat", "r");
9

10 // read single ints at a time, stopping on EOF or error:

11

12 while(fread(&a, sizeof(int), 1, fp), !feof(fp) && !ferror(fp)) {

13 printf("Read %d\n", a);
14 }
15

16 if (feof(fp))
17 printf("End of file was reached.\n");
18

19 if (ferror(fp))
20 printf("An error occurred.\n");
21

22 fclose(fp);
23 }
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 536

See Also
fopen(), fread()

61.25 perror()
Print the last error message to stderr

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>
#include <errno.h> // only if you want to directly use the "errno" var

void perror(const char *s);

Description
Many functions, when they encounter an error condition for whatever reason, will set a global variable called
errno (in <errno.h>) for you. errno is just an interger representing a unique error.

But to you, the user, some number isn’t generally very useful. For this reason, you can call perror() after
an error occurs to print what error has actually happened in a nice human-readable string.
And to help you along, you can pass a parameter, s, that will be prepended to the error string for you.
One more clever trick you can do is check the value of the errno (you have to include errno.h to see it)
for specific errors and have your code do different things. Perhaps you want to ignore certain errors but not
others, for instance.
The standard only defines three values for errno, but your system undoubtedly defines more. The three that
are defined are:

errno Description
EDOM Math operation outside domain.
EILSEQ Invalid sequence in multibyte to wide character encoding.
ERANGE Result of operation doesn’t fit in specified type.

The catch is that different systems define different values for errno, so it’s not very portable beyond the
above 3. The good news is that at least the values are largely portable between Unix-like systems, at least.

Return Value
Returns nothing at all! Sorry!

Example
fseek() returns -1 on error, and sets errno, so let’s use it. Seeking on stdin makes no sense, so it should
generate an error:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <errno.h> // must include this to see "errno" in this example
3

4 int main(void)
 Chapter 61. <stdio.h> Standard I/O Library 537

5 {
6 if (fseek(stdin, 10L, SEEK_SET) < 0)
7 perror("fseek");
8

9 fclose(stdin); // stop using this stream

10

11 if (fseek(stdin, 20L, SEEK_CUR) < 0) {

12

13 // specifically check errno to see what kind of

14 // error happened...this works on Linux, but your
15 // mileage may vary on other systems!
16

17 if (errno == EBADF) {
18 perror("fseek again, EBADF");
19 } else {
20 perror("fseek again");
21 }
22 }
23 }

And the output is:

fseek: Illegal seek
fseek again, EBADF: Bad file descriptor

See Also
feof(), ferror(), strerror()
Chapter 62

<stdlib.h> Standard Library

Functions

Some of the following functions have variants that handle different types: atoi(), strtod(), strtol(),
abs(), and div(). Only a single one is listed here for brevity.

Function Description
_Exit() Exit the currently-running program and don’t look back
abort() Abruptly end program execution
abs() Compute the absolute value of an integer
aligned_alloc() Allocate specifically-aligned memory
at_quick_exit() Set up handlers to run when the program quickly exits
atexit() Set up handlers to run when the program exits
atof() Convert a string to a floating point value
atoi() Convert an integer in a string into a integer type
bsearch() Binary Search (maybe) an array of objects
calloc() Allocate and clear memory for arbitrary use
div() Compute the quotient and remainder of two numbers
exit() Exit the currently-running program
free() Free a memory region
getenv() Get the value of an environment variable
malloc() Allocate memory for arbitrary use
mblen() Return the number of bytes in a multibyte character
mbstowcs() Convert a multibyte string to a wide character string
mbtowc() Convert a multibyte character to a wide character
qsort() Quicksort (maybe) some data
quick_exit() Exit the currently-running program quickly
rand() Return a pseudorandom number
realloc() Resize a previously allocated stretch of memory
srand() Seed the built-in pseudorandom number generator
strtod() Convert a string to a floating point number
strtol() Convert a string to an integer
system() Run an external program
wcstombs() Convert a wide character string to a multibyte string
wctomb() Convert a wide character to a multibyte character

The <stdlib.h> header has all kinds of—dare I say—miscellaneous functions bundled into it. This func-

538
Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 539

tionality includes:
• Conversions from numbers to strings
• Conversions from strings to numbers
• Pseudorandom number generation
• Dynamic memory allocation
• Various ways to exit the program
• Ability to run external programs
• Binary search (or some fast search)
• Quicksort (or some fast sort)
• Integer arithmetic functions
• Multibyte and wide character and string conversions
So, you know… a little of everything.

62.1 <stdlib.h> Types and Macros

A couple new types and macros are introduced, though some of these might also be defined elsewhere:

Type Description
size_t Returned from sizeof and used elsewhere
wchar_t For wide character operations
div_t For the div() function
ldiv_t For the ldiv() function
lldiv_t for the lldiv() function

And some macros:

Type Description
NULL Our good pointer friend
EXIT_SUCCESS Good exit status when things go well
EXIT_FAILURE Good exit status when things go poorly
RAND_MAX The maximum value that can be returned by the
rand() function
MB_CUR_MAX Maximum number of bytes in a multibyte character
in the current locale

And there you have it. Just a lot of fun, useful functions in here. Let’s check ’em out!

62.2 atof()
Convert a string to a floating point value

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

double atof(const char *nptr);

 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 540

Description
This stood for “ASCII-To-Floating” back in the day1 , but no one would dare to use such coarse language
now.
But the gist is the same: we’re going to convert a string with numbers and (optionally) a decimal point into
a floating point value. Leading whitespace is ignored, and translation stops at the first invalid character.
If the result doesn’t fit in a double, behavior is undefined.
It generally works as if you’d called strtod():
strtod(nptr, NULL)

So check out that reference page for more info.

In fact, strtod() is just better and you should probably use that.

Return Value
Returns the string converted to a double.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double x = atof("3.141593");
7

8 printf("%f\n", x); // 3.141593

9 }

See Also
atoi(), strtod()

62.3 atoi(), atol(), atoll()

Convert an integer in a string into a integer type

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

int atoi(const char *nptr);

long int atol(const char *nptr);

long long int atoll(const char *nptr);

1
http://man.cat-v.org/unix-1st/3/atof
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 541

Description
Back in the day, atoi() stood for “ASCII-To_Integer”2 but now the spec makes no mention of that.
These functions take a string with a number in them and convert it to an integer of the specified return type.
Leading whitespace is ignored. Translation stops at the first invalid character.
If the result doesn’t fit in the return type, behavior is undefined.
It generally works as if you’d called strtol() family of functions:
atoi(nptr) // is basically the same as...
(int)strtol(nptr, NULL, 10)

atol(nptr) // is basically the same as...

strtol(nptr, NULL, 10)

atoll(nptr) // is basically the same as...

strtoll(nptr, NULL, 10)

Again, the strtol() functions are generally better, so I recommend them instead of these.

Return Value
Returns an integer result corresponding to the return type.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 int x = atoi("3490");
7

8 printf("%d\n", x); // 3490

9 }

See Also
atof(), strtol()

62.4 strtod(), strtof(), strtold()

Convert a string to a floating point number

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

double strtod(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr);

2
http://man.cat-v.org/unix-1st/3/atoi
Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 542

float strtof(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr);

long double strtold(const char * restrict nptr, char ** restrict endptr);

Description
These are some neat functions that convert strings to floating point numbers (or even NaN or Infinity) and
provide some error checking, besides.
Firstly, leading whitespace is skipped.
Then the functions attempt to convert characters into the floating point result. Finally, when an invalid
character (or NUL character) is reached, they set endptr to point to the invalid character.
Set endptr to NULL if you don’t care about where the first invalid character is.
If you didn’t set endptr to NULL, it will point to a NUL character if the translation didn’t find any bad
characters. That is:
if (*endptr == '\0') {
printf("What a perfectly-formed number!\n");
} else {
printf("I found badness in your number: \"%s\"\n", endptr);
}

But guess what! You can also translate strings into special values, like NaN and Infinity!
If nptr points to a string containing INF or INFINITY (upper or lowercase), the value for Infinity will be
returned.
If nptr points to a string containing NAN, then (a quiet, non-signalling) NaN will be returned. You can tag
the NAN with a sequence of characters from the set 0-9, a-z, A-Z, and _ by enclosing them in parens:
NAN(foobar_3490)

What your compiler does with this is implementation-defined, but it can be used to specify different kinds of
NaN.
You can also specify a number in hexadecimal with a power-of-two exponent (2𝑥 ) if you lead with 0x (or
0X). For the exponent, use a p followed by a base 10 exponent. (You can’t use e because that’s a valid hex
digit!)
Example:
0xabc.123p15

Which computes to 0𝑥𝑎𝑏𝑐.123 × 215 .

You can put in FLT_DECIMAL_DIG, DBL_DECIMAL_DIG, or LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG digits and get a correctly-
rounded result for the type.

Return Value
Returns the converted number. If there was no number, returns 0. endptr is set to point to the first invalid
character, or the NUL terminator if all characters were consumed.
If there’s an overflow, HUGE_VAL, HUGE_VALF, or HUGE_VALL is returned, signed like the input, and errno
is set to ERANGE.
If there’s an underflow, it returns the smallest number closest to zero with the input sign. errno may be set
to ERANGE.
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 543

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char *inp = " 123.4567beej";
7 char *badchar;
8

9 double val = strtod(inp, &badchar);

10

11 printf("Converted string to %f\n", val);

12 printf("Encountered bad characters: %s\n", badchar);
13

14 val = strtod("987.654321beej", NULL);

15 printf("Ignoring bad chars for result: %f\n", val);
16

17 val = strtod("11.2233", &badchar);

18

19 if (*badchar == '\0')
20 printf("No bad chars: %f\n", val);
21 else
22 printf("Found bad chars: %f, %s\n", val, badchar);
23 }

Output:
Converted string to 123.456700
Encountered bad characters: beej
Ignoring bad chars: 987.654321
No bad chars: 11.223300

See Also
atof(), strtol()

62.5 strtol(), strtoll(), strtoul(), strtoull()

Convert a string to an integer

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

long int strtol(const char * restrict nptr,

char ** restrict endptr, int base);

long long int strtoll(const char * restrict nptr,

char ** restrict endptr, int base);

unsigned long int strtoul(const char * restrict nptr,

 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 544

char ** restrict endptr, int base);

unsigned long long int strtoull(const char * restrict nptr,

char ** restrict endptr, int base);

Description
These convert a string to an integer like atoi(), but they have a few more bells and whistles.
Most notable, they can tell you where conversion started going wrong, i.e. where invalid characters, if any,
appear. Leading spaces are ignored. A + or - sign may precede the number.
The basic idea is that if things go well, these functions will return the integer values contained in the strings.
And if you pass in the char** typed endptr, it’ll set it to point at the NUL at the end of the string.
If things don’t go well, they’ll set endptr to point at the first character where things have gone awry. That
is, if you’re converting a value 103z2! in base 10, they’ll send endptr to point at the z because that’s the
first non-numeric character.
You can pass in NULL for endptr if you don’t care to do any of that kind of error checking.
Wait—did I just say we could set the number base for the conversion? Yes! Yes, I did. Now number bases3
are out of scope for this document, but certainly some of the more well-known are binary (base 2), octal
(base 8), decimal (base 10), and hexadecimal (base 16).
You can specify the number base for the conversion as the third parameter. Bases from 2 to 36 are supported,
with case-insensitive digits running from 0 to Z.
If you specify a base of 0, the function will make an effort to determine it. It’ll default to base 10 except for
a couple cases:
• If the number has a leading 0, it will be octal (base 8)
• If the number has a leading 0x or 0X, it will be hex (base 16)
The locale might affect the behavior of these functions.

Return Value
Returns the converted value.
endptr, if not NULL is set to the first invalid character, or to the beginning of the string if no conversion was
performed, or to the string terminal NUL if all characters were valid.
If there’s overflow, one of these values will be returned: LONG_MIN, LONG_MAX, LLONG_MIN, LLONG_MAX,
ULONG_MAX, ULLONG_MAX. And errno is set to ERANGE.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // All output in decimal (base 10)
7

8 printf("%ld\n", strtol("123", NULL, 0)); // 123

9 printf("%ld\n", strtol("123", NULL, 10)); // 123

3
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Radix
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 545

10 printf("%ld\n", strtol("101010", NULL, 2)); // binary, 42

11 printf("%ld\n", strtol("123", NULL, 8)); // octal, 83
12 printf("%ld\n", strtol("123", NULL, 16)); // hex, 291
13

14 printf("%ld\n", strtol("0123", NULL, 0)); // octal, 83

15 printf("%ld\n", strtol("0x123", NULL, 0)); // hex, 291
16

17 char *badchar;
18 long int x = strtol(" 1234beej", &badchar, 0);
19

20 printf("Value is %ld\n", x); // Value is 1234

21 printf("Bad chars at \"%s\"\n", badchar); // Bad chars at "beej"
22 }

Output:
123
123
42
83
291
83
291
Value is 1234
Bad chars at "beej"

See Also
atoi(), strtod(), setlocale(), strtoimax(), strtoumax()

62.6 rand()
Return a pseudorandom number

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

int rand(void);

Description
This gives us back a pseudorandom number in the range 0 to RAND_MAX, inclusive. (RAND_MAX will be at
least 32767.)
If you want to force this to a certain range, the classic way to do this is to force it with the modulo operator %,
although this introduces biases4 if RAND_MAX+1 is not a multiple of the number you’re modding by. Dealing
with this is out of scope for this guide.
4
https://stackoverflow.com/questions/10984974/why-do-people-say-there-is-modulo-bias-when-using-a-random-number-
generator
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 546

If you want to to make a floating point number between 0 and 1 inclusive, you can divide the result by
RAND_MAX. Or RAND_MAX+1 if you don’t want to include 1. But of course, there are out-of-scope problems
with this, as well5 .
In short, rand() is a great way to get potentially poor random numbers with ease. Probably good enough
for the game you’re writing.
The spec elaborates:
There are no guarantees as to the quality of the random sequence produced and some implemen-
tations are known to produce sequences with distressingly non-random low-order bits. Applica-
tions with particular requirements should use a generator that is known to be sufficient for their
needs.
Your system probably has a good random number generator on it if you need a stronger source. Linux users
have getrandom(), for example, and Windows has CryptGenRandom().
For other more demanding random number work, you might find a library like the GNU Scientific Library6
of use.
With most implementations, the numbers produced by rand() will be the same from run to run. To get
around this, you need to start it off in a different place by passing a seed into the random number generator.
You can do this with srand().

Return Value
Returns a random number in the range 0 to RAND_MAX, inclusive.

Example
Note that all of these examples don’t produce perfectly uniform distributions. But good enough for the
untrained eye, and really common in general use when mediocre random number quality is acceptable.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("RAND_MAX = %d\n", RAND_MAX);
7

8 printf("0 to 9: %d\n", rand() % 10);

9

10 printf("10 to 44: %d\n", rand() % 35 + 10);

11 printf("0 to 0.99999: %f\n", rand() / ((float)RAND_MAX + 1));
12 printf("10.5 to 15.7: %f\n", 10.5 + 5.2 * rand() / (float)RAND_MAX);
13 }

Output on my system:
RAND_MAX = 2147483647
0 to 9: 3
10 to 44: 21
0 to 0.99999: 0.783099
10.5 to 15.7: 14.651888

Example of seeding the RNG with the time:

5
https://mumble.net/~campbell/2014/04/28/uniform-random-float
6
https://www.gnu.org/software/gsl/doc/html/rng.html
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 547

1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <time.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 // time(NULL) very likely returns the number of seconds since
8 // January 1, 1970:
9

10 srand(time(NULL));
11

12 for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)

13 printf("%d\n", rand());
14 }

See Also
srand()

62.7 srand()
Seed the built-in pseudorandom number generator

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

void srand(unsigned int seed);

Description
The dirty little secret of pseudorandom number generation is that they’re completely deterministic. There’s
nothing random about them. They just look random.
If you use rand() and run your program several times, you might notice something fishy: they produce the
same random numbers over and over again.
To mix it up, we need to give the pseudorandom number generator a new “starting point”, if you will. We
call that the seed. It’s just a number, but it is used as the basic for subsequent number generation. Give a
different seed, and you’ll get a different sequence of random numbers. Give the same seed, and you’ll get
the same sequence of random numbers corresponding to it7 .
So if you call srand(3490) before you start generating numbers with rand(), you’ll get the same sequence
every time. srand(37) would also give you the same sequence every time, but it would be a different
sequence than the one you got with srand(3490).
But if you can’t hardcode the seed (because that would give you the same sequence every time), how are you
supposed to do this?
7
Minecraft enthusiasts might recall that when generating a new world, they were given the option to enter a random number seed.
That single value is used to generate that entire random world. And if your friend starts a world with the same seed you did, they’ll get
the same world you did.
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 548

It’s really common to use the number of seconds since January 1, 1970 (this date is known as the Unix
epoch8 ) to seed the generator. This sounds pretty arbitrary except for the fact that it’s exactly the value most
implementations return from the library call time(NULL)9 .
We’ll do that in the example.
If you don’t call srand(), it’s as if you called srand(1).

Return Value
Returns nothing!

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <time.h> // for the time() call
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 srand(time(NULL));
8

9 for (int i = 0; i < 5; i++)

10 printf("%d\n", rand() % 32);
11 }

Output:
4
20
22
14
9

Output from a subsequent run:

19
0
31
31
24

See Also
rand(), time()

62.8 aligned_alloc()
Allocate specifically-aligned memory
8
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unix_time
9
The C spec doesn’t say exactly what time(NULL) will return, but the POSIX spec does! And virtually everyone returns exactly
that: the number of seconds since epoch.
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 549

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

void *aligned_alloc(size_t alignment, size_t size);

Description
Maybe you wanted malloc() or calloc() instead of this. But if you’re sure you don’t, read on!
Normally you don’t have to think about this, since malloc() and realloc() both provide memory regions
that are suitably aligned10 for use with any data type.
But if you need a more specific alignment, you can specify it with this function.
When you’re done using the memory region, be sure to free it with a call to free().
Don’t pass in 0 for the size. It probably won’t do anything you want.
In case you’re wondering, all dynamically-allocated memory is automatically freed by the system when the
program ends. That said, it’s considered to be Good Form to explicitly free() everything you allocate. This
way other programmers don’t think you were being sloppy.

Return Value
Returns a pointer to the newly-allocated memory, aligned as specified. Returns NULL if something goes
wrong.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <stdint.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 int *p = aligned_alloc(256, 10 * sizeof(int));
8

9 // Just for fun, let's convert to intptr_t and mod with 256
10 // to make sure we're actually aligned on a 256-byte boundary.
11 //
12 // This is probably some kind of implementation-defined
13 // behavior, but I'll bet it works.
14

15 intptr_t ip = (intptr_t)p;
16

17 printf("%ld\n", ip % 256); // 0!
18

19 // Free it up
20 free(p);
21 }

10
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Data_structure_alignment
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 550

See Also
malloc(), calloc(), free()

62.9 calloc(), malloc()

Allocate memory for arbitrary use

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

void *calloc(size_t nmemb, size_t size);

void *malloc(size_t size);

Description
Both of these functions allocate memory for general-purpose use. It will be aligned such that it’s useable for
storing any data type.
malloc() allocates exactly the specified number of bytes of memory in a contiguous block. The memory
might be full of garbage data. (You can clear it with memset(), if you wish.)
calloc() is different in that it allocates space for nmemb objects of size bytes each. (You can do the same
with malloc(), but you have to do the multiplication yourself.)
calloc() has an additional feature: it clears all the memory to 0.

So if you’re planning to zero the memory anyway, calloc() is probably the way to go. If you’re not, you
can avoid that overhead by calling malloc().
When you’re done using the memory region, free it with a call to free().
Don’t pass in 0 for the size. It probably won’t do anything you want.
In case you’re wondering, all dynamically-allocated memory is automatically freed by the system when the
program ends. That said, it’s considered to be Good Form to explicitly free() everything you allocate. This
way other programmers don’t think you were being sloppy.

Return Value
Both functions return a pointer to the shiny, newly-allocated memory. Or NULL if something’s gone awry.

Example
Comparison of malloc() and calloc() for allocating 5 ints:
1 #include <stdlib.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 // Allocate space for 5 ints
6 int *p = malloc(5 * sizeof(int));
7

8 p[0] = 12;
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 551

9 p[1] = 30;
10

11 // Allocate space for 5 ints

12 // (Also clear that memory to 0)
13 int *q = calloc(5, sizeof(int));
14

15 q[0] = 12;
16 q[1] = 30;
17

18 // All done
19 free(p);
20 free(q);
21 }

See Also
aligned_alloc(), free()

62.10 free()
Free a memory region

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

void free(void *ptr);

Description
You know that pointer you got back from malloc(), calloc(), or aligned_alloc()? You pass that
pointer to free() to free the memory associated with it.
If you don’t do this, the memory will stay allocated FOREVER AND EVER! (Well, until your program exits,
anyway.)
Fun fact: free(NULL) does nothing. You can safely call that. Sometimes it’s convenient.
Don’t free() a pointer that’s already been free()d. Don’t free() a pointer that you didn’t get back from
one of the allocation functions. It would be Bad11 .

Return Value
Returns nothing!

Example
1 #include <stdlib.h>
2

11
“Try to imagine all life as you know it stopping instantaneously and every molecule in your body exploding at the speed of light.”
—Egon Spengler
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 552

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 // Allocate space for 5 ints
6 int *p = malloc(5 * sizeof(int));
7

8 p[0] = 12;
9 p[1] = 30;
10

11 // Free that space

12 free(p);
13 }

See Also
malloc(), calloc(), aligned_alloc()

62.11 realloc()
Resize a previously allocated stretch of memory

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

void *realloc(void *ptr, size_t size);

Description
This takes a pointer to some memory previously allocated with malloc() or calloc() and resizes it to the
new size.
If the new size is smaller than the old size, any data larger than the new size is discarded.
If the new size is larger than the old size, the new larger part is uninitialized. (You can clear it with memset().)
Important note: the memory might move! If you resize, the system might need to relocate the memory to a
larger continguous chunk. If this happens, realloc() will copy the old data to the new location for you.
Because of this, it’s important to save the returned value to your pointer to update it to the new location if
things move. (Also, be sure to error-check so that you don’t overwrite your old pointer with NULL, leaking
the memory.)
You can also relloc() memory allocated with aligned_alloc(), but it will potentially lose its alignment
if the block is moved.

Return Value
Returns a pointer to the resized memory region. This might be equivalent to the ptr passed in, or it might
be some other location.
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 553

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // Allocate space for 5 ints
7 int *p = malloc(5 * sizeof(int));
8

9 p[0] = 12;
10 p[1] = 30;
11

12 // Reallocate for 10 bytes

13 int *new_p = realloc(p, 10 * sizeof(int));
14

15 if (new_p == NULL) {
16 printf("Error reallocing\n");
17 } else {
18 p = new_p; // It's good; let's keep it
19 p[7] = 99;
20 }
21

22 // All done
23 free(p);
24 }

See Also
malloc(), calloc()

62.12 abort()
Abruptly end program execution

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

_Noreturn void abort(void);

Description
This ends program execution abnormally and immediately. Use this in rare, unexpected circumstances.
Open streams might not be flushed. Temporary files created might not be removed. Exit handlers are not
called.
A non-zero exit status is returned to the environment.
On some systems, abort() might dump core12 , but this is outside the scope of the spec.
12
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Core_dump
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 554

You can cause the equivalent of an abort() by calling raise(SIGABRT), but I don’t know why you’d do
that.
The only portable way to stop an abort() call midway is to use signal() to catch SIGABRT and then
exit() in the signal handler.

Return Value
This function never returns.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 int bad_thing = 1;
7

8 if (bad_thing) {
9 printf("This should never have happened!\n");
10 fflush(stdout); // Make sure the message goes out
11 abort();
12 }
13 }

On my system, this outputs:

This should never have happened!
zsh: abort (core dumped) ./foo

See Also
signal()

62.13 atexit(), at_quick_exit()

Set up handlers to run when the program exits

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

int atexit(void (*func)(void));

int at_quick_exit(void (*func)(void));

Description
When the program does a normal exit with exit() or returns from main(), it looks for previously-registered
handlers to call on the way out. These handlers are registered with the atexit() call.
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 555

Think of it like, “Hey, when you’re about to exit, do these extra things.”
For the quick_exit() call, you can use the at_quick_exit() function to register handlers for that13 .
There’s no crossover in handlers from exit() to quick_exit(), i.e. for a call to one, none of the other’s
handlers will fire.
You can register multiple handlers to fire—at least 32 handlers are supported by both exit() and
quick_exit().

The argument func to the functions looks a little weird—it’s a pointer to a function to call. Basically just
put the function name to call in there (without parentheses after). See the example, below.
If you call atexit() from inside your atexit() handler (or equivalent in your at_quick_exit() handler),
it’s unspecified if it will get called. So get them all registered before you exit.
When exiting, the functions will be called in the reverse order they were registered.

Return Value
These functions return 0 on success, or nonzero on failure.

Example
atexit():
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 void exit_handler_1(void)
5 {
6 printf("Exit handler 1 called!\n");
7 }
8

9 void exit_handler_2(void)
10 {
11 printf("Exit handler 2 called!\n");
12 }
13

14 int main(void)
15 {
16 atexit(exit_handler_1);
17 atexit(exit_handler_2);
18

19 exit(0);
20 }

For the output:

Exit handler 2 called!
Exit handler 1 called!

And a similar example with quick_exit():

1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 void exit_handler_1(void)

13
quick_exit() differs from exit() in that open files might not be flushed and temporary files might not be removed.
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 556

5 {
6 printf("Exit handler 1 called!\n");
7 }
8

9 void exit_handler_2(void)
10 {
11 printf("Exit handler 2 called!\n");
12 }
13

14 int main(void)
15 {
16 at_quick_exit(exit_handler_1);
17 at_quick_exit(exit_handler_2);
18

19 quick_exit(0);
20 }

See Also
exit(), quick_exit()

62.14 exit(), quick_exit(), _Exit()

Exit the currently-running program

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

_Noreturn void exit(int status);

_Noreturn void quick_exit(int status);

_Noreturn void _Exit(int status);

Description
All these functions cause the program to exit, with various levels of cleanup performed.
exit() does the most cleanup and is the most normal exit.

quick_exit() is the second most.

_Exit() unceremoniously drops everything and ragequits on the spot.

Calling either of exit() or quick_exit() causes their respective atexit() or at_quick_exit() handlers
to be called in the reverse order in which they were registered.
exit() will flush all streams and delete all temporary files.

quick_exit() or _Exit() might not perform that nicety.

_Exit() doesn’t call any of the at-exit handlers, either.

 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 557

For all functions, the exit status is returned to the environment.

Defined exit statuses are:

Status Description
EXIT_SUCCESS Typically returned when good things happen
0 Same as EXIT_SUCCESS
EXIT_FAILURE Oh noes! Definitely failure!
Any positive value Generally indicates another failure of some kind

OS X note: quick_exit() is not supported.

Return Value
None of these functions ever return.

Example
1 #include <stdlib.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 int contrived_exit_type = 1;
6

7 switch(contrived_exit_type) {
8 case 1:
9 exit(EXIT_SUCCESS);
10

11 case 2:
12 // Not supported in OS X
13 quick_exit(EXIT_SUCCESS);
14

15 case 3:
16 _Exit(2);
17 }
18 }

See Also
atexit(), at_quick_exit()

62.15 getenv()
Get the value of an environment variable

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

char *getenv(const char *name);

 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 558

Description
The environment often provides variables that are set before the program run that you can access at runtime.
Of course the exact details are system dependent, but these variables are key/value pairs, and you can get the
value by passing the key to getenv() as the name parameter.
You’re not allowed to overwrite the string that’s returned.
This is pretty limited in the standard, but your OS often provides better functionality. See the Environment
Variables section for more details.

Return Value
Returns a pointer to the environment variable value, or NULL if the variable doesn’t exist.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("PATH is %s\n", getenv("PATH"));
7 }

Output (truncated in my case):

PATH is /usr/bin:/usr/local/bin:/usr/sbin:/home/beej/.cargo/bin [...]

62.16 system()
Run an external program

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

int system(const char *string);

Description
This will run an external program and then return to the caller.
The manner in which it runs the program is system-defined, but typically you can pass something to it just
like you’d run on the command line, searching the PATH, etc.
Not all systems have this capability, but you can test for it by passing NULL to system() and seeing if it
returns 0 (no command processor is available) or non-zero (a command processor is available! Yay!)
If you’re getting user input and passing it to the system() call, be extremely careful to escape all special shell
characters (everything that’s not alphanumeric) with a backslash to keep a villain from running something
you don’t want them to.
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 559

Return Value
If NULL is passed, returns nonzero if a command processor is available (i.e. system() will work at all).
Otherwise returns an implementation-defined value.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("Here's a directory listing:\n\n");
7

8 system("ls -l"); // Run this command and return

9

10 printf("\nAll done!\n");
11 }

Output:
Here's a directory listing:

total 92
drwxr-xr-x 3 beej beej 4096 Oct 14 21:38 bin
drwxr-xr-x 2 beej beej 4096 Dec 20 20:07 examples
-rwxr-xr-x 1 beej beej 16656 Feb 23 21:49 foo
-rw-rw-rw- 1 beej beej 155 Feb 23 21:49 foo.c
-rw-r--r-- 1 beej beej 1350 Jan 27 22:11 Makefile
-rw-r--r-- 1 beej beej 4644 Jan 18 09:12 README.md
drwxr-xr-x 3 beej beej 4096 Feb 23 20:21 src
drwxr-xr-x 6 beej beej 4096 Feb 21 20:24 stage
drwxr-xr-x 2 beej beej 4096 Sep 27 20:54 translations
drwxr-xr-x 2 beej beej 4096 Sep 27 20:54 website

All done!

62.17 bsearch()
Binary Search (maybe) an array of objects

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

void *bsearch(const void *key, const void *base,

size_t nmemb, size_t size,
int (*compar)(const void *, const void *));

Description
This crazy-looking function searches an array for a value.
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 560

It probably is a binary search or some fast, efficient search. But the spec doesn’t really say.
However, the array must be sorted! So binary search seems likely.
• key is a pointer to the value to find.
• base is a pointer to the start of the array—the array must be sorted!
• nmemb is the number of elements in the array.
• size is the sizeof each element in the array.
• compar is a pointer to a function that will compare the key against other values.

The comparison function takes the key as the first argument and the value to compare against as the second.
It should return a negative number if the key is less than the value, 0 if the key equals the value, and a positive
number if the key is greater than the value.
This is commonly computed by taking the difference between the key and the value to be compared. If
subtraction is supported.
The return value from the strcmp() function can be used for comparing strings.
Again, the array must be sorted according to the order of the comparison function before running bsearch().
Luckily for you, you can just call qsort() with the same comparison function to get this done.
It’s a general-purpose function—it’ll search any type of array for anything. The catch is you have to write
the comparison function.
And that’s not as scary as it looks. Jump down to the example

Return Value
The function returns a pointer to the found value, or NULL if it can’t be found.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int compar(const void *key, const void *value)

5 {
6 const int *k = key, *v = value; // Need ints, not voids
7

8 return *k - *v;
9 }
10

11 int main(void)
12 {
13 int a[9] = {2, 6, 9, 12, 13, 18, 20, 32, 47};
14

15 int *r, key;

16

17 key = 12; // 12 is in there

18 r = bsearch(&key, a, 9, sizeof(int), compar);
19 printf("Found %d\n", *r);
20

21 key = 30; // Won't find a 30

22 r = bsearch(&key, a, 9, sizeof(int), compar);
23 if (r == NULL)
24 printf("Didn't find 30\n");
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 561

25

26 // Searching with an unnamed key, pointer to 32

27 r = bsearch(&(int){32}, a, 9, sizeof(int), compar);
28 printf("Found %d\n", *r); // Found it
29 }

Output:
Found 12
Didn't find 30
Found 32

See Also
strcmp(), qsort()

62.18 qsort()
Quicksort (maybe) some data

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

void qsort(void *base, size_t nmemb, size_t size,

int (*compar)(const void *, const void *));

Description
This function will quicksort (or some other sort, probably speedy) an array of data in-place14 .
Like bsearch(), it’s data-agnostic. Any data for which you can define a relative ordering can be sorted,
whether ints, structs, or anything else.
Also like bsearch(), you have to give a comparison function to do the actual compare.
• base is a pointer to the start of the array to be sorted.
• nmemb is the number of elements in the array.
• size is the sizeof each element.
• compar is a pointer to the comparison function.

The comparison function takes pointers to two elements of the array as arguments and compares them. It
should return a negative number if the first argument is less than the second, 0 if they are equal, and a positive
number if the first argument is greater than the second.
This is commonly computed by taking the difference between the first argument and the second. If subtraction
is supported.
The return value from the strcmp() function can provide sort order for strings.
If you have to sort a struct, just subtract the specific field you want to sort by.
This comparison function can be used by bsearch() to do searches after the list is sorted.
To reverse the sort, subtract the second argument from the first, i.e. negate the return value from compar().
14
“In-place” meaning that the original array will hold the results; no new array is allocated.
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 562

Return Value
Returns nothing!

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int compar(const void *elem0, const void *elem1)

5 {
6 const int *x = elem0, *y = elem1; // Need ints, not voids
7

8 if (*x > *y) return 1;

9 if (*x < *y) return -1;
10 return 0;
11 }
12

13 int main(void)
14 {
15 int a[9] = {14, 2, 3, 17, 10, 8, 6, 1, 13};
16

17 // Sort the list

18

19 qsort(a, 9, sizeof(int), compar);

20

21 // Print sorted list

22

23 for (int i = 0; i < 9; i++)

24 printf("%d ", a[i]);
25

26 putchar('\n');
27

28 // Use the same compar() function to binary search

29 // for 17 (passed in as an unnamed object)
30

31 int *r = bsearch(&(int){17}, a, 9, sizeof(int), compar);

32 printf("Found %d!\n", *r);
33 }

Output:
1 2 3 6 8 10 13 14 17
Found 17!

See Also
strcmp(), bsearch()

62.19 abs(), labs(), llabs()

Compute the absolute value of an integer
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 563

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

int abs(int j);

long int labs(long int j);

long long int llabs(long long int j);

Description
Compute the absolute value of j. If you don’t remember, that’s how far from zero j is.
In other words, if j is negative, return it as a positive. If it’s positive, return it as a positive. Always be
positive. Enjoy life.
If the result cannot be represented, the behavior is undefined. Be especially aware of the upper half of
unsigned numbers.

Return Value
Returns the absolute value of j, |𝑗|.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("|-2| = %d\n", abs(-2));
7 printf("|4| = %d\n", abs(4));
8 }

Output:
|-2| = 2
|4| = 4

See Also
fabs()

62.20 div(), ldiv(), lldiv()

Compute the quotient and remainder of two numbers

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>
Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 564

div_t div(int numer, int denom);

ldiv_t ldiv(long int numer, long int denom);

lldiv_t lldiv(long long int numer, long long int denom);

Description
These functions get you the quotient and remainder of a pair of numbers in one go.
They return a structure that has two fields, quot, and rem, the types of which match types of numer and
denom. Note how each function returns a different variant of div_t.

These div_t variants are equivalent to the following:

typedef struct {
int quot, rem;
} div_t;

typedef struct {
long int quot, rem;
} ldiv_t;

typedef struct {
long long int quot, rem;
} lldiv_t;

Why use these instead of the division operator?

The C99 Rationale says:
Because C89 had implementation-defined semantics for division of signed integers when nega-
tive operands were involved, div and ldiv, and lldiv in C99, were invented to provide well-
specified semantics for signed integer division and remainder operations. The semantics were
adopted to be the same as in Fortran. Since these functions return both the quotient and the re-
mainder, they also serve as a convenient way of efficiently modeling underlying hardware that
computes both results as part of the same operation. Table 7.2 summarizes the semantics of these
functions.
Indeed, K&R2 (C89) says:
The direction of truncation for / and the sign of the result for % are machine-dependent for
negative operands […]
The Rationale then goes on to spell out what the signs of the quotient and remainder will be given the signs
of a numerator and denominator when using the div() functions:

numer denom quot rem

+ + + +
− + − −
+ − − +
− − + −

Return Value
A div_t, ldiv_t, or lldiv_t structure with the quot and rem fields loaded with the quotient and remainder
of the operation of numer/denom.
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 565

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 div_t d = div(64, -7);
7

8 printf("64 / -7 = %d\n", d.quot);

9 printf("64 %% -7 = %d\n", d.rem);
10 }

Output:
64 / -7 = -9
64 % -7 = 1

See Also
fmod(), remainder()

62.21 mblen()
Return the number of bytes in a multibyte character

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

int mblen(const char *s, size_t n);

Description
If you have a multibyte character in a string, this will tell you how many bytes long it is.
n is the maximum number of bytes mblen() will scan before giving up.

If s is a NULL pointer, tests if this encoding has state dependency, as noted in the return value, below. It also
resets the state, if there is one.
The behavior of this function is influenced by the locale.

Return Value
Returns the number of bytes used to encode this character, or -1 if there is no valid multibyte character in
the next n bytes.
Or, if s is NULL, returns true if this encoding has state dependency.

Example
For the example, I used my extended character set to put Unicode characters in the source. If this doesn’t
work for you, use the \uXXXX escape.
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 566

1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <locale.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
8

9 printf("State dependency: %d\n", mblen(NULL, 0));

10 printf("Bytes for €: %d\n", mblen("€", 5));
11 printf("Bytes for \u00e9: %d\n", mblen("\u00e9", 5)); // \u00e9 == é
12 printf("Bytes for &: %d\n", mblen("&", 5));
13 }

Output (in my case, the encoding is UTF-8, but your mileage may vary):
State dependency: 0
Bytes for €: 3
Bytes for é: 2
Bytes for &: 1

See Also
mbtowc(), mbstowcs()), setlocale()

62.22 mbtowc()
Convert a multibyte character to a wide character

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

int mbtowc(wchar_t * restrict pwc, const char * restrict s, size_t n);

Description
If you have a multibyte character, this function will convert it to a wide character and stored at the address
pointed to by pwc. Up to n bytes of the multibyte character will be analyzed.
If pwc is NULL, the resulting character will not be stored. (Useful for just getting the return value.)
If s is a NULL pointer, tests if this encoding has state dependency, as noted in the return value, below. It also
resets the state, if there is one.
The behavior of this function is influenced by the locale.

Return Value
Returns the number of bytes used in the encoded wide character, or -1 if there is no valid multibyte character
in the next n bytes.
Returns 0 if s points to the NUL character.
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 567

Or, if s is NULL, returns true if this encoding has state dependency.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <locale.h>
4 #include <wchar.h>
5

6 int main(void)
7 {
8 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
9

10 printf("State dependency: %d\n", mbtowc(NULL, NULL, 0));

11

12 wchar_t wc;
13 int bytes;
14

15 bytes = mbtowc(&wc, "€", 5);

16

17 printf("L'%lc' takes %d bytes as multibyte char '€'\n", wc, bytes);

18 }

Output on my system:
State dependency: 0
L'€' takes 3 bytes as multibyte char '€'

See Also
mblen(), mbstowcs(), wcstombs(), setlocale()

62.23 wctomb()
Convert a wide character to a multibyte character

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

int wctomb(char *s, wchar_t wc);

Description
If you have your hands on a wide character, you can use this to make it multibyte.
The wide character wc is stored as a multibyte character in the string pointed to by s. The buffer s points to
should be at least MB_CUR_MAX characters long. Note that MB_CUR_MAX changes with locale.
If wc is a NUL wide character, a NUL is stored in s after the bytes needed to reset the shift state (if any).
If s is a NULL pointer, tests if this encoding has state dependency, as noted in the return value, below. It also
resets the state, if there is one.
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 568

The behavior of this function is influenced by the locale.

Return Value
Returns the number of bytes used in the encoded multibyte character, or -1 if wc does not correspond to any
valid multibyte character.
Or, if s is NULL, returns true if this encoding has state dependency.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <locale.h>
4 #include <wchar.h>
5

6 int main(void)
7 {
8 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
9

10 printf("State dependency: %d\n", mbtowc(NULL, NULL, 0));

11

12 int bytes;
13 char mb[MB_CUR_MAX + 1];
14

15 bytes = wctomb(mb, L'€');

16 mb[bytes] = '\0';
17

18 printf("L'€' takes %d bytes as multibyte char '%s'\n", bytes, mb);

19 }

Output on my system:
State dependency: 0
L'€' takes 3 bytes as multibyte char '€'

See Also
mbtowc(), mbstowcs(), wcstombs(), setlocale()

62.24 mbstowcs()
Convert a multibyte string to a wide character string

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

size_t mbstowcs(wchar_t * restrict pwcs, const char * restrict s, size_t n);

 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 569

Description
If you have a multibyte string (AKA a regular string), you can convert it wto a wide character string with
this function.
At most n wide characters are written to the destination pwcs from the source s.
A NUL character is stored as a wide NUL character.
Non-portable POSIX extension: if you’re using a POSIX-complaint library, this function allows pwcs to be
NULL if you’re only interested in the return value. Most notably, this will give you the number of characters
in a multibyte string (as opposed to strlen() which counts the bytes.)

Return Value
Returns the number of wide characters written to the destination pwcs.
If an invalid multibyte character was found, returns (size_t)(-1).
If the return value is n, it means the result was not NUL-terminated.

Example
This source uses an extended character set. If your compiler doesn’t support it, you’ll have to replace them
with \u escapes.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <locale.h>
4 #include <string.h>
5

6 int main(void)
7 {
8 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
9

10 wchar_t wcs[128];
11 char *s = "€200 for this spoon?"; // 20 characters
12

13 size_t char_count, byte_count;

14

15 char_count = mbstowcs(wcs, s, 128);

16 byte_count = strlen(s);
17

18 printf("Wide string: L\"%ls\"\n", wcs);

19 printf("Char count : %zu\n", char_count); // 20
20 printf("Byte count : %zu\n\n", byte_count); // 22 on my system
21

22 // POSIX Extension that allows you to pass NULL for

23 // the destination so you can just use the return
24 // value (which is the character count of the string,
25 // if no errors have occurred)
26

27 s = "§¶°±π€•"; // 7 characters
28

29 char_count = mbstowcs(NULL, s, 0); // POSIX-only, nonportable

30 byte_count = strlen(s);
31
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 570

32 printf("Multibyte str: \"%s\"\n", s);

33 printf("Char count : %zu\n", char_count); // 7
34 printf("Byte count : %zu\n", byte_count); // 16 on my system
35 }

Output on my system (byte count will depend on your encoding):

Wide string: L"€200 for this spoon?"
Char count : 20
Byte count : 22

Multibyte str: "§¶°±π€•"

Char count : 7
Byte count : 16

See Also
mblen(), mbtowc(), wcstombs(), setlocale()

62.25 wcstombs()
Convert a wide character string to a multibyte string

Synopsis
#include <stdlib.h>

size_t wcstombs(char * restrict s, const wchar_t * restrict pwcs, size_t n);

Description
If you have a wide character string and you want it as multibyte string, this is the function for you!
It’ll take the wide characters pointed to by pwcs and convert them to multibyte characters stored in s. No
more than n bytes will be written to s.
Non-portable POSIX extension: if you’re using a POSIX-complaint library, this function allows s to be NULL
if you’re only interested in the return value. Most notably, this will give you the number of bytes needed to
encode the wide characters in a multibyte string.

Return Value
Returns the number of bytes written to s, or (size_t)(-1) if one of the characters can’t be encoded into a
multibyte string.
If the return value is n, it means the result was not NUL-terminated.

Example
This source uses an extended character set. If your compiler doesn’t support it, you’ll have to replace them
with \u escapes.
 Chapter 62. <stdlib.h> Standard Library Functions 571

1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <locale.h>
4 #include <string.h>
5

6 int main(void)
7 {
8 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
9

10 char mbs[128];
11 wchar_t *wcs = L"€200 for this spoon?"; // 20 characters
12

13 size_t byte_count;
14

15 byte_count = wcstombs(mbs, wcs, 128);

16

17 printf("Wide string: L\"%ls\"\n", wcs);

18 printf("Multibyte : \"%s\"\n", mbs);
19 printf("Byte count : %zu\n\n", byte_count); // 22 on my system
20

21 // POSIX Extension that allows you to pass NULL for

22 // the destination so you can just use the return
23 // value (which is the character count of the string,
24 // if no errors have occurred)
25

26 wcs = L"§¶°±π€•"; // 7 characters

27

28 byte_count = wcstombs(NULL, wcs, 0); // POSIX-only, nonportable

29

30 printf("Wide string: L\"%ls\"\n", wcs);

31 printf("Byte count : %zu\n", byte_count); // 16 on my system
32 }

Output on my system (byte count will depend on your encoding):

Wide string: L"€200 for this spoon?"
Multibyte : "€200 for this spoon?"
Byte count : 22

Wide string: L"§¶°±π€•"

Byte count : 16

See Also
mblen(), wctomb(), mbstowcs(), setlocale()
 Chapter 63

<stdnoreturn.h> Macros for

Non-Returning Functions

This header provides a macro noreturn that is a handy alias for _Noreturn.
Use this macro to indicate to the compiler that a function will never return to the caller. It’s undefined
behavior if the so-marked function does return.
Here’s a usage example:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <stdnoreturn.h>
4

5 noreturn void foo(void) // This function should never return!

6 {
7 printf("Happy days\n");
8

9 exit(1); // And it doesn't return--it exits here!

10 }
11

12 int main(void)
13 {
14 foo();
15 }

That’s all there is to it.

572
Chapter 64

<string.h> String Manipulation

Function Description
memchr() Find the first occurrence of a character in memory.
memcmp() Compare two regions of memory.
memcpy() Copy a region of memory to another.
memmove() Move a (potentially overlapping) region of memory.
memset() Set a region of memory to a value.
strcat() Concatenate (join) two strings together.
strchr() Find the first occurrence of a character in a string.
strcmp() Compare two strings.
strcoll() Compare two strings accounting for locale.
strcpy() Copy a string.
strcspn() Find length of a string not consisting of a set of
characters.
strerror() Return a human-readable error message for a given
code.
strlen() Return the length of a string.
strncat() Concatenate (join) two strings, length-limited.
strncmp() Compare two strings, length-limited.
strncpy() Copy two strings, length-limited.
strpbrk() Search a string for one of a set of character.
strrchr() Find the last occurrence of a character in a string.
strspn() Find length of a string consisting of a set of
characters.
strstr() Find a substring in a string.
strtok() Tokenize a string.
strxfrm() Prepare a string for comparison as if by strcoll().

As has been mentioned earlier in the guide, a string in C is a sequence of bytes in memory, terminated by a
NUL character (‘\0’). The NUL at the end is important, since it lets all these string functions (and printf()
and puts() and everything else that deals with a string) know where the end of the string actually is.
Fortunately, when you operate on a string using one of these many functions available to you, they add the
NUL terminator on for you, so you actually rarely have to keep track of it yourself. (Sometimes you do,
especially if you’re building a string from scratch a character at a time or something.)
In this section you’ll find functions for pulling substrings out of strings, concatenating strings together, getting
the length of a string, and so forth and so on.

573
 Chapter 64. <string.h> String Manipulation 574

64.1 memcpy(), memmove()

Copy bytes of memory from one location to another

Synopsis
#include <string.h>

void *memcpy(void * restrict s1, const void * restrict s2, size_t n);

void *memmove(void *s1, const void *s2, size_t n);

Description
These functions copy memory—as many bytes as you want! From source to destination!
The main difference between the two is that memcpy() cannot safely copy overlapping memory regions,
whereas memmove() can.
On the one hand, I’m not sure why you’d want to ever use memcpy() instead of memmove(), but I’ll bet it’s
possibly more performant.
The parameters are in a particular order: destination first, then source. I remember this order because it
behaves like an “=” assignment: the destination is on the left.

Return Value
Both functions return whatever you passed in for parameter s1 for your convenience.

Example
1 #include <string.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 char s[100] = "Goats";
6 char t[100];
7

8 memcpy(t, s, 6); // Copy non-overlapping memory

9

10 memmove(s + 2, s, 6); // Copy overlapping memory

11 }

See Also
strcpy(), strncpy()

64.2 strcpy(), strncpy()

Copy a string
 Chapter 64. <string.h> String Manipulation 575

Synopsis
#include <string.h>

char *strcpy(char *dest, char *src);

char *strncpy(char *dest, char *src, size_t n);

Description
These functions copy a string from one address to another, stopping at the NUL terminator on the srcstring.
strncpy() is just like strcpy(), except only the first n characters are actually copied. Beware that if you
hit the limit, n before you get a NUL terminator on the src string, your dest string won’t be NUL-terminated.
Beware! BEWARE!
(If the src string has fewer than n characters, it works just like strcpy().)
You can terminate the string yourself by sticking the '\0' in there yourself:
char s[10];
char foo = "My hovercraft is full of eels."; // more than 10 chars

strncpy(s, foo, 9); // only copy 9 chars into positions 0-8

s[9] = '\0'; // position 9 gets the terminator

Return Value
Both functions return dest for your convenience, at no extra charge.

Example
1 #include <string.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 char *src = "hockey hockey hockey hockey hockey hockey hockey hockey";
6 char dest[20];
7

8 int len;
9

10 strcpy(dest, "I like "); // dest is now "I like "

11

12 len = strlen(dest);
13

14 // tricky, but let's use some pointer arithmetic and math to append
15 // as much of src as possible onto the end of dest, -1 on the length to
16 // leave room for the terminator:
17 strncpy(dest+len, src, sizeof(dest)-len-1);
18

19 // remember that sizeof() returns the size of the array in bytes

20 // and a char is a byte:
21 dest[sizeof(dest)-1] = '\0'; // terminate
22

23 // dest is now: v null terminator

 Chapter 64. <string.h> String Manipulation 576

24 // I like hockey hocke

25 // 01234567890123456789012345
26 }

See Also
memcpy(), strcat(), strncat()

64.3 strcat(), strncat()

Concatenate two strings into a single string

Synopsis
#include <string.h>

int strcat(const char *dest, const char *src);

int strncat(const char *dest, const char *src, size_t n);

Description
“Concatenate”, for those not in the know, means to “stick together”. These functions take two strings, and
stick them together, storing the result in the first string.
These functions don’t take the size of the first string into account when it does the concatenation. What this
means in practical terms is that you can try to stick a 2 megabyte string into a 10 byte space. This will lead
to unintended consequences, unless you intended to lead to unintended consequences, in which case it will
lead to intended unintended consequences.
Technical banter aside, your boss and/or professor will be irate.
If you want to make sure you don’t overrun the first string, be sure to check the lengths of the strings first
and use some highly technical subtraction to make sure things fit.
You can actually only concatenate the first n characters of the second string by using strncat() and speci-
fying the maximum number of characters to copy.

Return Value
Both functions return a pointer to the destination string, like most of the string-oriented functions.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <string.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char dest[30] = "Hello";
7 char *src = ", World!";
8 char numbers[] = "12345678";
 Chapter 64. <string.h> String Manipulation 577

10 printf("dest before strcat: \"%s\"\n", dest); // "Hello"

11

12 strcat(dest, src);
13 printf("dest after strcat: \"%s\"\n", dest); // "Hello, world!"
14

15 strncat(dest, numbers, 3); // strcat first 3 chars of numbers

16 printf("dest after strncat: \"%s\"\n", dest); // "Hello, world!123"
17 }

Notice I mixed and matched pointer and array notation there with src and numbers; this is just fine with
string functions.

See Also
strlen()

64.4 strcmp(), strncmp(), memcmp()

Compare two strings or memory regions and return a difference

Synopsis
#include <string.h>

int strcmp(const char *s1, const char *s2);

int strncmp(const char *s1, const char *s2, size_t n);

int memcmp(const void *s1, const void *s2, size_t n);

Description
All these functions compare chunks of bytes in memory.
strcmp() and strncmp() operate on NUL-terminated strings, whereas memcmp() will compare the number
of bytes you specify, brazenly ignoring any NUL characters it finds along the way.
strcmp() compares the entire string down to the end, while strncmp() only compares the first n characters
of the strings.
It’s a little funky what they return. Basically it’s a difference of the strings, so if the strings are the same,
it’ll return zero (since the difference is zero). It’ll return non-zero if the strings differ; basically it will find
the first mismatched character and return less-than zero if that character in s1 is less than the corresponding
character in s2. It’ll return greater-than zero if that character in s1 is greater than that in s2.
So if they return 0, the comparison was equal (i.e. the difference was 0.)
These functions can be used as comparison functions for qsort() if you have an array of char*s you want
to sort.
 Chapter 64. <string.h> String Manipulation 578

Return Value
Returns zero if the strings or memory are the same, less-than zero if the first different character in s1 is less
than that in s2, or greater-than zero if the first difference character in s1 is greater than than in s2.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <string.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char *s1 = "Muffin";
7 char *s2 = "Muffin Sandwich";
8 char *s3 = "Muffin";
9

10 int r1 = strcmp("Biscuits", "Kittens");

11 printf("%d\n", r1); // prints < 0 since 'B' < 'K'
12

13 int r2 = strcmp("Kittens", "Biscuits");

14 printf("%d\n", r2); // prints > 0 since 'K' > 'B'
15

16 if (strcmp(s1, s2) == 0)
17 printf("This won't get printed because the strings differ\n");
18

19 if (strcmp(s1, s3) == 0)
20 printf("This will print because s1 and s3 are the same\n");
21

22 // this is a little weird...but if the strings are the same, it'll

23 // return zero, which can also be thought of as "false". Not-false
24 // is "true", so (!strcmp()) will be true if the strings are the
25 // same. yes, it's odd, but you see this all the time in the wild
26 // so you might as well get used to it:
27

28 if (!strcmp(s1, s3))
29 printf("The strings are the same!\n");
30

31 if (!strncmp(s1, s2, 6))

32 printf("The first 6 characters of s1 and s2 are the same\n");
33 }

See Also
memcmp(), qsort()

64.5 strcoll()
Compare two strings accounting for locale
 Chapter 64. <string.h> String Manipulation 579

Synopsis
#include <string.h>

int strcoll(const char *s1, const char *s2);

Description
This is basically strcmp(), except that it handles accented characters better depending on the locale.
For example, my strcmp() reports that the character “é” (with accent) is greater than “f”. But that’s hardly
useful for alphabetizing.
By setting the LC_COLLATE locale value (either by name or via LC_ALL), you can have strcoll() sort in a
way that’s more meaningful by the current locale. For example, by having “é” appear sanely before “f”.
It’s also a lot slower than strcmp() so use it only if you have to. See strxfrm() for a potential speedup.

Return Value
Like the other string comparison functions, strcoll() returns a negative value if s1 is less than s2, or a
positive value if s1 is greater than s2. Or 0 if they are equal.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <string.h>
3 #include <locale.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
8

9 // If your source character set doesn't support "é" in a string

10 // you can replace it with `\u00e9`, the Unicode code point
11 // for "é".
12

13 printf("%d\n", strcmp("é", "f")); // Reports é > f, yuck.

14 printf("%d\n", strcoll("é", "f")); // Reports é < f, yay!
15 }

See Also
strcmp()

64.6 strxfrm()
Transform a string for comparing based on locale

Synopsis
 Chapter 64. <string.h> String Manipulation 580

#include <string.h>

size_t strxfrm(char * restrict s1, const char * restrict s2, size_t n);

Description
This is a strange little function, so bear with me.
Firstly, if you haven’t done so, get familiar with strcoll() because this is closely related to that.
OK! Now that you’re back, you can think of strxfrm() as the first part of the strcoll() internals. Basi-
cally, strcoll() has to transform a string into a form that can be compared with strcmp(). And it does
this with strxfrm() for both strings every time you call it.
strxform() takes string s2 and transforms it (readies it for strcmp()) storing the result in s1. It writes no
more than n bytes, protecting us from terrible buffer overflows.
But hang on—there’s another mode! If you pass NULL for s1 and 0 for n, it will return the number of bytes
that the transformed string would have used1 . This is useful if you need to allocate some space to hold the
transformed string before you strcmp() it against another.
What I’m getting at, not to be too blunt, is that strcoll() is slow compared to strcmp(). It does a lot of
extra work running strxfrm() on all its strings.
In fact, we can see how it works by writing our own like this:
1 int my_strcoll(char *s1, char *s2)
2 {
3 // Use n = 0 to just get the lengths of the transformed strings
4 int len1 = strxfrm(NULL, s1, 0) + 1;
5 int len2 = strxfrm(NULL, s2, 0) + 1;
6

7 // Allocate enough room for each

8 char *d1 = malloc(len1);
9 char *d2 = malloc(len2);
10

11 // Transform the strings for comparison

12 strxfrm(d1, s1, len1);
13 strxfrm(d2, s2, len2);
14

15 // Compare the transformed strings

16 int result = strcmp(d1, d2);
17

18 // Free up the transformed strings

19 free(d2);
20 free(d1);
21

22 return result;
23 }

You see on lines 12, 13, and 16, above how we transform the two input strings and then call strcmp() on
the result.
So why do we have this function? Can’t we just call strcoll() and be done with it?
1
It always returns the number of bytes the transformed string took, but in this case because s1 was NULL, it doesn’t actually write a
transformed string.
 Chapter 64. <string.h> String Manipulation 581

The idea is that if you have one string that you’re going to be comparing against a whole lot of other ones,
maybe you just want to transform that string one time, then use the faster strcmp() saving yourself a bunch
of the work we had to do in the function, above.
We’ll do that in the example.

Return Value
Returns the number of bytes in the transformed sequence. If the value is greater than n, the results in s1 are
meaningless.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <string.h>
3 #include <locale.h>
4 #include <stdlib.h>
5

6 // Transform a string for comparison, returning a malloc'd

7 // result
8 char *get_xfrm_str(char *s)
9 {
10 int len = strxfrm(NULL, s, 0) + 1;
11 char *d = malloc(len);
12

13 strxfrm(d, s, len);
14

15 return d;
16 }
17

18 // Does half the work of a regular strcoll() because the second

19 // string arrives already transformed.
20 int half_strcoll(char *s1, char *s2_transformed)
21 {
22 char *s1_transformed = get_xfrm_str(s1);
23

24 int result = strcmp(s1_transformed, s2_transformed);

25

26 free(s1_transformed);
27

28 return result;
29 }
30

31 int main(void)
32 {
33 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
34

35 // Pre-transform the string to compare against

36 char *s = get_xfrm_str("éfg");
37

38 // Repeatedly compare against "éfg"

39 printf("%d\n", half_strcoll("fgh", s)); // "fgh" > "éfg"
40 printf("%d\n", half_strcoll("àbc", s)); // "àbc" < "éfg"
41 printf("%d\n", half_strcoll("ĥij", s)); // "ĥij" > "éfg"
 Chapter 64. <string.h> String Manipulation 582

42

43 free(s);
44 }

See Also
strcoll()

64.7 strchr(), strrchr(), memchr()

Find a character in a string

Synopsis
#include <string.h>

char *strchr(char *str, int c);

char *strrchr(char *str, int c);

void *memchr(const void *s, int c, size_t n);

Description
The functions strchr() and strrchr find the first or last occurrence of a letter in a string, respectively. (The
extra “r” in strrchr() stands for “reverse”–it looks starting at the end of the string and working backward.)
Each function returns a pointer to the char in question, or NULL if the letter isn’t found in the string.
memchr() is similar, except that instead of stopping on the first NUL character, it continues searching for
however many bytes you specify.
Quite straightforward.
One thing you can do if you want to find the next occurrence of the letter after finding the first, is call the
function again with the previous return value plus one. (Remember pointer arithmetic?) Or minus one if
you’re looking in reverse. Don’t accidentally go off the end of the string!

Return Value
Returns a pointer to the occurrence of the letter in the string, or NULL if the letter is not found.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <string.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // "Hello, world!"
7 // ^ ^ ^
8 // A B C
9
 Chapter 64. <string.h> String Manipulation 583

10 char *str = "Hello, world!";

11 char *p;
12

13 p = strchr(str, ','); // p now points at position A

14 p = strrchr(str, 'o'); // p now points at position B
15

16 p = memchr(str, '!', 13); // p now points at position C

17

18 // repeatedly find all occurrences of the letter 'B'

19 str = "A BIG BROWN BAT BIT BEEJ";
20

21 for(p = strchr(str, 'B'); p != NULL; p = strchr(p + 1, 'B')) {

22 printf("Found a 'B' here: %s\n", p);
23 }
24 }

Output:
Found a 'B' here: BIG BROWN BAT BIT BEEJ
Found a 'B' here: BROWN BAT BIT BEEJ
Found a 'B' here: BAT BIT BEEJ
Found a 'B' here: BIT BEEJ
Found a 'B' here: BEEJ

64.8 strspn(), strcspn()

Return the length of a string consisting entirely of a set of characters, or of not a set of characters

Synopsis
#include <string.h>

size_t strspn(char *str, const char *accept);

size_t strcspn(char *str, const char *reject);

Description
strspn() will tell you the length of a string consisting entirely of the set of characters in accept. That is,
it starts walking down str until it finds a character that is not in the set (that is, a character that is not to be
accepted), and returns the length of the string so far.
strcspn() works much the same way, except that it walks down str until it finds a character in the reject
set (that is, a character that is to be rejected.) It then returns the length of the string so far.

Return Value
The length of the string consisting of all characters in accept (for strspn()), or the length of the string
consisting of all characters except reject (for strcspn()).
 Chapter 64. <string.h> String Manipulation 584

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <string.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char str1[] = "a banana";
7 char str2[] = "the bolivian navy on maenuvers in the south pacific";
8 int n;
9

10 // how many letters in str1 until we reach something that's not a vowel?
11 n = strspn(str1, "aeiou");
12 printf("%d\n", n); // n == 1, just "a"
13

14 // how many letters in str1 until we reach something that's not a, b,

15 // or space?
16 n = strspn(str1, "ab ");
17 printf("%d\n", n); // n == 4, "a ba"
18

19 // how many letters in str2 before we get a "y"?

20 n = strcspn(str2, "y");
21 printf("%d\n", n); // n = 16, "the bolivian nav"
22 }

See Also
strchr(), strrchr()

64.9 strpbrk()
Search a string for one of a set of characters

Synopsis
#include <string.h>

char *strpbrk(const char *s1, const char *s2);

Description
This function searches string s1 for any of the characters that are found in string s2.
It’s just like how strchr() searches for a specific character in a string, except it will match any of the
characters found in s2.
Think of the power!

Return Value
Returns a pointer to the first character matched in s1, or NULL if the string isn’t found.
 Chapter 64. <string.h> String Manipulation 585

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <string.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // p points here after strpbrk
7 // v
8 char *s1 = "Hello, world!";
9 char *s2 = "dow!"; // Match any of these chars
10

11 char *p = strpbrk(s1, s2); // p points to the o

12

13 printf("%s\n", p); // "o, world!"

14 }

See Also
strchr(), memchr()

64.10 strstr()
Find a string in another string

Synopsis
#include <string.h>

char *strstr(const char *str, const char *substr);

Description
Let’s say you have a big long string, and you want to find a word, or whatever substring strikes your fancy,
inside the first string. Then strstr() is for you! It’ll return a pointer to the substr within the str!

Return Value
You get back a pointer to the occurrence of the substr inside the str, or NULL if the substring can’t be found.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <string.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char *str = "The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dogs.";
7 char *p;
8
 Chapter 64. <string.h> String Manipulation 586

9 p = strstr(str, "lazy");
10 printf("%s\n", p == NULL? "null": p); // "lazy dogs."
11

12 // p is NULL after this, since the string "wombat" isn't in str:

13 p = strstr(str, "wombat");
14 printf("%s\n", p == NULL? "null": p); // "null"
15 }

See Also
strchr(), strrchr(), strspn(), strcspn()

64.11 strtok()
Tokenize a string

Synopsis
#include <string.h>

char *strtok(char *str, const char *delim);

Description
If you have a string that has a bunch of separators in it, and you want to break that string up into individual
pieces, this function can do it for you.
The usage is a little bit weird, but at least whenever you see the function in the wild, it’s consistently weird.
Basically, the first time you call it, you pass the string, str that you want to break up in as the first argument.
For each subsequent call to get more tokens out of the string, you pass NULL. This is a little weird, but
strtok() remembers the string you originally passed in, and continues to strip tokens off for you.

Note that it does this by actually putting a NUL terminator after the token, and then returning a pointer to
the start of the token. So the original string you pass in is destroyed, as it were. If you need to preserve the
string, be sure to pass a copy of it to strtok() so the original isn’t destroyed.

Return Value
A pointer to the next token. If you’re out of tokens, NULL is returned.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <string.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // break up the string into a series of space or
7 // punctuation-separated words
8 char str[] = "Where is my bacon, dude?";
 Chapter 64. <string.h> String Manipulation 587

9 char *token;
10

11 // Note that the following if-do-while construct is very very

12 // very very very common to see when using strtok().
13

14 // grab the first token (making sure there is a first token!)

15 if ((token = strtok(str, ".,?! ")) != NULL) {
16 do {
17 printf("Word: \"%s\"\n", token);
18

19 // now, the while continuation condition grabs the

20 // next token (by passing NULL as the first param)
21 // and continues if the token's not NULL:
22 } while ((token = strtok(NULL, ".,?! ")) != NULL);
23 }
24 }

Output:
Word: "Where"
Word: "is"
Word: "my"
Word: "bacon"
Word: "dude"

See Also
strchr(), strrchr(), strspn(), strcspn()

64.12 memset()
Set a region of memory to a certain value

Synopsis
#include <string.h>

void *memset(void *s, int c, size_t n);

Description
This function is what you use to set a region of memory to a particular value, namely c converted into
unsigned char.

The most common usage is to zero out an array or struct.

Return Value
memset() returns whatever you passed in as s for happy convenience.
 Chapter 64. <string.h> String Manipulation 588

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <string.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 struct banana {
7 float ripeness;
8 char *peel_color;
9 int grams;
10 };
11

12 struct banana b;
13

14 memset(&b, 0, sizeof b);

15

16 printf("%d\n", b.ripeness == 0.0); // True

17 printf("%d\n", b.peel_color == NULL); // True
18 printf("%d\n", b.grams == 0); // True
19 }

See Also
memcpy(), memmove()

64.13 strerror()
Get a string version of an error number

Synopsis
#include <string.h>

char *strerror(int errnum);

Description
This function ties closely into perror() (which prints a human-readable error message corresponding to
errno). But instead of printing, strerror() returns a pointer to the locale-specific error message string.

So if you ever need that string back for some reason (e.g. you’re going to fprintf() it to a file or something),
this function will give it to you. All you need to do is pass in errno as an argument. (Recall that errno gets
set as an error status by a variety of functions.)
You can actually pass in any integer for errnum you want. The function will return some message, even if
the number doesn’t correspond to any known value for errno.
The values of errno and the strings returned by strerror() are system-dependent.

Return Value
A string error message corresponding to the given error number.
 Chapter 64. <string.h> String Manipulation 589

You are not allowed to modify the returned string.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <string.h>
3 #include <errno.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 FILE *fp = fopen("NONEXISTENT_FILE.TXT", "r");
8

9 if (fp == NULL) {
10 char *errmsg = strerror(errno);
11 printf("Error %d opening file: %s\n", errno, errmsg);
12 }
13 }

Output:
Error 2 opening file: No such file or directory

See Also
perror()

64.14 strlen()
Returns the length of a string

Synopsis
#include <string.h>

size_t strlen(const char *s);

Description
This function returns the length of the passed null-terminated string (not counting the NUL character at
the end). It does this by walking down the string and counting the bytes until the NUL character, so it’s a
little time consuming. If you have to get the length of the same string repeatedly, save it off in a variable
somewhere.

Return Value
Returns the number of bytes in the string. Note that this might be different than the number of characters in
a multibyte string.

Example
 Chapter 64. <string.h> String Manipulation 590

1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <string.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char *s = "Hello, world!"; // 13 characters
7

8 // prints "The string is 13 characters long.":

9

10 printf("The string is %zu characters long.\n", strlen(s));

11 }

See Also
Chapter 65

<tgmath.h> Type-Generic Math

Functions

These are type-generic macros that are wrappers around the math functions in <math.h> and <complex.h>.
This header includes both of those.
Deep down, these are implemented using type generics as described in the Types Part V chapter.
But on the surface, you can think of them as being able to use, say, the sqrt() function with any type without
needed to think about if it’s double or long double or even complex.
These are the defined macros—some of them don’t have a counterpart in the real or complex space. Type
suffixes are omitted in the table on the Real and Complex columns. None of the generic macros have type
suffixes.

Real Function Complex Function Generic Macro

acos cacos acos
asin casin asin
atan catan atan
acosh cacosh acosh
asinh casinh asinh
atanh catanh atanh
cos ccos cos
sin csin sin
tan ctan tan
cosh ccosh cosh
sinh csinh sinh
tanh ctanh tanh
exp cexp exp
log clog log
pow cpow pow
sqrt csqrt sqrt
fabs cabs fabs
atan2 — atan2
fdim — fdim
cbrt — cbrt
floor — floor
ceil — ceil
fma — fma

591
 Chapter 65. <tgmath.h> Type-Generic Math Functions 592

Real Function Complex Function Generic Macro

copysign — copysign
fmax — fmax
erf — erf
fmin — fmin
erfc — erfc
fmod — fmod
exp2 — exp2
frexp — frexp
expm1 — expm1
hypot — hypot
ilogb — ilogb
ldexp — ldexp
lgamma — lgamma
llrint — llrint
llround — llround
log10 — log10
log1p — log1p
log2 — log2
logb — logb
lrint — lrint
lround — lround
nearbyint — nearbyint
nextafter — nextafter
nexttoward — nexttoward
remainder — remainder
remquo — remquo
rint — rint
round — round
scalbn — scalbn
scalbln — scalbln
tgamma — tgamma
trunc — trunc
— carg carg
— cimag cimag
— conj conj
— cproj cproj
— creal creal

65.1 Example
Here’s an example where we call the type-generic sqrt() function on a variety of types.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <tgmath.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 double x = 12.8;
7 long double y = 34.9;
8 double complex z = 1 + 2 * I;
9

10 double x_result;
 Chapter 65. <tgmath.h> Type-Generic Math Functions 593

11 long double y_result;

12 double complex z_result;
13

14 // We call the same sqrt() function--it's type-generic!

15 x_result = sqrt(x);
16 y_result = sqrt(y);
17 z_result = sqrt(z);
18

19 printf("x_result: %f\n", x_result);

20 printf("y_result: %Lf\n", y_result);
21 printf("z_result: %f + %fi\n", creal(z_result), cimag(z_result));
22 }

Output:
x_result: 3.577709
y_result: 5.907622
z_result: 1.272020 + 0.786151i
Chapter 66

<threads.h> Multithreading Functions

Function Description
call_once() Call a function one time no matter how many
threads try
cnd_broadcast() Wake up all threads waiting on a condition variable
cnd_destroy() Free up resources from a condition variable
cnd_init() Initialize a condition variable to make it ready for
use
cnd_signal() Wake up a thread waiting on a condition variable
cnd_timedwait() Wait on a condition variable with a timeout
cnd_wait() Wait for a signal on a condition variable
mtx_destroy() Cleanup a mutex when done with it
mtx_init() Initialize a mutex for use
mtx_lock() Acquire a lock on a mutex
mtx_timedlock() Lock a mutex allowing for timeout
mtx_trylock() Try to lock a mutex, returning if not possible
mtx_unlock() Free a mutex when you’re done with the critical
section
thrd_create() Create a new thread of execution
thrd_current() Get the ID of the calling thread
thrd_detach() Automatically clean up threads when they exit
thrd_equal() Compare two thread descriptors for equality
thrd_exit() Stop and exit this thread
thrd_join() Wait for a thread to exit
thrd_yield() Stop running that other threads might run
tss_create() Create new thread-specific storage
tss_delete() Clean up a thread-specific storage variable
tss_get() Get thread-specific data
tss_set() Set thread-specific data

We have a bunch of good things at our disposal with this one:

• Threads
• Mutexes
• Condition Variables
• Thread-Specific Storage
• And, last but not least, the always-fun call_once() function!

594
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 595

Enjoy!

66.1 call_once()
Call a function one time no matter how many threads try

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

void call_once(once_flag *flag, void (*func)(void));

Description
If you have a bunch of threads running over the same piece of code that calls a function, but you only want
that function to run one time, call_once() can help you out.
The catch is the function that is called doesn’t return anything and takes no arguments.
If you need more than that, you’ll have to set a threadsafe flag such as atomic_flag, or one that you protect
with a mutex.
To use this, you need to pass it a pointer to a function to execute, func, and also a pointer to a flag of type
once_flag.

once_flag is an opaque type, so all you need to know is that you initialize it to the value ONCE_FLAG_INIT.

Return Value
Returns nothing.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 once_flag of = ONCE_FLAG_INIT; // Initialize it like this

5

6 void run_once_function(void)
7 {
8 printf("I'll only run once!\n");
9 }
10

11 int run(void *arg)

12 {
13 (void)arg;
14

15 printf("Thread running!\n");
16

17 call_once(&of, run_once_function);
18

19 return 0;
20 }
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 596

21

22 #define THREAD_COUNT 5
23

24 int main(void)
25 {
26 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
27

28 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++)

29 thrd_create(t + i, run, NULL);
30

31 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++)

32 thrd_join(t[i], NULL);
33 }

Output (might vary per run):

Thread running!
Thread running!
I'll only run once!
Thread running!
Thread running!
Thread running!

66.2 cnd_broadcast()
Wake up all threads waiting on a condition variable

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

int cnd_broadcast(cnd_t *cond);

Description
This is just like cnd_signal() in that it wakes up threads that are waiting on a condition variable…. except
instead of just rousing one thread, it wakes them all.
Of course, only one will get the mutex, and the rest will have to wait their turn. But instead of being asleep
waiting for a signal, they’ll be asleep waiting to reacquire the mutex. They’re rearin’ to go, in other words.
This can make a difference in a specific set of circumstances where cnd_signal() might leave you hanging.
If you’re relying on subsequent threads to issue the next cnd_signal(), but you have the cnd_wait() in
a while loop1 that doesn’t allow any threads to escape, you’ll be stuck. No more threads will be woken up
from the wait.
But if you cnd_broadcast(), all the threads will be woken, and presumably at least one of them will be
allowed to escape the while loop, freeing it up to broadcast the next wakeup when its work is done.
1
Which you should because of spurious wakeups.
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 597

Return Value
Returns thrd_success or thrd_error depending on how well things went.

Example
In the example below, we launch a bunch of threads, but they’re only allowed to run if their ID matches the
current ID. If it doesn’t, they go back to waiting.
If you cnd_signal() to wake the next thread, it might not be the one with the proper ID to run. If it’s not,
it goes back to sleep and we hang (because no thread is awake to hit cnd_signal() again).
But if you cnd_broadcast() to wake them all, then they’ll all try (one after another) to get out of the while
loop. And one of them will make it.
Try switching the cnd_broadcast() to cnd_signal() to see likely deadlocks. It doesn’t happen every
time, but usually does.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 cnd_t condvar;
5 mtx_t mutex;
6

7 int run(void *arg)

8 {
9 int id = *(int*)arg;
10

11 static int current_id = 0;

12

13 mtx_lock(&mutex);
14

15 while (id != current_id) {

16 printf("THREAD %d: waiting\n", id);
17 cnd_wait(&condvar, &mutex);
18

19 if (id != current_id)
20 printf("THREAD %d: woke up, but it's not my turn!\n", id);
21 else
22 printf("THREAD %d: woke up, my turn! Let's go!\n", id);
23 }
24

25 current_id++;
26

27 printf("THREAD %d: signaling thread %d to run\n", id, current_id);

28

29 //cnd_signal(&condvar);
30 cnd_broadcast(&condvar);
31 mtx_unlock(&mutex);
32

33 return 0;
34 }
35

36 #define THREAD_COUNT 5
37

38 int main(void)
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 598

39 {
40 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
41 int id[] = {4, 3, 2, 1, 0};
42

43 mtx_init(&mutex, mtx_plain);
44 cnd_init(&condvar);
45

46 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++)

47 thrd_create(t + i, run, id + i);
48

49 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++)

50 thrd_join(t[i], NULL);
51

52 mtx_destroy(&mutex);
53 cnd_destroy(&condvar);
54 }

Example run with cnd_broadcast():

THREAD 4: waiting
THREAD 1: waiting
THREAD 3: waiting
THREAD 2: waiting
THREAD 0: signaling thread 1 to run
THREAD 2: woke up, but it's not my turn!
THREAD 2: waiting
THREAD 4: woke up, but it's not my turn!
THREAD 4: waiting
THREAD 3: woke up, but it's not my turn!
THREAD 3: waiting
THREAD 1: woke up, my turn! Let's go!
THREAD 1: signaling thread 2 to run
THREAD 4: woke up, but it's not my turn!
THREAD 4: waiting
THREAD 3: woke up, but it's not my turn!
THREAD 3: waiting
THREAD 2: woke up, my turn! Let's go!
THREAD 2: signaling thread 3 to run
THREAD 4: woke up, but it's not my turn!
THREAD 4: waiting
THREAD 3: woke up, my turn! Let's go!
THREAD 3: signaling thread 4 to run
THREAD 4: woke up, my turn! Let's go!
THREAD 4: signaling thread 5 to run

Example run with cnd_signal():

THREAD 4: waiting
THREAD 1: waiting
THREAD 3: waiting
THREAD 2: waiting
THREAD 0: signaling thread 1 to run
THREAD 4: woke up, but it's not my turn!
THREAD 4: waiting
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 599

[deadlock at this point]

See how THREAD 0 signaled that it was THREAD 1’s turn? But—bad news—it was THREAD 4 that got woken
up. So no one continued the process. cnd_broadcast() would have woken them all, so eventually THREAD
1 would have run, gotten out of the while, and broadcast for the next thread to run.

See Also
cnd_signal(), mtx_lock(), mtx_unlock()

66.3 cnd_destroy()
Free up resources from a condition variable

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

void cnd_destroy(cnd_t *cond);

Description
This is the opposite of cnd_init() and should be called when all threads are done using a condition variable.

Return Value
Returns nothing!

Example
General-purpose condition variable example here, but you can see the cnd_destroy() down at the end.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 cnd_t condvar;
5 mtx_t mutex;
6

7 int run(void *arg)

8 {
9 (void)arg;
10

11 mtx_lock(&mutex);
12

13 printf("Thread: waiting...\n");
14 cnd_wait(&condvar, &mutex);
15 printf("Thread: running again!\n");
16

17 mtx_unlock(&mutex);
18

19 return 0;
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 600

20 }
21

22 int main(void)
23 {
24 thrd_t t;
25

26 mtx_init(&mutex, mtx_plain);
27 cnd_init(&condvar);
28

29 printf("Main creating thread\n");

30 thrd_create(&t, run, NULL);
31

32 // Sleep 0.1s to allow the other thread to wait

33 thrd_sleep(&(struct timespec){.tv_nsec=100000000L}, NULL);
34

35 mtx_lock(&mutex);
36 printf("Main: signaling thread\n");
37 cnd_signal(&condvar);
38 mtx_unlock(&mutex);
39

40 thrd_join(t, NULL);
41

42 mtx_destroy(&mutex);
43 cnd_destroy(&condvar); // <-- DESTROY CONDITION VARIABLE
44 }

Output:
Main creating thread
Thread: waiting...
Main: signaling thread
Thread: running again!

See Also
cnd_init()

66.4 cnd_init()
Initialize a condition variable to make it ready for use

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

int cnd_init(cnd_t *cond);

Description
This is the opposite of cnd_destroy(). This prepares a condition variable for use, doing behind-the-scenes
work on it.
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 601

Don’t use a condition variable without calling this first!

Return Value
If all goes well, returns thrd_success. It all doesn’t go well, it could return thrd_nomem if the system is
out of memory, or thread_error in the case of any other error.

Example
General-purpose condition variable example here, but you can see the cnd_init() down at the start of
main().
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 cnd_t condvar;
5 mtx_t mutex;
6

7 int run(void *arg)

8 {
9 (void)arg;
10

11 mtx_lock(&mutex);
12

13 printf("Thread: waiting...\n");
14 cnd_wait(&condvar, &mutex);
15 printf("Thread: running again!\n");
16

17 mtx_unlock(&mutex);
18

19 return 0;
20 }
21

22 int main(void)
23 {
24 thrd_t t;
25

26 mtx_init(&mutex, mtx_plain);
27 cnd_init(&condvar); // <-- INITIALIZE CONDITION VARIABLE
28

29 printf("Main creating thread\n");

30 thrd_create(&t, run, NULL);
31

32 // Sleep 0.1s to allow the other thread to wait

33 thrd_sleep(&(struct timespec){.tv_nsec=100000000L}, NULL);
34

35 mtx_lock(&mutex);
36 printf("Main: signaling thread\n");
37 cnd_signal(&condvar);
38 mtx_unlock(&mutex);
39

40 thrd_join(t, NULL);
41

42 mtx_destroy(&mutex);
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 602

43 cnd_destroy(&condvar);
44 }

Output:
Main creating thread
Thread: waiting...
Main: signaling thread
Thread: running again!

See Also
cnd_destroy()

66.5 cnd_signal()
Wake up a thread waiting on a condition variable

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

int cnd_signal(cnd_t *cond);

Description
If you have a thread (or a bunch of threads) waiting on a condition variable, this function will wake one of
them up to run.
Compare to cnd_broadcast() that wakes up all the threads. See the cnd_broadcast() page for more
information on when you’re want to use that versus this.

Return Value
Returns thrd_success or thrd_error depending on how happy your program is.

Example
General-purpose condition variable example here, but you can see the cnd_signal() in the middle of
main().
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 cnd_t condvar;
5 mtx_t mutex;
6

7 int run(void *arg)

8 {
9 (void)arg;
10

11 mtx_lock(&mutex);
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 603

12

13 printf("Thread: waiting...\n");
14 cnd_wait(&condvar, &mutex);
15 printf("Thread: running again!\n");
16

17 mtx_unlock(&mutex);
18

19 return 0;
20 }
21

22 int main(void)
23 {
24 thrd_t t;
25

26 mtx_init(&mutex, mtx_plain);
27 cnd_init(&condvar);
28

29 printf("Main creating thread\n");

30 thrd_create(&t, run, NULL);
31

32 // Sleep 0.1s to allow the other thread to wait

33 thrd_sleep(&(struct timespec){.tv_nsec=100000000L}, NULL);
34

35 mtx_lock(&mutex);
36 printf("Main: signaling thread\n");
37 cnd_signal(&condvar); // <-- SIGNAL CHILD THREAD HERE!
38 mtx_unlock(&mutex);
39

40 thrd_join(t, NULL);
41

42 mtx_destroy(&mutex);
43 cnd_destroy(&condvar);
44 }

Output:
Main creating thread
Thread: waiting...
Main: signaling thread
Thread: running again!

See Also
cnd_init(), cnd_destroy()

66.6 cnd_timedwait()
Wait on a condition variable with a timeout
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 604

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

int cnd_timedwait(cnd_t *restrict cond, mtx_t *restrict mtx,

const struct timespec *restrict ts);

Description
This is like cnd_wait() except we get to specify a timeout, as well.
Note that the thread still must reacquire the mutex to get more work done even after the timeout. The
the main difference is that regular cnd_wait() will only try to get the mutex after a cnd_signal() or
cnd_broadcast(), whereas cnd_timedwait() will do that, too, and try to get the mutex after the timeout.

The timeout is specified as an absolute UTC time since Epoch. You can get this with the timespec_get()
function and then add values on to the result to timeout later than now, as shown in the example.
Beware that you can’t have more than 999999999 nanoseconds in the tv_nsec field of the struct time-
spec. Mod those so they stay in range.

Return Value
If the thread wakes up for a non-timeout reason (e.g. signal or broadcast), returns thrd_success. If woken
up due to timeout, returns thrd_timedout. Otherwise returns thrd_error.

Example
This example has a thread wait on a condition variable for a maximum of 1.75 seconds. And it always times
out because no one ever sends a signal. Tragic.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <time.h>
3 #include <threads.h>
4

5 cnd_t condvar;
6 mtx_t mutex;
7

8 int run(void *arg)

9 {
10 (void)arg;
11

12 mtx_lock(&mutex);
13

14 struct timespec ts;

15

16 // Get the time now

17 timespec_get(&ts, TIME_UTC);
18

19 // Add on 1.75 seconds from now

20 ts.tv_sec += 1;
21 ts.tv_nsec += 750000000L;
22

23 // Handle nsec overflow

24 ts.tv_sec += ts.tv_nsec / 1000000000L;
25 ts.tv_nsec = ts.tv_nsec % 1000000000L;
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 605

26

27 printf("Thread: waiting...\n");
28 int r = cnd_timedwait(&condvar, &mutex, &ts);
29

30 switch (r) {
31 case thrd_success:
32 printf("Thread: signaled!\n");
33 break;
34

35 case thrd_timedout:
36 printf("Thread: timed out!\n");
37 return 1;
38

39 case thrd_error:
40 printf("Thread: Some kind of error\n");
41 return 2;
42 }
43

44 mtx_unlock(&mutex);
45

46 return 0;
47 }
48

49 int main(void)
50 {
51 thrd_t t;
52

53 mtx_init(&mutex, mtx_plain);
54 cnd_init(&condvar);
55

56 printf("Main creating thread\n");

57 thrd_create(&t, run, NULL);
58

59 // Sleep 3s to allow the other thread to timeout

60 thrd_sleep(&(struct timespec){.tv_sec=3}, NULL);
61

62 thrd_join(t, NULL);
63

64 mtx_destroy(&mutex);
65 cnd_destroy(&condvar);
66 }

Output:
Main creating thread
Thread: waiting...
Thread: timed out!

See Also
cnd_wait(), timespec_get()
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 606

66.7 cnd_wait()
Wait for a signal on a condition variable

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

int cnd_wait(cnd_t *cond, mtx_t *mtx);

Description
This puts the calling thread to sleep until it is awakened by a call to cnd_signal() or cnd_broadcast().

Return Value
If everything’s fantastic, returns thrd_success. Otherwise it returns thrd_error to report that something
has gone fantastically, horribly awry.

Example
General-purpose condition variable example here, but you can see the cnd_wait() in the run() function.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 cnd_t condvar;
5 mtx_t mutex;
6

7 int run(void *arg)

8 {
9 (void)arg;
10

11 mtx_lock(&mutex);
12

13 printf("Thread: waiting...\n");
14 cnd_wait(&condvar, &mutex); // <-- WAIT HERE!
15 printf("Thread: running again!\n");
16

17 mtx_unlock(&mutex);
18

19 return 0;
20 }
21

22 int main(void)
23 {
24 thrd_t t;
25

26 mtx_init(&mutex, mtx_plain);
27 cnd_init(&condvar);
28

29 printf("Main creating thread\n");

30 thrd_create(&t, run, NULL);
31
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 607

32 // Sleep 0.1s to allow the other thread to wait

33 thrd_sleep(&(struct timespec){.tv_nsec=100000000L}, NULL);
34

35 mtx_lock(&mutex);
36 printf("Main: signaling thread\n");
37 cnd_signal(&condvar); // <-- SIGNAL CHILD THREAD HERE!
38 mtx_unlock(&mutex);
39

40 thrd_join(t, NULL);
41

42 mtx_destroy(&mutex);
43 cnd_destroy(&condvar);
44 }

Output:
Main creating thread
Thread: waiting...
Main: signaling thread
Thread: running again!

See Also
cnd_timedwait()

66.8 mtx_destroy()
Cleanup a mutex when done with it

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

void mtx_destroy(mtx_t *mtx);

Description
The opposite of mtx_init(), this function frees up any resources associated with the given mutex.
You should call this when all threads are done using the mutex.

Return Value
Returns nothing, the selfish ingrate!

Example
General-purpose mutex example here, but you can see the mtx_destroy() down at the end.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 608

4 cnd_t condvar;
5 mtx_t mutex;
6

7 int run(void *arg)

8 {
9 (void)arg;
10

11 static int count = 0;

12

13 mtx_lock(&mutex);
14

15 printf("Thread: I got %d!\n", count);

16 count++;
17

18 mtx_unlock(&mutex);
19

20 return 0;
21 }
22

23 #define THREAD_COUNT 5
24

25 int main(void)
26 {
27 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
28

29 mtx_init(&mutex, mtx_plain);
30

31 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++)

32 thrd_create(t + i, run, NULL);
33

34 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++)

35 thrd_join(t[i], NULL);
36

37 mtx_destroy(&mutex); // <-- DESTROY THE MUTEX HERE

38 }

Output:
Thread: I got 0!
Thread: I got 1!
Thread: I got 2!
Thread: I got 3!
Thread: I got 4!

See Also
mtx_init()

66.9 mtx_init()
Initialize a mutex for use
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 609

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

int mtx_init(mtx_t *mtx, int type);

Description
Before you can use a mutex variable, you have to initialize it with this call to get it all prepped and ready to
go.
But wait! It’s not quite that simple. You have to tell it what type of mutex you want to create.

Type Description
mtx_plain Regular ol’ mutex
mtx_timed Mutex that supports timeouts
mtx_plain|mtx_recursive Recursive mutex
mtx_timed|mtx_recursive Recursive mutex that supports timeouts

As you can see, you can make a plain or timed mutex recursive by bitwise-ORing the value with
mtx_recursive.

“Recursive” means that the holder of a lock can call mtx_lock() multiple times on the same lock. (They
have to unlock it an equal number of times before anyone else can take the mutex.) This might ease coding
from time to time, especially if you call a function that needs to lock the mutex when you already hold the
mutex.
And the timeout gives a thread a chance to try to get the lock for a while, but then bail out if it can’t get it in
that timeframe. You use the mtx_timedlock() function with mtx_timed mutexes.

Return Value
Returns thrd_success in a perfect world, and potentially thrd_error in an imperfect one.

Example
General-purpose mutex example here, but you can see the mtx_init() down at the top of main():
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 cnd_t condvar;
5 mtx_t mutex;
6

7 int run(void *arg)

8 {
9 (void)arg;
10

11 static int count = 0;

12

13 mtx_lock(&mutex);
14

15 printf("Thread: I got %d!\n", count);

16 count++;
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 610

17

18 mtx_unlock(&mutex);
19

20 return 0;
21 }
22

23 #define THREAD_COUNT 5
24

25 int main(void)
26 {
27 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
28

29 mtx_init(&mutex, mtx_plain); // <-- CREATE THE MUTEX HERE

30

31 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++)

32 thrd_create(t + i, run, NULL);
33

34 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++)

35 thrd_join(t[i], NULL);
36

37 mtx_destroy(&mutex); // <-- DESTROY THE MUTEX HERE

38 }

Output:
Thread: I got 0!
Thread: I got 1!
Thread: I got 2!
Thread: I got 3!
Thread: I got 4!

See Also
mtx_destroy()

66.10 mtx_lock()
Acquire a lock on a mutex

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

int mtx_lock(mtx_t *mtx);

Description
If you’re a thread and want to enter a critical section, do I have the function for you!
A thread that calls this function will wait until it can acquire the mutex, then it will grab it, wake up, and run!
If the mutex is recursive and is already locked by this thread, it will be locked again and the lock count will
increase. If the mutex is not recursive and the thread already holds it, this call will error out.
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 611

Return Value
Returns thrd_success on goodness and thrd_error on badness.

Example
General-purpose mutex example here, but you can see the mtx_lock() in the run() function:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 cnd_t condvar;
5 mtx_t mutex;
6

7 int run(void *arg)

8 {
9 (void)arg;
10

11 static int count = 0;

12

13 mtx_lock(&mutex); // <-- LOCK HERE

14

15 printf("Thread: I got %d!\n", count);

16 count++;
17

18 mtx_unlock(&mutex);
19

20 return 0;
21 }
22

23 #define THREAD_COUNT 5
24

25 int main(void)
26 {
27 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
28

29 mtx_init(&mutex, mtx_plain); // <-- CREATE THE MUTEX HERE

30

31 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++)

32 thrd_create(t + i, run, NULL);
33

34 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++)

35 thrd_join(t[i], NULL);
36

37 mtx_destroy(&mutex); // <-- DESTROY THE MUTEX HERE

38 }

Output:
Thread: I got 0!
Thread: I got 1!
Thread: I got 2!
Thread: I got 3!
Thread: I got 4!
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 612

See Also
mtx_unlock(), mtx_trylock(), mtx_timedlock()

66.11 mtx_timedlock()
Lock a mutex allowing for timeout

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

int mtx_timedlock(mtx_t *restrict mtx, const struct timespec *restrict ts);

Description
This is just like mtx_lock() except you can add a timeout if you don’t want to wait forever.
The timeout is specified as an absolute UTC time since Epoch. You can get this with the timespec_get()
function and then add values on to the result to timeout later than now, as shown in the example.
Beware that you can’t have more than 999999999 nanoseconds in the tv_nsec field of the struct time-
spec. Mod those so they stay in range.

Return Value
If everything works and the mutex is obtained, returns thrd_success. If a timeout happens first, returns
thrd_timedout.

Otherwise, returns thrd_error. Because if nothing is right, everything is wrong.

Example
This example has a thread wait on a mutex for a maximum of 1.75 seconds. And it always times out because
no one ever sends a signal.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <time.h>
3 #include <threads.h>
4

5 mtx_t mutex;
6

7 int run(void *arg)

8 {
9 (void)arg;
10

11 struct timespec ts;

12

13 // Get the time now

14 timespec_get(&ts, TIME_UTC);
15

16 // Add on 1.75 seconds from now

17 ts.tv_sec += 1;
18 ts.tv_nsec += 750000000L;
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 613

19

20 // Handle nsec overflow

21 ts.tv_sec += ts.tv_nsec / 1000000000L;
22 ts.tv_nsec = ts.tv_nsec % 1000000000L;
23

24 printf("Thread: waiting for lock...\n");

25 int r = mtx_timedlock(&mutex, &ts);
26

27 switch (r) {
28 case thrd_success:
29 printf("Thread: grabbed lock!\n");
30 break;
31

32 case thrd_timedout:
33 printf("Thread: timed out!\n");
34 break;
35

36 case thrd_error:
37 printf("Thread: Some kind of error\n");
38 break;
39 }
40

41 mtx_unlock(&mutex);
42

43 return 0;
44 }
45

46 int main(void)
47 {
48 thrd_t t;
49

50 mtx_init(&mutex, mtx_plain);
51

52 mtx_lock(&mutex);
53

54 printf("Main creating thread\n");

55 thrd_create(&t, run, NULL);
56

57 // Sleep 3s to allow the other thread to timeout

58 thrd_sleep(&(struct timespec){.tv_sec=3}, NULL);
59

60 mtx_unlock(&mutex);
61

62 thrd_join(t, NULL);
63

64 mtx_destroy(&mutex);
65 }

Output:
Main creating thread
Thread: waiting for lock...
Thread: timed out!
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 614

See Also
mtx_lock(), mtx_trylock(), timespec_get()

66.12 mtx_trylock()
Try to lock a mutex, returning if not possible

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

int mtx_trylock(mtx_t *mtx);

Description
This works just like mtx_lock except that it returns instantly if a lock can’t be obtained.
The spec notes that there’s a chance that mtx_trylock() might spuriously fail with thrd_busy even if there
are no other threads holding the lock. I’m not sure why this is, but you should defensively code against it.

Return Value
Returns thrd_success if all’s well. Or thrd_busy if some other thread holds the lock. Or thrd_error,
which means something went right. I mean “wrong”.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <time.h>
3 #include <threads.h>
4

5 mtx_t mutex;
6

7 int run(void *arg)

8 {
9 int id = *(int*)arg;
10

11 int r = mtx_trylock(&mutex); // <-- TRY TO GRAB THE LOCK

12

13 switch (r) {
14 case thrd_success:
15 printf("Thread %d: grabbed lock!\n", id);
16 break;
17

18 case thrd_busy:
19 printf("Thread %d: lock already taken :(\n", id);
20 return 1;
21

22 case thrd_error:
23 printf("Thread %d: Some kind of error\n", id);
24 return 2;
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 615

25 }
26

27 mtx_unlock(&mutex);
28

29 return 0;
30 }
31

32 #define THREAD_COUNT 5
33

34 int main(void)
35 {
36 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
37 int id[THREAD_COUNT];
38

39 mtx_init(&mutex, mtx_plain);
40

41 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

42 id[i] = i;
43 thrd_create(t + i, run, id + i);
44 }
45

46 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++)

47 thrd_join(t[i], NULL);
48

49 mtx_destroy(&mutex);
50 }

Output (varies by run):

Thread 0: grabbed lock!
Thread 1: lock already taken :(
Thread 4: lock already taken :(
Thread 3: grabbed lock!
Thread 2: lock already taken :(

See Also
mtx_lock(), mtx_timedlock(), mtx_unlock()

66.13 mtx_unlock()
Free a mutex when you’re done with the critical section

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

int mtx_unlock(mtx_t *mtx);

 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 616

Description
After you’ve done all the dangerous stuff you have to do, wherein the involved threads should not be stepping
on each other’s toes… you can free up your stranglehold on the mutex by calling mtx_unlock().

Return Value
Returns thrd_success on success. Or thrd_error on error. It’s not very original in this regard.

Example
General-purpose mutex example here, but you can see the mtx_unlock() in the run() function:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 cnd_t condvar;
5 mtx_t mutex;
6

7 int run(void *arg)

8 {
9 (void)arg;
10

11 static int count = 0;

12

13 mtx_lock(&mutex);
14

15 printf("Thread: I got %d!\n", count);

16 count++;
17

18 mtx_unlock(&mutex); // <-- UNLOCK HERE

19

20 return 0;
21 }
22

23 #define THREAD_COUNT 5
24

25 int main(void)
26 {
27 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
28

29 mtx_init(&mutex, mtx_plain);
30

31 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++)

32 thrd_create(t + i, run, NULL);
33

34 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++)

35 thrd_join(t[i], NULL);
36

37 mtx_destroy(&mutex);
38 }

Output:
Thread: I got 0!
Thread: I got 1!
Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 617

Thread: I got 2!
Thread: I got 3!
Thread: I got 4!

See Also
mtx_lock(), mtx_timedlock(), mtx_trylock()

66.14 thrd_create()
Create a new thread of execution

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

int thrd_create(thrd_t *thr, thrd_start_t func, void *arg);

Description
Now you have the POWER!
Right?
This is how you launch new threads to make your program do multiple things at once2 !
In order to make this happen, you need to pass a pointer to a thrd_t that will be used to represent the thread
you’re spawning.
That thread will start running the function you pass a pointer to in func. This is a value of type
thrd_start_t, which is a pointer to a function that returns an int and takes a single void* as a parameter,
i.e.:
int thread_run_func(void *arg)

And, as you might have guessed, the pointer you pass to thrd_create() for the arg parameter is passed on
to the func function. This is how you can give additional information to the thread when it starts up.
Of course, for arg, you have to be sure to pass a pointer to an object that is thread-safe or per-thread.
If the thread returns from the function, it exits just as if it had called thrd_exit().
Finally, the value that the func function returns can be picked up by the parent thread with thrd_join().

Return Value
In the case of goodness, returns thrd_success. If you’re out of memory, will return thrd_nomem. Other-
wise, thrd_error.

Example
2
Well, as at least as many things as you have free cores. Your OS will schedule them as it can.
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 618

1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 int run(void *arg)

5 {
6 int id = *(int*)arg;
7

8 printf("Thread %d: I'm alive!!\n", id);

9

10 return id;
11 }
12

13 #define THREAD_COUNT 5
14

15 int main(void)
16 {
17 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
18 int id[THREAD_COUNT]; // One of these per thread
19

20 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

21 id[i] = i; // Let's pass in the thread number as the ID
22 thrd_create(t + i, run, id + i);
23 }
24

25 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

26 int res;
27

28 thrd_join(t[i], &res);
29

30 printf("Main: thread %d exited with code %d\n", i, res);

31 }
32 }

Output (might vary from run to run):

Thread 1: I'm alive!!
Thread 0: I'm alive!!
Thread 3: I'm alive!!
Thread 2: I'm alive!!
Main: thread 0 exited with code 0
Main: thread 1 exited with code 1
Main: thread 2 exited with code 2
Main: thread 3 exited with code 3
Thread 4: I'm alive!!
Main: thread 4 exited with code 4

See Also
thrd_exit(), thrd_join()
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 619

66.15 thrd_current()
Get the ID of the calling thread

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

thrd_t thrd_current(void);

Description
Each thread has an opaque ID of type thrd_t. This is the value we see get initialized when we call
thrd_create().

But what if you want to get the ID of the currently running thread?
No problem! Just call this function and it will be returned to you.
Why? Who knows!
Well, to be honest, I could see it being used a couple places.
1. You could use it to have a thread detach itself with thrd_detach(). I’m not sure why you’d want to
do this, however.
2. You could use it to compare this thread’s ID with another you have stored in a variable somewhere by
using the thrd_equal() function. Seems like the most legit use.
3. …
4. Profit!
If anyone has another use, please let me know.

Return Value
Returns the calling thread’s ID.

Example
Here’s a general example that shows getting the current thread ID and comparing it to a previously-recorded
thread ID and taking exciting action based on the result! Starring Arnold Schwarzenegger!
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 thrd_t first_thread_id;
5

6 int run(void *arg)

7 {
8 (void)arg;
9

10 thrd_t my_id = thrd_current(); // <-- GET MY THREAD ID

11

12 if (thrd_equal(my_id, first_thread_id))
13 printf("I'm the first thread!\n");
14 else
15 printf("I'm not the first!\n");
16
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 620

17 return 0;
18 }
19

20 int main(void)
21 {
22 thrd_t t;
23

24 thrd_create(&first_thread_id, run, NULL);

25 thrd_create(&t, run, NULL);
26

27 thrd_join(first_thread_id, NULL);
28 thrd_join(t, NULL);
29 }

Output:
Come on, you got what you want, Cohaagen! Give deez people ay-ah!

No, wait, that’s an Arnold Schwarzenegger quote from Total Recall, one of the best science fiction films of
all time. Watch it now and then come back to finish this reference page.
Man–what an ending! And Johnny Cab? So excellent. Anyway!
Output:
I'm the first thread!
I'm not the first!

See Also
thrd_equal(), thrd_detach()

66.16 thrd_detach()
Automatically clean up threads when they exit

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

int thrd_detach(thrd_t thr);

Description
Normally you have to thrd_join() to get resources associated with a deceased thread cleaned up. (Most
notably, its exit status is still floating around waiting to get picked up.)
But if you call thrd_detach() on the thread first, manual cleanup isn’t necessary. They just exit and are
cleaned up by the OS.
(Note that when the main thread dies, all the threads die in any case.)

Return Value
thrd_success if the thread successfully detaches, thrd_error otherwise.
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 621

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 thrd_t first_thread_id;
5

6 int run(void *arg)

7 {
8 (void)arg;
9

10 printf("Thread running!\n");
11

12 return 0;
13 }
14

15 #define THREAD_COUNT 5
16

17 int main(void)
18 {
19 thrd_t t;
20

21 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

22 thrd_create(&t, run, NULL);
23 thrd_detach(t);
24 }
25

26 // No need to thrd_join()!
27

28 // Sleep a quarter second to let them all finish

29 thrd_sleep(&(struct timespec){.tv_nsec=250000000}, NULL);
30 }

See Also
thrd_join(), thrd_exit()

66.17 thrd_equal()
Compare two thread descriptors for equality

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

int thrd_equal(thrd_t thr0, thrd_t thr1);

Description
If you have two thread descriptors in thrd_t variables, you can test them for equality with this function.
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 622

For example, maybe one of the threads has special powers the others don’t, and the run function needs to be
able to tell them apart, as in the example.

Return Value
Returns non-zero if the threads are equal. Returns 0 if they’re not.

Example
Here’s a general example that shows getting the current thread ID and comparing it to a previously-recorded
thread ID and taking boring action based on the result.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 thrd_t first_thread_id;
5

6 int run(void *arg)

7 {
8 (void)arg;
9

10 thrd_t my_id = thrd_current();

11

12 if (thrd_equal(my_id, first_thread_id)) // <-- COMPARE!

13 printf("I'm the first thread!\n");
14 else
15 printf("I'm not the first!\n");
16

17 return 0;
18 }
19

20 int main(void)
21 {
22 thrd_t t;
23

24 thrd_create(&first_thread_id, run, NULL);

25 thrd_create(&t, run, NULL);
26

27 thrd_join(first_thread_id, NULL);
28 thrd_join(t, NULL);
29 }

Output:
I'm the first thread!
I'm not the first!

See Also
thrd_current()
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 623

66.18 thrd_exit()
Stop and exit this thread

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

_Noreturn void thrd_exit(int res);

Description
A thread commonly exits by returning from its run function. But if it wants to exit early (perhaps from deeper
in the call stack), this function will get that done.
The res code can be picked up by a thread calling thrd_join(), and is equivalent to returning a value from
the run function.
Like with returning from the run function, this will also properly clean up all the thread-specific storage
associated with this thread—all the destructors for the threads TSS variables will be called. If there are any
remaining TSS variables with destructors after the first round of destruction3 , the remaining destructors will
be called. This happens repeatedly until there are no more, or the number of rounds of carnage reaches
TSS_DTOR_ITERATIONS.

If the main thread calls this, it’s as if you called exit(EXIT_SUCCESS).

Return Value
This function never returns because the thread calling it is killed in the process. Trippy!

Example
Threads in this example exit early with result 22 if they get a NULL value for arg.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 thrd_t first_thread_id;
5

6 int run(void *arg)

7 {
8 (void)arg;
9

10 if (arg == NULL)
11 thrd_exit(22);
12

13 return 0;
14 }
15

16 #define THREAD_COUNT 5
17

18 int main(void)
19 {
20 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];

3
For example, if a destructor caused more variables to be set.
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 624

21

22 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++)

23 thrd_create(t + i, run, i == 2? NULL: "spatula");
24

25

26 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

27 int res;
28 thrd_join(t[i], &res);
29

30 printf("Thread %d exited with code %d\n", i, res);

31 }
32 }

Output:
Thread 0 exited with code 0
Thread 1 exited with code 0
Thread 2 exited with code 22
Thread 3 exited with code 0
Thread 4 exited with code 0

See Also
thrd_join()

66.19 thrd_join()
Wait for a thread to exit

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

int thrd_join(thrd_t thr, int *res);

Description
When a parent thread fires off some child threads, it can wait for them to complete with this call

Return Value
Example
Threads in this example exit early with result 22 if they get a NULL value for arg. The parent thread picks
up this result code with thrd_join().
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 thrd_t first_thread_id;
5

6 int run(void *arg)

 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 625

7 {
8 (void)arg;
9

10 if (arg == NULL)
11 thrd_exit(22);
12

13 return 0;
14 }
15

16 #define THREAD_COUNT 5
17

18 int main(void)
19 {
20 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
21

22 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++)

23 thrd_create(t + i, run, i == 2? NULL: "spatula");
24

25

26 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

27 int res;
28 thrd_join(t[i], &res);
29

30 printf("Thread %d exited with code %d\n", i, res);

31 }
32 }

Output:
Thread 0 exited with code 0
Thread 1 exited with code 0
Thread 2 exited with code 22
Thread 3 exited with code 0
Thread 4 exited with code 0

See Also
thrd_exit()

66.20 thrd_sleep()
Sleep for a specific number of seconds and nanoseconds

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

int thrd_sleep(const struct timespec *duration, struct timespec *remaining);

 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 626

Description
This function puts the current thread to sleep for a while4 allowing other threads to run.
The calling thread will wake up after the time has elapsed, or if it gets interrupted by a signal or something.
If it doesn’t get interrupted, it’ll sleep at least as long as you asked. Maybe a tad longer. You know how hard
it can be to get out of bed.
The structure looks like this:
struct timespec {
time_t tv_sec; // Seconds
long tv_nsec; // Nanoseconds (billionths of a second)
};

Don’t set tv_nsec greater than 999,999,999. I can’t see what officially happens if you do, but on my system
thrd_sleep() returns -2 and fails.

Return Value
Returns 0 on timeout, or -1 if interrupted by a signal. Or any negative value on some other error. Weirdly,
the spec allows this “other error negative value” to also be -1, so good luck with that.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // Sleep for 3.25 seconds
7 thrd_sleep(&(struct timespec){.tv_sec=3, .tv_nsec=250000000}, NULL);
8

9 return 0;
10 }

See Also
thrd_yield()

66.21 thrd_yield()
Stop running that other threads might run

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

void thrd_yield(void);

4
Unix-like systems have a sleep() syscall that sleeps for an integer number of seconds. But thrd_sleep() is likely more portable
and gives subsecond resolution, besides!
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 627

Description
If you have a thread that’s hogging the CPU and you want to give your other threads time to run, you can
call thrd_yield(). If the system sees fit, it will put the calling thread to sleep and one of the other threads
will run instead.
It’s a good way to be “polite” to the other threads in your program if you want the encourage them to run
instead.

Return Value
Returns nothing!

Example
This example’s kinda poor because the OS is probably going to reschedule threads on the output anyway, but
it gets the point across.
The main thread is giving other threads a chance to run after every block of dumb work it does.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <threads.h>
3

4 int run(void *arg)

5 {
6 int main_thread = arg != NULL;
7

8 if (main_thread) {
9 long int total = 0;
10

11 for (int i = 0; i < 10; i++) {

12 for (long int j = 0; j < 1000L; j++)
13 total++;
14

15 printf("Main thread yielding\n");

16 thrd_yield(); // <-- YIELD HERE
17 }
18 } else
19 printf("Other thread running!\n");
20

21 return 0;
22 }
23

24 #define THREAD_COUNT 10
25

26 int main(void)
27 {
28 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
29

30 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++)

31 thrd_create(t + i, run, i == 0? "main": NULL);
32

33 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++)

34 thrd_join(t[i], NULL);
35
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 628

36 return 0;
37 }

The output will vary from run to run. Notice that even after thrd_yield() other threads might not yet be
ready to run and the main thread will continue.
Main thread yielding
Main thread yielding
Main thread yielding
Other thread running!
Other thread running!
Other thread running!
Other thread running!
Main thread yielding
Other thread running!
Other thread running!
Main thread yielding
Main thread yielding
Main thread yielding
Other thread running!
Main thread yielding
Main thread yielding
Main thread yielding
Other thread running!
Other thread running!

See Also
thrd_sleep()

66.22 tss_create()
Create new thread-specific storage

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

int tss_create(tss_t *key, tss_dtor_t dtor);

Description
This helps when you need per-thread storage of different values.
A common place this comes up is if you have a file scope variable that is shared between a bunch of functions
and often returned. That’s not threadsafe. One way to refactor is to replace it with thread-specific storage so
that each thread gets their own code and doesn’t step on other thread’s toes.
To make this work, you pass in a pointer to a tss_t key—this is the variable you will use in subsequent
tss_set() and tss_get() calls to set and get the value associated with the key.

The interesting part of this is the dtor destructor pointer of type tss_dtor_t. This is actually a pointer to
a function that takes a void* argument and returns void, i.e.
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 629

void dtor(void *p) { ... }

This function will be called per thread when the thread exits with thrd_exit() (or returns from the run
function).
It’s unspecified behavior to call this function while other threads’ destructors are running.

Return Value
Returns nothing!

Example
This is a general-purpose TSS example. Note the TSS variable is created near the top of main().
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <threads.h>
4

5 tss_t str;
6

7 void some_function(void)
8 {
9 // Retrieve the per-thread value of this string
10 char *tss_string = tss_get(str);
11

12 // And print it
13 printf("TSS string: %s\n", tss_string);
14 }
15

16 int run(void *arg)

17 {
18 int serial = *(int*)arg; // Get this thread's serial number
19 free(arg);
20

21 // malloc() space to hold the data for this thread

22 char *s = malloc(64);
23 sprintf(s, "thread %d! :)", serial); // Happy little string
24

25 // Set this TSS variable to point at the string

26 tss_set(str, s);
27

28 // Call a function that will get the variable

29 some_function();
30

31 return 0; // Equivalent to thrd_exit(0); fires destructors

32 }
33

34 #define THREAD_COUNT 15
35

36 int main(void)
37 {
38 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
39

40 // Make a new TSS variable, the free() function is the destructor

 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 630

41 tss_create(&str, free); // <-- CREATE TSS VAR!

42

43 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

44 int *n = malloc(sizeof *n); // Holds a thread serial number
45 *n = i;
46 thrd_create(t + i, run, n);
47 }
48

49 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

50 thrd_join(t[i], NULL);
51 }
52

53 // And all threads are done, so let's free this

54 tss_delete(str);
55 }

Output:
TSS string: thread 0! :)
TSS string: thread 2! :)
TSS string: thread 1! :)
TSS string: thread 5! :)
TSS string: thread 3! :)
TSS string: thread 6! :)
TSS string: thread 4! :)
TSS string: thread 7! :)
TSS string: thread 8! :)
TSS string: thread 9! :)
TSS string: thread 10! :)
TSS string: thread 13! :)
TSS string: thread 12! :)
TSS string: thread 11! :)
TSS string: thread 14! :)

See Also
tss_delete(), tss_set(), tss_get(), thrd_exit()

66.23 tss_delete()
Clean up a thread-specific storage variable

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

void tss_delete(tss_t key);

 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 631

Description
This is the opposite of tss_create(). You create (initialize) the TSS variable before using it, then, when
all the threads are done that need it, you delete (deinitialize/free) it with this.
This doesn’t call any destructors! Those are all called by thrd_exit()!

Return Value
Returns nothing!

Example
This is a general-purpose TSS example. Note the TSS variable is deleted near the bottom of main().
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <threads.h>
4

5 tss_t str;
6

7 void some_function(void)
8 {
9 // Retrieve the per-thread value of this string
10 char *tss_string = tss_get(str);
11

12 // And print it
13 printf("TSS string: %s\n", tss_string);
14 }
15

16 int run(void *arg)

17 {
18 int serial = *(int*)arg; // Get this thread's serial number
19 free(arg);
20

21 // malloc() space to hold the data for this thread

22 char *s = malloc(64);
23 sprintf(s, "thread %d! :)", serial); // Happy little string
24

25 // Set this TSS variable to point at the string

26 tss_set(str, s);
27

28 // Call a function that will get the variable

29 some_function();
30

31 return 0; // Equivalent to thrd_exit(0); fires destructors

32 }
33

34 #define THREAD_COUNT 15
35

36 int main(void)
37 {
38 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
39

40 // Make a new TSS variable, the free() function is the destructor

 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 632

41 tss_create(&str, free);
42

43 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

44 int *n = malloc(sizeof *n); // Holds a thread serial number
45 *n = i;
46 thrd_create(t + i, run, n);
47 }
48

49 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

50 thrd_join(t[i], NULL);
51 }
52

53 // And all threads are done, so let's free this

54 tss_delete(str); // <-- DELETE TSS VARIABLE!
55 }

Output:
TSS string: thread 0! :)
TSS string: thread 2! :)
TSS string: thread 1! :)
TSS string: thread 5! :)
TSS string: thread 3! :)
TSS string: thread 6! :)
TSS string: thread 4! :)
TSS string: thread 7! :)
TSS string: thread 8! :)
TSS string: thread 9! :)
TSS string: thread 10! :)
TSS string: thread 13! :)
TSS string: thread 12! :)
TSS string: thread 11! :)
TSS string: thread 14! :)

See Also
tss_create(), tss_set(), tss_get(), thrd_exit()

66.24 tss_get()
Get thread-specific data

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

void *tss_get(tss_t key);

 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 633

Description
Once you’ve set a variable with tss_set(), you can retrieve the value with tss_get()—just pass in the
key and you’ll get a pointer to the value back.
Don’t call this from a destructor.

Return Value
Returns the value stored for the given key, or NULL if there’s trouble.

Example
This is a general-purpose TSS example. Note the TSS variable is retrieved in some_function(), below.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <threads.h>
4

5 tss_t str;
6

7 void some_function(void)
8 {
9 // Retrieve the per-thread value of this string
10 char *tss_string = tss_get(str); // <-- GET THE VALUE
11

12 // And print it
13 printf("TSS string: %s\n", tss_string);
14 }
15

16 int run(void *arg)

17 {
18 int serial = *(int*)arg; // Get this thread's serial number
19 free(arg);
20

21 // malloc() space to hold the data for this thread

22 char *s = malloc(64);
23 sprintf(s, "thread %d! :)", serial); // Happy little string
24

25 // Set this TSS variable to point at the string

26 tss_set(str, s);
27

28 // Call a function that will get the variable

29 some_function();
30

31 return 0; // Equivalent to thrd_exit(0); fires destructors

32 }
33

34 #define THREAD_COUNT 15
35

36 int main(void)
37 {
38 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
39

40 // Make a new TSS variable, the free() function is the destructor

 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 634

41 tss_create(&str, free);
42

43 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

44 int *n = malloc(sizeof *n); // Holds a thread serial number
45 *n = i;
46 thrd_create(t + i, run, n);
47 }
48

49 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

50 thrd_join(t[i], NULL);
51 }
52

53 // And all threads are done, so let's free this

54 tss_delete(str);
55 }

Output:
TSS string: thread 0! :)
TSS string: thread 2! :)
TSS string: thread 1! :)
TSS string: thread 5! :)
TSS string: thread 3! :)
TSS string: thread 6! :)
TSS string: thread 4! :)
TSS string: thread 7! :)
TSS string: thread 8! :)
TSS string: thread 9! :)
TSS string: thread 10! :)
TSS string: thread 13! :)
TSS string: thread 12! :)
TSS string: thread 11! :)
TSS string: thread 14! :)

See Also
tss_set()

66.25 tss_set()
Set thread-specific data

Synopsis
#include <threads.h>

int tss_set(tss_t key, void *val);

 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 635

Description
Once you’ve set up your TSS variable with tss_create(), you can set it on a per thread basis with
tss_set().

key is the identifier for this data, and val is a pointer to it.

The destructor specified in tss_create() will be called for the value set when the thread exits.
Also, if there’s a destructor and there is already at value for this key in place, the destructor will not be called
for the already-existing value. In fact, this function will never cause a destructor to be called. So you’re on
your own, there—best clean up the old value before overwriting it with the new one.

Return Value
Returns thrd_success when happy, and thrd_error when not.

Example
This is a general-purpose TSS example. Note the TSS variable is set in run(), below.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h>
3 #include <threads.h>
4

5 tss_t str;
6

7 void some_function(void)
8 {
9 // Retrieve the per-thread value of this string
10 char *tss_string = tss_get(str);
11

12 // And print it
13 printf("TSS string: %s\n", tss_string);
14 }
15

16 int run(void *arg)

17 {
18 int serial = *(int*)arg; // Get this thread's serial number
19 free(arg);
20

21 // malloc() space to hold the data for this thread

22 char *s = malloc(64);
23 sprintf(s, "thread %d! :)", serial); // Happy little string
24

25 // Set this TSS variable to point at the string

26 tss_set(str, s); // <-- SET THE TSS VARIABLE
27

28 // Call a function that will get the variable

29 some_function();
30

31 return 0; // Equivalent to thrd_exit(0); fires destructors

32 }
33

34 #define THREAD_COUNT 15
35
 Chapter 66. <threads.h> Multithreading Functions 636

36 int main(void)
37 {
38 thrd_t t[THREAD_COUNT];
39

40 // Make a new TSS variable, the free() function is the destructor

41 tss_create(&str, free);
42

43 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

44 int *n = malloc(sizeof *n); // Holds a thread serial number
45 *n = i;
46 thrd_create(t + i, run, n);
47 }
48

49 for (int i = 0; i < THREAD_COUNT; i++) {

50 thrd_join(t[i], NULL);
51 }
52

53 // And all threads are done, so let's free this

54 tss_delete(str);
55 }

Output:
TSS string: thread 0! :)
TSS string: thread 2! :)
TSS string: thread 1! :)
TSS string: thread 5! :)
TSS string: thread 3! :)
TSS string: thread 6! :)
TSS string: thread 4! :)
TSS string: thread 7! :)
TSS string: thread 8! :)
TSS string: thread 9! :)
TSS string: thread 10! :)
TSS string: thread 13! :)
TSS string: thread 12! :)
TSS string: thread 11! :)
TSS string: thread 14! :)

See Also
tss_get()
Chapter 67

<time.h> Date and Time Functions

Function Description
clock() How much processor time has been used by this process
difftime() Compute the difference between two times
mktime() Convert a struct tm into a time_t
time() Get the current calendar time
timespec_get() Get a higher resolution time, probably now
asctime() Return a human-readable version of a struct tm
ctime() Return a human-readable version of a time_t
gmtime() Convert a calendar time into a UTC broken-down time
localtime() Convert a calendar time into a broken-down local time
strftime() Formatted date and time output

When it comes to time and C, there are two main types to look for:
• time_t holds a calendar time. This is an potentially opaque numeric type that represents an absolute
time that can be converted to UTC1 or local time.
• struct tm holds a broken-down time. This has things like the day of the week, the day of the month,
the hour, the minute, the second, etc.
On POSIX systems and Windows, time_t is an integer and represents the number of seconds that have
elapsed since January 1, 1970 at 00:00 UTC.
A struct tm contains the following fields:
struct tm {
int tm_sec; // seconds after the minute -- [0, 60]
int tm_min; // minutes after the hour -- [0, 59]
int tm_hour; // hours since midnight -- [0, 23]
int tm_mday; // day of the month -- [1, 31]
int tm_mon; // months since January -- [0, 11]
int tm_year; // years since 1900
int tm_wday; // days since Sunday -- [0, 6]
int tm_yday; // days since January 1 -- [0, 365]
int tm_isdst; // Daylight Saving Time flag
};

1
When you say GMT, unless you’re talking specifically about the time zone and not the time, you probably mean “UTC”.

637
Chapter 67. <time.h> Date and Time Functions 638

You can convert between the two with mktime(), gmtime(), and localtime().
You can print time information to strings with ctime(), asctime(), and strftime().

67.1 Thread Safety Warning

asctime(), ctime(): These two functions return a pointer to a static memory region. They both might
return the same pointer. If you need thread safety, you’ll need a mutex across them. If you need both results
at once, strcpy() one of them out.
All these problems with asctime() and ctime() can be avoided by using the more flexible and thread-safe
strftime() function instead.

localtime(), gmtime(): These other two functions also return a pointer to a static memory region. They
both might return the same pointer. If you need thread safety, you’ll need a mutex across them. If you need
both results at once, copy the struct to another.

67.2 clock()
How much processor time has been used by this process

Synopsis
#include <time.h>

clock_t clock(void);

Description
Your processor is juggling a lot of things right now. Just because a process has been alive for 20 minutes
doesn’t mean that it used 20 minutes of “CPU time”.
Most of the time your average process spends asleep, and that doesn’t count toward the CPU time spent.
This function returns an opaque type representing the number of “clock ticks”2 the process has spent in
operation.
You can get the number of seconds out of that by dividing by the macro CLOCKS_PER_SEC. This is an integer,
so you will have to cast part of the expression to a floating type to get a fractional time.
Note that this is not the “wall clock time” of the program. If you want to get that loosely use time() and
difftime() (which might only offer 1-second resolution) or timespec_get() (which might only also offer
low resolution, but at least it might go to nanosecond level).

Return Value
Returns the amount of CPU time spent by this process. This comes back in a form that can be divided by
CLOCKS_PER_SEC to determine the time in seconds.

Example
2
The spec doesn’t actually say “clock ticks”, but I… am.
 Chapter 67. <time.h> Date and Time Functions 639

1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <time.h>
3

4 // Deliberately naive Fibonacci

5 long long int fib(long long int n) {
6 if (n <= 1) return n;
7

8 return fib(n-1) + fib(n-2);

9 }
10

11 int main(void)
12 {
13 printf("The 42nd Fibonacci Number is %lld\n", fib(42));
14

15 printf("CPU time: %f\n", clock() / (double)CLOCKS_PER_SEC);

16 }

Output on my system:
The 42nd Fibonacci Number is 267914296
CPU time: 1.863078

See Also
time(), difftime(), timespec_get()

67.3 difftime()
Compute the difference between two times

Synopsis
#include <time.h>

double difftime(time_t time1, time_t time0);

Description
Since the time_t type is technically opaque, you can’t just straight-up subtract to get the difference between
two of them3 . Use this function to do it.
There is no guarantee as to the resolution of this difference, but it’s probably to the second.

Return Value
Returns the difference between two time_ts in seconds.
3
Unless you’re on a POSIX system where time_t is definitely an integer, in which case you can subtract. But you should still use
difftime() for maximum portability.
 Chapter 67. <time.h> Date and Time Functions 640

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <time.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // April 12, 1982 and change
7 struct tm time_a = { .tm_year=82, .tm_mon=3, .tm_mday=12,
8 .tm_hour=4, .tm_min=00, .tm_sec=04, .tm_isdst=-1,
9 };
10

11 // November 15, 2020 and change

12 struct tm time_b = { .tm_year=120, .tm_mon=10, .tm_mday=15,
13 .tm_hour=16, .tm_min=27, .tm_sec=00, .tm_isdst=-1,
14 };
15

16 time_t cal_a = mktime(&time_a);

17 time_t cal_b = mktime(&time_b);
18

19 double diff = difftime(cal_b, cal_a);

20

21 double years = diff / 60 / 60 / 24 / 365.2425; // close enough

22

23 printf("%f seconds (%f years) between events\n", diff, years);

24 }

Output:
1217996816.000000 seconds (38.596783 years) between events

See Also
time(), mktime()

67.4 mktime()
Convert a struct tm into a time_t

Synopsis
#include <time.h>

time_t mktime(struct tm *timeptr);

Description
If you have a local date and time and want it converted to a time_t (so that you can difftime() it or
whatever), you can convert it with this function.
Basically you fill out the fields in your struct tm in local time and mktime() will convert those to the
UTC time_t equivalent.
 Chapter 67. <time.h> Date and Time Functions 641

A couple notes:
• Don’t bother filling out tm_wday or tm_yday. mktime() will fill these out for you.
• You can set tm_isdst to 0 to indicate your time isn’t Daylight Saving Time (DST), 1 to indicate it is,
and -1 to have mktime() fill it in according to your locale’s preference.
If you need input in UTC, see the non-standard functions timegm()4 for Unix-likes and _mkgmtime()5 for
Windows.

Return Value
Returns the local time in the struct tm as a time_t calendar time.
Returns (time_t)(-1) on error.

Example
In the following example, we have mktime() tell us if that time was DST or not.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <time.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 struct tm broken_down_time = {
7 .tm_year=82, // years since 1900
8 .tm_mon=3, // months since January -- [0, 11]
9 .tm_mday=12, // day of the month -- [1, 31]
10 .tm_hour=4, // hours since midnight -- [0, 23]
11 .tm_min=00, // minutes after the hour -- [0, 59]
12 .tm_sec=04, // seconds after the minute -- [0, 60]
13 .tm_isdst=-1, // Daylight Saving Time flag
14 };
15

16 time_t calendar_time = mktime(&broken_down_time);

17

18 char *days[] = {"Sunday", "Monday", "Tuesday",

19 "Wednesday", "Furzeday", "Friday", "Saturday"};
20

21 // This will print what was in broken_down_time

22 printf("Local time : %s", asctime(localtime(&calendar_time)));
23 printf("Is DST : %d\n", broken_down_time.tm_isdst);
24 printf("Day of week: %s\n\n", days[broken_down_time.tm_wday]);
25

26 // This will print UTC for the local time, above

27 printf("UTC : %s", asctime(gmtime(&calendar_time)));
28 }

Output (for me in Pacific Time—UTC is 8 hours ahead):

Local time : Mon Apr 12 04:00:04 1982
Is DST : 0
Day of week: Monday

4
https://man.archlinux.org/man/timegm.3.en
5
https://docs.microsoft.com/en-us/cpp/c-runtime-library/reference/mkgmtime-mkgmtime32-mkgmtime64?view=msvc-160
 Chapter 67. <time.h> Date and Time Functions 642

UTC : Mon Apr 12 12:00:04 1982

See Also
localtime(), gmtime()

67.5 time()
Get the current calendar time

Synopsis
#include <time.h>

time_t time(time_t *timer);

Description
Returns the current calendar time right now. I mean, now. No, now!
If timer is not NULL, it gets loaded with the current time, as well.
This can be converted into a struct tm with localtime() or gmtime(), or printed directly with ctime().

Return Value
Returns the current calendar time. Also loads timer with the current time if it’s not NULL.
Or returns (time_t)(-1) if the time isn’t available because you’ve fallen out of the space-time continuum
and/or the system doesn’t support times.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <time.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 time_t now = time(NULL);
7

8 printf("The local time is %s", ctime(&now));

9 }

Example output:
The local time is Mon Mar 1 18:45:14 2021

See Also
localtime(), gmtime(), ctime()
 Chapter 67. <time.h> Date and Time Functions 643

67.6 timespec_get()
Get a higher resolution time, probably now

Synopsis
#include <time.h>

int timespec_get(struct timespec *ts, int base);

Description
This function loads the current time UTC (unless directed otherwise) into the given struct timespec, ts.
That structure has two fields:
struct timespec {
time_t tv_sec; // Whole seconds
long tv_nsec; // Nanoseconds, 0-999999999
}

Nanoseconds are billionths of a second. You can divide by 1000000000.0 to convert to seconds.
The base parameter has only one defined value, by the spec: TIME_UTC. So portably make it that. This will
load ts with the current time in seconds since a system-defined Epoch6 , often January 1, 1970 at 00:00 UTC.
Your implementation might define other values for base.

Return Value
When base is TIME_UTC, loads ts with the current UTC time.
On success, returns base, valid values for which will always be non-zero. On error, returns 0.

Example
1 struct timespec ts;
2

3 timespec_get(&ts, TIME_UTC);
4

5 printf("%ld s, %ld ns\n", ts.tv_sec, ts.tv_nsec);

6

7 double float_time = ts.tv_sec + ts.tv_nsec/1000000000.0;

8 printf("%f seconds since epoch\n", float_time);

Example output:
1614654187 s, 825540756 ns
1614654187.825541 seconds since epoch

Here’s a helper function to add values to a struct timespec that handles negative values and nanosecond
overflow.
#include <stdlib.h>

// Add delta seconds and delta nanoseconds to ts.

6
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Unix_time
Chapter 67. <time.h> Date and Time Functions 644

// Negative values are allowed. Each component is added individually.

//
// Subtract 1.5 seconds from the current value:
//
// timespec_add(&ts, -1, -500000000L);

struct timespec *timespec_add(struct timespec *ts, long dsec, long dnsec)

{
long sec = (long)ts->tv_sec + dsec;
long nsec = ts->tv_nsec + dnsec;

ldiv_t qr = ldiv(nsec, 1000000000L);

if (qr.rem < 0) {
nsec = 1000000000L + qr.rem;
sec += qr.quot - 1;
} else {
nsec = qr.rem;
sec += qr.quot;
}

ts->tv_sec = sec;
ts->tv_nsec = nsec;

return ts;
}

And here are some functions to convert from long double to struct timespec and back, just in case you
like thinking in decimals. This is more limited in significant figures than using the integer values.
#include <math.h>

// Convert a struct timespec into a long double

long double timespec_to_ld(struct timespec *ts)
{
return ts->tv_sec + ts->tv_nsec / 1000000000.0;
}

// Convert a long double to a struct timespec

struct timespec ld_to_timespec(long double t)
{
long double f;
struct timespec ts;
ts.tv_nsec = modfl(t, &f) * 1000000000L;
ts.tv_sec = f;

return ts;
}

See Also
time(), mtx_timedlock(), cnd_timedwait()
 Chapter 67. <time.h> Date and Time Functions 645

67.7 asctime()
Return a human-readable version of a struct tm

Synopsis
#include <time.h>

char *asctime(const struct tm *timeptr)

Description
This takes a time in a struct tm and returns a string with that date in the form:
Sun Sep 16 01:03:52 1973

with a newline included at the end, rather unhelpfully. (strftime() will give you more flexibility.)
It’s just like ctime(), except it takes a struct tm instead of a time_t.
WARNING: This function returns a pointer to a static char* region that isn’t thread-safe and might be
shared with the ctime() function. If you need thread safety, use strftime() or use a mutex that covers
ctime() and asctime().

Behavior is undefined for:

• Years less than 1000
• Years greater than 9999
• Any members of timeptr are out of range

Return Value
Returns a pointer to the human-readable date string.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <time.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 time_t now = time(NULL);
7

8 printf("Local: %s", asctime(localtime(&now)));

9 printf("UTC : %s", asctime(gmtime(&now)));
10 }

Sample output:
Local: Mon Mar 1 21:17:34 2021
UTC : Tue Mar 2 05:17:34 2021

See Also
ctime(), localtime(), gmtime()
 Chapter 67. <time.h> Date and Time Functions 646

67.8 ctime()
Return a human-readable version of a time_t

Synopsis
#include <time.h>

char *ctime(const time_t *timer);

Description
This takes a time in a time_t and returns a string with the local time and date in the form:
Sun Sep 16 01:03:52 1973

with a newline included at the end, rather unhelpfully. (strftime() will give you more flexibility.)
It’s just like asctime(), except it takes a time_t instead of a struct tm.
WARNING: This function returns a pointer to a static char* region that isn’t thread-safe and might be
shared with the asctime() function. If you need thread safety, use strftime() or use a mutex that covers
ctime() and asctime().

Behavior is undefined for:

• Years less than 1000
• Years greater than 9999
• Any members of timeptr are out of range

Return Value
A pointer to the human-readable local time and data string.

Example
1 time_t now = time(NULL);
2

3 printf("Local: %s", ctime(&now));

Sample output:
Local: Mon Mar 1 21:32:23 2021

See Also
asctime()

67.9 gmtime()
Convert a calendar time into a UTC broken-down time
 Chapter 67. <time.h> Date and Time Functions 647

Synopsis
#include <time.h>

struct tm *gmtime(const time_t *timer);

Description
If you have a time_t, you can run it through this function to get a struct tm back full of the corresponding
broken-down UTC time information.
This is just like localtime(), except it does UTC instead of local time.
Once you have that struct tm, you can feed it to strftime() to print it out.
WARNING: This function returns a pointer to a static struct tm* region that isn’t thread-safe and might
be shared with the localtime() function. If you need thread safety use a mutex that covers gmtime() and
localtime().

Return Value
Returns a pointer to the broken-down UTC time, or NULL if it can’t be obtained.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <time.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 time_t now = time(NULL);
7

8 printf("UTC : %s", asctime(gmtime(&now)));

9 printf("Local: %s", asctime(localtime(&now)));
10 }

Sample output:
UTC : Tue Mar 2 05:40:05 2021
Local: Mon Mar 1 21:40:05 2021

See Also
localtime(), asctime(), strftime()

67.10 localtime()
Convert a calendar time into a broken-down local time

Synopsis
 Chapter 67. <time.h> Date and Time Functions 648

#include <time.h>

struct tm *localtime(const time_t *timer);

Description
If you have a time_t, you can run it through this function to get a struct tm back full of the corresponding
broken-down local time information.
This is just like gmtime(), except it does local time instead of UTC.
Once you have that struct tm, you can feed it to strftime() to print it out.
WARNING: This function returns a pointer to a static struct tm* region that isn’t thread-safe and
might be shared with the gmtime() function. If you need thread safety use a mutex that covers gmtime()
and localtime().

Return Value
Returns a pointer to the broken-down local time, or NULL if it can’t be obtained.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <time.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 time_t now = time(NULL);
7

8 printf("Local: %s", asctime(localtime(&now)));

9 printf("UTC : %s", asctime(gmtime(&now)));
10 }

Sample output:
Local: Mon Mar 1 21:40:05 2021
UTC : Tue Mar 2 05:40:05 2021

See Also
gmtime(), asctime(), strftime()

67.11 strftime()
Formatted date and time output

Synopsis
#include <time.h>

size_t strftime(char * restrict s, size_t maxsize,

Chapter 67. <time.h> Date and Time Functions 649

const char * restrict format,

const struct tm * restrict timeptr);

Description
This is the sprintf() of date and time functions. It’ll take a struct tm and produce a string in just about
whatever form you desire, for example:
2021-03-01
Monday, March 1 at 9:54 PM
It's Monday!

It’s a super flexible version of asctime(). And thread-safe, besides, since it doesn’t rely on a static buffer
to hold the results.
Basically what you do is give it a destination, s, and its max size in bytes in maxsize. Also, provide a
format string that’s analogous to printf()’s format string, but with different format specifiers. And lastly,
a struct tm with the broken-down time information to use for printing.
The format string works like this, for example:
"It's %A, %B %d!"

Which produces:
It's Monday, March 1!

The %A is the full day-of-week name, the %B is the full month name, and the %d is the day of the month.
strftime() substitutes the right thing to produce the result. Brilliant!

So what are all the format specifiers? Glad you asked!

I’m going to be lazy and just drop this table in right from the spec.

Specifier Description
%a Locale’s abbreviated weekday name. [tm_wday]
%A Locale’s full weekday name. [tm_wday]
%b Locale’s abbreviated month name. [tm_mon]
%B Locale’s full month name. [tm_mon]
%c Locale’s appropriate date and time representation.
%C Year divided by 100 and truncated to an integer, as a decimal number (00–99). [tm_year]
%d Day of the month as a decimal number (01–31). [tm_mday]
%D Equivalent to "%m/%d/%y". [tm_mon, tm_mday, tm_year]
%e Day of the month as a decimal number (1–31); a single digit is preceded by a space.
[tm_mday]
%F Equivalent to “%Y-%m-%d” (the ISO 8601 date format). [tm_year, tm_mon, tm_mday]
%g Last 2 digits of the week-based year (see below) as a decimal number (00–99). [tm_year,
tm_wday, tm_yday]
%G Week-based year (see below) as a decimal number (e.g., 1997). [tm_year, tm_wday,
tm_yday]
%h Equivalent to “%b”. [tm_mon]
%H Hour (24-hour clock) as a decimal number (00–23). [tm_hour]
%I Hour (12-hour clock) as a decimal number (01–12). [tm_hour]
%j Day of the year as a decimal number (001–366). [tm_yday]
%m Month as a decimal number (01–12).
%M Minute as a decimal number (00–59). [tm_min]
%n A new-line character.
Chapter 67. <time.h> Date and Time Functions 650

Specifier Description
%p Locale’s equivalent of the AM/PM designations associated with a 12-hour clock. [tm_hour]
%r Locale’s 12-hour clock time. [tm_hour, tm_min, tm_sec]
%R Equivalent to "%H:%M". [tm_hour, tm_min]
%S Second as a decimal number (00–60). [tm_sec]
%t A horizontal-tab character.
%T Equivalent to "%H:%M:%S" (the ISO 8601 time format). [tm_hour, tm_min, tm_sec]
%u ISO 8601 weekday as a decimal number (1–7), where Monday is 1. [tm_wday]
%U Week number of the year (the first Sunday as the first day of week 1) as a decimal number
(00–53). [tm_year, tm_wday, tm_yday]
%V ISO 8601 week number (see below) as a decimal number (01–53). [tm_year, tm_wday,
tm_yday]
%w Weekday as a decimal number (0–6), where Sunday is 0.
%W Week number of the year (the first Monday as the first day of week 1) as a decimal number
(00–53). [tm_year, tm_wday, tm_yday]
%x Locale’s appropriate date representation.
%X Locale’s appropriate time representation.
%y Last 2 digits of the year as a decimal number (00–99). [tm_year]
%Y Year as a decimal number (e.g., 1997). [tm_year]
%z Offset from UTC in the ISO 8601 format "-0430" (meaning 4 hours 30 minutes behind UTC,
west of Greenwich), or by no characters if no time zone is determinable. [tm_isdst]
%Z Locale’s time zone name or abbreviation, or by no characters if no time zone is determinable.
[tm_isdst]
%% A plain ol’ %

Phew. That’s love.

%G, %g, and %v are a little funky in that they use something called the ISO 8601 week-based year. I’d never
heard of it. But, again stealing from the spec, these are the rules:
%g, %G, and %V give values according to the ISO 8601 week-based year. In this system, weeks
begin on a Monday and week 1 of the year is the week that includes January 4th, which is also
the week that includes the first Thursday of the year, and is also the first week that contains at
least four days in the year. If the first Monday of January is the 2nd, 3rd, or 4th, the preceding
days are part of the last week of the preceding year; thus, for Saturday 2nd January 1999, %G is
replaced by 1998 and %V is replaced by 53. If December 29th, 30th, or 31st is a Monday, it and
any following days are part of week 1 of the following year. Thus, for Tuesday 30th December
1997, %G is replaced by 1998 and %V is replaced by 01.
Learn something new every day! If you want to know more, Wikipedia has a page on it7 .
If you’re in the “C” locale, the specifiers produce the following (again, stolen from the spec):

Specifier Description
%a The first three characters of %A.
%A One of Sunday, Monday, … , Saturday.
%b The first three characters of %B.
%B One of January, February, … , December.
%c Equivalent to %a %b %e %T %Y.
%p One of AM or PM.
%r Equivalent to %I:%M:%S %p.
%x Equivalent to %m/%d/%y.

7
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ISO_week_date
 Chapter 67. <time.h> Date and Time Functions 651

Specifier Description
%X Equivalent to %T.
%Z Implementation-defined.

There are additional variants of the format specifiers that indicate you want to use a locale’s alternative format.
These don’t exist for all locales. It’s one of the format specifies above, with either an E or O prefix:
%Ec %EC %Ex %EX %Ey %EY %Od %Oe %OH %OI
%Om %OM %OS %Ou %OU %OV %Ow %OW %Oy

The E and O prefixes are ignored in the “C” locale.

Return Value
Returns the total number of bytes put into the result string, not including the NUL terminator.
If the result doesn’t fit in the string, zero is returned and the value in s is indeterminate.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <time.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char s[128];
7 time_t now = time(NULL);
8

9 // %c: print date as per current locale

10 strftime(s, sizeof s, "%c", localtime(&now));
11 puts(s); // Sun Feb 28 22:29:00 2021
12

13 // %A: full weekday name

14 // %B: full month name
15 // %d: day of the month
16 strftime(s, sizeof s, "%A, %B %d", localtime(&now));
17 puts(s); // Sunday, February 28
18

19 // %I: hour (12 hour clock)

20 // %M: minute
21 // %S: second
22 // %p: AM or PM
23 strftime(s, sizeof s, "It's %I:%M:%S %p", localtime(&now));
24 puts(s); // It's 10:29:00 PM
25

26 // %F: ISO 8601 yyyy-mm-dd

27 // %T: ISO 8601 hh:mm:ss
28 // %z: ISO 8601 time zone offset
29 strftime(s, sizeof s, "ISO 8601: %FT%T%z", localtime(&now));
30 puts(s); // ISO 8601: 2021-02-28T22:29:00-0800
31 }
Chapter 67. <time.h> Date and Time Functions 652

See Also
ctime(), asctime()
Chapter 68

<uchar.h> Unicode utility functions

Function Description
c16rtomb() Convert a char16_t to a multibyte character
c32rtomb() Convert a char32_t to a multibyte character
mbrtoc16() Convert a multibyte character to a char16_t
mbrtoc32() Convert a multibyte character to a char32_t

These functions are restartable, meaning multiple threads can safely call them at once. They handle this by
having their own conversion state variable (of type mbstate_t) per call.

68.1 Types
This header file defines four types.

Type Description
char16_t Type to hold 16-bit characters
char32_t Type to hold 32-bit characters
mbstate_t Holds the conversion state for restartable funcitons (also defined in <wchar.h>)
size_t To hold various counts (also defined in <stddef.h>)

String literals for the character types are u for char16_t and U for char32_t.
char16_t *str1 = u"Hello, world!";
char32_t *str2 = U"Hello, world!";

char16_t *chr1 = u'A';

char32_t *chr2 = U'B';

Note that char16_t and char32_t might contain Unicode. Or not. If __STDC_UTF_16__ or
__STDC_UTF_32__ is defined as 1, then char16_t and char32_t use Unicode, respectively. Other-
wise they don’t and the actual value stored depend on the locale. And if you’re not using Unicode, you have
my commiserations.

653
Chapter 68. <uchar.h> Unicode utility functions 654

68.2 OS X issue
This header file doesn’t exist on OS X—bummer. If you just want the types, you can:
#include <stdint.h>

typedef int_least16_t char16_t;

typedef int_least32_t char32_t;

But if you also want the functions, that’s all on you.

68.3 mbrtoc16() mbrtoc32()

Convert a multibyte character to a char16_t or char32_t restartably

Synopsis
#include <uchar.h>

size_t mbrtoc16(char16_t * restrict pc16, const char * restrict s, size_t n,

mbstate_t * restrict ps);

size_t mbrtoc32(char32_t * restrict pc32, const char * restrict s, size_t n,

mbstate_t * restrict ps);

Description
Given a source string s and a destination buffer pc16 (or pc32 for mbrtoc32()), convert the first character
of the source to char16_ts (or char32_ts for mbrtoc32()).
Basically you have a regular character and you want it as char16_t or char32_t. Use these functions to do
it. Note that only one character is converted no matter how many characters in s.
As the functions scan s, you don’t want them to overrun the end. So you pass in n as the maximum number
of bytes to inspect. The functions will quit after that many bytes or when they have a complete multibyte
character, whichever comes first.
Since they’re restartable, pass in a conversion state variable for the functions to do their work.
And the result will be placed in pc16 (or pc32 for mbrtoc32()).

Return Value
When successful this function returns a number between 1 and n inclusive representing the number of bytes
that made up the multibyte character.
Or, also in the success category, they can return 0 if the source character is the NUL character (value 0).
When not entirely successful, they can return a variety of codes. These are all of type size_t, but negative
values cast to that type.

Return Value Description

(size_t)(-1) Encoding error—this isn’t a valid sequence of bytes. errno is set to EILSEQ.
(size_t)(-2) n bytes were examined and were a partial valid character, but not a complete one.
Chapter 68. <uchar.h> Unicode utility functions 655

Return Value Description

(size_t)(-3) A subsequent value of a character that can’t be represented as a single value. See
below.

Case (size_t)(-3) is an odd one. Basically there are some characters that can’t be represented with 16 bits
and so can’t be stored in a char16_t. These characters are store in something called (in the Unicode world)
surrogate pairs. That is, there are two 16-bit values back to back that represent a larger Unicode value.
For example, if you want to read the Unicode character \U0001fbc5 (which is a stick figure1 —I’m just not
putting it in the text because my font doesn’t render it) that’s more than 16 bits. But each call to mbrtoc16()
only returns a single char16_t!
So subsequent calls to mbrtoc16() resolves the next value in the surrogate pair and returns (size_t)(-3)
to let you know this has happened.
You can also pass NULL for pc16 or pc32. This will cause no result to be stored, but you can use it if you’re
only interested in the return value from the functions.
Finally, if you pass NULL for s, the call is equivalent to:
mbrtoc16(NULL, "", 1, ps)

Since the character is a NUL in that case, this has the effect of setting the state in ps to the initial conversion
state.

Example
Normal use case example where we get the first two character values from the multibyte string "€Zillion":
#include <uchar.h>
#include <stdio.h> // for printf()
#include <locale.h> // for setlocale()
#include <string.h> // for memset()

int main(void)
{
char *s = "\u20acZillion"; // 20ac is "€"
char16_t pc16;
size_t r;
mbstate_t mbs;

setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
memset(&mbs, 0, sizeof mbs);

// Examine the next 8 bytes to see if there's a character in there

r = mbrtoc16(&pc16, s, 8, &mbs);

printf("%zu\n", r); // Prints a value >= 1 (3 in UTF-8 locale)

printf("%#x\n", pc16); // Prints 0x20ac for "€"

s += r; // Move to next character

// Examine the next 8 bytes to see if there's a character in there

r = mbrtoc16(&pc16, s, 8, &mbs);

1
https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Symbols_for_Legacy_Computing
 Chapter 68. <uchar.h> Unicode utility functions 656

printf("%zu\n", r); // Prints 1

printf("%#x\n", pc16); // Prints 0x5a for "Z"
}

Example with a surrogate pair. In this case we read plenty to get the entire character, but the result must be
stored in two char16_ts, requiring two calls to get them both.
1 #include <uchar.h>
2 #include <stdio.h> // for printf()
3 #include <string.h> // for memset()
4 #include <locale.h> // for setlocale()
5

6 int main(void)
7 {
8 char *s = "\U0001fbc5*"; // Stick figure glyph, more than 16 bits
9 char16_t pc16;
10 mbstate_t mbs;
11 size_t r;
12

13 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
14 memset(&mbs, 0, sizeof mbs);
15

16 r = mbrtoc16(&pc16, s, 8, &mbs);
17

18 printf("%zd\n", r); // r is 4 bytes in UTF-8 locale

19 printf("%#x\n", pc16); // First value of surrogate pair
20

21 s += r; // Move to next character

22

23 r = mbrtoc16(&pc16, s, 8, &mbs);
24

25 printf("%zd\n", r); // r is (size_t)(-3) here to indicate...

26 printf("%#x\n", pc16); // ...Second value of surrogate pair
27

28 // Since r is -3, it means we're still processing the same

29 // character, so DON'T move to the next character this time
30 //s += r; // Commented out
31

32 r = mbrtoc16(&pc16, s, 8, &mbs);
33

34 printf("%zd\n", r); // 1 byte for "*"

35 printf("%#x\n", pc16); // 0x2a for "*"
36 }

Output on my system, indicating the first character is represented by the pair (0xd83e, 0xdfc5) and the
second character is represented by 0x2a:
4
0xd83e
-3
0xdfc5
1
0x2a
 Chapter 68. <uchar.h> Unicode utility functions 657

See Also
c16rtomb(), c32rtomb()

68.4 c16rtomb() c32rtomb()

Convert a char16_t or char32_t to a multibyte character restartably

Synopsis
#include <uchar.h>

size_t c16rtomb(char * restrict s, char16_t c16, mbstate_t * restrict ps);

size_t c32rtomb(char * restrict s, char32_t c32, mbstate_t * restrict ps);

Description
If you have a character in a char16_t or char32_t, use these functions to convert them into a multibyte
character.
These functions figure out how many bytes are needed for the multibyte character in the current locale and
stores them in the buffer pointed to by s.
But how big to make that buffer? Luckily there is a macro to help: it needs be no larger than MB_CUR_MAX.
As a special case, if s is NULL, it’s the same as calling
c16rtomb(buf, L'\0', ps); // or...
c32rtomb(buf, L'\0', ps);

where buf is a buffer maintained by the system that you don’t have access to.
This has the effect of setting the ps state to the initial state.
Finally for surrogate pairs (where the character has been split into two char16_ts), you call this once with
the first of the pair—at this point, the function will return 0. Then you call it again with the second of the
pair, and the function will return the number of bytes and store the result in the array s.

Return Value
Returns the number of bytes stored in the array pointed to by s.
Returns 0 if processing is not yet complete for the current character, as in the case of surrogate pairs.
If there is an encoding error, the functions return (size_t)(-1) and errno is set to EILSEQ.

Example
1 #include <uchar.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h> // for MB_CUR_MAX
3 #include <stdio.h> // for printf()
4 #include <string.h> // for memset()
5 #include <locale.h> // for setlocale()
6
 Chapter 68. <uchar.h> Unicode utility functions 658

7 int main(void)
8 {
9 char16_t c16 = 0x20ac; // Unicode for Euro symbol
10 char dest[MB_CUR_MAX];
11 size_t r;
12 mbstate_t mbs;
13

14 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
15 memset(&mbs, 0, sizeof mbs); // Reset conversion state
16

17 // Convert
18 r = c16rtomb(dest, c16, &mbs);
19

20 printf("r == %zd\n", r); // r == 3 on my system

21

22 // And this should print a Euro symbol

23 printf("dest == \"%s\"\n", dest);
24 }

Output on my system:
r == 3
dest == "€"

This is a more complex example that converts a large-valued character in a multibyte string into a surrogate
pair (as in the mbrtoc16() example, above) and then converts it back again into a multibyte string to print.
1 #include <uchar.h>
2 #include <stdlib.h> // for MB_CUR_MAX
3 #include <stdio.h> // for printf()
4 #include <string.h> // for memset()
5 #include <locale.h> // for setlocale()
6

7 int main(void)
8 {
9 char *src = "\U0001fbc5*"; // Stick figure glyph, more than 16 bits
10 char dest[MB_CUR_MAX];
11 char16_t surrogate0, surrogate1;
12 mbstate_t mbs;
13 size_t r;
14

15 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
16 memset(&mbs, 0, sizeof mbs); // Reset conversion state
17

18 // Get first surrogate character

19 r = mbrtoc16(&surrogate0, src, 8, &mbs);
20

21 // Get next surrogate character

22 src += r; // Move to next character
23 r = mbrtoc16(&surrogate1, src, 8, &mbs);
24

25 printf("Surrogate pair: %#x, %#x\n", surrogate0, surrogate1);

26

27 // Now reverse it
28 memset(&mbs, 0, sizeof mbs); // Reset conversion state
 Chapter 68. <uchar.h> Unicode utility functions 659

29

30 // Process first surrogate character

31 r = c16rtomb(dest, surrogate0, &mbs);
32

33 // r should be 0 at this point, because the character hasn't been

34 // processed yet. And dest won't have anything useful... yet!
35 printf("r == %zd\n", r); // r == 0
36

37 // Process second surrogate character

38 r = c16rtomb(dest, surrogate1, &mbs);
39

40 // Now we should be in business. r should have the number of

41 // bytes, and dest should hold the character.
42 printf("r == %zd\n", r); // r == 4 on my system
43

44 // And this should print a stick figure, if your font supports it

45 printf("dest == \"%s\"\n", dest);
46 }

See Also
mbrtoc16(), mbrtoc32()
Chapter 69

<wchar.h> Wide Character Handling

Function Description
btowc() Convert a single byte character to a wide character
fgetwc() Get a wide character from a wide stream
fgetws() Read a wide string from a wide stream
fputwc() Write a wide character to a wide stream
fputws() Write a wide string to a wide stream
fwide() Get or set the orientation of the stream
fwprintf() Formatted wide output to a wide stream
fwscanf() Formatted wide input from a wide stream
getwchar() Get a wide character from stdin
getwc() Get a wide character from stdin
mbrlen() Compute the number of bytes in a multibyte character restartably
mbrtowc() Convert multibyte to wide characters restartably
mbsinit() Test if an mbstate_t is in the initial conversion state
mbsrtowcs() Convert a multibyte string to a wide character string restartably
putwchar() Write a wide character to stdout
putwc() Write a wide character to stdout
swprintf() Formatted wide output to a wide string
swscanf() Formatted wide input from a wide string
ungetwc() Pushes a wide character back into the input stream
vfwprintf() Variadic formatted wide output to a wide stream
vfwscanf() Variadic formatted wide input from a wide stream
vswprintf() Variadic formatted wide output to a wide string
vswscanf() Variadic formatted wide input from a wide string
vwprintf() Variadic formatted wide output
vwscanf() Variadic formatted wide input
wcscat() Concatenate wide strings dangerously
wcschr() Find a wide character in a wide string
wcscmp() Compare wide strings
wcscoll() Compare two wide strings accounting for locale
wcscpy() Copy a wide string dangerously
wcscspn() Count characters not from a start at the front of a wide string
wcsftime() Formatted date and time output
wcslen() Returns the length of a wide string
wcsncat() Concatenate wide strings more safely
wcsncmp() Compare wide strings, length limited

660
Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 661

Function Description
wcsncpy() Copy a wide string more safely
wcspbrk() Search a wide string for one of a set of wide characters
wcsrchr() Find a wide character in a wide string from the end
wcsrtombs() Convert a wide character string to a multibyte string restartably
wcsspn() Count characters from a set at the front of a wide string
wcsstr() Find a wide string in another wide string
wcstod() Convert a wide string to a double
wcstof() Convert a wide string to a float
wcstok() Tokenize a wide string
wcstold() Convert a wide string to a long double
wcstoll() Convert a wide string to a long long
wcstol() Convert a wide string to a long
wcstoull() Convert a wide string to an unsigned long long
wcstoul() Convert a wide string to an unsigned long
wcsxfrm() Transform a wide string for comparing based on locale
wctob() Convert a wide character to a single byte character
wctombr() Convert wide to multibyte characters restartably
wmemcmp() Compare wide characters in memory
wmemcpy() Copy wide character memory
wmemmove() Copy wide character memory, potentially overlapping
wprintf() Formatted wide output
wscanf() Formatted wide input

These are the wide character variants of the functions found in <stdio.h>.
Remember that you can’t mix-and-match multibyte output functions (like printf()) with wide character
output functions (like wprintf()). The output stream has an orientation to either multibyte or wide that
gets set on the first I/O call to that stream. (Or it can be set with fwide().)
So choose one or the other and stick with it.
And you can specify wide character constants and string literals by prefixing L to the front of it:
wchar_t *s = L"Hello, world!";
wchar_t c = L'B';

This header also introduces a type wint_t that is used by the character I/O functions. It’s a type that can
hold any single wide character, but also the macro WEOF to indicate wide end-of-file.

69.1 Restartable Functions

Finally, a note on the “restartable” functions that are included here. When conversion is happening, some
encodings require C to keep track of some state about the progress of the conversion so far.
For a lot of the functions, C uses an internal variable for the state that is shared between function calls. The
problem is if you’re writing multithreaded code, this state might get trampled by other threads.
To avoid this, each thread needs to maintain its own state in a variable of the opaque type mbstate_t. And
the “restartable” functions allow you to pass in this state so that each thread can use their own.
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 662

69.2 wprintf(), fwprintf(), swprintf()

Formatted output with a wide string

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h> // For fwprintf()
#include <wchar.h>

int wprintf(const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);

int fwprintf(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);

int swprintf(wchar_t * restrict s, size_t n,

const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);

Description
These are the wide versions of printf(), fprintf()](#man-printf), and [sprintf()‘.
See those pages for exact substantial usage.
These are the same except the format string is a wide character string instead of a multibyte string.
And that swprintf() is analogous to snprintf() in that they both take the size of the destination array as
an argument.
And one more thing: the precision specified for a %s specifier corresponds to the number of wide characters
printed, not the number of bytes. If you know of other difference, let me know.

Return Value
Returns the number of wide characters outputted, or -1 if there’s an error.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <wchar.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 char *mbs = "multibyte";
7 wchar_t *ws = L"wide";
8

9 wprintf(L"We're all wide for %s and %ls!\n", mbs, ws);

10

11 double pi = 3.14159265358979;
12 wprintf(L"pi = %f\n", pi);
13 }

Output:
We're all wide for multibyte and wide!
pi = 3.141593
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 663

See Also
printf(), vwprintf()

69.3 wscanf() fwscanf() swscanf()

Scan a wide stream or wide string for formatted input

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h> // for fwscanf()
#include <wchar.h>

int wscanf(const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);

int fwscanf(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);

int swscanf(const wchar_t * restrict s, const wchar_t * restrict format, ...);

Description
These are the wide variants of scanf(), fscanf(), and sscanf().
See the scanf() page for all the details.

Return Value
Returns the number of items successfully scanned, or EOF on some kind of input failure.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <wchar.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 int quantity;
7 wchar_t item[100];
8

9 wprintf(L"Enter \"quantity: item\"\n");

10

11 if (wscanf(L"%d:%99ls", &quantity, item) != 2)

12 wprintf(L"Malformed input!\n");
13 else
14 wprintf(L"You entered: %d %ls\n", quantity, item);
15 }

Output (input of 12: apples):

Enter "quantity: item"
12: apples
You entered: 12 apples
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 664

See Also
scanf(), vwscanf()

69.4 vwprintf() vfwprintf() vswprintf()

wprintf() variants using variable argument lists (va_list)

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h> // For vfwprintf()
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <wchar.h>

int vwprintf(const wchar_t * restrict format, va_list arg);

int vswprintf(wchar_t * restrict s, size_t n,

const wchar_t * restrict format, va_list arg);

int vfwprintf(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format,

va_list arg);

Description
These functions are the wide character variants of the vprintf(), functions. You can refer to that reference
page for more details.

Return Value
Returns the number of wide characters stored, or a negative value on error.

Example
In this example, we make our own version of wprintf() called wlogger() that timestamps output. Notice
how the calls to wlogger() have all the bells and whistles of wprintf().
1 #include <stdarg.h>
2 #include <wchar.h>
3 #include <time.h>
4

5 int wlogger(wchar_t *format, ...)

6 {
7 va_list va;
8 time_t now_secs = time(NULL);
9 struct tm *now = gmtime(&now_secs);
10

11 // Output timestamp in format "YYYY-MM-DD hh:mm:ss : "

12 wprintf(L"%04d-%02d-%02d %02d:%02d:%02d : ",
13 now->tm_year + 1900, now->tm_mon + 1, now->tm_mday,
14 now->tm_hour, now->tm_min, now->tm_sec);
15

16 va_start(va, format);
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 665

17 int result = vwprintf(format, va);

18 va_end(va);
19

20 wprintf(L"\n");
21

22 return result;
23 }
24

25 int main(void)
26 {
27 int x = 12;
28 float y = 3.2;
29

30 wlogger(L"Hello!");
31 wlogger(L"x = %d and y = %.2f", x, y);
32 }

Output:
2021-03-30 04:25:49 : Hello!
2021-03-30 04:25:49 : x = 12 and y = 3.20

See Also
printf(), vprintf()

69.5 vwscanf(), vfwscanf(), vswscanf()

wscanf() variants using variable argument lists (va_list)

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h> // For vfwscanf()
#include <stdarg.h>
#include <wchar.h>

int vwscanf(const wchar_t * restrict format, va_list arg);

int vfwscanf(FILE * restrict stream, const wchar_t * restrict format,

va_list arg);

int vswscanf(const wchar_t * restrict s, const wchar_t * restrict format,

va_list arg);

Description
These are the wide counterparts to the vscanf() collection of functions. See their reference page for details.

Return Value
Returns the number of items successfully scanned, or EOF on some kind of input failure.
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 666

Example
I have to admit I was wracking my brain to think of when you’d ever want to use this. The best example I
could find was one on Stack Overflow1 that error-checks the return value from scanf() against the expected.
A variant of that is shown below.
1 #include <stdarg.h>
2 #include <wchar.h>
3 #include <assert.h>
4

5 int error_check_wscanf(int expected_count, wchar_t *format, ...)

6 {
7 va_list va;
8

9 va_start(va, format);
10 int count = vwscanf(format, va);
11 va_end(va);
12

13 // This line will crash the program if the condition is false:

14 assert(count == expected_count);
15

16 return count;
17 }
18

19 int main(void)
20 {
21 int a, b;
22 float c;
23

24 error_check_wscanf(3, L"%d, %d/%f", &a, &b, &c);

25 error_check_wscanf(2, L"%d", &a);
26 }

See Also
wscanf()

69.6 getwc() fgetwc() getwchar()

Get a wide character from an input stream

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h> // For getwc() and fgetwc()
#include <wchar.h>

wint_t getwchar(void);

wint_t getwc(FILE *stream);

wint_t fgetwc(FILE *stream);

1
https://stackoverflow.com/questions/17017331/c99-vscanf-for-dummies/17018046#17018046
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 667

Description
These are the wide variants of fgetc().
fgetwc() and getwc() are identical except that getwc() might be implemented as a macro and is allowed
to evaluate stream multiple times.
getwchar() is identical to getwc() with stream set to stdin.

I don’t know why you’d ever use getwc() instead of fgetwc(), but if anyone knows, drop me a line.

Return Value
Returns the next wide character in the input stream. Return WEOF on end-of-file or error.
If an I/O error occurs, the error flag is also set on the stream.
If an invalid byte sequence is encountered, errno is set to ILSEQ.

Example
Reads all the characters from a file, outputting only the letter ’b’s it finds in the file:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <wchar.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 FILE *fp;
7 wint_t c;
8

9 fp = fopen("datafile.txt", "r"); // error check this!

10

11 // this while-statement assigns into c, and then checks against EOF:

12

13 while((c = fgetc(fp)) != WEOF)

14 if (c == L'b')
15 fputwc(c, stdout);
16

17 fclose(fp);
18 }

See Also
fputwc, fgetws, errno

69.7 fgetws()
Read a wide string from a file

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 668

wchar_t *fgetws(wchar_t * restrict s, int n, FILE * restrict stream);

Description
This is the wide version of fgets(). See its reference page for details.
A wide NUL character is used to terminate the string.

Return Value
Returns s on success, or a NULL pointer on end-of-file or error.

Example
The following example reads lines from a file and prepends them with numbers:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <wchar.h>
3

4 #define BUF_SIZE 1024

5

6 int main(void)
7 {
8 FILE *fp;
9 wchar_t buf[BUF_SIZE];
10

11 fp = fopen("textfile.txt", "r"); // error check this!

12

13 int line_count = 0;
14

15 while ((fgetws(buf, BUF_SIZE, fp)) != NULL)

16 wprintf(L"%04d: %ls", ++line_count, buf);
17

18 fclose(fp);
19 }

Example output for a file with these lines in them (without the prepended numbers):
0001: line 1
0002: line 2
0003: something
0004: line 4

See Also
fgetwc(), fgets()

69.8 putwchar() putwc() fputwc()

Write a single wide character to the console or to a file
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 669

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h> // For putwc() and fputwc()
#include <wchar.h>

wint_t putwchar(wchar_t c);

wint_t putwc(wchar_t c, FILE *stream);

wint_t fputwc(wchar_t c, FILE *stream);

Description
These are the wide character equivalents to the ‘fputc()’ group of functions. You can find more information
‘in that reference section’.
fputwc() and putwc() are identical except that putwc() might be implemented as a macro and is allowed
to evaluate stream multiple times.
putwchar() is identical to putwc() with stream set to stdin.

I don’t know why you’d ever use putwc() instead of fputwc(), but if anyone knows, drop me a line.

Return Value
Returns the wide character written, or WEOF on error.
If it’s an I/O error, the error flag will be set for the stream.
If it’s an encoding error, errno will be set to EILSEQ.

Example
Read all characters from a file, outputting only the letter ’b’s it finds in the file:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <wchar.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 FILE *fp;
7 wint_t c;
8

9 fp = fopen("datafile.txt", "r"); // error check this!

10

11 // this while-statement assigns into c, and then checks against EOF:

12

13 while((c = fgetc(fp)) != WEOF)

14 if (c == L'b')
15 fputwc(c, stdout);
16

17 fclose(fp);
18 }

See Also
fgetwc(), fputc(), errno
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 670

69.9 fputws()
Write a wide string to a file

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>

int fputws(const wchar_t * restrict s, FILE * restrict stream);

Description
This is the wide version of fputs().
Pass in a wide string and an output stream, and it will so be written.

Return Value
Returns a non-negative value on success, or EOF on error.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <wchar.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 fputws(L"Hello, world!\n", stdout);
7 }

See Also
fputwc() fputs()

69.10 fwide()
Get or set the orientation of the stream

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>

int fwide(FILE *stream, int mode);

 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 671

Description
Streams can be either wide-oriented (meaning the wide functions are in use) or byte-oriented (that the regular
multibyte functions are in use). Or, before an orientation is chosen, unoriented.
There are two ways to set the orientation of an unoriented stream:
• Implicitly: just use a function like printf() (byte oriented) or wprintf() (wide oriented), and the
orientation will be set.
• Explicitly: use this function to set it.
You can set the orientation for the stream by passing different numbers to mode:

mode Description
0 Do not alter the orientation
-1 Set stream to byte-oriented
1 Set stream to wide-oriented

(I said -1 and 1 there, but really it could be any positive or negative number.)
Most people choose the wide or byte functions (printf() or wprintf()) and just start using them and never
use fwide() to set the orientation.
And once the orientation is set, you can’t change it. So you can’t use fwide() for that, either.
So what can you use it for?
You can test to see what orientation a stream is in by passing 0 as the mode and checking the return value.

Return Value
Returns greater than zero if the stream is wide-oriented.
Returns less than zero if the stream is byte-oriented.
Returns zero if the stream is unoriented.

Example
Example setting to byte-oriented:
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <wchar.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 printf("Hello world!\n"); // Implicitly set to byte
7

8 int mode = fwide(stdout, 0);

9

10 printf("Stream is %s-oriented\n", mode < 0? "byte": "wide");

11 }

Output:
Hello world!
Stream is byte-oriented

Example setting to wide-oriented:

 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 672

1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <wchar.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 wprintf(L"Hello world!\n"); // Implicitly set to wide
7

8 int mode = fwide(stdout, 0);

9

10 wprintf(L"Stream is %ls-oriented\n", mode < 0? L"byte": L"wide");

11 }

Output:
Hello world!
Stream is wide-oriented

69.11 ungetwc()
Pushes a wide character back into the input stream

Synopsis
#include <stdio.h>
#include <wchar.h>

wint_t ungetwc(wint_t c, FILE *stream);

Description
This is the wide character variant of ungetc().
It performs the reverse operation of fgetwc(), pushing a character back on the input stream.
The spec guarantees you can do this one time in a row. You can probably do it more times, but it’s up to the
implementation. If you do too many calls without an intervening read, an error could be returned.
Setting the file position discards any characters pushed by ungetwc() without being subsequently read.
The end-of-file flag is cleared after a successful call.

Return Value
Returns the value of the pushed character on success, or WEOF on failure.

Example
This example reads a piece of punctuation, then everything after it up to the next piece of punctuation. It
returns the leading punctuation, and stores the rest in a string.
1 #include <stdio.h>
2 #include <wctype.h>
3 #include <wchar.h>
4
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 673

5 wint_t read_punctstring(FILE *fp, wchar_t *s)

6 {
7 wint_t origpunct, c;
8

9 origpunct = fgetwc(fp);
10

11 if (origpunct == WEOF) // return EOF on end-of-file

12 return WEOF;
13

14 while (c = fgetwc(fp), !iswpunct(c) && c != WEOF)

15 *s++ = c; // save it in the string
16

17 *s = L'\0'; // nul-terminate the string

18

19 // if we read punctuation last, ungetc it so we can fgetc it next

20 // time:
21 if (iswpunct(c))
22 ungetwc(c, fp);
23

24 return origpunct;
25 }
26

27 int main(void)
28 {
29 wchar_t s[128];
30 wint_t c;
31

32 while ((c = read_punctstring(stdin, s)) != WEOF) {

33 wprintf(L"%lc: %ls\n", c, s);
34 }
35 }

Sample Input:
!foo#bar*baz

Sample output:
!: foo
#: bar
*: baz

See Also
fgetwc(), ungetc()

69.12 wcstod() wcstof() wcstold()

Convert a wide string to a floating point number
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 674

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

double wcstod(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr);

float wcstof(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr);

long double wcstold(const wchar_t * restrict nptr, wchar_t ** restrict endptr);

Description
These are the wide counterparts to the strtod() family of functions. See their reference pages for details.

Return Value
Returns the string converted to a floating point value.
Returns 0 if there’s no valid number in the string.
On overflow, returns an apporpriately-signed HUGE_VAL, HUGE_VALF. or HUGE_VALL depending on the return
type, and errno is set to ERANGE.
On underflow, returns a number no greater than the smallest normalized positive number, appropriately
signed. The implemention might set errno to ERANGE.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 wchar_t *inp = L" 123.4567beej";
6 wchar_t *badchar;
7

8 double val = wcstod(inp, &badchar);

9

10 wprintf(L"Converted string to %f\n", val);

11 wprintf(L"Encountered bad characters: %ls\n", badchar);
12

13 val = wcstod(L"987.654321beej", NULL);

14 wprintf(L"Ignoring bad chars: %f\n", val);
15

16 val = wcstod(L"11.2233", &badchar);

17

18 if (*badchar == L'\0')
19 wprintf(L"No bad chars: %f\n", val);
20 else
21 wprintf(L"Found bad chars: %f, %ls\n", val, badchar);
22 }

Output:
Converted string to 123.456700
Encountered bad characters: beej
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 675

Ignoring bad chars: 987.654321

No bad chars: 11.223300

See Also
wcstol(), strtod(), errno

69.13 wcstol() wcstoll() wcstoul() wcstoull()

Convert a wide string to an integer value

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

long int wcstol(const wchar_t * restrict nptr,

wchar_t ** restrict endptr, int base);

long long int wcstoll(const wchar_t * restrict nptr,

wchar_t ** restrict endptr, int base);

unsigned long int wcstoul(const wchar_t * restrict nptr,

wchar_t ** restrict endptr, int base);

unsigned long long int wcstoull(const wchar_t * restrict nptr,

wchar_t ** restrict endptr, int base);

Description
These are the wide counterparts to the strtol() family of functions, so see their reference pages for the
details.

Return Value
Returns the integer value of the string.
If nothing can be found, 0 is returned.
If the result is out of range, the value returned is one of LONG_MIN, LONG_MAX, LLONG_MIN, LLONG_MAX,
ULONG_MAX or ULLONG_MAX, as appropriate. And errno is set to ERANGE.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 // All output in decimal (base 10)
6

7 wprintf(L"%ld\n", wcstol(L"123", NULL, 0)); // 123

8 wprintf(L"%ld\n", wcstol(L"123", NULL, 10)); // 123
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 676

9 wprintf(L"%ld\n", wcstol(L"101010", NULL, 2)); // binary, 42

10 wprintf(L"%ld\n", wcstol(L"123", NULL, 8)); // octal, 83
11 wprintf(L"%ld\n", wcstol(L"123", NULL, 16)); // hex, 291
12

13 wprintf(L"%ld\n", wcstol(L"0123", NULL, 0)); // octal, 83

14 wprintf(L"%ld\n", wcstol(L"0x123", NULL, 0)); // hex, 291
15

16 wchar_t *badchar;
17 long int x = wcstol(L" 1234beej", &badchar, 0);
18

19 wprintf(L"Value is %ld\n", x); // Value is 1234

20 wprintf(L"Bad chars at \"%ls\"\n", badchar); // Bad chars at "beej"
21 }

Output:
123
123
42
83
291
83
291
Value is 1234
Bad chars at "beej"

See Also
wcstod(), strtol(), errno, wcstoimax(), wcstoumax()

69.14 wcscpy() wcsncpy()

Copy a wide string

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

wchar_t *wcscpy(wchar_t * restrict s1, const wchar_t * restrict s2);

wchar_t *wcsncpy(wchar_t * restrict s1,

const wchar_t * restrict s2, size_t n);

Description
These are the wide versions of strcpy() and strncpy().
They’ll copy a string up to a wide NUL. Or, in the case of the safer wcsncpy(), until then or until n wide
characters are copied.
If the string in s1 is shorter than n, wcsncpy() will pad s2 with wide NUL characters until the nth wide
character is reached.
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 677

Even though wcsncpy() is safer because it will never overrun the end of s2 (assuming you set n correctly),
it’s still unsafe a NUL is not found in s1 in the first n characters. In that case, s2 will not be NUL-terminated.
Always make sure n is greater than the string length of s1!

Return Value
Returns s1.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 wchar_t *s1 = L"Hello!";
6 wchar_t s2[10];
7

8 wcsncpy(s2, s1, 10);

9

10 wprintf(L"\"%ls\"\n", s2); // "Hello!"

11 }

See Also
wmemcpy(), wmemmove() strcpy(), strncpy()

69.15 wmemcpy() wmemmove()

Copy wide characters

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

wchar_t *wmemcpy(wchar_t * restrict s1,

const wchar_t * restrict s2, size_t n);

wchar_t *wmemmove(wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2, size_t n);

Description
These are the wide versions of memcpy() and memmove().
They copy n wide characters from s2 to s1.
They’re the same except that wmemmove() is guaranteed to work with overlapping memory regions, and
wmemcpy() is not.

Return Value
Both functions return the pointer s1.
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 678

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 wchar_t s[100] = L"Goats";
6 wchar_t t[100];
7

8 wmemcpy(t, s, 6); // Copy non-overlapping memory

9

10 wmemmove(s + 2, s, 6); // Copy overlapping memory

11

12 wprintf(L"s is \"%ls\"\n", s);

13 wprintf(L"t is \"%ls\"\n", t);
14 }

Output:
s is "GoGoats"
t is "Goats"

See Also
wcscpy(), wcsncpy(), memcpy(), memmove()

69.16 wcscat() wcsncat()

Concatenate wide strings

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

wchar_t *wcscat(wchar_t * restrict s1, const wchar_t * restrict s2);

wchar_t *wcsncat(wchar_t * restrict s1,

const wchar_t * restrict s2, size_t n);

Description
These are the wide variants of strcat() and strncat().
They concatenate s2 onto the end of s1.
They’re the same except wcsncat() gives you the option to limit the number of wide characters appended.
Note that wcsncat() always adds a NUL terminator to the end, even if n characters were appended. So be
sure to leave room for that.

Return Value
Both functions return the pointer s1.
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 679

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 wchar_t dest[30] = L"Hello";
6 wchar_t *src = L", World!";
7 wchar_t numbers[] = L"12345678";
8

9 wprintf(L"dest before strcat: \"%ls\"\n", dest); // "Hello"

10

11 wcscat(dest, src);
12 wprintf(L"dest after strcat: \"%ls\"\n", dest); // "Hello, world!"
13

14 wcsncat(dest, numbers, 3); // strcat first 3 chars of numbers

15 wprintf(L"dest after strncat: \"%ls\"\n", dest); // "Hello, world!123"
16 }

See Also
strcat(), strncat()

69.17 wcscmp(), wcsncmp(), wmemcmp()

Compare wide strings or memory

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

int wcscmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);

int wcsncmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2, size_t n);

int wmemcmp(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2, size_t n);

Description
These are the wide variants of memcmp(), strcmp(), and strncmp().
wcscmp() and wcsncmp() both compare strings until a NUL character.

wcsncmp() also has the additional restriction that it will only compare the first n characters.

wmemcmp() is like wcsncmp() except it won’t stop at a NUL.

The comparison is done against the character value (which might (or might not) be its Unicode code point).

Return Value
Returns zero if both regions are equal.
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 680

Returns a negative number if the region pointed to by s1 is less than s2.

Returns a positive number if the region pointed to by s1 is greater than s2.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 wchar_t *s1 = L"Muffin";
6 wchar_t *s2 = L"Muffin Sandwich";
7 wchar_t *s3 = L"Muffin";
8

9 wprintf(L"%d\n", wcscmp(L"Biscuits", L"Kittens")); // <0 since 'B' < 'K'

10 wprintf(L"%d\n", wcscmp(L"Kittens", L"Biscuits")); // >0 since 'K' > 'B'
11

12 if (wcscmp(s1, s2) == 0)
13 wprintf(L"This won't get printed because the strings differ\n");
14

15 if (wcscmp(s1, s3) == 0)
16 wprintf(L"This will print because s1 and s3 are the same\n");
17

18 // this is a little weird...but if the strings are the same, it'll

19 // return zero, which can also be thought of as "false". Not-false
20 // is "true", so (!wcscmp()) will be true if the strings are the
21 // same. yes, it's odd, but you see this all the time in the wild
22 // so you might as well get used to it:
23

24 if (!wcscmp(s1, s3))
25 wprintf(L"The strings are the same!\n");
26

27 if (!wcsncmp(s1, s2, 6))

28 wprintf(L"The first 6 characters of s1 and s2 are the same\n");
29 }

Output:
-1
1
This will print because s1 and s3 are the same
The strings are the same!
The first 6 characters of s1 and s2 are the same

See Also
wcscoll(), memcmp(), strcmp(), strncmp()

69.18 wcscoll()
Compare two wide strings accounting for locale
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 681

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

int wcscoll(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);

Description
This is the wide version of strcoll(). See that reference page for details.
This is slower than wcscmp(), so only use it if you need the locale-specific compare.

Return Value
Returns zero if both regions are equal in this locale.
Returns a negative number if the region pointed to by s1 is less than s2 in this locale.
Returns a positive number if the region pointed to by s1 is greater than s2 in this locale.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2 #include <locale.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
7

8 // If your source character set doesn't support "é" in a string

9 // you can replace it with `\u00e9`, the Unicode code point
10 // for "é".
11

12 wprintf(L"%d\n", wcscmp(L"é", L"f")); // Reports é > f, yuck.

13 wprintf(L"%d\n", wcscoll(L"é", L"f")); // Reports é < f, yay!
14 }

See Also
wcscmp(), wcsxfrm(), strcoll()

69.19 wcsxfrm()
Transform a wide string for comparing based on locale

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

size_t wcsxfrm(wchar_t * restrict s1,

const wchar_t * restrict s2, size_t n);
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 682

Description
This is the wide variant of strxfrm(). See that reference page for details.

Return Value
Returns the length of the transformed wide string in wide characters.
If the return value is greater than n, all bets are off for the result in s1.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2 #include <locale.h>
3 #include <stdlib.h>
4

5 // Transform a string for comparison, returning a malloc'd

6 // result
7 wchar_t *get_xfrm_str(wchar_t *s)
8 {
9 int len = wcsxfrm(NULL, s, 0) + 1;
10 wchar_t *d = malloc(len * sizeof(wchar_t));
11

12 wcsxfrm(d, s, len);
13

14 return d;
15 }
16

17 // Does half the work of a regular wcscoll() because the second

18 // string arrives already transformed.
19 int half_wcscoll(wchar_t *s1, wchar_t *s2_transformed)
20 {
21 wchar_t *s1_transformed = get_xfrm_str(s1);
22

23 int result = wcscmp(s1_transformed, s2_transformed);

24

25 free(s1_transformed);
26

27 return result;
28 }
29

30 int main(void)
31 {
32 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
33

34 // Pre-transform the string to compare against

35 wchar_t *s = get_xfrm_str(L"éfg");
36

37 // Repeatedly compare against "éfg"

38 wprintf(L"%d\n", half_wcscoll(L"fgh", s)); // "fgh" > "éfg"
39 wprintf(L"%d\n", half_wcscoll(L"àbc", s)); // "àbc" < "éfg"
40 wprintf(L"%d\n", half_wcscoll(L"ĥij", s)); // "ĥij" > "éfg"
41

42 free(s);
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 683

43 }

Output:
1
-1
1

See Also
wcscmp(), wcscoll(), strxfrm()

69.20 wcschr() wcsrchr()

Find a wide character in a wide string

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

wchar_t *wcschr(const wchar_t *s, wchar_t c);

wchar_t *wcsrchr(const wchar_t *s, wchar_t c);

wchar_t *wmemchr(const wchar_t *s, wchar_t c, size_t n);

Description
These are the wide equivalents to strchr(), strrchr(), and memchr().
They search for wide characters in a wide string from the front (wcschr()), the end (wcsrchr()) or for an
arbitrary number of wide characters (wmemchr()).

Return Value
All three functions return a pointer to the wide character found, or NULL if the character, sadly, isn’t found.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 // "Hello, world!"
6 // ^ ^ ^
7 // A B C
8

9 wchar_t *str = L"Hello, world!";

10 wchar_t *p;
11

12 p = wcschr(str, ','); // p now points at position A

 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 684

13 p = wcsrchr(str, 'o'); // p now points at position B

14

15 p = wmemchr(str, '!', 13); // p now points at position C

16

17 // repeatedly find all occurrences of the letter 'B'

18 str = L"A BIG BROWN BAT BIT BEEJ";
19

20 for(p = wcschr(str, 'B'); p != NULL; p = wcschr(p + 1, 'B')) {

21 wprintf(L"Found a 'B' here: %ls\n", p);
22 }
23 }

Output:
Found a 'B' here: BIG BROWN BAT BIT BEEJ
Found a 'B' here: BROWN BAT BIT BEEJ
Found a 'B' here: BAT BIT BEEJ
Found a 'B' here: BIT BEEJ
Found a 'B' here: BEEJ

See Also
strchr(), strrchr(), memchr()

69.21 wcsspn() wcscspn()

Return the length of a wide string consisting entirely of a set of wide characters, or of not a set of wide
characters

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

size_t wcsspn(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);

size_t wcscspn(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);

Description
The are the wide character counterparts to [strspn()] (#man-strspn)and strcspn().
They compute the length of the string pointed to by s1 consisting entirely of the characters found in s2. Or,
in the case of wcscspn(), the characters not found in s2.

Return Value
The length of the string pointed to by s1 consisting solely of the characters in s2 (in the case of wcsspn())
or of the characters not in s2 (in th ecase of wcscspn()).
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 685

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 wchar_t str1[] = L"a banana";
6 wchar_t str2[] = L"the bolivian navy on maneuvers in the south pacific";
7 int n;
8

9 // how many letters in str1 until we reach something that's not a vowel?
10 n = wcsspn(str1, L"aeiou");
11 wprintf(L"%d\n", n); // n == 1, just "a"
12

13 // how many letters in str1 until we reach something that's not a, b,

14 // or space?
15 n = wcsspn(str1, L"ab ");
16 wprintf(L"%d\n", n); // n == 4, "a ba"
17

18 // how many letters in str2 before we get a "y"?

19 n = wcscspn(str2, L"y");
20 wprintf(L"%d\n", n); // n = 16, "the bolivian nav"
21 }

See Also
wcschr(), wcsrchr(), strspn()

69.22 wcspbrk()
Search a wide string for one of a set of wide characters

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

wchar_t *wcspbrk(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);

Description
This is the wide character variant of strpbrk().
It finds the first occurrance of any of a set of wide characters in a wide string.

Return Value
Returns a pointer to the first character in the string s1 that exists in the string s2.
Or NULL if none of the characters in s2 can be found in s1.
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 686

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 // p points here after wcspbrk
6 // v
7 wchar_t *s1 = L"Hello, world!";
8 wchar_t *s2 = L"dow!"; // Match any of these chars
9

10 wchar_t *p = wcspbrk(s1, s2); // p points to the o

11

12 wprintf(L"%ls\n", p); // "o, world!"

13 }

See Also
wcschr(), wmemchr(), strpbrk()

69.23 wcsstr()
Find a wide string in another wide string

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

wchar_t *wcsstr(const wchar_t *s1, const wchar_t *s2);

Description
This is the wide variant of strstr().
It locates a substring in a string.

Return Value
Returns a pointer to the location in s1 that contains s2.
Or NULL if s2 cannot be found in s1.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 wchar_t *str = L"The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dogs.";
6 wchar_t *p;
7
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 687

8 p = wcsstr(str, L"lazy");
9 wprintf(L"%ls\n", p == NULL? L"null": p); // "lazy dogs."
10

11 // p is NULL after this, since the string "wombat" isn't in str:

12 p = wcsstr(str, L"wombat");
13 wprintf(L"%ls\n", p == NULL? L"null": p); // "null"
14 }

See Also
wcschr(), wcsrchr(), wcsspn(), wcscspn(), strstr()

69.24 wcstok()
Tokenize a wide string

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>
wchar_t *wcstok(wchar_t * restrict s1, const wchar_t * restrict s2,
wchar_t ** restrict ptr);

Description
This is the wide version of strtok().
And, like that one, it modifies the string s1. So make a copy of it first if you want to preserve the original.
One key difference is that wcstok() can be threadsafe because you pass in the pointer ptr to the current state
of the transformation. This gets initializers for you when s1 is initially passed in as non-NULL. (Subsequent
calls with a NULL s1 cause the state to update.)

Return Value
Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 // break up the string into a series of space or
6 // punctuation-separated words
7 wchar_t str[] = L"Where is my bacon, dude?";
8 wchar_t *token;
9 wchar_t *state;
10

11 // Note that the following if-do-while construct is very very

12 // very very very common to see when using strtok().
13

14 // grab the first token (making sure there is a first token!)

15 if ((token = wcstok(str, L".,?! ", &state)) != NULL) {
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 688

16 do {
17 wprintf(L"Word: \"%ls\"\n", token);
18

19 // now, the while continuation condition grabs the

20 // next token (by passing NULL as the first param)
21 // and continues if the token's not NULL:
22 } while ((token = wcstok(NULL, L".,?! ", &state)) != NULL);
23 }
24 }

Output:
Word: "Where"
Word: "is"
Word: "my"
Word: "bacon"
Word: "dude"

See Also
strtok()

69.25 wcslen()
Returns the length of a wide string

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

size_t wcslen(const wchar_t *s);

Description
This is the wide counterpart to strlen().

Return Value
Returns the number of wide characters before the wide NUL terminator.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 wchar_t *s = L"Hello, world!"; // 13 characters
6

7 // prints "The string is 13 characters long.":

8
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 689

9 wprintf(L"The string is %zu characters long.\n", wcslen(s));

10 }

See Also
strlen()

69.26 wcsftime()
Formatted date and time output

Synopsis
#include <time.h>
#include <wchar.h>

size_t wcsftime(wchar_t * restrict s, size_t maxsize,

const wchar_t * restrict format,
const struct tm * restrict timeptr);

Description
This is the wide equivalent to strftime(). See that reference page for details.
maxsize here refers to the maximum number of wide characters that can be in the result string.

Return Value
If successful, returns the number of wide characters written.
If not successful because the result couldn’t fit in the space alloted, 0 is returned and the contents of the string
could be anything.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2 #include <time.h>
3

4 #define BUFSIZE 128

5

6 int main(void)
7 {
8 wchar_t s[BUFSIZE];
9 time_t now = time(NULL);
10

11 // %c: print date as per current locale

12 wcsftime(s, BUFSIZE, L"%c", localtime(&now));
13 wprintf(L"%ls\n", s); // Sun Feb 28 22:29:00 2021
14

15 // %A: full weekday name

16 // %B: full month name
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 690

17 // %d: day of the month

18 wcsftime(s, BUFSIZE, L"%A, %B %d", localtime(&now));
19 wprintf(L"%ls\n", s); // Sunday, February 28
20

21 // %I: hour (12 hour clock)

22 // %M: minute
23 // %S: second
24 // %p: AM or PM
25 wcsftime(s, BUFSIZE, L"It's %I:%M:%S %p", localtime(&now));
26 wprintf(L"%ls\n", s); // It's 10:29:00 PM
27

28 // %F: ISO 8601 yyyy-mm-dd

29 // %T: ISO 8601 hh:mm:ss
30 // %z: ISO 8601 time zone offset
31 wcsftime(s, BUFSIZE, L"ISO 8601: %FT%T%z", localtime(&now));
32 wprintf(L"%ls\n", s); // ISO 8601: 2021-02-28T22:29:00-0800
33 }

See Also
strftime()

69.27 btowc() wctob()

Convert a single byte character to a wide character

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

wint_t btowc(int c);

int wctob(wint_t c);

Description
These functions convert between single byte characters and wide characters, and vice-versa.
Even though ints are involved, don’t let this mislead you; they’re effectively converted to unsigned chars
internally.
The characters in the basic character set are guaranteed to be a single byte.

Return Value
btowc() returns the single-byte character as a wide character. Returns WEOF if EOF is passed in, or if the
byte doesn’t correspond to a valid wide character.
wctob() returns the wide character as a single-byte character. Returns EOF if WEOF is passed in, or if the
wide character doesn’t correspond to a value single-byte character.
See mbtowc() and wctomb() for multibyte to wide character conversion.
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 691

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2

3 int main(void)
4 {
5 wint_t wc = btowc('B'); // Convert single byte to wide char
6

7 wprintf(L"Wide character: %lc\n", wc);

8

9 unsigned char c = wctob(wc); // Convert back to single byte

10

11 wprintf(L"Single-byte character: %c\n", c);

12 }

Output:
Wide character: B
Single-byte character: B

See Also
mbtowc(), wctomb()

69.28 mbsinit()
Test if an mbstate_t is in the initial conversion state

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

int mbsinit(const mbstate_t *ps);

Description
For a given conversion state in a mbstate_t variable, this function determines if it’s in the initial conversion
state.

Return Value
Returns non-zero if the value pointed to by ps is in the initial conversion state, or if ps is NULL.
Returns 0 if the value pointed to by ps is not in the initial conversion state.

Example
For me, this example doesn’t do anything exciting, saying that the mbstate_t variable is always in the initial
state. Yay.
But if have a stateful encoding like 2022-JP, try messing around with this to see if you can get into an
intermediate state.
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 692

This program has a bit of code at the top that reports if your locale’s encoding requires any state.
1 #include <locale.h> // For setlocale()
2 #include <string.h> // For memset()
3 #include <stdlib.h> // For mbtowc()
4 #include <wchar.h>
5

6 int main(void)
7 {
8 mbstate_t state;
9 wchar_t wc[128];
10

11 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
12

13 int is_state_dependent = mbtowc(NULL, NULL, 0);

14

15 wprintf(L"Is encoding state dependent? %d\n", is_state_dependent);

16

17 memset(&state, 0, sizeof state); // Set to initial state

18

19 wprintf(L"In initial conversion state? %d\n", mbsinit(&state));

20

21 mbrtowc(wc, "B", 5, &state);

22

23 wprintf(L"In initial conversion state? %d\n", mbsinit(&state));

24 }

See Also
mbtowc(), wctomb(), mbrtowc(), wcrtomb()

69.29 mbrlen()
Compute the number of bytes in a multibyte character, restartably

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

size_t mbrlen(const char * restrict s, size_t n, mbstate_t * restrict ps);

Description
This is the restartable version of mblen().
It inspects at most n bytes of the string s to see how many bytes in this character.
The conversion state is stored in ps.
This function doesn’t have the functionality of mblen() that allowed you to query if this character encoding
was stateful and to reset the internal state.
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 693

Return Value
Returns the number of bytes required for this multibyte character.
Returns (size_t)(-1) if the data in s is not a valid multibyte character.
Returns (size_t)(-2) if the data is s is a valid but not complete multibyte character.

Example
If your character set doesn’t support the Euro symbol “€”, substitute the Unicode escape sequence \u20ac,
below.
1 #include <locale.h> // For setlocale()
2 #include <string.h> // For memset()
3 #include <wchar.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 mbstate_t state;
8 int len;
9

10 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
11

12 memset(&state, 0, sizeof state); // Set to initial state

13

14 len = mbrlen("B", 5, &state);

15

16 wprintf(L"Length of 'B' is %d byte(s)\n", len);

17

18 len = mbrlen("€", 5, &state);

19

20 wprintf(L"Length of '€' is %d byte(s)\n", len);

21 }

Output:
Length of 'B' is 1 byte(s)
Length of '€' is 3 byte(s)

See Also
mblen()

69.30 mbrtowc()
Convert multibyte to wide characters restartably

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

size_t mbrtowc(wchar_t * restrict pwc, const char * restrict s,

size_t n, mbstate_t * restrict ps);
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 694

Description
This is the restartable counterpart to mbtowc().
It converts individual characters from multibyte to wide, tracking the conversion state in the variable pointed
to by ps.
At most n bytes are inspected for conversion to a wide character.
These two variants are identical and cause the state pointed to by ps to be set to the initial conversion state:
mbrtowc(NULL, NULL, 0, &state);
mbrtowc(NULL, "", 1, &state);

Also, if you’re just interested in the length in bytes of the multibyte character, you can pass NULL for pwc and
nothing will be stored for the wide character:
int len = mbrtowc(NULL, "€", 5, &state);

This function doesn’t have the functionality of mbtowc() that allowed you to query if this character encoding
was stateful and to reset the internal state.

Return Value
On success, returns a positive number corresponding to the number of bytes in the multibyte character.
Returns 0 if the character encoded is a wide NUL character.
Returns (size_t)(-1) if the data in s is not a valid multibyte character.
Returns (size_t)(-2) if the data is s is a valid but not complete multibyte character.

Example
If your character set doesn’t support the Euro symbol “€”, substitute the Unicode escape sequence \u20ac,
below.
1 #include <string.h> // For memset()
2 #include <stdlib.h> // For mbtowc()
3 #include <locale.h> // For setlocale()
4 #include <wchar.h>
5

6 int main(void)
7 {
8 mbstate_t state;
9

10 memset(&state, 0, sizeof state);

11

12 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
13

14 wprintf(L"State dependency: %d\n", mbtowc(NULL, NULL, 0));

15

16 wchar_t wc;
17 int bytes;
18

19 bytes = mbrtowc(&wc, "€", 5, &state);

20

21 wprintf(L"L'%lc' takes %d bytes as multibyte char '€'\n", wc, bytes);

22 }
Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 695

Output on my system:
State dependency: 0
L'€' takes 3 bytes as multibyte char '€'

See Also
mbtowc(), wcrtomb()

69.31 wcrtomb()
Convert wide to multibyte characters restartably

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

size_t wcrtomb(char * restrict s, wchar_t wc, mbstate_t * restrict ps);

Description
This is the restartable counterpart to wctomb().
It converts individual characters from wide to multibyte, tracking the conversion state in the variable pointed
to by ps.
The destination array s should be at least MB_CUR_MAX2 bytes in size—you won’t get anything bigger back
from this function.
Note that the values in this result array won’t be NUL-terminated.
If you pass a wide NUL character in, the result will contain any bytes needed to restore the conversion state
to its initial state followed by a NUL character, and the state pointed to by ps will be reset to its initial state:
// Reset state
wcrtomb(mb, L'\0', &state)

If you don’t care about the results (i.e. you’re just interested in resetting the state or getting the return value),
you can do this by passing NULL for s:
wcrtomb(NULL, L'\0', &state); // Reset state

int byte_count = wctomb(NULL, "X", &state); // Count bytes in 'X'

This function doesn’t have the functionality of wctomb() that allowed you to query if this character encoding
was stateful and to reset the internal state.

Return Value
On success, returns the number of bytes needed to encode this wide character in the current locale.
If the input is an invalid wide character, errno will be set to EILSEQ and the function returns (size_t)(-1).
If this happens, all bets are off for the conversion state, so you might as well reset it.
2
This is a variable, not a macro, so if you use it to define an array, it’ll be a variable-length array.
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 696

Example
If your character set doesn’t support the Euro symbol “€”, substitute the Unicode escape sequence \u20ac,
below.
1 #include <string.h> // For memset()
2 #include <stdlib.h> // For mbtowc()
3 #include <locale.h> // For setlocale()
4 #include <wchar.h>
5

6 int main(void)
7 {
8 mbstate_t state;
9

10 memset(&state, 0, sizeof state);

11

12 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
13

14 wprintf(L"State dependency: %d\n", mbtowc(NULL, NULL, 0));

15

16 char mb[10] = {0};

17 int bytes = wcrtomb(mb, L'€', &state);
18

19 wprintf(L"L'€' takes %d bytes as multibyte char '%s'\n", bytes, mb);

20 }

See Also
mbrtowc(), wctomb(), errno

69.32 mbsrtowcs()
Convert a multibyte string to a wide character string restartably

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

size_t mbsrtowcs(wchar_t * restrict dst, const char ** restrict src,

size_t len, mbstate_t * restrict ps);

Description
This is the restartable version of mbstowcs().
It converts a multibyte string to a wide character string.
The result is put in the buffer pointed to by dst, and the pointer src is updated to indicate how much of the
string was consumed (unless dst is NULL).
At most len wide characters will be stored.
This also takes a pointer to its own mbstate_t variable in ps for holding the conversion state.
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 697

You can set dst to NULL if you only care about the return value. This could be useful for getting the number
of characters in a multibyte string.
In the normal case, the src string will be consumed up to the NUL character, and the results will be stored
in the dst buffer, including the wide NUL character. In this case, the pointer pointed to by src will be set
to NULL. And the conversion state will be set to the initial conversion state.
If things go wrong because the source string isn’t a valid sequence of characters, conversion will stop and
the pointer pointed to by src will be set to the address just after the last successfully-translated multibyte
character.

Return Value
If successful, returns the number of characters converted, not including any NUL terminator.
If the multibyte sequence is invalid, the function returns (size_t)(-1) and errno is set to EILSEQ.

Example
Here we’ll convert the string “€5 ± π” into a wide character string:
1 #include <locale.h> // For setlocale()
2 #include <string.h> // For memset()
3 #include <wchar.h>
4

5 #define WIDE_STR_SIZE 10
6

7 int main(void)
8 {
9 const char *mbs = "€5 ± π"; // That's the exact price range
10

11 wchar_t wcs[WIDE_STR_SIZE];
12

13 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
14

15 mbstate_t state;
16 memset(&state, 0, sizeof state);
17

18 size_t count = mbsrtowcs(wcs, &mbs, WIDE_STR_SIZE, &state);

19

20 wprintf(L"Wide string L\"%ls\" is %d characters\n", wcs, count);

21 }

Output:
Wide string L"€5 ± π" is 6 characters

Here’s another example of using mbsrtowcs() to get the length in characters of a multibyte string even if
the string is full of multibyte characters. This is in contrast to strlen(), which returns the total number of
bytes in the string.
1 #include <stdio.h> // For printf()
2 #include <locale.h> // For setlocale()
3

4 #include <string.h> // For memset()

5 #include <stdint.h> // For SIZE_MAX
6 #include <wchar.h>
7
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 698

8 size_t mbstrlen(const char *mbs)

9 {
10 mbstate_t state;
11

12 memset(&state, 0, sizeof state);

13

14 return mbsrtowcs(NULL, &mbs, SIZE_MAX, &state);

15 }
16

17 int main(void)
18 {
19 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
20

21 char *mbs = "€5 ± π"; // That's the exact price range

22

23 printf("\"%s\" is %zu characters...\n", mbs, mbstrlen(mbs));

24 printf("but it's %zu bytes!\n", strlen(mbs));
25 }

Output on my system:
"€5 ± π" is 6 characters...
but it's 10 bytes!

See Also
mbrtowc(), mbstowcs(), wcsrtombs(), strlen(), errno

69.33 wcsrtombs()
Convert a wide character string to a multibyte string restartably

Synopsis
#include <wchar.h>

size_t wcsrtombs(char * restrict dst, const wchar_t ** restrict src,

size_t len, mbstate_t * restrict ps);

Description
If you have a wide character string, you can convert it to a multibyte character string in the current locale
using this function.
At most len bytes of data will be stored in the buffer pointed to by dst. Conversion will stop just after the
NUL terminator is copied, or len bytes get copied, or some other error occurs.
If dst is a NULL pointer, no result is stored. You might do this if you’re just interested in the return value
(nominally the number of bytes this would use in a multibyte string, not including the NUL terminator).
If dst is not a NULL pointer, the pointer pointed to by src will get modified to indicate how much of the data
was copied. If it contains NULL at the end, it means everything went well. In this case, the state ps will be
set to the initial conversion state.
 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 699

If len was reached or an error occurred, it’ll point one address past dst+len.

Return Value
If everything goes well, returns the number of bytes needed for the multibyte string, not counting the NUL
terminator.
If any character in the string doesn’t correspond to a valid multibyte character in the currently locale, it returns
(size_t)(-1) and EILSEQ is stored in errno.

Example
Here we’ll convert the wide string “€5 ± π” into a multibyte character string:
1 #include <locale.h> // For setlocale()
2 #include <string.h> // For memset()
3 #include <wchar.h>
4

5 #define MB_STR_SIZE 20
6

7 int main(void)
8 {
9 const wchar_t *wcs = L"€5 ± π"; // That's the exact price range
10

11 char mbs[MB_STR_SIZE];
12

13 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
14

15 mbstate_t state;
16 memset(&state, 0, sizeof state);
17

18 size_t count = wcsrtombs(mbs, &wcs, MB_STR_SIZE, &state);

19

20 wprintf(L"Multibyte string \"%s\" is %d bytes\n", mbs, count);

21 }

Here’s another example helper function that malloc()s just enough memory to hold the converted string,
then returns the result. (Which must later be freed, of course, to prevent leaking memory.)
1 #include <stdlib.h> // For malloc()
2 #include <locale.h> // For setlocale()
3 #include <string.h> // For memset()
4 #include <stdint.h> // For SIZE_MAX
5 #include <wchar.h>
6

7 char *get_mb_string(const wchar_t *wcs)

8 {
9 setlocale(LC_ALL, "");
10

11 mbstate_t state;
12 memset(&state, 0, sizeof state);
13

14 // Need a copy of this because wcsrtombs changes it

15 const wchar_t *p = wcs;
16

17 // Compute the number of bytes needed to hold the result

 Chapter 69. <wchar.h> Wide Character Handling 700

18 size_t bytes_needed = wcsrtombs(NULL, &p, SIZE_MAX, &state);

19

20 // If we didn't get a good full conversion, forget it

21 if (bytes_needed == (size_t)(-1))
22 return NULL;
23

24 // Allocate space for result

25 char *mbs = malloc(bytes_needed + 1); // +1 for NUL terminator
26

27 // Set conversion state to initial state

28 memset(&state, 0, sizeof state);
29

30 // Convert and store result

31 wcsrtombs(mbs, &wcs, bytes_needed + 1, &state);
32

33 // Make sure things went well

34 if (wcs != NULL) {
35 free(mbs);
36 return NULL;
37 }
38

39 // Success!
40 return mbs;
41 }
42

43 int main(void)
44 {
45 char *mbs = get_mb_string(L"€5 ± π");
46

47 wprintf(L"Multibyte result: \"%s\"\n", mbs);

48

49 free(mbs);
50 }

See Also
wcrtomb(), wcstombs(), mbsrtowcs(), errno
Chapter 70

<wctype.h> Wide Character

Classification and Transformation

Function Description
iswalnum() Test if a wide character is alphanumeric.
iswalpha() Tests if a wide character is alphabetic
iswblank() Tests if this is a wide blank character
iswcntrl() Tests if this is a wide control character.
iswctype() Determine wide character classification
iswdigit() Test if this wide character is a digit
iswgraph() Test to see if a wide character is a printable non-space
iswlower() Tests if a wide character is lowercase
iswprint() Tests if a wide character is printable
iswpunct() Test if a wide character is punctuation
iswspace() Test if a wide character is whitespace
iswupper() Tests if a wide character is uppercase
iswxdigit() Tests if a wide character is a hexadecimal digit
towctrans() Convert wide characters to upper or lowercase
towlower() Convert an uppercase wide character to lowercase
towupper() Convert a lowercase wide character to uppercase
wctrans() Helper function for towctrans()
wctype() Helper function for iswctype()

This is like <ctype.h> except for wide characters.

With it you can test for character classifications (like “is this character whitespace?”) or do basic character
conversions (like “force this character to lowercase”).

70.1 iswalnum()
Test if a wide character is alphanumeric.

701
 Chapter 70. <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 702

Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>

int iswalnum(wint_t wc);

Description
Basically tests if a character is alphabetic (A-Z or a-z) or a digit (0-9). But some other characters might also
qualify based on the locale.
This is equivalent to testing if iswalpha() or iswdigit() is true.

Return Value
Returns true if the character is alphanumeric.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2 #include <wctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswalnum(L'a')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
9 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswalnum(L'B')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
10 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswalnum(L'5')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
11 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswalnum(L'?')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
12 }

See Also
iswalpha(), iswdigit(), isalnum()

70.2 iswalpha()
Tests if a wide character is alphabetic

Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>

int iswalpha(wint_t wc);

Description
Basically tests if a character is alphabetic (A-Z or a-z). But some other characters might also qualify based
on the locale. (If other characters qualify, they won’t be control characters, digits, punctuation, or spaces.)
This is the same as testing for iswupper() or iswlower().
 Chapter 70. <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 703

Return Value
Returns true if the character is alphabetic.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2 #include <wctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswalpha(L'a')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
9 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswalpha(L'B')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
10 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswalpha(L'5')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
11 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswalpha(L'?')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
12 }

See Also
iswalnum(), isalpha()

70.3 iswblank()
Tests if this is a wide blank character

Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>

int iswblank(wint_t wc);

Description
Blank characters are whitespace that are also used as word separators on the same line. In the “C” locale, the
only blank characters are space and tab.
Other locales might define other blank characters.

Return Value
Returns true if this is a blank character.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2 #include <wctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
 Chapter 70. <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 704

6 // testing this char

7 // v
8 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswblank(L' ')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
9 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswblank(L'\t')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
10 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswblank(L'\n')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
11 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswblank(L'a')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
12 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswblank(L'?')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
13 }

See Also
iswspace(), isblank()

70.4 iswcntrl()
Tests if this is a wide control character.

Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>

int iswcntrl(wint_t wc);

Description
The spec is pretty barren, here. But I’m just going to assume that it works like the non-wide version. So let’s
look at that.
A control character is a locale-specific non-printing character.
For the “C” locale, this means control characters are in the range 0x00 to 0x1F (the character right before
SPACE) and 0x7F (the DEL character).
Basically if it’s not an ASCII (or Unicode less than 128) printable character, it’s a control character in the
“C” locale.
Probably.

Return Value
Returns true if this is a control character.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2 #include <wctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswcntrl(L'\t')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes (tab)
 Chapter 70. <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 705

9 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswcntrl(L'\n')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes (newline)

10 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswcntrl(L'\r')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes (return)
11 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswcntrl(L'\a')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes (bell)
12 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswcntrl(L' ')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
13 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswcntrl(L'a')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
14 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswcntrl(L'?')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
15 }

See Also
iscntrl()

70.5 iswdigit()
Test if this wide character is a digit

Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>

int iswdigit(wint_t wc);

Description
Tests if the wide character is a digit (0-9).

Return Value
Returns true if the character is a digit.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2 #include <wctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswdigit(L'0')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
9 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswdigit(L'5')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
10 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswdigit(L'a')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
11 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswdigit(L'B')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
12 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswdigit(L'?')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
13 }

See Also
iswalnum(), isdigit()
 Chapter 70. <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 706

70.6 iswgraph()
Test to see if a wide character is a printable non-space

Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>

int iswgraph(wint_t wc);

Description
Returns true if this is a printable (non-control) character and also not a whitespace character.
Basically if iswprint() is true and iswspace() is false.

Return Value
Returns true if this is a printable non-space character.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2 #include <wctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswgraph(L'0')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
9 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswgraph(L'a')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
10 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswgraph(L'B')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
11 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswgraph(L'?')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
12 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswgraph(L' ')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
13 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswgraph(L'\n')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
14 }

See Also
iswprint(), iswspace(), isgraph()

70.7 iswlower()
Tests if a wide character is lowercase

Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>

int iswlower(wint_t wc);

 Chapter 70. <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 707

Description
Tests if a character is lowercase, in the range a-z.
In other locales, there could be other lowercase characters. In all cases, to be lowercase, the following must
be true:
!iswcntrl(c) && !iswdigit(c) && !iswpunct(c) && !iswspace(c)

Return Value
Returns true if the wide character is lowercase.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2 #include <wctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswlower(L'c')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
9 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswlower(L'0')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
10 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswlower(L'B')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
11 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswlower(L'?')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
12 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswlower(L' ')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
13 }

See Also
islower(), iswupper(), iswalpha(), towupper(), towlower()

70.8 iswprint()
Tests if a wide character is printable

Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>

int iswprint(wint_t wc);

Description
Tests if a wide character is printable, including space (' '). So like isgraph(), except space isn’t left out
in the cold.

Return Value
Returns true if the wide character is printable, including space (' ').
 Chapter 70. <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 708

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2 #include <wctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswprint(L'c')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
9 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswprint(L'0')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
10 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswprint(L' ')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
11 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswprint(L'\r')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
12 }

See Also
isprint(), iswgraph(), iswcntrl()

70.9 iswpunct()
Test if a wide character is punctuation

Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>

int iswpunct(wint_t wc);

Description
Tests if a wide character is punctuation.
This means for any given locale:
!isspace(c) && !isalnum(c)

Return Value
True if the wide character is punctuation.

Example
Results may vary based on locale.
1 #include <wchar.h>
2 #include <wctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
 Chapter 70. <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 709

8 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswpunct(L',')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes

9 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswpunct(L'!')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
10 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswpunct(L'c')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
11 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswpunct(L'0')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
12 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswpunct(L' ')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
13 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswpunct(L'\n')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
14 }

See Also
ispunct(), iswspace(), iswalnum()

70.10 iswspace()
Test if a wide character is whitespace

Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>

int iswspace(wint_t wc);

Description
Tests if c is a whitespace character. These are probably:
• Space (' ')
• Formfeed ('\f')
• Newline ('\n')
• Carriage Return ('\r')
• Horizontal Tab ('\t')
• Vertical Tab ('\v')
Other locales might specify other whitespace characters. iswalnum(), iswgraph(), and iswpunct() are
all false for all whitespace characters.

Return Value
True if the character is whitespace.

Example
Results may vary based on locale.
1 #include <wchar.h>
2 #include <wctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswspace(L' ')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
 Chapter 70. <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 710

9 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswspace(L'\n')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes

10 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswspace(L'\t')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
11 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswspace(L',')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
12 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswspace(L'!')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
13 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswspace(L'c')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
14 }

See Also
isspace(), iswblank()

70.11 iswupper()
Tests if a wide character is uppercase

Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>

int iswupper(wint_t wc);

Description
Tests if a character is uppercase in the current locale.
To be uppercase, the following must be true:
!iscntrl(c) && !isdigit(c) && !ispunct(c) && !isspace(c)

Return Value
Returns true if the wide character is uppercase.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2 #include <wctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswupper(L'B')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
9 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswupper(L'c')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
10 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswupper(L'0')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
11 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswupper(L'?')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
12 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswupper(L' ')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
13 }
 Chapter 70. <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 711

See Also
isupper(), iswlower(), iswalpha(), towupper(), towlower()

70.12 iswxdigit()
Tests if a wide character is a hexadecimal digit

Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>

int iswxdigit(wint_t wc);

Description
Returns true if the wide character is a hexadecimal digit. Namely if it’s 0-9, a-f, or A-F.

Return Value
True if the character is a hexadecimal digit.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2 #include <wctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // testing this char
7 // v
8 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswxdigit(L'B')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
9 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswxdigit(L'c')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
10 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswxdigit(L'2')? L"yes": L"no"); // yes
11 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswxdigit(L'G')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
12 wprintf(L"%ls\n", iswxdigit(L'?')? L"yes": L"no"); // no
13 }

See Also
isxdigit(), iswdigit()

70.13 iswctype()
Determine wide character classification
 Chapter 70. <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 712

Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>

int iswctype(wint_t wc, wctype_t desc);

Description
This is the Swiss Army knife of classification functions; it’s all the other ones rolled into one.
You call it with something like this:
if (iswctype(c, wctype("digit"))) // or "alpha" or "space" or...

and it behaves just like you’d called:

if (iswdigit(c))

The difference is that you can specify the type of matching you want to do as a string at runtime, which might
be convenient.
iswctype() relies on the return value from the wctype() call to get its work done.

Stolen from the spec, here are the iswctype() calls and their equivalents:

iswctype() call Hard-coded equivalent

iswctype(c, wctype("alnum")) iswalnum(c)
iswctype(c, wctype("alpha")) iswalpha(c)
iswctype(c, wctype("blank")) iswblank(c)
iswctype(c, wctype("cntrl")) iswcntrl(c)
iswctype(c, wctype("digit")) iswdigit(c)
iswctype(c, wctype("graph")) iswgraph(c)
iswctype(c, wctype("lower")) iswlower(c)
iswctype(c, wctype("print")) iswprint(c)
iswctype(c, wctype("punct")) iswpunct(c)
iswctype(c, wctype("space")) iswspace(c)
iswctype(c, wctype("upper")) iswupper(c)
iswctype(c, wctype("xdigit")) iswxdigit(c)

See the wctype() documentation for how that helper function works.

Return Value
Returns true if the wide character wc matches the character class in desc.

Example
Test for a given character classification at when the classification isn’t known at compile time:
1 #include <stdio.h> // for fflush(stdout)
2 #include <wchar.h>
3 #include <wctype.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 wchar_t c; // Holds a single wide character (to test)
 Chapter 70. <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 713

8 char desc[128]; // Holds the character class

9

10 // Get the character and classification from the user

11 wprintf(L"Enter a character and character class: ");
12 fflush(stdout);
13 wscanf(L"%lc %s", &c, desc);
14

15 // Compute the type from the given class

16 wctype_t t = wctype(desc);
17

18 if (t == 0)
19 // If the type is 0, it's an unknown class
20 wprintf(L"Unknown character class: \"%s\"\n", desc);
21 else {
22 // Otherwise, let's test the character and see if its that
23 // classification
24 if (iswctype(c, t))
25 wprintf(L"Yes! '%lc' is %s!\n", c, desc);
26 else
27 wprintf(L"Nope! '%lc' is not %s.\n", c, desc);
28 }
29 }

Output:
Enter a character and character class: 5 digit
Yes! '5' is digit!

Enter a character and character class: b digit

Nope! 'b' is not digit.

Enter a character and character class: x alnum

Yes! 'x' is alnum!

See Also
wctype()

70.14 wctype()
Helper function for iswctype()

Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>

wctype_t wctype(const char *property);

Description
This function returns an opaque value for the given property that is meant to be passed as the second
argument to iswctype().
 Chapter 70. <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 714

The returned value is of type wctype_t.

Valid properties in all locales are:
"alnum" "alpha" "blank" "cntrl"
"digit" "graph" "lower" "print"
"punct" "space" "upper" "xdigit"

Other properties might be defined as determined by the LC_CTYPE category of the current locale.
See the iswctype() reference page for more usage details.

Return Value
Returns the wctype_t value associated with the given property.
If an invalid value is passed for property, returns 0.

Example
Test for a given character classification at when the classification isn’t known at compile time:
1 #include <stdio.h> // for fflush(stdout)
2 #include <wchar.h>
3 #include <wctype.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 wchar_t c; // Holds a single wide character (to test)
8 char desc[128]; // Holds the character class
9

10 // Get the character and classification from the user

11 wprintf(L"Enter a character and character class: ");
12 fflush(stdout);
13 wscanf(L"%lc %s", &c, desc);
14

15 // Compute the type from the given class

16 wctype_t t = wctype(desc);
17

18 if (t == 0)
19 // If the type is 0, it's an unknown class
20 wprintf(L"Unknown character class: \"%s\"\n", desc);
21 else {
22 // Otherwise, let's test the character and see if its that
23 // classification
24 if (iswctype(c, t))
25 wprintf(L"Yes! '%lc' is %s!\n", c, desc);
26 else
27 wprintf(L"Nope! '%lc' is not %s.\n", c, desc);
28 }
29 }

Output:
Enter a character and character class: 5 digit
Yes! '5' is digit!

Enter a character and character class: b digit

 Chapter 70. <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 715

Nope! 'b' is not digit.

Enter a character and character class: x alnum

Yes! 'x' is alnum!

See Also
iswctype()

70.15 towlower()
Convert an uppercase wide character to lowercase

Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>

wint_t towlower(wint_t wc);

Description
If the character is upper (i.e. iswupper(c) is true), this function returns the corresponding lowercase letter.
Different locales might have different upper and lowercase letters.

Return Value
If the letter wc is uppercase, a lowercase version of that letter will be returned according to the current locale.
If the letter is not uppercase, wc is returned unchanged.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2 #include <wctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // changing this char
7 // v
8 wprintf(L"%lc\n", towlower(L'B')); // b (made lowercase!)
9 wprintf(L"%lc\n", towlower(L'e')); // e (unchanged)
10 wprintf(L"%lc\n", towlower(L'!')); // ! (unchanged)
11 }

See Also
tolower(), towupper(), iswlower(), iswupper()
 Chapter 70. <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 716

70.16 towupper()
Convert a lowercase wide character to uppercase

Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>

wint_t towupper(wint_t wc);

Description
If the character is lower (i.e. iswlower(c) is true), this function returns the corresponding uppercase letter.
Different locales might have different upper and lowercase letters.

Return Value
If the letter wc is lowercase, an uppercase version of that letter will be returned according to the current locale.
If the letter is not lowercase, wc is returned unchanged.

Example
1 #include <wchar.h>
2 #include <wctype.h>
3

4 int main(void)
5 {
6 // changing this char
7 // v
8 wprintf(L"%lc\n", towupper(L'B')); // B (unchanged)
9 wprintf(L"%lc\n", towupper(L'e')); // E (made uppercase!)
10 wprintf(L"%lc\n", towupper(L'!')); // ! (unchanged)
11 }

See Also
toupper(), towlower(), iswlower(), iswupper()

70.17 towctrans()
Convert wide characters to upper or lowercase

Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>

wint_t towctrans(wint_t wc, wctrans_t desc);

 Chapter 70. <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 717

Description
This is the Swiss Army knife of character conversion functions; it’s all the other ones rolled into one. And
by “all the other ones” I mean towupper() and towlower(), since those are the only ones there are.
You call it with something like this:
if (towctrans(c, wctrans("toupper"))) // or "tolower"

and it behaves just like you’d called:

towupper(c);

The difference is that you can specify the type of conversion you want to do as a string at runtime, which
might be convenient.
towctrans() relies on the return value from the wctrans() call to get its work done.

towctrans() call Hard-coded equivalent

towctrans(c, wctrans("toupper")) towupper(c)
towctrans(c, wctrans("tolower")) towlower(c)

See the wctrans() documentation for how that helper function works.

Return Value
Returns the character wc as if run through towupper() or towlower(), depending on the value of desc.
If the character already matches the classification, it is returned as-is.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h> // for fflush(stdout)
2 #include <wchar.h>
3 #include <wctype.h>
4

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 wchar_t c; // Holds a single wide character (to test)
8 char desc[128]; // Holds the conversion type
9

10 // Get the character and conversion type from the user

11 wprintf(L"Enter a character and conversion type: ");
12 fflush(stdout);
13 wscanf(L"%lc %s", &c, desc);
14

15 // Compute the type from the given conversion type

16 wctrans_t t = wctrans(desc);
17

18 if (t == 0)
19 // If the type is 0, it's an unknown conversion type
20 wprintf(L"Unknown conversion: \"%s\"\n", desc);
21 else {
22 // Otherwise, let's do the conversion
23 wint_t result = towctrans(c, t);
24 wprintf(L"'%lc' -> %s -> '%lc'\n", c, desc, result);
 Chapter 70. <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 718

25 }
26 }

Output on my system:
Enter a character and conversion type: b toupper
'b' -> toupper -> 'B'

Enter a character and conversion type: B toupper

'B' -> toupper -> 'B'

Enter a character and conversion type: B tolower

'B' -> tolower -> 'b'

Enter a character and conversion type: ! toupper

'!' -> toupper -> '!'

See Also
wctrans(), towupper(), towlower()

70.18 wctrans()
Helper function for towctrans()

Synopsis
#include <wctype.h>

wctrans_t wctrans(const char *property);

Description
This is a helper function for generating the second argument to towctrans().
You can pass in one of two things for the property:
• toupper to make towctrans() behave like towupper()
• tolower to make towctrans() behave like towlower()

Return Value
On success, returns a value that can be used as the desc argument to towctrans().
Otherwise, if the property isn’t recognized, returns 0.

Example
1 #include <stdio.h> // for fflush(stdout)
2 #include <wchar.h>
3 #include <wctype.h>
4
 Chapter 70. <wctype.h> Wide Character Classification and Transformation 719

5 int main(void)
6 {
7 wchar_t c; // Holds a single wide character (to test)
8 char desc[128]; // Holds the conversion type
9

10 // Get the character and conversion type from the user

11 wprintf(L"Enter a character and conversion type: ");
12 fflush(stdout);
13 wscanf(L"%lc %s", &c, desc);
14

15 // Compute the type from the given conversion type

16 wctrans_t t = wctrans(desc);
17

18 if (t == 0)
19 // If the type is 0, it's an unknown conversion type
20 wprintf(L"Unknown conversion: \"%s\"\n", desc);
21 else {
22 // Otherwise, let's do the conversion
23 wint_t result = towctrans(c, t);
24 wprintf(L"'%lc' -> %s -> '%lc'\n", c, desc, result);
25 }
26 }

Output on my system:
Enter a character and conversion type: b toupper
'b' -> toupper -> 'B'

Enter a character and conversion type: B toupper

'B' -> toupper -> 'B'

Enter a character and conversion type: B tolower

'B' -> tolower -> 'b'

Enter a character and conversion type: ! toupper

'!' -> toupper -> '!'

See Also
towctrans()
Index

! boolean NOT, 17 #line directive, 144

!= inequality operator, 16 #pragma directive, 142–143
' single quote, 90 nonstandard pragmas, 142–143
* for VLA function prototypes, 220 #undef directive, 134
* indirection operator, 32–33 #warning directive, 142
* multiplication operator, 14 % modulus operator, 14
*= assignment operator, 14 %= assignment operator, 14
+ addition operator, 14 & address-of operator, 30–31
++ increment operator, 15–16 & bitwise AND, 181
+= assignment operator, 14 &= assignment, 181
, comma operator, 16 && boolean AND, 17
- subtraction operator, 14 ^ bitwise XOR, 181
-- decrement operator, 15–16 ^= assignment, 181
-= assignment operator, 14 _Alignas alignment specifier, 305
-> arrow operator, 53 _Alignas() alignment specifier, 455
... variadic arguments, 183–184 _Alignof operator, 305–306
/ division operator, 14 _Alignof() operator, 457
/= assignment operator, 14 _Atomic type qualifier, 292–293, 467
< less than operator, 16 _Atomic type specifier, 293
<< shift left, 182 _Atomic() type specifier, 467
<<= assignment, 182 _Complex type, 251
<= less or equal operator, 16 _Complex_I macro, 252, 312
= assignment operator, 13 _Exit() function, 209–210, 556
== equality operator, 16 _Generic keyword, 235–238
> greater than operator, 16 _Imaginary type, 252
>= less or equal operator, 16 _Imaginary_I macro, 252, 312
>> shift right, 182 _Noreturn function specifier, 304
>>= assignment, 182 _Pragma operator, 143
?: ternary operator, 14–15 in a macro, 143
# null directive, 144 _Thread_local storage class, 115, 274
# stringification, 139 __DATE__ macro, 134–135
## concatenation, 139 __FILE__ macro, 134–135
#define directive, 6, 130, 136–139 __LINE__ macro, 134–135, 144
versus const, 130 __STDC_ANALYZABLE__ macro, 136
#elif directive, 132–133 __STDC_HOSTED__ macro, 135
#else directive, 132 __STDC_IEC_559_COMPLEX__ macro, 136, 251–
#endif directive, 131–132 252
#error directive, 142 __STDC_IEC_559__ macro, 136
#if 0 directive, 133 __STDC_ISO_10646__ macro, 136, 198
#if defined directive, 133–134 __STDC_LIB_EXT1__ macro, 136
#if directive, 132–134 __STDC_MB_MIGHT_NEQ_WC__ macro, 136
#ifdef directive, 131–132 __STDC_NO_ATOMICS__ macro, 136, 285
#ifndef directive, 131–132 __STDC_NO_COMPLEX__, 312
#include directive, 6, 129–130 __STDC_NO_COMPLEX__ macro, 136, 251
local files, 129–130 __STDC_NO_THREADS__ macro, 136, 266

720
INDEX 721

__STDC_NO_VLA__ macro, 136, 217 Arithmetic Operators, 14, 14

__STDC_UTF_16__ macro, 136, 205 Array initializers, 37–39
__STDC_UTF_32__ macro, 205 Arrays, 36–44
__STDC_UTF_32__ macro, 136 as pointers, 41
__STDC_VERSION__ macro, 134–135 getting the length, 37
__STDC__ macro, 134 indexing, 36–37
__TIME__ macro, 134–135 modifying within functions, 42–43
__alignas_is_defined macro, 455 multidimensional, 40
__alignof_is_defined macro, 455 multidimensional initializers, 240–242
__func__ identifier, 134–135 out of bounds, 39
_mkgmtime() Windows function, 263 passing to functions, 41–44
_putenv() function, 127 static in parameter lists, 239–240
| bitwise OR, 181 type qualifiers in parameter lists, 239
|= assignment, 181 zero length, 149
|| boolean OR, 17 asctime() function, 262, 645
\ backslash escape, 162–165 asin() function, 394, 591
\' single quote, 162–163 asinf() function, 394
\123 octal value, 165 asinh() function, 399, 591
\? question mark, 163–164 asinhf() function, 399
\U Unicode escape, 165, 195 asinhl() function, 399
\a alert, 163 asinl() function, 394
\b backspace, 163–164 assert() macro, 307
\f formfeed, 163 assert.h header file, 307
\n newline, 7, 163 at_quick_exit() function, 554
\r carriage return, 163–164 atan() function, 395, 591
\t tab, 163 atan2() function, 395, 591
\u Unicode escape, 165, 195 atan2f() function, 395
\v vertical tab, 163 atan2l() function, 395
\x12 hexadecimal value, 165 atanf() function, 395
\\ backslash, 163 atanh() function, 400, 591
bitwise NOT, 181 atanhf() function, 400
0 octal, 96 atanhl() function, 400
0b binary, 96 atanl() function, 395
0x hexadecimal, 96 atexit() function, 208, 554
atof() function, 539
abort() function, 210, 553 atoi() function, 540
abs() function, 562 atol() function, 540
acos() function, 393, 591 atoll() function, 540
acosf() function, 393 Atomic variables, 285–300
acosh() function, 399, 591 acquire, 289–290, 298
acoshf() function, 399 acquire/release, 298
acoshl() function, 399 assignments and operators, 291
acosl() function, 393 atomic flags, 295
Addition operator, see + addition operator compiling with, 285
alignas alignment specifier, 305 consume, 298
alignas() alignment specifier, 455 fences, 299
aligned_alloc() function, 82, 548 lock-free, 294
Alignment, 304–306 memory order, 297–299
alignof operator, 305–306 pointers, 296–297
alignof() operator, 457 relaxed, 298–299
and macro, 376 release, 289–290, 298
and_eq macro, 376 sequential consistency, 290–291, 298
argc parameter, 121–124 struct and union, 295–296
argv parameter, 121–124 synchronization, 287
INDEX 722

synchronized library functions, 292 atomic_uint_least32_t type, 293, 467

with signal handlers, 295 atomic_uint_least64_t type, 293, 467
atomic_bool type, 292, 467 atomic_uint_least8_t type, 293, 467
ATOMIC_BOOL_LOCK_FREE macro, 294, 468 atomic_uintmax_t type, 293, 467
atomic_char type, 292, 467 atomic_uintptr_t type, 293, 467
atomic_char16_t type, 292, 467 atomic_ullong type, 292, 467
ATOMIC_CHAR16_T_LOCK_FREE macro, 294, 468 atomic_ulong type, 292, 467
atomic_char32_t type, 292, 467 atomic_ushort type, 292, 467
ATOMIC_CHAR32_T_LOCK_FREE macro, 294, 468 ATOMIC_VAR_INIT() macro, 469
ATOMIC_CHAR_LOCK_FREE macro, 294, 468 atomic_wchar_t type, 293, 467
atomic_compare_exchange_*() function, 478 ATOMIC_WCHAR_T_LOCK_FREE macro, 294, 468
atomic_exchange() function, 477 auto storage class, 112
atomic_fetch_*() function, 480 Automatic variables, 75
atomic_fetch_add() function, 297
atomic_fetch_add_explicit() function, 297 Bell, see \a operator
atomic_flag type, 295, 468 bitand macro, 376
atomic_flag_clear() function, 295, 484 bitor macro, 376
ATOMIC_FLAG_INIT macro, 295 Bitwise operations, 181–182
atomic_flag_test_and_set() function, 295, 482 bool macro, 486
atomic_init() function, 469 bool type, 14
atomic_int type, 286–287, 292, 467 Boolean AND, see && operator
atomic_int_fast16_t type, 293, 467 Boolean NOT, see ! operator
atomic_int_fast32_t type, 293, 467 Boolean Operators, 17
atomic_int_fast64_t type, 293, 467 Boolean OR, see || operator
atomic_int_fast8_t type, 293, 467 Boolean types, 13–14
atomic_int_least16_t type, 293, 467 break statement, 22–24
atomic_int_least32_t type, 293, 467 bsearch() function, 559
atomic_int_least64_t type, 293, 467 btowc() function, 690
atomic_int_least8_t type, 293, 467
ATOMIC_INT_LOCK_FREE macro, 294, 468 C Preprocessor, 6
atomic_intmax_t type, 293, 467 c16rtomb() function, 206, 657
atomic_intptr_t type, 293, 467 c32rtomb() function, 206, 657
atomic_is_lock_free() function, 294, 474 C3PO, 25
atomic_llong type, 292, 467 cabs() function, 255, 325
ATOMIC_LLONG_LOCK_FREE macro, 294, 468 cabsf() function, 325
atomic_load() function, 476 cabsl() function, 325
atomic_long type, 292, 467 cacos() function, 255, 313
ATOMIC_LONG_LOCK_FREE macro, 294, 468 cacosf() function, 313
ATOMIC_POINTER_LOCK_FREE macro, 294, 468 cacosh() function, 255, 318
atomic_ptrdiff_t type, 293, 467 cacoshf() function, 318
atomic_schar type, 292, 467 cacoshl() function, 318
atomic_short type, 292, 467 cacosl() function, 313
ATOMIC_SHORT_LOCK_FREE macro, 294, 468 call_once() function, 284, 595
atomic_signal_fence() function, 299, 473 calloc() function, 77–78, 550
atomic_size_t type, 293, 467 carg() function, 255, 328, 592
atomic_store() function, 475 cargf() function, 328
atomic_thread_fence() function, 299, 471 cargl() function, 328
atomic_uchar type, 292, 467 Carriage return, see \r operator
atomic_uint type, 292, 467 case statement, 22–23
atomic_uint_fast16_t type, 293, 467 casin() function, 255, 314
atomic_uint_fast32_t type, 293, 467 casinf() function, 314
atomic_uint_fast64_t type, 293, 467 casinh() function, 255, 319
atomic_uint_fast8_t type, 293, 467 casinhf() function, 319
atomic_uint_least16_t type, 293, 467 casinhl() function, 319
INDEX 723

casinl() function, 314 Comparison operators, 16

catan() function, 255, 315 Compilation, 8
catanf() function, 315 compl macro, 376
catanh() function, 255, 320 complex double type, 252
catanhf() function, 320 complex float type, 252
catanhl() function, 320 complex long double type, 252
catanl() function, 315 Complex numbers, 251–255
cbrt() function, 416, 591 arithmetic, 253–254
cbrtf() function, 416 declaring, 252
cbrtl() function, 416 complex type, 251
ccos() function, 255, 316 complex.h header file, 251, 311
ccosf() function, 316 Compound literals, 232–235
ccosh() function, 255, 321 passing to functions, 233
ccoshf() function, 321 pointers to, 234
ccoshl() function, 321 scope, 234–235
ccosl() function, 316 with struct, 233–234
ceil() function, 424, 591 Condition variables, 280–284
ceilf() function, 424 broadcasting, 284
ceill() function, 424 spurious wakeup, 281
cexp() function, 255, 324 timeouts, 283–284
cexpf() function, 324 Conditional compilation, 131–134
cexpl() function, 324 Conditional Operators, 16–17
char * type, 12 conj() function, 255, 331, 592
char type, 12, 17, 89–90 conjf() function, 331
char16_t type, 205, 653 conjl() function, 331
char32_t type, 205, 653 const type qualifier, 108–110
CHAR_BIT macro, 377 and pointers, 108–109
CHAR_MAX macro, 377 correctness, 109–110
CHAR_MIN macro, 377 copysign() function, 435, 592
Character sets, 194–195 copysignf() function, 435
basic, 194–195 copysignl() function, 435
execution, 194, 195 cos() function, 396, 591
source, 194, 195 cosf() function, 396
cimag() function, 253, 255, 329, 592 cosh() function, 401, 591
cimagf() function, 253, 329 coshf() function, 401
cimagl() function, 253, 329 coshl() function, 401
clang compiler, 8 cosl() function, 396
clearerr() function, 534 cpow() function, 255, 326
clock() function, 638 cpowf() function, 326
clog() function, 255, 325 cpowl() function, 326
clogf() function, 325 cproj() function, 255, 332, 592
clogl() function, 325 cprojf() function, 332
CMPLX() macro, 252–253, 255, 330 cprojl() function, 332
CMPLXF() macro, 253, 330 creal() function, 253, 255, 333, 592
CMPLXL() macro, 253, 330 crealf() function, 253, 333
cnd_broadcast() function, 284, 596 creall() function, 253, 333
cnd_destroy() function, 280–283, 599 csin() function, 255, 317
cnd_init() function, 280–283, 600 csinf() function, 317
cnd_signal() function, 280–283, 602 csinh() function, 255, 322
cnd_t type, 280–283 csinhf() function, 322
cnd_timedwait() function, 283–284, 603 csinhl() function, 322
cnd_wait() function, 280–283, 606 csinl() function, 317
Command line arguments, 120–124 csqrt() function, 255, 327
Comments, 6 csqrtf() function, 327
INDEX 724

csqrtl() function, 327 erfc() function, 421, 592

ctan() function, 255, 317 erfcf() function, 421
ctanf() function, 317 erfcl() function, 421
ctanh() function, 255, 323 erff() function, 420
ctanhf() function, 323 erfl() function, 420
ctanhl() function, 323 errno variable, 348
ctanl() function, 317 errno.h header file, 348
ctime() function, 261–262, 646 Escape sequences, 162–165
ctype.h header file, 335 Exit status, 124–126
CX_LIMITED_RANGE macro, 312 obtaining from shell, 125
CX_LIMITED_RANGE pragma, 143 exit() function, 556
EXIT_FAILURE macro, 124–125, 539
Data serialization, 61 EXIT_SUCCESS macro, 124–125, 539
Date and time, 260 Exiting, 207–210
differences, 264 return from main(), 207
DBL_DECIMAL_DIG macro, 366 exp() function, 403, 591
DBL_DECMIAL_DIG macro, 95 exp2() function, 404, 592
DBL_DIG macro, 93–95, 366 exp2f() function, 404
DBL_EPSILON macro, 364 exp2l() function, 404
DBL_HAS_SUBNORM macro, 365 expf() function, 403
DBL_MANT_DIG macro, 363 expl() function, 403
DBL_MAX macro, 364 expm1() function, 405, 592
DBL_MAX_10_EXP macro, 364 expm1f() function, 405
DBL_MAX_EXP macro, 364 expm1l() function, 405
DBL_MIN macro, 364 extern storage class, 113–114, 119
DBL_MIN_10_EXP macro, 363
DBL_MIN_EXP macro, 363 F float constant, 98
DBL_TRUE_MIN macro, 364 fabs() function, 417, 591
DECIMAL_DIG macro, 363 fabsf() function, 417
DECMIAL_DIG macro, 95 fabsl() function, 417
default label, 23 Fall through, 23–24
Dereferencing, 32–33 false macro, 486
difftime() function, 264–265, 639 false value, 14
div() function, 563 fclose() function, 55–56, 500
div_t type, 539 fdim() function, 439, 591
Division operator, see / division operator fdimf() function, 439
do-while statement, 20–21 fdiml() function, 439
in multiline macros, 139–141 FE_ALL_EXCEPT macro, 352
double complex type, 312 FE_DIVBYZERO macro, 351
double imaginary type, 312 FE_INEXACT macro, 351
double type, 93 FE_INVALID macro, 352
double_t type, 388 FE_OVERFLOW macro, 352
FE_UNDERFLOW macro, 352
Empty parameter lists, 28 feclearexcept() function, 352
Endianess, 60 fegetenv() function, 358
enum enumerated types, 166–169 fegetexceptflag() function, 353
numbering order, 166–167 fegetround() function, 356
scope, 167 feholdexcept() function, 359
enum keyword, 24 fenv.h header file, 351
env parameter, 128 FENV_ACCESS pragma, 143, 352
environ variable, 127–128 fenv_t type, 351
Environment variables, 126–128 feof() function, 534
EOF end of file, 55–56 feraiseexcept() function, 354
erf() function, 420, 592 ferror() function, 534
INDEX 725

fesetenv() function, 358 fmin() function, 439, 592

fesetexceptflag() function, 353 fminf() function, 439
fesetround() function, 356 fminl() function, 439
fetestexcept() function, 355 fmod() function, 431, 592
feupdateenv() function, 360 fmodf() function, 431
fexcept_t type, 351 fmodl() function, 431
fflush() function, 501 fopen() function, 55–56, 503
fgetc() function, 55–56, 522 for statement, 21–22
fgetpos() function, 530 FP_CONTRACT pragma, 143, 389
fgets() function, 56–57, 523 fpclassify() function, 389
fgetwc() function, 200, 666 fprintf() function, 58, 507
fgetws() function, 200, 667 fputc() function, 58, 525
File I/O, 54–61 fputs() function, 58
binary files, 58–60 fputwc() function, 200, 668
formatted input, 57–58 fputws() function, 200, 670
line by line, 56–57 fread() function, 59–60, 528
text files, reading, 55 free() function, 76, 551
text files, writing, 58 freopen() function, 504
with numeric values, 60–61 frexp() function, 406, 592
with structs, 60–61 frexpf() function, 406
FILE* type, 495, 54–495 frexpl() function, 406
Fixed width integers, 256–259 fscanf() function, 57, 513
float complex type, 312 fseek() function, 532
float imaginary type, 312 fsetpos() function, 530
float type, 12 ftell() function, 533
float.h header file, 363 Function arguments, 25
float_t type, 388 Function parameters, 25
Floating point constants, 98 Function prototypes, 27–28
floor() function, 425, 591 Function specifiers, 301–304
floorf() function, 425 Functions, 25–28
floorl() function, 425 fwide() function, 200, 670
Flow Control, 18–24 fwprintf() function, 200, 662
FLT_DECIMAL_DIG macro, 366 fwrite() function, 58–59, 529
FLT_DECMIAL_DIG macro, 95 fwscanf() function, 200, 663
FLT_DIG macro, 93–95, 366
FLT_EPSILON macro, 364 gcc compiler, 7–10, 119
FLT_EVAL_METHOD macro, 363, 365, 388 with threads, 266
FLT_HAS_SUBNORM macro, 365 Generic selections, 235–238
FLT_MANT_DIG macro, 363 getc() function, 522
FLT_MAX macro, 364 getchar() function, 522
FLT_MAX_10_EXP macro, 364 getenv() function, 126, 557
FLT_MAX_EXP macro, 363 gets() function, 523
FLT_MIN macro, 364 getwc() function, 666
FLT_MIN_10_EXP macro, 363 getwchar() function, 200, 666
FLT_MIN_EXP macro, 363 gmtime() function, 262, 646
FLT_RADIX macro, 363 goto statement, 224–231
FLT_ROUNDS macro, 365 as labeled break, 227
FLT_TRUE_MIN macro, 364 as labeled continue, 225–226
fma() function, 440, 591 for bailing out, 226
fmaf() function, 440 multilevel cleanup, 227–228
fmal() function, 440 restarting system calls, 229–230
fmax() function, 439, 592 tail call optimzation, 228–229
fmaxf() function, 439 variable scope, 230–231
fmaxl() function, 439 with variable-length arrays, 231
INDEX 726

Greenwich Mean time, 260 iscntrl() function, 338

isdigit() function, 339
Hello, world, 6, 7 isfinite() function, 391
Hex floating point constants, 99 isgraph() function, 340
Hexadecimal, see 0x hexadecimal isgreater() function, 441
hypot() function, 418, 592 isgreaterequal() function, 441
hypotf() function, 418 isinf() function, 391
hypotl() function, 418 isless() function, 441
islessequal() function, 441
I macro, 252, 312 islessgreater() function, 442
I/O stream orientation, 200 islower() function, 341
if statement, 18–19 isnan() function, 391
if-else statement, 19–20 isnormal() function, 391
ilogb() function, 407, 592 iso646.h header file, 376
ilogbf() function, 407 isprint() function, 341
ilogbl() function, 407 ispunct() function, 342
imaginary type, 252 isspace() function, 343
imaxabs() function, 371 isunordered() function, 443
imaxdiv() function, 372 isupper() function, 344
Implicit declaration, 28 iswalnum() function, 202, 701
Incomplete types, 247 iswalpha() function, 202, 702
self-referential structs, 247–248 iswblank() function, 202, 703
inline function specifier, 301–304 iswcntrl() function, 202, 704
int type, 12 iswctype() function, 711
INT_FASTn_MAX macros, 258, 492 iswdigit() function, 202, 705
INT_FASTn_MIN macros, 258, 492 iswgraph() function, 202, 706
int_fastN_t types, 256–257, 491 iswlower() function, 202, 706
INT_LEASTn_MAX macros, 258, 492 iswprint() function, 202, 707
INT_LEASTn_MIN macros, 258, 492 iswpunct() function, 202, 708
int_leastN_t types, 256–257, 491 iswspace() function, 202, 709
INT_MAX macro, 377 iswupper() function, 202, 710
INT_MIN macro, 377 iswxdigit() function, 202, 711
Integer constants, 96–98 isxdigit() function, 345
Integer promotions, 181
Integrated Development Environment, 9 jmp_buf type, 244
International Obfuscated C Code Contest, 1
INTMAX_C() macro, 257, 493 kill_dependency() function, 470
INTMAX_MAX macro, 258
INTMAX_MAX macros, 492 L long constant, 96–98
INTMAX_MIN macro, 258 L long double constant, 98
INTMAX_MIN macros, 492 L wide character prefix, 198
intmax_t type, 257, 492 Labels, 224–225
INTn_C() macros, 257, 493 labs() function, 562
INTn_MAX macros, 258, 492 Language versions, 9–135
INTn_MIN macros, 258, 492 LDBL_DECIMAL_DIG macro, 366
intN_t types, 256–257, 491 LDBL_DECMIAL_DIG macro, 95
INTPTR_MAX macros, 492 LDBL_DIG macro, 93–95, 366
INTPTR_MIN macros, 492 LDBL_EPSILON macro, 364
intptr_t type, 492 LDBL_HAS_SUBNORM macro, 365
inttypes.h header file, 370 LDBL_MANT_DIG macro, 363
isalnum() function, 336 LDBL_MAX macro, 364
isalpha() function, 336 LDBL_MAX_10_EXP macro, 364
with UTF-8, 196 LDBL_MAX_EXP macro, 364
isblank() function, 337 LDBL_MIN macro, 364
LDBL_MIN_10_EXP macro, 363
INDEX 727

LDBL_MIN_EXP macro, 363 LONG_MIN macro, 377

LDBL_TRUE_MIN macro, 364 longjmp(), 244, 245
ldexp() function, 408, 592 longjmp() function, 243–245, 446
ldexpf() function, 408 lonjmp(), 246
ldexpl() function, 408 lrint() function, 427, 592
ldiv() function, 563 lrintf() function, 427
ldiv_t type, 539 lrintl() function, 427
lgamma() function, 422, 592 lround() function, 429, 592
lgammaf() function, 422 lroundf() function, 429
lgammal() function, 422 lroundl() function, 429
limits.h header file, 377
LL long long constant, 96–98 main() function, 7, 26
llabs() function, 562 command line options, 121–122
lldiv() function, 563 returning from, 124
lldiv_t type, 539 malloc() function, 75–76, 550
LLONG_MAX macro, 377 and arrays, 77
LLONG_MIN macro, 377 error checking, 76–77
llrint() function, 427, 592 with UTF-8, 196
llrintf() function, 427 Manual memory management, 75–83
llrintl() function, 427 math.h header file, 386
llround() function, 429, 592 MATH_ERREXCEPT macro, 389
llroundf() function, 429 math_errhandling variable, 389
llroundl() function, 429 MATH_ERRNO macro, 389
Local time, 260 max_align_t type, 489
Locale, 187–191 MB_CUR_MAX macro, 539
money, 188–190 MB_LEN_MAX macro, 196, 197, 377
locale.h header file, 187 mblen() function, 565
locale.h. header file, 380 mbrlen() function, 692
localeconv() function, 188–189, 382 mbrtoc16() function, 206, 654
mon_grouping, 189 mbrtoc32() function, 206, 654
sep_by_space, 190 mbrtowc() function, 693
localtime() function, 262, 647 mbsinit() function, 691
log() function, 409, 591 mbsrtowcs() function, 696
log10() function, 410, 592 mbstate_t type, 653, 661
log10f() function, 410 mbstowcs() function, 198–199, 568
log10l() function, 410 with UTF-8, 196
log1p() function, 410, 592 mbtowc() function, 198, 566
log1pf() function, 410 memchr() function, 582
log1pl() function, 410 memcmp() function, 577
log2() function, 411, 592 memcpy() function, 70–73, 574
log2f() function, 411 memmove() function, 574
log2l() function, 411 Memory address, 29
logb() function, 412, 592 Memory alignment, 81–83
logbf() function, 412 Memory order, 297–299
logbl() function, 412 acquire, 298
logf() function, 409 acquire/release, 298
logl() function, 409 consume, 298
long double complex type, 312 relaxed, 298–299
long double imaginary type, 312 release, 298
long double type, 93 sequential consistency, 298
Long jumps, 243–246 memory_order_acq_rel enumerated type, 297,
long long type, 91–92 468
long type, 91–92 memory_order_acquire enumerated type, 297,
LONG_MAX macro, 377 468
INDEX 728

memory_order_consume enumerated type, 297, nexttowardf() function, 438

468 nexttowardl() function, 438
memory_order_relaxed enumerated type, 297, noreturn function specifier, 304
468 noreturn macro, 572
memory_order_release enumerated type, 297, not macro, 376
468 not_eq macro, 376
memory_order_seq_cst enumerated type, 297, NULL macro, 539
468 NULL pointer, 34
memset() function, 587 zero equivalence, 175
mktime() function, 262–263, 640
modf() function, 413 Object files, 119
modff() function, 413 Octothorpe, 6
modfl() function, 413 offsetof operator, 490
Modulus operator, see % modulus operator offsetof() macro, 150–151
mtx_destroy() function, 276–278, 281–283, 607 once_flag type, 284
mtx_init() function, 276–278, 281–283, 608 ONCE_FLAG_INIT macro, 284
mtx_lock() function, 276–278, 280–283, 610 or macro, 376
mtx_plain macro, 279 or_eq macro, 376
mtx_recursive macro, 279
mtx_t type, 277 Pass by value, 26, 27
mtx_timed macro, 279 perror() function, 536
mtx_timedlock() function, 279–280, 612 Pointer types, 31–32
mtx_trylock() function, 614 Pointers, 29–35
mtx_unlock function, 276 arithmetic, 66–74
mtx_unlock() function, 277–278, 280–283, 615 array equivalence, 69–70
Multibyte characters, 196–197 as arguments, 33–34
parse state, 202–204 as integers, 175–176
Multifile projects, 116–119 casting, 176–178
extern storage class, 119 declarations, 35
function prototypes, 116–118 subtracting, 68, 178
includes, 116–119 to functions, 178–180
static storage class, 119 to multibyte values, 174–175
Multiplication operator, see * multiplication operator to pointers, 170–172
Multithreading, 266–284 to pointers, const, 173
and the standard library, 267 with sizeof, 35
one-time functions, 284 pow() , 14
race conditions, 270, 276–277 pow() function, 418, 591
Mutexes, 276–280 powf() function, 418
timeouts, 279–280 powl() function, 418
types, 279–280 Preprocessor, 6, 129–144
macros, 130
NAN macro, 388 macros with arguments, 136–139
nan() function, 436 macros with variable arguments, 138–139
nanf() function, 436 multiline macros, 139–141
nanl() function, 436 predefined macros, 134–136
NDEBUG macro, 307 PRIdFASTn macros, 258–259, 371
nearbyint() function, 426, 592 PRIdLEASTn macros, 258–259, 371
nearbyintf() function, 426 PRIdMAX macro, 258–259, 371
nearbyintl() function, 426 PRIdn macros, 258–259, 371
New line, see \n newline PRIdPTR macro, 371
nextafter() function, 437, 592 PRIiFASTn macros, 258–259, 371
nextafterf() function, 437 PRIiLEASTn macros, 258–259, 371
nextafterl() function, 437 PRIiMAX macro, 258–259, 371
nexttoward() function, 438, 592 PRIin macros, 258–259, 371
INDEX 729

PRIiPTR macro, 371 remquo() function, 433, 592

printf(), 7, 15 remquof() function, 433
printf() function, 7, 13, 258, 507 remquol() function, 433
with pointers, 30 rename() function, 497
with UTF-8, 196 restrict type qualifier, 110–111
PRIoFASTn macros, 259, 371 return statement, 25
PRIoLEASTn macros, 259, 371 rewind() function, 532
PRIoMAX macro, 371 rint() function, 427, 592
PRIoMAX macros, 259 rintf() function, 427
PRIon macros, 259, 371 rintl() function, 427
PRIoPTR macro, 371 round() function, 429, 592
PRIuFASTn macros, 259, 371 roundf() function, 429
PRIuLEASTn macros, 259, 371 roundl() function, 429
PRIuMAX macro, 371
PRIuMAX macros, 259 scalbln() function, 415, 592
PRIun macros, 259, 371 scalblnf() function, 415
PRIuPTR macro, 371 scalblnl() function, 415
PRIXFASTn macros, 259, 371 scalbn() function, 415, 592
PRIxFASTn macros, 259, 371 scalbnf() function, 415
PRIXLEASTn macros, 259, 371 scalbnl() function, 415
PRIxLEASTn macros, 259, 371 scanf() function, 258, 259, 513
PRIXMAX macro, 371 SCHAR_MAX macro, 377
PRIxMAX macro, 371 SCHAR_MIN macro, 377
PRIXMAX macros, 259 Scientific notation, 98–99
PRIxMAX macros, 259 SCNdFASTn macros, 259, 371
PRIXn macros, 259, 371 SCNdLEASTn macros, 259, 371
PRIxn macros, 259, 371 SCNdMAX macro, 371
PRIXPTR macro, 371 SCNdMAX macros, 259
PRIxPTR macro, 371 SCNdn macros, 259, 371
PTRDIFF_MAX macro, 493 SCNdPTR macro, 371
PTRDIFF_MIN macro, 493 SCNiFASTn macros, 259, 371
ptrdiff_t type, 178, 488 SCNiLEASTn macros, 259, 371
printing, 178 SCNiMAX macro, 371
putc() function, 525 SCNiMAX macros, 259
putchar() function, 525 SCNin macros, 259, 371
putenv() function, 127 SCNiPTR macro, 371
puts() function, 526 SCNoFASTn macros, 259, 371
putwc() function, 668 SCNoLEASTn macros, 259, 371
putwchar() function, 200, 668 SCNoMAX macro, 371
SCNoMAX macros, 259
qsort() function, 73–74, 561 SCNon macros, 259, 371
quick_exit() function, 208–209, 556 SCNoPTR macro, 371
SCNuFASTn macros, 259, 371
raise() function, 295 SCNuLEASTn macros, 259, 371
raise() function, 453 SCNuMAX macro, 371
rand() function, 545 SCNuMAX macros, 259
RAND_MAX macro, 539 SCNun macros, 259, 371
realloc() function, 78–79, 552 SCNuPTR macro, 371
with NULL argument, 81 SCNxFASTn macros, 259, 371
register storage class, 114–115 SCNxLEASTn macros, 259, 371
remainder() function, 432, 592 SCNxMAX macro, 371
remainderf() function, 432 SCNxMAX macros, 259
remainderl() function, 432 SCNxn macros, 259, 371
remove() function, 496 SCNxPTR macro, 371
INDEX 730

Scope, 84–87 with arrays, 37

block, 84–85 with malloc(), 76–77
file, 85–86 snprintf() function, 507
for loop, 86 sprintf() function, 507
function, 87 sqrt() function, 419, 591
setbuf() function, 505 sqrtf() function, 419
setenv(), 127 sqrtl() function, 419
setjmp() srand() function, 547
in an expression, 245–246 sscanf() function, 513
setjmp() function, 243–245, 444 static storage class, 112–113, 119
setjmp.h header file, 444 in block scope, 112–113
setlocale() function, 187–188, 204–205, 380 in file scope, 113
LC_ALL macro, 191 static_assert() macro, 309
LC_COLLATE macro, 191 stdalign.h header file, 455
LC_CTYPE macro, 191 stdarg.h header file, 184, 459
LC_MONETARY macro, 191 stdatomic.h header, 286
LC_NUMERIC macro, 191 stdatomic.h header file, 466
LC_TIME macro, 191 stdbool.h header file, 14, 486
short type, 91–92 stddef.h header file, 488
SHRT_MAX macro, 377 stderr standard error, 54, 496
SHRT_MIN macro, 377 stdin standard input, 54, 496
SIG_ATOMIC_MAX macro, 493 stdint.h header file, 256, 491
SIG_ATOMIC_MIN macro, 493 stdio.h, 7
sig_atomic_t type, 214–215 stdio.h header file, 6–7, 494
SIG_DFL macro, 212, 213, 215 stdlib.h header file, 538
SIG_ERR macro, 213 stdnoreturn.h header file, 572
SIG_IGN macro, 212 stdout standard output, 54, 496
SIG_INT signal, 213 Storage-Class Specifiers, 111–115
SIGABRT signal, 210, 211 strcat() function, 576
sigaction() function, 211, 214 strchr() function, 582
SIGFPE signal, 211 with UTF-8, 196
SIGILL signal, 211 strcmp() function, 577
SIGINT signal, 211–212 strcoll() function, 578
Signal handlers strcpy() function, 574
with lock-free atomics, 295 strcspn() function, 583
Signal handling, 211–216 strerror() function, 588
Signal handling- strftime() function, 263–264, 648
limitations, 214 String, see char *
signal() function, 211–214, 216, 449 String literals, 45
signal.h header file, 449 String variables, 45
signbit() function, 392 as arrays, 46
signed char type, 89–90 string.h header file, 573
Significant digits, 93–95 Strings, 45–49
SIGSEGV signal, 211 copying, 48–49
SIGTERM signal, 211 getting the length, 47
sin() function, 397, 591 initializers, 46–47
sinf() function, 397 termination, 47–48
sinh() function, 402, 591 strlen() function, 589
sinhf() function, 402 with UTF-8, 197
sinhl() function, 402 strncat() function, 576
sinl() function, 397 strncmp() function, 577
SIZE_MAX macro, 493 strncpy() function, 574
size_t type, 17, 489, 539, 653 strpbrk() function, 584
sizeof operator, 17–18 strrchr() function, 582
INDEX 731

strspn() function, 583 thrd_detach() function, 271–272, 620

strstr() function, 585 thrd_equal() function, 621
with UTF-8, 196 thrd_exit() function, 623
strtod() function, 541 thrd_join() function, 267–270, 624
strtof() function, 541 thrd_start_t type, 268
strtoimax() function, 373 thrd_t type, 267
strtok() function, 586 thrd_timedout macro, 283
with UTF-8, 196 thrd_timedout() macro, 283–284
strtol() function, 543 thrd_yield() function, 626
strtold() function, 541 Thread local data, 272–274
strtoll() function, 543 Thread-specific storage, 274–276
strtoul() function, 543 thread_local storage class, 274
strtoull() function, 543 threads.h header file, 274, 594
strtoumax() function, 373 time() function, 261, 642
struct keyword, 50–53, 145–161 time.h header file, 637
anonymous, 147 time_t type, 261, 637
bit fields, 153–155 conversion to struct tm, 262
comparing, 53 timegm() Unix function, 263
compound literals, 233–234 timespec_get() function, 264, 279–280, 283–284,
copying, 53 643
declaring, 50–51 tmpfile() function, 498
flexible array members, 148–150 tmpnam() function, 499
initializers, 51, 145–147 tolower() function, 346
padding bytes, 150 with UTF-8, 196
passing and returning, 51–52, 160–161 toupper() function, 346
self-referential, 148 with UTF-8, 196
struct timespec type, 264 towctrans() function, 716
struct tm type, 261, 637 towlower() function, 202, 715
conversion to time_t, 262–263 towupper() function, 202, 716
strxfrm() function, 579 Trigraphs, 164
Subtraction operator, see - subtraction operator true macro, 486
switch statement, 22–24 true value, 14
swprintf() function, 200, 662 trunc() function, 430, 592
swscanf() function, 200, 663 truncf() function, 430
system() function, 558 truncl() function, 430
tss_create() function, 275–276, 628
Tab (is better), see \t operator tss_delete() function, 275–276, 630
Tail call optimzation tss_dtor_t type, 275
with goto, 228–229 tss_get() function, 275–276, 632
tan() function, 398, 591 tss_set() function, 275–276, 634
tanf() function, 398 tss_t type, 275–276
tanh() function, 402, 591 Type conversions, 100–107
tanhf() function, 402 Boolean, 104
tanhl() function, 402 casting, 106–107
tanl() function, 398 char, 103–104
Ternary operator, see ?: ternary operator explicit, 106–107
tgamma() function, 423, 592 floating point, 105
tgammaf() function, 423 implicit, 105–106
tgammal() function, 423 integer, 104–105
tgmath.h header file, 591 numeric, 104–106
The heap, 75 strings, 100–103
The stack, 75 Type qualifiers, 108–111
thrd_create() function, 267–270, 617 arrays in parameter lists, 239
thrd_current() function, 619 typedef keyword, 62–65
INDEX 732

scoping rules, 62–64 va_copy() macro, 185–186, 460

with anonymous structs, 63–64 va_end() macro, 184–185, 462
with arrays, 65 va_list type, 184–186, 459
with pointers, 64 passing to functions, 186
with structs, 62–64 va_start() macro, 184–185, 463
Types, 12 Variable hiding, 85
character, 89–90 Variable-length array, 217–223
signed and unsigned, 88–89 and sizeof(), 218–219
controversy, 222–223
U Unicode prefix, 205 defining, 217–218
u Unicode prefix, 205 in function prototypes, 220
U unsigned constant, 96–98 multidimensional, 219
u8 UTF-8 prefix, 204 passing to functions, 219–221
UCHAR_MAX macro, 377 with goto, 222
UINT_FASTn_MAX macros, 258, 492 with longjmp(), 222
uint_fastN_t types, 256–257 with regular arrays, 221–222
UINT_LEASTn_MAX macros, 258, 492 with typedef, 222
uint_leastN_t types, 256–257 Variables, 11–12
UINT_MAX macro, 377 uninitialized, 12
UINTMAX_C() macro, 257, 493 Variadic functions, 183–186
UINTMAX_MAX macro, 258 vfprintf() function, 519
UINTMAX_MAX macros, 492 vfscanf() function, 521
uintmax_t type, 257, 492 vfwprintf() function, 200, 664
UINTn_C() macros, 257 vfwscanf() function, 200, 665
UINTn_MAX macros, 258, 492 void type, 26, 28
uintN_t types, 256–257 in function prototypes, 28
UINTPTR_MAX macros, 492 void* void pointer, 70–74
uintptr_t type, 492 caveats, 72
UL unsigned long constant, 96–98 volatile type qualifier, 111
ULL unsigned long long constant, 96–98 with setjmp(), 244–245
ULLONG_MAX macro, 377 vprintf() function, 186, 519
ULONG_MAX macro, 377 vscanf() function, 521
ungetc() function, 527 vsnprintf() function, 519
ungetwc() function, 200, 672 vsprintf() function, 519
Unicode, 192–206 vsscanf() function, 521
code points, 192–193 vswprintf() function, 200, 664
encoding, 193–194 vswscanf() function, 200, 665
endianess, 194 vwprintf() function, 200, 664
UTF-16, 193–194, 205 vwscanf() function, 200, 665
UTF-32, 193–194, 205
UTF-8, 193–194, 196, 204–205 wchar.h header file, 660
union keyword, 155–161 WCHAR_MAX macro, 493
and unnamed structs, 159–160 WCHAR_MIN macro, 493
common initial sequences, 157–159 wchar_t type, 197–199, 490, 539
passing and returning, 160–161 wcrtomb() function, 695
pointers to, 156–157 wcscat() function, 201, 678
type punning, 155–156 wcschr() function, 201, 683
Universal Coordinated Time, 260 wcscmp() function, 201, 679
unsetenv() function, 127 wcscoll() function, 201, 680
unsigned char type, 89–90 wcscpy() function, 201, 676
unsigned type, 88–89 wcscspn() function, 201, 684
USHRT_MAX macro, 377 wcsftime() function, 202, 689
wcslen() function, 199, 202, 688
va_arg() macro, 184–185, 459 wcsncat() function, 201, 678
INDEX 733

wcsncmp() function, 201, 679

wcsncpy() function, 201, 676
wcspbrk() function, 201, 685
wcsrchr() function, 201, 683
wcsrtombs() function, 698
wcsspn() function, 201, 684
wcsstr() function, 201, 686
wcstod() function, 200, 673
wcstof() function, 200, 673
wcstoimax() function, 374
wcstok() function, 201, 687
wcstol() function, 200, 675
wcstold() function, 200, 673
wcstoll() function, 200, 675
wcstombs() function, 198, 199, 570
wcstoul() function, 200, 675
wcstoull() function, 201, 675
wcstoumax() function, 374
wcsxfrm() function, 201, 681
wctob() function, 690
wctomb() function, 198, 567
wctrans() function, 718
wctype() function, 713
wctype.h header file, 701
while statement, 20
Wide characters, 197–204
WINT_MAX macro, 493
WINT_MIN macro, 493
wint_t type, 199
wmemchr() function, 201
wmemcmp() function, 201, 679
wmemcpy() function, 201, 677
wmemmove() function, 201, 677
wmemset() function, 202
wprintf() function, 200, 662
wscanf() function, 200, 663

xor macro, 376

xor_eq macro, 376